July 2024
DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/4622
Executive summary
Scotland’s net zero 2045 ambition and updated Climate Change Plan require the rapid development of carbon capture and storage (CCS) and carbon dioxide removal (CDR). Current pathways to meeting statutory targets are dependent on large industrial clusters, funded by the UK Government.
Alternative pathways for the rapid decarbonisation of smaller, distributed biogenic sources of carbon dioxide (CO2) may be available, noting that these would be of an order of magnitude less than the industrial clusters, with the advantage of high-value CDR credits. This requires permits for storage sites within Scottish inshore waters which extend to 12 nautical miles from the coast, and policy coordination across capture, transport and storage.
This study explored the potential total CO2 storage capacity in Scottish inshore areas and the availability of onshore emissions originating from biomass, known as bio-CO2. The study also investigated if the distribution of potential sources and storage availability would make it possible to expedite Scotland’s CCS and CDR potential.
The capture of bio-CO2 is already a commercial success in Scotland, with an ambition to scale without subsidy to 1 million tonnes per year by 2030, which requires storage. Norway, Denmark and Iceland are selling CO2 storage at a premium, reflecting a supply-and-demand imbalance in regional storage availability.
Aims
This study aimed to assess the potential for developing CCS within 12 nautical miles of the Scottish shoreline – an area within Scottish Ministers’ competence. We explored the feasibility to deploy high-value capture and low-cost CO2 storage in Scotland and what the commercially viable total capacity for nearshore storage is likely to be. The outcomes also address the availability of bio-CO2, domestic CCS value chains, fit-for-purpose storage site licensing and high-value CDR certificates.
We propose that Scotland can make rapid progress by refocusing on domestic bio-CO2. These emissions are already being captured in Scotland at low cost and with simple technology.
We identified prospects within the 12 nm territorial waters. Developing secure storage of high value bio-CO2 within the Scottish jurisdiction can produce several financial benefits, including premium lease payments to Crown Estate Scotland, development of local skills and growth of new businesses. This has the potential to increase Scottish GDP by tens to hundreds of millions of pounds per year, as well as paying staff and corporate taxes.
Developing Scottish storage sites for CO2 provides elements of control over licensing and the pace of approval for carbon capture and storage. Developing secure storage of high value bio-CO2 within the Scottish jurisdiction can produce CO2 removals, equivalent to direct air capture but at much lower financial cost.
We reviewed the potential for the rapid licensing of inshore storage using a streamlined version of UK licensing. Four geographic areas of interest are ranked by maturity of evaluation. We examine when injection could start if all regulations were in place across the different authorities.
Findings
We addressed five elements of CCS: licensing, storage, sources, timeframes and cost. We found that it is theoretically possible to adopt a streamlined licensing framework; inshore storage is available for rapid appraisal, albeit at a very limited capacity compared to offshore; bio-CO2 sources are abundant across nine sectors with explosive growth potential driven by the global CDR market; timeframes can be measured in years with the potential to deliver operational injection of bio-CO2 before 2030; costs are competitive with UK clusters and export markets.
Licensing
- CO2 storage involves multiple activities under different licensing regimes.
- New regulations for CO2 storage are not required.
- Minor amendments to existing statutory instruments may be required.
- The amendments may be fast if based on existing UK regulations and the CCS Directive.
- A Crown Estate Scotland (CES) lease is also required.
- Consents may also be required from the Scottish Environmental Protection Agency (SEPA) and the Scottish Government’s Marine Directorate.
Storage
- Four areas have well data and seismic coverage.
- Only the Lybster oil field is a candidate for immediate development.
- The total expected nearshore capacity is 2 Mt without further extensive surveying.
- The Forth Basin is a low Technology Readiness Level research opportunity.
Sources
- We mapped 98 of the largest bio-CO2 sources in Scotland.
- Source emissions range from 2 to 360 kilotonnes per annum.
- Separation of CO2 from distilleries and biogas upgrading are low cost.
- Combustion sources are higher cost and are the largest sources and sectors.
- The source distribution across five clusters favours road transport to local storage.
Timeframes
- North Sea Transition Authority appraisal licences average five years and three months.
- Appraisal are followed by storage permits and 2 years of further site development.
- The fastest storage permits are issued in as little as three years.
- The fastest development of a site to first injection is around a year.
- Lybster permitting could be fast but requires further exploration of legal frameworks.
- Rapid progression is dependent on pre-existing data to confirm site suitability.
Costs
- Capture costs for separation sources are low, at £60 per tonne.
- Capture costs for combustion sources are higher, at £120 per tonne.
- Truck transport costs £20 per tonne per 100 miles, or £0.12/tonne/km.
- Storage costs for Lybster are £70 per tonne.
- The full chain CCS cost is £150 per tonne for separation within 100 miles of Lybster.
- Storage costs for sites further offshore are at least two to three times higher.
Revenue
- CDR credits on the European voluntary market are worth £297 per tonne.
- Taxing storage would be subject to further work by the Scottish Government.
- As a simple example, a 10% tax could yield between £7 and £30 per tonne per annum.
- Lybster tax revenue would be £30 million for a 2 Mt capacity and £15 per tonne tax.
- Further revenue is available if bio-CO2 is transported to Acorn via the Feeder 10 pipeline.
- Combined revenue for Lybster and Feeder 10 could total £250-500 million by 2045.
Next steps
In order to progress the potential benefits of CCS and CDR in Scotland, we recommend the following actions.
- The Scottish Government could conduct further work to fully understand the law around consenting and regulating storage and consider pursuing a streamlined regulatory framework for storage that builds on the structure established by the NSTA while emulating the accelerated approach taken by Denmark and Norway. This is relevant to Scottish policy, legislators, SEPA, and the Marine Directorate.
- The Scottish Government could consider supporting an appraisal of Lybster with the involvement of a compliant operator. This would require 3D seismic interpretation to build a static model and undertake reservoir simulation. This could be completed within one year with the intention of transitioning to a front-end engineering design study and development decision within three years. This requires a competent person’s report on the site, model outcomes, and risk analysis.
- The Forth Basin saturated water injection proposal could be considered as a potential research pilot to mature the concept and location from its current low TRL. This is relevant to the Scottish universities’ research community and British Geological Survey.
- Maturing the Fraserburgh and Solway Firth areas could proceed when market signals support the necessary investment in data acquisition and offshore development.
- The Scottish Government could seek mechanisms and policies to maximise the domestic benefits of full chain CCS, rather than exporting captured bio-CO2 to storage providers in other countries. The high concentration of bio-CO2 sources in the central belt raises the possibility of a gathering station for Feeder 10 access to Acorn.

Onshore bio-CO2 sources located close to inshore CO2 storage prospects.
(Sources: SCCS, BGS, SNZR, NNFCC, NSTA)
List of abbreviations
|
AD |
Anaerobic Digester |
|
AOI |
Area of Interest |
|
BEIS |
Department for Business, Energy, and Industrial Strategy |
|
BSA |
Boston Square Analysis |
|
Bio-CO2 |
CO2 from decomposition, digestion, or combustion of biomass |
|
CCS |
Carbon Capture and Storage |
|
CDR |
Carbon Dioxide Removal |
|
CES |
Crown Estate Scotland |
|
DECC |
Department of Energy and Climate Change |
|
DESNZ |
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero |
|
DF |
Distillery Fermentation |
|
EfW |
Energy from Waste |
|
FEED |
Front End Engineering Design |
|
MD |
Marine Directorate |
|
Mtpa |
Million tonnes per annum, equal to 50 litres per second of CO2 |
|
NSTA |
North Sea Transition Authority |
|
OGA |
Oil & Gas Authority, the legal entity for the NSTA |
|
P90-P50-P10 |
Pessimistic-Expected-Optimistic range |
|
SEPA |
Scottish Environmental Protection Agency |
Glossary
|
Aquifer |
An aquifer is an underground layer of water-bearing rock, consisting of porous and permeable materials such as sandstone and chalk. |
|
Biomethane |
Biomethane is methane gas, CH4, that has been produced from the anaerobic digestion of organic matter such as manure, sewage, and organic waste. |
|
Biomethane Upgrader |
A biomethane upgrader is a piece of equipment that transforms biogas to biomethane by filtering out impurities such as other gases that are also generated during anaerobic digestion. |
|
Caprock |
A relatively impermeable rock, commonly shale, anhydrite, or salt, that forms a barrier or seal above and around reservoir rock so that fluids cannot migrate out of the reservoir. |
|
Inshore |
Inshore is a marine area adjacent to the coast of a state or jurisdiction. The inshore area for Scotland is synonymous with the territorial waters that extend 12 nm beyond the coastline. |
|
Regional Aquifer |
A regional aquifer is a water-bearing reservoir that extends laterally for 10s to 100s of km, reflecting a thick regional distribution of the reservoir rock such as a sandstone or chalk. |
|
Seismic |
Seismic in this context refers to the geophysical surveying technique of imaging the geologic structure of the subsurface by using vibrational waves and sonic reflections. |
|
Syncline |
A trough of stratified rock in which the beds dip toward each other from either side to form a u-shaped or v-shaped structure along a geometric axis. |
Introduction
The following report consists of five sections that cover CO2 storage licencing, inshore storage opportunities, available sources of bio-CO2, storage development timeframes, and a cost-revenue analysis of onshore capture, transport, and inshore storage. The report closes with six questions and answers that aim to synthesise the outcomes and propose ways forward.
Licensing
The Energy Act 2008 first enabled CO2 storage in the UK. The Carbon Dioxide Regulations 2010 adopted many requirements of the EU CCS Directive 2009 on the geological storage of carbon dioxide and came into force October 2010 – Appendix A. The regulations were extended in 2011 to address the termination of licences. The CCS Directive was transposed into UK law in 2012 by the adoption of secondary legislation under the authority of the Energy Act 2008.
CCS Directive
An EU regulatory framework for CCS was first proposed by the European Commission in 2007 (EC, 2007). The CCS Directive 2009 provides the framework for CO2 storage with only brief mentions of capture and transport. The CCS Directive is supported by a series of six guidance documents. The guidance covers: the storage complex, characterisation, risk management, stream composition, monitoring and corrective measures, criteria for the transfer of liability to the competent authority, and financial security and financial mechanisms. The Directorate-General for Climate Action (DG CLIMA) commissioned DNV in 2022 to revise the guidance documents to reflect the current understanding of CCS and remove ambiguities identified during the development of early CCS projects. The outcomes can be expected in Q3 2024.
Licensing in the UK
DESNZ currently leads UK government energy policy, preceded by BEIS (2016-2023) and DECC (2008-2016). UK energy policy is framed by HM Treasury budgeting and long-term planning. The Energy Act 2008 makes provision for gas storage, enabling the licensing of CO2 storage appraisals and CO2 storage permitting – Figure 1.

Figure 1. Current UK licensing framework for CO2 storage in Scotland for offshore areas such as Acorn.
UK licensing development
There are currently 27 UK appraisal licences open – see detail in Appendix B and Figure 2.

Figure 2. The location of offshore CO2 storage appraisal licences currently active in UK waters.
Licence CS001 and 1CS003-CS027). CS002 was reissued as CS003 in 2023.
Over a decade of policy engagement and early licensing experience has led to the current structure of appraisal licensing, storage permitting, and licence termination. The appraisal licence and storage permit terms both consist of three phases each:
- Appraisal licence phases: 1. Appraise 2. Assess 3. Define
- Storage permit phases: 4. Execute 5. Operate 6. Monitor
The seventh and final phase is a further monitoring period that occurs after the transfer of the site liability from the operator to the regulator with the termination of the storage permit. The seven phases are described in more detail below:
1. Appraise: This initial phase consists of an early risk assessment to establish storage feasibility and identify gaps which are then addressed by site characterisation. The characterisation of the trap structure may require 3D seismic acquisition over the site or reprocessing of an existing survey, and appraisal drilling.
2. Assess: This phase is a thorough evaluation of the site characterisation outcomes, and the operator’s proposed storage plan or need for further appraisal.
3. Define: This phase is a detailed proposal for site development commonly referred to as front end engineering and design (FEED). The design specification and required engineering informs a final investment decision and, if positive, an application for a storage permit.
4. Execute: On issuance of a storage permit, the operator executes the design plan. This entails the construction and commissioning of the engineering works necessary for CO2 injection into the target reservoir and for site conformance monitoring during the operational phase.
5. Operate: This phase commences with the first injection of CO2 and conformance to the operational plan. Any deviation from the planned operational conditions such as pressure excursions, flow impedance, or indications of out-of-zone migration are investigated and addressed to the satisfaction of the regulator, or otherwise promoted to a change in the operational plan up to and including a suspension of operations and early closure of the site.
6. Monitor: This phase commences with the end of injection and closure of the site and is a continuation of any preceding operational monitoring adapted to the specific requirements of conformance monitoring for the post-operational phase.
7. Verify: This phase commences with the end of the storage permit and transfer of site liability to the regulator. It consists of a sustained monitoring plan that verifies the long-term conformance of the site to expected outcomes.
The seven phases outline the structure of the current UK licensing regime – Table 1. In practice, each phase entails many elements that need to be negotiated between the operator and regulator. The negotiations are based on the specific requirements of a storage site and the evidence base of increasingly detailed assessments, characterisation, development proposals, and adaptation to conditions during the execution and operational phases.
Illustrating this, 17 of the 28 appraisal licences include between two and five additional requirements that apply during the initial appraisal phase to support characterisation – Table 2. These range from acquiring 3D seismic and drilling an appraisal well, to undertaking CO2 transport and topside installation studies, core sampling, and fault geomechanical analysis.
Table 1. Main stages of license progression
|
Main stages |
TLA |
Maturity |
|
Early Risk Assessment |
ERA |
Feasibility |
|
Characterise |
CH |
Appraisal |
|
Assess |
AS |
Pre-front-end engineering |
|
Define |
DF |
Front-end engineering design |
|
Permit Application |
PA |
FIP, firm intention to proceed |
|
Construct & Commission |
CX |
FID, final investment decision |
|
Operational |
OP |
OI, on injection |
|
Post-Closure |
PC |
Post-Closure monitoring |
|
Post-Transfer |
PT |
Post-Transfer monitoring |
Table 2. Additional licensing requirements.UK licensing structure
|
Additional Requirement |
Description of Requirement |
|
Seismic RP |
3D Survey reprocessing |
|
Seismic AQ |
3D Survey acquisition |
|
Well |
Appraisal drilling |
|
Injectivity |
Appraisal flow |
|
Wells VSP |
Vertical seismic profile |
|
Firm TR |
Transport study |
|
Firm TS |
Topside installation study |
|
Firm Geomech |
Geomechanical study |
|
Firm Cap |
Caprock seal study |
|
Firm Seal |
Fault seal study |
|
Firm Core |
Core analysis study |
Licensing in Scotland
Inshore developers in Scotland must first secure the appropriate rights to appraise and develop storage from the Crown Estate Scotland (CES). A CES agreement is required for a site appraisal. A CES lease is required for storage in accordance with the Energy Act 2008. The CES approach to managing storage assets is set out in the CCS Asset Profile (CES, 2022).
Onshore consent is covered by Scots law and is a matter for the local planning authority. Offshore consent for CO2 storage in territorial waters is also covered by Scots law, and requires coordination between the Scottish Environmental Protection Agency (SEPA), the Marine Directorate (MD) and the NSTA. The shared jurisdiction is discussed below.
Scots law
The territorial sea adjacent to Scotland is subject to both UK and Scots law. In terms of international law, the UK as the coastal state, enjoys sovereignty in the territorial sea which includes the seabed and subsurface. How the UK decides to exercise that sovereignty is a matter for the UK and this becomes complex in the context of devolution – Appendix C.
Licensing and regulation
Oil and gas fields under the territorial sea adjacent to Scotland are vested in the Crown. Although Scottish Ministers did receive licensing powers for oil and gas in the post-referendum settlement in the context of the Scotland Act 2016, this was explicitly only in relation to the onshore area, defined as lying within the baselines of the territorial sea – section 47. Licensing in relation to all offshore oil and gas, within the territorial sea and under the continental shelf, is a matter for the NSTA. This would be relevant to the closure of the oil production licence for Lybster in preparation for CO2 storage.
Scottish Ministers are established as the licensing for CO2 storage in the territorial sea by section 18 of the Energy Act 2008. The Storage of Carbon Dioxide Regulations 2010 went on to define a licence as granted by the authority, namely the NSTA – Regulation 1.3. However, the Storage of Carbon Dioxide Regulations 2011, a Scottish Statutory Instrument (SSI), transferred the powers to grant storage licences to Scottish Ministers, along with the associated powers to oversee the development, operation, monitoring, and closure of storage sites in Scottish territorial waters. This greatly simplifies the regulatory framework and requirements for licensing storage in Scottish waters.
Two points are worth noting. Firstly, the SSI precedes the 2012 transposition of the CCS Directive, and withdrawal of the UK from the EU in 2020. Very minor amendments to SSI 2011/24 may be required to reflect this. For example, the reporting authority named in the SSI is the European Commission.
Secondly, while the necessary powers sit with Scottish Ministers to oversee storage licensing, the competent authorities, and associated resources and procedures are not developed. Purchasing the services of the NSTA as regulator is an option that requires exploring. The long experience of the NSTA is an important supporting consideration. One option may be an agreement between an existing Scottish authority such as the Marine Directorate and the NSTA to deal with carbon licensing in territorial waters.
There is a precedent, the Memorandum of Understanding between the HSE and OPRED to form the Offshore Safety Directive Regulator, now OMAR, when that directive required a competent authority to deal with health, safety, and environmental risks under one roof (HSE, 2024). While that involved two regulators at UK level, there ought to be no objection to a similar arrangement between a UK and a Scottish regulator given the commonality of purpose and the desirability of a seamless approach.
Liability and ownership
Hydrocarbons in strata, even if residual and uneconomic, are vested in the Crown unless the Crown specifically transferred ownership, which it would be unlikely to do. Regarding liability for operational oil fields, the principal party is the licensee. In most cases, however, liability is joint and several with co-venturers under a joint operating agreement.
For decommissioning, it is a matter of anyone who holds a section 29 notice under the Petroleum Act 1998. Again, this will usually be co-venturers, but the list is lengthened to minimise the risk to the state if duty holders become insolvent. Things get more complicated in relation to any remaining infrastructure under an agreed derogation. Firstly, there is no specific legislation or regulation on this matter; rather it is dealt with in the context of guidance notes issued from time to time by OPRED. Leaving aside the apparent confusion in the guidance over ownership and section 29 notice holders – see Appendix C7. More fundamentally, there is an argument that the use of a Crown lease in relation to CCS constitutes an exercise of property rights. This raises the possibility that pre-existing infrastructure is a fixture in both jurisdictions. It follows that this belongs to the owner of the land or seabed to which it is attached. This has never been tested but is certainly arguable.
By contrast, this is a much easier proposition to establish within the territorial sea where the Crown Estate has habitually claimed property rights and the courts have readily confirmed them. Whatever is stated in the guidance notes and essentially accepted by duty holders in relation to decommissioning, property law may say something different.
Pore space
For Lybster, whereas the hydrocarbons in the field are vested in the Crown and those rights are exercised by the NSTA, the pore space is the property of the Crown. Property rights would be exercisable by the CES. For the Forth Basin, the pore space would also be owned by the Crown and the property rights would be exercisable by CES. Note that this property law analysis also implies that CO2 injected into depleted reservoirs beneath the territorial sea would be owned by the Crown on the basis of the principle of annexation. This has been more fully explored in the context of enhanced oil recovery (Patterson & Paisley, 2016).
Shared jurisdiction
The exploration and production licensing for Lybster at the time would have been a matter for the Secretary of State. Even now, as the reservoir lies within the territorial sea, the oil licensing would be a matter for NSTA. However, the CO2 storage licensing is a matter for Scottish Ministers. The siting and operation of the drilling rig onshore would then and now be a matter for the local planning authority. Thus, both UK law and Scots law are engaged as appropriate.
The Beatrice field presents a most interesting problem. The residual hydrocarbons in the field remain vested in the Crown. The pore space within 12 nm is owned by the Crown. The ownership of pore space beyond 12 nm is not clear, but from a practical perspective only the Crown has sovereign rights to act. The licensing authority within 12 nm is Scottish Ministers, and, beyond the 12 nm, NSTA. This may be resolved by some form of arrangement modelled on those for hydrocarbon reservoirs that cross boundaries.
Summary
CO2 storage involves multiple activities under different licensing regimes. These need to be explored further by the Scottish Government to fully understand what will be necessary to put in to law for CO2 storage within Scottish waters. New regulations will be required; it may well be, however, that insofar as existing regulations could be relied upon, the process of modifying SSI 2011/24 and drafting consents could be fast. This would really be a question for those with a better insight into the technical detail and political due process.
Inshore storage
Scotland’s territorial waters cover an area of 55,480 km2 with the potential for inshore storage. This includes a great deal of seismic data – Figure 3. While the 2D seismic coverage is extensive, only three areas have 3D seismic: Lybster, Fraserburgh, and the Solway Firth. 3D seismic is the most effective data for accurately characterising subsurface structures (Dee, et al., 2005). In its absence, 2D data may identify structures of interest in cross-section. The Forth Basin area is covered by a 2D survey – Appendix C. The availability of data allows the prospective areas to be ranked by maturity – Table 3. The exploration ranking of Fraserburgh and the Solway Firth is explained in the description of the areas of interest that follows below.
Areas of Interest
Figure 3 presents areas of interest for inshore CO2 storage.

Figure 3. Areas of interest for inshore CO2 storage. Four areas are identified with seismic coverage and exploration well data – see Annex E for an inventory. Lybster has the best data coverage (contingent), followed by Fraserburgh and the Solway Firth (prospective), and the Forth Basin (exploration).
Table 3. Inshore areas of interest ranked by maturity and potential to progress rapidly.
|
Areas of Interest |
Area Name |
Seismic & Wells |
Maturity |
|---|---|---|---|
|
AOI 1 |
Lybster |
RE07 3D seismic + 5 wells + model |
Contingent |
|
AOI 2 |
Fraserburgh |
PGS18 3D seismic + 3 wells |
Prospective |
|
AOI 3 |
Solway Firth |
ES94 3D seismic + 2 wells |
Prospective |
|
AOI 4 |
Forth Basin |
CN87 2D seismic + 1 well |
Exploration |
Lybster Area
The Lybster oil field is ranked as contingent on the maturity pyramid where the maturity progresses from an exploration resource (large base) to a commercial reserve of sites (small top) via contingent prospects – Figure 3. The area of interest encompasses 306 km2 that include the field and exploration structures, Knockinnon and Braemore.
Two more oil fields, Beatrice and Jacky, are located at the 12 nm limit. Lybster is notable for three reasons: its proximity to the coast; a substantial amount of data and analysis; and an existing production well. These significantly reduce the potential cost and timeline to developing a storage site. The field needs to be screened for capacity and suitability to qualify the field for appraisal licensing. The initial capacity estimate and assessment of suitability are documented in Section 4.2, supported by Appendix D.
Knockinnon and Braemore are relatively immature with respect to storage analysis but noteworthy for potentially providing step-out capacity to Lybster. Beatrice has not been assessed for this report as the field is beyond a presumed technical limit for onshore development via extended reach wells. 12 nautical miles is equivalent to 22 km; the 2022 record for an extended reach well is 15 km. A reasonable economic limit of 10 km has been set for assuming offshore development. Beatrice, the largest field in the area, straddles the 12 nm boundary. Jacky is a small satellite field in territorial waters to the north of Beatrice.
Fraserburgh & Solway Firth
Both areas have 3D seismic survey coverage and exploration wells. The location of the 3 wells and seismic for Fraserburgh, approximately 16-20 km from shore, would require an offshore installation (pipeline, injection well, and monitoring equipment). Any prospects within the area would need to be identified from the existing seismic and well data and screened for suitable reservoir injectivity and caprock seal properties prior to appraisal licensing.
The Solway Firth area has two exploration wells and a 3D seismic survey in the southern half of the 12 nm territorial waters. One of the wells is within the seismic survey area. The location of the seismic and well 13 km from shore would require an offshore installation (pipeline, injection well, and monitoring equipment). As with Fraserburgh, prospects within the area would need to be identified from the existing seismic and well data and screened for suitable reservoir injectivity and caprock seal properties prior to appraisal licensing. As such, both areas are ranked as prospective on the maturity pyramid.
Forth Basin
The Forth Basin is close to a diverse cluster of bio-CO2 sources located in the Central Belt. The Forth was screened for prospective storage sites as part of the CASSEM project (SCCS, 2012). Trap structures were identified but rejected due to a lack of well data and poor control on the 2D seismic interpretation for caprock thickness and reservoir volume (Monaghan et al., 2012). The Forth also contains a large basin, the Leven syncline. The syncline may be suitable for an alternative strategy of CO2-brine surface mixing and injection of the CO2-rich mixture which is denser than the syncline’s porewaters (Eke et al., 2011). This approach to storage is examined in section 2.3. The low TRL of dissolved CO2 injection and need to mature the concept for the Forth Basin rank this area as exploration.
Lybster prospect
Lybster was drilled in 1996 just 3 km off the Caithness coast – Figure 4. Lybster is 3 km from the coast, with a vertical offshore discovery well, 11/24-1 (1996), onshore extended reach appraisal well, 11/24-3 (2008), 3D seismic coverage, and a reservoir model.

Figure 4. The Lybster prospect location, associated reservoir model, seismic section and well data.
The model (Figure 4, bottom right) is constructed from 3D seismic data (Figure 4, bottom left) and well data (Figure 4, top left). The field has two high quality reservoir units, the lower ‘A’ and ‘B’ sands, separated by a baffle, the mid-shale, and capped by the Uppat Shale seal. The field is divided into two halves by a fault that strikes NE-SW. Several small faults occur between the regional Great Glen Fault (GGF) and Helmsdale Fault (HF).
The discovery well for Lybster was plugged and abandoned. The field was then drilled from the shore in 2008 via a 3 km extended reach well; the only offshore UK field to be produced this way. Most North Sea fields are much further offshore. This makes Lybster an accessible and low-cost storage prospect that requires no expensive infrastructure. If suitable, the suspended production well could be repurposed for CO2 injection.
Lybster is a four-way closure, or small 6 km2 dome, that has trapped oil and gas beneath a mudstone caprock for tens of millions of years. This is a good indication of suitability for storing CO2. The structural volume or space available for storage is calculated from known properties of the field such as reservoir area, thickness, porosity, and fluid properties such as CO2 density at reservoir conditions. The expected capacity is 2 Mt, (low-high range: 0.3-9 Mt).
An appraisal licence requires an early risk assessment (ERA) to formally establish the expected capacity and technical suitability of a suite of attributes ranging from seal and reservoir quality to fault geomechanics, lateral migration risk, legacy wells, and more. The ERA is a gap analysis that identifies further data requirements and potential issues to address in the ‘Assess and Define’ phases of an appraisal term for a storage licence. A first-look analysis follows below.
Storage analysis
At least two attributes of the Lybster field require further analysis as part of an early risk assessment. Firstly, the production history deviated from expectations – Figure 5. Increasing gas and water cuts within a matter of months and declining oil production resulted in a well workover and then suspension. A dynamic reservoir model is needed to explain these outcomes and fully understand the flow and containment of fluids within the structure.

Figure 5. Production history in barrels of oil, water, equivalent gas, and produced reservoir volume.
Secondly, the field is located between two large faults, the Helmsdale Fault and Great Glen Fault, and has several smaller faults within the field boundary that segment the reservoir. These require a detailed geomechanical study to de-risk the prospect – Appendix F.
Capacity: The expected capacity of Lybster, based on the structural volume, is 2.1 Mt of CO2. – Table 4. This reasonable mid-range value assumes just half the field area, 3 km2, and an average reservoir thickness of 15 meters. A storage area of 3 km2 assumes the main fault for the field is sealing and CO2 storage is restricted to half the mapped field area. The full field area, 6.11 km2 (NSTA estimate), effectively doubles the capacity for mid-range values.
Combining the full-field area with high-range values for the other five variables quadruples the capacity. The full field area and high-range values for all variables furnishes an optimistic maximum capacity of 9.4 Mt. The low estimate, a pessimistic 0.35 Mt, uses low range values and halves the expected area again. The highly conservative minimum estimate of 100 kt is based on the produced volumes of oil, gas, and water.
Qualifying adjectives for capacity are as follows: ‘minimum’ is the lowest value calculated, a highly conservative production volume estimate. The structural volume estimates are defined as ‘low, ‘mid’, and ‘high’, based on reasonable range estimates for six variables; the dominant variable is the storage area. Note that while the outcomes resemble the common P90-P50-P10 approach, the data is too sparse to support a statistical analysis. This simply reflects the field’s short production history. The two methods are summarised in Appendix H.
Table 4. Structural volume variable range and applied values for capacity estimates
|
Variable |
Range |
Low, 0.35 Mt |
Mid, 2.1 Mt |
High, 9.4 Mt |
|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Storage area |
1.5 – 6 km2 |
1.5 |
3 |
6 |
|
Net thickness |
5 – 25 m |
9 |
15 |
21 |
|
Porosity |
8 – 22% |
0.11 |
0.15 |
0.19 |
|
Net to Gross |
56-80% |
0.6 |
0.68 |
0.76 |
|
CO2 Density |
700-750 kg/m3 |
710 |
725 |
740 |
|
Saturation |
50 – 75% |
0.55 |
0.625 |
0.70 |
Discussion
The Lybster field area has been intensively studied – Appendix H. While this report relies on Keenan’s detailed analysis of reservoir attributes such as porosity (Keenan, 2023), it corrects for the field area which was underestimated by an order of magnitude. The 2 Mt outcome is reasonable when compared to traps with a similar area such as Sleipner, Norway.
The alternative analysis, presented by Watt (Watt et al., in preparation), assumes a replacement volume for produced fluids. While this is a common approach to the capacity assessment of mature depleted fields such as Viking and Hamilton (Track-1 and Track-2 storage sites), the outcome is highly conservative for Lybster, a field with an unusually short production history. We favour the structural volume as a more reasonable indication.
The suite of suitability attributes also supports Lybster as a strong candidate for a licenced storage appraisal – Figure 6. This will apply the rigour necessary to mature the attribute scores from speculative to verified or identify gaps for further analysis. Our recommendation is that an appraisal licence include studies on fault integrity, geomechanics, and reservoir simulation.

Figure 6. Boston Square analysis of attribute suitability for Lybster. A Boston Square is a simple scheme for scoring expert judgement from 1 to 3 devised by the Boston Consulting Group.
Forth Basin
The Forth Basin contains the Leven syncline, a geological structure in the Forth Estuary mapped on 2D seismic – Figures 7 and 8. Most proposals for CO2 storage assume injection of liquid CO2. This requires a geological seal above the reservoir to trap its buoyant rise. However, it is also possible to inject dissolved CO2 with large volumes of water, where the CO2-saturated water is denser than the porewater and sinks rather than rises. Research at the BGS and the University of Edinburgh shows that suitable geology to retain sinking dense CO2 may exist beneath the inshore waters of the Forth Estuary (Smith et al, 2011).
CO2-brine surface mixing
The CO2-brine dissolution approach was extensively modelled by Eke et al. (2011) and became a commercial reality in 2014 with the industrial-scale injection of 7 ktpa of CO2 from the Hellisheiði power plant, Iceland. While the physical limit for CO2 dissolution is 50 kg/m3, optimal chemical and physical parameters are controlled in the surface process facility. For Iceland, the outcome is 20 kg of dissolved CO2 per cubic meter of injected brine. This increases the volume of injected fluid by about 35x compared to a pure CO2 injection project like Sleipner. Reservoir pressure increases are minimised by extracting brine from the reservoir for mixing and return. This has worked for Iceland, with injection recently increasing from 7 ktpa to 12 ktpa. Future plans will scale to 40 ktpa before 2030. However, the geological setting, densely fractured young volcanic rocks, is quite different from the Leven Syncline.

Figure 7. Forth Basin, location of 2D seismic data grid, interpreted line and exploration well 25/26-1.

Figure 8. 2D seismic line CAS87-116, revealing the stratigraphy and structure of the Leven Syncline.
Suitability
The high volumes of brine injection associated with dissolved CO2 storage require a simple combination of a large regional aquifer with good reservoir quality and low structural complexity. The aquifer needs to provide a sufficient volume to help minimise pressure increases. Reservoir quality also minimises pressure increases. This implies above average porosity and permeability and thick continuous beds of high net-to-gross sandstones. Low structural complexity implies a simple geometry with a small number of faults that are transmissive, i.e. open to the lateral flow of brine, allowing the dissipation of injected fluids. These attributes are not clearly established for the Leven syncline – Figure 9.
A detailed analysis of the area (Monaghan et al. 2012) noted the poor data quality, lack of reservoir data, and structural complexity. These attributes are reflected in the low TRL status of the Forth Basin prospect.

Figure 9. Forth Basin area regional geology, indicating the stratigraphic and structural complexity.
Sources of bio-CO2
Our analysis of over a hundred sources of bio-CO2 in Scotland produced a database of 98 sites with emissions that range from 3 to 360 ktpa – Figure 10. Four small distilleries, 1.6-2.8 ktpa, are included as these have already been selected for bio-CO2 capture. The total resource is 3.7 Mtpa. Almost all the sources, 91 sites, are grouped into five regional clusters – Figure 11.
Categories and Sectors
We have categorised the sources based on capture method: combustion, 89%, and separation, 11%. Separation at distilleries and anaerobic digesters is low-cost and high purity relative to post-combustion flue gas capture. The two categories are then split by process into nine sectors.
Biomass
Biomass, the largest sector at 46%, produces CO2 from the combustion of plant and animal waste. Biomass is often configured as combined heat and power (CHP). The 18 facilities in the database produce an average of 95 ktpa and total 1.7 Mtpa. The six largest sites, 150-360 ktpa, include Markinch, Steven’s Croft, and Morayhill. This accounts for 900 ktpa of bio-CO2 emissions. The smallest site, Gleneagles, emits 7 ktpa. Locations tend to be semi-rural.
Energy from Waste
Energy from Waste (EfW), the second largest sector, 29%, produces electricity and heat from the incineration of municipal waste, often in a CHP configuration. Roughly half of the emissions are bio-CO2 (Tolvik, 2024). The 13 sites emit a total of 1.1 Mtpa, average 84 ktpa. The five largest are amongst the top ten sources, total 0.6 Mtpa, average 126 ktpa. The largest, South Clyde Energy Centre, 158 ktpa, is planned for 2025. The smallest site, Binn, 38 ktpa, opens in 2026.
Anaerobic Digestion
Anaerobic digestion (AD) covers a range of dry and wet waste applications that produce raw biogas. AD tends to be small, with 39 sites in the database accounting for 0.5 Mtpa of bio-CO2, average 13 ktpa. The largest site, 44 ktpa, is the Girvan distillery. The smallest site, Crofthead farm, 3 ktpa. We identify five sectors where biogas is combusted on site:
- AD Landfill is the fourth largest sector overall after biomass, EfW, and distillery fermentation, with 18 facilities producing a total of 0.18 Mtpa, average 10 ktpa.
- AD Industrial is the second largest AD sector with 7 facilities producing 0.17 Mtpa, average 25 ktpa. Sites include distilleries, breweries, and pharma manufacturing.
- AD City Waste is the third largest AD sector with 6 facilities producing 0.08 Mtpa in total, average 14 ktpa. Sites process municipal wet streams such as food waste.
- AD Farming is the fifth largest AD sector with 6 facilities producing 0.04 Mtpa in total, average 7 ktpa. Sites process wet streams such as crop waste and silage.
- AD Sewage is the smallest bio-CO2 sector, with just 2 facilities in the database producing 0.02 Mtpa in total: Seafield, 16 ktpa, and Nigg, 8 ktpa.
Distillery Fermentation
Whisky distilleries produce CO2 during the mash fermentation stage. The CO2 can be easily separated using a simple wash process where pressurised water acts as a solvent. This generates a pure CO2 stream. Distillery fermentation (DF), 10%, is the third largest sector after biomass and EfW, with 20 sites producing 0.35 Mtpa in total, average 18 ktpa.
The three largest distilleries account for 0.2 Mtpa, average 66 ktpa; the remaining 17 sites account for 0.16 Mtpa, average 9 ktpa. The database includes four small distilleries: Tomatin, Speyburn, Tullibardine, and Balmenach, 1.6-2.8 ktpa. These are shortlisted along with Invergordon and North British for commercial bio-CO2 capture and storage (CCSL, 2024). Many of the 20 sites are located around Speyside as part of the Inverness cluster.
AD upgrading
AD biogas can be upgraded to biomethane by separating out the CO2 using a membrane filter. The biomethane is frequently sold directly into the natural gas grid. As with distilleries, this also generates a low-cost and high-purity stream of bio-CO2. AD upgrading is the seventh largest sector overall, 2%, with eight sites producing 0.07 Mtpa in total, average 8 ktpa. Sites include farms and industrial facilities located in semi-rural areas across the country.
Table 5. Bio-CO2 sources by sector. Note: the lowest cost sectors are highlighted in grey.
|
Sector, Bio-CO2 |
Category |
Sites |
Average |
Range, ktpa |
Total |
3.7 Mtpa |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Biomass |
Combustion |
18 |
95 ktpa |
7-360 |
1.70 Mtpa |
45.8% |
|
Energy from Waste |
Combustion |
13 |
84 ktpa |
38-158 |
1.10 Mtpa |
29.4% |
|
Distillery Wash |
Separation |
20 |
18 ktpa |
2-75 |
0.35 Mtpa |
9.52% |
|
AD Landfill |
Combustion |
18 |
10 ktpa |
4-32 |
0.18 Mtpa |
4.93% |
|
AD Industrial |
Combustion |
7 |
25 ktpa |
6-44 |
0.17 Mtpa |
4.67% |
|
AD City Waste |
Combustion |
6 |
14 ktpa |
6-24 |
0.08 Mtpa |
2.20% |
|
AD Upgrading |
Separation |
8 |
8 ktpa |
4-17 |
0.07 Mtpa |
1.76% |
|
AD Farming |
Combustion |
6 |
7 ktpa |
3-12 |
0.04 Mtpa |
1.08% |
|
AD Sewage |
Combustion |
2 |
12 ktpa |
8-16 |
0.02 Mtpa |
0.65% |


Figure 10. Bio-CO2 sectors. Distillery (orange) and AD Upgrading (green) are categorised as separation, yielding a low-cost CO2 source relative to post-combustion capture. Values in square brackets [18] represent the number of sources; area of circles represent the size of the source (ktpa).

Figure 11. Onshore sources of bio-CO2 across Scotland. 91 of the 98 sites are located in five clusters.
Many low-cost distillery sources are located in the Inverness cluster, relatively close to the Lybster site. The five clusters are analysed by road distance from the nearest storage prospect in section 3.2. Also, note the overlap of the Forth and Clyde clusters at the terminus of the Feeder 10 pipeline. This highlights an interesting possible alternative to inshore storage, i.e. access to the Acorn offshore storage hub. This is discussed further in the summary.
Regional Clusters
We have grouped the sources into five clusters. The boundaries are marked by either a 100 km or 50 km diameter circle. Note, the sources east of Elgin are closer to Fraserburgh but included as part of the Inverness cluster given the primacy of Lybster as a storage candidate.
Inverness
The Inverness cluster, the third largest overall, falls within the Lybster catchment area. The cluster has 21 sites, producing 0.55 Mt of bio-CO2, and boasts a concentration of low-cost separation sources: 12 distilleries, 92 ktpa, and two AD upgraders, 18 ktpa. The average road distance to storage is high at 186 km. However, just over half of the cluster, 0.31 Mtpa, is within 150 km of Lybster: 5 distilleries, 43 ktpa, including the region’s largest distillery, Invergordon, 24 ktpa, which has been shortlisted for commercial CO2 capture; and 2 biomass plants: Morayhill, 323 ktpa, and Balcas, 28 ktpa, which is close to the Invergordon distillery. The remaining low-cost sources, 67 ktpa, are 200 to 240 km from Lybster by road.
Aberdeen
The Aberdeen cluster sits within the Fraserburgh catchment area, with six facilities producing 116 ktpa. The majority comes from five combustion facilities; the remainder from a small AD upgrading facility: Savock Farm, 4 ktpa. The largest source is the NESS EfW plant at 67 ktpa. The cluster has the third shortest average road distance to storage at 56 km.
Dumfries
The Dumfries cluster has five facilities producing 300 ktpa, mostly from the Steven’s Croft biomass plant, 0.28 Mtpa. The area includes two low-cost AD upgrading facilities producing a combined 18 ktpa. One of these, Crofthead, is already commercially capturing 13 ktpa, and has a separate CHP source, 3 ktpa, currently not captured. All the sites are within 70 km by road of the Solway Firth storage prospect. The cluster average at 48 km is the shortest overall.
Forth & Clyde
The Forth and Clyde clusters are closest to the Forth Basin storage prospect. These are the two largest clusters in our database, with a combined 59 sites producing 2.5 Mtpa. The area accounts for 69% of all combustion and 45% of all separation sources in the database; and includes some of the largest facilities including the Markinch and Caledonian biomass plants, 360 and 144 ktpa, and Cameronbridge distillery, 75 ktpa. Just over 0.84 Mtpa is within 50 km of the Forth Basin storage location, including Cameronbridge, 9 km, and Markinch, 10 km.
The North British distillery, 49 ktpa and 49 km by road from the storage location, is already commercially capturing CO2 for export to storage in Denmark. Low-cost separation sources account for 190 ktpa of bio-CO2 at an average road distance of 80 km from the storage location. It is worth noting the Feeder 10 terminus is located in the overlap of the two cluster boundary circles. Also of interest, are the significant local combustion clusters at Irvine, 290 ktpa, and Dunbar, 208 ktpa, which are 107 km and 109 km by road from the storage location.
Outliers
Seven outliers account for just 3% of all combustion, and 24% of all separation sources. The latter value reflects a concentration of low-costs sources in Ayrshire. This includes two facilities at the Girvan distillery: fermentation, 75 ktpa, and AD upgrading, 17 ktpa; and the neighbouring Ailsa Bay distillery, 7 ktpa. Combustion sources include Charlesfield AD, Borders, 18 ktpa, the Acharn biomass plant, Perthshire, 31 ktpa, and the Pulteney distillery, Wick, a small biomass plant, 19 ktpa. The latter is the closest source to Lybster.
Table 6. Bio-CO2 sources by cluster. Note: the sources outside clusters are highlighted in grey
|
Combustion |
Bio-CO2 |
Storage |
N |
Average |
Road |
Range, ktpa |
3.3 Mtpa |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Inverness |
441 ktpa |
Lybster |
7 |
63 ktpa |
197 km |
5-242 |
13% |
|
Aberdeen |
112 ktpa |
Fraserburgh |
5 |
22 ktpa |
57 km |
4-67 |
3% |
|
Forth |
1,362 ktpa |
Forth Basin |
25 |
51 ktpa |
46 km |
4-360 |
41% |
|
Clyde |
987 ktpa |
Forth Basin |
26 |
41 ktpa |
99 km |
5-158 |
32% |
|
Dumfries |
288 ktpa |
Solway Firth |
3 |
96 ktpa |
50 km |
3-279 |
9% |
|
Outliers |
112 ktpa |
Various |
4 |
28 ktpa |
86 km |
18-44 |
3% |
|
Separation |
Bio-CO2 |
Storage |
N |
Average |
Road |
Range, ktpa |
0.4 Mtpa |
|
Inverness |
109 ktpa |
Lybster |
14 |
8 ktpa |
181 km |
2-24 |
26 % |
|
Aberdeen |
4 ktpa |
Fraserburgh |
1 |
4 ktpa |
49 km |
4 |
1% |
|
Forth |
151 ktpa |
Forth Basin |
6 |
25 ktpa |
68 km |
2-75 |
36% |
|
Clyde |
39 ktpa |
Forth Basin |
2 |
19 ktpa |
114 km |
12-27 |
9% |
|
Dumfries |
18 ktpa |
Solway Firth |
2 |
9 ktpa |
46 km |
5-13 |
4% |
|
Outliers |
99 ktpa |
Various |
3 |
33 ktpa |
84 km |
7-75 |
24% |
Development timeframes
CCS is being rapidly deployed to meet demanding net zero targets. By our analysis, there are 32 projects across Europe with realistic timelines to storage by 2030 – Figure 12. Development timeframes have become crucial to delivering these targets, as policy makers seek to balance haste with due diligence. The exponential growth in demand for CDR credits is also exacerbating a supply imbalance for CO2 storage that early movers, notably Denmark (Stenlille), Iceland (Coda), and Norway (Northern Lights) are seeking to capitalise on. We observe that timeframes in these countries are the fastest in Europe at around five years.

Figure 12. The outlook for European Storage, 2030. Seven countries have megatonne projects planned, with 64% of capacity in the North Sea. Countries in grey have no storage planned for 2030.
UK timelines
The NSTA, as the UK’s competent authority and carbon storage regulator, is instrumental in setting UK licensing timelines. The first UK carbon storage licensing round was held in 2022. The NSTA announced 21 accepted appraisal licences in September 2023, building on the experience of the previous seven licences. Each licence is tailored to the prospective storage site with a deadline for a storage permit application and specific requirements relating to the necessary maturation of the project for a permit application – Appendix D.
The first storage permits are expected no later than Q4 2024 for Endurance CS001 (East Coast Cluster) and Hamilton CS004 (HyNet North West). Assuming a two-year construction and commissioning period, first injection is expected no later than 2028 with minor delays possibly increasing that to 2030. It is worth noting that 21 of the appraisals are required to submit storage permit applications between 2026 and 2028, which may cause a significant bottleneck similar to Class VI well permitting delays at the Federal level in the USA – Appendix I.
Analysis of the 27 active licences indicates that the average appraisal time from early risk assessment to storage permit application is five years and three months. Examples of exceptionally short and long appraisals are the Scottish Cluster’s Acorn East licence (Storegga, two years) and the East Coast Cluster’s Bunter 42 expansion (BP, eight years). The former is supported by a decade of prior site characterisation. The latter is an exploration target that requires 3D seismic acquisition and an appraisal well. Allowing for construction and commissioning, storage projects expect to be operational, i.e. ‘on injection’, within eight years on average of an appraisal licence application.
EEA timeframes
Analysis for EEA projects is largely dependent on public statements of ambition. The outcomes are faster than the UK. The nine Norwegian projects average six years from initial application to expected operation. Denmark is relatively fast by comparison, averaging four years for its six projects. The two large Dutch projects, Porthos (2019) and Aramis (2021), expect to be operational within seven years. Pycasso, the French project launched in 2021, has the longest development period at ten years. The remaining projects for Bulgaria, Greece, Iceland, and Italy expect to be operational within five years of their start dates which range from 2021 to 2023. If the UK timings are indicative, ambitious EEA deadlines of less than six years for a third of the projects are likely optimistic and at risk of delays of one to five years. This may result a storage capacity substantially less than the EU target of 50 Mtpa.
Implications for inshore storage
Many storage projects are on timelines of around a decade characterised by three phases: a pre-licensing identification and application phase of approximately three years; an appraisal licensing phase that averages five years; a storage permit construction and commissioning phase of around two years. This is likely to hold true for Fraserburgh and the Solway Firth, the two less mature areas of interest identified in Chapter 2. Lybster is an exception, with several factors indicating a fast-track approach that could support a storage permit application within three years. This option is examined in the final chapter of this report.
Cost-revenue analysis
The following cost-revenue analysis for the capture, transport, and storage of bio-CO2 establishes to a good first approximation the potential value of developing onshore and inshore CCS in Scotland. The full chain cost is compared to available revenue from the recent emergence of a high-demand and low-supply voluntary CDR market.
Note that indicative costs for capture, transport, and storage are based on publicly available sources where possible. In the absence of published data, companies operating in Scotland, the UK, and Europe have been approached to provide a commercial estimate.
Capture
Capture is divided into two categories: combustion and separation. Combustion accounts for seven of the studied nine sectors and 89% of the bio-CO2, 3.3 Mtpa. This category costs more than separation as the capture is a post-combustion process on a low-purity and dilute flue gas stream, whereas separation from distilleries and biomethane upgraders is on a high-purity and concentrated CO2 stream that simply requires dehydration and compression.
The combustion sources in this study range from eight large biomass and EfW facilities, 130-360 ktpa, to twenty-five small AD sites, 3-12 ktpa. Post-combustion capture is sensitive to economies of scale, with many studies noting a wide range of capture costs that reflect the stream purity and size of the facility. For example, there is an average 43% increase in cost for an order of magnitude decrease in capture rate from megatonne to sub-megatonne projects (GCCSI, 2021).
The available literature focuses on large CCS applications, broadly defined as facilities emitting at least 100 ktpa (IEAGHG, 2024). A degree of generalisation is therefore necessary given that 89 of the 98 sources in this study emit less than 100 ktpa, with half the sources emitting less than 15 ktpa.
Where possible, we estimate a range for costs and assume the high cost given the predominance of small sources in our data.
Biomass is the largest sector in this study with sources averaging 95 ktpa. We estimate a low cost of £87 per tonne based on the levelised cost analysis of Lehtveer & Emanuelsson (2021) – Appendix J. We estimate a high cost of £128 per tonne based on analysis of emitters smaller than 100 ktpa by Beiron et al. (2022). We favour the high cost as representative – Table 5.
Energy from Waste is the second largest sector with average emissions of 84 ktpa. Two estimates were found with broadly similar costs: £81 and £109 per tonne (MVV, 2024; IEAGHG, 2024). We favour a high cost as the average plant capacity is small at under 200 ktpa of waste.
Anaerobic Digestion covers five sectors in the combustion category with low average emissions of 13 ktpa. We found no data on capture costs for AD combustion. We assume a low-cost of £128 per tonne from the biomass analysis, given the much smaller size of AD sources. In the absence of data, we conservatively assume a high cost of £136 per tonne based on a mean EfW cost, £95, multiplied by the order-of-magnitude scalar for combustion, 143%.
Separation produces highly concentrated streams of pure bio-CO2 (EBA, 2022). Distillery fermentation, average 18 ktpa, and AD upgrading, 8 ktpa, are the two sectors that use cryogenic distillation and membrane separation to capture the CO2. Global analyses provide a low-cost estimate of £30 (IEA 2021; NETL, 2023). In our opinion this reflects economies of scale for large bioethanol plants in the USA. A high-cost price of £60 per tonne is based on a commercial sales estimate for small emitters (E Nimmons, pers. comm., May 2024)[1].
Table 7. Estimated capture costs by sector, including % concentration of CO2 in emissions stream.
|
Sector, Bio-CO2 |
Category |
N |
Average |
Cost Range |
High Cost |
Stream |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Biomass Plant |
Combustion |
18 |
95 ktpa |
£87 – £128 |
£128 |
8-20% |
|
Energy from Waste |
Combustion |
13 |
84 ktpa |
£81 – £109 |
£109 |
6-12% |
|
AD Combustion |
Combustion |
39 |
13 ktpa |
£128 – £136 |
£136 |
10-20% |
|
Distillery |
Separation |
20 |
18 ktpa |
£30 – £60 |
£60 |
98% |
|
AD Upgrading |
Separation |
8 |
8 ktpa |
£30 – £60 |
£60 |
98% |
Transport
Truck transport is the simplest option, as rail transport of geographically dispersed sources would require onloading and offloading at rail heads with truck transport at both ends. A rail route north from Inverness, and clusters further south and east, terminates at Wick. No cost analysis of rail has been undertaken for this study.
Truck transport of CO2 is by a cryogenic T75 ISO tank as a liquid at -35°C and 22 bar. Each truck carries 20 tonnes. Assuming an injection rate of 100 ktpa and batch delivery over 6 days a week throughout the year, 16 truck loads per day are required. There is scarce literature on truck costs for Europe. However, a commercial estimate of £20 per tonne for a 100-mile round trip seems reasonable (E. Nimmons, pers. comm. May 2024) and is applied here – Appendix J. This is equivalent to £0.124 per tonne per km, which is similar to a recent cost estimate of £0.126 by Ricardo (2023) and $0.111 for the USA (Stolaroff et al., 2021). We presume that the slightly lower dollar estimate reflects lower fuel costs in America.
The average road distance to Lybster for the Inverness cluster is 191 km, with 87 ktpa available within 150 km. This includes 40 ktpa of low-cost CO2 from four distilleries; the remaining 47 ktpa are from two biomass sources, Balcas and Pulteney. The Inverness cluster has enough low-cost CO2 to supply 109 ktpa at an average road distance of 188 km, equivalent to £24/tonne.
With the exception of Savock Farm at Ellon, 4 ktpa and 300 km, the remaining low-cost sources are more than 360 km away. It follows that road transport costs for 100 ktpa over 10 years are £20-50 million with an opportunity to source all of the bio-CO2 from the Inverness cluster and low-cost sources at £24 million. It is worth mentioning that a hydrogen fleet would reduce life cycle emissions and road wear, being lighter than an electric vehicle equivalent (Low, 2024).
Storage
Three storage cost scenarios are considered. The most detailed is Lybster, outlined below. The second scenario is a first approximation for Fraserburgh and the Solway Firth. This is similar to Lybster but less mature and more challenging with respect to appraisal wells, seismic data, and location. The third scenario is a consideration of potential costs for the Forth Basin proposal, the least mature of the storage options.
Lybster
The cost analysis for Lybster assumes 100 ktpa of CO2 over a decade which would account for half of the expected capacity estimate of 2 million tonnes – section 2.2.1. This would potentially mature the understanding of the site towards a further decade of injection.
Buffer: The site will require tanks for the temporary storage of CO2 prior to injection. We assume four tanks with sufficient capacity for an injection rate of 100 ktpa, equivalent to an injection rate of 12 tonnes/hr. This allows for 10 days of well maintenance per year. While the production and injection of CO2 is continuous, transport occurs in discrete runs and is a batch process. Redundant capacity is required on-site to provide operational flexibility. Assuming 16 trucks a day and 125% capacity based on LNG shipping experience, 4 x 100 m3 onsite tanks would buffer flow to the wellhead. For comparison, the twelve Northern Lights tanks at Øygarden are 6 times the size to accommodate one shipload, 7,500 m3. The capital investment for the Lybster storage tanks and site works is assumed to be around £1 million.
Compression: The site will require a compressor to take the liquid CO2 to the required pipeline pressure of 150 bar for the well system and injection at reservoir conditions. We estimate this to require 120 kWh per tonne after Psarras et al. (2020) at an operational cost of £30 per tonne with no capital investment, assuming rental of the equipment from a service company. The operational cost over 10 years at 100 ktpa is estimated at £30 million.
Injection: The site also requires an injection well. The discovery well, 11/24-1, is unsuitable. The well is designated AB3 (NSTA, 2023), i.e. permanently abandoned and seabed cleared, with no infrastructure in place. Additionally, three cement barriers isolate the well. The re-purposing of 11/24-1 would be technically challenging and very expensive.
The production well, 11/24-3y, is currently suspended with the onshore surface infrastructure in place. The current drilling pad can be re-used and the well re-purposed. 11/24-3y is an extended reach well that has been designed to encounter a 173 m succession of the target reservoir sandstones compared to the 25 m of the vertical exploration well, 11/24-1. This favours good injectivity. It is estimated that the conversion cost of an onshore well to CO2 injection is approximately £1-2 million (IEAGHG, 2022). This is an order of magnitude cheaper than an offshore injection well at £10-15 million based on NSTA estimates of recent North Sea drilling costs at £5-10 thousand per meter (NSTA, 2023). We conservatively assume a combined conversion and maintenance cost for the well of £3 million.
Appraisal: The storage site requires an expert reinterpretation of the existing 3D seismic cube, including depth conversion and static model construction (three months) and dynamic simulation of the reservoir (nine months). This would match the known fluid production history and forward model the reservoir response to CO2 injection and storage (9 months). We estimate the cost of this appraisal study to be about £0.5 million. A related geomechanical study of similar duration and rigour is also estimated to cost £0.5 million. The budget for a two-year appraisal that includes both the modelling and geomechanical studies, a well repurposing study, and standard elements of the NSTA appraise-assess-define framework for appraisal licensing is estimated to cost approximately £3 million.
The cost estimates sum to a sub-total is £37 million. Assuming operational costs for the site of £250,000 per annum, the capital investment and operational costs sum to £40 million. Not addressed here are monitoring and verification, as these are highly dependent on the technologies chosen. The design of the monitoring programme is an important element of the appraisal licence. However, if we conservatively assume a monitoring cost of £20 million over the lifetime of storage and add £10 million for conformance and decommissioning, this indicates a storage cost of £70/tonne based on 100 ktpa over 10 years.
Fraserburgh and Solway Firth
These two prospective sites require an offshore installation and operation. Assuming suitable targets are discovered at 1,000-2,000 m depth, the well drilling cost would be £10-15 million. A compressor would need to be either located offshore on a small operational platform, or at the landfall end of a 16 km pipeline. While there is scant literature on short pipeline costs, we conservatively assume a cost of £50 per tonne based on the analysis of Johnsson et al. (2017). The 10 year 100 ktpa cost is £50 million. The cost of an offshore operational platform is tentatively estimated at £10 million. Note that no cost estimate was found for this element.
Appraisal costs reflect the need to reinterpret the existing seismic over the area at £2 million, plus the possibility of needing 100 km2 of new 3D seismic for exploration and appraisal at £5 million. Further appraisal requirements will likely increase the appraisal budget to at least £10 million. From the Lybster cost breakdown, we can add on the cost of temporary storage, £1 million, compression, £30 million, maintenance for the well, £3 million, and monitoring of the site, £20 million. It follows that the total cost for Fraserburgh and Solway Firth would be, to a very rough approximation, around £140/tonne, i.e. double the estimate for Lybster.
Forth Basin
No cost analysis is undertaken for the Forth Basin, as our recommendation is for this prospect to proceed as an experimental pilot study with a nominal injection rate of 10 ktpa. The site would require an injection well with the wellhead located onshore to reduce costs. However, the research budget would need to cover the cost of the well, and handling of the onshore dissolution of CO2 into brine extracted from the well. Any research proposal is likely to be costed at more than £10 million for the well alone. The brine extraction, mixing facility, and re-injection are likely to more than double the well cost. However, no data was found on the latter elements. As such, an accurate costing is beyond the scope of this study.
CDR market
The European Union and UK have yet to regulate a CO2 removal requirement. However, the voluntary market for carbon dioxide removal (CDR) is rapidly emerging, with rumours of Microsoft, Shopify, and Stripe buying credits valued at USD1,000 per tonne from Iceland’s Carbfix and Climeworks projects in 2021. Climeworks is offering public CDR subscriptions at USD1,500 per tonne (WP, 2024). These are based on direct air capture (DAC) and CO2 mineralisation in the young and reactive basalts of Hellisheiði, 20 km to the east of Reykjavik.
A different price signal for permanent storage has recently emerged in Europe. In 2023, the European Commission approved the Danish NECCS fund (DKK 2.6 billion, €350 million) for the permanent geological storage of CO2 from direct air capture and biogenic sources; the projects must be operational by 2026. In April 2024, Denmark awarded NECCS funding to three bio-CO2 companies to remove 1.1 Mt of CO2 between 2026 and 2032 – Table 8[2].
Table 8. Awarded NECCS funding for CDR and CCS in Denmark, April 2024.
|
Company, Country |
NECCS |
Storage |
Contract |
DKK / tonne |
GBP/tonne |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
BioCirc biogas, DK |
2026-2032 |
Stenlille |
130.7 ktpa |
968.5 |
£110 |
|
Bioman biogas, DK |
2026-2032 |
Stenlille |
25 ktpa |
1,117.5 |
£127 |
|
Carbon Capture Scotland, UK |
2026-2032 |
Stenlille |
4.65 ktpa |
2,600 |
£297 |
These credits have been negotiated on the voluntary carbon market, and tentatively establish a low CDR value of £110. Ørsted, the Danish power company, are also contracted by Microsoft to capture 3.67 Mt of bio-CO2 over 10 years which will be exported to Northern Lights for a combined transport and storage cost of around €100 per tonne. The Ørsted credit value is unknown. However, given the much higher value of credits for geological storage in Iceland, we favour the high value of £297 as indicative of European CDR pricing in the near future.
Value proposition
Applying the high-cost prices for capture, transport, and storage, and assuming storage at Lybster, we can estimate a full chain cost. Low-cost bio-CO2 is sourced from the Inverness cluster. A combined capture and storage rate of 100 ktpa is assumed for a period of 10 years.
£60 per tonne for bio-CO2 from separation sources, primarily distilleries
£24 per tonne for transport for an average road distance of 188 km
£70 per tonne for storage from buffering tanks to decommissioning
- Full chain CCS cost estimate: £154 per tonne
- Voluntary market CDR credit revenue: £297 per tonne
- Net return on investment over 10 years: £143 million
Conclusions
The following section poses six questions that draw out the major themes and outcomes of our research. The answers are intended to highlight actionable policy directions that may support the rapid development of domestic CCS on small but lucrative bio-CO2 sources.
Can Scotland develop inshore bio-CO2 storage by 2030?
The short answer is yes. The key metrics are 3.7 Mtpa of available bio-CO2, including 109 ktpa of the lowest cost sources, mainly distilleries, within 188 km of the inshore Lybster prospect. This is a good source-sink match for a site that has an expected 2.1 Mt capacity. First injection by 2030 will require a rapid formal appraisal and regulated consents to permit storage.
The remaining prospects identified in this study are much less mature and characterised by locations that require a substantial investment to appraise. A realistic timeline for these prospects is 2035-2040 with no clear indication at this stage that the prospects are suitable.
How can this be funded?
There are several ways to fund the appraisal of Lybster, which we estimate will cost about £3 million and take three years. Commercial interest may be sufficient to raise capital. This may be through a capture company that is seeking storage, or as a joint venture between the capture company, whisky distilleries and their parent companies. A successful appraisal will lead to construction and commissioning, including site works such as tank installation and well engineering, which we estimate to cost £3-5 million. An approximate budget of £10 million is needed.
We note the strong narrative structure of decarbonising international brands within a cultural tradition. This may attract global corporations who wish to associate themselves with carbon dioxide removals that have a story to tell. As a strategic project for Scotland, the appraisal costs may be partly underwritten by government funding.
On commissioning, verified carbon storage certificates can be issued on the voluntary market at an estimated price of £300 per tonne. On injection, assuming a sustained injection rate of 100 ktpa and a 20% mark-down of storage to removal, the site would generate an annual revenue of £24 million. No subsidy would be needed once storage has commenced. This would contribute to both Scotland’s economic growth and a just transition to net zero.
How quickly can this be done?
The fastest appraisal-to-permit timelines in Europe are about three years. These fast-track appraisals rely on an aggressive pursuit of a commercial opportunity and a background of available data and mature understanding of the technical risk. Lybster has both the interest and the technical maturity. The missing piece is the necessary legislation to support a legal consent for the appraisal license and storage permit if successful. The legal advice is that the necessary consents may only require a transfer of existing UK regulations to Scottish law.
How much bio-CO2 capture is available?
In total, we have identified 3.7 Mtpa of available bio-CO2. This is far in excess of the initial requirement for inshore storage, which we estimate at 0.1 Mtpa. The 3.6 Mt surplus and its geographic concentration in the central belt suggests that offtake to Acorn via the Feeder 10 pipeline ought to be considered as a parallel strategy to inshore storage, noting that this could be a considerable time in the future – Figures 13 and 14.
Combustion source capture is relatively high cost at around £120 per tonne. Separation is much more valuable at £60 per tonne. Distilleries and AD upgraders are common at the low end of the range, making up nearly half of the smallest 27 sites that average 5 ktpa, and one-third of 22 sites that average 10 ktpa. Significantly, there are 14 separation sources near Inverness that may support 21 modular capture units assuming 3-5 ktpa per unit, i.e. sufficient to batch load 16 trucks at 20 tonnes per day for a 100 ktpa supply to Lybster.

Figure 13. Central Belt sources: 2.3 Mt of combustion bio-CO2 is available, of which 0.3 Mt is from 28 small AD sites; another 190 ktpa of separation bio-CO2 from 6 distilleries and 2 AD biogas upgraders.
How much storage capacity is available?
Based on current data, our analysis found that only the Lybster prospect has potential commercially viable storage capacity – expected to be 2.1 Mt. This would be sufficient for 20 years of storage at an injection rate of 100 ktpa. This is not significant in terms of overall storage capacity in the North Sea or in terms of Scotland’s overall statutory climate targets but would provide an opportunity to showcase Scotland as a global frontrunner for CCUS technologies.
2.1 Mt of storage would generate £500 million in CDR revenue at 100 ktpa – an injection rate that is much lower than the technical limit for CO2 storage, which is generally thought to be around 700 ktpa. The low estimate is 0.35 Mt, which would result in only three to four years storage and a revenue of £72 million. The high estimate of 9.4 Mt would be more than sufficient to provide storage out to 2090 at a revenue in excess of £1.5 billion.
What policy actions need to be taken?
The legal opinion is that minor amendments to existing regulations are required to license storage appraisals and storage permits in the territorial waters of Scotland. To repeat the summary from Chapter 1: CO2 storage involves multiple activities under different licensing regimes. It may well be, however, that insofar as existing regulations could be relied upon, the process of modifying existing statutory instruments could be fast. This would really be a question for those with a better insight into the technical detail and political due process.
The government may also consider if it is helpful to fund the appraisal of Lybster partially or wholly, at an estimated cost of £3 million, which could commence immediately in anticipation of the required amendments being in place to sanction the outcomes and grant a storage permit. Assuming a construction and commissioning term of 1-2 years, the legislative changes would need to be in place by 2028 to support an on-injection outcome by 2030.

Figure 14. Storage prospects by maturity and available bio-CO2 from the 98 sources. The inner circle represents the available separation CO2; the lighter outer circle represents the combustion CO2. Note: the Clyde circles are not associated with a prospect but included for relevance to Feeder 10.
Vision
Storegga has proposed that Acorn will include a NET contribution (Storegga, 2022a). This was originally envisaged as a direct air capture project but timelines and capture costs for this technology suggest that bio-CO2 has a greater likelihood of supporting 2030 targets. We envision two bio-CO2 scenarios that potentially provide significant tax revenue to Scotland.
Scenario 1: Low-cost separation sources at £60 per tonne provide the highest profit and earliest opportunity for taxation. For Lybster, 100 ktpa is available from the Inverness cluster of distilleries. For Feeder 10 and Acorn, 200 ktpa is available from the central belt.
Scenario 2: More costly but larger combustion sources, primarily biomass and energy-from-waste plants at £120 per tonne provide 2 Mtpa of CO2 to Feeder 10. For Lybster, a large biomass plant, Morayhill, potentially doubles and then trebles the 100 ktpa injection rate if early well performance and capacity indications support expansion. This may include possible satellite prospects such as Knockinnon and Braemore.
Storage taxation: Assuming a 10% tax on storage only, this would harvest a nominal £7 per tonne on a storage cost of £70 per tonne – our estimate for Lybster; Storegga has published a transport and storage cost of £45 per tonne for Acorn (Storegga, 2022b). Taxing the full chain yields £15 on a CCS cost of £150. A tax on net profit would also yield £15 assuming a £300 credit.
Credit taxation: A yet more lucrative option would be to tax the CDR credit, yielding £30 on a nominal £300 per tonne – Figure 15. The supply-demand imbalance for permanent removals suggest high prices may be sustained for at least a decade as early storage capacity is primarily being booked to industrial clusters and fossil CO2, which is priced as a reduction on the ETS market.

Figure 15. Storage rate and potential tax revenue for two described Lybster and Feeder 10 scenarios.
Worth noting is that a successful demonstration of profitable storage and permanent removals at Lybster would potentially catalyse a race to capture separation bio-CO2 from AD sources. This would drive decentralised farm-scale emissions control, upgrading of biogas to biomethane and displacing fossil methane from local energy networks and the grid where a connection is available.
A boutique demonstration of storage at Lybster also has the advantage of being driven by commercial incentives and timelines, with the possibility of positively disrupting the cluster timelines and NET outcomes, especially for the second scenario.
References
Beiron, J et al (2022). Carbon capture from combined heat and power plants – Impact on the supply and cost of electricity and district heating in cities. International Journal of Greenhouse Gas Control, 129.
BEIS (2024). BEIS: Heat Networks Planning Database (January 2024). Available at: www.data.gov.uk/dataset/8a5139b3-e49b-47bd-abba-d0199b624d8a/beis-heat-networks-planning-database (Accessed May 2024)
Brownsort, P (2018). Negative Emission Technology in Scotland: CCS for Biogenic CO2. SCCS. Available at: www.sccs.org.uk//Negative_Emission_Technology_in_Scotland.pdf
(Accessed May 2024)
CCSL (2024). Carbon Capture Sites. Carbon Capture Scotland Ltd. Available at: www.carboncapture.scot/capture-sites (Accessed May 2024)
CDR.fyi (2024). Trending on Track? 2023 Year in Review – CDR market continues to see explosive growth. Available at: www.cdr.fyi/blog/2023-year-in-review (Accessed Feb 2022)
Dee, S et al (2005). Best practice in structural geology analysis. First Break, 23, 4.
DESNZ (2024). Energy Trends: UK renewables – Renewable electricity capacity and generation for 2023. Available at: www.gov.uk/government/statistics/energy-trends-section-6-renewables (Accessed May 2024)
DUKES (2022). Digest of UK Energy Statistics (DUKES): Renewable Sources of Energy, DUKES Chapter 6: Statistics on Energy from Renewable Sources. Department for Energy Security and Net Zero. Available at: www.gov.uk/government/statistics/renewable-sources-of-energy-chapter-6-digest-of-united-kingdom-energy-statistics-dukes (Accessed May 2024)
EC (2007). Sustainable power generation from fossil fuels: aiming for near-zero emissions from coal after 2020. European Commission Communication, January 2007. Available at: eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/?uri=celex:52006DC0843 (Accessed May 2024)
Eke, P et al (2011). CO2 brine dissolution and injection for storage. SPE Project F&C, 41-53.
ENDS (2024). ENDS Waste & Bioenergy. Available at: www.endswasteandbioenergy.com (Accessed May 2024)
Energyst (2023). Iona Capital invests in biogenic CO2 pioneers Carbon Capture Scotland. Available at: theenergyst.com/iona-capital-invests-in-biogenic-co2-pioneers-carbon-capture-scotland (Accessed May 2023)
GCCSI (2021). Technology Readiness and Costs Of CCS. Report. Available at: www.globalccsinstitute.com/wp-content/uploads/2021/03/Technology-Readiness-and-Costs-for-CCS-2021-1.pdf (Accessed May 2024)
Gibbins, J et al (2024). Evidence Review of Emerging Techniques for Carbon Dioxide Capture using Amine-Based and Hot Potassium Carbonate Technologies under the IED for the UK.
HSE (2024). Agency agreements, memoranda of understanding and concordats, and working arrangements protocols. Health and Safety Executive. Available at: www.hse.gov.uk/agency-agreements-memoranda-of-understanding-concordats/index.htm#pageContainer (Accessed May 2024)
IEAGHG (2024). Techno-Economic Assessment of Small-Scale Carbon Capture for Industrial and Power Systems. Report. Available at: ieaghg.org/publications/techno-economic-assessment-of-small-scale-carbon-capture-for-industrial-and-power-systems/ (Accessed May 2024)
Keenan, H (2023). The Lybster Field: A prospect for CO2 storage in the Inner Moray Firth, Scotland. MSc Thesis, Supervisor Gilfillan, S. School of GeoSciences, University of Edinburgh.
Lehtveer, M & Emanuelsson, A (2021). BECCS and DACCS as Negative Emission Providers in an Intermittent Electricity System: Why Levelized Cost of Carbon May Be a Misleading Measure for Policy Decisions. Frontiers in Climate, 3.
Low, J (2024). Pathways to decarbonising heat and transport in Scotland using hydrogen. PhD thesis, University of Edinburgh.
Monaghan, A et al (2012). New insights from 3D models at analogue CO2 storage sites in Lincolnshire and eastern Scotland, UK. Proceedings of the Yorkshire Geological Society, 59.
MVV (2024). Range €80-€110/tCO2 provided by MVV Environmental for a 700 ktpa capacity EfW in Mannheim, Germany. MVV Environmental pers comm.
NNFCC (2023). The Official Information Portal on Anaerobic Digestion. Available at: www.biogas-info.co.uk/resources/biogas-map/ (Accessed May 2024)
Ofgem (2024a). Renewables Obligation (RO) Annual Report 2022-23 – (Scheme Year 21). Available at: www.ofgem.gov.uk/publications/renewables-obligation-ro-annual-report-2022-23-scheme-year-21 (Accessed May 2024)
Ofgem (2024b). Renewables and CHP Register (2024). Accredited Stations. Available at: renewablesandchp.ofgem.gov.uk/Public/ReportManager.aspx (Accessed May 2024)
Patterson, J & Paisley, R (2016). CO2 EOR policy and regulations in Scotland, SCCS Report.
REPD (2024). Renewable Energy Planning Database (REPD): January 2024. DESNZ. Available at: www.gov.uk/government/publications/ (Accessed May 2024)
Ricardo (2023). Negative Emissions Technologies (NETS): Feasibility Study. Report. Available at: www.gov.scot/publications/negative-emissions-technologies-nets-feasibility-study/ (Accessed March 2024)
SEPA (2022). Scottish Pollutant Release Inventory 2022 Full data. Available at: www.sepa.org.uk/environment/environmental-data/spri/ (Accessed May 2024)
SG (2022). Securing a green recovery on a path to net zero: climate change plan 2018–2032 – update. Available at: www.gov.scot/publications/securing-green-recovery-path-net-zero-update-climate-change-plan-20182032/ (Accessed May 2024)
Smith, M et al (2011). CO2 aquifer storage site evaluation and monitoring. CASSEM Report.
Stolaroff et al (2021).
Statista (2024). Bioenergy. Available at: www.statista.com/outlook/io/energy/renewable-energy/bioenergy/worldwide (Accessed May 2024)
Storegga (2022a). Mitsui and Storegga Conclude Memorandum of Understanding on Commercialization of Direct Air Capture Technology. Press release, March 2022. Available at: storegga.earth/news/2022/press-releases/ (Accessed June 2024)
Storegga (2022b). Project Dreamcatcher – Low Carbon Direct Air Capture. Phase 1 Report. Available at: www.gov.uk/government/publications/direct-air-capture-and-other-greenhouse-gas-removal-technologies-competition (Accessed June 2024)
Su et al. (2023). Thermal integration of waste to energy plants with post-combustion CO2 capture. Available at: www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0016236122028289 (Accessed May 2024)
Tolvik (2024). UK Energy from Waste Statistics – 2022. Available at: www.tolvik.com/published-reports/ (Accessed 4 June 2024)
UK Environment Agency (2021). Post-combustion carbon dioxide capture: emerging techniques. Available at: www.gov.uk/guidance/post-combustion-carbon-dioxide-capture-best-available-techniques-bat. Published: 2 July 2021, Last updated: 27 March 2024 (Accessed May 2024)
WP (2024). The world’s largest carbon-capture plant just switched on. Washington Post, 9 May 2024. Available at: www.washingtonpost.com/climeworks-mammoth-carbon-capture/ (Accessed 17 June 2024)
Watt, I et al (in preparation). Lybster CCS Prospect. Powerpoint summary presentation for Carbon Capture Scotland Limited. Supervisor Gilfillan, S. School of GeoSciences, University of Edinburgh.
Whisky Invest Direct (2024). Malt whisky distilleries in Scotland. Available at: www.whiskyinvestdirect.com/about-whisky/malt-whisky-distilleries-in-scotland
(Accessed: May 2024)
Appendices
Appendix A Background on the CCS Directive
Pioneering work on CCS legislation in the EU was undertaken by the UK with the implementation of the UK Energy Act 2008. The Energy Act established a national regulatory framework for offshore CO2 storage with sufficient flexibility to transpose the anticipated CCS Directive. Directive 2009/31/EC on the geological storage of carbon dioxide was adopted by the EU Council of Ministers in 2009. The CCS Directive was transposed to UK law in 2012 and also incorporated into the Agreement on the European Economic Area. The EEA includes significant storage activity in Norway and Iceland. Despite recent changes in EU membership, the CCS Directive provides a common framework across Europe for offshore CO2 storage.
The CCS Directive applies to onshore and offshore geological storage of CO2 within a country, including exclusive economic zones and continental shelves. Member States that choose to permit storage must carry out an assessment of their regional potential storage capacity. Member States retain the right not to allow storage in their territories. Member States are required to report to the Commission on the implementation of the CCS Directive every four years. The Commission shares the progress with the Parliament and the Council. The 3rd report noted that the CCS Directive had been transposed into the national law of sixteen Member States by 2017. As of the 4th report, released in October 2023, only nine countries, Germany, Estonia, Ireland, Cyprus, Latvia, Lithuania, Austria, Finland, and Slovenia, prohibit the geological storage of carbon dioxide. Germany, 23% of EU fossil CO2 emissions, announced a carbon management strategy in 2024 to support CCS and currently plans to export CO2 for storage, primarily via the Rhine-Delta Corridor. The 4th report concluded that the CCS Directive had been correctly applied from 2019 to 2023 across the EU, acknowledging progress in Europe on the development and exploration of CO2 storage sites, and support for storage projects in most European countries.
DG CLIMA have commissioned DNV to revise the CCS Directive guidance documents to reflect the current understanding of CCS and remove ambiguities identified during the development of the first CCS projects in the EEA. Outcomes of the revision can be expected in 2024. The revised guidance documents aim to support operators and competent authorities in the practical implementation of permitting storage.
Appendix B Analysis of UK licensing
The Energy Act 2016 assigned the role of regulator to the Oil & Gas Authority (OGA) including related infrastructure such as CO2 pipelines. The OGA issued seven CO2 storage appraisal licences between 2012 and 2022. The North Sea Transition Authority (NSTA) issued a further 21 appraisal licences in 2023.
The UK’s Oil & Gas Authority (OGA) has issued 28 storage appraisal licences since 2012[3], of which 27 are active, with most having been issued through the NSTA carbon storge licensing round in 2023. The OGA issued the first CO2 storage licence, CS001, in 2012[4]. The licence permitted BP to drill a single appraisal well in the Bunter aquifer, southern North Sea, to assess storage for White Rose, a post-combustion capture project on coal power at Drax. Prior to this, large CCS projects had been proposed for Scotland at Longannet (Scottish Power, coal, 2008) and Peterhead (BP, H2 and EOR, 2005). Neither progressed to a storage appraisal before funding support was withdrawn.
Licence CS002 was also issued in 2012, to Shell for the Goldeneye oil field and Peterhead project[5]. Both CS001 and CS002 progressed to FEED and were rumoured to be close to positive final investment decisions (FIDs) when funding was withdrawn with the cancellation of the £1bn CCS competition in 2015. These two licenses suggest an appraisal timeframe of around 4 years for these early projects. The publicly available CS001 and CS002 documents do not include a description of the technical requirements or staging of the appraisals.
The OGA extended CS001 in 2018 for the Endurance project and went on to issue CS003-CS007 by the end of 2021, prior to rebranding as the North Sea Transition Authority (NSTA) in March 2022[6]. The new licenses enabled storage appraisals for the Track-1 and Track-2 clusters, namely Endurance (BP), Acorn (Storegga), Hamilton (Eni), and Viking (Harbour Energy), as well as two Bunter prospects (BP). The latter, CS006 and CS007, appear to be build-out capacity for the Track-1 East Coast Cluster. We note that the Track licenses balance appraisals of saline aquifers, Bunter and Acorn, with appraisals of depleted gas fields, Hamilton and Viking. The second tranche of licences document the staging of appraisals, and the additional requirements associated with specific licenses – see Section 3 and Fig 6.2.
Overlooking the years of appraisal for Acorn and Endurance prior to 2021, the four storage appraisals associated with the Track-1 and Track-2 are identical at 4 years. The licence holders must apply for a storage permit or relinquish the area at the end of the appraisal. The less mature Bunter prospects, CS006 and CS007, are licensed for 6 and 8 years respectively. Both include 3D seismic acquisition and appraisal well drilling as additional requirements.
The NSTA became the UK competent authority and storage regulator in 2023. This extended the role of the NSTA to mentoring aspirant storage operators and stewarding offshore storage from the start of appraisal to the end of operational liability with the transfer of the site ownership to the state on closure, subject to meeting the terms of licence.
The seven early licenses prepared the ground for the NSTA to issue 21 licenses in 2023, CS008-CS028. Nominations closed in May 2022. The NSTA launched the licensing round in June 2022. Applications closed September 2022 and licences were offered in May 2023.
The outliers are CS011 (Storegga, Acorn East, 2 years) and CS025 (BP, Bunter Closure 42, 8 years). 25 of the licences are in the North Sea: 18 in the southern North Sea, 3 in the central North Sea, and 4 in the northern North Sea. There are 2 licences in the East Irish Sea.
Appendix C Questions and Answers on Scots Law
C1. How was the UK North Sea divided at devolution for the purpose of renewables?
There are essentially two boundaries between Scotland and England in the North Sea. One determines which courts would be responsible in the event of criminal or civil matters arising out of offshore oil and gas operations – the Civil Jurisdiction (Offshore Activities) Order 1987 and the Criminal Jurisdiction (Offshore Activities) Order 1987.
The other is derived from the arrangements made at the time of devolution to delineate those parts of the territorial sea and the EEZ that would be treated as waters adjacent to Scotland and those which would not for purposes of environmental protection and the regulation of fisheries – namely the Scottish Adjacent Waters Boundaries Order 1999.
The area subject to Scottish jurisdiction is less in the case of the 1999 Order. It is important to note, however, that the 1987 Orders were made under the Oil and Gas (Enterprise) Act 1982 (as well as under the Continental Shelf Act 1964) and confer jurisdiction on the civil and criminal courts respectively in relation to “relevant acts”, which are defined (now by s11(2) of the Petroleum Act 1998) as “activities connected with the exploration of, or the exploitation of the natural resources of…the [sea]bed…or the subsoil beneath it”. Note that section 11(3) is so worded as to make it clear that it applies to installations involved in CCS.
By contrast, the equivalent Orders dealing with civil and criminal jurisdiction in relation to offshore renewable installations which were passed in 2009 utilise the same boundaries as the 1999 Order insofar as they seek to reflect the division of powers in relation to such installations as between Westminster and the Scottish Ministers (see the Civil Jurisdiction (Application to Offshore Renewable Energy Installations etc) Order 2009, and the Criminal Jurisdiction (Application to Offshore Renewable Energy Installations etc) Order 2009).
One could argue that this arrangement is not very tidy, but there does not appear to be any active dispute about it. Were there ever to be Scottish independence, however, and the matter of the location of what would now become the international maritime boundary required to be resolved, existing boundaries drawn for internal administrative and jurisdictional purposes would not be determinative and could, indeed, provide arguments respectively for those seeking more northerly or southerly solutions—albeit interestingly that those specifically relating to offshore oil and gas installations would appear to suggest a more southerly boundary. It would essentially be a matter to be agreed between Scotland and the rest of the UK as part of an overall settlement involving the division of assets and liabilities.
C2. Is CO2 storage in Scottish territorial waters already in the Scottish competence under the Energy Act 2008? Does Scotland require additional legislation for storage, such as transposing or adopting the CCS Directive to Scots law?
Scottish Ministers are clearly established as the licensing authority in relation to CO2 storage for the territorial sea adjacent to Scotland by s18 of the Energy Act 2008. The Storage of Carbon Dioxide (Licensing etc.) Regulations 2010, however, do not apply to this area, insofar as they define a “licence” as a licence granted by the authority (now NSTA/OGA) in relation to “a controlled place which is not in, under or over the territorial sea adjacent to Scotland” (Reg. 1(3)). Further legislation would therefore be required were Scottish Ministers minded to operate as the licensing authority for this area, albeit that there would be good reasons simply to mirror the existing regulations.
C3. What are the Scottish Ministers responsible for within the 12 nm limit? Sea surface to seabed? All fish, water, and benthic quality from land outfalls into sea?
Given the way in which powers have been allocated between UK and Scottish bodies, it is not possible to give a once and for all answer to this question. In terms of international law, the UK as the coastal state, enjoys sovereignty in the territorial sea which includes the seabed, the subsurface and the water column (subject only to, for example, rights of innocent passage). How the UK decides to exercise that sovereignty, however, is a matter for it and this becomes complex in the context of devolution. Thus, while Scottish Ministers undoubtedly have responsibility for, say, environmental issues in the territorial sea adjacent to Scotland, this needs to be read in conjunction with the environmental responsibilities in the hands of OPRED in the context of oil and gas operations in the same space.
C4. Who has responsibility and rights for the sub-seabed, mineral oil and gas rights?
Oil and gas under the territorial sea adjacent to Scotland as with all such resources wheresoever located in the UK, onshore or offshore, are vested in the Crown. Whereas Scottish Ministers did receive licensing powers for oil and gas in the post-referendum settlement in the context of the Scotland Act 2016, this was explicitly only in relation to the “onshore area”, defined as lying “within the baselines” of the territorial sea (s47). Thus, licensing in relation to all offshore oil and gas, within the territorial sea and under the continental shelf, is a matter for the NSTA/OGA.
C5. Does Scotland need its own regulator and competent authority? Or can those services be purchased from the UK government?
Purchasing the services of the NSTA/OGA would still require there to be appropriate regulations covering the territorial sea adjacent to Scotland and may raise political considerations. For example, if it is seen as expedient to make use of the UK regulator for this function, the question would arise as to where else such an approach might be appropriate – industry generally would like to deal with fewer regulators and to have to adapt to fewer jurisdictional variations. This could, of course, be countered by pointing to the very specific nature of the issue at hand where the long experience of the NSTA/OGA and its predecessors is an important consideration. Another way of looking at this, however, would be to consider whether an agreement could be reached between, say, Marine Scotland and the NSTA/OGA to deal with carbon licensing in territorial waters adjacent to Scotland (again on the basis that appropriate regulations are in place for the territorial sea adjacent to Scotland). There is a precedent for such an approach, effected by Memorandum of Understanding between the HSE and OPRED[7] to form the Offshore Safety Directive Regulator (now OMAR) when that directive required a competent authority to deal with health and safety, and environmental risks under one roof. That, of course, involved two regulators at UK level, but there should be no objection to a similar arrangement between a UK and a Scottish regulator given the commonality of purpose and the desirability of a seamless approach.
C6. Is the natural fill of residual oil and gas in depleted gas fields owned by Scottish Ministers or retained by the Crown Estate?
Residual oil and gas remain vested in the Crown.
C7. Who holds liability for oil and gas field operations, for decommissioning, and for permanent abandonment within the 12 nm limit?
First and foremost, in the context of operations, attention will be focused on the licensee. In most cases, however, liability will be joint and several with co-venturers under a joint operating agreement. In relation to decommissioning, it is a matter of anyone who holds a section 29 notice under the Petroleum Act 1998 – again usually co-venturers, but the list is lengthened to minimise the risk that the state is left to tidy up if duty holders become insolvent. Things get more complicated in relation to any infrastructure left in place under an agreed derogation. There is no specific legislation or regulation on this matter; rather it is dealt with in the context of guidance notes issued from time to time by OPRED. Originally, the wording was as follows: “The persons who own an installation or pipeline at the time of its decommissioning will remain the owner of any residues”. More recently, it has been adapted to: “The persons/parties who own an installation or pipeline, or are a section 29 [notice] holder, at the time of its decommissioning will remain the owners of any residues and remains after decommissioning.” This is problematical on a couple of levels. For a start, either someone is the owner, or they are not. If they are merely a section 29 notice holder, they cannot without further ado suddenly become the owner. More fundamentally, there is an argument that the use of Crown Leases in the EEZ in relation to renewables and CCS constitutes an exercise of property rights in the seabed which raises the question of whether any infrastructure left in place is actually a fixture (in both Scots and English law) which belongs to the owner of the land (or seabed) to which it is attached. This has never been tested but is certainly arguable. By contrast, this would appear to be a much easier proposition to establish within the territorial sea where the Crown Estate has habitually claimed property rights and the courts have readily confirmed them. Thus, whatever is stated in the guidance notes (and, of course, essentially accepted by duty holders in the context of a decommissioning programme), property law may say something different.
C8. Does Scotland own the pore space for the Lybster field and Forth Basin?
If I am right in understanding that the Lybster field lies wholly within the 12 nm limit, then whereas the hydrocarbons in that field are vested in the Crown and those rights are exercised by the NSTA, the pore space is the property of the Crown, which property rights would be exercisable by the CES. Insofar as the Forth Basin aquifer is similarly located within the 12 nm limit, the pore space there would also be owned by the Crown and the property rights would be exercisable by CES. Note that this property law analysis also implies that CO2 injected into depleted reservoirs beneath the territorial sea would be owned by the Crown on the basis of the principle of annexation. Roddy Paisley and John Paterson wrote a report on CO2 in the context of EOR years ago in which the property dimension was more fully explored.
C9. Is Lybster administered under onshore or offshore regulation? UK or Scots law?
Insofar as the exploration for and production of hydrocarbons is involved, then the petroleum licensing at the time would have been a matter for the Secretary of State. Even now, insofar as the reservoir lies beyond the baselines for the territorial sea and thus within the territorial sea, the licensing in relation to such a reservoir would be a matter for NSTA/OGA. The siting and operation of the drilling rig onshore would then and now be a matter for the local planning authority. Thus, both UK law and Scots law are engaged as appropriate.
C10. Now that the Beatrice field is no longer in production, does Scotland own the field, which is partly in territorial waters and partly beyond the 12 nm limit?
This is a most interesting problem. The residual hydrocarbons in the field remain vested in the Crown. The pore space within 12 nm is owned by the Crown. The ownership of pore space beyond 12 nm is not clear, but from a practical perspective only the Crown has sovereign rights to act in respect of that pore space. The licensing authority within 12 nm is Scottish Ministers and beyond the NSTA/OGA. Ways forward? Some form of arrangement modelled on those for hydrocarbon reservoirs that cross boundaries. This returns us to the answer above where an MoU between Marine Scotland and NSTA/OGA was suggested.
C11. Are consents expected to be closely similar, or identical, to permissions and standards already enacted for offshore oil and gas licensing, appraisal, development, and production? Lybster must have already passed regulatory agencies inspections for oil production, water cut disposal, and gas flaring – will CO2 injection for storage be different or require a new inspection?
Given that different activities under different licensing regimes are involved, new consents would be required. It may well be, however, that insofar as existing data could be relied upon, the process would be faster. This would really be a question for those with a better insight into the technical processes.
Appendix D Timeframe analysis of European CO2 storage
Analysis of CO2 storage projects across Europe at various stages of development indicates that both the European Union’s 2030 CO2 storage target (50 Mtpa) and United Kingdom’s 2030 target (20-30 Mtpa) may be achieved if storage development deadlines are met and expected storage rates are slightly exceeded. The addition of large storage projects in Norway and Iceland will very likely be necessary to meet EU demand and provide a contingency against capacity shortfalls. Planned storage capacities for Norway, Denmark, and Iceland vastly exceed domestic emissions, indicating an ambition to establish large CO2 import markets.
On average, megaton-scale European projects store 2-4 Mtpa. At the national level, results range from Bulgaria (P10 optimistic, 0.8 Mtpa) and Greece (P50 expected, 1 Mtpa), to Iceland (P10 optimistic, 2 Mtpa) and Norway (P50 expected, 15 Mtpa). The data indicates that the European Economic Area (EEA) and United Kingdom are on track to deliver regional storage rates of 18-106 Mtpa by 2030, with an expected P50 forecast of 58 Mtpa, i.e. slightly less than the 70-80 Mtpa aggregated net zero target for the EU and UK. Regionally significant storage in the North Sea remains a mainstay for the Netherlands (P50 4.5 Mtpa), the UK (P50 22.5 Mtpa), and Denmark (P50 12.2 Mtpa, of which 3 Mtpa is offshore). The emergence of onshore storage ambitions for Denmark (4-14 Mtpa) is an interesting development. It is notable that the UK, Norway, and Denmark contribute 44% of total storage. Only six EU27 countries are planning megatonne-scale projects. Portugal, Spain, Germany, and Poland, 45% of EU CO2 emissions, have no large projects planned – Table D.1.
Table D.1. Storage rates for the 32 projects on track to potentially deliver storage by 2030.
|
NORWAY, EEA |
Start |
SRMS, Mtpa: |
P90 |
P50 |
P10 |
Storage |
Operator |
Type |
2040s, Mtpa |
|
Sleipner |
1996 |
On Injection |
0 |
0.8 |
1 |
Utsira Fmn |
Equinor |
SAQ |
0 |
|
Snøhvit |
2008 |
On Injection |
0.2 |
0.5 |
0.8 |
Stø Fmn |
Equinor |
SAQ |
0 |
|
Northern Lights |
2025 |
FID, PCI, CEF |
1.2 |
3.6 |
5 |
Johansen Fmn |
Equinor |
SAQ |
5 |
|
Smeaheia |
2028 |
EXP, EXL002 |
0 |
2.5 |
5 |
Sognefjord Fmn |
Equinor |
SAQ |
20 |
|
Havstjerne |
2029 |
EXP, EXL006 |
0 |
3 |
5 |
Sandnes, Bryne Fmns |
Wintershall DEA |
SAQ |
10 |
|
Trudvang |
2029 |
EXP, EXL007 |
0 |
0.8 |
1.5 |
Utsira Fmn |
Sval Energi |
SAQ |
10 |
|
Barents Blue |
2030 |
EXP, EXL003 |
0 |
1 |
2 |
Stø Fmn |
PUN |
SAQ |
9 |
|
Luna |
2030 |
EXP, EXL004 |
0 |
2.5 |
5 |
Johansen Fmn |
Wintershall DEA |
SAQ |
5 |
|
Poseidon |
2030 |
EXP, EXL005 |
0 |
0 |
2.5 |
Rødby Formation |
Aker BP |
SAQ |
5 |
|
UNITED KINGDOM |
Start |
SRMS, Mtpa: |
P90 |
P50 |
P10 |
Storage |
Operator |
Type |
2040s, Mtpa |
|
NEP, Endurance |
2027 |
FIP, Track 1 |
4 |
7 |
10 |
Bunter Fmn |
BP |
SAQ |
23 |
|
HyNet |
2027 |
FIP, Track 1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
Hamilton Fields |
Eni |
DGF |
10 |
|
Acorn |
2027 |
FIP, Track 2 |
0.5 |
1 |
3 |
Captain, Wick Fmn |
Shell |
SAQ |
10 |
|
Viking |
2028 |
FIP, Track 2 |
3 |
5 |
8 |
Victor, Viking A Fields |
Harbour Energy |
DGF |
15 |
|
BTNZ |
2030 |
pre-FEED |
0 |
2 |
4 |
Hewett Field |
Eni |
DGF |
10 |
|
Morecambe |
2030 |
pre-FEED |
0 |
3 |
5 |
Morecambe Fields |
Spirit Energy |
DGF |
20 |
|
Poseidon |
2030 |
pre-FEED |
0 |
1.5 |
3 |
Leman Field |
Perenco |
DGF |
40 |
|
Orion |
2031 |
pre-FEED |
0 |
0 |
1 |
Amethyst, W Sole Fields |
Perenco |
DGF |
6 |
|
DENMARK, EU |
Start |
SRMS, Mtpa: |
P90 |
P50 |
P10 |
Storage |
Operator |
Type |
2040s, Mtpa |
|
Greensand |
2026 |
FIP |
0.5 |
1.5 |
3 |
Nini Fields |
INEOS Energy |
DOF |
8 |
|
CO2RYLUS |
2026 |
FIP |
0.1 |
0.2 |
0.5 |
Stenlille, Gassum Fmn |
GSD |
SAQ |
0.5 |
|
Bifrost |
2029 |
FEED, PCI |
0 |
1.5 |
3 |
Harald Fields |
TotalEnergies |
DGF |
10 |
|
Norne Fyrkat |
2027 |
pre-FEED, PCI |
2 |
4 |
6 |
Gassum, Gassum Fmn |
Fidelis, ROSS |
SAQ |
10 |
|
Norne Trelleborg |
2027 |
pre-FEED, PCI |
2 |
4 |
6 |
Havnsø, Gassum Fmn |
Fidelis, ROSS |
SAQ |
10 |
|
Ruby |
2028 |
EXP |
0 |
1 |
2 |
Rødby, Bunter Fmn |
BlueNord |
SAQ |
10 |
|
NETHERLANDS, EU |
Start |
SRMS, Mtpa: |
P90 |
P50 |
P10 |
Storage |
Operator |
Type |
2040s, Mtpa |
|
Porthos |
2026 |
FID, PCI, CEF |
1 |
2 |
2.5 |
P18-2,4,6 Fields |
TAQA |
DGF |
2.5 |
|
Aramis |
2028 |
FEED, PCI, CEF |
1 |
2.5 |
5 |
L10, L04-A, K14-FA |
Neptune |
DGF |
22 |
|
ITALY, EU |
Start |
SRMS, Mtpa: |
P90 |
P50 |
P10 |
Storage |
Operator |
Type |
2040s, Mtpa |
|
Callisto, Ravenna |
2027 |
FEED, PCI |
0 |
2 |
4 |
Porto Corsini Field |
Eni |
DGF |
16 |
|
ICELAND, EEA |
Start |
SRMS, Mtpa: |
P90 |
P50 |
P10 |
Storage |
Operator |
Type |
2040s, Mtpa |
|
Coda Terminal |
2026 |
FIP, IF |
0.5 |
1 |
2 |
Kapelluhraun lava field |
Carbfix |
BAS |
3 |
|
GREECE, EU |
Start |
SRMS, Mtpa: |
P90 |
P50 |
P10 |
Storage |
Operator |
Type |
2040s, Mtpa |
|
Prinos |
2026 |
FEED, PCI, IF |
0 |
1 |
2 |
Prinos, Epsilon Fields |
Energean |
DOF |
3 |
|
CROATIA, EU |
Start |
SRMS, Mtpa: |
P90 |
P50 |
P10 |
Storage |
Operator |
Type |
2040s, Mtpa |
|
GT CCS |
2031 |
pre-FEED, PCI |
0 |
0 |
0.3 |
Bockovac |
Nexe |
SAQ |
0.7 |
|
Ivanić Grad |
2026 |
Pre-FEED |
0 |
0.1 |
0.2 |
Ivanić Grad Field |
MOL Group |
EOR |
0 |
|
FRANCE, EU |
Start |
SRMS, Mtpa: |
P90 |
P50 |
P10 |
Storage |
Operator |
Type |
2040s, Mtpa |
|
Pycasso |
2030 |
Pre-FEED, PCI |
0 |
0 |
1 |
Lacq Gas Field |
Teréga |
DGF |
5 |
|
BULGARIA, EU |
Start |
SRMS, Mtpa: |
P90 |
P50 |
P10 |
Storage |
Operator |
Type |
2040s, Mtpa |
|
ANRAV |
2028 |
Pre-FEED, IF |
0 |
0 |
0.8 |
Galata Field |
Petroceltic |
DGF |
1.3 |
Appendix E UK Licensing timeframe
Table E.1. UK licence timing from CS001 to CS028 (2012-2023).
|
First proposed project | |||||||||||||||||||||||
|
2002 |
2003 |
2004 |
2005 |
2006 | |||||||||||||||||||
|
DTI: Energy White Paper 2003 |
| ||||||||||||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
| |||||||||||||||||||
|
BP “Beyond Petroleum” |
|
| |||||||||||||||||||||
|
Peterhead gas, Miller EOR |
|
| |||||||||||||||||||||
|
UK Competitions | |||||||||||||||||||||||
|
2008 |
2009 |
2010 |
2011 |
2012 |
2013 |
2014 |
2015 |
2016 |
2017 | ||||||||||||||
|
DECC: Energy Act 2008 |
|
CCS Directive 2009 transposed |
|
BEIS: Clean Growth Strategy | |||||||||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
OGA: Offshore Carbon Storage Licensing, Storage of Carbon Dioxide Licensing Regulations | |||||||||||||||||||
|
£1bn Competition #1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| ||||||||||||||||
|
Longannet coal |
£1bn Competition #2 |
|
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
|
[Drax, Statoil] BP, CS001 |
White Rose, Bunter 42/25 & 43/21 | |||||||||||||||||||||
|
|
|
[SSE] Shell, CS002 |
Peterhead, Goldeneye: ERA – CH – AS |
| |||||||||||||||||||
|
First six licences | |||||||||||||||||||||||
|
2018 |
2019 |
2020 |
2021 |
2022 |
2023 |
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 | |||||||||||
|
|
2050 Net Zero target 2019 |
|
DESNZ: Energy Act 2023, CCUS Market Creation 2023 |
|
|
| |||||||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
NSTA: Offshore Carbon Storage Regulator & Competent Authority | ||||||||||||||||||
|
Cluster Sequencing Process |
Track 1 |
|
Track 2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |||||||||||||
|
CS001* NEP, Endurance: CH |
Endurance (T1): ERA – CH – AS- PA |
CX |
ENDURANCE OPERATIONAL | ||||||||||||||||||||
|
CS003* |
Acorn: CH |
Acorn (T2) South: ERA – CH – AS – DF – PA |
Central: CH – – PA |
ACORN SOUTH OP |
CENTRAL OP | ||||||||||||||||||
|
|
Eni, CS004 |
HyNet NW: Hamilton (T1): ERA – – DF – PA |
CX |
HAMILTON OPERATIONAL | |||||||||||||||||||
|
|
|
[BP] Harbour, CS005 |
Viking (T2): ERA – CH – AS – DF – PA |
CX |
VICTOR OPERATIONAL | ||||||||||||||||||
|
[TotalEnergies, Equinor] BP, CS006 |
Bunter Closures 39 & 40: ERA – Seismic AQ – Well – CH – AS – DF – PA |
CX |
39 & 40 OP | ||||||||||||||||||||
|
[TotalEnergies, Equinor] BP, CS007 |
Bunter Closures 36 & 37: ERA – Well – Seismic AQ – Well – CH – AS – DF – PA |
CX | |||||||||||||||||||||
NSTA Carbon Storage Licensing Round #1
|
|
|
|
|
2023 |
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 | |
|
|
|
|
|
DESNZ: Energy Act 2023, CCUS Market Creation 2023 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
NSTA: Offshore Carbon Storage Regulator & Competent Authority | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
| |||||||||
|
|
|
Eni, CS008 |
BTNZ, Hewett: ERA – Seismic RP & AQ – Well – CH – AS – DF – PA |
CX |
HEWETT OP | |||||||
|
[Wintershall Dea, CCL] Perenco, CS009 |
Poseidon, Leman: ERA – Seismic RP – Injectivity – Wells VSP – – PA |
CX |
LEMAN OP | |||||||||
|
|
[Centrica] Spirit, CS010 |
Morecambe: ERA – Seismic AQ – – Injectivity – Firm TR & TS – – PA |
CX |
MOR’E OP | ||||||||
|
|
[Harbour, Shell] Storegga, CS011 |
Acorn East: ERA – – PA |
CX |
ACORN EAST OPERATIONAL | ||||||||
|
|
[Harbour, Shell] Storegga, CS012 |
East Mey Sub Areas 1 & 2: ERA – CH – AS – DF – Sub Area 1 PA |
SA2 PA |
CX | ||||||||
|
|
|
EnQuest, CS013 |
Magnus: ERA – CH – Assess – Define – Permit Application |
CX |
MAGNUS OP | |||||||
|
|
|
EnQuest, CS014 |
Thistle: ERA – CH – Assess – Define – Permit Application |
CX |
THISTLE OP | |||||||
|
|
|
EnQuest, CS015 |
Tern: ERA – CH – Assess – Define – Permit Application |
CX |
TERN OP | |||||||
|
|
|
EnQuest, CS016 |
Eider: ERA – CH – Assess – Define – Permit Application |
CX |
EIDER OP | |||||||
|
|
[SEEL, CCL] Perenco, CS017 |
Orion, Amethyst East: ERA – Seismic RP & AQ – Firm TR & TS – CH – AS – DF – PA |
CX | |||||||||
|
|
[SEEL, CCL] Perenco, CS018 |
Orion, West Sole: ERA – Seismic RP & AQ – Firm TR & TS – Injectivity – CH – – PA |
CX | |||||||||
|
|
|
[W’Dea] Synergia, CS019 |
Camelot, Bunter Closure 18: ERA – Seismic RP & AQ – Well – – PA |
CX |
CAMELOT OP | |||||||
|
|
|
Neptune, CS020 |
Proteus, Bunter Closure 05: ERA – Seismic RP – Well – CH – PA |
CX |
PROTEUS OP | |||||||
|
|
[Exxon] Neptune, CS021 |
Bunter Closure 13: ERA – Seismic AQ & RP – Well – Firm TR & TS – CH – – PA |
CX | |||||||||
|
|
|
Neptune, CS022 |
Caister, Bunter Closure: ERA – Seismic AQ & RP – Well – Firm TR & TS – CH – – PA |
CX | ||||||||
|
|
|
[BP] Harbour, CS023 |
Vulcan: ERA – Seismic RP – Firm Geomech & Fault & Core – CH – AS – DF – PA |
CX | ||||||||
|
|
|
[BP] Harbour, CS024 |
Audrey: ERA – Seismic RP – Firm Geomech & Fault & Core – CH – AS – DF – PA |
CX | ||||||||
|
|
|
[Equinor] BP, CS025 |
Bunter Closure 42: ERA – Seismic RP & AQ -Well – Characterise – Assess – Define – Permit Application | |||||||||
|
|
|
[Exxon] Shell, CS026 |
Sean: ERA – Seismic RP – Well – Characterise – Assess – Define – PA |
CX | ||||||||
|
|
|
[Exxon] Shell, CS027 |
Indefatigable: ERA – Seismic RP – Well – Characterise – Assess – Define – PA |
CX | ||||||||
|
|
|
[Exxon] Shell, CS028 |
Bunter Area 3S & N:ERA – Seismic RP & AQ -Well S (N) – CH S (N) – AS – – PA |
CX | ||||||||
Appendix F AOI inventory of 3D seismic and wells
AOI 1 – Lybster field area
Q11: 3D RE07112025 2007
(Proprietary, IGas PLC)
- 11/25-2 1986 dry hole 3713 m
- 11/25-1 1984 dry hole 3307 m
- 11/24b-4 2019 dry hole 963 m
- 11/24-3z,y,x,w,v, producing well
- 11/24a-2z 2004 dry hole 2098 m
- 11/24-1 1996 oil well 1884 m
AOI 1 – Beatrice area
Q11: 3D TB973D0001 1997
Q11: 3D BN803F0001 1985
(Proprietary, Repsol Sinopec)
- 11/30a-B9Z 1984 oil well 2398 m
- 11/30-7 1978 oil show 2192 m
- 11/30a-10 1990 dry hole 3461 m
- 11/30-5 1977 oil well 2372 m
- 11/30a-A26Z 1988 producer 2083 m
- 11/30-2 1976 oil well 2220 m
- 11/30a-8 1982 oil well 2495 m
- 11/30z-C2 1985 oil well 2266 m
- 11/30-4 1981 dry hole 2391 m
AOI 1 – Jacky area
- 12/21-5 1987 dry hole 2722 m
- 12/21-2 1983 oil show 3459 m
- 12/21c-6 2007 oil well 2233 m
AOI 1 – Wick area
Q12: 3D GE863F0001 1986
(Speculative, Schlumberger)
- 12/16-1 1988 dry hole 3659 m
- 12/16-2 1993 dry hole 1554 m
AOI 1, South of GE86
- 12/21-3 1984 oil show 4174 m
- 2D: 12-81-145 NW-SE
- 2D: BN/12-81-126 SW-NE
- 12/21-1 1969 dry hole 1590 m
- 2D: 12-81-144 NW-SE
- 2D: 12-86-10 SW-NE
- 12/22-3 1986 dry hole 2190 m
- 2D: A12-85-03 NWW-SEE
- 2D: A12-85-10 NW-SE
AOI 1 S of Lybster, W of Beatrice
- 11/29-1 2008 dry hole 2483 m
- 2D: 302A NW-SE
- 2D: 105A SW-NE
AOI 2 – Forth Basin area
Q25: 2D CN872D1010 1987
(Proprietary, ConocoPhillips)
- 25/26-1 1990 dry hole 2040 m
AOI 3 – Fraserburgh area
Q18: 3D PGS18002MOF 2019, Release 2029
(Speculative, PGS Exploration Ltd)
- 18/05a-1 1982 dry hole 1984
- 2D: CNS-83-125 NW-SE
- 2D: A18,19-82-25A W-E
- 18/05-2 2007 dry hole 1763 m
- 2D: A18,19-82-25 W-E
- 2D: A18,19-82-20 N-S
- Q19: 3D YC06A01902 2007
- (Proprietary, CENTURY Exploration Ltd)
- 19/01-1 1992 dry hole 3425 m
- 2D: A18,19-82-31 E-W
- 2D: A18,19-82-28A N-S
AOI 4 – Solway Firth area
Q112: 3D ES943F0001 1994
(Proprietary, ExxonMobil)
- 112/15-1 1996 dry hole 2715 m
- 2D WG932D0001 Line 151 NW-SE 1993
- 2D WG932D0001 Line 149 SW-NE 1993
- 111/15-1 1995 dry hole 1981 m
- 2D: BG942-13 SW-NE
- 2D: BG96-112-19 NW-SE
Lybster is Old Norse for “slope farmstead”. The field was named after the local village, an important herring port in the 19th Century. Premier Oil drilled the discovery well, 11/24-1, in 1996. This was one of a series of exploration successes in the 1980s and 1990s including the Fife and Angus fields, Central North Sea. The vertical discovery well tested up to 2,000 bopd of 36°API oil and was suspended. Premier was also party to the offshore extension of Wytch Farm in 1994. This made the Dorset oil field the largest onshore asset in Western Europe. The development required a five km extended reach well, the first of its kind in the UK.
Lybster was acquired by Caithness Petroleum in 2008 and, like Wytch Farm, developed from land with a 5 km extended reach well, 11/24-3z – Figure F.1. Lybster and Wytch Farm are the only onshore-offshore extended reach well developments in the UK. The Lybster structure is crossed by a northeast-southwest trending fault. The appraisal well and a short side-track tested the western half of the field which proved uncommercial. The well was re-entered in 2010 and side-tracked across the fault to twin the discovery well.
The assessment of oil fields, like storage prospects, require high quality subsurface data, with 3D seismic and well data being commonly cited as key datasets for the suitability and capacity assessment of a site. The Lybster field, in addition to its near-shore location, has both.
The well plan and production strategy for the oil field were based on a 3D reservoir model built from the RE07 seismic survey. Multiple interpretations are possible depending on the wells chosen for depth conversion of the seismic. For example, compare Figure F1 with Figure F2. While the models are similar, depths differ for the field area by as much as 60 metres.

Figure F.1. A ‘top surface’ model for the RE07 3D survey by an oil company (Corallian Resources, 2018).
In the model below, the inferred oil-water contact (white line, dashed) differs from the field outline (red line). This suggests the depth conversion of the Keenan model differs from the oil company interpretation. The Keenan depth conversion of seismic two-way-time is based on a single well log and challenging, as noted by Keenan (2023). The depth uncertainty was not estimated but is likely to be of the order of tens of meters which would impact on an accurate geometric assessment of capacity and precise location of the spill point to the north.

Figure F.2. A ‘top surface’ reservoir model for the RE07 3D seismic survey area by Keenan (2023).
Geological setting: The onshore Lybster area is unconformably overlain by Middle Devonian flagstones. These extremely hard, thinly interbedded siltstones and sandstones form a top to the more prospective and younger Jurassic formations below. The flagstones caused the 11/24-3 well drillers significant challenges in 2008, slowing the early hole progress, as documented in the well completion report.
The Devonian flagstones are underlain by Cretaceous carbonates and calcareous mudstones, organic rich Jurassic mudstones, coals and siltstones, Triassic sandstones and Permian sandstones, mudstones, and minor salts. Late Jurassic rifting in the North Sea resulted in large normal faults and relatively deep marine basins. At the time of this tectonic activity the Great Glen Fault and Helmsdale Fault were active as normal faults. The field is a four-way dip closed structural trap that formed at a flexure point in response to tectonic inversion of the Inner Moray Firth area. A fault separates the field into an unproductive western compartment and a proven oil-bearing eastern compartment.
The main reservoir, the Beatrice Formation, is 10-20 m thick and composed of a shallow marine sandstone sequence that lies between the Brora Coal Formation and the Heather Formation, which is of Middle Jurassic age. The upward-coarsening sandstones of the Beatrice Formation have been interpreted as marine barrier-bar and offshore-bar environments. The ‘B’ Sand is interpreted as distributary channel environment.
Lybster was in production from June 2012-December 2014, with a five month pause from July-November 2013. Production averaged 184 bopd for the first 13 months, and 64 bopd for the last 13 months. Oil was transported by road tanker to Immingham for sale. An average of 0.989 mmscfpd of associated gas was flared. The field was sold to IGas in 2013. A rapidly changing production profile in Q2 2013 saw the gas cut double and water cut increase more than ten-fold from an average daily 57 m3 to over 690 m3. This led to the July 2013 well intervention. Oil production resumed in December 2013 with a declining profile from 142 bopd in January to 25 bopd in September 2014. Associated gas dropped to an average of 0.883 mmscfpd. The daily water cut doubled, increasing to 1,244 m3 in May 2014.
Field: Lybster oil field
Operator: IGas, 2013 – present
Location: Inner Moray Firth, North Sea
Category: Small, 250k barrels OOIP
Discovery: 11/24-1
Water Depth: 39 m
Discovered: Premier Oil, Repsol
Discovery: 20 Sep – 22 Oct 1996
Reservoir: Beatrice formation
Trap 4-way dip closure, 1-2°
Res Lithology Sandstones, thin shales
Reservoir Top 1,433 m / 4,700 feet
OOIP GIIP 250 kbbl, 2000 mmscf
OWC, FWL 1493 m / 4,898 feet
Quadrant/ block: 11/24
Area: 6.11 km2
Discovery: 1 exploration well
Appraisal: 1 ERW + 2 side-track
First Production: 11/24-3z, Aug 2011
Liquids: oil + flare + water
Reservoir: Mesozoic sandstones
Primary: A and B Sands
Figure G.1. Discovery well 11/24-1 summary
Poro-Perm: 15%, 200 mD
Reserves: proven – probable – possible
Oil & Condensate: 147-62-48 kbbl
Sales Gas: 734-310-243 mmscf
Oil equivalent: 274-115-90 kboe
Produced volumes
Oil (sold): 97,992 bbl
Gas (flared): 108,582 boe
Water (treated): 79,940 bbl
CO2 storage
Seal, primary: Uppat Shale, 23 m thick
Seal complex: KCF Shale, 1065 m thick
Capacity (min) – produced volume: 95 kt
Capacity (low) – structural volume: 0.35 Mt
Capacity (mid) – structural volume: 2.1 Mt
Capacity (high) – structural volume: 9.4 M

Figure G.2. Well 11/24-1 log for reservoir section and overlying seal.
Appendix I Lybster CO2 Storage Assessment
A series of interpretation techniques have been applied to establish the storage capacity and storage suitability of Lybster. The North Sea Transition Authority (NSTA) and British Geological Survey (BGS) are the primary sources for the seismic and well data that inform the analysis.
The study area is defined by the boundary of RE07112025, a 3D seismic survey acquired in 2007 across quadrant-blocks 11/24 and 11/25, encompassing an area of 306 km2 – Fig 4.1. 3D seismic is the most effective data for accurately characterising subsurface structures and reservoir connectivity (Dee, et al., 2005). The survey defines the Lybster study area as it represents the limit of the subsurface that can be geologically mapped with confidence. Site characterisation also relies on existing well data from the field and surrounding area. These provide depth-conversion calibration points for 3D models based on the seismic. Well data are provided by the North Sea Transition Authority (NSTA) and British Geological Survey (BGS) through their open access data resources.
Table I.1: Summary of wells in area and available data.
G, S, D stands for gamma, sonic, density; CS for check shot.
|
Well ID |
Type |
Depth, m |
Bottom hole Fm |
Composite |
G, S, D |
Core |
CS |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
11/24-1 |
Vertical |
1920 |
Lossiemouth Fm |
Yes |
Yes |
Yes |
No |
|
11/24a-2 |
Vertical |
2111 |
Lossiemouth Fm |
Yes |
Yes |
Yes |
Yes |
|
11/24a-2z |
Deviated |
2190 |
Lossiemouth Fm |
Yes |
Yes |
No |
No |
|
11/24b-4 |
Vertical |
1000 |
Brora Coal |
Yes |
Yes |
No |
No |
|
11/25-1 |
Vertical |
3347 |
Old Red Sstn (Devonian) |
Yes |
Yes |
Yes |
No |
|
11/25-2 |
Vertical |
3749 |
Old Red Sstn (Devonian) |
Yes |
Yes |
Yes |
No |
|
11/29-1 |
Vertical |
2626 |
Top Lady’s Walk Shale (L Jurassic) |
Yes |
Yes |
No |
N/A |
|
11/30-7 |
Vertical |
2250 |
Lossiemouth Fm (Top Triassic) |
Yes |
Yes |
Yes |
N/A |
|
12/16-2 |
Deviated |
1583 |
Brora Coal |
Yes |
Yes |
No |
N/A |
|
12/21-3 |
Deviated |
4236 |
Old Red Sstn (Devonian) |
Yes |
Yes |
Yes |
N/A |
|
12/21-5 |
Deviated |
2760 |
Stotfield Chert |
Yes |
Yes |
No |
N/A |
|
12/26-2 |
Deviated |
1706 |
Base Kimmeridge Clay (U Jurassic) |
Yes |
Yes |
Yes |
N/A |
|
12/26-3 |
Deviated |
3156 |
Old Red Sstn (Devonian) |
Yes |
Yes |
No |
N/A |
Five exploration wells are located within the study area, including the Lybster discovery well, 11/24-1. A further seven wells were selected from the surrounding region, based on location and data quality, to establish the stratigraphic and structural relationship between the field and its surrounding geology. Table I.1 documents the studied wells. Each of the wells penetrate beyond the mid Jurassic strata that contains the oil field reservoir. However, few wells extend beyond the Upper Triassic, setting the stratigraphic floor for the evaluation above the Permian basement.
Premier Oil drilled the ‘wildcat’ discovery well, 11/24-1, in 1996. Production tests flowed 415-1850 barrels of oil per day from the Jurassic Beatrice Sandstones. The field was further developed in 2008 when Caithness Petroleum drilled an extended reach well, L11/24-3 and side-track, L11/24-3Z from onshore.
Both the well and side-track showed minimal oil. Caithness Petroleum re-entered L11/24-3 and drilled a second side-track, L11/24-3y, to intersect 11/24-1, the discovery well – Fig 3.2. The new side-track successfully proved hydrocarbon reserves, and in 2011 Caithness Petroleum re-entered the well to start production in 2012. The field was purchased by IGas in 2013, followed by a 5-month workover period to improve the well. However, the workover failed to prevent an increasing gas-oil ratio, and increasing water cut. IGas suspended production from the well in 2014 during a period of low oil prices.
I1 Site characterisation | Attribute suitability
Injectivity: The production history suggests good injectivity – Figure 6. The field area is in hydraulic connection with the regional aquifer. The measured permeability, 200 mD (range 10-4,000 mD) reflects the observed reservoir lithologies which are predominantly darcy-permeability sandstones with minor interbedded siltstones. Reservoir thickness is adequate at 5-25 m and the reservoir units, the Beatrice A and B Sands, extend across the basin.
Seal: The history of oil and gas retention for many millions of years at Lybster and Beatrice is evidence for a highly suitable seal. The Uppat Shale is 23 m thick in well 11/24-1. The caprock was not sampled at Lybster but a 13 m core is available from Beatrice, well 11/30a-8. The shale was described as homogeneous but not tested for permeability – Appendix F.
Faults: The main fault that bisects the field is considered to be sealing as the western half of the field contains no hydrocarbons. A number of smaller associated faults lie within the field boundary. Two risks associated with faults, leakage and seismic reactivation, need to be de-risked at appraisal with a fault analysis study including a geomechanical assessment.
Wells: The discovery well, 11/24-1, was plugged with three cement isolation barriers, abandoned, and cleared to seabed in 1996. As such, it does not represent a leakage risk but cannot be repurposed for CO2 injection. The production well, 11/24-3y, is suspended with its surface infrastructure in place. A dedicated study on the suitability for repurpose as a CO2 injector needs to be to a condition of an appraisal licence.
CO2 density: The field depth, 1,430 m, is ideal for dense phase CO2 storage. The reservoir temperature and pressure, 47 °C and 15 MPa, mean that the reservoir CO2 density will be 725 kg/m3. This will make it highly miscible with the residual oil, 726 kg/m3. The CO2 will trap between the existing natural gas cap, 110 kg/m3, and porewater below, 1030 kgm3. This sandwich configuration is an ideal fluid trap for a depleted oil field. The oil-free area to the west of the fault will function as saline aquifer store with about 90% of the supercritical CO2 rising to trap beneath the caprock, and about 10% dissolving into the surrounding porewater.
Migration: The four-way dip trap geometry is ideal for preventing lateral migration. The structural spill point is to the northeast of the field at 1,500 m: a saddle to the up-dip Braemore prospect. The expected capacity, 2 Mt, assumes no fill beyond the oil-water contact at 1490 m. The appraisal licence will require a site boundary that is likely to be defined by the structural spill point and dynamic simulation of the expected plume extent.
Location: The near-shore location and proximity to sources of high-value bio-CO2, primarily from local distilleries, makes the location exceptional. Access by road places requirements and limits on annual injection rates relating to trucked loads and on-site temporary storage.
Monitoring: Not assessed. The monitoring location for the storage area is in shallow waters of around 40 m depth. This will require a suite of geophysical equipment suited to the local environment. The appraisal licence will require a plan for monitoring storage that focuses on the injection well and remote monitoring from the surface.
Intervention: Not assessed. The requirements and cost of intervening in the case of poor well performance or unexpected migration out of the storage complex has not been assessed.
I2 Site characterisation | Capacity estimate
Structural Volume
Storage area 3 km2 (Assumes only half the field area of 6 km2 is available)
Net thickness 15 m (Assumes an average value from the range: 5-25 m)
Porosity 15% (Assumes an average value from the range: 8-22%)
Net to Gross 68% (Estimated from the gamma ray log for 11/24-1)
CO2 density 725 kg/m3 (Dense phase at ambient reservoir conditions)
Saturation 62.5% (Assume an average value from the range: 50-75%)
High CO2 capacity, optimistic: 9.4 Mt = 6E06 x 21 x 0.19 x 0.76 x 740 x 0.70 kg
Mid CO2 capacity, expected: 2.1 Mt = 3E06 x 15 x 0.15 x 0.68 x 725 x 0.625 kg
Low CO2 capacity, pessimistic: 0.35 Mt = 1.5E06 x 9 x 0.11 x 0.6 x 710 x 0.55 kg
Produced Volume
Produced reservoir fluids 131,227 m3 (Oil: 14%, Gas: 76%, Water: 10%)
CO2 density, reservoir conditions 725 kg/m3 (Pressure: 15 MPa, Temp: °47 C)
Minimum and highly conservative: 95.1 kt = 131,227 m3 x 725 kg/m3
STRUCTURAL VOLUME: A structural volume estimate of storage capacity assumes the pore space is available for CO2. A mid-range value of 2.1 Mt indicates the potential for a reasonably sized CO2 storage project. The limitations and range assumptions for the pore volume estimate should be accounted for within the low estimate which assumes the smallest area and poorest reservoir quality, representing a minimum capacity of 350,000 tonnes of CO2.
PRODUCED VOLUME: The fluid replacement capacity for a produced field is often useful in establishing a reliable ‘proven’ storage capacity estimate, based on known volumes which have been produced from the reservoir. However, the Lybster field was in production for a surprisingly brief period, which means that a production volume estimate will be extremely low, and hardly representative of the available pore volume. A storage capacity of 95,100 tonnes is estimated from produced volumes of oil, gas, and water using this method.
I3 Site characterisation | Stratigraphic analysis
An assessment of the stratigraphy was completed using composite logs, geophysical logs, core photographs, and published studies (Thomson & Underhill, 1993; Richards, et al., 1993; Tamas, et al., 2022). Where data gaps existed within the study area, wells from the surrounding region with a similar stratigraphy were looked at as analogues for Lybster.
The Lybster site assessment uses standard criteria established in previous CO2 storage projects (Chadwick, et al., 2008; Alcade, et al., 2021; IEAGHG, 2022). Lybster attributes are assessed using a traffic light, where green indicates favourable properties, red indicates unfavourable properties, and orange indicates intermediate values. Table I2 documents the outcomes for storage criteria.
Table I.2: Traffic light assessment of reservoir and seal attributes for CO2 storage
|
Parameter |
Value |
Aspect of storage |
|
Depth |
1433 m |
Storage capacity |
|
Thickness (net) |
15 m, 5 – 25 m |
Storage capacity, injectivity |
|
Porosity |
15%, 8 – 22% |
Storage capacity |
|
Permeability |
200 mD, 10 – 4000 mD |
Injectivity |
|
CO2 density |
725 kg/m3, supercritical |
Storage capacity |
|
Rock type |
Sandstone with siltstones |
Storage efficiency |
|
Seal lithology |
Low permeability mudstone |
Containment |
|
Seal thickness |
23 m in well 11/24-1 |
Containment |
Secondary reservoir: The Brora Sandstone and Alness Spiculite members display good reservoir characteristics as indicated by their low-gamma ray values and lithologies, but poor permeability within the two formations suggests a reservoir quality unsuitable for CO2 storage.
Secondary seal: The Kimmeridge Clay Formation exists as a thick regional succession of fine siltstones and mudstones above the Uppat Mudstones. A stable gamma-ray curve in all well logs is indicative of a homogenous, low-porosity formation, suitable for a secondary seal.
I4 Site characterisation | Structural analysis
A four-way dip closure, or dome, associated with an anticlinal structural deformation traps buoyant CO2 and tightly constrains the migration of CO2 within the crest of the structure. The main fault which crosscuts the field area is identified as a potential leakage pathway and requires further investigation to de-risk the site, but its proven history of trapping hydrocarbons is a positive indicator.
The Lybster structure formed at a flexure point during tectonic inversion of the Inner Moray Firth area. A fault segments the field roughly in half: a western compartment with no oil as proven by wells 11/24-3 and 11/24-3z; and an eastern compartment where the Beatrice Sandstones are oil bearing.
The Uppat Mudstones are an effective top seal, preventing upward migration. The adjacent structural high at the Braemore prospect, and patterns identified across the in-line seismic profile, suggest a series of anticline-syncline pairs along strike, parallel to the coastline.
The continuation of the reservoir along strike presents the possibility of increased storage capacity. Injecting down-dip of the trap and into the water-leg of the reservoir on the migration path but outside the structural closure increases the storage capacity with a proven trap at the end of the migration path.
I5 Site characterisation | Production Data
Existing exploration and production well data from Lybster allows for a detailed analysis of the reservoir pressure conditions and residual fluids within the field, both of which are significant for CO2 storage capacity calculations. The Lybster field is hydrostatically pressured with open boundaries to a regional aquifer, the Beatrice Formation. This is as a positive indicator for CO2 storage as a reservoir with open boundaries allows for the displacement of pore fluids and the dispersion of injected-related pressure. This increases the storage capacity compared to a field with closed boundaries.
Production data suggests the field contains a column of residual natural gas. This is also favourable for CO2 storage as gas is more compressible than oil or water, increasing storage capacity. As CO2 is denser than natural gas at reservoir conditions, 724 kg/m3 vs 110 kg/m3, the CO2 will occupy the bottom of the reservoir when injection stops with the remaining natural gas at the top of the reservoir. This acts as a gas barrier which reduces the risk of CO2 leakage through the top seal.
Table I.3: Historic production data for Lybster oil field.
|
Year |
Month |
Oil, bbl |
Reservoir, m^3 |
Gas, mscf |
Gas, boe |
Reservoir, m^3 |
Water, m^3 |
Water, bbl |
Reservoir, m^3 |
Reservoir, m^3 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
2012 |
June |
7,724 |
1,424 |
11,160 |
1,983 |
1,196 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
2,620 |
|
2012 |
July |
6,762 |
1,247 |
20,235 |
3,596 |
2,945 |
37 |
233 |
37 |
6,849 |
|
2012 |
August |
6,938 |
1,279 |
24,862 |
4,418 |
3,765 |
47 |
296 |
47 |
11,941 |
|
2012 |
September |
8,064 |
1,487 |
37,505 |
6,665 |
5,937 |
17 |
107 |
17 |
19,381 |
|
2012 |
October |
9,202 |
1,697 |
59,753 |
10,618 |
9,849 |
88 |
554 |
88 |
31,016 |
|
2012 |
November |
4,491 |
828 |
27,969 |
4,970 |
4,590 |
41 |
258 |
41 |
36,476 |
|
2012 |
December |
3,202 |
590 |
3,390 |
602 |
272 |
21 |
132 |
21 |
37,359 |
|
2013 |
January |
1,717 |
317 |
10,065 |
1,789 |
1,641 |
157 |
988 |
158 |
39,474 |
|
2013 |
February |
1,057 |
195 |
5,933 |
1,054 |
963 |
50 |
314 |
50 |
40,682 |
|
2013 |
March |
3,038 |
560 |
12,713 |
2,259 |
1,980 |
302 |
1,900 |
303 |
43,525 |
|
2013 |
April |
9,649 |
1,779 |
71,901 |
12,777 |
12,004 |
778 |
4,894 |
781 |
58,090 |
|
2013 |
May |
7,491 |
1,382 |
74,974 |
13,323 |
12,792 |
798 |
5,019 |
802 |
73,066 |
|
2013 |
June |
3,485 |
643 |
31,536 |
5,604 |
5,345 |
493 |
3,101 |
495 |
79,549 |
|
2013 |
Jul-Nov |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
79,549 |
|
2013 |
December |
2,132 |
393 |
742 |
132 |
0 |
940 |
5,913 |
944 |
80,886 |
|
2014 |
January |
4,403 |
812 |
22,919 |
4,073 |
3,684 |
838 |
5,271 |
842 |
86,224 |
|
2014 |
February |
1,912 |
353 |
9,747 |
1,732 |
1,563 |
724 |
4,554 |
727 |
88,866 |
|
2014 |
March |
3,837 |
708 |
37,752 |
6,708 |
6,434 |
1073 |
6,749 |
1078 |
97,086 |
|
2014 |
April |
2,573 |
474 |
28,181 |
5,008 |
4,835 |
903 |
5,680 |
907 |
103,302 |
|
2014 |
May |
3,403 |
628 |
28,605 |
5,083 |
4,822 |
1244 |
7,825 |
1250 |
110,001 |
|
2014 |
June |
2,359 |
435 |
35,598 |
6,326 |
6,202 |
848 |
5,334 |
852 |
117,490 |
|
2014 |
July |
1,812 |
334 |
25,709 |
4,569 |
4,468 |
1035 |
6,510 |
1040 |
123,332 |
|
2014 |
August |
1,138 |
210 |
18,223 |
3,238 |
3,182 |
807 |
5,076 |
811 |
127,535 |
|
2014 |
September |
742 |
137 |
8,052 |
1,431 |
1,381 |
759 |
4,774 |
762 |
129,815 |
|
2014 |
October |
730 |
135 |
1,165 |
207 |
133 |
575 |
3,617 |
578 |
130,660 |
|
2014 |
November |
132 |
24 |
2,331 |
414 |
408 |
80 |
503 |
80 |
131,173 |
|
2014 |
December |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
54 |
340 |
54 |
131,227 |
Appendix J Sources methodology
The database comprises a list of candidate bio-CO2 sources. The methodology calculates CO2 emissions for these sites based on publicly available data[8] (see below). Facilities include those that are already operational, under construction, or at FID and expected to come online before 2030. Facilities from across the various sources and source types are identified from a combination of the following publicly available sources:
• Renewable Energy Planning Database (REPD, 2024)
• BEIS Heat Networks Planning Database (BEIS, 2024)
• Ofgem Renewables Obligation Annual Report (Ofgem, 2024a)
• Ofgem Accredited Stations (Ofgem, 2024b)
• Whisky Invest Direct (WID, 2024)
• The Official Information Portal on Anaerobic Digestion (NNFCC, 2023)
• UK Energy from Waste Statistics 2022 (Tolvik, 2023)
• Scottish Environment Protection Agency SPRI (SEPA, 2022)
• ENDS Waste & Bioenergy (ENDS, 2024)
• Project and facility websites
• Local authority planning portals
Estimating the amount of bio-CO2
The threshold for inclusion is 3 ktpa of bio-CO2. This is based on consultation with current commercial bio-CO2 capture operations in Scotland (Carbon Capture Scotland Ltd, 2024). The methodology follows a top-down calculation similar to Brownsort (2018), using installed or generating capacity, and assumptions to estimate total CO2 emissions from biogenic sources. The following section outline the methodology and key assumptions for each source type.
Biomass combustion
Biomass combustion is determined from three sources and categorised into two groups: biomass combustion for heat and Combined Heat and Power (CHP). The REPD (2024) is updated quarterly and includes data on installed capacity for all UK renewable electricity and CHP projects. For heat provision, a capacity factor of 56.7% (Dukes, 2022) and a heat efficiency of 80% are used. For CHP, the same capacity factor of 56.7% and an electrical conversion efficiency of 35% are used. All biomass feedstock is assumed to be wood with a specific CO2 emission of 0.39kg/kW, despite chicken litter being the main feedstock for one site, Lochgelly.
Energy from Waste
EfW facilities are calculated based on plant waste processing capacity data collected from project or facility websites, ENDS Waste & Bioenergy (ENDS, 2024), and, where necessary, local authority planning portals. Emissions arising are modelled on a ratio of 0.944:1 tCO2 per tonne of waste processing capacity, i.e. 0.944 tCO2 produced for every tonne of waste. Plants are assumed to operate at 50% of plated capacity during the first year of operation and at 95% for the rest of their operational lifetime. It is assumed that 50% of emissions arising from EfW is biogenic in origin following the generally accepted UK industry baseline, although it is accepted that this figure could be conservative and is certainly subject to change.
Fermentation
Two factors are considered: firstly, the production of pure alcohol intended for use in beverages; and secondly, the ratio of CO2 to pure alcohol produced during fermentation.
Actual volumes of alcohol produced by specific breweries and distilleries are not publicly available. Hence, plant capacity data are used to estimate bio-CO2 emissions. Figures for the amount of pure alcohol produced at grain whisky distilleries in Scotland is derived from distillery capacity data and by applying a process capacity factor of 90%. Malt whisky production is similarly assessed, with the difference of applying a capacity factor of 75%, reflecting the smaller scale and less industrial nature of this production.
To estimate the ratio of CO2 to alcohol that is produced, the methodology assumes that fermentation of one molecule of glucose produces two molecules of ethanol and two molecules of CO2 in a 1:1 molar ratio. By adjusting this ratio for the molecular weights of ethanol (46g/mol) and CO2 (44g/mol), and for the density of ethanol (0.789kg/litre), it is determined that 0.755kg CO2 is produced per litre of pure ethanol.
Biogas and biomethane
Plant capacity data for AD biogas and biomethane upgrading are acquired from the NNFCC AD portal (NNFCC, 2023). This provides comprehensive information on the CHP generation capacity and biomethane injection capacity of AD biogas plants. Emissions are estimated assuming maximum capacity from generation capacity data, with a presumed capacity utilisation factor of 80% for AD plants – a high-capacity factor suggested by the NNFCC (2023).
For AD biogas combustion, emissions are calculated based on an assumed mid-range energy conversion efficiency of 37.5%. Efficiency is typically 35-40% for electricity and 40-45% for heat. A typical biogas composition with a CH4/CO2 ratio of 55:45 by volume is assumed. The methane energy content is presumed to be the higher heating value (HHV), 55.53 GJ/t, while gas densities were determined from values reported in the literature, 0.668 kg/m3.
Biomethane upgrading emissions are calculated using the same assumptions and sources as for biogas above but with a separate capacity factor of 47.7%. The calculations for biomethane upgrading provide two values: the first value is for the CO2 that is separated from the raw biogas, which would typically be discharged at the upgrading site. The second value is for the CO2 from the combustion of the upgraded biomethane, which would usually be released downstream where the biomethane is ultimately burnt. Only the CO2 discharged at the upgrading facility is within the scope of this study.
Landfill and sewage
CO2 emissions are calculated based on the installed capacity data for each plant over the period 2022-2023 (Ofgem, 2024a). Average Scottish capacity factors (DESNZ, 2024) are 33% for landfill gas and 53% for sewage gas. The same assumptions and methodology as outlined for biogas above are used for a landfill gas composition ratio of 50:50 of CH4/CO2 by volume.
Scotland’s bio-CO2 resource 2024-2035
The total amount of bio-CO2 in Scotland averages 3.7 Mtpa between 2027-2035 – Table J.1.These projections are based on facilities that are known to have reached at least the FID stage and they assume unchanged operational profiles based on the most recent publicly available data. Given Scotland and the UK’s ambitions for bioenergy, coupled with global forecasts for the sector (an annual growth rate of 3.56% is expected (CAGR 2024-2028) (Statista, 2024)), available volumes of bio-CO2 could increase.
Table J.1: Bio-CO2 forecast. The increase to 2027 is due to 6 new energy-from-waste plants coming online. The reduction post-2030 is due to Baldovie 1, an EfW plant, coming offline.
|
Year |
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 |
2031 |
2032 |
2033 |
2034 |
2035 |
|
Mtpa |
3.15 |
3.38 |
3.64 |
3.72 |
3.72 |
3.72 |
3.72 |
3.68 |
3.68 |
3.68 |
3.68 |
3.68 |
Post-combustion adjustment factor
A minimum capture rate of 95% applies across all sources. This follows the UK Environment Agency Best Available Technique (BAT) (UK Environment Agency, 2021) guidance for post-combustion capture plants, although it should be noted that capture rates higher than 95% are achievable. High rates can be economically viable and are desirable from a climate mitigation perspective (Gibbins et al., 2024). For EfW, this can be as high as 99.72% with only a marginal cost penalty (Su et al., 2023). A 95% capture rate applies to biomethane upgrading facilities and distilleries. This is likely to be conservative for distillery capture, which achieves around 97% [9].
North America and the EU both enacted net zero by 2050 in 2021. Canada and the USA share similar 2030 ambitions to decarbonise by 40-to-50% from 2005 levels. This is much less ambitious than the EU (55%) and UK (68%) 2030 targets which are from 1990 levels. The USA and Canada saw peak annual emissions in the mid 2000s at 6 Gt and 0.8 Gt respectively, whereas the EU and UK emissions peaked at 5 Gt and 0.8 Gt in the early 1990s.
Carbon capture in North America is characterised by early regional movers but slow overall progress on storage. This has resulted in legislation to accelerate the deployment of CCS in response to the enacted net zero targets. The following section briefly reviews the region to highlight relevant projects and policy actions. As with Europe, the early regional projects have been vertically integrated and located in states and provinces strongly associated with fossil fuel extraction: Alberta, Saskatchewan, North Dakota, Louisiana, and Texas.
USA
In 2021, the Biden administration set a goal of 500 million tonnes of annual carbon abatement by 2050. The intermediate target is 85-170 million tonnes of annual carbon capture and storage by 2030. This new target is incentivised by the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act 2021 (IIJA) and Inflation Reduction Act 2022 (IRA). IIJA and IRA are intended to support investment decisions on 6 large commercial capture projects and 4 DAC hubs by 2030. The new incentives have created a rush for storage that has resulted in a bottleneck of Class VI permits applications for CO2 injection wells. As of April 2024, there are 128 applications under review, 56% of which were submitted in the previous 12 months. The EPA has issued 4 permits since 2010.
The IRA increases pre-existing credits under Section 45Q of the Internal Revenue Code from $50 to $85 per ton for CCS, and from $50 to $180 per ton for DAC with permanent storage. The 45Q tax credits expire after 12 years of operational capture and only apply to projects that begin construction before 2033. The credits are transferable between the capture entity and another entity, creating a carbon trading market.
In addition to 45Q, IIJA provides $12bn of funding for capture (30%), DAC hubs (30%), storage testing and validation (20%), transport infrastructure (17.5%), and 1% for storage permitting. The funds potentially reduce the CAPEX of large DAC and CCS projects by up to 75%.
In the USA, CO2 storage requires an Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Class VI permit for an injection well under the federal Underground Injection Control (UIC) program[10]. States can apply for UIC primacy to expedite the licensing process. This may take years but transfers the primary enforcement authority from the EPA to the State. Only two States have been granted primacy. North Dakota applied for primacy in 2013 and was approved in 2018. Wyoming formally applied in 2019 and was approved in 2020, but that process was preceded by years of dialogue with EPA.
As of April 2024, the EPA have issued four Class VI permits, two of which are active, both at the Archer Daniels Midland ethanol plant, Illinois. For both, the time from application submission to issuance was three years, though the entire permitting process took around six years. There are currently 128 applications under review, 56% of which were submitted within the last 12 months.
Pursuant to the UIC program, EPA has promulgated regulations and established minimum federal requirements for six classes of injection wells (Class I to Class VI). Each well class is based on the type and depth of the injection activity and the potential for the injection activity to impact underground sources of drinking water.
In 2010, EPA established Class VI, the most recently created UIC well class, for wells used to inject CO2 into deep subsurface geologic formations for long-term underground storage—a process known as “geologic sequestration.” By comparison, Class II wells inject fluids associated with oil and natural gas production for enhanced oil recovery. Currently, there are approximately 180,000 active Class II wells but only two active Class VI wells in the United States as of 2022. 80% of Class II wells are used for enhanced oil recovery.
Thus, project proponents seeking to inject CO2 for permanent geologic sequestration must obtain a permit from EPA to drill and operate a Class VI well. A geologic sequestration project is defined by the extent of the area of review (AoR), which is the region surrounding the well where underground sources of drinking water may be impacted by the injection activity. A permit applicant must delineate the AoR to predict the movement of the injected CO2 and displaced fluids using a model that considers the geologic conditions and operations.
The permit application must present a detailed evaluation of site geology, the AoR, and how the modelling inputs reflect site-specific geologic and operational conditions, well construction design, plans to monitor the site, and other required activities. Permit applications are multifaceted and address all aspects of the geologic sequestration project to ensure that underground sources of drinking water are protected. They are comprehensive, and contain maps and cross sections, modelling results, water quality data, analyses of core samples and well logs, engineering schematics, and financial information.
All of the permit application information submitted and reviewed is interrelated, and the information collected to meet one requirement may inform or be informed by other submittals or analyses. Therefore, project proponents need to ensure that, collectively, all of the information submitted is consistent, supports a determination of site-suitability, and affords protection to underground sources of drinking water.
Appendix L Cost-revenue analysis
Cost of trucking
£20 per tonne estimate for 320 km round-trip from Carbon Capture Scotland Ltd.
A, annual 100,000 tonnes
P, payload 20 tonnes
L, distance 160 km
T, trip = 2L 320 km
N, trucks per day 16
D, drivers 16
F, fuel diesel 152 pence per litre
C, fuel consumption 33 litres per 100 km
B, fuel burn per km £0.50 per km
Cost per year of 16 trucks amortised over 10 years: £25,000 x 16 = £400,000
Cost of fuel at £0.50/km for one year: 100,000/20 x 320 x 0.5 = £800,000
Wages for 16 drivers over one year: 50,000 x 16 = £800,000
Total = £2,000,000
Cost per tonne for 100,000 tonne annual payload = £20
Cost of biomass capture
Based on the levelised cost analysis by Lehtveer & Emanuelsson (2021):
LCOC = ((CAPEX×CRF) / FLH) + OPEXfix + OPEXvar + CFuel + CTransportation + CStorage – CElectricity
By neglecting the cost of electricity, and determining the transport and storage costs separately, the LCOC simplifies to the cost of capture:
CCapture = (CAPEX×CRF)/FLH + OPEXfix + OPEXvar + CFuel
- CAPEX, capital expenditure €3.31 million per MW
- OPEXfix, fixed operating expense €105,000 per MW per year
- OPEXvar, variable operating expense €2.1 per MWh
- CRF, Capital Recovery Factor CRF = (i*(1 + i)*n) / ((1 + i)*(n – 1)
- i, interest rate 5%
- n, lifetime of the technology 40 years
- FLH, Full Load Hours 8000 hours per year
- CFuel,th , fuel cost for biomass €30 per MWhth
- Carbon intensity 0.4 tonne/MWhth
- η, plant efficiency 27%
CRF = (0.05*(1+0.05)40) / ((1+0.05)40−1) = 0.0583
CAPEX and OPEX
Annualized CAPEX: CAPEXannual = (CAPEX×CRF)/FLH = 3.31×106 × 0.0583/8000 = 24.12 €/ MWh
Fixed OPEX per MWh: OPEXfix = 105,000€/MW/FLH = 105,000/8000 = 13.125 €/MWh
Total OPEX per MWh: OPEXtotal = OPEXfix + OPEXvar = 13.125+2.1 = 15.225 €/MWh
Biomass energy needed to produce 1 MWh
Biomass input per MWh = 1 / η = 1/0.27 ≈ 3.7 MWhth / MWh electricity
CO2 produced per MWh of electricity produced
CO2 per MWh = Biomass per MWh × carbon intensity = 3.7 × 0.4 = 1.48 tCO2 / MWh electricity
Cost of fuel
CFuel = CFuel,th * Biomass per MWh = 30 *3.7 = 111 €/ MWh electricity
Cost of capture for biomass combustion
CoCBECCS = CAPEXannual + OPEXtotal + CFuel = (24.12+15.225+111) = 150.345 €/MWh
Cost of capture for biomass combustion
CCapture, Biomass = (CAPEXannual + OPEXtotal + CFuel) / CO2 per MWh = 150.345/1.48 = 101.58 €/ tCO2
Total cost per tonne
- /tCO2 = £86.50/tCO2 1 EUR = 0.851 GBP
Table M.1 Sources by sector; average bin size (ktpa), and potential number of capture units per site for all low-cost sites (NxU), assuming a unit is 3-5 ktpa.
|
8 x 1 |
N x U = Sites x Units, low-cost (Nx U) = Sites x Units, high cost |
|
|
|
ktpa |
| |||
|
6 |
|
Biomass |
7-360 |
| |||||
|
– 6 – |
|
|
|
|
| ||||
|
6 |
|
|
|
|
Energy from Waste |
38-158 |
| ||
|
6 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| ||
|
– 6 – |
7 x 2 |
|
|
|
AD Combustion |
3-44 |
| ||
|
6 |
14 |
|
|
|
|
|
| ||
|
6 |
13 |
|
|
|
Distillery Wash |
2-75 |
| ||
|
6 |
13 |
|
|
|
|
|
| ||
|
6 |
– 13 – |
3 x 4 |
|
|
AD Upgrading |
5-13 |
| ||
|
– 6 – |
12 |
30 |
|
|
|
|
| ||
|
6 |
12 |
30 |
|
|
|
|
| ||
|
6 |
– 12 – |
– 30 – |
|
|
|
|
| ||
|
5 |
– 12 – |
– 28 – |
|
|
|
|
| ||
|
5 |
12 |
27 |
|
|
|
|
| ||
|
5 |
11 |
– 24 – |
1 x 8 |
|
|
|
| ||
|
– 5 – |
11 |
24 |
55 |
2 x 16 |
|
|
| ||
|
– 5 – |
9 |
22 |
49 |
108 |
|
|
| ||
|
4 |
– 8 – |
21 |
49 |
97 |
|
|
| ||
|
4 |
8 |
– 21 – |
– 46 – |
94 |
|
|
| ||
|
4 |
8 |
20 |
45 |
83 |
|
|
| ||
|
4 |
8 |
19 |
44 |
75 |
[6 x 32] |
|
| ||
|
– 4 – |
7 |
19 |
44 |
75 |
– 242 – |
|
| ||
|
3 |
7 |
18 |
38 |
70 |
158 |
|
| ||
|
– 3 – |
7 |
17 |
36 |
69 |
150 |
|
| ||
|
2 |
7 |
17 |
33 |
– 69 – |
144 |
[2 x 64] |
| ||
|
– 2 – |
7 |
16 |
32 |
67 |
135 |
360 |
| ||
|
– 2 – |
– 7 – |
15 |
31 |
67 |
135 |
279 |
| ||
|
Ave: 5 ktpa |
10 ktpa |
20 ktpa |
40 ktpa |
80 ktpa |
160 ktpa |
320 ktpa |
| ||
Table M.2: Sources by sector, location, road distance from nearest storage (km), process of capture, and annual potential capture rate (ktpa).
|
Biomass |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |||||||
|
LOC |
ID |
Short name |
Post code |
Latitude |
Longitude |
km |
Sector |
Process |
ktpa | ||||||
|
F |
1001 |
Markinch |
KY7 5PZ |
56.20017 |
-3.15669 |
10 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
360 | ||||||
|
S |
1002 |
Croft |
DG11 2SQ |
55.15298 |
-3.38013 |
69 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
279 | ||||||
|
N |
1003 |
Morayhill |
IV2 7JQ |
57.51775 |
-4.08378 |
151 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
242 | ||||||
|
G |
1004 |
Cowie |
FK7 7BQ |
56.07768 |
-3.86212 |
74 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
150 | ||||||
|
C |
1005 |
Caledonian |
KA11 5AT |
55.58462 |
-4.64174 |
112 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
144 | ||||||
|
C |
1006 |
Liberty |
ML1 1PU |
55.78842 |
-3.98196 |
87 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
94 | ||||||
|
F |
1007 |
Lochgelly |
KY5 0HR |
56.16862 |
-3.30545 |
18 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
69 | ||||||
|
N |
1008 |
Speyside |
AB38 9RX |
57.49494 |
-3.20666 |
224 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
69 | ||||||
|
F |
1009 |
Tarmac |
EH42 1SL |
55.98063 |
-2.47298 |
108 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
55 | ||||||
|
N |
1010 |
Rothes |
AB38 7BW |
57.53307 |
-3.20761 |
225 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
46 | ||||||
|
F |
1011 |
Guardbridge |
KY16 0US |
56.36482 |
-2.89013 |
38 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
36 | ||||||
|
H |
1012 |
Acharn |
FK21 8RA |
56.44734 |
-4.34494 |
116 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
31 | ||||||
|
F |
1013 |
Diageo |
KY8 5RL |
56.18953 |
-3.05583 |
9 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
30 | ||||||
|
C |
1014 |
Egger |
KA18 2LL |
55.47011 |
-4.32728 |
98 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
30 | ||||||
|
N |
1015 |
Balcas |
IV18 0LT |
57.70219 |
-4.15645 |
109 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
28 | ||||||
|
O |
1016 |
Pulteney |
KW1 5BA |
58.43514 |
-3.08414 |
24 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
19 | ||||||
|
C |
1017 |
Glennon |
KA10 6DJ |
55.54741 |
-4.68127 |
109 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
14 | ||||||
|
F |
1018 |
Gleneagles |
PH3 1NF |
56.28626 |
-3.75079 |
64 |
Biomass |
Combustion |
7 | ||||||
|
EfW |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |||||||
|
LOC |
ID |
Short name |
Post code |
Latitude |
Longitude |
km |
Sector |
Process |
ktpa | ||||||
|
C |
1019 |
SCEC |
G51 4SJ |
55.86136 |
-4.35344 |
111 |
EfW Plant |
Combustion |
158 | ||||||
|
C |
1020 |
Drumgray |
ML6 7TD |
55.90592 |
-3.94183 |
87 |
EfW Plant |
Combustion |
135 | ||||||
|
C |
1021 |
Dunbar |
EH42 1SW |
55.97478 |
-2.46485 |
109 |
EfW Plant |
Combustion |
135 | ||||||
|
F |
1022 |
Westfield |
KY5 0HR |
56.16993 |
-3.29276 |
21 |
EfW Plant |
Combustion |
108 | ||||||
|
G |
1023 |
Earls Gate |
FK3 8XG |
56.01194 |
-3.73653 |
55 |
EfW Plant |
Combustion |
97 | ||||||
|
F |
1024 |
Oldhall |
KA11 5DG |
55.59488 |
-4.64028 |
113 |
EfW Plant |
Combustion |
83 | ||||||
|
F |
1025 |
Millerhill |
EH22 1SX |
55.92459 |
-3.08624 |
72 |
EfW Plant |
Combustion |
70 | ||||||
|
C |
1026 |
GRREC |
G42 0PJ |
55.83439 |
-4.24446 |
101 |
EfW Plant |
Combustion |
67 | ||||||
|
E |
1027 |
NESS |
AB12 3BG |
57.12652 |
-2.07786 |
73 |
EfW Plant |
Combustion |
67 | ||||||
|
F |
1028 |
Baldovie 2 |
DD4 0NS |
56.48495 |
-2.90174 |
53 |
EfW Plant |
Combustion |
49 | ||||||
|
G |
1029 |
Levenseat |
ML11 8TS |
55.79743 |
-3.68852 |
73 |
EfW Plant |
Combustion |
45 | ||||||
|
F |
1030 |
Baldovie 1 |
DD4 0NS |
56.48495 |
-2.90174 |
53 |
EfW Plant |
Combustion |
44 | ||||||
|
C |
1031 |
Binn |
PH2 9PX |
56.30246 |
-3.34516 |
33 |
EfW Plant |
Combustion |
38 | ||||||
|
Distillery |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |||||||
|
LOC |
ID |
Short name |
Post code |
Latitude |
Longitude |
km |
Sector |
Process |
ktpa | ||||||
|
F |
1032 |
Cameronbridge |
KY8 5RL |
56.18951 |
-3.0558 |
9 |
Distillery |
Separation |
75 | ||||||
|
A |
1033 |
Girvan |
KA26 9PT |
55.25928 |
-4.83023 |
84 |
Distillery |
Separation |
75 | ||||||
|
F |
1034 |
North British |
EH11 2PX |
55.93922 |
-3.23654 |
49 |
Distillery |
Separation |
49 | ||||||
|
C |
1035 |
Strathclyde |
G5 0QB |
55.84846 |
-4.23995 |
102 |
Distillery |
Separation |
27 | ||||||
|
N |
1036 |
Invergordon |
IV18 0HP |
57.69546 |
-4.16491 |
109 |
Distillery |
Separation |
24 | ||||||
|
G |
1037 |
Starlaw |
EH47 7BW |
55.88934 |
-3.5785 |
59 |
Distillery |
Separation |
17 | ||||||
|
C |
1038 |
Loch Lomond |
G83 0TL |
55.99241 |
-4.57636 |
126 |
Distillery |
Separation |
12 | ||||||
|
N |
1039 |
Glenlivet |
AB37 9DB |
57.34351 |
-3.3376 |
231 |
Distillery |
Separation |
12 | ||||||
|
N |
1040 |
Glenfiddich |
AB55 4DH |
57.45485 |
-3.12795 |
236 |
Distillery |
Separation |
12 | ||||||
|
LOC |
ID |
Short name |
Post code |
Latitude |
Longitude |
km |
Sector |
Process |
ktpa | ||||||
|
N |
1041 |
Macallan |
AB38 9RX |
57.48488 |
-3.20614 |
231 |
Distillery |
Separation |
8 | ||||||
|
A |
1042 |
Ailsa Bay |
KA26 9PF |
55.26118 |
-4.83495 |
84 |
Distillery |
Separation |
7 | ||||||
|
N |
1043 |
Glen Ord |
IV6 7UJ |
57.5223 |
-4.47397 |
139 |
Distillery |
Separation |
7 | ||||||
|
N |
1044 |
Roseisle |
IV30 5YP |
57.66883 |
-3.47425 |
202 |
Distillery |
Separation |
6 | ||||||
|
N |
1045 |
Dalmunach |
AB38 7RE |
57.45479 |
-3.30027 |
221 |
Distillery |
Separation |
6 | ||||||
|
N |
1046 |
Teaninich |
IV17 0XB |
57.69154 |
-4.26051 |
114 |
Distillery |
Separation |
6 | ||||||
|
N |
1047 |
Glenmorangie |
IV19 1PZ |
57.82658 |
-4.07743 |
88 |
Distillery |
Separation |
4 | ||||||
|
N |
1048 |
Tomatin |
IV13 7YT |
57.34149 |
-4.01045 |
166 |
Distillery |
Separation |
3 | ||||||
|
N |
1049 |
Speyburn |
AB38 7AG |
57.53646 |
-3.21595 |
225 |
Distillery |
Separation |
2 | ||||||
|
F |
1050 |
Tullibardine |
PH4 1QG |
56.25815 |
-3.7851 |
123 |
Distillery |
Separation |
2 | ||||||
|
N |
1051 |
Balmenach |
PH26 3PF |
57.32546 |
-3.53212 |
208 |
Distillery |
Separation |
2 | ||||||
|
Landfill |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |||||||
|
LOC |
ID |
Short name |
Post code |
Latitude |
Longitude |
km |
Sector |
Process |
ktpa | ||||||
|
G |
1052 |
Avondale |
FK2 0YG |
55.99067 |
-3.67843 |
51 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
32 | ||||||
|
C |
1053 |
Greengairs |
ML6 7TD |
55.90502 |
-3.94501 |
87 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
20 | ||||||
|
F |
1054 |
Dunbar |
EH42 1SW |
55.97169 |
-2.46156 |
109 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
19 | ||||||
|
C |
1055 |
Greenoakhill |
G71 7SQ |
55.83865 |
-4.13733 |
94 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
15 | ||||||
|
E |
1056 |
Stoneyhill |
AB42 0PR |
57.45897 |
-1.87237 |
36 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
12 | ||||||
|
C |
1057 |
Cathkin |
G73 3RE |
55.78877 |
-4.1898 |
102 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
11 | ||||||
|
C |
1058 |
Auchencarroch |
G83 9EY |
55.99891 |
-4.53778 |
127 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
11 | ||||||
|
C |
1059 |
Garlaff |
KA18 2RB |
55.42964 |
-4.30544 |
93 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
8 | ||||||
|
C |
1060 |
Oatslie |
EH25 9QN |
55.85126 |
-3.18402 |
64 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
7 | ||||||
|
F |
1061 |
Kaimes |
EH27 8EF |
55.88372 |
-3.39556 |
52 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
7 | ||||||
|
F |
1062 |
Binn |
PH2 9PX |
56.30514 |
-3.33799 |
34 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
6 | ||||||
|
LOC |
ID |
Short name |
Post code |
Latitude |
Longitude |
km |
Sector |
Process |
ktpa | ||||||
|
F |
1063 |
Lochhead |
KY12 0RX |
56.09775 |
-3.47311 |
29 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
6 | ||||||
|
C |
1064 |
Auchinlea |
ML1 5LR |
55.80956 |
-3.90035 |
82 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
6 | ||||||
|
C |
1065 |
Summerston |
G23 5HD |
55.9119 |
-4.27466 |
106 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
6 | ||||||
|
C |
1066 |
Rigmuir |
G75 0QZ |
55.74302 |
-4.12468 |
105 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
6 | ||||||
|
C |
1067 |
Shewalton |
KA11 5DF |
55.59493 |
-4.64203 |
113 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
5 | ||||||
|
F |
1068 |
Cireco |
KY15 7UL |
56.2926 |
-3.13048 |
22 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
4 | ||||||
|
E |
1069 |
Tramaud |
AB23 8BQ |
57.2111 |
-2.08733 |
62 |
Landfill |
Combustion |
4 | ||||||
|
Industrial |
|
|
|
|
|
| |||||||||
|
LOC |
ID |
Short name |
Post code |
Latitude |
Longitude |
km |
Sector |
Process |
ktpa | ||||||
|
A |
1070 |
Girvan |
KA26 9PT |
55.26386 |
-4.82595 |
85 |
Industrial |
Combustion |
44 | ||||||
|
F |
1071 |
Cameronbridge |
KY8 5RL |
56.18953 |
-3.05583 |
9 |
Industrial |
Combustion |
33 | ||||||
|
N |
1072 |
Portgordon |
AB56 5BU |
57.65558 |
-3.02453 |
231 |
Industrial |
Combustion |
30 | ||||||
|
N |
1073 |
Glenfiddich |
AB55 4DH |
57.45601 |
-3.12411 |
236 |
Industrial |
Combustion |
21 | ||||||
|
E |
1074 |
Brewdog |
AB41 8BX |
57.36964 |
-2.05049 |
43 |
Industrial |
Combustion |
21 | ||||||
|
B |
1075 |
Charlesfield |
TD6 0HH |
55.56084 |
-2.65219 |
119 |
Industrial |
Combustion |
18 | ||||||
|
C |
1076 |
GSK |
KA11 5AP |
55.59496 |
-4.62817 |
113 |
Industrial |
Combustion |
6 | ||||||
|
City Waste |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |||||||
|
LOC |
ID |
Short name |
Post code |
Latitude |
Longitude |
km |
Sector |
Process |
ktpa | ||||||
|
C |
1077 |
Polmadie |
G42 0PJ |
55.83434 |
-4.24477 |
101 |
City Waste |
Combustion |
24 | ||||||
|
C |
1078 |
Energen |
G67 3EN |
55.92553 |
-4.05769 |
85 |
City Waste |
Combustion |
22 | ||||||
|
C |
1079 |
Barkip |
KA24 4JJ |
55.71786 |
-4.65683 |
130 |
City Waste |
Combustion |
13 | ||||||
|
F |
1080 |
Millerhill |
EH21 8RZ |
55.92612 |
-3.08608 |
71 |
City Waste |
Combustion |
9 | ||||||
|
F |
1081 |
Lochhead AD |
KY12 0RX |
56.09775 |
-3.47311 |
29 |
City Waste |
Combustion |
7 | ||||||
|
C |
1082 |
Deerdykes |
G68 9NB |
55.92671 |
-4.0568 |
85 |
City Waste |
Combustion |
6 | ||||||
|
Farming | |||||||||||||||
|
LOC |
ID |
Short name |
Post code |
Latitude |
Longitude |
km |
Sector |
Process |
ktpa | ||||||
|
F |
1091 |
Inchdairnie |
KY5 0UL |
56.17697 |
-3.22284 |
14 |
Farming |
Combustion |
12 | ||||||
|
F |
1092 |
Binn Farm |
PH2 9PX |
56.30482 |
-3.33923 |
34 |
Farming |
Combustion |
8 | ||||||
|
C |
1093 |
Tambowie |
G62 7HN |
55.94956 |
-4.36302 |
114 |
Farming |
Combustion |
6 | ||||||
|
S |
1094 |
West Roucan |
DG1 3QG |
55.09372 |
-3.5339 |
53 |
Farming |
Combustion |
6 | ||||||
|
N |
1095 |
Wester Alves |
IV30 8XD |
57.64396 |
-3.45841 |
201 |
Farming |
Combustion |
5 | ||||||
|
S |
1096 |
Crofthead |
DG2 8QW |
54.99901 |
-3.839 |
27 |
Farming |
Combustion |
3 | ||||||
|
Sewage |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| ||||||
|
LOC |
ID |
Short name |
Post code |
Latitude |
Longitude |
km |
Sector |
Process |
ktpa | ||||||
|
F |
1097 |
Seafield |
EH6 7RF |
55.97112 |
-3.1444 |
53 |
Sewage |
Combustion |
16 | ||||||
|
E |
1098 |
Nigg |
AB12 3LT |
57.13236 |
-2.06023 |
72 |
Sewage |
Combustion |
8 | ||||||
|
Upgrading |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |||||||
|
LOC |
ID |
Short name |
Post code |
Latitude |
Longitude |
km |
Sector |
Process |
ktpa | ||||||
|
A |
1083 |
Girvan |
KA26 9PT |
55.26386 |
-4.82595 |
85 |
Upgrading |
Separation |
17 | ||||||
|
S |
1084 |
Crofthead |
DG2 8QW |
54.99901 |
-3.839 |
27 |
Upgrading |
Separation |
13 | ||||||
|
N |
1085 |
Glenfiddich |
AB55 4DH |
57.45601 |
-3.12411 |
236 |
Upgrading |
Separation |
13 | ||||||
|
N |
1086 |
Portgordon |
AB56 5BU |
57.65558 |
-3.02453 |
231 |
Upgrading |
Separation |
5 | ||||||
|
F |
1087 |
Bangley |
EH41 3SN |
55.96642 |
-2.82347 |
86 |
Upgrading |
Separation |
5 | ||||||
|
S |
1088 |
Lockerbie |
DG11 1LW |
55.12065 |
-3.40844 |
64 |
Upgrading |
Separation |
5 | ||||||
|
F |
1089 |
Keithick |
PH13 9NF |
56.5321 |
-3.29713 |
83 |
Upgrading |
Separation |
4 | ||||||
|
E |
1090 |
Savock |
AB41 6AL |
57.31676 |
-2.04657 |
49 |
Upgrading |
Separation |
4 | ||||||
© The University of Edinburgh, 2024.
Prepared by SCCS on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions, or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
Note that this estimate does not include associated costs such as financing and contingency. ↑
Note that at the time of going to press the Stenlille storage permit has not been issued. ↑
All NSTA licenses continue to be issued by the OGA as a legal entity under the Energy Act 2008. ↑
Storage appraisals are regulated by the CCS Directive 2009, transposed to UK law in 2012. ↑
Licenses CS001 and CS002 were both issued by the OGA under the Energy Act 2008. ↑
The HSE-OPRED MoU is a relatively brief document, available at: www.hse.gov.uk/agency-agreements-memoranda-of-understanding-concordats/assets/docs/opred-hse.pdf ↑
Data for the Cowie and Morayhill biomass facilities came directly from the operator, West Fraser (formerly Norbord). Personal communication with Nick Fedo, General Manager (March 2023). ↑
95-96% CO2 from biogas using membrane technology and sending the CO2 stream straight to CO2 recovery. The 4-5% loss occurs during the purification of CO2 in the recovery stage. Personal communication with Richard Nimmons, Carbon Capture Scotland (March 2023). ↑
www.mayerbrown.com: storage-class-vi-wells-and-us-state-primacy ↑
Research completed: February 2024
DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/4549
Executive summary
There is a need to decarbonise our heating sources to reduce greenhouse gas emissions. Switching from fossil fuel-based technology, such as gas and oil, to low-carbon electricity is a significant step in this process.
To achieve Scotland’s emissions reduction targets, the number of zero direct emissions heating systems (ZDEH) installed, such as heat pumps, needs to increase.
Social landlords have begun taking steps to improve the energy efficiency of the homes they rent out and to meet standards set by the Scottish Government, such as the second milestone of the Energy Efficiency Standard for Social Housing (EESSH2). In recent years, their work has included a rising number of ZDEH projects.
Aims
This research has developed a series of case studies to support social landlords in their delivery of future ZDEH projects. The learnings from this report and the associated case studies seek to encourage social landlords to deliver more decarbonisation projects, and support the delivery of Scottish Government’s net zero targets.
Findings
The findings may not be fully representative as they only relate to eight case studies.
The majority of the case studies installed air source heat pumps. Most social landlords were confident in writing funding applications.
- Engaging with tenants throughout the project is important to delivery, and seeing the new heating system in person can increase tenant confidence.
- Delivering at least one building as a pilot helps identify and address any challenges. This engagement needs to continue after the installation as new heating systems may not be intuitive to use and require behaviour change; supporting tenants with this is important in achieving tenant satisfaction.
- Key considerations to project planning were overlooked by some landlords, resulting in challenges, delays and/or unforeseen costs. These included: unexpected costs in relation to gas meter removals, changes to the built environment required for planning permission and upgrades to the electricity grid required for solar panels.
- All of the case studies aimed to increase affordability for residents. However, the energy crisis has made impact on affordability difficult to assess. Energy Performance Certificate (EPC) ratings improved across all projects, with the majority of properties achieving an EPC B or C rating post-installation[1]. Overall, there was limited data to quantify the impact of the new heating systems, but landlords reported that anecdotally tenants feel positive about their new heating system.
Lessons for future social housing heating projects
Some lessons for social landlords:
- Tenant engagement: Consider a mixed-method approach to engage and support a range of residents, such as face-to-face events, ongoing support and opportunities to see and use the technology in-situ.
- Impact evaluation: This should be planned from the outset of the project to truly understand the impact of the project on tenants, its success in achieving its aims and how it might be improved for next time. The methodology should provide a before and after picture, and include temperature and humidity assessments, energy consumption data and EPC data.
- Multiple buildings: In projects involving large or multiple buildings, delivering at least one building as a pilot helps identify and address any challenges. Rolling the installations out in one building helps to reduce disruption and focus tenant support.
- Project management and costs: If you plan to procure a project manager, involving them from the outset means that they can support with application writing. It should be noted that there may be a cost to this, which should be taken into account. Consider aspects such as planning permission requirements, meter changes and electricity grid upgrades at an early stage to avoid unexpected costs.
Glossary / Abbreviations table
|
ABS |
Area Based Schemes |
|
EESSH |
Energy Efficiency Standard for Social Housing. When the EESSH was introduced in March 2014 it set a first milestone for social landlords to meet for social rented homes by 31 December 2020. A second milestone (EESSH2) was confirmed in June 2019, for social rented houses to meet by December 2032. |
|
EPC |
Energy Performance Certificate |
|
Housing Revenue Account |
A ring-fenced account which is separate from the council’s General Fund. The account is for income and expenditure relating to the management and maintenance of the council’s housing stock |
|
LCITP |
Low Carbon Infrastructure Transition Programme |
|
SHNZHF |
Social Housing Net Zero Heat Fund |
|
ZDEH |
Zero Direct Emissions Heating |
Introduction
Importance of decarbonisation
Greenhouse gas emissions from Scotland’s homes account for 13% of the total emissions in Scotland. The Heat in Buildings Strategy sets out the Scottish Government’s commitments both to decarbonise heating and to remove poor energy efficiency as a driver of fuel poverty.
In Scotland, 23% of domestic dwellings are social housing. The social housing sector has shown strong leadership on improving fabric energy efficiency, with the aim of supporting tenants to reduce their energy bills and contributing to carbon savings. However, to achieve net zero targets, the installation of zero direct emissions heating systems (ZDEH) such as heat pumps, is also needed.
Research aims
The research reviewed case studies to assist landlords in their planning for meeting the standard that will replace EESSH2.[2] The case studies show how various measures, including a change in the heating system, can improve the energy efficiency of their dwellings.
The learnings identified in this report and the associated case studies seek to:
- Encourage social landlords across Scotland to deliver more decarbonisation projects in their housing stock;
- Improve delivery of domestic decarbonisation projects, especially in the social housing sector, by building on existing learnings and solutions;
- Support the delivery of the Scottish Government’s net zero targets.
Method overview
Local Authorities and Housing Associations were approached in equal measure to provide case studies. However, in the research time available, only one Local Authority was able to commit. Furthermore, while many council-led decarbonisation projects exist many of them were out of scope of this research, either due to their focus on new build homes or because the projects were not yet complete. Additionally, some councils no longer have social housing.
Therefore, the higher ratio of Housing Associations to Local Authorities in this report should not be taken as evidence of a greater or lesser willingness to participate in decarbonisation projects from parts of the sector. Lessons are relevant across all social landlords.
The methodology is summaries in figure 1.

Overview of case studies
Eight case studies were selected from a range of social housing projects across Scotland:
- Angus Housing Association ‘Kirkbank Renewable Heat Project’ delivered 32 air source heat pumps in a mix of private and social rented housing to replace inefficient storage heaters. Solar photovoltaic (PV) panels and electricity storage batteries were also installed. The project took place between 2018 and 2022.
- Grampian Housing Association ‘Mackenzie Gardens’ Zero Emission Heating Project’ installed three commercial air source heat pumps, creating a heat network servicing 17 flats and three terraced houses. The project took place between 2021 and 2023.
- Hebridean Housing Partnership ‘Hebridean Heat Pumps Project’ installed air source heat pumps in a wide range of archetypes across 102 of their social rented properties. For three householders, this replaced solid fuel heat sources. The project took place between 2022 and 2023.
- Maryhill Housing Association ‘North-west Glasgow Replacement Heating Project’ installed 266 air source heat pumps into 11 seven-storey housing blocks. Their aim was to contribute towards their net zero targets whilst offering tenants a more affordable alternative to the existing electric storage heaters. The project took place between 2018 and 2021.
- North Lanarkshire Council ‘Lorne Gardens Air Source Heat Pumps Project’ installed air source heat pumps in 20 properties in a retirement housing complex. This also included cavity wall insulation for some of the properties. The project took place in 2021.
- Osprey Housing ‘Moray and Aberdeenshire Heat Pumps 2021 Project’ installed air source heat pumps in 61 properties, accounting for 20% of their off-gas housing stock. This was to provide a cost-effective alternative to the electric storage heating that had been used in the properties previously. The project took place between 2020 and 2022.
- Queens Cross Housing Association ‘Regeneration of Cedar Multistorey Flats in Woodside Project’ delivered a number of retrofit upgrades to a newly acquired tower block. This included an electric wet central heating system as their new form of zero direct emissions heating. Options appraisals began in 2012, with project delivery taking place between 2016 and 2023.
- Rural Stirling Housing Association ‘Old Kirk Loan and Craigmore View Heat Replacement Programme’ replaced older storage heaters with air source heat pumps in 40 properties, alongside installing solar PV panels and electricity storage batteries. This was to ensure that the properties met the requirements of EESSH2. The project took place between 2021 and 2022.
About this report
This report provides an overview of the above case studies. It gives social landlords a summary of the key challenges and successes experienced and draws lessons for future projects. The report should not be viewed as a comprehensive piece of research into the experiences of social landlords in delivering zero direct emissions heating projects, as it does not include sufficient numbers of projects to draw any wider conclusions.
Context
Scottish decarbonisation targets and policies
Heat in Buildings Bill and Strategy
The Scottish Government is currently consulting on a Heat in Buildings Bill with proposals on legislation covering energy efficiency standards and heating system requirements. This bill follows on from the 2019 Heat in Buildings Strategy, which outlines how Scotland will reduce greenhouse gas emissions from buildings and remove poor energy performance as a driver of fuel poverty. Since homes and buildings account for a significant portion of Scotland’s greenhouse gas emissions, the Bill is important in achieving Scotland’s statutory emissions target of net zero greenhouse gas emissions by 2045. The Bill will provide a regulatory framework that will drive the development of heat networks, the adoption of zero emission heating systems, and improved standards of energy efficiency.
The Heat in Buildings Strategy sets out the changes required to ensure Scotland’s buildings no longer contribute to climate change. As part of the support package to deliver the strategy, the Scottish Government has committed to invest £1.8 billion in heat and energy efficiency over the lifetime of the parliament. This includes the £200 million allocated to projects through the Social Housing Net Zero Heat Fund.
Energy efficiency standards for social housing
As part of the Heat in Buildings Strategy, the Scottish Government has established targets to improve the energy efficiency of social housing. The purpose of the standard is to encourage landlords to improve the energy efficiency of social housing in Scotland.
EESSH was originally introduced in 2014 and set an initial target for social landlords to meet by the end of 2020. This meant that no eligible social property in Scotland was to be lower than EPC band C or D by the end of 2020.
EESSH2 was established in 2019. It specified that all social housing must meet EPC band B, or be as energy efficient as practicably possible, by the end of December 2032. It also stated that no social housing below EPC band D should be re-let from December 2025, subject to temporary specified exemptions. At the time of writing, EESSH2 has been under review to realign the standard with net zero targets, and the 2032 milestone has been put on hold.
In November 2023, the Scottish Government launched a consultation on a new Social Housing Net Zero Standard, which will replace EESSH2. The proposed new standard includes a minimum fabric efficiency rating and would introduce a requirement to replace polluting heating systems with clean alternatives by 2045. Energy efficiency target ranges and interim target years have been proposed but are yet to be decided.
EPC reform
Improving energy efficiency is an important aspect of the Scottish Government’s decarbonisation and fuel poverty strategies, and EPCs are the most widely used tool for assessing the energy efficiency of properties. A number of issues with the current EPC methodology have been raised in recent years. These include that the current main metric is a cost efficiency rating which does not adequately incentivise the building and heating system improvements necessary to meet net zero targets.[3]
As set out in the Heat in Buildings Strategy, the Scottish Government is progressing work on the reform of EPCs.[4] A consultation on this topic closed in October 2023. The reform proposes to introduce new metrics that, among other things, separate out fabric efficiency and cost, and carbon emissions. The Government is also exploring options for the inclusion of energy use data to make EPCs more accurate and consistent (research by Changeworks, forthcoming). The reform will impact how buildings are assessed to ensure that they comply with Scottish regulations.
Retrofit programmes for social housing
This is a list of current and closed retrofit programmes for social housing and how the funds operate. Most of the case studies accessed one of these funding streams.
Social Housing Net Zero Heat Fund
The Social Housing Net Zero Heat Fund (SHNZHF) is an ongoing Scottish Government programme that supports the decarbonisation of social housing in Scotland. Funding is given to social landlords to install energy efficient zero emissions heating systems in their housing stock. The fund has £200 million available up to 2026.[5]
Low Carbon Infrastructure Transition Programme (Closed 2020)
The Low Carbon Infrastructure Transition Programme (LCITP) was a partnership between the Scottish Government and a range of other enterprise organisations and experts. The aim was to support Scotland’s transition to a low-carbon economy. This involved providing financial support to assist the development and delivery of low-carbon projects. The focus was to assist projects that would secure public and private finance to demonstrate innovative low carbon technology in Scotland. As part of this, financial support was made available to some social landlords delivering zero direct emissions heating projects.[6]
Area Based Schemes
The Area Based Schemes (ABS)[7] is a programme developed by the Scottish Government. It provides grant funding to local authorities to develop and deliver energy efficiency programmes, including measures such as insulation, solar PV and batteries, and air source heat pumps: “This funding is blended with owner’s contributions and funding from Registered Social Landlords who may choose to insulate their homes at the same time”.[8]
Scotland’s Heat Network Fund
Launched in 2022, Scotland’s Heat Network Fund makes £300 million available to applicants from the public and private sector to support the roll-out of large-scale heat networks in Scotland.[9] The Heat Network Support Unit (HNSU)[10] supports pre-capital stages of heat network development.
Other financing options/models
See section 11.2 for other previous funding that shaped the retrofit project landscape over the past 10 years.
Case study aims and motivations
Scotland’s buildings need to decarbonise. The case studies examined in this research demonstrate a range of approaches to how this can be achieved. They also display the many different motivations that underpin the choice to take action on specific buildings.
One of the key priorities present throughout all of the case studies was increasing affordability for residents. In six of the eight case studies, the previous heating system was electric storage heaters, which are known to be both expensive in their operation and can make it difficult to maintain a comfortable temperature. Complaints from residents about high energy costs motivated several of the social landlords to install new heating systems. Two of the landlords had carried out surveys which found that many tenants were unhappy with their existing heating systems.
One housing association noted that in moving from storage heaters, which are controlled room by room, to a central heating system would provide greater comfort for residents.
The decision to install air source heat pumps also related to regulatory requirements for housing associations. While both EESSH2 and EPCs are undergoing review and reform (see sections 4.1.2 and 4.1.3), many social landlords have begun the work needed to bring their housing stock to EPC band B.
For some, the presence of funding was a motivating factor which aligned with other priorities. As one social landlord expressed:
“We had access to funding, it was the right thing to do for the tenants and for the EESSH targets.”
Hebridean Housing Partnership, who have been installing heat pumps in their properties since 2011, described their main driver as “getting ahead of the curve” and making the most of the available funding to install as many heat pumps as possible.
Wider organisation-established goals related to net zero and decarbonisation also factored in, though generally not as highly as the other priorities. One Housing Association, whose project was the only case study that changed the heating systems from gas central heating, did so as part of their goal of being net zero, and they had a clear strategy:
“We wanted to get tenants on board with the idea of decarbonisation. We wanted it to be a positive experience that we could then sell to the rest of our tenants, because that’s the journey we’re on – [we have] committed to being net zero by 2035.”
Their priority was to demonstrate that switching to electric heating does not have to impact people financially, and thus set a positive example which would help deliver more projects in the future.
Overall, the social landlords expressed an awareness and concern for their tenants’ limited income, and some said that this is holding them back from switching on-gas properties to zero direct emissions heating systems.
Key findings: Project planning
Funding and project costs
Six of the eight social landlords we spoke to had received funding from the Social Housing Net Zero Heat Fund (SHNZHF) or the Low Carbon Infrastructure Transition Programme (LCITP). Two social landlords had not applied for Scottish Government funding. One of these was Queen’s Cross Housing Association, who had their project funded through a second stage stock transfer, and whose project began before Government funding became available in 2015. The other, North Lanarkshire Council, found there was no specific retrofit funding available for local authorities when they started the project in 2021, before the launch of the SHNZHF. Instead, their project was funded from their Housing Revenue Account.
Applications
Many found that the process of applying for funding was straightforward, and they were confident that they could do this themselves. Several social landlords found that a key to success was to demonstrate a robust tenant engagement strategy and to focus on the benefits for the householders. As one housing association representative said:
“I have found that Scottish Government are quite good at caring more about what the project is trying to achieve, than focusing too much on the language.”
To help develop their applications, one social landlord consulted with specialists to get figures for expected carbon savings. Another social landlord explained that they considered the application complex and found it useful to partner with a consultant. One social landlord, who used a consultant to write their proposal, has since found that some contractors are willing to include consultancy and application writing in the contract.
One social landlord found that the wait time to get funding confirmation was too long. Despite being ready to go ahead with installations in April, the funding was not confirmed until August of the same year. This caused delays in the timeline that had already been agreed with the contractor.
Internal staff costs
When speaking to the social landlords, we found that most did not consider internal staff costs as a part of the total project cost. When considering the full cost of retrofit, landlords may wish to consider the time and cost not directly related to installation of measures, such as applications, tenant engagement and support provided by their own staff. In the absence of this information, it makes it difficult to get a sense of the full cost of this work and how it varies across the projects.
Key findings
- Most social landlords felt confident about writing the funding applications.
- Some social landlords found it helpful to have a third party involved in writing the funding application or in calculating anticipated carbon savings.
- Staff costs related to tenant engagement were typically considered outside of the project costs and therefore their relative contribution was difficult to quantify.
Heating system considerations
6 domestic air source heat pumps | 1 commercial air source heat pump network | 1 electric wet central heating system |
Several factors influenced which Zero Direct Emissions Heating (ZDEH) system was chosen for the projects. These factors included:
- The type, condition, and location of the properties
- The available funding
- The priorities for the landlord
Air source heat pumps were the most common heating system choice across the case studies. In seven of the eight case studies, most properties had electric storage heating prior to the project installations.
Two projects included some properties using solid fuel, and one project switched the heating system away from gas central heating.
Comparing heat pumps and electric storage heaters
Both air source heat pumps and electric storage heaters fall under the category of Zero Direct Emissions Heating (ZDEH) systems since both run on electricity. Electricity is a less carbon intensive fuel type compared to other heating fuels (e.g. gas and oil). However, the efficiency of an air source heat pump is higher since it uses the latent heat energy in the air outside, resulting in more heat per unit of energy inputted.
Cost and affordability
Cost was a key factor across the case studies. Three of the social landlords considered ground source heat pumps, but the high cost of this solution led them to choose air source heat pumps instead. In one of these cases, there were also limitations related to the composition of the soil and the distance between the buildings, which made ground source heat pumps and district heating nonviable.
Air source heat pumps were preferred in most of the case studies as a more affordable and energy efficient heating solution. Though heat pumps are more expensive to install than electric storage heaters, they are cheaper to run for residents due to higher efficiency, resulting in higher EPC ratings (see Box 1). They are also an increasingly common and well-understood heating system and meet the SHNZHF criteria of having the potential to deliver a significant reduction in greenhouse gas emissions.
One project, delivered by Grampian Housing Association, installed three commercial air source heat pumps to supply 20 properties via a heat network. The key motivation was to increase efficiency and reduce heating costs for the residents. This was further achieved by also installing solar PV and battery storage.
One case study did not install a heat pump-based system. Air source heat pumps had been a desired option but there were not funds available for this after carrying out the prioritised fabric-first upgrades. Government funding was not available at the time to subsidise the measures, therefore electric wet central heating was chosen as a cheaper alternative.
Supply chain
Of the eight case studies, most of the social landlords did not highlight issues relating to the supply chain, however there were two exceptions to this. These landlords reported project delays due to material shortages and noted that many contractors at the time were struggling with supplies of heat pumps.
Maintenance and repairs
Two of the eight case studies referenced maintenance and repairs as a consideration in their choice of technology. They expressed concerns that eventual repairs of the air source heat pumps might be more expensive than the previous gas boilers and electric storage heaters. One social landlord explained that some of their concerns had been realised when some of their air source heat pumps began to develop faults. As a whole-house heating system, rather than a room heater as previously installed (with storage heaters), this was more expensive and challenging to deal with. In one case, a resident had to be relocated for three weeks while their heat pump was replaced.
The same landlord said that they also had worries regarding:
- Availability of organisations offering maintenance services due to the rurality of their area.
- Tenants’ understanding of air source heat pump controls, which it was felt could lead to a higher instance of faults and repairs required.
Planning permission
Two of the case studies experienced challenges that related to planning permissions. In the case of one project, some of the flats were required to have freestanding platforms built for the heat pumps in order to get planning permission. They felt that the platforms would negatively impact the aesthetics of the buildings, so these flats were removed from the project and other properties were included instead.
However, this was not possible for another social landlord for whom planning permission was a major obstacle to project delivery. Concerns had been raised over potential noise from the commercial air source heat pumps, which were close to other private properties. This delayed the project by a year and resulted in the housing association having to pay for sound consultants and the building of a sound box around the heat pump.
Key findings
- Air source heat pumps are the most common ZDEH choice among the case studies.
- High cost was the main reason why ground source heat pumps were not chosen for many of the projects.
- Planning permission needs to be taken into consideration from the outset, as this can result in changes or delays to projects.
Building types
The eight case studies included a wide range of properties built between 1950 and 2008, with the majority from the 1960s, 1990s, and early 2000s. Building types included multi-storey blocks, cottage flats (or four-in-a-blocks), bungalows, and terraced houses. In many cases, the buildings had already received fabric improvements such as external wall insulation, cavity wall insulation, and loft insulation, reducing heat loss enough to make air source heat pumps a viable option. In some cases, fabric improvements took place as part of the projects alongside ZDEH installations.
Most of the case studies encompassed buildings of a similar type and age, which meant that challenges associated with particular building types did not arise. The exception to this was the Hebridean 100 project, which included a wide variety of building types and ages. Despite this, Hebridean Housing Partnership did not report any challenges associated with the installations.
Maryhill Housing Association was able to install individual air source heat pumps in their seven-storey blocks by utilising the drying areas inside the buildings. A similar solution is unlikely to be available in other multi-storey blocks, but other alternatives exist, such as a shared air source heat pump system.[11]
Pilot projects
Multiple social landlords spoke positively about testing the proposed measures on one pilot building before carrying out installations in the rest of the buildings.
In one of the projects, air source heat pumps had already been installed in one block of flats before the landlord applied for funding for the remaining blocks. Another landlord, who did not take this approach, expressed that, in hindsight, it would have been beneficial, even if it had resulted in increased project costs and timelines. In particular, for projects with several large buildings, it was felt that piloting the installations in one building could help make the process smoother and less disruptive for the tenants.
Key findings
- ZDEH systems were installed across many different building types; none of the social landlords reported challenges associated with particular building archetypes.
- In projects involving large buildings, social landlords indicated that it is helpful to deliver at least one building as a pilot building, to better understand what challenges arise.
Impact evaluation
The aim of impact evaluation in the context of a retrofit project is to establish to what extent the aims of the project have been achieved, i.e. to provide evidence of the changes that have taken place as a result of the measures installed. The case studies show a wide variety of approaches to evaluating the impact of the projects. Overall, very little data is currently available either because it has not been collected or because collection is still ongoing. As a result, limited conclusions can be drawn on the outcomes of the projects. Despite this, the different approaches provide insights into the challenges and considerations relating to evaluation work. This section outlines the data that was collected. For a discussion on the findings of the evaluation work see section 8.1.
Data collection
Different aims and motivations (see section 5) affected what evaluation data was collected. EPCs were the form of data most commonly collected across the case studies. For the case studies that emphasised the importance of regulatory compliance, EPCs were considered the main focus of the evaluation work. Improvement in EPC ratings may reflect changes beyond the heating system, including the installation of other energy efficiency measures.
Pre- and post-install surveys were carried out by some of the social landlords, but in most cases, the response rates were low. This limits the ability to carry out a full impact evaluation.
Three projects have been collecting temperature and humidity data via sensors. This data is being collected over a period of at least 12 months to cover weather changes throughout the year, and the collection is still ongoing for two of the projects.
None of the case studies had energy bills or meter reading data that could be included in this research. This data can only be provided by the tenants, which makes it difficult to collect consistently across multiple properties. One social landlord navigated this challenge by collecting data during the annual heat pump servicing. This comprised heat pump and electricity meter readings as well as a satisfaction survey.
Usefulness of data
The social landlords had different perspectives on the importance and usefulness of collecting impact evaluation data. One social landlord explained that data collection was not a high priority on their project since they were confident that heat pumps were a viable option, having collected more evaluation data on previous projects. They highlighted the obvious benefits of heat pumps compared to other forms of electric heating. This landlord noted that future projects where properties are changing from gas central heating to heat pumps will likely require more impact evaluation work to ensure the change does not impact the residents negatively.
Another social landlord explained that collecting impact evaluation data was not a high priority for their limited resources and viewed this type of data as more beneficial to the Scottish Government than to the housing association and their tenants. On smaller projects, some of the social landlords felt that they knew what they needed to know from verbal feedback from their tenants. A majority of the social landlords in the case studies shared positive but anecdotal feedback from their tenants and considered a lack of complaints as a positive indicator.
Different factors drive these perspectives. Planning and delivering robust impact evaluation requires staff time, skills, knowledge, equipment, and funding. It also requires the foresight to plan in advance of the project to gather the necessary pre-installation data. This is particularly challenging since resources are limited for many social landlords. With time restrictions on meeting energy efficiency targets, EPCs become a key focus for many social landlords since it is how their performance is measured.
Key findings
- Social landlords prioritised impact evaluation to different degrees.
- EPCs are the most consistently available source of data across the case studies.
- Some social landlords carried out tenant satisfaction surveys, but overall response rates were low.
- Three case studies collected comprehensive data including from sensors, but for two projects data collection is not yet complete.
Key findings: Project delivery
Tenant engagement
The social landlords displayed care and experience in engaging with their tenants before and during the installation works. There were several different strategies taken, including:
- Carrying out pre-installation surveys
- Employing tenant liaison officers
- Demonstrating the heating system
- Hosting tenant engagement sessions
Tenant project approval
Some of the projects started from the point of tenants being unhappy with their existing heating system. Two of the social landlords surveyed their tenants and found concerns about heating and affordability.
Another landlord hired a consultant to carry out a phone survey with tenants, which focused on attitudes towards decarbonisation and climate change. The results showed that tenants were concerned about climate change and, as a result, were on board with the decarbonisation plans but were mainly concerned about the disruption of the work. The consultant also provided a liaison officer responsible for dialogues with the tenants.
“We didn’t want to just spring [the project] on them. They felt like they were being taken on that [decarbonisation] journey and that they were being listened to.” – Social landlord
A common strategy across the social landlords was to organise tenant engagement sessions, typically hosted in local community spaces. For most of the larger-scale projects, information was sent out in letters and on their websites, while smaller-scale projects were able to have one-to-one conversations with residents about the benefits and cost savings of the projects.
One of the larger projects involving several hundred properties found that they were unable to get in touch with some of the tenants, despite multiple attempts to make contact through letters and via housing officers. Conversely, another landlord found that since their tenants already knew they wanted a heat pump, few turned up to the consultation events.
Example flats
Several social landlords found that demonstrating the new heating system helped their tenants to feel more confident about the installation.
In one of the projects, the heat pump installer and manufacturer attended tenant engagement days, where they displayed the heat pumps and how they operated. The housing association found it helpful that information was provided by a third party, rather than from themselves as the landlord.
By chance, Grampian Housing Association had a void property that they decided to use as a space to demonstrate the installations that would be carried out. This helped tenants understand how the commercial air source heat pump network would work. Such heating system demonstrations were also helpful to residents who did not speak English as their first language.
Mixed tenure
The main focus of all eight case studies was on social housing tenants. Three of the projects also included buildings containing some privately owned properties. Of these, two included large building blocks.
In these case studies, private owners were hesitant to be involved due to the costs of installation. In one project, all five owner-occupiers declined to have air source heat pumps installed on the grounds of cost. In another project, external building works were completed for all properties, including the privately owned ones, but they declined any internal work, which would have been at their own expense.
Budget
Most of the case studies did not have a specific budget for tenant engagement, and the social landlords absorbed most of the tenant engagement costs as staff costs. As a result, the cost of tenant engagement was largely unknown in most instances.
There were two exceptions where external tenant liaison officers were used. Grampian Housing Association had this work carried out by an external consultant, and North Lanarkshire Council had a basic level of tenant engagement included it as part of the work carried out by the contractor who carried out the installations.
Key findings
- The social landlords had many different and often creative ways of engaging with tenants.
- Seeing the new heating system in person before installation can help residents feel more confident about the project.
- Some social landlords found it beneficial to have a third-party organisation involved in the dialogues with tenants or in demonstrating the heating system.
- Mixed-tenure projects remain a challenge. There were no examples of projects which resulted in the installation of ZDEH systems in privately owned properties.
Heating system installation
Location of heating system
The installation of air source heat pumps could present challenges related to the location of the heat pump and its pipework. Due to the layout of the properties, the multi-storey flats in Maryhill Housing Association ended up with significant pipework going across the walls of the properties, which some residents have been unhappy about. The social landlords felt that, on reflection, a better solution would have been to put the pipework under the floors, or at floor level so they are not in the line of sight.
There are also circumstances where the installer and the resident may have different opinions about the optimal location for the heating system. For example, the space selected by contractors might already be used by residents for storage or drying. Some social landlords navigated those situations by installing additional storage space or by paying the contractor the extra cost of placing the heating system elsewhere in the home.
In one of the projects, some of the new water tanks had to be put in a different location to the old ones due to size differences. In these cases, storage space was installed where the old water tank cupboard was located. Actions or adjustments such as these resulted in higher levels of satisfaction from the residents.
Redecoration
Three of the case studies mentioned the need for redecoration of the properties after the new heating system installations, and these cases provided some form of decoration allowance for tenants. These costs cannot be funded as part of grant schemes, and so would have been covered by the social landlords.
One of the social landlords reported that residents were unhappy with the impacts on the property after installation, such as lines where the carpet had been cut when new radiators had been fitted. The landlord gave an allowance for carpet replacements but not for other costs, under the reasoning that some things, such as wallpaper, had been installed at the tenant’s own risk.
Another of the social landlords who had provided a decoration allowance, said they would do this differently in future projects. They had found that the decoration allowance, which was given as cash, was sometimes spent on other things besides redecorating the property.
Unexpected costs
Several of the case studies experienced costs related to the project that they had not been able to plan for. These were different in each of the cases and are highlighted here to inform future projects.
Gas meter removal
Grampian Housing Association experienced a challenge around meters after installing commercial heat pumps. It turned out that the energy supplier charged a high cost for the removal of the gas meters. This was important because without the removal, standing charges were building up for the tenants. The housing association found that this cost could not be covered by the funding. Since removal is charged per meter, this led to a significant extra cost. Grampian Housing Association was the only case study that previously had gas heating and therefore was the only case to encounter this issue.
Grid infrastructure
In one rural property, the social landlord encountered a challenge around connecting the solar PV and battery storage to the electricity grid. The Distribution Network Operator sought a significant financial contribution to improve the infrastructure of the local electricity network to enable the connection. The issue of who will pay this cost has not yet been resolved.
Planning permission
Grampian Housing Association experienced a significant additional cost to install an acoustic enclosure around their commercial air source heat pumps to address the planners’ concerns about potential noise levels. Since they did not expect this cost at the start of the project, it was not covered by the grant funding. This issue also caused significant project delays.
Key findings
Examples of areas that may incur costs include:
- Gas meter removal
- Changes to the built environment required for planning permission
- Improvements to the electricity grid when installing solar PV
Key findings: Post project
Tenant support
Metering
It is often necessary to change the meter when a new heating system has been installed, and this proved to be a challenge in several of the case studies. Many of the properties had had electric storage heating with a dual rate electricity meter, which has lower rates at night when the heater is charging but higher costs during the day. Changing to an air source heat pump required having a single rate meter installed, to avoid disproportionately high costs for heating the home during the day.
Since energy accounts are a matter between householder and supplier, residents have to contact the supplier individually to request a meter change. This can be a slow and difficult process[12].
After their tenants had experienced these challenges, one social landlord contacted the company that supplied the majority of the properties to facilitate quicker installation of smart meters. In a different project, the contractor supported tenants in-person to speak with their supplier and ensure they got the correct meter. This was beneficial for both the residents and the housing association.
Using the new heating system
A common challenge with air source heat pumps was enabling residents to use them correctly and efficiently. Heat pumps work best when they maintain a constant temperature. This is different from gas boilers. which are typically operated for a few hours at a time, giving a shorter burst of heat, or storage heaters which heat up overnight and gradually release this heat during the day. One social landlord felt that they needed to shift residents’ mindsets around how and when to heat their homes.
Some of the social landlords made different heating controls available to support tenants in controlling their heating. In one project, this took the form of an app. The landlord explained that the app makes it is easier to adjust the temperature than the heat pump controls. This enables householders to set the temperature to be slightly lower when they are not in the house, and warmer when they are at home. The downside is that some demographics, especially older residents, may be unable to use the app, due to lack of access to a smartphone or the internet, or challenges with IT literacy.
In two of the case studies, the social landlords did not have dedicated resources to support their tenants in how to use the heat pumps efficiently. In one of the cases, a third party had been contracted to carry out tenant support for both meter change and use of the system, but for unclear reasons it did not go ahead. As a result, the social landlord is in the process of carrying out engagement, which is ongoing.
Key findings
- Meter changes can be more challenging and time consuming than expected, and difficult for some tenants to undertake without support.
- For many households, a new heating system may not be intuitive and require getting used to a very different way of heating the home.
- Ensuring ease of use of the new heating system for tenants is likely to result in higher levels of satisfaction.
Project results
As discussed in section 6.5, the available impact evaluation data is limited due to either not having been collected or collection not yet being complete. This section gives an overview of the high-level outcomes across the projects, where possible.
EPC ratings
All social landlords with data saw improvements in their properties’ EPC ratings as a result of the projects. Before the installations, all properties fell within band E, D, or C, with the majority in band D. After the measures had been installed, all properties achieved band C or B, with the exception of three solid wall houses whose EPC ratings decreased from band D to band E. It is unknown why this was the case and may have been the result of an assessment error.
The average improvement in SAP scores varied across projects depending on the building type, previous heating system, and whether other measures were installed. The most significant SAP score increase took place in Queens Cross Housing Association’s project. Before the project, a sample property[13] was in EPC band E, while all properties post-project achieved band C or B, depending on the number of exposed walls.
Affordability
All case studies faced the challenge that the heating system changes coincided with a period of significant energy price increases. As a result, many tenants have experienced higher energy costs despite their new heating system being cheaper to run per kWh. Since energy consumption data was not available for any of the projects, it is difficult to calculate the counterfactual (i.e. what would the energy costs have been if a new heating system had not been installed).
Tenant satisfaction
It has not been possible to draw definitive conclusions on the residents’ satisfaction with their new heating systems due to a lack of representative data. All social landlords reported that many of their tenants were happy with their new heating system. Most of the information was anecdotal, and several social landlords saw the lack of complaints as a success in itself.
“The thing with tenants is, if nothing’s going bad, you don’t hear from them.” – social landlord
Where tenant feedback was available, the negative comments primarily related to high energy costs or issues with understanding their heat pump and controlling the temperature. The positive comments related to feeling warmer and more comfortable, and finding the system easier to use. Some tenants felt positive about their new heating system despite high bills, as they took this to be a result of the wider energy price increases rather than a result of the new heating system.
Hebridean Housing Partnership was the only project where comprehensive tenant satisfaction data was available at the time of writing. Their survey, which was carried out as part of their annual heat pump service, reported a 95% satisfaction rate.
Key findings
- EPC ratings improved across all projects.
- The majority of properties achieved an EPC B or C rating after the installations.
- It has been difficult to assess to what degree the affordability has changed due to increased energy costs.
- Many social landlords anecdotally reported that their tenants feel positive about the heating system change, but there is limited data available to quantify this.
Conclusions
Social landlords in Scotland are in the process of improving their housing stock to meet future needs. Many are making use of Scottish Government funding, which has been made available for this purpose.
Most of the case studies included in this research have installed air source heat pumps. Compared to ground source heat pumps and heat networks, air source heat pumps have lower capital costs and require less involvement and responsibility from the housing provider, which makes them a more attractive choice for many social landlords. Some social landlords and tenants have experienced challenges around the operation of the air source heat pumps, including access to maintenance engineers.
The buildings in these case studies do not represent Scotland’s many older or ‘hard-to-treat’ buildings. Rather, many of the projects that have been completed so far involve buildings that were easier to upgrade, such as those that were ‘heat pump ready’ or only required cavity wall insulation.
The majority of the properties in this research switched from electric storage heating. The social landlords found that this necessitated a significant change in tenants’ heating patterns and behaviours, which was identified as a key challenge related to air source heat pumps. Doing this successfully requires a level of support for the tenants. The nature of heat pumps offers the benefit of more consistent temperatures. However, the constant use needed to efficiently achieve this, could be putting use of the heating system beyond the reach of those in fuel poverty. This is likely to prove more challenging when moving properties away from gas central heating.
Limited collection of impact evaluation data is a significant barrier to quantifying how the projects have impacted tenants. Without such data, the social landlords cannot determine whether the original aims of their project, such as increasing affordability and comfort, have been met. Some project data will become available in 2024. This research highlights that impact evaluation work is a long process, and the most useful data is collected consistently over a number of years.
Overall, the majority of the social landlords were satisfied with the outcomes of their projects and the installation process. Despite the lack of formal impact evaluation in some cases, many anecdotally described an encouraging response from their tenants and perceived the lack of complaints as a positive result. However, this absence of complaints does not necessarily guarantee satisfaction or that there would not be more to learn through seeking feedback directly.
Lessons for future social housing energy efficiency and heating projects
Lessons for social landlords:
- Tenant engagement: Consider a mixed-method approach to engage and support a range of residents, such as face-to-face events, ongoing support and opportunities to see and use the technology in-situ.
- Impact evaluation: This should be planned from the outset of the project to truly understand the impact of the project on tenants, its success in achieving its aims and how it might be improved for next time. The methodology should provide a before and after picture, and include temperature and humidity assessments, energy consumption data and EPC data.
- Multiple buildings: In projects involving large or multiple buildings, delivering at least one building as a pilot helps identify and address any challenges. Rolling the installations out in one building helps to reduce disruption and focus tenant support.
- Project management and costs: If you plan to procure a project manager, involving them from the outset means that they can support with application writing. It should be noted that there may be a cost to this, which should be taken into account. Consider aspects such as planning permission requirements, meter changes and electricity grid upgrades at an early stage to avoid unexpected costs.
Appendix / Appendices
Methodology
Case study selection criteria
The following lays out the criteria by which the case study selection was made.
|
Priority |
Criteria |
Reasoning |
|
1 |
Evaluation Reports |
Aimed to select case studies that had data available to provide information about the impact of the project. |
|
2 |
ZDEH Solution |
Providing case studies with a mix of ZDEH solutions will be useful for a wide range of social landlords. |
|
3 |
Funding sources |
We want to highlight that a range of funding sources are available but are aware that these can change, so focused on examples most relevant to social landlords. |
|
4 |
Archetypes |
It is key to have a range of housing types represented so that the case studies are relevant for social landlords with diverse properties. |
|
5 |
Landlord type |
A range of social landlords will help engage varied groups and increase the relatability and therefore impact of the case studies. |
|
6 |
Other measures |
Providing insights into other measures will help landlords to consider the energy efficiency of the whole property. |
|
7 |
Delivery agents and installers |
To ensure a non-biased view of delivery and the challenges associated. |
|
8 |
Project costs |
By prioritising criteria such as a range of housing type and solutions used, we will collate data on varied project costs. |
|
9 |
Location |
Aimed to include a diverse range of locations to represent the diverse urban and rural install experience, as this can impact the associated challenges. However, other aspects such as housing type will be prioritised, as we expect the range of case studies to be applicable to different locations in Scotland overall. |
Overview case study selection process and limitations
A list of potential case studies was compiled based on an online search, which included publicly available funding reports. A call for case studies was shared by the Scottish Federation of Housing Associations on their social media and via their newsletter and an email to their decarbonisation group. Scottish Government also sent out emails to their distribution lists. This resulted in a list of 23 projects which met the research requirements. Eight projects were finally selected based on the selection criteria.
Finding projects with robust evaluation data was a high priority, and it proved to be a significant challenge. Detailed information about the projects’ approach to impact evaluation was not available before the interviews, and each interviewee had a different perspective on what robust evaluation data includes. Additionally, many of the projects have only recently been completed, and data collection is still ongoing in the projects with the most comprehensive evaluation approach.
The case studies cover a limited range of heating systems with an overweight of air source heat pumps. Many examples of other heating systems, such as district heating and ground source heat pumps, were primarily found in new build housing which was out of scope of the research.
Finding examples of projects that include mixed tenures was also challenging as there were few examples that met the research criteria. As a result, the conclusions drawn in this area are limited.
Several of the social landlords had changes to their staff since the project was completed. In some cases, this meant that interviewees were unfamiliar with certain aspects or stages of the project, limiting what information they could pass on.
Interview topic guide
Section 1: Background of the project
1. Can you start by giving me an overview of the project?
Prompts:
- What measures were installed?
- How many properties had measures installed?
- What property archetypes were included? (detached, four-in-a-block, high rise)
- Were all households tenants of the housing association, or were other tenure types included?
2. What motivated your organisation to develop the project?
- Did you complete any (other) energy efficiency upgrades around the same time as this project?
3. How did you determine what measures you wanted to install?
- In particular, why this ZDEH technology?
- Did the archetype of the properties factor into the decision?
- What heating type was in place before?
- Had the properties had any other recent energy efficiency retrofit work done?
4. Can you give a rough timeline of the project?
- I.e. start date, finish date, when did tenant engagement start, when were installs completed
5. What is the current status of the project?
Section 2: Project delivery and practicalities
6. Did you have any challenges associated with delivering the proposed number of installs?
- Did you take any steps to mitigate these issues? If yes:
- What did you do?
- How effective was this?
7. How did you decide on an appropriate contractor for installing the measures?
- Did you have contractors involved in other parts of the project, such as impact evaluation?
8. What approach did you take to engaging with the tenants?
- Would you say it was successful?
- What was the tenants experience of the project overall?
- Can you give an approximate cost of these engagement activities?
Section 3: Financial considerations
9. Did you receive any funding to deliver the project?
- How was the process to access that funding?
- Do you have recommendations for other social landlords regarding funding and the application process?
10. What was the overall cost of the project?
Did you have other funding sources, or was the rest covered entirely by your organisation?
11. Do you know how much of that was associated with the cost of purchasing the equipment, and of installing the measures?
- Did the equipment and installation costs vary based on property size or building archetype? If so, how?
- If mixed-tenure present: Were there any cost variations as a result of the mixed-tenure nature of the scheme?
12. What other costs were there?
- Was there a budget for:
- Tenant engagement activities?
- Monitoring and evaluation?
Section 4: Project impacts
13. Who carried out the evaluation work?
- What was the cost of evaluation?
- Was the cost of evaluation considered when deciding whether to evaluate the project or not?
14. What kind of impact evaluation data was collected as part of the project?
- What was the sample size for each of these methods?
- Was this collected both before and after?
- Did the before and after periods include heating seasons?
15. How did the energy efficiency of the properties change as a result of the decarbonisation project?
- What evidence do you have to support this?
- What was the impact of the measures on the SAP score?
16. Do you know what the impact of the project has been on energy use?
- Were you able to calculate an average change in kWh per property?
- What was the impact of this on tenant fuel bills?
17. Do you have any figures on the carbon savings that resulted from the project?
- If yes, how was this calculated?
18. Do you know what the impact of the measures were on temperature and humidity of the properties?
- Were there any trends seen across the properties?
- Did you calculate average temp and humidity changes that we report in the case study?
19. What was the householders’ experience pre and post installation?
Section 5: Recommendations for future projects and other social landlords
20. What challenges did you experience during the project?
- Were these centered around any particular project stages?
- Were there specific challenges associated with the archetype, tenure, or location of the buildings?
- How did you overcome these challenges?
21. What were the most successful aspects of the project?
- What factors were behind these successes?
22. Do you feel that the project has met its aims? Why/why not?
23. If you were to carry out a similar project in the future, is there anything you would do differently?
Historic funding schemes
UK Social Housing Decarbonisation Fund Demonstrator
Three Scottish projects included. The current fund is England-only.
Non-domestic Renewable Heat Incentive
Now closed. One project applied but did not get it due to mistake on application.
© Published by Changeworks, 2024 on behalf of ClimateXChange. All rights reserved.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
NB. As set out in the Heat in Buildings Strategy, the Scottish Government is progressing work on the reform of EPCs. A consultation on this topic closed in October 2023. The reform proposes to introduce new metrics that, among other things, separate out fabric efficiency and cost, and carbon emissions. ↑
Scottish Government (2023) Social housing net zero standard: consultation ↑
Climate Change Committee (2023) Letter: Reform of domestic EPC rating metrics to Patrick Harvie MSP ↑
Scottish Government (2023) Energy Performance Certificate (EPC) reform: consultation ↑
This research focuses on specific criteria therefore this case sample is not representative of the success and outcomes of the SHNZHF overall. The SHNZHF was originally part of the LCITP. The SHNZHF is an ongoing programme whereas the LCITP has closed. ↑
This research focuses on specific criteria therefore this case sample is not representative of the success and outcomes of the LCITP overall. ↑
Formerly ‘Energy Efficient Scotland: Area Based Schemes’ or EES:ABS ↑
Scottish Government (2023) Area-Based Schemes ↑
Scottish Government (2023) Scotland’s Heat Network Fund: application guidance ↑
European Heat Pump Association (2023) Heat pumps and high rises: Case studies from across Europe ↑
Ofgem (2023) Ofgem review reveals that customer service standards of energy suppliers must improve ↑
Given the standard nature of the flats, only one pre-install EPC was provided by the social landlord for analysis. ↑
Research completed in July 2024
DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/4431
Executive summary
Introduction
This study assesses the likely impact of an electricity pricing model known as locational marginal pricing (LMP), as well as its potential alternatives, in the context of the Scottish Government’s Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan ambitions. LMP is a component of the UK Government’s ongoing Review of Electricity Market Arrangements (REMA) and could significantly impact Scotland’s energy landscape.
The assessment is based on a literature review and engagement with an expert advisory panel, including members from across the energy industry. The study was conducted between September 2023 and January 2024 and the assessment is based on the literature available at the time.
Under LMP, the national wholesale electricity market would be split into several smaller areas. This creates the opportunity to provide different local price signals that incentivise the optimal siting of generation, demand, and flexibility across the areas. Such incentives can improve the utilisation of renewable energy, reduce the need for network build and reduce costs. Additionally, variations in price provide flexible assets with locationally specific dispatch signals. This encourages these assets to adjust their consumption or generation to match local grid requirements, further reducing system costs. However, LMP creates significant uncertainty for market participants and could discourage investment in some low-carbon technologies in different parts of GB.
Findings
Based on the Scottish Government’s energy transition ambitions, we have categorised the impacts of LMP into the following four categories:
- The scale up of low-cost renewable energy
Without insulating mechanisms, LMP would heighten price risk (£/MWh sold) and volume risk (MWh sold) for Scottish renewable generators. Delays to transmission network build would exacerbate this. Elevated risk could increase the cost of capital for new developments, potentially negating the modelled system benefit of LMP. Renewables support mechanisms could help mitigate disruption to Scotland’s renewables pipeline, reducing UK decarbonisation risks. Wider benefits of the green economy in Scotland are closely tied to the continued buildout of renewables.
- Adhere to the principles of a fair and just transition.
Studies suggest that, due to the significant existing capacity of renewables, Scottish consumers could benefit from some of the lowest wholesale power prices in Europe under LMP. Conversely, as LMP creates regional differences in price, some GB regions would see increases in prices. The extent to which this materialises depends on policy design and the pace at which LMP is implemented. The impact of LMP is reduced the later it is implemented as the network is reinforced to 2035, reducing transmission constraints.
- Support accelerated decarbonisation.
LMP is unlikely to accelerate the decarbonisation of the power sector. LMP could even slow decarbonisation down by causing a hiatus in investment if implemented without sufficient mitigations demonstrating that renewable support can be maintained. However, the potential to improve system efficiency could decrease the cost of the UK power system between £0.2bn-1.6bn annually (AFRY 2023, Aurora 2023). In Scotland, lower wholesale prices could reduce the cost of electrification of sectors such as transport, heat and industry, and could play a part in attracting new industries and green hydrogen production.
- Enable a secure and flexible net zero energy system.
LMP has the potential to encourage the efficient location and operation of assets that provide flexibility to the electricity system. Due to significant capacity of renewables in Scotland, LMP could attract further investment in flexible assets. This would help to reduce network congestion in Scotland, allowing for greater penetration of renewable generation. However, strategic planning is necessary to ensure that Scotland receives the network capacity required for further development of renewables.
Conclusions
The authors have critiqued quantitative and qualitative studies on the possible impact of LMP, assessing the strength of assumptions used in the studies. This overview of the conclusions is based on this literature review as well as evidence gained through the expert advisory panel.
- Scotland must prioritise and coordinate a strategic plan for renewable generation and network reinforcement with the UK Government.
If LMP is to be introduced, mechanisms to support renewables need to be feasible. Long-term locational signals for strategically siting renewables are vital for achieving a low-cost net zero power system by 2035. Support mechanisms like a reformed Contracts for Difference scheme that protect against revenue and volume risk, are essential to maintaining investor confidence in Scottish renewables. Alternatively, reformed Transmission Network Use of System charges could offer locational investment signals in a national market, although they lack the same operational signals created by LMP.
- LMP would provide the clearest dispatch signal for flexibility, delivering efficient investment and operation of flexibility.
Maximising the use of renewables can only be done with significant flexibility. LMP can provide effective investment signals for the development of flexibility in Scotland. Of the options evaluated, LMP can also provide the clearest operational dispatch signals to optimise the use of flexibility. Local constraint markets are a potential alternative to LMP, although they may introduce further market complexity and are unlikely to fully replicate the effects of LMP.
- The potential benefits of LMP for consumers are greater the earlier it is introduced.
A quick implementation of LMP would create the most significant benefit for Scottish consumers. As the transmission network is upgraded to 2035, the benefits of LMP are reduced. However, LMP will likely take four to eight years to implement and must be done with care, providing support for existing and future renewable generation.
- Careful implementation of LMP is required to address regional differences in price across GB.
LMP will create regional differences in price across GB that need to be carefully considered. Scottish consumers would likely be a key winner of LMP, benefiting from lower wholesale prices. However, support for renewables needs to be secured to ensure that investment stays in Scotland, jobs are realised, and the wider benefits of net zero can be delivered. Future renewables support needs to be designed and communicated ahead of a transition to LMP.
Abbreviations table
|
CfD |
Contracts for Difference |
|
BAU |
Business-as-usual |
|
BM |
Balancing Mechanism |
|
CCUS |
Carbon capture, utilisation, and storage |
|
EAP |
Expert advisory panel |
|
EV |
Electric vehicle |
|
FES |
Future Energy Scenarios |
|
FTR |
Financial transmission right |
|
H2 |
Hydrogen |
|
HDV |
Heavy duty vehicle |
|
HND |
Holistic Network Design |
|
HP |
Heat pump |
|
LCM |
Local constraint market |
|
LCOH |
Levelised cost of hydrogen |
|
LMP |
Locational marginal pricing |
|
MO |
Market operator |
|
NGESO |
National Grid Electricity System Operator |
|
NOA |
Network Options Assessment |
|
PPA |
Power purchase agreement |
|
REMA |
Review of Electricity Market Arrangements |
|
SO |
System operator |
|
SWOT |
Strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats |
|
TCO |
Total cost of ownership |
|
TNUoS |
Transmission Network Use of System |
|
WACC |
Weighted average cost of capital |
|
VAT |
Value Added Tax |
Glossary
|
Assets |
In the context of this report, assets include any source of power demand or generation on the electricity system. This includes generating assets, demand-side assets, energy storage, and interconnectors. |
|
Balancing |
The continuous adjustment of generation and consumption of electricity to maintain a stable grid. As generation and demand need to be matched in real-time, National Grid ESO performs balancing actions to do so. The primary mechanism for this is the Balancing Mechanism. |
|
Capacity |
Maximum amount of instantaneous power an asset can provide (usually measured in MW). |
|
Capacity Market |
A mechanism from the UK Government to ensure there is enough generating capacity to enable security of supply. The Capacity Market provides payments for the availability of reliable sources of power. |
|
Congestion |
When there is insufficient network capacity to transport electricity from generators to consumers. |
|
Congestion rent |
Additional revenue collected by the Market Operator under LMP markets when the network is congested. Areas with an oversupply will see generators receiving lower prices. Areas with an undersupply will see consumers paying higher prices. The difference between these is collected as congestion rent. |
|
Contracts for Difference |
The main mechanism through which renewable generation is supported in the UK. Enables stable revenues by auctioning “strike prices” for generators. When wholesale prices fall below the strike price, generators receive a top-up. When wholesale prices exceed the strike price, generators must pay back excess revenues. |
|
Curtailment |
The intentional reduction of electricity generation, primarily due to excess generation (e.g. during high wind periods), or grid constraints. |
|
Demand-side response |
Demand-side response is a form of flexibility by shifting electricity consumption according to grid requirements or market signals. This can achieve an equal but opposite effect of flexing generation. |
|
Dispatch |
The process of determining which generating units will supply electricity to meet demand at any given moment. In the UK generators “self-dispatch,” choosing when to provide electricity, while National Grid ESO can then proceed to redispatch electricity according to real-time balancing requirements. |
|
Dispatchable generation |
Generating assets that can be controlled and scheduled, such as gas power plants or hydro-electric plants. |
|
Distribution network |
The network that transports electricity from the transmission network to consumers. Some new intermittent renewable energy sources are also directly connected to the distribution network. |
|
Electrolyser |
A device that uses electricity to split water into its constituent parts: hydrogen and oxygen. |
|
Embedded generation or storage |
Any assets that can deliver power and are connected to the distribution, rather than transmission system. In the UK, most solar generation is connected to the distribution system. |
|
Firm access rights |
The guaranteed access to the network for certain types of assets. In the GB national wholesale market, this means generators can sell electricity without considering the impact on network constraints. |
|
Flexibility |
The ability to adjust the generation/consumption of electricity to meet grid requirements. This is essential to provide a reliable and stable grid in an electricity system with growing intermittent renewable generation. Includes dispatchable generation, energy storage, interconnectors, and demand-side response. |
|
Flexibility market |
Markets operated by NGESO or distribution network operators that procure flexibility to ensure the needs of the grid are met. Flexibility providers are typically paid on either an availability (£/MW/h) and/or utilisation (£/MWh) basis. |
|
Interconnector |
High-voltage power cables that connect the grid in GB with other countries e.g. France and the Netherlands, allowing for power trading across markets. |
|
Liquidity / illiquidity |
The degree to which electricity can be bought and sold easily, quickly, and with minimal impact on prices. |
|
Locational element / signal |
Incentives to invest and/or operate assets in ways that reflect local grid requirements i.e. generation, demand, network constraints. |
|
Locational marginal pricing |
A wholesale electricity market reform that divides a single national market into smaller markets. |
|
Market Operator |
In an LMP market, the Market Operator is responsible for the operation of the wholesale market and administering the pricing mechanism of the market. If introduced in the UK, this task would likely fall to National Grid ESO. |
|
Network constraints |
Physical bottlenecks on the electricity network that occur when the amount of electricity that needs to be transmitted from generating assets to demand exceeds the maximum possible flows of the network. In this study, network constraints generally refer to constraints on the transmission network. |
|
Operational efficiency |
In the context of wholesale markets, the ability for assets to appropriately schedule generation or consumption to best match grid requirements, enabling a cost-effective system. |
|
Peaker plant |
A type of generating plant that is designed to operate intermittently during periods of high electricity demand (peak demand). |
|
Power purchase agreement |
Bilateral agreements between generators and suppliers or consumers that allow generators to reduce wholesale market price risk by selling electricity at a pre-agreed price. |
|
Redispatch |
A change in the operating schedule of a generating asset to balance supply and demand or resolve network constraints. National Grid ESO may pay generators to redispatch. |
|
Settlement period |
Half-hourly period in which electricity is traded in UK markets. |
|
Transmission losses |
The electricity dissipated as heat when transmitted across the network. |
|
Transmission network |
High-voltage network that transports bulk electricity from large generating assets to distribution networks. Most large-scale generation is connected to the transmission network. |
|
Variable renewable energy / generation |
Renewable energy sources that generate intermittently based on variable resources like wind or solar, as opposed to dispatchable generation that can be actively adjusted. |
|
Wholesale electricity market |
The main market for electricity to be sold between generators and suppliers on day-ahead or intra-day time scales. Electricity not sold in bilateral trades will be sold in the wholesale market. |
Introduction
In this section we will introduce the context of this literature review and the concept of locational marginal pricing (LMP). This is followed by a brief introduction on the ambitions of the Scottish Government regarding the climate transition, how this relates to electricity market reform, and what the key limitations of this review are.
Context
This study has been commissioned by ClimateXChange, acting on behalf of the Scottish Government, to explore the likely impact that LMP, as an approach to wholesale electricity market reform, could have in Scotland. LMP is currently being explored as part of the Review of Electricity Market Arrangements (REMA), the UK Government’s consultation on the reforms required to make electricity markets fit for a net zero energy system. REMA’s scope of potential reform is very wide, looking at almost all aspects of electricity markets. As LMP has the potential to significantly impact Scotland’s energy landscape, it is of particular interest.
This is an independent review of LMP and its alternatives and does not represent the view of the Scottish Government. The authors have critiqued quantitative and qualitative studies on the possible impact of LMP, assessing the strength of assumptions used in the studies. The study was conducted between September 2023 and January 2024 and the assessment is based on the literature available at the time. The conclusions are based on this evidence as well as evidence gained through an expert advisory panel (EAP). The EAP was invited to contribute and comment on the interim findings of the study. Members of this panel include various stakeholders across government, energy research centres, renewables developers, flexibility aggregators, industry, community, consumer and business representatives, energy suppliers, and large consumers of electricity in Scotland. This panel was invited to two 2-hour presentations and roundtable discussions. The panel’s views have been considered in our analysis, and certain commentary has been highlighted in this report. In addition, the study team responded to additional engagement requests for bilateral discussions with members of the panel representing industry and energy system representatives. One of these was followed by detailed letters setting out the members’ views on the interim findings.
The review has been structured into three sections. Firstly, a literature review of LMP and its alternatives, including an assessment of recently published cost-benefit assessments. Secondly, an analysis of how LMP may impact – positively and negatively – the Scottish Government’s key ambitions outlined in the Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan, amongst others. Thirdly, the study presents a set of conclusions and suggested next steps.
Locational marginal pricing
Electricity that is not traded under bilateral agreements between generators and suppliers/consumers is sold in the wholesale market. The current GB electricity wholesale market is a national market with marginal pricing[1]. This means that across the market, electricity can be bought or sold regardless of the location of the consumer or generator and the resulting grid conditions this creates. As the price is set by the cost of the marginal generator, the revenue or cost seen by all generators or consumers is the same price across GB for each settlement period. A settlement period is the 30-minute period in which volumes of electricity are traded.
Under LMP, the wholesale market would be split up into several zones (zonal pricing), or many (multiples of) nodes (nodal pricing), see Figure 1. With zonal pricing, the boundaries between zones reflect network constraints (bottlenecks) on the transmission network. These network constraints occur when power flow is limited by the capacity of the physical network. With nodal pricing, each location where demand or generation is connected to the transmission network is known as a node. For each settlement period, consumers and generators in different zones/nodes can experience different wholesale prices, depending on the local level of generation, demand, and network constraint.

LMP is being proposed in REMA as a potential mechanism to tackle the drawbacks of a national market in a net zero power system. A key drawback of a national wholesale market is that transmission losses and network constraints are not considered in the wholesale price of electricity. Therefore, national pricing does not incentivise efficient investment decisions for generation, demand and flexibility to locate where it is most helpful for the system. On a constrained network with a national market, generation often needs to be re-dispatched to resolve constraints, creating additional costs. The annual cost of this transmission constraints has been growing in recent years (£170m in 2010, £1.3bn in 2022), and will likely increase with a higher proportion of renewable generation outpacing transmission capacity (National Grid ESO, 2022a).
The main theoretical benefits of LMP are improved locational signals for investment, as well as improved operational efficiency. This improves whole system efficiency, thus reducing cost. Different prices across zones or nodes set by local generation, demand, and network constraint, create new investment incentives for assets and consumers to locate where it is most economical. In the long-term this should create a more efficient system, reducing the need for network reinforcement. Additionally, as locational pricing reflects the current level of demand and supply in the region, price signals incentivise optimal dispatch of generation, demand and flexibility, improving operational efficiency. However, operationally, there are also non-price factors which influence investment decisions – including Government policy, planning, natural resources, access to skills, supply chains and connectivity.
Objectives of the Scottish Government
The Scottish Government has outlined its ambitions relating to the energy transition in its Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan (ESJTP) (2023). The ambitions of the Scottish Government have been further detailed in the Heat in Buildings Strategy (2021), the Hydrogen Action Plan (2022), and the National Transport Strategy 2 (2020). This study aims to discuss how LMP will impact the Scottish Government in achieving these ambitions. The ambitions can be summarised into the following four broad categories:
- Support ambitions to scale up low-cost renewable energy.
- Adhere to the principles of a fair and just transition.
- Support accelerated decarbonisation of heat, transport, and industry, including through CCUS and hydrogen.
- Enable a secure and flexible net zero energy system which is not dependent on fossil fuels.
In Section 4 of this report, we detail which ambitions are sensitive to the impact of LMP and summarise the key strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (SWOT) of LMP relating to Scotland’s ambitions.
Key outcomes for wholesale market reform
Wholesale market reform will have widespread impacts on Scotland’s ESJTP, as well as wider economic implications. By reviewing Sottish Government strategy papers and assessing where wholesale market reform has significant impact, we have developed key outcomes that need to be prioritised for electricity market reform to align with Scotland’s ambitions:
- Strategic coordination of renewable development and network investment is required to ensure that renewables continue to be deployed in Scotland and net zero is achieved.
- UK decarbonisation relies on significant capacity of renewables being built in Scotland.
- Strategic planning of renewable development is required to place generation where it is most suitable, whilst considering existing and future network capacity and the pace required for decarbonisation.
- More efficient locational dispatch signals are necessary to encourage flexibility and enable greater renewable penetration.
- Granular locational dispatch signals that provide the right signals for flexibility, in the right places, are essential for a power system with a high penetration of renewables and significant network constraints.
- Mechanisms that allow demand, including industry, businesses, and domestic consumers to benefit from the lower cost of renewable generation are required.
- GB already generates significant electricity from renewable sources, yet consumers still pay prices largely defined by national gas generation.
- Benefits and costs of a green transition need to be shared fairly.
- Changes in market arrangements need to consider the winners and losers of reform, as well as the status quo, to ensure that costs and benefits are distributed fairly.
- Market arrangements need to ensure that investment is incentivised at pace yet is also cost efficient, minimising energy bills for consumers.
- Wider economic benefits, skills, fair work, and quality jobs need to be maintained and created for local communities.
Key limitations in the quantitative modelling of LMP
This review is based on a qualitative assessment of existing published literature. As such, it does not include any further detailed modelling. The main limitation of the assessment of LMP in the Scottish and GB context is the uncertainty of quantitative outcomes published in reports by Aurora (2023), FTI (2023), and AFRY (2023). These constituted the main published economic cost-benefit analysis of LMP in GB at the time of writing, between October 2023 and February 2024.
It needs to be noted that significant assumptions are made within the existing modelling that can materially impact any outcomes. Firstly, the benefits of the studies are compared to a counterfactual of the existing national market arrangements. Regardless of whether LMP is implemented, the market will likely see significant reform. As alternative reform is not predictable, comparing LMP to the existing market arrangements provides a baseline to assess wider reforms and alternative measures against in future studies. We acknowledge the limitations with this approach; however, this reflects the nature of existing studies and literature. This will likely lead to an overestimation of the benefits of LMP compared to a future reformed national market. On the contrary, some negative impacts may be overstated due to the mitigations that wider reforms – particularly to investment policy – could deliver.
Indeed, additional reforms introduced alongside LMP are equally uncertain. The design of investment policy (e.g. the reform of Contracts for Difference, CfD) will have a significant impact on scale of the benefits of LMP. The modelled benefits of LMP are also significantly impacted by the level of transmission network buildout. National Grid ESO are proposing substantial levels of network build. Each study includes various scenarios which make assumptions about the level of network buildout expected over the modelled period. Finally, the timing of when LMP is introduced will have a significant impact on the potential scale of benefits. The benefits will likely reduce the later LMP is introduced, as network build progresses and alleviates constraints costs. However, the rate of required buildout is unprecedented[2] (National Grid, 2023) and may see delays.
Due to these limitations, the absolute values of the outcomes in these studies will have significant levels of uncertainty. Therefore, while we have used absolute values for subsequent analysis, in general, we have conveyed the general trends of the outcomes of the studies.
A literature review of the impacts of LMP and alternatives
This section comprises of a literature review of the impacts of LMP and its alternatives. We have included both quantitative and qualitative studies in the GB context, with some additional insight from international markets. This section has been split into the following themes to guide the review:
- Consumers and end users
- Investment and decarbonisation
- Market arrangements
Furthermore, this section provides a critique of the modelling assumptions taken in the literature and a high-level review of the alternative reforms to LMP explored in the literature.
Consumers and end users
System cost/net economic benefit
The net economic benefit of introducing LMP, both zonal and nodal pricing, has been most extensively modelled by Aurora (2023), FTI Consulting (2023), and AFRY (2023) in recent studies. These assess the impact that LMP will have on the whole system cost of the power system. Whole system cost includes wholesale cost, balancing costs, CfD cost, and congestion rent. Overall, these cost benefit analyses suggest that, in the broad terms, LMP would improve market efficiency and reduce net costs to the consumer (Table 1), i.e. reduce whole system cost. However, the total reduction in whole system cost remains relatively small (% change in whole system cost, Table 1). The modelled periods in these studies are not all the same, making direct comparison of total net savings difficult.
Table 1: Modelled net economic benefit of LMP in GB. Whole system cost and net benefits for AFRY and Aurora are presented in 2021 base year. FTI values are converted from 2024 to 2021 using CPI inflation and 2.2% assumption for 2024[3].
|
AFRY (2023) |
FTI (2023) |
Aurora (2023) | ||
|
Period |
2028-2050 |
2025-2040 |
2025-2060 | |
|
Scenario |
Consumer Transformation |
System Transformation – Leading the Way NOA7 |
Net zero 2035 | |
|
Base case whole system cost |
£466bn |
N/A |
£1310bn | |
|
Zonal |
Net benefit |
4.2bn |
5.2 – 12.8bn |
23bn |
|
% change in whole system cost |
-0.9% |
N/A[4] |
-1.8% | |
|
Nodal |
Net benefit |
4.5bn |
11.0 – 20.5bn |
35bn |
|
% change in whole system cost |
-1.0% |
N/A |
-2.7% | |

On an annual basis, the modelled benefit on the overall cost of the system varies greatly, ranging from £0.2bn to £1.3bn for a nodal arrangement (see Figure 2). These differences show the significant impact that different inputs and scenarios can have on the modelling outcome and indicate uncertainty in the modelling.
The components of where these benefits come from broadly align in the studies. In both Aurora and FTI modelling, average wholesale prices increase for consumers across GB, however this is balanced out by reduced balancing costs and congestion rent revenues. Modelled CfD costs are expected to increase. However, these will largely depend on the assumptions made as to how CfDs will be reformed alongside the wholesale market.
Congestion rent is a new source of income for the Market Operator (MO) that is created under LMP. The role of the MO is to optimise dispatch and calculate prices under LMP markets. The System Operator (National Grid ESO in the UK) could take this role. Congestion rent is the revenue gained by the MO by moving electricity between zones/nodes with different prices and is generally assumed to be passed to the consumer.
A concern highlighted by one member of the EAP is that without understanding the full package of market reform that will be undertaken, it is difficult to model the impact that LMP will have as a standalone change. Additionally, there has been concern that radical market reform would create increases in the cost of capital or an investment hiatus, which could reduce or eliminate any benefits seen. This will be discussed later.
Wholesale power prices
LMP would introduce regional wholesale electricity markets, leading to regional differences in prices. These differences are created when network constraints between two different zones or nodes limit the amount of power that can be transferred at a given moment. Across the UK, consumers in areas with an oversupply of renewable generation, such as Scotland, stand to benefit the most from reduced wholesale prices due to LMP. Areas such as the south of England, which have high demand, are expected to see wholesale prices increase when compared to a national wholesale market.
Across the three reviewed studies, the most detailed analysis on prices is in the FTI report. AFRY modelling is generally at the national level, while Aurora reporting focuses on whole system costs and spreads of capacity and generation.
In FTI’s modelling, price projections in oversupplied areas such as Scotland decrease more compared to the national wholesale price, than price increases in undersupplied areas (see Figure 3). The north of Scotland could even benefit from the lowest prices in all of GB.


The extent to which differences in wholesale prices between different regions are maintained will depend on the location and scale of future demand and generation, as well as network build. These differences will diminish over time as generation is built closer to demand, new demand re-sites to where prices are lowest (to an extent), and importantly new network build reduces constraint.
Electricity bills for residential consumers and shielding of demand
Currently, the average domestic electricity bill in Scotland is one of the highest in the UK (DESNZ, 2023c). A significant factor that causes regional differences in bills are unevenly distributed network charges, which make up approximately 23% of the average electricity bill (Ofgem, 2024). Network charges include distribution, transmission, and balancing components. The other main components of a domestic electricity bill in the UK are wholesale costs (29%), supplier operating costs (16%), environmental/social obligation costs (25%), and VAT (5%). In Scotland, transmission network charges are generally lower, as demand is located closer to generation. Distribution network charges make up the greatest difference between regions and are particularly high in Northern Scotland. Overall, this means that the average domestic direct debit bill in Scotland is £1,282, compared to £1,252 in England and Wales, and £1,152 in Northern Ireland, based on fixed consumption levels (DESNZ, 2023c). The introduction of LMP could reduce the wholesale cost contribution to Scottish electricity bills.
LMP would likely create different regional inequalities in the cost of electricity across GB. Particularly in a nodal arrangement, some regions could see significant changes due to significant oversupply or undersupply of generation in the area. This can be mitigated by shielding demand from wholesale market price exposure (see Table 2) and could be done to protect consumers at risk of fuel poverty. Shielding would reduce the benefit Scottish consumers would see from lower wholesale prices. The greater the extent that demand is shielded from differences in wholesale price, the less effective LMP would be in providing a locational signal to improve market efficiency on the demand side. FTI consulting has completed a demand shielding sensitivity, showing net economic benefits of LMP reduce (FTI Consulting, 2023). This reduces the net benefit from £13.1bn to £11.4bn (Nodal, System Transformation NOA7 Scenario). The reporting does not show the regional impact of demand shielding, however, does indicate that average wholesale prices for GB would be higher than without load shielding.
Table 2: Citizen’s Advice (2023) has summarised different options for shielding demand from price exposure under LMP.
|
Type |
Description |
Effect |
Example |
|---|---|---|---|
|
National average |
Consumers pay a weighted average national price. |
Eliminates all price differences and reduces price volatility. |
Italy |
|
Adjust for regional variations |
Consumers pay national average wholesale price, but regions preserve different time of use profiles. |
Socialises differences in average cost between regions, but still sends local dispatch signals. |
None – hypothetical scenario |
|
Zonal average |
Consumers pay a regional (zonal) average price in a nodal market. |
Reduces, but does not eliminate regional differences in price. Reduces price volatility. |
California, New York |
|
Minimal intervention |
Up to suppliers to offer range of tariffs, with varying exposure, for consumers to choose from. |
Variable. Will likely send strongest price signal through to consumers. |
Denmark, New Zealand |
|
Opt-in |
Choice between exposure to locational price, or national/regional price. |
Provides consumers the choice to be exposed to a potentially more volatile price. |
Ontario, PJM (USA) |
|
Shield by type of user |
Expose some users (e.g. commercial and industrial) but shield other consumers (e.g. residential). |
Considers the ability of different types of users to respond to locational prices. Still exposes large consumers to price signals. |
Most jurisdictions (e.g. Ontario) |
|
Phased exposure |
Expose some types of large and flexible demand first, before expanding to other types. |
Incentivise uptake of technologies to improve grid flexibility, before domestic consumers are exposed. |
New York |
Investment & decarbonisation
Changes in location of renewable development
One intended outcome of LMP is that locational wholesale prices provide incentives for generation and demand to be built where it is most efficient. In theory, where there is oversupply, prices fall and there is an incentive for demand to co-locate. High demand leads to higher prices, incentivising new generation capacity to co-locate. This should incentivise a more efficient system in which generation is located closer to demand, reducing the need for network build, as well as reduced re-dispatch.
The modelling of capacity siting decisions in Aurora and FTI Consulting generally allows new capacity to re-site within certain limitations. The limitations and assumptions made significantly affect the outcome, e.g. FTI assumes no new onshore wind in England, with offshore wind re-siting being limited by seabed leasing. Aurora assumes that most capacity in their net zero scenario requires some form of subsidy support, thus will have limited ability to respond to locational signals. AFRY suggests that the sharpness of the locational signal under LMP is stronger before 2030, but then becomes weaker than the national base case after 2035. As current locational network charges will be largely integrated into the wholesale market under LMP, once transmission constraint is relieved in the medium-term, after 2035, the overall locational investment signal will be reduced. This analysis is aligned with the trend of wholesale prices across GB converging over time under LMP and reflects a system with less constraint.
In Aurora and FTI modelling, the overall patterns seen for capacity siting in Scotland are a general increase in battery storage capacity[5], as well as a reduction in solar generation capacity[6], as compared to the national base case (see Table 3). Changes in wind capacity are contested. FTI assumes that offshore wind will generally re-site away from Scotland[7], Northwest England and Northern Wales to the Humber and East Anglia. Onshore wind is limited by not being able to re-site in England, showing increased capacity in the Northern Scotland[8]. FTI also assumes there is no change in locations of pumped hydro for any scenario. Aurora shows limited changes in wind capacity locations.
A significant limitation of the modelling is that it assumes capacity buildout will continue at the same rates, simply responding to locational signals. Several members of the EAP relay the concern that the impact of unmitigated LMP on general investment levels in renewable energy could be severe. As renewable energy is very capital intensive, changes in the risk profile, and thus the cost of capital can have significant negative consequences.
Table 3: Changes in generation and storage capacities under LMP, as compared to the national base case.
|
Area |
Aurora Zonal |
FTI Zonal |
FTI Nodal |
|
Northern Scotland (above B4 boundary[9]) |
|
| |
|
Southern Scotland (between B4 and B6 boundary) |
|
|
|
|
England & Wales |
|
|
|
The table above shows general trends in the re-siting of generation caused by LMP. These general trends are read from charts in the studies. Detailed data on exact capacity changes in specific regions is generally not reported. Large uncertainties in absolute modelling outputs mean general trends are more useful to assess.
Impact on renewable development
A significant change that would be introduced under LMP, particularly affecting generators, is the loss of firm access rights. Under a national market, generators have “firm access” to the grid. This means generators can sell electricity on the wholesale market without consideration of network constraints. Therefore, generation can act independently of network buildout, and future scenarios for generation inform network build out plans.
In an LMP market, generators lose firm access to the market outside of their respective zone. This means generators lose the right for compensation when the lack of network capacity means they cannot export onto the network, requiring a change to business models and investment approaches.
Scotland is currently in an oversupplied region behind an export constraint, meaning more electricity is generated than consumed locally (National Grid ESO, 2022b). The B6 boundary between Scotland and England limits the power that can be exported such that generators in Scotland are often curtailed off. There is currently significant network buildout planning to increase the capacity across the B6 boundary, which would reduce this risk for Scottish generators. However, excess flows across the B6 boundary are still maintained, even with these upgrades (National Grid ESO, 2023b). The loss of firm access under LMP is a significant new risk for generators in Scotland, as they will lose volume certainty when the network is constrained.
Existing generators could lose out on revenue from markets or CfD payments as they lose firm access rights to sell electricity to wholesale market. This would make many projects (especially in Scotland) unviable. Projects that are in development face similar risks. Should no new CfD scheme be implemented, new renewable development in areas behind constraints with high existing renewables (like Scotland), will have to compete for already very low wholesale prices during times of wind output, likely making projects unviable. For planned projects, lack of revenue certainty would either drive up the cost of capital (due to sizeable increase in risk) or lead to an investment exodus to markets in other parts of GB/Europe with more certain/lucrative revenue streams.
However, overall renewable curtailment across GB is projected to decrease under LMP, though this may not be the same in oversupplied Scotland. FTI’s modelling shows less renewable curtailment in both zonal (510-636 TWh between 2025-2040) and nodal markets (426-502 TWh), with the difference to the national base case (591-812 TWh) increasing to 2040 (National Grid, 2022b). This is due to improved dispatch, interconnector use, flexible demand, and the re-location of generation closer to demand. Aurora’s modelling suggests Scottish wind generation will face slightly higher curtailment in a zonal market, 3% more than in the national base case in 2035.
The risks to generators are further increased because under LMP, particularly in a nodal market, wholesale electricity markets are split into small areas. Aurora suggests that, particularly in smaller, more illiquid zones or in a nodal system, revenues can become less predictable for generators as price volatility increases. This is because local demand and supply become harder to predict. This could increase the cost of capital and reduce investment. FTI suggests that liquidity problems that may arise from smaller markets in a nodal system could be solved using trading hubs (as in USA), reducing liquidity problems.
Pace of power market decarbonisation
As electrification of transport, heat, and industry are key components of decarbonisation, a decarbonised power sector is a key step towards net zero. Under LMP, the modelled pace of GB power sector decarbonisation does not show a significant change. In a scenario where a net zero power sector is achieved by 2035, Aurora modelling shows emissions tracking the national base case closely. FTI modelling show an emissions reduction of 25-100MtCO2 between 2025-2040. This equates to 2-7 MtCO2 per year, or 2-7% of 2022 power sector emissions. This reduction is due to modelled improvements in dispatch, siting efficiency, and interconnector use, reducing the requirement for fossil fuel peakers. Overall, there is little difference in power sector decarbonisation as FTI and Aurora generally model continued buildout of generation at a similar pace.
A major limitation of LMP is the significant time it will take to implement. AFRY argue that the earliest implementation date would be 2028, meaning the window for investment decisions to impact emissions by 2035 (UK Government ambition for power sector decarbonisation) is limited. Additionally, the detrimental risk of causing an investment hiatus could threaten power sector decarbonisation in GB. This has not been properly captured in the modelling.
Scotland’s decarbonisation efforts will require an increased focus on flexibility alongside continued deployment of renewables. Scotland already has significant renewable generation, and thus a significantly decarbonised power sector. Under a constrained network with significant variable renewable generation, greater volatility in local wholesale prices can attract the deployment of flexibility (i.e. storage and demand side response), which enables a more efficient use of said generation.
Interconnector use
A significant potential benefit of LMP is the improved use of interconnectors. Interconnector flows are largely determined by price differentials between markets (Ofgem, 2014). This means that interconnectors can exacerbate network constraints under current market conditions.
The example in Figure 4 shows how a national market allows for import from Norway to Scotland and export from England to France, exacerbating the constraint between England and Scotland. This is a hypothetical example developed by National Grid ESO, as no interconnector between Norway and Scotland currently exists. When there is high wind in Scotland in an LMP market, Scottish prices would be lower than in the south, due to the oversupply of renewable generation. Interconnector flows would reflect price differentials between markets, allowing electricity generated in Scotland to be exported through the hypothetical GB interconnector to Norway, alleviating the constraint to England. Overall, this would enable greater export of Scottish renewable generation.


There has been overwhelming agreement of this benefit of LMP in the EAP sessions. Some members suggest that LMP is the best way to enable improved interconnector use, stating there has been a significant lack of alternative options tabled by industry that could solve this issue.
Energy storage and demand response
LMP markets would create locationally granular dispatch signals that enable the efficient use of flexibility. Price differentials in the wholesale market create an opportunity for assets that can be used flexibly to generate value, including BESS (battery energy storage system), pumped hydro, long duration energy storage, and demand response. Under a national market, wholesale price signals do not consider local constraints, so there is no incentive to place flexible assets in particular locations (National Grid ESO, 2022a). This means that flexible assets, placed in the wrong location, do not necessarily contribute to alleviating constraints.
In an LMP market, prices reflect local constraints on the network. As such, the dispatch signal created by the wholesale market will more accurately reflect the current needs of the network. For example, local oversupply is reflected in the wholesale market and incentivises charging of local storage assets, reducing export constraint. In a national market, the price signal will not only be weaker, but also not send specific signals to assets that are ideally located.
Increased price volatility increases revenues for battery and other energy storage projects, incentivising investment. Scottish price volatility is expected to be higher due to the significant capacity of variable renewable generation. Aurora and FTI modelling suggest Scotland will therefore likely see increased buildout of battery storage, making use of more volatile local nodal and zonal prices. Pumped hydro is likely to also benefit from this, however reporting on this technology is limited in the literature. According to Aurora modelling, overall GB market volatility is expected to decrease over time, but will persist in Scotland.
For this reason, improved locational dispatch signals provided by the wholesale market under LMP could help reduce congestion in Scotland and reduce curtailment by incentivising storage assets and demand response to respond in an efficient way.
Stakeholders in the Expert Advisory Panel agree that improved flexibility is a significant benefit of LMP for GB and Scotland. Improved flexibility allows for the more efficient use of renewable generation, and LMP provides the locationally granular price signal that otherwise needs to be created in separate flexibility markets.
Market arrangements
Additional market complexity under nodal arrangement
The introduction of LMP necessitates a decision between adopting a nodal or zonal market arrangement. FTI and Aurora modelling show that nodal markets can achieve greater power system cost benefit than zonal markets, however, increase complexity significantly.
Nodal markets would require radical change that increase the barriers to entry in the electricity market. International nodal markets have generally required central dispatch, forcing generators to participate in wholesale markets, and therefore require generators to develop new mechanisms to hedge against price risk. This is to enable the MO to run a clearing algorithm that allows for the most optimal cost-efficient dispatch at hundreds of nodes. Zonal markets exist with both centralised dispatch, and self-dispatch internationally.
For Scotland and GB, the benefits of an LMP market could be enabled in a zonal market, reducing the risk of increased complexity and radical reform required in a nodal market. With increased market complexity and associated uncertainty in a nodal market, there is heightened risk for investors.
Market arrangements to allow for bilateral trading
Generators in LMP markets can only directly access their specific nodal/zonal price. This increases risk as any local changes in network build, demand, and generation can have a significant impact on the price. To reduce such risk some international nodal markets have introduced Financial Transmission Rights (FTR) to allow for price risk hedging.

An FTR gives the holder the right to cash flows relative to the difference in price across nodes, thus allowing generators in oversupplied areas to potentially access higher prices (see Figure 5). They are funded by congestion rent, accrued by the MO. The MO may assign FTRs to electricity suppliers, with the intention that congestion rent is passed as a saving to consumers.
As all market actors need to participate in the wholesale market in a nodal system (as they are centrally dispatched), FTRs are also necessary to enable Power Purchase Agreements, (PPA). PPAs are a mechanism that allow generators to reduce price risk of the wholesale market by directly selling electricity to an electricity supplier or consumer at an agreed price. In a nodal market, the consumer and generator within a PPA still need to buy and sell electricity on the wholesale market. The prices bought and sold at will not necessarily be the same when they are not on the same node. An FTR between the nodes allows for some of the price difference to be compensated, though additional cashflow may be required if the value of the FTR is not equal to the agreed upon PPA price (Gill et. al, 2023).
As greater volumes of FTRs are created by the MO, the impact of nodal pricing on generators will be reduced, as fewer are exposed to local prices. It is therefore unlikely that enough FTRs are created that all generation can be hedged.
Implementation of a CfD scheme
Creating a CfD scheme under a locational market would be a novel development, with associated risks in implementation. Designing a CfD scheme under LMP faces significant new complexities, however, would be important to support the mass buildout of renewable generation in Scotland. Currently, CfDs provide generators top-up revenue calculated by the difference between their reference price (wholesale market price), and the auctioned strike price (price to which uplift is calculated, ensuring revenue certainty). When wholesale prices are higher than their strike price, generators also need to pay back excess revenues. A key decision for a CfD scheme under LMP is the extent to which generators will be shielded from local prices. A CfD scheme that completely protects generators from locational signals could be seen as counterproductive, as it would reduce the benefit of signalling where generation should be built.
Choosing a strike price, to which uplift is calculated, can be done either nationally or at the zone/node. Auctioning strike prices nationally, would provide similar support to all generators, and auctions would tend to minimise cost. Alternatively, a zonal/nodal strike price would support generators across regions differently, and the cost to the consumer would vary across regions. An auction that minimises CfD cost would minimise the average cost of uplift, rather than minimise the strike price, which is the current mechanism. Such an auction would require significant modelling to assess which generators will require the least uplift. In our view, regionally auctioned strike prices would favour generators located in areas with favourable conditions such as high-capacity factors and lower grid costs, yet still reduce the locational signal of the wholesale market.
The way the reference price is chosen in an LMP market impacts the strength of the locational signal and the cost of support (Figure 6). A zonal/nodal reference price completely shields the generator from the locational wholesale market. A national reference price provides equal uplift for all generators (given the strike price is the same). Generators in low price regions are still exposed to the lower wholesale price, so earn less revenues unless hedged. This allows for some exposure to locational wholesale prices.

Some members of the EAP see the continuation of a reformed CfD scheme under LMP as potentially difficult to implement. Many choices need to be made that will significantly affect the extent of the impact that LMP can have, whilst also introducing additional complexity in CfD administration, auctioning, and cost. Other EAP members have stated that to ensure continued investor confidence, existing CfD schemes will likely need to be grandfathered. This means existing CfD generator revenues are secured such that they remain unchanged, regardless of market reform.
Critique of LMP modelling assumptions
Introduction (description of modelling approaches)
The two key studies that have been used in this literature review to assess the economic and system benefit of LMP are Aurora (2023) and FTI Consulting (2023). To date, these are the only cost-benefit analyses that have published a significant level of detail, with AFRY (2023) only publishing overall results. The key modelling approaches can be seen in Table 4.
Table 4: Key configurations of Aurora and FTI Consulting’s modelling of LMP.
|
FTI Consulting |
Aurora | |
|
Zones |
7 |
7 |
|
Nodes |
850 |
Not stated |
|
Period |
2025 – 2040 |
2025 – 2060 |
|
Scenarios |
3 scenarios each with different network build assumptions, including Network Options Assessment 7 (NOA7) and Holistic Network Design (HND), as well as decarbonisation pathways Leading the Way (LtW) and System Transformation (ST). |
2 scenarios of a net zero power system by 2035 and by 2050. HND is included in network build assumptions. |
|
Sensitivities |
Dispatch only, load shielding, increased cost of capital. |
Increased cost of capital, delayed network build, dispatch only. |
Impact of network build assumptions
Network buildout has a large effect on the impacts of LMP, and how they are distributed geographically. It is therefore a core assumption that determines the benefits of LMP. In an unconstrained network, LMP will have no benefit over a national wholesale market. If the modelling underestimates the level of network build, it will overestimate the impact of LMP.
NGESO identify which parts of the network require reinforcement and assess the cost-effectiveness over other possible measures. The Network Option Assessment 7 (NOA7) sets out the requirements for new infrastructure out to 2030. However, NOA7 has been supplemented by the new Holistic Network Design (HND), which accounts for additional upgrades required to support offshore wind (National Grid ESO, 2022b).
FTI Consulting only uses NOA7 as its central network buildout scenario, with a second scenario exploring HND. However, as HND has already been approved, only the HND scenario should be considered. This reduces the FTI net benefit of LMP by 40%. Aurora accounts for HND in its net zero scenario, then models further grid reinforcement after 2035 using their own network congestion/revenue algorithm. Sensitivities of delayed network build in Aurora modelling also show that this increases whole system cost in both national and LMP markets. LMP markets, however, can partially mitigate this impact.
Wholesale price projections
Wholesale price projections in the national base case will affect the absolute magnitude of the modelled net impact of LMP. Comparing to DESNZ national wholesale price projections (DESNZ, 2023a), Figure 7 illustrates that Aurora projects higher prices than DESNZ before 2030, then lower prices afterwards. FTI projects significantly lower prices than DESNZ in the short- and long-term. Therefore, the counterfactual national wholesale cost is not consistent between the two studies, leading to different net benefit calculations. When comparing equivalent scenarios, this could partially explain the greater benefits of the Aurora modelling (£1.40Bn/a) compared to FTI (£0.77Bn/a).
When assessing the modelled wholesale prices in Scotland under LMP, both Aurora and FTI prices are similar to (in fact slightly greater than) DESNZ projections for the levelised cost of energy (LCOE) of offshore wind (DESNZ, 2023b). This provides confidence that with LMP, the wholesale prices in Scotland will be closely tied to the levelised cost of wind. As a greater proportion of electricity is supplied by unsubsidised wind in Scotland, the levelised cost of wind will to a greater extent determine wholesale prices in Scotland. The higher projections reflect that additional dispatchable generation/storage is required during periods of low wind output.

Cost of capital for renewable generation
A transition to LMP could have a significant impact on the cost of capital of generation. There is a consensus amongst the literature, as well as from modelling from AFRY, Aurora and FTI Consulting, that even small changes in the cost of capital would eliminate the net benefits of LMP.
A transition to LMP would be a radical market reform, with reduced volume and price certainty and transition uncertainty leading to a potential increase in the cost of capital. A study assessing the impact on introducing a zonal market in Australia, showed the weighted average cost of capital (WACC) increased by 15-20%, which is equivalent to 1-2pp (Rai et al., 2021). Frontier Economics (2022) suggests that price volatility in the GB market under LMP would increase the WACC of wind farms by 1.8-4pp.
AFRY, Aurora, and FTI have modelled sensitivities to estimate the impact that increases of the cost of capital can have on the modelled net benefit of LMP.
- Aurora models that a 3pp (percentage point) increase in the WACC would increase the cost to consumers by up to 5% compared to the national base case.
- FTI models that an expected 0.5pp increase in the cost of capital of renewables would reduce the net economic benefit of the base case by £7.5bn across the modelled period. Further analysis shows a 1.3-3.4pp increase would be enough to eliminate any consumer benefit in their base case.
- AFRY modelling suggests that a 0.56pp increase in the cost of capital would eliminate the net modelled benefit of LMP.
The wider literature suggests it is likely for there to be an increase in the cost of capital upon the implementation of LMP. Modelling of this scenario shows that even small increases could eliminate the net modelled benefit of LMP. The base cases presented by Aurora and FTI consulting therefore likely overestimate benefits as they do not consider this factor. The potential impact of an increased cost of capital on the level of investment, as well as the cost of electricity, is one of the major factors to consider when choosing to implement LMP.
Volatility
Average price volatility, which is a contributing factor to revenue risk and increasing the cost of capital, is unlikely to significantly increase in a locational market. Both FTI and Aurora argue there is not a significant increase in average wholesale price volatility in LMP markets over a national market. FTI does suggest that volatility will increase over time, likely due to increasing renewables, but this would also occur without LMP. However, it is worth noting that in specific nodes/zones where variable renewable generation is high, such as Scotland, volatility may significantly increase. While this provides opportunities for flexibility and energy storage, it could increase risk for generators participating directly in the wholesale market and would likely require continued/reformed CfD support to mitigate against it.
Re-siting of generation and demand
With lower wholesale prices under LMP, some re-siting of renewables away from Scotland should be expected. While Scotland has the highest load factors for both offshore and onshore wind in the UK (DESNZ, 2023d), the greater load factors may not be sufficient to offset lower wholesale prices. However, the extent to which new renewable generation will re-site away from Scotland is limited by several factors. This includes planning, sea-bed leasing, and network availability. Furthermore, short-term changes in the location of advanced development pipelines are unlikely, given the level of planning and permitting required. Development timelines for large generation projects are often very long and so the window for changes to 2035 is limited. At worst, existing pipelines could be cancelled due to lacking investor confidence, which could cause delays in overall GB investment levels as new areas need to be scoped. Consequently, a bigger impact might be expected in the siting of future generation, rather than that which is already planned.
The re-location of some renewable generation in the modelling by Aurora and FTI is a sensible assumption. However, this will be moderated by other non-price factors that could reduce the benefits modelled in the studies.
While significant existing demand is unlikely to re-site according to locational wholesale signals, new forms of demand could re-site within GB or enter the UK market to take advantage of the lower electricity prices in Scotland. Residential demand, constituting 35% of national demand (DESNZ, 2023e), is unlikely to significantly re-site, with most change in this sector likely to be seen in demand response to wholesale price profiles.
Early electrolysers are likely to be developed near centres of demand such as industrial clusters. This is the assumption in both Aurora and FTI studies. FTI allows hydrogen electrolysers to locate on any node with hydrogen gas turbines (as specified in NGESO’s Future Energy Scenarios 2021). Aurora’s main approach is to model new electrolyser locations based on existing pipelines. As electrolyser capacities increase, the siting of their new demand could be an additional benefit of LMP (McIver et al., 2023).
New sources of demand could also be an unmodelled benefit of LMP. Existing industry is less likely to shift locations in the short- and medium-term, however could benefit from lower wholesale costs to drive electrification. New sources of demand such as data centres and green steel could re-locate to Scotland to take advantage of lower electricity prices. Precedence for this is the choice of northern Sweden for the first commercial green steel plant (H2Green Steel, 2023).
Impact of timescales
The period when LMP is introduced has a significant impact on the modelled cost-benefit. The literature agrees that the earlier it is introduced, the more significant the benefits of LMP will be. The more constrained the network is, the greater the benefit that LMP can have on the system. Based on the NOA 2021/22 Refresh (National Grid ESO, 2022b), significant transmission build is planned to 2030. This will relieve the network constraints and reduce the potential benefit of implementing LMP. It will still take a significant amount of time between deciding to implement an LMP market and its delivery. REMA timelines do not allow the implementation of LMP to begin by 2025 (Ofgem, 2023), and National Grid assumes implementing a nodal market would take 4-8 years (National Grid ESO, 2022a). As such, the modelled benefit of LMP is likely overestimated by FTI and Aurora, both models start in 2025. The modelling by AFRY would still overestimate benefits, with a start year of 2028. As such, the realisation of wholesale cost benefits for Scotland are likely more limited than presented. However, any delays to grid build will improve the case for LMP, as seen in sensitivities completed by Aurora (2023). The volume of additional grid required is unprecedented and it could be likely that some is delayed.
Alternatives to LMP
There are alternative options to LMP to further locational signals in the electricity system. Some of the most prominent options, as agreed by the project steering group, will be discussed at a high level in this section.
Transmission Network Use of System reform
Locational signals already exist in the GB electricity system within Transmission Network Use of System (TNUoS) charges, which are paid by generators, embedded generators, suppliers, and directly connected transmission demand. TNUoS covers the cost of installing and maintaining the transmission network. This is passed down to consumer’s electricity bills. TNUoS reform could provide an alternative to LMP investment signals, creating an equivalent benefit to LMP by influencing investment siting. It will however be unlikely to enable benefits seen by improved dispatch under LMP. Currently, the method for calculating TNUoS limits its impact on investment decisions for generation/demand build. Energy UK (2023) have published reforms that would be required to make TNUoS reflective of a modern system to provide an alternative to LMP, summarised in Table 5.
Table 5: A summary of Energy UK (2023) requirements for TNUoS reform.
|
Reform |
Current TNUoS |
Reformed TNUoS |
|
Transparency |
Methodology for calculating TNUoS is not transparent on locational inputs. |
Transparent methodology would help investors forecast TNUoS charges. |
|
Modelling assumptions |
Assumptions underpinning TNUoS are based on an outdated fossil-based power system. |
Reformed TNUoS would reflect a decarbonised system with increasing generation and demand. |
|
Predictability |
TNUoS varies yearly, often with volatile price signals, increasing uncertainty for investors, hence the cost of new generation. |
Long-term TNUoS charges (e.g. fixed for 10 years at point of connection) have been proposed to provide certainty to investors. |
|
Locational charges |
Currently, locational signals in TNUoS are small. |
Signals would need to increase for both generation and demand to reproduce the effects of LMP. |
|
Treatment of storage |
Storage is currently treated as a “conventional carbon generator”, despite being both generation and demand. |
Storage could be given specific treatment to encourage siting areas with net supply. |
Aurora and Frontier Economics (2023) agree that a reformed TNUoS charge could create an equivalent benefit to LMP for the optimal siting of generation/demand. Aurora’s modelling shows that in some locations in Scotland, TNUoS reform would need to increase charges on some renewables to have the same impact as LMP, causing some renewables to re-site away from Scotland. However, their modelling assumes sufficient grid build to incentivise new offshore wind in northern Scotland. Across the whole of Scotland, Aurora model increasing incentives to build flexible generation and storage. As a whole, Frontier Economics argues TNUoS reform could improve investor confidence by providing long-term location signals to influence generation/demand siting. This would mean that the risk of increases in the cost of capital for renewable generation introduced by LMP could be avoided by TNUoS reform.
CfD reform
CfD reform could also provide locational signals in renewable investment. CfDs are the main mechanism through which renewable generation is supported in the UK. They enable stable revenues by auctioning “strike prices” for generators. When wholesale prices fall below the strike price, generators receive a top-up. When wholesale prices exceed the strike price, generators must pay back excess revenues.
This study has identified two main approaches to introducing a locational signal to CfDs, deemed generation (discussed by AFRY, 2023) or non-price factors (discussed by Regen, 2023a).
Table 6: Description of reformed CfD mechanisms.
|
Mechanism |
Actual generation CfD |
Deemed generation CfD |
CfD – non-price factors |
|
Source |
Current mechanism |
AFRY |
Regen |
|
Description |
Revenue top-up based on generation (MWh) based on a fixed £/MWh strike price. |
Revenue top-up based on capacity at a fixed £/kW/yr. Contracts awarded by the lowest deemed £/MWh, rather than the actual MWh produced. |
Introduce non-price factors into the auction that reflect various additional considerations of CfD, including locational and other whole systems benefits. |
|
Benefits |
Ensures best value (£/MWh generated) projects win contracts, reducing wholesale prices in national market. |
Contracts awarded based on forecasts of MWh delivered, accounting for locational factors (e.g. expected load factor and hours constrained). Guarantees revenue at point of contract award. |
Non-price factors reflect various additional considerations of CfD, e.g. location & other whole systems benefits. Recognises projects that provide wider socio-economic benefits. |
|
Limitations |
Generators still topped-up if constrained, so no consideration of network constraints. Generators do not receive revenue during periods of national curtailment. |
Does not necessarily provide best £/MWh generated for consumers. Requires CfD awarder to produce generation and constraint forecasts, increasing mechanism complexity. |
Does not necessarily provide best £/MWh generated for consumers. Increase complexity of mechanism for CfD awarder and developers to introduce/quantify additional benefits. |
Balancing Mechanism reform
The Balancing Mechanism is the main energy balancing market NGESO uses to ensure that demand and supply are matched, as well as to solve constraints on the network. A reformed BM could both influence investment siting decisions, as well as improve dispatch signals, though it is unlikely to fully replicate the benefits of LMP. Note that under a national market with a reformed BM, dispatch is still done through the wholesale market, meaning BM reform would only aim to reduce the cost of redispatch.
Investment siting decisions could be improved under a reformed BM, influenced by the potential revenue offered by the BM. However, currently this is difficult to forecast. Improvements to forecasting could include increasing the transparency of BM dispatch. Reform could go further by introducing/increasing long-term contractual agreements between NGESO and flexibility operators.
Reducing the cost of redispatch could be achieved by BM Wider Access, which will enable participation from aggregation of demand side assets and embedded generation storage. This would increase the number of assets in the BM and increase competition. Increasing the visibility and dispatch of storage assets could increase participation. National Grid is currently working to improve battery storage participation with the Open Balancing Platform, allowing bulk dispatch of batteries. Another potential reform in the BM to increase operational efficiency of the market is to enable interconnectors to participate. This could allow for the redispatch of significant interconnector capacity to resolve constraints on the network.
Local constraint markets
Local constraint markets (LCM) are newly developing flexibility markets that aim to enable wider access of assets to solve constraints on the network. These could go some way to improving locational dispatch and investment signals in a national market.
GB’s first local constraint market (LCM) came into operation in Scotland in 2023, seeking to manage the constraint between England and Scotland. Participants above the B6 export constraint in Scotland turn up demand during periods of high renewable generation. The aim is to provide a service that can solve the constraint at lower cost than the Balancing Mechanism, and simultaneously increase the number and types of assets that can participate in electricity markets by allowing households to participate.
Regen’s Insight Paper (2023b) suggests NGESO should procure flexibility in LCMs over a variety of timescales (intraday, day-ahead, and long-term) to help the optimal locational dispatch of demand in a national price market. If LCMs are guaranteed in certain locations in the long-term, Regen also comment that they could provide investment signals in areas of constraint for the development of flexibility. It is important that such markets provide constraint management at a lower cost than currently through the BM, otherwise they will increase the system cost of resolving constraints.
While LCMs are unlikely able to replicate the granular benefits of LMP, they are a useful addition to national pricing to add a locational signal, and, if the trial in Scotland is successful, could be rolled out in the intermediary period ahead of market reform. A possible downside, also raised in the EAP, is that many separate markets will need to be developed, possibly leading to increased complexity.
Assessment of the opportunities, threats, costs and benefits to the Scottish Government’s objectives
In this section we assess the impact that LMP and its alternatives could have on the objectives of the Scottish government, as outlined in the Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan amongst other strategy papers. The assessment is split into four main categories:
- The scale up of low-cost renewable energy.
- The fair and just transition.
- The decarbonisation of heat, transport, and industry.
- Enabling a secure and flexible net zero energy system.
We have proceeded to summarise the main findings in a SWOT diagram (Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, Threats).
Scale up of low-cost renewable energy
The development of renewable energy will be significantly affected by any wholesale market reform. This section outlines how Scottish renewables ambitions could be affected by LMP.
Description of Scottish ambitions
Scotland has strong ambitions for the scale up of renewable energy, largely focusing on the scale up of onshore and offshore wind, but also on increasing contributions from solar, hydro, and marine energy. The Scottish Government also has an ambition for an installed capacity of 5GW of renewable and low-carbon hydrogen production by 2030, and 25GW by 2045.
Scotland’s wind capacity ambitions largely align with UK goals and NGESO Future Energy Scenarios (FES) 2023 modelling. The UK Government goal of 50GW offshore wind by 2030 is supported by significant ambitions for 20GW of offshore wind development in Scotland. To reach net zero by 2050, FES 2023 also forecasts 45% of offshore wind to be located in Scotland. In addition to offshore wind, Scotland’s ambition for onshore wind is to develop 8-11GW by 2030.
Scotland’s current wind pipeline is extensive, with 12.7GW of onshore wind projects under construction, awaiting construction, or in planning (Scot Gov, 2023a). 8.3GW of projects stand to deliver the bulk of the offshore wind ambition in Scotland. Additionally, the ScotWind and Innovation and Targeted Oil & Gas (INTOG) leasing rounds reflect very significant market ambitions for offshore wind in Scottish waters. For Scotland, and wider UK decarbonisation, it is key that these projects are not risked by market reform. Renewables development is a significant pillar in the energy strategy of Scotland and underpins other socio-economic and decarbonisation ambitions.
Impact of continued constraint and network delays on Scottish generators

A significant challenge in the development of renewables in Scotland from a power system perspective is the export constraint to England. In FY22/23, export constraints in Scotland resulted in 4.4TWh of balancing actions at a cost of £908 million to the consumer (National Grid ESO, 2023e). To address this, National Grid has proposed transmission build between Scotland and England to allow for flows of 20GW by 2030, and 30GW by 2035 (NOA 2021/22 Refresh). Even with this additional transmission build, the boundary will still likely see excess flows resulting in constraints (National Grid ESO, 2023b). Any delays in this network build would further exacerbate the constraint.
Under LMP, Scottish generators would lose firm access rights to the wholesale market. This means they would be acutely impacted by export constraints and delays to network build, which would limit the market they could sell to, generating a significant volume risk for investors. Excess renewable generation and export constraints in Scotland would drive down wholesale prices, and while this benefits consumers, it would generate further risk for renewable investors’ revenue opportunities. Continued low wholesale prices for consumers in Scotland would still rely on further development of renewables. This risk could be partially mitigated by new opportunities for renewable generators to sell electricity to new sources of demand in Scotland or to Europe, via interconnectors, taking advantage of the lower wholesale prices in Scotland. However, this would unlikely fully outweigh the current opportunity to sell to England under a national market.
Some members of the EAP highlighted that Scotland still is the best location for renewable generation in the UK with the load factors and existing pipelines and supply chains, despite the inability of some of the generation to reach demand. However, another member of the EAP suggested that planning to build more generation in Scotland, when there is not the physical grid to support it is unsustainable. Especially when accounting for a history of slow network build, with required transmission build exceeding current rates significantly. These views set out by EAP members must be assessed on the basis that decarbonisation at the lowest cost to the consumer should be prioritised, however within the timeframe to achieve a net zero power system by 2035.
Market arrangements for mass renewables in Scotland
A long-term strategic plan for renewable generation and network upgrades could be implemented in a future market design to achieve a decarbonised power system at the lowest cost to the consumer, within the timeframe set by the UK Government’s decarbonisation targets. Such a plan would need to coordinate the location of generation and network upgrades (and flexibility) to send a clear signal to investors about where generation is required to de-risk investment and ensure confidence in mass renewable buildout. The establishment of the Strategic Spatial Energy Plan (SSEP) by 2025 could provide the framework to achieve this. This will be a UK Government led strategy that outlines where, when, and what energy infrastructure needs to be built to enable a net zero system.
Under LMP, it is most efficient and profitable to place generating capacity near demand, reducing the cost of transmission. This is a short-term market signal that does not consider the future location of new generation and network build. It places all the risk on investors to forecast how local grid conditions will evolve when developing their business case. The necessity of the Scottish pipeline for broader GB decarbonisation efforts should be considered before implementing reform that could risk development, considering the limited time for action. Market arrangements are needed that ensure the development of renewables in strategic locations but protect generators.
Support mechanisms such as CfDs would provide revenue certainty whether LMP is introduced or not. However, under the current CfD mechanism, the awarding of CfD does not consider locational factors (past planning and renewable resource) and places all volume risk on consumers (there is no top-up payment if the reference price falls below £0/MWh for recent CfDs). CfD reform could encompass locational considerations when awarding contracts. Such considerations should locate low-cost renewable generation where it minimises cost for consumers, considering the constraints on the network, planned upgrades, and centres of demand. Furthermore, under LMP, CfD reform would need to consider how it could protect renewables from volume risk to improve investor confidence in renewable development in the UK. We discuss this in more detail in section 5.2. Regardless of LMP, CfD reform should consider the increasing periods of national curtailment of renewables as capacity increases and the additional volume risk for investors this will bring.
An alternative method to LMP and reformed CfDs to provide long-term investment signals for the location of renewables is a reform to TNUoS charges. Depending on the timeframe of the investment signal, TNUoS charges could be used to both incentivise or disincentivise the development of renewables in Scotland. The potential benefit of TNUoS reform is that radical market reform is not required. TNUoS reform could be rapidly adopted under a national price market, with fewer of the associated transition risks. However, TNUoS charges would be unlikely to provide regular and accurate locational dispatch signals and so would have to be combined with additional reforms to replicate the full potential benefits of LMP.
Cost of capital
A significant risk that is presented throughout the literature, as well as the modelling, is the impact of an increase in the cost of capital. As renewables development is very capital intensive, changes in the cost of capital will have significant effects on the levels of investment and the final cost of electricity. A small increase in the cost of capital can significantly affect the total cost of a project, impacting its financial viability.
The cost-benefit modelling sensitivities simulated by Aurora, FTI, and AFRY, show that small increases in the cost of capital can easily wipe out the net modelled benefits of implementing LMP. Therefore, well-planned implementation of LMP is essential to limit the increases in the cost of capital for renewables. Furthermore, supporting policies such as CfDs, could work to derisk renewable development, if reformed for a LMP market, reducing the impact of market reform on the cost of capital of renewables.
Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities & Threats
Table 7: Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities & Threats of LMP regarding renewables development in Scotland.
|
Strengths |
Opportunities |
|
|
|
Weaknesses |
Threats |
|
|
Fair and just transition
This section outlines how LMP may affect Scotland’s ambitions to achieve a fair and just transition, as outlined in the draft ESJTP (Scottish Government, 2023c). This is of particular significance, as LMP will create regional differences across GB.
Description of Scottish ambitions
A fair and just transition is the cornerstone of Scotland’s energy strategy and aims to ensure that benefits and risks of the energy transition are distributed fairly. This means delivering affordable energy to Scottish consumers which is not subject to global fossil fuel price volatility. It also includes the wider economic developments of the energy transition. Scotland aims to maintain or increase employment in the energy production sector, amongst the backdrop of a historically strong oil and gas sector. Further growth in the energy sector should also come alongside boosting the skills base and local supply chains, ensuring technology, manufacturing, and know-how remain in Scotland. The benefits of market reform need to be spread out across all regions of Scotland, and not leave anyone behind. This is of particular concern for those at risk of fuel poverty. Additionally, Scotland aims to grow the community energy sector to 2GW by 2030.
Lower wholesale prices for consumers
LMP could see Scotland’s consumers benefitting from the lowest wholesale prices in GB, and possibly Europe (FTI Consulting, 2023). This is due to the significant capacity of renewable generation that is behind an export constraint, so prices will largely be set by wind generation. Compared to southern England, prices will converge in the long-term, as network build reduces constraint and generation is built closer to demand. However, Scotland is expected to maintain the cheapest prices in GB. It should be noted that there is limited reporting on the finer regional differences on price in the modelling.
As LMP creates regional differences in wholesale prices across GB, some areas will see electricity prices increase. It should be noted that the increase in electricity prices in some areas will not be equal, but less than the decrease in prices in Scotland. Because the current market arrangements are a national marginal price, every consumer in GB pays the price of the most expensive generator across the country. Under LMP, the marginal price of generation may increase in some locations (e.g. due to generation scarcity within the zone/node). However, on average this will only be a small increase on the national marginal price compared to the decrease in locations such as Scotland. In 2025, FTI project average wholesale prices in the most expensive zone and node to increase by 9% and 12% respectively compared to national pricing. This reduces to -4%[12] and 11% in 2040 respectively (FTI, LtW (HND) Scenario). It should be noted that zonal prices can help mitigate some of the most extreme regional inequalities that nodal LMP could create.
Despite this, it is possible given examples of LMP in other markets (see section 3.1) that, at least initially, domestic consumers could be shielded from some wholesale price signals under LMP, to reduce the negative impact on consumer bills where prices go up and protect consumers at risk of fuel poverty. In the reverse this would reduce the benefits on Scottish domestic electricity bills. A concern raised in the EAP is that it may be politically difficult or unpalatable for the UK Government to implement a new policy that disadvantages domestic consumers in specific areas.
Electricity suppliers may also decide not to pass on the whole benefit of reduced wholesale prices in Scotland to Scottish consumers. Increased costs in other areas mean suppliers may decide to effectively average out wholesale cost across their customer base. Additionally, ERM analysis projects that wholesale costs will make up 44% of domestic consumer bills in 2025. Any reduction in wholesale cost will thus be buffered by other components of the electricity bill including distribution network charges, green levies, and supplier costs. This would lead to a 21% reduction in Scottish electricity bills under LMP in 2025, based on a 35% reduction in wholesale cost (FTI Consulting, 2023). This would still be a significant reduction for Scottish consumers, which could result in a wide range of benefits and further a fair and just transition.
Employment, skills, and economic opportunities
A key ambition for a fair and just transition is to encourage economic growth and employment opportunities. The growth of the renewables sector poses a significant opportunity for this. New job opportunities will be needed to offset the decline of the oil and gas industry in Scotland. In 2021, there were around 82,400 direct and indirect jobs in the oil and gas sector (OEUK, 2022). Employment growth in the renewables and green energy sector could be used to offset this. The Fraser of Allander Institute (FAI) study shows that the renewable energy sector supported more than 42,000 jobs across the Scottish economy and generated over £10.1 billion of output in 2021 (FAI, 2023). With Scottish Government ambitions for increased generation capacity across a range of technologies by 2030, the wider employment benefits of renewables development are large. As discussed in section 4.1, LMP without mitigation could see future investment in renewables leave Scotland. This would risk the wider economic and employment benefits associated with renewables development.
However, if implemented successfully, lower wholesale prices could incentivise new industries such as electrolysers and data centres as well as other decarbonised industry with high electricity demand to locate in Scotland. This is a significant opportunity that could bring economic growth and employment to Scotland. An important factor is that the continued development of renewables in Scotland is necessary to provide sustained low electricity prices to attract new demand, as well as provide the actual power required for demand growth. Several members of the EAP supported this view, noting that reductions in electricity bills could be a key driver for new industry to locate in Scotland, especially if paired with additional Scottish Government backed incentives for industrial growth. However, others have stated that lower wholesale prices alone may not be sufficient to encourage new demand in certain industries.
Community energy
Without further support, community owned energy renewable generation is likely to become less attractive under LMP in Scotland. Renewables support mechanisms are likely to target larger scale projects, potentially leaving smaller community projects behind. Without support, lower wholesale prices are expected to make renewable energy projects less profitable in Scotland, reducing incentives for investment. Demand-side community energy projects will not be directly affected by wholesale market reform, other than the effect of lower and more volatile prices in Scotland. Members of the EAP noted that community energy projects are already lacking access to finance. Additional market reforms would be required to ensure the growth of community energy and enable easier routes to market, which is needed for a net zero system. Overall, there is not much literature on the impact of LMP on community energy, both regarding generation and demand-side projects.
Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities & Threats
Table 8: Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities & Threats regarding a fair and just transition under LMP in Scotland.
|
Strengths |
Opportunities |
|
|
|
Weaknesses |
Threats |
|
|
Decarbonisation of heat, transport, & industry
Wider decarbonisation efforts are often closely linked to electrification. In this section we will outline how regional changes in electricity prices that LMP creates could affect heat, transport, and industrial decarbonisation in Scotland.
Description of Scottish ambitions
Scotland’s ambitions for decarbonisation extend beyond the power sector to include heat, transport, and industry. Scotland aims to decarbonise heat and transport using renewable electricity or hydrogen. This includes the delivery of 6TWh of heat through heat networks (13% of 2021 heat demand). Electrolysis to produce green hydrogen is a significant opportunity, as Scotland already has a significant capacity of renewable generation, with ambitions for significant growth. This would not only use excess generation, store energy, and decarbonise industrial processes domestically, but also enable export of hydrogen to other countries. As such, Scotland aims to develop 5GW of renewable and low carbon hydrogen generation capacity by 2030 and 25GW by 2045. To further enable industrial decarbonisation, Scotland aims to accelerate the development of carbon capture utilisation and storage (CCUS).
Transport decarbonisation
Increasingly the decarbonisation of road transport looks to be dominated by electrification (Element Energy, an ERM Company, 2021). A reduction in electricity prices in Scotland under LMP could result in a decrease in the costs of electric vehicle (EV) charging. Despite this, the implementation of LMP is unlikely to significantly accelerate the uptake of EVs.
An Element Energy (an ERM Company) study in 2022 shows that electricity costs only make up around 9% of the total cost of ownership (TCO) of an EV car for a first owner (typically 1-4 years). Therefore, a 21% reduction in electricity cost for the consumer under LMP (see section 4.2) would only reduce the total cost of ownership by 2%. This highlights that the key cost consideration for an EV is the upfront purchase cost (and the associated depreciation for a first owner). Note that the potential savings attributed to electricity cost increases as a proportion of the TCO for second and third owners as the upfront purchase cost decreases. However, as with new EVs, operational costs are not a barrier to the uptake of second hand EVs. Additional considerations for EV ownership include access to public EV infrastructure and EV performance. So, while LMP could provide valuable benefits for consumers with EVs by reducing running costs, it is unlikely to significantly accelerate EV car adoption.
The impact is similar for other forms of road transport, such as vans and heavy-duty vehicles (HDVs). While fuel/energy cost can be a greater proportion of the TCO for high mileage vans and HDVs, capital expenditure is still the key consideration for electrification (ICCT, 2023). Access to public EV infrastructure is also essential for the uptake of electric vans and HDVs. Nevertheless, reduced wholesale electricity costs would lead to more favourable TCOs for these EVs, leading to earlier price parity with diesel equivalents and a more rapid uptake.
Heat decarbonisation
As with EVs, electrification will play a key role in the decarbonisation of heat in Scotland. The electrification of heat will focus on heat pumps (HP) and heat networks, with some role for other electric heating technologies including storage heaters and direct electric heating. For the average consumer, electric heating (with a HP) is more energy intensive than an EV, with annual consumptions of 3,000kWh and 1,800kWh respectively (ERM analysis). Therefore, lower electricity prices would have a greater impact on the running costs of a HP than an EV, so could incentivise uptake to a greater extent.
For the same reduction in prices detailed in section 4.2, ERM analysis on the TCO of a domestic HP shows a 10% reduction. For other forms of electrified heat (e.g. storage heaters and direct electric), LMP could similarly reduce running costs in Scotland. However, in the case of HPs, upfront costs can currently be prohibitive for many households. Continuation of Government support schemes to reduce upfront costs will be crucial to drive uptake, even with electricity market reform, particularly amongst lower income households. An example of this is the Home Energy Scotland Scheme, which offers homeowners grants of £7,500 to install a HP, and up to £9,000 in rural areas. A stakeholder in the EAP suggested that the introduction of lower prices in Scotland through electricity market reform could come at a critical moment as the uptake of HPs and EVs accelerates among the majority of consumers.
Hydrogen
A significant opportunity for Scotland under LMP is the development of hydrogen electrolysis capacity for the production of green hydrogen. Electricity cost is the largest contributor to the levelised cost of hydrogen (LCOH) via electrolysis, making it an important factor that contributes to the location of electrolysers (BEIS, 2021). Under LMP, Scotland could benefit from some of the lowest wholesale prices in Europe (FTI Consulting, 2023) which would attract electrolyser growth. This would enable a hydrogen export industry, but also contribute to the decarbonisation of industry by enabling some industries to decarbonise where it is more cost effective to use hydrogen. It can also help to enable a high renewables power system by absorbing excess variable generation. The wider economic benefits of employment and industry are also an opportunity for Scotland. An EAP member stated that the levels of electrolyser capacity in Scotland required for a net zero energy system are already very ambitious in FES 2023. Without market reform it will be very difficult to deliver this.
The main risk is that LMP leads to reduced development of renewables in Scotland, which is required for the significant demand that electrolysers, as well as wider electrification, will create. This could mean that supply may not grow in-line with growing demand, reducing the ability to provide electricity at low cost. Mechanisms to retain renewable development in Scotland are therefore essential for a thriving green hydrogen industry in Scotland.
Carbon capture, utilisation, and storage
Carbon capture can be used to reduce emissions of difficult to decarbonise industrial processes. Carbon capture generally involves three processes: carbon capture, conditioning and compression, and transport and storage. The main drivers for successful carbon capture are the need to mitigate large industrial emissions of CO2, as well as good transport and storage options. The main energy requirement for carbon capture is heat, not electricity, which is usually procured using natural gas. Some electricity is required for processes such as compression. As such, lower wholesale electricity prices would only minimally benefit the cost of carbon capture in Scotland.
Other types of carbon capture, including Direct Air Capture, also predominantly require heat. The solid sorbent DAC process requires lower thermal energy (80-100◦C), which can be delivered using waste industrial heat or industrial heat pumps. The liquid solvent process requires temperatures of 900◦C, which are usually delivered using natural gas (McQueen et al., 2021). Thus, DAC could benefit from lower wholesale electricity prices when using lower-temperature processes coupled with heat-pumps, maximising the use of electricity as the main energy requirement.
Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities & Threats
Table 9: Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities & Threats regarding the decarbonisation of heat, transport, and industry, including CCUS and hydrogen.
|
Strengths |
Opportunities |
|
|
|
Weaknesses |
Threats |
|
|
Enabling a secure and flexible net zero energy system
A future electricity system must be resilient to the fluctuations in variable renewable generation and demand. Flexibility is a significant aspect of enabling a secure electricity system. In this section we outline how LMP could affect Scotland’s ambitions to achieve this.
Description of Scottish ambitions
The Scottish Government aims to enable a secure and flexible net zero energy system which is not dependent on fossil fuels. As Scotland continues to expand its growing renewable energy capacity, increasing its role as a net exporter of electricity to the rest of the UK, the need to maximise the penetration of renewables will become increasingly important. There are several key factors that can contribute to this. Firstly, the development of energy storage and flexibility. This will enable the efficient use of variable renewable generation. Secondly, investment in grid infrastructure is essential, so that generators are not curtailed to mitigate constraints and electricity can flow where it is needed. Finally, dispatchable low carbon generation, such as hydrogen generation or gas with carbon capture, will be an important component of a secure decarbonised power system during periods of low renewable output. LMP provides a significant opportunity in Scotland for locational price signals to incentivise flexibility, as well as to incentivise efficient dispatch profiles to reduce constraints.
Energy storage and flexibility
The introduction of LMP would incentivise energy storage and flexibility to locate in Scotland due to volatile electricity prices, driven by generation from the high variable renewable capacity in Scotland that at times exceeds demand. Storage and flexibility benefit most when there is greater variation in electricity prices. Under LMP, this will occur in zones where intermittent renewable capacity or peak demand is greatest. Given that Scotland has significant wind capacity, prices will be more volatile than in other regions of GB. FTI find that the standard deviation in electricity prices in N. Scotland in 2025 under LMP would be similar to 2023 national prices, despite average prices being 71% lower. This is greater than in other areas in the country, even those with high demand (e.g. SE England). Such volatility would provide the best environment in the UK for wholesale arbitrage, likely attracting the relocation of battery investment to Scotland. Whilst this opportunity would decrease in magnitude as the transmission network is upgraded between England and Scotland, FTI notes that Scotland would still be among the most attractive locations to locate energy storage within the modelling timeframe to 2040. It should be noted that the implementation of LMP will likely take 4-8 years (National Grid ESO, 2022a), so the opportunity is overestimated when including years that LMP can not actually be realised. Overall, increasing flexibility in Scotland will not only reduce the need for expensive network build, but also improve security of supply.
This view was largely confirmed by the EAP. However, it was raised that the strongest signal to provide certainty for the investment in flexibility in Scotland would be a long-term contract, similar to the Capacity Market. Despite this, the clear signal sent by LMP would be stark in comparison to the weak signals from current locational mechanisms such as TNUoS charges and the Balancing Mechanism.
Furthermore, LMP would introduce locational dispatch signals improving the operational dispatch of flexibility to respond to generation and grid conditions at the node/zone that the flexibility is located. This would improve the efficiency of energy storage and flexibility (including interconnectors). The result of this would be to reduce the flexible capacity requirement and hence the cost of developing a secure and flexible net zero system.
Alignment of investment signals with network upgrades, at correct timescales
LMP provides short-term price signals that identify where the grid is constrained the most, given that it is designed around network bottlenecks. As such, it can be used to identify which zone/node boundaries require network reinforcement. Incentives for generation and demand to relocate should also reduce the need for network reinforcement itself.
However, to build an optimal net zero power system by 2035, rapid transmission build needs to be strategic, and in-line with plans for generation capacity build. This means that network build-out will not always be optimal, but the goal of strategic planning is to deliver electricity to consumers at the lowest cost achievable within the timescale for decarbonisation. This means co-optimising the development of generation, flexibility, and transmission network within these constraints. Such an approach has begun with NGESO proposing the HND, planned around offshore wind seabed leasing, providing more capacity to transport electricity out of Scotland.
Market reforms need to ensure that strategic planning of investment is prioritised. LMP can only send short-term price signals that dictate where network reinforcement is required for the current power system, it does not take into account future developments. Under LMP, this could be achieved through investment mechanisms (e.g. reformed CfDs and the Capacity Market) to ensure generation is developed in locations with a long-term system benefit.
Dispatchable low-carbon generation
Firm dispatchable low-carbon generation is a requirement for a future energy system that relies on variable renewable generation, to ensure security of supply. Dispatchable low-carbon generation is required for longer periods of limited renewable generation, when battery storage is not able to provide power over extended periods of time. This includes gas generation with carbon capture, hydrogen generation, or biomass generation (with carbon capture).
Such generation will be dispatched based on periods of high electricity prices, balancing actions, and Capacity Market instructions. LMP would improve locational signals for this generation, improving the efficiency of dispatch. Therefore, under LMP, dispatchable generation would be incentivised to locate in locations with high renewable generation or where peak demand is greatest. As with flexibility, such conditions would make Scotland an attractive location for dispatchable generation under LMP.
As with renewables, LMP creates additional risks for the investment in low carbon dispatchable generation. In an optimal market, LMP should incentivise investment in low carbon dispatchable generation where it is most required (locations with the highest prices). However, LMP introduces new risks for investors over the certainty of revenue as this will be significantly impacted by when and where network is upgraded. Mechanisms could be implemented alongside LMP to incentivise investment where it is most required while reducing risk for investors e.g. adding a locational element to the Capacity Market. This could be implemented without LMP, but with reduced dispatch efficiency.
Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, Threats
Table 10: Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats for a secure and flexible net zero energy system.
|
Strengths |
Opportunities |
|
|
|
Weaknesses |
Threats |
|
|
Conclusions
Summary of findings
In this study we have reviewed the literature to understand the potential impacts of electricity market reform in Scotland. Based on the ambitions of the Scottish Government in their Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan, we have applied these impacts to explore how market reform and LMP could help further or risk these ambitions. The key conclusions of this assessment are summarised in Table 11.
Table 11: Key conclusions on the extent that LMP in electricity market reform could aid the Scottish Government’s ambitions in their Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan.
|
Ambition |
Conclusions |
|
Support the scale up of low-cost renewable energy |
On its own, LMP would create new risks for renewable generators and increase the cost of capital of new developments.
|
|
Adhere to the principles of a fair and just transition |
LMP could provide Scottish consumers with some of the lowest wholesale prices in Europe.
|
|
Support accelerated decarbonisation |
LMP could reduce the cost of electrification and incentivise power intensive industry and H2 production to locate in Scotland.
|
|
Enable a secure and flexible net zero energy system |
LMP is the most effective reform to provide locational signals for flexibility.
|
Overall LMP provides theoretical benefits to consumers of electricity and flexibility in Scotland, reducing wholesale prices and improving dispatch signals. If executed optimally, LMP could reduce the whole system cost associated with decarbonisation. However, LMP only provides short-term market signals and removes firm access rights for generators. Therefore, LMP would be ineffective at providing the long-term investment signals for renewables, which could create risks for the industry in Scotland, nullifying the potential benefits. Nevertheless, if additional market reform, alongside LMP, could protect renewable investment in Scotland, the potential benefits for Scottish consumers of electricity are sufficient to explore such a set of reforms.
Future market arrangements
In this section, we will explore the arrangement in which LMP could be successfully implemented and two counterfactuals, business-as-usual (BAU) with incremental reform, and LMP without further support. This will illustrate how reform could deliver benefits for consumers while protecting renewable generators.
These have been created based on what we believe possible market arrangements could be. First, business-as-usual arrangement identifies the flaws of continuing as usual. We identify the key reforms that would be required if national pricing is maintained to create a market with more effective locational signals. Second, LMP without supporting measures is described to identify the risk to Scottish renewables this arrangement could have. Finally, we explore LMP with mitigating measures as a final arrangement that we believe has the most potential to be successful.

Arrangement 1: Business-as-usual with incremental reform
Firm access to the entire GB electricity market will see renewable generators continue to locate in Scotland. Revenues would be secured by CfDs (regardless of exacerbated constraints, but not national curtailment). Without additional reform, TNUoS charges would be the only locational price driver for investment in renewables and flexibility. Although, non-price factors such as planning and renewable resource would also influence the location of renewables. As such, flexibility would not have a significant incentive to locate near renewables or behind import constraints in centres of demand. Local constraint markets could go some way to provide such signals, however, not without risks of its own (complicated market arrangements and perverse interactions of constraint and wholesale markets). Therefore, without reform, a BAU electricity market will not be optimal to encourage efficient investment in generation, flexibility, or networks for power system decarbonisation.
For consumers, the entire country would pay the marginal price of electricity regardless of the local generation mix. Therefore, wholesale prices will remain uniform across GB and would not provide a signal for demand to relocate to take advantage of areas with surplus renewable generation. As such, Scottish demand sectors would not be able to benefit from the renewable resources present in the country.
As indicated by the current REMA consultation, existing BAU electricity market arrangements are not fit for net zero. Regardless of the introduction of LMP, the electricity market will require reforms to enable a decarbonised energy system. Any reforms will create uncertainty so maintaining confidence for investors and consumers will be essential in any next steps. A combination of alternative reforms could achieve some the LMP’s potential benefits. These could include reforms to TNUoS, CfDs, the Balancing Mechanism, as well as developing local constraint markets. These alternatives could see less disruption, as they would be evolutions of existing arrangements. However, they would be unlikely to fully replicate the benefits of a successfully implemented LMP market.
Arrangement 2: LMP without further renewables support
Under LMP, the loss of firm access rights to markets outside of immediate zones/nodes would greatly increase revenue risk to generators located behind export constraints (such as in Scotland). With the additional prospect of low wholesale prices, due to a surplus in renewable generation in Scotland, LMP would create a significant investment risk in Scotland. This could lead to some renewable generation re-locating to other parts of the UK, or investment leaving for other markets entirely. This would pose further risks to whole system decarbonisation, potentially leading to delays in renewable roll-out in the UK as supply chains move from Scotland to other areas. Likely increases in the cost of capital due to elevated risks for generators would also lead to reduced investment in renewables. This alone could wipe out the power system cost-benefit of introducing LMP.
Flexibility would be incentivised to relocate to Scotland under LMP, where volatile locational prices would provide operational profiles that could see flexibility generate the highest revenue across the UK. Furthermore, consumers would be set to benefit in Scotland. Given Scotland is already a net exporter of electricity, LMP would see a reduction in wholesale prices and hence a reduction in retail prices if passed through to consumers. Note that some consumer groups could be shielded from locational variations in wholesale prices.
Nevertheless, despite the potential benefits for consumers, the risk to the renewables industry in Scotland and the wider economic benefits that it brings means that LMP alone will be unable to deliver on the ambitions of the Scottish Government. Further reform would be needed to insulate renewable generators from the adverse effects of LMP on their investment case.
Arrangement 3: LMP with reformed support mechanisms to insulate renewables
LMP can provide strong incentives for the optimal location and dispatch of flexibility and demand as well as offering Scottish consumers the lowest wholesale prices in the UK. The extent to which Scottish demand could benefit from lower wholesale prices will depend on several factors, including potential shielding of demand and long-term effects on the cost of electricity if cost of capital increases materialise. However, in Scotland it leaves an oversupplied generation market with limited case for further investment until the transmission network is reinforced. A thriving Scottish renewables sector is required to meet the UK Government’s target of a net zero power system by 2035. Therefore, it is vital that renewables continue to be developed in Scotland ahead of planned network capacity upgrades that enable generation to be transmitted to centres of demand across the UK. Should a support mechanism for investment in renewables be implemented on this basis alongside LMP then such electricity market reforms could deliver for all players in the power system: generators, flexibility, and consumers.
While it is out of the scope of this study to fully consider the design of such a support mechanism, it would likely take the form of a reformed CfD. Already, the current CfD mechanism completely insulates renewable generation from market price to de-risk investment. Under LMP, the further reform that would be required to de-risk renewables would be to insulate renewables from market volume. Essentially, this would protect renewables from the loss of firm access rights under LMP. An example of this reform could be moving to a deemed CfD, however other options should be considered.
The argument for such a reform is that renewable generation is inflexible, with no control over when and how much it generates. Given that vast additional renewable capacity is required to reach net zero, renewable energy should not be penalised based on these limitations. The result of this would put additional onus on the UK Government to consider the long-term system benefits when awarding CfDs based on current and future constraint forecasts and network upgrades. It would also likely increase the cost of CfDs for the UK Government. However, given the rapid pace of decarbonisation required to reach net zero, it could be argued that such additional risk and cost should sit with the UK Government rather than investors. This is because, overall, the mechanism should still provide whole system investment and operational savings, which will be passed down to consumers via electricity bills.
Conclusions
The authors conclusions are based on the work presented in this report. They form an assessment of the opportunities and threats that LMP and wider electricity market reform poses to the Scottish Government’s ambitions as per their Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan. Based on the findings of this study, the Scottish Government should consider supporting the implementation of LMP alongside a GB-wide strategic plan for renewable and network investment through further electricity market reform. The following conclusions are in order of importance and are sequential:
- Scotland must prioritise and coordinate a strategic plan for renewable generation and network reinforcement with the UK Government.
- Alone, LMP poses a significant risk for renewable development in Scotland, threatening the green economy in Scotland, the wider economic benefits it may bring, and a net zero power system by 2035.
- Long-term locational signals to strategically locate investment of renewables are essential to achieve a cost-efficient net zero power system by 2035.
- Due to its existing renewable pipeline, renewable resources, and existing industry, Scotland should be prioritised as a location for renewable investment and network reinforcement.
- Introducing support mechanisms, such as a reformed CfD, which protects against revenue and volume risk in the wholesale market, is essential to the successful implementation of LMP to maintain investor confidence in Scottish renewables.
- Alternatively, improved TNUoS charges, with long-term locational signals, could provide similar locational investment signals in a national market, however without creating the efficient dispatch signals LMP could.
- The Scottish Government has the opportunity to work with the UK Government to implement reform, as the responsibility for these mechanisms lie with the UK Government.
- LMP would provide the clearest dispatch signal for flexibility, delivering efficient investment and operation of flexibility.
- To maximise renewable penetration, net zero will require clear dispatch signals for flexibility to improve siting and operation. These signals under LMP would incentivise the relocation of flexibility to Scotland.
- If implemented effectively, these features of LMP should reduce the whole system investment and operational cost associated with decarbonisation, benefiting consumers.
- Should consumers be exposed to locational prices, Scottish consumers would benefit directly from reduced wholesale prices because of existing renewable generation in Scotland. This would send a clear signal to site new demand in Scotland.
- A zonal market would enable most of the system benefits of LMP, without the complexity and disruption of implementing a nodal market.
- However, should LMP be deemed too disruptive, local constraint markets could serve as an alternative dispatch signal for flexibility. However, this is unlikely to be able to replicate the granular benefits of LMP and could result in complex market arrangements with consequences that should be explored in detail before it is recommended as a complete solution to locational dispatch signals.
- The Scottish Government should account for the potential benefits of LMP for consumers being greater the earlier it is introduced.
- Scottish consumers stand to benefit more from LMP the earlier it is introduced ahead of planned network reinforcement by 2035 and onwards.
- While the priority must be to have a clear and well communicated plan for the implementation of market reform, the earlier LMP could be implemented, the greater the benefits to Scottish consumers.
- The first step would need to be the development of reformed support mechanisms and the grandfathering of existing support mechanisms which protect both existing and developing renewable generation.
- If alternative market reforms are pursued, a similar approach to prioritising confidence in renewables should be adopted.
- Locational market reform would need to be carefully implemented as it would inevitably create winners and losers.
- While Scottish consumers could be a key winner of LMP, the Scottish Government would have to consider how the rest of GB may be impacted.
- Support to protect the future Scottish renewables industry is essential to deliver net zero, while ensuring that the industry remains in Scotland and jobs are realised.
- Future renewables support, also including the grandfathering of current arrangements, should be designed, communicated and implemented ahead of a transition to LMP.
- Zonal pricing could help to remove the most extreme regional inequalities from LMP under a nodal market, reducing the risk of LMP to a just transition.
Next steps
Based on our conclusions, we suggest the Scottish Government takes the following next steps to fully explore whether LMP could be implemented with the appropriate support mechanisms to provide benefits to generation and demand across the whole system:
- Work with the UK Government to develop a long-term strategic plan, such as the SSEP, to achieve a decarbonised power system by 2035 and net zero by 2050. This includes the planning of a cost-effective level of network infrastructure investment, renewables development, and short- and long-duration storage. This would improve the penetration of renewables, reduce constraints, and lead to whole system savings.
- Fully explore the risks and opportunities of reforming CfDs to insulate renewables against price risk and volume risk, and the suitability of implementing such a support mechanism alongside LMP.
- Develop wider support mechanisms to support the benefits of LMP in Scotland, such as new demand sectors, to ensure that Scotland can take full advantage of electricity market reform.
- LMP will take 4-8 years to implement if selected, Scotland should support alternative reforms in the interim to encourage the early development of locational benefits ahead of LMP (e.g. extending the NGESO Local Constraint Market in Scotland).
Scotland has a significant opportunity to benefit from a decarbonised power system by taking advantage of its renewable resources and distributing those benefits to consumers in a decarbonised economy. Proposed changes to wholesale electricity markets could improve system-wide efficiency and offer cheaper electricity in Scotland. However, it could increase risk associated with investment in Scottish renewables, increasing costs. The Scottish Government needs to engage carefully with the electricity market reform process to ensure that prospective benefits are realised, and that potential disbenefits are avoided or mitigated.
References
AFRY (2023) Review of electricity market design in Great Britain. Available at: https://afry.com/sites/default/files/2023-12/gb_electricitymarketdesign_phase2_publicsummaryreport_v500.pdf
Aurora (2023) Locational marginal pricing in Great Britain. Available at: https://auroraer.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Locational-Marginal-Pricing-GB-Aurora-Public-Report.pdf
Baringa (2023) Net Zero Market Reform – Phase 4. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/document/276841/download
Carbon Tracker (2023) Gone with the Wind? Grid congestion and wind integration in GB. Available at: https://carbontracker.org/reports/gone-with-the-wind/
Citizens Advice (2023) It’s all about location: Will changing the way we price electricity deliver for consumers?. Available at: https://assets.ctfassets.net/mfz4nbgura3g/2esOmp5ZjvBnxChIV7sjd4/8d1a042a8c1e406b189a2491144b9e01/For_20publication_20-_20It_s_20all_20about_20location.pdf
ClimateXChange (2022) Expanding Scottish energy data – heat. Available at: https://www.climatexchange.org.uk/media/5157/cxc-expanding-scottish-energy-data-heat-february-22.pdf
Department for Business, Energy & Industrial Strategy (2021) Hydrogen Production Costs 2021. Available at: https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/611b710e8fa8f53dc994e59d/Hydrogen_Production_Costs_2021.pdf
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (2023a) Energy and emissions projections: 2022 to 2040. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/energy-and-emissions-projections-2022-to-2040
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (2023b) Electricity generation costs 2023. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/electricity-generation-costs-2023
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (2023c) Average annual domestic electricity bills by countries in the United Kingdom. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistical-data-sets/annual-domestic-energy-price-statistics
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (2023d) Regional Statistics 2009-2022: Standard Load Factors. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/regional-renewable-statistics
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (2023e) ECUK 2023: Primary energy consumption data tables. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/energy-consumption-in-the-uk-2023
Element Energy (an ERM Company) (2021) Decarbonising the Scottish Transport Sector. Available at: https://www.transport.gov.scot/media/50354/decarbonising-the-scottish-transport-sector-summary-report-september-2021.pdf
Element Energy (an ERM Company) (2022) TCO and tax scenarios for passenger cars in the UK.
Energy UK (2023) Energy UK high-level views on Locational Marginal Pricing. Available at: https://www.energy-uk.org.uk/publications/energy-uk-high-level-views-on-locational-marginal-pricing/
ES Catapult (2021) Introducing nodal pricing to the GB power market to drive innovation for consumers’ benefit: Why now and how? Available at: https://es.catapult.org.uk/report/locational-energy-pricing-in-the-gb-power-market/
ES Catapult (2021) Locational Energy Pricing in the GB Power Market. Available at: https://es.catapult.org.uk/report/locational-energy-pricing-in-the-gb-power-market/
ES Catapult (2022) Informing the REMA debate. International Learnings on Investment Support for Clean Electricity. Available at: https://es.catapult.org.uk/report/rema-international-learnings-on-investment-support-for-clean-electricity/
ES Catapult (2022) Location, Location, Location. Reforming wholesale electricity markets to meet Net-Zero. Available at: https://es.catapult.org.uk/report/location-location-location-reforming-wholesale-electricity-markets-to-meet-net-zero/
Fraser of Allander Institute (2023) The Economic Impact of Scotland’s Renewable Energy Sector – 2023 Update. Available at: https://fraserofallander.org/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/FINAL-The-Economic-Impact-of-Scotlands-Renewable-Energy-Sector-1.pdf
Frontier Economics (2022) Locational marginal pricing – Implications for cost of capital. Available at: https://www.frontier-economics.com/uk/en/news-and-insights/news/news-article-i20310-locational-marginal-pricing-implications-for-the-cost-of-capital/#
Frontier Economics (2023) The benefits of locational marginal pricing in the GB electricity system – A review of FTI’s assessment of the benefits. Available at: https://www.frontier-economics.com/uk/en/news-and-insights/news/news-article-i20234-locational-marginal-pricing-assessing-the-benefits/
FTI Consulting (2023) Locational pricing assessment in GB: Final modelling results. Available at: https://www.ofgem.gov.uk/sites/default/files/2023-10/Key%20findings%20from%20FTI%20Consulting%20presentation%20June%202023%20.pdf
FTI Consulting (2022) Net Zero Market Reform: Phase 3. Assessment of market design options. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/document/258876/download
Gill et al. (2023) Exploring market change in the GB electricity system: the potential impact of Locational Marginal Pricing. Available at: https://pureportal.strath.ac.uk/en/publications/exploring-market-change-in-the-gb-electricity-system-the-potentia-2
Gill, S. (2023) Review of Electricity Market Arrangements: A Vision for Scotland. Available at: https://www.scottishfuturestrust.org.uk/publications/documents/sft-rema-report-a-vision-for-scotland-november-2023
H2Green Steel (2023) Questions and answers about our establishment in Boden. Available at: https://www.h2greensteel.com/questions-and-answers-about-our-establishment-in-boden#:~:text=We%20chose%20to%20locate%20our,the%20region%20%E2%80%93%20an%20ideal%20environment
ICCT (2023) A total cost of ownership comparison of truck decarbonisation pathways in Europe. Available at: https://theicct.org/publication/total-cost-ownership-trucks-europe-nov23/
MacIver et al. (2023) Exploring market change in the GB electricity system: the potential impact of Locational Marginal Pricing – stakeholder insight report. Available at: https://pureportal.strath.ac.uk/en/publications/exploring-market-change-in-the-gb-electricity-system-the-potentia
McQueen et al. (2021) A review of direct air capture (DAC): scaling up commercial technologies and innovating for the future. Available at: https://iopscience.iop.org/article/10.1088/2516-1083/abf1ce/pdf
National Grid (2023) We’re engaging on our early pans to transform our network for net zero. Available at: https://www.nationalgrid.com/electricity-transmission/were-engaging-our-early-plans-transform-our-network-net-zero
National Grid ESO (2022a) Net Zero Market Reform: Phase 3 Assessment and Conclusions. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/document/258871/download
National Grid ESO (2022b) Network Options Assessment 2021/22 Refresh. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/document/262981/download
National Grid ESO (2023a) Monthly Balancing Services Summary. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/data-portal/mbss
National Grid ESO (2023b) Markets Roadmap. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/document/278306/download
National Grid ESO (2023c) Future Energy Scenarios 2023 Data Workbook. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/future-energy/future-energy-scenarios-fes
National Grid ESO (2023d) NZMR Phase 4 Webinar Q&A. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/document/283516/download
National Grid ESO (2023e) Monthly Balancing Services Summary (MBSS) Mar-2023. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/data-portal/mbss
OEUK (2022) Workforce Insight 2022+. Available at: https://oeuk.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/OEUK-Workforce-Insight-2022.pdf
Office for Budget Responsibility (2024) Economic and fiscal outlook – March 2024. Available at: https://obr.uk/efo/economic-and-fiscal-outlook-march-2024/
Office for National Statistics (2024) Consumer price inflation time series (MM23). Available at: https://www.ons.gov.uk/economy/inflationandpriceindices/timeseries/d7bt/mm23
Offshore Wind Scotland (2023) Offshore Wind Market in Scotland. Available at: https://www.offshorewindscotland.org.uk/the-offshore-wind-market-in-scotland/
Ofgem (2014) Electricity Interconnectors factsheet. Available at: https://www.ofgem.gov.uk/sites/default/files/docs/2014/05/electricity_interconnectors_factsheet.pdf
Ofgem (2023) Assessment of Locational Wholesale Pricing for GB. Available at: https://www.ofgem.gov.uk/sites/default/files/2023-10/Ofgem%20Report%20-%20Assessment%20of%20Locational%20Pricing%20in%20GB%20%28final%29.pdf
Ofgem (2024) Breakdown of an electricity bill. Available at: https://www.ofgem.gov.uk/energy-data-and-research/data-portal/all-available-charts?keyword=bills&fuel_type=1606&sort=relevance
Pollitt, M. (2023) Locational Marginal Prices (LMPs) for Electricity in Europe? The Untold Story. Available at: https://www.eprg.group.cam.ac.uk/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/text-2318-revised-180723.pdf
Rai et al. (2021) Financing costs and barriers to entry in Australia’s electricity market. Available at: https://www.researchgate.net/publication/350358213_Financing_costs_and_barriers_to_entry_in_Australia’s_electricity_market
Regen (2023a) Call for evidence on introducing non-price factors into the Contracts for Difference scheme. Available at: https://www.regen.co.uk/wp-content/uploads/CfE-non-price-factors-CfD-Regen-response.pdf
Regen (2023b) Improving locational signals in the GB electricity markets. Available at: https://www.regen.co.uk/insight-paper-improving-locational-signals-in-the-gb-electricity-market/
Scottish Government (2021) Heat in Buildings Strategy. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/heat-buildings-strategy-achieving-net-zero-emissions-scotlands-buildings/documents/
Scottish Government (2022) Hydrogen Action Plan. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/hydrogen-action-plan/
Scottish Government (2023a) Scottish Energy Statistics HubEnergy Statistics for Scotland – Q2 2023. Available at: https://scotland.shinyapps.io/sg-scottish-energy-statistics/?Section=RenLowCarbon&Subsection=RenElec&Chart=RenElecPipeline https://www.gov.scot/publications/energy-statistics-for-scotland-q2-2023/pages/renewable-electricity-capacity/
Scottish Government (2023b) Just Transition: Grangemouth. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/strategy-plan/2023/09/discussion-paper-transition-grangemouth-industrial-cluster/documents/discussion-paper-transition-grangemouth-industrial-cluster/discussion-paper-transition-grangemouth-industrial-cluster/govscot%3Adocument/discussion-paper-transition-grangemouth-industrial-cluster.pdf
Scottish Government (2023c) Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/draft-energy-strategy-transition-plan/documents/
The Crown Estate (2023) The Crown Estate Offshore Wind Leasing Round 4 Selected Projects. Available at: https://www.thecrownestate.co.uk/media/3721/the-crown-estate-offshore-wind-leasing-round-4-selected-projects.pdf
Transport Scotland (2020) National Transport Strategy 2. Available at: https://www.transport.gov.scot/publication/national-transport-strategy-2/
© The University of Edinburgh, 2024
Prepared by Environmental Resources Management Ltd.on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
Marginal pricing means that one price, the price set by the most expensive selected electricity generation offer to meet demand is received by every successful participant in the electricity generation auction. ↑
National Grid suggest that to meet the Government’s target of 50GW of offshore wind by 2030, more than five times the amount of transmission infrastructure must be delivered in the next seven years, than has been built in the past 30 years. ↑
Historical CPI inflation data from ONS (2024), and 2024 forecast from OBR (2024). ↑
No whole system cost estimate provided, only relative changes. ↑
6.8GW and 3.7GW increase in battery capacity by 2035 in N and S Scotland respectively, compared to 13GW total GB capacity. FTI Consulting (2023) LtW NOA7 Scenario. Values estimated from report charts. ↑
-1.2GW and -1.4GW reduction of solar capacity by 2035 in N and S Scotland respectively, compared to 58GW total GB capacity. FTI Consulting (2023) LtW NOA7 Scenario. Values estimated from report charts. ↑
-1.5GW and -4.3GW reduction in offshore wind capacity by 2035 in N and S Scotland respectively, compared to 76GW total GB capacity. FTI Consulting (2023) LtW NOA7 Scenario. Values estimated from report charts. ↑
6.5GW increase in onshore wind capacity by 2035 in N Scotland, compared to 31GW total GB capacity. FTI Consulting (2023) LtW NOA7 Scenario. Values estimated from report charts. ↑
The boundaries for Scotland and Southern Scotland in the models are generally defined by the B4 and B6 transmission constraints. The B4 constraint separates the transmission network between the SP Transmission and SSEN Transmission interface, from the Firth of Tay in the east to the north of the Isle of Arran in the West. The B6 boundary runs roughly along the border between Scotland and England, on the SP Transmission and NG Electricity Transmission interface. ↑
Up to 2035. ↑
Beyond 2035. ↑
A decrease in the average wholesale price in the most expensive zone by 2040 due to system savings under LMP. ↑
Research completed: July 2024
Non-technical summary
This is a non-technical summary to a report published separately as GB wholesale electricity market reform: impacts and opportunities for Scotland. The reader is invited to refer to the full report for detail.
Context
This study assesses the impact that the introduction of locational marginal pricing (LMP) to the Great Britain (GB) wholesale electricity market would have for Scotland, as well as the impact of potential alternatives. LMP has been proposed as a potential reform in the UK Government’s Review of Electricity Market Arrangements (REMA) consultation, which aims to reform electricity markets to enable a net zero energy system. LMP would be a significant reform and is of particular interest to Scotland, as the country is likely to be affected differently to other parts of GB.
We conducted a literature review and assessment of LMP and its alternatives between September 2023 and January 2024. It is an independent review and is not the view of the Scottish Government. This included a detailed assessment of quantitative and qualitative literature, as well as input from an expert advisory panel. The panel was invited to attend two 2-hour discussions, commented on, and reviewed interim findings. It consisted of stakeholders across government, energy research centres, renewables developers, flexibility providers, industry and business representatives, energy suppliers, large consumers of electricity in Scotland, a community energy group, and a consumer protection and advocacy body. Its views have been considered and included in the development of this review. This is the non-technical summary, with a detailed report published separately.
Locational marginal pricing
The wholesale electricity market is where electricity is bought and sold before it is delivered to consumers. Its main participants are electricity generators and suppliers. The current wholesale market is national and marginal. This means that electricity can be bought and sold anywhere in GB at a single national price[1], regardless of the physical constraints, or bottlenecks, on the transmission network. An example of this can be found at the B6 boundary that separates the transmission network between Scotland and England. Constraints arising here limit power flow (typically southward). Generators and consumers are not directly incentivised by the wholesale market to place and operate physical assets that generate or consume electricity in a way that is efficient for their specific location on the electricity network.
Electricity is traded in advance based on a predicted amount of electricity demand. The amount of electricity generated in real-time is adjusted by the electricity system operator (National Grid ESO) to meet the actual, rather than the predicted demand. The cost incurred by National Grid ESO is then passed on to consumers through their electricity bills. When traded generation is expected to exceed the maximum power flow of the network (creating a constraint), additional trades need to be made by National Grid ESO in affected areas to change the expected operating schedules of generators or consumers. With network build not keeping up with the growth in renewables, this inefficiency is accelerating and contributing to higher electricity bills for consumers (National Grid ESO, 2022a).
LMP could help reduce this inefficiency by splitting the national market into smaller geographic areas called zones or nodes (see Figure 1). This creates smaller markets that reflect the supply and demand in an area, and the constraints of the network. Areas where the supply is higher than demand will see prices fall, and areas with higher demand will see prices rise. This could incentivise generation and demand to locate where they do not exacerbate constraints. However, it is necessary to consider the wider, non-price factors that also influence decisions by generators and consumers on where to locate. These include the availability and quality of renewable resources (e.g. wind speed or seabed space), supply chains, skills, planning and consenting.

Additionally, the daily variation in price within these locational markets would reflect the instantaneous state of the local network. The result of this would be to create better signals that indicate how to operate flexible assets such as battery storage, international interconnectors, demand side response and dispatchable low-carbon generation (such as hydrogen or biomass) more efficiently. This helps to balance generation and demand and reduce constraints on the network. This further reduces operating costs for National Grid ESO, which are passed directly to consumers.
LMP could, however, make investment in renewable electricity generation less attractive in certain areas of the UK. Without appropriate investment support, it would place additional risks on market participants and create market uncertainty due to the radical nature of the reform. This could have positive impacts on investment in new sources of flexibility (such as storage), but negative impacts on renewables ambitions, particularly in Scotland. Policies could be put in place to mitigate these risks. The impact of LMP on renewable energy development in Scotland will be highly sensitive to whether such policies are implemented effectively.
Objectives of the Scottish Government
The Scottish Government outlined key ambitions in the Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan (ESJTP 2023), amongst other strategy papers. This review was completed before the publication of the final Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan in 2024.
The review aims to discuss how LMP could impact the Scottish Government in achieving these ambitions. They have been summarised using four broad categories most relevant to wholesale market reform:
- Support ambitions to scale up low-cost renewable energy.
- 8-11GW of offshore wind by 2030 (ambitions from draft ESJTP).
- 20GW of onshore wind by 2030 (ambitions from draft ESJTP).
- Adhere to the principles of a fair and just transition.
- Deliver affordable energy that isn’t subject to global fossil fuel price volatility.
- Enable community participation.
- Incentivise wider economic benefit including jobs, skills, supply chains and investment.
- Support accelerated decarbonisation of heat, transport and industry, including through carbon capture and hydrogen.
- Decarbonise heat and transport using renewable electricity/hydrogen.
- Scale hydrogen generation and develop carbon capture in Scotland.
- Enable a secure and flexible net zero energy system, which is not dependent on fossil fuels.
- Enable energy security through the development of own resources and energy storage.
- Invest in grid infrastructure at pace to allow for a net zero transition.
Key outcomes for wholesale market reform
Wholesale market reform will have widespread impacts on Scotland’s energy strategy, as well as wider social and economic implications. By reviewing Scottish Government strategy papers and assessing where wholesale market reform has significant impact, the authors have developed key outcomes that need to be prioritised for electricity market reform to align with Scotland’s ambitions:
- Strategic coordination of renewable development and network investment is required to ensure that renewables stay in Scotland and net zero is achieved.
- Local price signals are necessary to encourage investment in and optimise the use of flexible assets, such as batteries, and enable an efficient use of renewables.
- Mechanisms that allow electricity users to benefit from low-cost renewable generation are required.
- Benefits and costs of a green transition need to be shared fairly to consumers, communities, and businesses.
Findings
In this section we present the key findings on how LMP and its alternatives could impact Scotland’s energy transition ambitions. This is split into four broad categories:
- The scale up of low-cost renewable energy.
- The fair and just transition.
- The decarbonisation of heat, transport, and industry.
- Enabling a secure and flexible net zero energy system.
Scale up of low-cost renewable energy
LMP would create regional differences in wholesale prices across GB, which depend on local levels of generation and demand. Areas such as the south of England, where demand is higher than supply, would likely see wholesale prices rise. Areas with an oversupply of renewable generation, such as Scotland, would see wholesale prices fall. The primary purpose of LMP is to create a market that is more reflective of the cost of delivering electricity to specific locations on the grid. In doing so, this encourages the placement of generation and demand where it is most suitable and cost-effective for the energy system. The wholesale price signal seen by renewables developers in Scotland could disincentivise investment, as market revenues would decline. Modelling by Aurora (2023) and FTI Consulting (2023) suggest a general southern shift in solar generation, away from Scotland. Changes in the buildout of on- and off-shore wind are more contested due other non-price factors such as the effective on-shore wind ban in England, as well as limited off-shore site availability due to leasing rounds from the Crown Estate. Certain market arrangements could be developed to help shield generators from excessively low local wholesale prices, however this would somewhat diminish the benefit of LMP.
Additionally, LMP introduces a change to the rights of access participants have to the market. Currently, electricity generators can sell electricity on the wholesale market regardless of transmission network constraints. They have firm access rights to the market. Under LMP, generators lose their firm access to the network. As a result, they can only sell their electricity within their zone/node or when it can be transmitted to consumers. This introduces a significant risk for generators in Scotland, as there are times when more electricity is produced from wind in Scotland than can be transmitted to domestic and commercial consumers within Scotland and to the rest of the UK. National Grid has proposed to significantly upgrade the network to 2035, however some excess flows from Scotland are likely to persist even after the new transmission is built.
The new risks created by LMP, combined with additional implementation uncertainty (as a result of reforming wholesale market arrangements), could lead to increases in the cost of capital. The cost of capital reflects the cost of money (e.g. interest on debt) required to finance projects. It represents the return required for an investment to be worthwhile and increases with project risk. As renewables require major upfront investment, the cost of capital has a significant impact on investment levels and the final cost of electricity for consumers. Overall, modelling completed by Aurora (2023), FTI Consulting (2023) and AFRY (2023) shows that small increases in the cost of capital caused by introducing LMP could wipe out any benefits linked to cost savings resulting from LMP.
UK decarbonisation relies on significant renewables capacity in Scotland. As such, the introduction of LMP alone would risk Scottish renewables deployment and therefore GB decarbonisation ambitions. To mitigate this, a possible solution is to reform the renewables support scheme, referred to as Contracts for Difference, to reduce risk in low carbon electricity generation development. This solution must be explored further for possible options and feasibility. Alternatively, improved Transmission Use of System Charges (TNUoS) could provide similar locational investment signals to LMP. These charges are paid by generators and suppliers to recover the cost of installing and maintaining the transmission network. However, reformed TNUoS would lack the operational incentives for flexible assets that LMP could provide.
Fair and just transition
If LMP benefits are realised, the total cost of running the electricity system should decrease moderately as a more efficient electricity system is developed. If these benefits are not offset by increases in the cost of capital for renewables, the modelled annual net economic benefit to the cost of the electricity system lies between £0.2bn-1.6bn (AFRY, 2023; Aurora, 2023).
Due to significant existing renewables capacity, LMP could see Scottish consumers benefitting from wholesale electricity prices lower than current prices as well as prices in other regions of GB. This benefit would reduce over time, though according to one study, Scottish prices would remain as some of the lowest in Europe (FTI Consulting, 2023). As transmission network is reinforced to 2035 and more electricity generation facilities are built closer to where they are needed, prices across GB will converge.
However, initially prices would rise in some areas in GB, although not as much as they would decrease in Scotland (FTI Consulting, 2023). It is possible that some consumer groups, e.g. domestic customers, would be shielded from wholesale prices through arrangements with their electricity retail companies, or UK Government policy design. Additionally, energy suppliers may not pass savings directly to customers, as their costs may rise in other regions. As wholesale electricity prices only constitute a proportion of the domestic electricity bill, with other components including network charges and green levies, the impact of LMP on overall domestic electricity bills will depend on the proportion of the bill that wholesale prices make up at any given time.
Overall, the benefits are more likely to be seen by commercial and industrial consumers in Scotland, who are less likely to be shielded from wholesale prices. The extent to which these benefits are realised depends on when LMP is implemented. The modelling shows the earlier it is implemented, the greater the benefit, as networks are reinforced and become less constrained to 2035 and beyond. However, National Grid ESO suggests LMP will take at least four to eight years for implementation (National Grid ESO, 2022a), limiting the benefits that can be attained.
The development of employment opportunities and other wider economic benefits due to accelerated renewables development is a significant benefit for Scotland. To ensure this, continued development of renewables is necessary through supporting policy. LMP also provides a significant economic opportunity through investment in new demand and industrial sectors. Lower electricity prices could attract investment in sectors such as green hydrogen, data centres or green steel – though none of the reviewed studies directly model this. The Fraser of Allander Institute study (FAI, 2023) shows that the renewable energy sector already supported more than 42,000 jobs across the Scottish economy and generated over £10.1 billion of output in 2021. With decarbonisation seeing the decline of the Scottish oil & gas industry, renewable energy and new demand sectors could provide significant employment opportunities and economic growth.
Decarbonisation of heat, transport and industry
Overall, the modelling in reports published by Aurora (2023) and FTI Consulting (2023) suggests that even if LMP is implemented successfully, it would not significantly affect the pace of decarbonisation of the electricity system. In fact, implementation of LMP without appropriate accompanying mitigations could risk UK decarbonisation efforts through a hiatus in renewable generation investment. The main benefit of LMP is that it could reduce the cost of decarbonisation, especially in Scotland, where the price of electricity could decrease the most.
The electrification of heat and transport is a significant aspect of decarbonisation. Lower wholesale costs under LMP in Scotland can contribute to heat pump and electric vehicle (EV) uptake. This is more likely for heat pumps, as electricity cost is a larger proportion of the total lifetime cost compared to EVs. Analysis by the authors indicates that a 35% reduction in wholesale cost in Scotland would reduce the total cost of ownership of an EV (in years 1-4) by 2%, and 10% for heat pumps. Both still have significant upfront costs that would need to be addressed.
LMP could make the development of green hydrogen more attractive in Scotland. Aurora’s modelling (2023) suggests hydrogen produced in Northern Scotland could have some of the lowest costs in Europe. This is because electricity is one of the main cost components of hydrogen electrolysis. This could generate a hydrogen export economy that could also benefit the decarbonisation of other industrial processes.
Carbon capture on the other hand is not likely to benefit from LMP. The implementation of carbon capture is linked to identifying industrial sites with good transport and carbon storage opportunities.
Enable a secure and flexible net zero energy system
LMP incentivises the optimal location and operation of flexible assets. Flexible assets can shift the consumption or generation of electricity in time or location. The significant capacity of renewable generation in Scotland means that prices in the wholesale market would show significant variation. This would attract investment of flexible assets in Scotland, as operators can access higher revenues. A system with a large proportion of renewable generation requires greater capacity of flexible assets. Such assets relieve network constraints and reduce the overall requirement for generation capacity and network build. Both Aurora (2023) and FTI (2023) show a significant increase in the capacity of battery storage in Scotland due to the implementation of LMP.
Under LMP, the operation of flexible assets is more efficient. A national wholesale market sends the same price signal to all flexible assets, anywhere in the country, regardless of local constraints. This would be improved under LMP, as flexible assets would respond to wholesale price variation, which would reflect local grid requirements. A particular benefit seen is the improved use of interconnectors to other countries. Overall, this enables a cheaper, more secure power system.
Local constraint markets (LCMs) could provide alternative locational signals for flexibility in this respect. LCMs are new electricity markets designed around network constraints. They provide incentives for operators to change their generation/consumption schedules, so that limits on the network are not exceeded. LCMs could, to an extent, replicate LMP market signals for flexibility. However, they would likely create additional barriers and be more complex by creating multiple markets and signals for flexibility to respond to.
Conclusions
The conclusions are based on the authors full independent assessment of the opportunities and threats that LMP and wider electricity market reform could have on the Scottish Government’s ambitions. Based on the findings of this study, the Scottish Government should support the development of a GB-wide strategic plan for renewables and network investment. The Scottish Government should fully explore the implementation of LMP with accompanying reformed support for renewable generation, specifically Contracts for Difference, to ensure continued investment in Scotland.
On the basis of this assessment, the following conclusions are presented in order of importance.
- Scotland must prioritise and coordinate a strategic plan for renewable generation and network reinforcement with the UK Government.
Without support mechanisms for renewables that shield energy generators from LMP, there would be additional risks that disincentivise renewables development in Scotland. Delays to transmission network reinforcement would exacerbate this. Long-term locational signals to strategically locate investment is essential to achieve a low-cost net zero power system. LMP, alongside support mechanisms for renewables, could provide these signals and continue to enable renewables development in Scotland. It is essential that mechanisms such as reformed Contracts for Difference are tested for feasibility before implementation. Alternatively, improved Transmission Network Use of System charges could provide the market with similar signals that indicate the best locations to invest, although this will not improve dispatch signals in the way LMP would.
- LMP would provide the clearest dispatch signal for flexibility, delivering efficient investment in and operation of flexibility.
Maximising the use of renewables can only be done with significant electricity system flexibility. LMP can provide effective investment signals for its development in Scotland and improve operational signals to optimise its use. This would reduce whole system investment requirements in generation capacity and network, reducing bills for consumers. LCMs could be an alternative in this regard, however, could also result in more complex markets and are unlikely to fully replicate the benefits created by LMP.
- The potential benefits of LMP for consumers are greater the earlier it is introduced.
LMP would create the most significant benefit for Scottish consumers before the transmission network is reinforced to 2035, and therefore, would need to be implemented quickly to maximise benefits. The extent to which this can be achieved is limited, as National Grid assumes implementation may take 4-8 years. A well-developed plan to implement LMP is required that accounts for the creation of support mechanisms which protect renewable generation, ensuring benefits are realised.
- Careful implementation of LMP is required to address regional differences in price.
Scottish consumers benefitting from lower wholesale prices would be a clear winner of LMP. However, this is not evenly spread across the rest of GB and must be considered.
Scotland has a clear opportunity to benefit from a net zero power system by making the most of low-cost renewable energy and distributing those benefits to consumers. Proposed changes to wholesale electricity markets could improve system-wide efficiency and offer cheaper electricity in Scotland. However, it could increase risk associated with investment in Scottish renewables, increasing costs. The Scottish Government needs to engage carefully with the electricity market reform process to ensure that prospective benefits are realised, and that potential disbenefits are avoided or mitigated.
© The University of Edinburgh, 2024
Prepared by Environmental Resources Management Ltd. on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
If you require the report in an alternative format such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
The national price for all generators is set by the most expensive generation selling power on the wholesale market in the period (marginal). ↑
Research completed in April 2024
DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/4747
Executive summary
To deliver climate change mitigation and adaptation, nature restoration and high quality food production, the Scottish Government produced their vision for agriculture, along with the next steps, to encourage sustainable and regenerative farming in Scotland. A programme of work is underway to reform agricultural payments with a greater emphasis placed on delivering environmental outcomes with a proposed structure of four payment tiers tied to a suite of potential measures that will deliver tangible outcomes.
This study identified the most suitable metrics that could be used to monitor the success of the proposed measures in the agricultural reform programme against environmental outcomes. This includes consideration of cost-effectiveness, practicalities and the skills and capabilities of those tasked with monitoring.
Findings
We found potential metrics for assessing the success of the measures for all outcomes. Most metrics can already be applied as the methods are available, whilst a small number are under development and could be applied in the near to medium term. These metrics fell into several categories:
- Emissions cannot be measured directly, so we suggest using current farm-level tools to assess GHG emissions, known as carbon audits. A field level, real time GHG emission model is in development as well as a tool for doing this for ammonia.
- Many metrics depend on direct sampling of soil or biodiversity and can’t be realistically replaced by proxies or existing data. However, well designed sampling programmes can maximise the efficiency of sampling, e.g. sampling for soil carbon, nutrients, pH and eDNA can be done at the same time.
- The outcomes associated with animal health, nutrition and breeding must be largely monitored through proxy metrics. These are relatively easy to measure and provide useful information directly to the land manager.
- A few metrics, such as pesticide usage data or area under permanent habitat, collected as part of the agricultural census, can be derived from existing data.
- Some of the metrics in development could take advantage of samples/data collected at the start of any monitoring programme (e.g. soil eDNA, acoustic monitoring) and others would come online later (e.g. LIDAR-derived hedge data).
- The measure ‘retain traditional cattle’ could not be related to the outcomes.
- Deciding on a suitable suite of metrics to assess the benefits of the Agriculture Reform Programme is only one step as there are issues related to design, sample size and data to be considered.
Recommendations
A full list of suitable metrics for each measure from the Agricultural Reform list of measures is supplied in an accompanying spreadsheet “MeasuresXMetrics.xlsx”. The spreadsheet can be filtered to look at what metrics are suitable for each measure, which outcome they relate to, whether the metric is suitable for direct assessment, if it provides additional useful information or if the metric is still in development, whether the metric is suitable against multiple outcomes and who can carry out the monitoring.
Table 1 summarises the spreadsheet by showing which metrics relate to each outcome. The final choice of which metrics to collect will depend on two main factors:
- The availability of resources to carry out any monitoring programme
- The sampling philosophy adopted; whether widespread collection of a few metrics, where data collection could be partly done by land managers, versus a programme designed to give accurate data at the national level by sampling intensely from a representative sample of locations with mainly expert-led sampling.
Combining information on who can do the monitoring and potential likely costs of expert-led monitoring, we suggest the following monitoring philosophy is appropriate:
- All enterprises to assess soil erosion and buffer strip effectiveness.
- All livestock enterprises to record growth rate, milk yields, mortality, conception rates, replacement rates, age at slaughter for sheep and cattle.
- ScotEID to require information on sires.
- All enterprises to use farm tool calculators (carbon audits) to model GHG emissions. Livestock enterprises to model ammonia emissions when a suitable tool is available. The requirement to model might be limited to enterprises above a certain size to reduce costs.
- The remaining outcomes would be best assessed using expert-led monitoring in a sample-based programme similar in philosophy to the Welsh approach. The resources available for monitoring and statistical power analysis would be key inputs into developing a sampling approach with decisions about the trade-off between number of metrics recorded versus sample size needing to be made.
Table 1. Metrics identified as worthy of adoption in future monitoring, listed by outcome – a full list of which metrics are suitable to assess each measure are shown in the spreadsheet. Metrics are divided into three categories: Suggested metric – a suitable metric for monitoring the relevant outcome(s) that can be applied now; Additional metric – a useful set of additional information or approaches; and Metric in development – analytical methods are still in development, but samples/data can be collected and archived for future analysis. Metrics suitable for use for multiple outcomes are shown in bold.
|
Outcome |
Suitable metric |
Additional metric |
Metric in development |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Reducing Soil GHG emissions |
Modelled farm emissions of CH4, CO2, N2O |
Field level, real time emission models. | |
|
Increasing soil carbon/organic matter content |
Soil carbon stock (C content and bulk density) Area under permanent vegetation or other carbon positive management |
Soil clay content |
Indicators based on soil FTIR spectroscopy |
|
Increasing resilience to weather events |
Soil carbon stock Water stable aggregates Soil bulk density and porosity Erosion monitoring |
Visual Evaluation of Soil Structure (VESS) |
Indicators based on soil FTIR spectroscopy |
|
Improving soil nutrient content |
Mineralisable nitrogen and available phosphorus |
Indicators based on soil FTIR spectroscopy | |
|
Reducing diffuse pollution |
Mineralisable nitrogen, available phosphorus and pH Soil bulk density and porosity Erosion monitoring and effectiveness of buffer strips |
Visual Evaluation of Soil Structure Detailed monitoring in SEPA catchments to include water quality (nitrate, phosphate etc.) |
Runoff evaluation using LIDAR derived fine resolution topographic data. |
|
Improving water and air quality |
Mineralisable nitrogen, available phosphorus and pH SEPA regulatory monitoring Erosion monitoring and effectiveness of buffer strips |
Detailed monitoring in SEPA catchments to include water quality (nitrate, phosphate etc.) Intensive farm-scale monitoring of ammonia emissions in livestock intensive areas |
Modelled farm emissions of ammonia |
|
Improving soil water retention and flow |
Sub-soil bulk density and porosity Water stable aggregates Erosion monitoring |
Visual Evaluation of Soil Structure | |
|
Improving soil biodiversity |
Soil surface invertebrates Earthworm functional group abundance |
Pesticide Usage Survey data |
Archive sample for eDNA |
|
Removing drivers for biodiversity loss |
Bird, pollinator and plant composition and diversity |
Farmland habitat diversity Pesticide Usage Survey data |
Archive acoustic monitoring files LIDAR derived hedge data |
|
Livestock health |
Growth rate, Milk yields, Mortality, Conception rates, Replacement rates, Age at slaughter | ||
|
Livestock nutrition |
Growth rate, Milk yields, Mortality, Conception rates, Replacement rates, Age at slaughter |
Feed analysis for digestibility/protein | |
|
Livestock genetics |
Applications to ScotEID for calf/lamb passports, with requirement for sire details to be included |
Growth rate, Milk yield, Conception rates, Age at slaughter. | |
|
Livestock methane emissions |
Modelled farm emissions of CH4, CO2, N2O | ||
|
Nutrient management |
Mineralisable nitrogen and available phosphorus Effectiveness of buffer strips Modelled farm emissions of CH4, CO2, N2O |
Modelled farm emissions of ammonia |
Glossary / Abbreviations table
|
Citizen scientist |
Usually used to denote a non-professional scientist. Can range from the public (including land managers) to highly proficient amateur scientists. |
|
FTIR |
Fourier-transformed infrared spectroscopy – an analytical technique using infra-red light to identify the chemical composition of materials. |
|
GHG |
Greenhouse gases such as CH4 methane, CO2 carbon dioxide and N2O nitrous oxide. |
|
LIDAR |
Light Detection and Ranging, is a remote sensing method that uses light in the form of a pulsed laser to measure ranges and hence vegetation structure. |
|
Measure |
An action or set of actions employed to reach the outcomes of the Vision for Agriculture. |
|
Method |
The processes followed to obtain the data required to produce metrics. |
|
Metric |
A quantifiable set of data that can be used to track, compare and assess performance or processes. |
|
RPID |
Scottish Government’s Rural Payments and Inspections Division |
Introduction
This report examines the potential metrics for assessing the environmental outcomes of measures identified in the Scottish Agricultural Reform Programme.
Policy environment
Agriculture is a major contributor to Scottish greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions; currently, it is responsible for c. 20 % of countrywide emissions (Brodie 2023). Agricultural management has also been a major driver of the declines in above- and belowground biodiversity (Walton et al. 2023) and puts significant pressure on Scottish water bodies, preventing them from reaching Good Ecological Status (Environmental Standards Scotland 2022).
Following on from the Scottish Government’s Vision for Agriculture, a new Agriculture and Rural Communities (Scotland) Bill has been passed, which will allow for a new framework for future support payments for farmers (“farmer” is used in this report to cover both farmers and crofters), including for environmental goods. This will encourage sustainable and regenerative farming practices that will help Scotland transition towards net zero, reverse the decline in biodiversity, and improve soil health and water quality.
It is anticipated that there will be a new framework for agricultural payments focused on key outcomes of high-quality food production; climate mitigation and adaptation; nature restoration; and wider rural development alongside a just transition. Greater conditionality will be key, with a transition towards shifting 50% of direct payments to climate action and funding for on-farm nature restoration and enhancement by 2025.
At present a draft list of measures (Appendix A) is being appraised by Scottish Government that covers both land-based and animal-based actions that should lead to improvements in biodiversity, climate, flooding, soil health, water quality and animal health and welfare. However, a system of monitoring and verification is needed to ensure compliance and that the measures are delivering the desired outcomes.
Aims
The aims of this project were:
- To identify potential metrics that could be used to monitor the success of the proposed measures in delivering the desired environmental outcomes (Appendix B). Those metrics that could be used in practice will have to be cost-effective, practical and within the skills and capabilities of those tasked with the monitoring.
- To take an overview across all the metrics and outcomes to refine the list of metrics to avoid duplication and maximise the usefulness of information collected.
Considerations for selecting appropriate metrics
Introduction
To determine whether any changes over time are the result of direct action through applied measures, it is important to be able to compare areas where measures have been applied with other similar areas that are not in the scheme (control sites). Without this, it is not possible to determine whether any change detected is due to the measures or to other drivers.
It is also possible that even if an improvement is not detected on sites where measures have been applied, the measures might mean that a negative change, that would otherwise have occurred, has been avoided.
A Before-After-Control-Impact (BACI) design is commonly used for monitoring the effect of environmental interventions. However, a difficulty is that areas which are originally selected as controls may join the scheme later. Also, as pointed out by Emmett et al. (2014), it can be difficult to select appropriate controls given the numerous other factors, including field contents, size, and boundary characteristics that would need to be held constant across matched pairs. Even if the areas selected as controls are not part of the current scheme, they may not be true controls as they may have benefitted from similar environmental measures under legacy schemes.
As a result of these issues, it can be difficult and costly to assess outcomes at the level of individual farms, though overall performance of measures can be assessed through an appropriate monitoring scheme.
Requirements
Effective monitoring requires an appropriate baseline for measuring outcomes against (Pakeman et al. 2020). A proper baseline gives power to any analysis, as it is detecting change against known values for indicators. For example, agricultural soil monitoring as part of scheme monitoring will need to align with the national soil monitoring programme that is in development.
Similarly, identifying an appropriate sampling design is critical. It needs to cover enterprises in different situations and localities and have the appropriate statistical power to give good evidence on the performance of each measure in at least the medium-term (i.e., to inform revisions to agricultural support schemes). Some outcomes may be detectable quickly, but others, like soil carbon, may take longer to be detectable within realistic sampling regimes (Saby et al. 2008). For other measures it may be difficult to separate the effects of the scheme from market-driven effects, such as the breeding of livestock for reduced methane production, which could be driven by the price of carbon rather than the support from any scheme (Cottle & Conington 2012, 2013).
Selecting metrics
The selection of metrics depends on several factors, including the design of any monitoring scheme, what is being monitored, for whom and for what purpose, and needs to take account of the trade-offs associated with the approach taken. These can be seen as different aspects of taking either a “broad and shallow” or a “narrow and deep” approach to data gathering for the same amount of effort. Data gathered from a “narrow and shallow” approach will be less detailed and likely less robust, whereas a “broad and deep” approach may be too costly to deploy widely.
Sample or population
Taking a sample of the population and focussing monitoring has the benefit of concentrating resources if it is understood that any sampling design has some measure of uncertainty built in. This type of approach has been adopted in monitoring programmes such as Countryside Survey (e.g., Carey et al. 2008) and the monitoring of the Welsh agri-environment scheme Environment and Rural Affairs Monitoring and Modelling Programme (ERAMMP), which focusses monitoring on 300 1 km x 1 km grid squares and assesses the impact of the scheme using information on how much land in each square is under Glastir funded management (see Section 8.1.1). The approach allows for efficient linkage between changes in different outcomes, but with the proviso that there is uncertainty and that it can only give a national-level picture.
Citizen scientist or specialist
For agriculture, options will include asking the farmer or land manager to gather information, drawing data from wider datasets, or drawing in specialists to sample and process data. There are advantages and disadvantages to asking land managers, as opposed to specialists, to carry out the monitoring. Land managers differ from citizen scientists in other monitoring, e.g., the British Trust for Ornithology’s Breeding Bird Survey, which is undertaken by volunteers with a high degree of skill at bird recognition. Expectations would have to be tempered in terms of what can be provided.
Consequently, the advantage of monitoring by the land manager is that it is effectively free, it can be repeated frequently and provides information direct to the land manager. This must be viewed against the benefits of sampling with more accuracy and precision by specialists.
It may be possible to develop hybrid monitoring strategies using the advantages of the different groups, either using land managers to take samples (e.g., soils), which are then sent away for analysis, or deploying monitoring equipment, with the specialists undertaking data analysis. Specialist data analysis is preferable from the point of view of scientific robustness, although monitoring equipment does need expert maintenance, calibration and quality control and is more costly. Alternatively, a tiered approach to monitoring could be followed, with land managers collecting some data whilst more specialised data collection is undertaken on a sample of farms.
Meaningful scales of monitoring
The appropriate scale of monitoring is inherent in what is being monitored. For plants, relatively small areas (a few square metres) tend to be monitored, whilst for butterflies and bees, the area might be a transect 100 m long and 5 m wide, and for birds, the British Trust for Ornithology uses 1 km x 1 km grid squares as the basis of their Breeding Bird Survey.
In consequence, the scale of monitoring for different aspects of the environment and biodiversity will not be the same for all outcomes. There is, therefore, some constraint on the overall approach as it is dependent on finding the most appropriate scale for each outcome.
Who is the monitoring for?
The vision for agriculture includes provision for payments that deliver to defined outcomes. If the aim is to inform management at the farm-scale or smaller, in effect using the results of monitoring in adaptive management, then there may be a benefit to a broad and shallow approach. There is also value in aligning monitoring with appropriate advice and resources for decision making. However, if the monitoring is just aimed at showing which measures are value for money, then a national level focus is more appropriate.
Understanding what is driving change
If measured changes can be linked directly to the impact of targeted funding, or with conditions for an agri-environment scheme, then this is a direct demonstration of the efficacy of the scheme.
However, a narrower set of more detailed monitoring may be better placed to understand more precisely what is driving change as a greater range of measured parameters can be used to examine the processes that lead to change. This improved knowledge might be more useful in developing future schemes and inform adaptive management. A tiered approach to monitoring may deliver the best information.
Can you monitor outcomes, or just activity?
It is possible that suitable methods to measure outcomes at the desired scale are not available or practical. Consequently, it may be that measuring actions or activity remain the only option to assess whether management is driving change in the desired direction. However, there would need to be some form of outcome monitoring at a wider scale to assess overall performance of the scheme.
Does land manager-led monitoring need supervision?
This is a contentious issue, but in other spheres such as sampling for water industry and fish farm compliance there are quality assurance assessments of ‘operator collected data’. Some are targeted based on evidence of some kind, but there is a random element to create pressure to conform.
There is a need to consider whether an inspection system is required to ensure there is pressure to maintain high standards of monitoring. Northern Ireland has decided that the best way to obtain robust data for monitoring is to employ people to do the measurement and use techniques such as GPS monitoring to check sample collection protocols are being followed (https://www.afbini.gov.uk/articles/soil-nutrient-health-scheme).
Methodology
We used an expert led rapid evidence assessment to look for different ways of assessing the success of each measure against environmental outcomes. This involved a multistep approach to developing appropriate metric recommendations to monitor the environmental outcomes of the new agricultural support system.
Step 1
For the land-based proposed measures only, we assessed each proposed measure (Appendix B) to identify which of the outcomes it was relevant to. For example, there are nine outcomes listed for In Field – Cultivated Soils, but not all outcomes are relevant for each measure. For example, the outcomes Reducing Soil Greenhouse Gas (GHG) emissions and Increasing soil carbon/organic matter content are unlikely to be affected by Efficient/Reduced use of synthetic pesticides so it would not be useful to monitor those if this was the sole measure in place.
This step was undertaken by individuals with expertise in each outcome.
Step 2
For each combination of relevant outcomes and measures, we used expert knowledge and a search of relevant literature to identify potential metrics that could be employed to assess compliance and/or the success of the measure in reaching the desired outcome (Appendix C). These were categorised in the following ways:
- Compliance or outcome-based
- Already collected under the current payment scheme, by agencies or third parties, or if novel data metrics will be required
- Practical for field-level monitoring, holding-based monitoring or for national-scale monitoring only, or unsuitable for routine monitoring.
This step was undertaken with the expertise of the research team backed up by literature searches. However, for the land-based measures, one individual was tasked with identifying appropriate metrics across all measures relevant to a particular outcome to ensure a consistency of approach. In contrast, the livestock-based measures are more holistic and required an expert to consider the actions around these in the round to identify appropriate metrics.
Step 3
The assessment in Step 2 generated a large list of metrics with associated methods that could be employed to assess the success of the scheme. A series of three workshops was used to consolidate these to ensure that where possible the same method can be employed across as many measures as possible for simplicity and to help in scaling up from individual measures to the success of the whole scheme. This stage delivered a shortlist of metrics that could be used to assess the success of the measures in delivering the desired outcomes, i.e., cost-effective, practical and within the skills and capabilities of those tasked with implementing the metric(s).
Step 4
This step focussed on identifying data collection approaches for consideration, as well as considering requirements for establishing an initial baseline and for future data collection to assess both compliance/activity and outcomes. Data collected could be integrated into existing data sets, such as the National Soil Inventory of Scotland, to give a longer perspective of change.
Potential metrics for each outcome
The outputs from Steps 1 and 2 are presented in Appendices B and C but are summarised below. Step 3 identified a set of metrics that could be employed in monitoring outcomes. This section identifies those metrics that would provide practical and cost-effective information. Potential metrics are categorised into three levels:
- Suitable metric – a suitable and available metric for monitoring the relevant outcome(s).
- Additional metric – a useful set of additional information or approach.
- Metric in development – analytical methods are still in development, but samples/data can be collected for future analysis.
Reducing soil greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions
The outcome
Greenhouse gas emissions from agriculture are a significant part of the national total. Reducing these emissions is a key goal of the Agricultural Reform Programme and the Climate Change Plan.
Considerations with a metric
Current methods required for direct measurement of GHG fluxes are not suitable for wide-scale use as they are dependent on relatively expensive equipment and a high degree of specialist knowledge to run the equipment.
We suggest that instead of this a modelling approach, based on existing or in development farm/field GHG calculators, is used that would estimate CO2, N2O and CH4 emissions. These are also known as Carbon Audits and are currently funded as part of the Preparing for Sustainable Farming initiative. However, several issues would need considering:
- There are several modelling tools on the market (see section “Reducing Soil Greenhouse Gas (GHG) emissions” in the Appendix), so an updated review (see Leinonen et al. 2019) of their capabilities would be needed to ensure that only suitable products were used, and to ensure consistency of outputs.
- Assistance may be needed, and hence need paying for, in setting up the calculators in the first instance, as in the Carbon Audits in the Preparing for Sustainable Farming initiative.
- Outputs from the calculator depend on the quality of the primary data gathered, which means data quality checks may be a requirement.
- Feed and forage quality might be useful information to feed into the calculators – see section below on Animal health and nutrition.
Land managers will benefit from these whole farm or field-level calculators with the potential to identify cost reductions or increases in productivity through improved forage and manure management. This could be supported by the soil organic matter and nutrient data collected.
Suggested metrics
Suitable metric: Modelled farm emissions of CH4, CO2, N2O
Metric in development: Modelled gas fluxes in real time at the field scale.
Increasing soil carbon/organic matter content
The outcome
Increasing the levels of soil carbon through regenerative agriculture can make agricultural land a sink for carbon and facilitate the journey to net zero.
Issues with a metric
Soil organic carbon can be routinely measured. There are different laboratory methods available, all of which work well, but a standardised approach would need to be selected for any scheme. Dry combustion (Dumas method) is widespread in its application and thought of as the best chemical method for soil carbon determination (Chatterjee et al. 2009). In addition, some consideration needs to be given to dealing with soil samples from calcareous soils where inorganic carbon levels are high (mainly carbonates), which though rare do include soils like machair soils. Additionally, by linking soil carbon to clay content (measured when characterising soil texture) a measure of the land parcel’s status regarding storing carbon is produced. Thresholds of 13:1, 10:1, and 8:1 clay to soil organic carbon could potentially be applied to arable, arable ley, and woodland systems (Prout et al., 2022).
Laboratory measurement is straightforward, but to calculate stocks, there also needs to be a measurement of soil bulk density (total dry mass per unit volume). Consideration of sampling depth(s) is important as some changes, such as a switch to deeper rooting crops may increase subsoil carbon, while changes in soil tillage might affect the vertical distribution of soil carbon. A standardised sampling protocol needs to take this into account. The approach being taken in Northern Ireland is informative. Every farm and every field are being sampled for carbon and nutrients and soil testing is a precondition of eligibility for environmental payments. Soil carbon stocks are large and are heterogeneously distributed, meaning that quantifying changes over short time periods is seldom possible. For instance, the proposal for a directive on Soil Monitoring and Resilience (Soil Monitoring Law) will require samples to be taken every five years. However, to ensure agronomic management changes will deliver and to identify which ones deliver, actions such as the employment of minimum tillage, use of winter cover crops, inputs of organic wastes and increases in permanent vegetation cover (woodland, hedges, grassland) need to be recorded at the field level alongside actions that will reduce soil carbon such as the removal of permanent vegetation cover and ploughing of grasslands.
Further considerations in developing this sampling include:
• Sampling to be carried out by land manager or by experts. There is a trade-off between cost and reliability but given the range of other soil metrics that need to be sampled to assess other outcomes, we suggest that soil sampling is expert led.
• Should samples from the same field be bulked to reduce costs or should they be analysed separately (expensive) to provide measures of error/heterogeneity and the possibility to statistically assess change at the field level rather than at the farm or national level? For instance, the Soil Nutrient Health Scheme in Northern Ireland analyses a bulked sample of 25 cores but this can miss coldspots and hotspots of nutrients (Hayes et al. 2023). The Welsh Soil Project splits each field into three before the W-shaped sampling is done. There is a direct trade-off between the number of fields that can be sampled and the number of samples per field. We suggest that the most useful information comes from sampling as many fields as possible, so a bulked sample per field would be an appropriate sample to measure. Some within field stratification could be done if there was a clear internal boundary, e.g., between dry slope and wetter flat ground.
• Collecting additional information such as the current and past management and cropping at field level would enhance interpretation.
• Several companies already operate soil testing services. In a competitive market, there is a question regarding how consistency is guaranteed and whether a consistency check should be carried out by a third party. United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) accreditation would be a minimum standard for participating laboratories.
• Sampling of enclosed land with a single habitat per field is straightforward. However, consideration needs to be given on how to sample from unenclosed land which may contain multiple habitats and a wide range of soil types.
Suggested metrics
- Suitable metric: Soil carbon stock, Area under permanent vegetation or other carbon positive management
- Additional metrics: Soil clay content
- Metric in development: Indicators based on soil FTIR spectroscopy.
Increasing resilience to weather events
The outcome
Soils are vulnerable to runoff and erosion after heavy rain and to drought. Improving the resilience of soils will safeguard their continuing productivity, reduce their susceptibility to the runoff of water and nutrients, and subsequent downstream impacts on flooding and water quality.
Issues with a metric
Resilience is a synthetic metric and can be best seen as a multi-dimensional concept. In addition, the thresholds for resilience will depend on soil type. Regarding improving soil resilience, mineral soils that have greater soil carbon concentrations tend to retain water and have better soil structure, allowing water flow through them rather than across them. Soils that show water percolating (high permeability) rather than flow across the surface are at lesser risk of runoff and erosion, whereas compacted soils with lesser porosity and greater bulk densities are much more vulnerable to weather events. Compacted soils also restrict water availability and nutrient dynamics impacting crop growth. The presence of water stable aggregates also helps prevent water and wind breaking down the soil and hence lower the risk of erosion. These indicators are covered elsewhere in this report (see sections Increasing soil carbon/organic matter content, Improving soil nutrient content and Reducing diffuse pollution) and hence not covered here in detail.
Suggested metrics
- Suitable metric: Soil carbon stock, Water stable aggregates, Soil bulk density and porosity, Erosion monitoring
- Additional metric: Visual Evaluation of Soil Structure (VESS)
- Metric in development: Indicators based on soil FTIR spectroscopy
Improving soil nutrient content
The outcome
Maintaining soil nutrient supply to ensure high levels of productivity is important for efficient farming. However, an oversupply of nutrients can lead to losses as emissions of ammonia and nitrous oxide, or as increased nutrient loadings of freshwaters. While Scotland has no widespread and high impact nutrient issues such as Lough Neagh in Northern Ireland, there are localised issues that have been identified through designations such as Nitrate Vulnerable Zones that might be more cost effective/appropriate to measure.
Issues with a metric
The total concentrations of the various soil nutrients are relatively straightforward to sample and analyse and could be combined with sampling for soil carbon. Analysis methods depend on whether a restricted set of macro-nutrients is the focus, or whether micronutrients and heavy metals are also of interest.
Total nutrient levels work well for some nutrients, but there may be an interest in looking at available nutrients where there is an extraction/exchange step to assess what is available to plants and leaching processes. There are standard laboratory methods for this, particularly for nutrients such as potassium and calcium, but phosphate extraction methods have been developed to be specific for different soil acidity levels (pH).
Unfortunately, neither total nutrient levels nor extractable/exchangeable levels work well for nitrogen, as nitrate is very quickly absorbed by roots, leached, or transformed (e.g., to nitrous oxide). Here, an incubation step is needed, meaning that getting a good understanding of available nitrogen requires sampling, dividing the sample, extracting immediately from one half of the sample, incubating the other half for a set time under standard conditions, and then calculating the release of nitrogen by the soil.
There is an immediate trade-off with adding fertiliser to raise nutrient levels, as excess nutrients can be leached and end up in the aquatic environment, or excess nitrogen can be lost as N2O. Hence, a balance must be reached where inputs meet plant requirements, while also fostering accumulation of soil organic matter to maximise intrinsic soil nutrient cycling. Current agronomic practice is to apply inorganic fertiliser at rates based on an understanding of plant uptake, but application rates often exceed those which are required as soil-specific variability in supply of nutrients from soil organic matter is usually not accounted for. Tools such as PLANET (Planning Land Applications of Nutrients for Efficiency and the environmenT), a nutrient management decision support tool for farmers and advisers to carry out field level nutrient planning and for demonstrating compliance with the Nitrate Vulnerable Zone (NVZ) rules, could be useful in this regard.
Maintaining optimal pH for crop growth also appears to reduce soil greenhouse gas emissions (Wang et al., 2021; Zhang et al, 2022), but there is a degree of context specificity, and this may not be appropriate for soils of high organic matter content.
Suggested metrics
- Suitable metric: Mineralisable N and available P, Soil pH
- Metric in development: Indicators based on soil FTIR spectroscopy
Reducing diffuse pollution
The outcome
Diffuse pollution has severe impacts on freshwater biodiversity and water quality with risks that climate change (low and high flow extreme increases, warmer temperatures) exacerbates effects such that moderate nutrient loading improvements may not lead to improved water quality.
Issues with a metric
Monitoring of diffuse pollution operates across scales, from the field scale, to highlight local improvements, to the catchment scale to understand cumulative effects and impacts (Bieroza et al. 2021). Field-scale predictions and observations of runoff prevalence and pathways, monitoring of soil compaction (measured by soil porosity) and soil chemistry (particularly nitrogen and phosphorus levels) provides an idea of risk, as does monitoring of in-field erosion (Hayes et al. 2023). Management at the edge of fields, e.g., buffer strips are designed to reduce diffuse pollution, but for best effectiveness, their location and design need to be targeted to ensure that they effectively treat converging runoff pathways and critical delivery points to the channel network (Stutter et al. 2021). Similarly, nutrient losses from field drains also need to be monitored as these can only be mitigated by specially designed and strategically located buffer strips.
Water sampling provides integrative evidence of the effectiveness of measures as it reflects management upstream in the catchment. Whilst monitoring of chemistry, biodiversity (invertebrates) and sediment will provide an understanding of upstream issues, it may be difficult to attribute impacts to diffuse or point source pollution (Glendell et al. 2019).
Water quality is closely linked with soil nutrient status, particularly nitrogen and phosphorus status of the soils, so relevant information can be acquired by soil sampling. However, there is also the need to monitor runoff generation and pathways, soil erosion, sediment flows and drainage waters. Monitoring is especially useful during extreme events, including high and low flows. An understanding of pollutant concentration changes over differing flow stages (e.g., inter-storm sampling) brings a wealth of information beneficial to management about source and transport behaviours at field to catchment scales.
We suggest that land managers are given responsibility for assessing erosion and water flow pathways and the subsequent monitoring of erosion and sediment flows, and potentially taking water samples of drainage waters for analysis by specialist laboratories. This would mean farmers assessing whether individual buffer strips were effective at preventing water flows, or whether their design allowed for flow around their edges by visiting them during periods of heavy rain. Future erosion pathways could be identified using fine-scale elevation data from LIDAR to model the flow of water across the surface of land (e.g. Reaney et al. 2019. Aquatic biodiversity requires specialist surveyors and could be done at the same time as the above-ground biodiversity assessment (Section 6.9).
SEPA currently collect a wide range of data from multiple sites. We suggest that it would be of benefit to use the current SEPA monitoring of agricultural catchments as the basis for studies linking agricultural management and water quality, by ensuring studies are joined up. This may mean enhancing the range and/or frequency of measures taken. A nested design could be followed, whereby field- and farm-scale sampling are nested within these catchments representing different land use typologies in Scotland, with water quality being monitored at the catchment outlet. The detailed knowledge from these catchments could be linked to farm-level data to make national estimates of benefits.
Farm-level models for looking at nutrient inputs and losses have been developed for England and Wales, e.g., FARMSCOPER. However, the extent to which it can be applied to the soils, climate and farming systems in Scotland has not been tested and this would need carrying out before it could be recommended as a metric for use in assessing the efficacy of measures.
Suggested metrics
- Suitable metric: Mineralisable nitrogen, available phosphorus and pH, Soil bulk density and porosity, Erosion monitoring and effectiveness of buffer strips (including other enhancements e.g., wetlands, wet woodland, sediment traps)
- Additional metric: Visual Evaluation of Soil Structure (VESS), Detailed monitoring in representative SEPA and other research catchments for process-based understanding on management impacts
- Metric in development: Runoff evaluation using LIDAR derived fine resolution topographic data
Improving water and air quality
The outcome
Water quality is tightly linked to freshwater biodiversity. However, it also has implications for the cost of water treatment downstream. Air pollution, particularly of ammonia, can also severely impact local biodiversity.
Issues with a metric
There can be a disconnect between actions at the field scale to reduce nutrient loss and water quality as actions can be poorly sited, poorly implemented and miss important routes of pollutant movement. However, there is clear evidence that reduction in soil nutrient status is the most likely route to deliver improvements in water quality, so monitoring for water quality is intrinsically linked to monitoring of soil nutrient status (Hayes et al. 2023).
High-resolution water quality monitoring that would represent the temporal and spatial variability is expensive and the movement of water in catchments may make linking it to the actions of individual farms problematic. Consequently, we suggest a combination of field/farm-level monitoring of soil nutrient status (i.e., soil organic matter, plant available (mineralisable) N, biologically available P and pH) and detailed monitoring of several representative catchment outlets to improve the understanding of processes. These could be based around SEPA’s existing catchment observation platforms, with additional investment to maximise the robustness of collected evidence.
Further action to reduce point source pollution, such as slurry pit overflow, farmyards and septic tanks, should not be overlooked (Harrison et al. 2019). Monitoring of this would be in the form of capital spend. Best practice should be followed for digestate and slurry application to land.
Currently available sensors for monitoring ammonia emissions tend to be expensive, require technical expertise and are sensitive to meteorological conditions and other atmospheric gases. Lower cost passive samplers, which could be deployed by non-specialists are less accurate, have lower temporal resolution, and require laboratory analysis (Insausti et al., 2020). A similar approach to that proposed for water quality could be implemented, with intensive monitoring of key areas with intensive livestock production systems, coupled with national scale monitoring utilising the National Ammonia Monitoring Network which monitors atmospheric ammonia concentrations monthly. A farm-level calculator for ammonia emissions is in development as part of the Scottish Government’s Strategic Research Programme. This would be the most cost-effective way forward for wide deployment of monitoring.
Suggested metrics
- Suitable metric: Mineralisable nitrogen, available P and pH, Soil bulk density and porosity, Erosion monitoring and effectiveness of buffer strips
- Additional metric: Intensive farm-scale monitoring of ammonia emissions in livestock intensive areas, Visual Evaluation of Soil Structure (VESS), Detailed monitoring in SEPA catchments for process-based understanding on management impacts
- Metric in development: Modelled farm emissions of ammonia
Improving soil water retention and flow
The outcome
Soil water retention is important in reducing soil erosion and diffuse pollution. If water flows through the soil it is slowed, reducing flood peaks, and there is greater interaction between the soil and water reducing the risk of nutrient loss. In contrast, water flowing across the surface of soils leads to erosion and nutrient runoff.
Issues with a metric
There are several detailed methods available to understand water retention and flow through soils, but they are not appropriate for wide-scale monitoring, apart from their potential use in the detailed monitoring of test catchments. These include detailed measures of soil texture, as well as laboratory measures of hydraulic conductivity. Direct measures of soil compaction with penetrometers suffer from variability due to soil water content, stoniness of the soil and differences between manufacturers. They are not suitable for wide-scale monitoring.
However, a set of straightforward measures are available to assess how soil water behaves. As part of the sampling of soil for soil carbon measurements, bulk density is measured to calculate carbon stocks from carbon concentrations. However, topsoil bulk density can vary seasonally and with respect to management. Subsoil bulk density is an indicator in the draft EU soil monitoring and resilience law and provides a more consistent measure of how the soil is behaving. This is a key parameter for understanding the effect of management on this outcome. However, the additional effort of also recording specific gravity of the soil will allow the calculation of soil porosity, another key parameter that is important for assessing soil water retention.
The Visual Evaluation of Soil Structure (VESS) is a qualitative metric that could also be used to supplement other measures and provide land managers with direct information at the field level on the degree of soil compaction, especially if this included both topsoil and subsoil. For quantitative measures of soil structure, the measurement of Water stable aggregates (WSA) should be considered and removes the potential for subjectivity.
Suggested metric
- Suitable metric: Sub-soil bulk density and porosity, Water stable aggregates, Erosion monitoring
- Additional metric: Visual Evaluation of Soil Structure (VESS)
Improving soil biodiversity
The outcome
Maintaining a healthy soil ecosystem is critical to the regulation of key processes, as soil organisms are critical to the cycling of nutrients and to plant growth. For instance, soil animals like earthworms are highly important to water movement in soils.
Issues with a metric
Soil biodiversity, whilst a key soil health indicator (Neilson et al. 2021), is unlikely to be practically assessed by the land manager. Identification of surface-dwelling invertebrates, such as beetles and earthworms, requires specialist taxonomic skills; even for earthworms a total count does not work as all functional groups need to be present for good soil health. Existing data is not available for surface dwelling invertebrates, but data collection methods with pitfall traps are standardised, for example by the Environmental Change Network. However, these methods require at least two visits, so may not be cost-effective. Previous earthworm surveys have been carried out (Boag et al. 1997, Carpenter et al. 2012), we suggest that methodologies should be kept consistent.
Molecular methods have been employed for bacteria, fungi and nematodes. However, methods to characterise complete soil biodiversity using eDNA (environmental DNA) are now emerging. As is typical with emerging technologies, there are issues surrounding data interpretation, thresholds and developing and/or defining baseline comparators. It is, perhaps, too early to suggest using this as a monitoring method, as the science relating molecular data to improvements in soil health is in its infancy. However, as soil sampling is likely to be used to monitor other outcomes, samples could be taken and archived for future use as a baseline to assess change.
Pesticide usage could be a proxy for the pressure on biodiversity, and hence pesticide usage data would be a useful addition to direct monitoring. It is already collected in Scotland, but refining the data to consider impacts on soil organisms and the different application rates would be necessary.
Further consideration needs to be given to:
- Collecting contextual information such as the current and previous crops.
- Whether the optimum times for sampling in spring and autumn coincide with the optimum times for sampling soil carbon and nutrients.
Suggested metrics
- Suitable metric: Surface dwelling invertebrates and earthworm functional group abundance
- Additional metric: Pesticide usage data
- Metric in development: eDNA samples archived as interpretation needs to improve
Removing drivers for biodiversity loss
The outcome
As much of Scotland is affected by agriculture, sensitive agricultural management is important to delivering the goals of the Scottish Biodiversity Strategy.
Issues with a metric
Biodiversity is intrinsically multi-dimensional, but typical agri-environmental monitoring targets habitat diversity, birds, pollinators and plants, as they give information at different scales.
In most schemes, biodiversity monitoring is done by specialists, as it is the status of priority species that has been the driver for the development of the scheme. However, that is not practical in terms of cost at the farm level, so a choice must be made between:
- Land manager-led monitoring aided by tools such as report cards and identification guides. Bird surveys could allow different levels of precision from individual species to groups (e.g., finches). Similarly, pollinator surveys could record at the level of group (bumblebee, honeybee, butterfly, hoverfly) or plant surveys, by numbers of different types of flower (e.g., daisy, pea types) in a set area. Alternatively, there is the possibility of sub-contracting to specialists if grant payments included money for monitoring. Land managers setting out acoustic recording devices also fits into this space. The resulting files could be uploaded to a central organisation responsible for analysis. The methodologies for data analysis are still in development, but sound files could be archived for later analysis when the methodologies have matured to deal with high levels of false positive identifications. The biodiversity audit as part of the whole farm plan also falls into this category.
- Specialist surveys on samples of farms with the sampling design considering the implementation of measures (Pakeman et al. 2020) or being large enough to assess change for most measures, however, they are distributed across the landscape (e.g., the Welsh approach to monitoring Glastir).
There is a clear trade-off here between broad and shallow versus narrow and deep approaches. To enable adaptive management at the farm level, then land manager-led monitoring is important, but there is the risk that the measures deliver higher numbers of generalist species, do not benefit species that are a conservation priority, but the data is incapable of showing this. It may be that a hybrid approach is necessary, so that field/farm-level data is complemented by detailed measures on a sample of land holdings. However, sample sizes need to be sufficient to confidently assess change. Previous monitoring studies, e.g., Perry et al. (2003), could be used to identify appropriate levels of sampling needed.
Currently collected biodiversity data is not appropriate for agri-environment monitoring for a range of reasons, mainly due to mismatches in scale between land holdings and the specific sampling method used. In the case of breeding bird data, it has been used as a measure of general farmland diversity against which the performance of in-scheme farms has been judged.
Proxies for habitat diversity currently collected by RPID would be useful data, but it only characterises area and has no measure of quality associated. Alternatives include using remote sensing data (e.g., habitat maps or LIDAR derived information on hedgerow extent and conditions) that provides information on land cover and structure, but these are only proxies for biodiversity.
Finally, pesticide usage is a clear driver of biodiversity loss. Usage statistics are already collected using a sampling approach to assess a Scotland-level picture. However, the diversity of chemicals applied, and their different application rates would require methodological developments to combine their usage into meaningful statistics.
Suggested metrics
- Suitable metric: Bird, pollinator and plant composition and diversity
- Additional metric: Farmland habitat diversity, pesticide usage survey data
- Metric in development: Acoustic diversity, LIDAR derived hedge data
Improving animal nutrition
The outcome
Improving animal nutrition will reduce the time taken to deliver animals to market. This reduces lifetime emissions especially of methane.
Issues with a metric
Improving livestock nutrition leads to increased animal performance and reduced methane, nitrous oxide and ammonia emissions. Monitoring of nutrition can be undertaken through laboratory analysis of feedstuffs. The key analyses are forage digestibility – which can easily be undertaken by many feed companies – and dietary crude protein. There is also an important trade-off already mentioned between optimising nutrition and the increased fertiliser use, leading to greenhouse gas emissions and/or pollution of water courses. However, these are very much business-related metrics, and their collection may not be informative as a means of national monitoring, particularly as silage quality varies between fields, time of year and across years. The need for its collection as part of a national monitoring scheme is, therefore, debateable.
Instead, we suggest that simple measures of animal performance are collected and form part of routine monitoring of flock/herd status. These reflect actual performance rather than inputs into the system and are easier to record.
Suggested metrics
- Suitable metrics: Growth rates, Milk yields (Dairy cattle only), Mortality, Conception rates, Replacement rates, Age at slaughter
- Additional metric: Feed analysis for digestibility/protein
Improving animal breeding
The outcome
Focusing on animal breeding can improve the productivity of farming systems and, also, increase the quality of products like meat and milk. In terms of reducing methane production, breeding can directly reduce emissions, but also quicker growing animals will release less over their lifetimes.
Issues with a metric
Selective breeding for improved productivity, improved efficiency or reduced methane emissions could drive permanent and cumulative improvement in performance and/or reductions in methane emissions. Monitoring of selective cattle breeding for specific traits could be undertaken through applications for calf passports to ScotEID, but this would rely upon sire details being recorded on passports (which is currently not mandatory) and on the sire’s genetic potential for selected traits being known.
Proxy measures such as growth rates, milk production, conception rates and days to slaughter could also be used to monitor improvements over longer time periods but could be confounded with improvements in nutrition and health.
Suggested metrics
- Suitable metric: Sire details included on applications to ScotEID for calf/lamb passports
- Additional metric: Growth rates, Milk production, Conception rates, Age at slaughter
Improving animal health
The outcome
Improved animal health has a direct benefit to animal welfare. However, it also reduces losses during the production process, improving productivity and reducing methane emissions on a lifetime basis.
Issues with a metric
Several endemic (and exotic) diseases and syndromes can impact on the production efficiency and associated GHG emissions of farmed livestock. Some diseases have a direct impact on individual animals and metrics such as growth rates, reproductive success, and replacement rates. Others have a more indirect impact at herd/flock and national level, through how diseased animals are managed following diagnosis. Data and metrics on the prevalence of key priority diseases and health conditions at a national level are currently not collected, but would be invaluable, if logistically challenging. Eradication may be feasible for some diseases, e.g., Bovine Viral Diarrhoea (BVD), but requires the relevant tools, e.g., vaccines, and diagnostics to be available, in addition to coordination and buy-in across the industry.
The most straightforward was to assess animal health would be to collect a common set of proxy measures, e.g., growth rates, age at slaughter, conception rates, replacement rates and mortality rates will be the most feasible approach to measuring progress on animal health. This approach could also be applied to animal breeding and nutrition.
Recording all these metrics would be useful to both national-level monitoring of performance and for the land manager’s care for their livestock. This could also include records of veterinary medicines used to gauge movement towards sustainable prescribing, though this complex topic (Humphry et al. 2021) is outwith the scope of this report.
Suggested metrics
- Suitable metrics: Growth rate, Milk yields (Dairy cattle only), Mortality, Conception rates, Replacement rates, age at slaughter
Methane suppression
The outcome
Methane is a greenhouse gas with much higher global warming potential than carbon dioxide (methane from non-fossil fuel sources has a global warming potential of 27 times that of C02 with a 100-year time horizon, IPCC 2021). Enteric methane is released by ruminants such as cattle and sheep as part of the natural digestion of plant material by their associated microbiota. Methane is a significant part of agricultural emissions and so reducing it is key to reaching net zero emissions.
Issues with a metric
Selective breeding for reduced enteric methane emissions/increased animal efficiency (section 6.11) is a long-term strategy. In the short term, feed supplements designed to suppress enteric methane production could be used to drive down emissions. Sexed semen could be used to optimise herd dynamics by reducing numbers of male dairy calves and increasing male beef and dairy-beef calves. Direct measurement of methane emissions depends upon specialised equipment and is therefore not practical at the herd or flock level.
Two potential options are available. Firstly, to monitor the usage of methane-reducing feed supplements and calculate emission reductions based on their reduction factors. However, appropriate reduction factors for all feed products may not be available for all systems. The other option is to use current carbon footprinting tools (e.g., Agrecalc, Cool Farm Tool), but these need a subscription, may need the help of a consultant to set up and would benefit from information on forage quality and the impacts of feed supplements (so in effect replacing the need for providing information separately on feed supplements). The use of a standard tool across herds/flocks would allow for comparison.
Suggested metrics
- Suitable metric: Modelled farm emissions of CH4, CO2, N2O
Nutrient management
The outcome
Poor nutrient management can lead to the emissions of nitrous oxide, methane and ammonia. It also runs the risk of point source and diffuse pollution into watercourses.
Issues with a metric
Organic manures help recycle nutrients and build soil organic matter. However, there is the potential for them to be a source of ammonia, methane and nitrous oxide, as well as nutrient runoff in water courses. Much can be done to alleviate this, with well-designed and covered manure stores as well as appropriate application techniques. Gaseous emissions are difficult to monitor directly, so these would have to be modelled using a farm calculator. Impacts on soil nutrients and water quality are dealt with in previous sections so a separate metric for nutrient management is not necessary.
Suggested metrics
- Suitable metric: Modelled farm emissions of CH4, CO2, N2O, Mineralisable nitrogen and available phosphorus, Effectiveness of buffer strips
- Metric in development: Modelled farm emissions of ammonia
Coordinated metric collection
This section examines opportunities to synthesise across the required outcomes to minimise the number of metrics to be collected.
Why is this important?
Any monitoring must be as cost-effective as possible. Consequently, during the design phase decisions should be focussed on making the recording of metrics as straightforward as possible and to build efficiency into any monitoring programme, for example, by sampling multiple metrics on the same visit.
Greenhouse gas emissions
Gas emissions cannot be realistically measured directly. Using current farm-level tools to assess GHG emissions will deliver against multiple outcomes [Reducing Soil Greenhouse Gas (GHG) emissions, Livestock emissions, Nutrient management]. In addition, a tool for estimating ammonia emissions [Improving water and air quality] is in development, as is a field-level, real time emission model. These will further enhance capability in this area.
Coordinated sampling strategies
Many metrics depend on the direct sampling of soil or biodiversity and can’t be realistically replaced by proxies or existing data. However, well designed sampling programmes can maximise the efficiency of sampling, e.g., sampling for soil carbon, nutrients, pH and eDNA can be done at the same time. Even if this were not possible, sampling of soil nutrients, particularly mineralisable nitrogen and available phosphorus, would deliver against multiple outcomes [Improving soil nutrient content, Reducing diffuse pollution, Improving water and air quality, Nutrient management]. Similarly, monitoring soil bulk density is important for multiple outcomes [Increasing soil carbon/organic matter content, Improving soil water retention and flow], as is Water stable aggregates.
Soil monitoring
A range of soil monitoring is already being carried out for different purposes. There is a need to consider how future monitoring could supplement or replace existing work in this area, including:
- Scottish Government’s National Test Programme’s includes soil carbon measurement in Preparing for Sustainable Farming (PSF).
- The Agriculture and Horticulture Development Board Scorecard for soil health which includes soil structure (using VESS Visual Evaluation of Soil Structure), pH, extractable nutrients (phosphorus, potassium and magnesium), earthworms, soil organic matter.
- Linking Environment And Farming (LEAF).
- Red Tractor.
- Soil Association.
Livestock
The outcomes associated with animal health, nutrition and breeding must be largely monitored through proxy metrics, but these are relatively easy to measure and provide useful information direct to the land manager. However, it would be difficult to disentangle the differing contributions of nutrition, health and breeding on the overall performance of the flock/herd. At present, the separate contributions of improving animal nutrition, improving animal health and improving the genetics of the flock/herd are not easily separated but offer three routes for livestock managers to improve performance and consequently reduce emissions, one or more of which can be followed.
National level data
A few metrics can be based on existing data such as data collected as part of the agricultural census or can be derived from existing data such as satellite habitat maps. These are useful additional data, but do not provide the best metrics to assess the success of outcomes. They include: Area under permanent vegetation or other carbon positive management, Detailed monitoring in SEPA catchments to include water quality (nitrate, phosphate etc.), SEPA regulatory monitoring, Pesticide Usage Survey data, Farmland habitat diversity. They can be identified by filtering column I in the terrestrial sheet of MeasuresXMetrics.xlsx file.
Metrics currently in development
There are a range of metrics that are in development, some of which could take advantage of samples/data collected at the start of any monitoring programme (e.g., soil eDNA, acoustic monitoring) but others would come online later (e.g., LIDAR derived hedge data).
Cost-effective data acquisition strategies
Where this report recommends farmer-led metric recording, then this would provide a whole population value that can be followed through time. However, where only a proportion of the population of farms/fields can be sampled there has to be a statistically sound design adopted. This would include a comparison between areas where measures have been applied with other similar areas that are not in the scheme (control sites). A Before-After-Control-Impact (BACI) design is commonly used for monitoring the effect of environmental interventions. One issue to be addressed is that areas which are originally selected as controls may join the scheme later, so starting with a larger control population may guard against this.
An example – Wales
In Wales, the Glastir Monitoring and Evaluation Programme (GMEP) sample consisted of a stratified random sample 150 “Wider Wales” 1 km squares and 150 targeted at priority areas for the agri-environment scheme. It should be noted, however, that the “Wider Wales” squares do include land which is in the scheme, and that even the targeted 1 km squares contain differing amounts of land where specific management options have been applied. As it was found that the “Wider Wales” squares had considerable coverage of the scheme, in the more recent ERAMMP National Field Survey the aim has been to capture as much in-scheme and counterfactual land as possible within the full set of 300 squares.
To allow sampling effort to be spread across years and provide both temporal and spatial coverage, a rolling monitoring programme was followed by GMEP, in which sites are revisited, for example, every four or five years but different sites are sampled in years two and three. This allows better spatial coverage than if each site was revisited every year, while at the same time providing a more powerful estimate of change over say a five-year period, than not revisiting sites at all. The GMEP scheme uses a four-year rolling monitoring programme. Countryside Survey is also now following a rolling programme. Power analysis for the GMEP scheme (Emmett et al., 2014) suggested that across a variety of metrics, around 45 squares per year was the minimum number that need to be monitored before losing significant power to detect change over a period of 8 years (two cycles of the rolling programme).
Other considerations
Soil nutrients and soil carbon would be most appropriately measured at the scale of fields within farms, as this is the level at which relevant measures are applied. On the other hand, surveys of birds and pollinators, which are mobile over a larger area, might be more appropriately recorded for parcels of land, such as 1 km squares, although it is unlikely that the same measures will have been applied consistently across a whole 1 km square. To provide a common spatial unit across different metrics, the GMEP survey used 1 km squares, but, as it is not possible to sample vegetation and soils over the entire square, five randomly placed plots in each square were used for vegetation monitoring and soil samples were taken from the same plots. Vegetation was also recorded in other plot types, for example, along boundaries and field margins.
If fields rather than squares are to be used for soil monitoring, a representative sample for a particular field or part of a larger field can be obtained by bulking individual cores. For example, in the Soil Nutrient Health Scheme in Northern Ireland samplers follow a ‘W’ shaped track and take 25 cores. This should give a good estimate of the mean for an individual field but unless replicate cores are analysed individually it does not provide an estimate of the variability within the field. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether a change in a particular field between two sampling occasions is statistically significant. Under the Scottish Government’s National Test Programme 20% of arable and improved grassland can claim funding for soil testing each year. If this scheme is continued, it could mean complete coverage of all arable and improved grassland fields after five years. The recommendation of Scotland’s Farm Advisory Service (FAS) is that larger fields should be divided into 4 ha units, potentially with the help of the 1:25000 soil map. This approach might provide sufficient replicate samples across a farm as a whole to allow a change to be detected on a specific farm, although it should be noted that unless a suitable control is available it may not be possible to attribute any change to particular measures and that soil carbon changes in response to measures might take longer than five years to be detectable.
A note on data
Monitoring across a range of outcomes and metrics will generate a considerable volume of data. This will require a significant investment in design and development of the databases and in the staff required for data curation.
Alongside the technical aspects of database curation and management, consideration should be given to who owns the data – whether the land manager as it concerns their land holding or the taxpayer as they paid for it, who has access to it? – a narrow access regime provides increased security, especially around GDPR, but wider access allows for a broader range of analyses to be carried out. Furthermore, an overall data controller/owner would likely need to be appointed to comply with GDPR. It should be possible to develop data frameworks, where analysis without direct access to locations is possible (similar to medical data where analysis is separated from any data identifying subjects) and comply with Freedom of Information requests. Arguably, data should follow FAIR data principles and be open access as it has been funded from the public purse, as in the European Soil Observatory.
Conclusions
Some metrics will clearly be valuable in identifying the benefits of future agri-environmental management. For example, the collection of data on soil carbon and methane emissions clearly supports the Scottish Government’s climate ambitions. Others will support policies regarding sustainability (soil erosion) and the health of Scotland’s freshwater resources (reducing diffuse pollution). There is a mix of field data collection, farmer-collected data and modelled information with some usage of existing data.
It should be noted that several metrics have been identified that may only be proxies of the outcome they relate to, such as area of non-farmed habitats or pesticide usage, but they have the advantage of being based on already collected data with the cost savings this brings. Other metrics are still in development but should either be available by the start of the scheme or where samples can be collected for future analysis.
There are several outcomes that are closely related and need consideration together. Improving animal nutrition requires maintaining soil nutrients at a level where protein is not limiting growth. This may require the application of organic and/or inorganic fertilisers. However, excess nutrients can end up as N2O and ammonia emissions from slurry and the leaching of nitrates into freshwater. Careful management to optimise nutrient use is, therefore, required to reach all the desired outcomes: improving soil nutrient content, reducing diffuse pollution, improving water and air quality, livestock nutrition and nutrient management.
A second set of outcomes are also closely related, those dealing with livestock genetics, health and nutrition, alongside reducing methane emissions. Improved efficiency across the livestock sector should increase margins but at the same time reduce the methane footprint of meat.
Some metrics are not useful in isolation and need to be collected as a set to be useful. This is particularly true for animal health, nutrition and genetics where a range of data on growth rates, milk yields, mortality, conception rates and replacement rates are needed to get a full picture.
The final choice of which metrics to collect will depend on the availability of resources to carry out the monitoring and the type of sampling philosophy adopted. Assembly, curation and analysis of the data will all add costs to metric collection but it is important to get the most out of the data. Data ownership is also a key consideration.
Given the division between farmer-led and expert-led monitoring highlighted in the spreadsheet and in Section 6, we suggest the following:
- All enterprises to assess soil erosion and buffer strip effectiveness as this is highly site specific.
- All livestock enterprises to record growth rate, milk yields, mortality, conception rates, replacement rates, age at slaughter for sheep and cattle.
- ScotEID to require information on sires.
- All enterprises to use farm tool calculators to model GHG emissions. Livestock enterprises to model ammonia emissions when a suitable tool is available. The requirement to model might be limited to enterprises above a certain size to reduce costs.
- The remaining outcomes are best assessed using expert-led monitoring in a sample-based programme similar in philosophy to the Welsh approach. Resources available for monitoring and statistical power analysis would be a key part of how to structure this monitoring. They would also determine whether to focus on a small number of metrics and outcomes and cover a larger sample size, or to cover all outcomes on a smaller sample size. The outcomes monitored in this way include those focused on soils, waters and biodiversity.
References
Bieroza, M.Z., Bol, R. & Glendell, M. (2021) What is the deal with the Green Deal: Will the new strategy help to improve European freshwater quality beyond the Water Framework Directive? Science of The Total Environment, 791, 148080. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.scitotenv.2021.148080
Boag, B., Palmer, L.F., Neilson, R., Legg, R. & Chambers, S.J. (1997). Distribution, prevalence and intensity of earthworm populations in arable land and grassland in Scotland. Annals of Applied Biology, 130, 153-165. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1744-7348.1997.tb05791.x
Brodie, E. (2023) Farm for Scotland’s Future: the case for change. A report for Scottish Environment LINK. https://farmforscotlandsfuture.scot/wp-content/uploads/2023/04/Farm-for-Scotlands-Future-full-report.pdf
Carey, P.D., Wallis, S., Chamberlain, P.M., Cooper, A., Emmett, B.A., Maskell, L.C., McCann, T., Murphy, J., Norton, L.R., Reynolds, B., Scott, W.A., Simpson, I.C., Smart, S.M. & Ullyett, J.M. (2008) Countryside Survey: UK Results from 2007. NERC/Centre for Ecology & Hydrology, 105pp. (CEH Project Number: C03259) https://nora.nerc.ac.uk/id/eprint/5191/
Carpenter, D., Sherlock, E., Jones, D.T., Chiminoides, J., Writer, T., Neilson, R., Boag, B., Keith, A.M. & Eggleton, P. (2012). Mapping of earthworm distribution for the British Isles and Eire highlights the under-recording of an ecologically important group. Biodiversity and Conservation, 21, 475-485. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10531-011-0194-x
Chatterjee, A., Lal, R., Wielopolski, L., Martin, M.Z. & Ebinger, M.H. (2009) Evaluation of different soil carbon determination methods. Critical Reviews in Plant Science, 28, 164-178. https://doi.org/10.1080/07352680902776556
Cottle, D.J. & Conington, J. (2012) Breeding for reduced methane emissions in extensive UK sheep systems. Journal of Agricultural Science, 150, 570-583. doi:10.1017/S0021859611000967
Cottle, D.J. & Conington, J. (2013) Reducing methane emissions by including methane production or feed intake in genetic selection programmes for Suffolk sheep. Journal of Agricultural Science, 151, 6, 872-888. doi:10.1017/S0021859612001037
Emmett, B.E., Abdalla, M., Anthony, S., Astbury, S., August, T., Barrett, G., Biggs, J., Botham, M., Bradley, D., Brown, M., Carter, H., Chadwick, D., Cigna, F., Cooper, D., Cooper, J., Cosby, BJ., Creer, S Cross, P., Edwards, F., Edwards, M., Evans, C., Ewald, N., Fitton, A., Garbutt, A., Grebby, S., Greene, S., Halfpenney, I., Hall, J., Harrison, S., Harrower, C., Henrys, P., Hobson, R., Hughes, S., Isaac, N., Jackson, B., Jarvis, S., Jones, D., Keith, A., Kelly, M., Korenko, J., Lallias, D., Leaver, D., Lebron, I., Malcolm, H., Maskell, L., McDonald, J., Moxley, J., Norton, L., O’Hare, M., Owen, A., Pereira, M., Peyton, J., Powney, G., Pywell, R., Rawlins, B., Robinson, D.A., Rorke, S., Rowland, C., Roy, D., Scarlett, P., Scholefield, P., Scott, A., Scott, L., Scott, R., Siriwardena, G., Smart, S., Smith, P., Swetnam, R., Taylor, R., Tordoff, G., Van Breda, J., Vincent, H., Wagner, M., Waters, E., Watkins, J., White, J., Williams, B., Wood, C. & Wright, S. (2014) Glastir Monitoring & Evaluation Programme. First Year Annual Report to Welsh Government (Contract reference: C147/2010/11). NERC/Centre for Ecology & Hydrology (CEH Project: NEC04780), pp.442. https://gmep.wales/sites/default/files/GMEP-First-Year-Annual-Report-2014-05-17.pdf
Environmental Standards Scotland (2022) Baseline Evidence Review – Water (Strategy and Analysis). https://www.environmentalstandards.scot/wp-content/uploads/2022/09/Baseline-Evidence-Review-Water-2022-09.pdf
Estrada-Carmona, N., Sánchez, A.C., Remans, R. & Jones, S.K. (2022) Complex agricultural landscapes host more biodiversity than simple ones: A global meta-analysis. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, 119, e2203385119. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.2203385119
Giles, M.E., Caul, S., King, D., Mitchell, S., Sim, A., Neilson, R. & Paterson, E. (2023). Grass variety selection of microbial community composition is associated with differences in soil CO2 emissions. Applied Soil Ecology, 190, 104968.
Glendell, M., Palarea‐Albaladejo, J., Pohle, I., Marrero, S., McCreadie, B., Cameron, G. & Stutter, M. (2019) Modeling the ecological impact of phosphorus in catchments with multiple environmental stressors. Journal of Environmental Quality, 48, 1336-1346. https://doi.org/10.2134/jeq2019.05.0195
Harrison, S., McAree, C., Mulville, W. & Sullivan, T. (2019) The problem of agricultural ‘diffuse’ pollution: Getting to the point. Science of the Total Environment, 677, 700-717. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.scitotenv.2019.04.169
Hayes, E., Higgins, S., Geris, J., Nicholl, G. & Mullan, D. (2023) Weighted risk assessment of critical source areas for soil phosphorus losses through surface runoff mechanisms. Catena, 225, 107027. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.catena.2023.107027
Humphry, R., Skuce, P., Hayward, A., Henry, M., Hutchinson, I., Gunn, G. & Costa, M. (2021) Measurement of antimicrobial usage: what can we learn across Livestock Sectors? https://sefari.scot/research/measurement-of-antimicrobial-usage-what-can-we-learn-across-livestock-sectors
Insausti, M., Timmis, R., Kinnersley, R. & Rufino, M.C. (2020) Advances in sensing ammonia from agricultural sources. Science of The Total Environment, 706, 135124. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.scitotenv.2019.135124
IPCC (2021) Climate Change 2021: The Physical Science Basis. Contribution of Working Group I to the Sixth Assessment Report of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change. Eds Masson-Delmotte, V., P. Zhai, A. Pirani, S.L. Connors, C. Péan, S. Berger, N. Caud, Y. Chen, L. Goldfarb, M.I. Gomis, M. Huang, K. Leitzell, E. Lonnoy, J.B.R., Matthews, T.K. Maycock, T. Waterfield, O. Yelekçi, R. Yu, and B. Zhou. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, United Kingdom and New York, NY, USA, 2391 pp. doi:10.1017/9781009157896.
Leinonen, I., Eory, V., MacLeod, M., Sykes, AS., Glenk, K., & Rees, RM. (2019). Comparative analysis of farm-based carbon audits. ClimateXChange. https://www.climatexchange.org.uk/media/3584/farm-based-carbon-audits-final.pdf
Neilson, R., Aitkenhead, M., Lilly, A. & Loades, K. (2021) Monitoring soil health in Scotland by land use category – a scoping study. James Hutton Institute. https://doi.org/10.7488/era/1293
Pakeman, R.J., Beaton, J., Fielding, D., Hewison, R., McKeen, M., Potts, J., Quinzo-Ortega, L., Stephen, T. & Stockan, J. (2020) Evaluation of the Biodiversity outcomes of the 2014-20 SRDP Agri-Environment Climate Scheme through a selection of case studies. Report to NatureScot. https://www.nature.scot/doc/naturescot-research-report-1254-evaluation-biodiversity-outcomes-2014-20-srdp-agri-environment.
Perry, J.N., Rothery, P., Clark, S.J., Heard, M.S. & Hawes, C. (2003) Design, analysis and statistical power of the Farm‐Scale Evaluations of genetically modified herbicide‐tolerant crops. Journal of Applied Ecology, 40, 17-31. https://doi.org/10.1046/j.1365-2664.2003.00786.x
Prout, J.M., Shepherd, K.D., McGrath, S.P., Kirk, G.J.D., Hassall, K.L. & Haefele, S.M. (2022) Changes in organic carbon to clay ratios in different soils and land uses in England and Wales over time. Scientific Reports, 12, 5162. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-022-09101-3.
Reaney, S.M., Mackay, E.B., Haygarth, P.M., Fisher, M., Molineux, A., Potts, M. & Benskin, C.M.H. (2019) Identifying critical source areas using multiple methods for effective diffuse pollution mitigation. Journal of Environmental Management, 250, 109366. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jenvman.2019.109366
Saby, N.P., Bellamy, P.H., Morvan, X., Arrouays, D., Jones, R.J., Verheijen, F.G., Kibblewhite, M.G., Verdoodt, A.N.N., Üveges, J.B., Freudenschuss, A. & Simota, C. (2008) Will European soil‐monitoring networks be able to detect changes in topsoil organic carbon content? Global Change Biology, 14, 2432-2442. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2486.2008.01658.x
Skuce, P., Holland, J., Kenyon, F., Wells, B., McCracken, D., Neilson, R. & Bartley, D. (2022) Anthelmintics and the Environment – opening a whole can of worms? https://sefari.scot/research/anthelmintics-and-the-environment-%E2%80%93-opening-a-whole-can-of-worms
Staggenborg, J. & Anthes, N. (2022) Long‐term fallows rate best among agri‐environment scheme effects on farmland birds—A meta‐analysis. Conservation Letters, 15, e12904. https://doi.org/10.1111/conl.12904
Stutter, M., Costa, F.B. & Ó hUallacháin, D. (2021) The interactions of site-specific factors on riparian buffer effectiveness across multiple pollutants: A review. Science of the Total Environment, 798, 149238. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.scitotenv.2021.149238
Walton, P., O’Brien, D., Smart, J., Burns, F., Basset, D., Bradfer-Lawrence, T., Foster, S., James, B.D., Mancini, F., Mordue, S., Pakeman, R.J., Pescott, O.L., Simkin, J., Stanbury, A.J. & Towers, M. (2023) State of Nature Scotland 2023. The State of Nature Partnership. https://stateofnature.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/TP26056-SoN-Scotland-summary-report-v5-1.pdf.pagespeed.ce.EIp-TYaoGQ.pdf
Wang, Y., Yao, Z., Zhan, Y., Zheng, X., Zhou, M., Yan, G., Wang, L., Werner, C. & Butterbach‐Bahl, K. (2021) Potential benefits of liming to acid soils on climate change mitigation and food security. Global Change Biology, 27, 2807-2821. https://doi.org/10.1111/gcb.15607
Zhang, H.M., Liang, Z., Li, Y., Chen, Z.X., Zhang, J.B., Cai, Z.C., Elsgaard, L., Cheng, Y., van Groenigen, K.J. & Abalos, D. (2022) Liming modifies greenhouse gas fluxes from soils: A meta-analysis of biological drivers. Agriculture, Ecosystems & Environment, 340, 108182. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.agee.2022.108182
List of Appendices
Appendix A. List of measures under consideration
Appendix B. Correspondence between land-based measures and relevant outcomes
Appendix C. Potential monitoring metrics and methods
Measures and metrics spreadsheet
© Published by The James Hutton Institute, 2024 on behalf of ClimateXChange. All rights reserved.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/4346
Executive summary
Aims
This research is a rapid review, presenting and examining evidence relating to climate change and digital connectivity such as:
- whether investment in digital connectivity can support reductions of greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions and, if so, how
- examples of relevant policies and impacts
- the best options for assessing emissions from digital connectivity and services in Scotland
- key evidence gaps in these areas.
The review was undertaken between October and the middle of December 2023 and was focused on and bounded by specific criteria set out by the Scottish Government and ClimateXChange steering group. The study team were asked to only include information and projects that were current and operating, not theoretical. Search terms were selected and agreed with the steering group.
We used a methodology known as “claim, argument, evidence” to assess whether claims made within certain arguments were true or false. We classified evidence as having low, moderate or good confidence levels, based on its volume and quality, and the level of agreement in the literature reviewed.
Findings
We have found mixed evidence of the decarbonisation impact of digital connectivity and whether it contributes to adaptation and a just transition. Our main findings on basis of the literature reviewed are:
- The Information Communications Technology (ICT) sector is a source of GHG emissions. The sector’s energy consumption and generation of electronic waste (e-waste) generates GHG emissions directly. This is despite the possibility that it can reduce emissions indirectly by increasing efficiency and through behaviour changes like reduced travel due to remote meetings. Studies point out a need for a holistic approach in calculating GHG emissions of the ICT sector, to fully account for indirect emissions and emissions from end-of-life.
- ICT technology and digitalisation reduce GHG emissions in other industries. Heavy industry and the energy sector would benefit the most from digitalisation. To achieve this, there would need to be widespread high-speed internet coverage, which would likely generate further GHG emissions. On their own, digital connectivity infrastructures do not support emissions reduction. They provide a mechanism to support decarbonisation of other sectors.
- The GHG emissions associated with e-waste are of growing concern internationally. Even though ICT use could help reduce GHG emissions in other sectors, it is uncertain whether this can outweigh the direct emissions of the ITC sector. It gives us only moderate confidence that the ICT sector can help reduce more emissions than are inherent in the manufacture, use and disposal of the equipment used.
- The indirect impact of ICT technologies can either lead to a net reduction in carbon emissions or to a net increase. The overall effects depend on context. Rebound effects can lead to increases in emissions. Policy and measurement do not usually account for these effects. Human behaviour plays a part in whether the indirect impacts on emissions are positive or negative. This means that it is not solely down to technology and therefore we are only moderately confident that the challenge of emissions reduction can solely be met by utilising digital technology.
- We are unable to say whether digital connectivity supports climate adaptation because of the small number of ex-post studies in this area. With regard to a just transition, digital connectivity and ICT can have either a positive or a negative effect, either addressing or exacerbating existing inequalities such as access to digital connectivity and skills. Studies repeat the need for strong policy in this area.
Within the literature reviewed as part of the study, we identified gaps in knowledge, including:
- Lack of evidence on whether investment in digital connectivity directly reduces GHG emissions, or contributes to a just transition and how.
- There are varying approaches to quantifying direct and indirect emissions of ICT and to comparing the GHG emissions of digital and non-digital practices and solutions.
- Climate adaptation in relation to ICT is either an afterthought or future looking, with few real-world examples.
- Case studies of digital technologies saving money, power or water in municipalities focused on the GHG emissions reduced or averted, with no acknowledgment of rebound effects, which literature states is important.
- The GHG emissions of data collection and use necessary to digitalisation are opaque and limited to specific studies on data centres.
- Lack of evidence of policy to address GHG emissions of e-waste or the embedded emissions from extraction of raw materials and production of ICT equipment.
- Lack of best practice for measuring, monitoring and assessing the GHG footprint of electronic communications services.
Glossary
|
Term |
Description |
|---|---|
|
Backhaul |
The set of copper, fibre or wireless links that connect the core (or backbone) telecommunications networks with smaller subnetworks, such as private internet networks. |
|
Co-located or edge data centres |
In co-location, an organisation rents space within a data centre owned by others and located off premises. |
|
Data Over Cable Service Interface Specification (DOCSIS) |
DOCSIS delivers high-speed network or internet access through cable television. |
|
Digital economy |
The economic activities that emerge from connecting individuals, businesses, devices, data and operations through computers and connectivity. |
|
Digital productivity paradox or Solow computer paradox |
The observation that as more investment is made in information technology, worker productivity may go down instead of up (Dreyfuss, et al., n.d.). |
|
Direct emissions |
Emissions from energy consumption and generation of electronic waste (e-waste). |
|
Direct Subscriber Line (DSL) |
DSL technologies deliver high-speed network or internet access over voice line. |
|
Electronic waste, e-waste |
Waste from end of life, broken or obsolete ICT equipment. |
|
Embedded or embodied carbon |
The carbon footprint, i.e. the GHG emissions, from producing and manufacturing a product or service. |
|
Energy Management System, ISO 50001 |
An international standard organisation system for managing energy use. |
|
Global warming potential, GWP |
Relative potency, molecule for molecule, of a greenhouse gas, taking account of how long it remains active in the atmosphere. Global warming potentials (GWPs) are calculated over 100 years. Carbon dioxide is the gas of reference, with a 100-year GWP of 1 (Eurostat, n.d.). |
|
Hyperscale data centre |
A hyperscale data centre is a large offsite facility housing servers which exceeds 5,000 servers and 10,000 square feet. |
|
Information and Communications Technology (ICT) sector |
The ICT sector combines manufacturing and services industries whose products primarily fulfil or enable the function of information processing and communication by electronic means, including transmission and display (OECD Library, 2023). |
|
Indirect emissions |
Emissions not directly related to ICT but influenced by its use, e.g. decreased or increased emissions from working from home. |
|
Internal datacentre |
An organisation uses in-house servers that are located onsite. |
|
Internet of Things (IoT) |
Connected devices pooling data, often in real time, for decision-making. |
|
Just Transition Score (JTS) |
Measures the carbon efficiency of social progress of each country, based on the ratio of consumption-based CO2 emissions per capita to the Social Progress Index (Social Progress Imperative, 2022). |
|
Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) |
A technique to systematically analyse the potential environmental impacts of products or services over their entire lifecycle, including on human health, land use, resources and acid rain formation. |
|
Power usage effectiveness (PUE) |
The metric used to determine the energy efficiency of a data centre. A PUE value of 1.0 indicates that all energy consumed by a data centre is used to power computing devices. As some wastage is inevitable, the most efficient data centres in the world achieve a PUE of 1.2 (Lavi, 2022). |
|
Rebound effect |
Increase in energy demand due to efficiency savings, such as cost savings, that might be used for other energy consumption purposes (Lin & Huang, 2023). |
|
Workload |
Amount of computing resources and time it takes to complete a task or generate an outcome. Any application or program running on a computer can be considered a workload (HP Enterprise, n.d.). |
Introduction
Need for this research
The extent to which the development and deployment of digital and data solutions supports the reduction of a country’s greenhouse gas footprint, assists in adaptation, and contributes to a just transition is unclear. Digital technologies have become an integral part of our lives, but they also have an environmental impact, including the production of greenhouse gas emissions (GHG) during their manufacturing, use and disposal.
In recent years, over £1 billion has been invested in programmes to enhance digital connectivity in Scotland, for a variety of anticipated outcomes relating to regional equity and opportunity. These include Digital Scotland Superfast Broadband (DSSB), Reaching 100% (R100), Scottish 4G Infill (S4GI), and the Scotland 5G Centre, with a regional network of 5G Innovation Hubs to facilitate widespread deployment of 5G.
Digital connectivity, and increasing access to it, is the focus of many Scottish Government policies. The Digital Strategy, ‘A changing nation: how Scotland will thrive in a digital world,’ is the policy backbone, setting out actions on: broadband and connectivity; data and statistics; digital inclusion and ethics; digital, data and technology profession, skills and capability; Transforming public services; and the Technology Assurance Framework. Enhancing Scotland’s digital infrastructure, both nationally and internationally, has also been a stated priority in successive Programmes for Government and the 10-year National Strategy for Economic Transformation (NSET) published in 2022. There is a lack of current evidence on the extent of the potential contribution of digital connectivity to Scotland’s climate change goals, not least of achieving net zero by 2045.
Project aim
The aim of the project is to examine recent research on climate change and digital connectivity to answer the following questions:
- To what extent is there evidence that investment in digital connectivity can support emissions reduction, climate adaptation and a just transition?
- If so, what are the key mechanisms by which this could occur (for example, reduction in travel, investment in green data centres or other mechanisms suggested in the evidence)?
- What are key examples of existing policies (in Scotland, such as in Local Authorities, the UK and/or international examples from comparable countries) designed to support emission reductions, adaptation, and/ or just transition through digital connectivity? Is there any evidence for the impact of such policies?
- What are the different options suggested within the literature for Scotland to provide a baseline assessment of, and monitor carbon emissions from digital infrastructure, technologies, and associated activities?
- What are the other key gaps in existing knowledge where further research is required to support digital connectivity and Scotland’s climate change goals?
These questions are answered in Sections 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9. By better understanding the mechanisms in which digital connectivity supports Scotland reaching net zero, policy makers will know how to influence what they want to occur.
Key terms used throughout the report are explained in the Glossary in Section 2.
Components of the digital landscape covered by this research
The focus of the research is digital connectivity. This can encompass a wide range of products and services. Figure 1 sets out the boundaries of the research undertaken to inform this paper, including:
- infrastructure such as fixed broadband, mobile connectivity and data centres
- application, use and behaviours such as artificial intelligence and the Internet of Things, data driven products and services, and practices such as home working
- the list of countries with applicable learning for Scotland.
Figure 1 – The landscape of digital connectivity defined as within scope of this research.
Approach to the research
This section provides an overview of the research approach. Our full methodology is outlined in Appendix 1.
Methodology for collecting evidence
Frazer-Nash Consultancy (Frazer-Nash) was tasked with completing this research for ClimateXChange (CxC) on behalf of the Scottish Government Digital Connectivity Division. A steering group was set up consisting of representatives from Scottish Government, CxC and Frazer-Nash.
We followed an approach based on the Double Diamond approach of Discovery and Define[1], including literature gathering, revising and providing initial conclusions, and further developing conclusions before developing the report. We socialised the initial and final conclusions with the steering group. Keywords for the literature search were also agreed with the steering group. The literature reviewed was identified through google and google scholar searches. The review was focused on and limited by specific criteria, such as the non-inclusion of theoretical studies around “what is possible”, with an emphasis on current and recent experience.
Methodology for policy review
One of our research questions requests a review of policies which were designed to support emission reductions, adaptation or just transition through digital connectivity. To determine the geographic scope of the research, we chose countries analogous to Scotland facing similar digital connectivity challenges, that is, large landmasses with areas of low population density, and a number of isolated and rural remote communities. This list was agreed with the steering group and consists of: Finland, Wales, Portugal, Norway, Sweden, Estonia, Canada (Ontario), New Zealand, Denmark, and Iceland.
We use a star key (Table 3) to rate the extent that digital connectivity and emissions reduction are linked within a country’s policy.
Section 7 sets out the policies we found and reviewed.
How we have presented our findings
By following this methodology, we came up with a series of statements based on the findings from our research. These are presented in Section 5 and 6 with a structure as follows:
- Claim: a conclusion formatted in bold and accompanied by a statement of confidence in our conclusion.
- Argument: concise statements explaining how we arrived at the conclusion.
- Evidence: synthesis of literature in support of our argument.
We have provided a confidence level based on the extent of agreement in the literature and the robustness of evidence. We follow a methodology similar to the one developed by the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change for the fifth assessment report and used for the sixth for the consistent treatment of uncertainties.
Figure 2 sets out what constitutes low, moderate, and good confidence in our claims.
Low agreement is where sources do not agree.
Medium agreement is where sources make broadly similar conclusions but the data or evidence they use to support their conclusions are very different.
High agreement is where sources independently make similar conclusions and underlying data are similar despite being independent.
Limited evidence is some evidence available but largely anecdotal and not from recognised peer reviewed sources. Availability of data was low.
Medium evidence is information from peer reviewed sources or official sources.
Robust evidence is a greater volume of information from peer reviewed sources and official sources.
The combination of low agreement and limited evidence provides the lowest level of confidence and the combination of high agreement and robust evidence provides a good level of confidence, with combinations in-between generating moderate confidence.
Our definitions for “limited”, “medium” and “robust” evidence are described in Appendix 1: Detailed Methodology & Approach to the Research. This means that when we say we have “good confidence” in a finding, we are content that there is medium to high agreement in the literature and medium to robust evidence provided for that claim.

Figure 2 – How extent of literature agreement and evidence robustness combines into our stated confidence level.
Investment in digital connectivity and emissions reduction
Digital connectivity, technologies and GHG emissions
We have good confidence in the evidence that, taken on its own, digital connectivity and digital technologies are sources of GHG emissions.
Digital connectivity enables a range of ICT applications. The underlying infrastructure that makes it all work often gives rise to GHG emissions. It depends on the structure of the primary energy and electricity generation sectors of the countries where ICT goods are produced and used, as well as the materials used, such as plastic. These emissions arise across communication equipment such as fixed and mobile broadband, datacentres, cables, and the computers or devices themselves.
The ICT sector is responsible for around 3% to 4% of global greenhouse gas emissions (UNEP, 2021). In Scotland, using domestic output and supply and the environmental input-output model greenhouse gas effects data, the sector contributes around 2% of direct and indirect emissions of carbon dioxide equivalent[2]. It is also true that regions and countries with higher levels of digital economy development have higher GHG emissions (Wang, et al., 2023). Between 1995 and 2015, GHG emissions of ICT manufacturing have doubled and demand for materials to develop more ICT equipment has quadrupled in the same time period (Itten, et al., 2020).
Besides the high-energy consumption of ICT and electronic equipment, many energy-intensive infrastructures such as backhaul and data centres need to be built to achieve digital connectivity (Lin & Huang, 2023). This means that GHG emissions will increase as a country or region digitalises, up to a certain point (explored further in section 5.1.2). On their own, digital connectivity infrastructures do not support emissions reduction. They provide a mechanism to support decarbonisation of other sectors.
Digital connectivity, emissions reduction and other economic sectors
We have good confidence in the evidence that digital connectivity can only support emissions reduction when paired with other economic sectors.
Digital connectivity is hailed as an enabler for decarbonisation. Despite being a source of GHG emissions themselves, they enable other sectors to digitise in ways that improve productivity and efficiency. The mechanisms by which this is achieved are explored more in Section 6. Essentially, ICT products and services allow traditional industry to change their methodologies to curb GHG emissions (Wang, et al., 2023). Many policymakers hope that the reduction in GHG emissions achieved by these sectors will outweigh the ICT sector’s emissions, as suggested by the European Commission, which states: “If properly governed, digital technologies can help create a climate neutral, resource-efficient economy and society, cutting the use of energy and resources in key economic sectors and becoming more resource-efficient themselves. When implemented under the right conditions, digital solutions have demonstrated significant reduction in greenhouse gas emissions, increased resource efficiency and improved environmental monitoring.” (European Commission, 2022)
Many policies are reliant upon a viewpoint that, on balance, digital innovation to reduce GHG emissions will outweigh the emissions cost of producing and maintaining the necessary ICT networks and components. It is less common for papers to acknowledge there is an initial increase in GHG emissions (particularly from energy use) at the onset of digitalisation. Nor are there many papers discussing the point at which digitalisation starts to reduce emissions.
Lin &Huag is another paper that does address this issue (Lin & Huang, 2023). They state that with increased digitalisation, the resulting increased digital connectivity meant that an energy saving effect could be scaled up across the economy. This marginal energy saving effect exceeds energy consumption of the system – this could be seen as the point at which the GHG savings which result from efficiencies outweigh the GHG emissions from the energy use, production of devices and so on involved in digitalisation. Lin and Huang refer to this point as ‘digitalisation level 0.43’ (Lin & Huang, 2023). The digitalisation level indicator used in the paper is based on data on digital infrastructure, such as internet access and bandwidth, digital application, e.g. fixed and mobile subscription and digital skills and on aggregate ranges from 0 to 100%, using a weighted average for the component elements of the indicator. The paper stipulates that most developed countries have passed the 0.43 point, and it is reasonable to assume that this is the case for Scotland. The assumption of the inverted U-shaped relationship is well tested in the paper, see image in Figure 4. However, the slope of the downward curve is not specified and therefore the applicability of the analysis to Scotland is uncertain, however it is likely to depend on other factors such as the structure of the economy. (Lin & Huang, 2023) make no comment on obsolescence or upgrades to physical equipment.
Figure 4 – Country-level energy intensity against digitalisation; adapted from (Lin & Huang, 2023).
Paired with industrial sectors, there is therefore good evidence that digital connectivity supports emission reductions.
Indirect impacts from ICT use on GHG emissions
We have good confidence in the evidence that indirect impacts from ICT use can be both positive and negative for GHG emissions.
ICT can have both increasing and decreasing effects on GHG emissions. These can be direct or indirect. Direct impacts include energy consumption while the device is in use. Indirect impacts include secondary benefits such as more people being able to work from home and associated reduction in commuting emissions. While digital connectivity can reduce transport through, for example, hosting virtual meetings, some studies postulate that it could also increase emissions from transport by creating the desire to travel to places seen on the internet (Bieser and Hilty, 2018; Hilty and Bieser, 2017; Wang, et al, 2023). Many studies which look at quantifying both, the direct and indirect effects of ICT use, often conclude that the indirect effects are favourable (i.e., reducing GHG emissions) and far outweigh direct effects of energy use. However, these studies often neglect factors such as stimulating transport demand, rebound effects, behaviour changes of humans using these systems, or the embedded carbon of the product or service (Itten, et al., 2020).
The CxC study on emissions impact of home working in Scotland found a small reduction in commuting and office emissions and an increase in home emissions. However, how these changes in emissions balance for each individual defines the net emissions impact from homeworking (Riley, et al., 2021).
Therefore, we conclude from the literature reviewed, that the evidence remains divided in which is more significant: increasing or decreasing effects on GHG emissions.
Emissions reduction and digital technologies that rely on connectivity
We have good confidence in the evidence that the challenge of emissions reduction cannot be met without digital technologies that rely on connectivity.
A great number of the studies and policies we read stated strongly that the challenge of emissions reduction and climate adaptation will not be met without the intervention or use of digital technology and tools (including Royal Society, 2020; Exponential Roadmap Initiative, 2023). The three technologies most often hailed as transformative to all sectors of the economy are 5G, the Internet of Things (IoT, connected devices pooling data often in real time for decision-making) and artificial intelligence (AI, computer-based machine learning).
Many papers assert that digital technology has the potential to assist the transition to a low carbon world, enabling global emission reductions while limiting the emissions created by ICT use (Royal Society, 2020). Some claim that if the currently available digital solutions were used at scale, there would be the potential to reduce GHG emissions in the three highest-emitting global sectors (energy, materials, and mobility) by 20% by 2050 (World Economic Forum, 2022). There was no concrete evidence in these papers that connectivity would enable these goals to be met, only claims.
Sectors that will benefit the most from digital connectivity
We have good confidence in the evidence that suggests that the sectors that will most benefit from digital connectivity are industrial in nature and will vary from country to country.
The sources above state the energy sector would benefit the most from digital solutions. In Scotland, the energy sector is the fourth highest emitter at 4.9 million tonnes of CO2e in 2021 (Scottish Government, 2021). With regards to electricity in particular, the complexity and scale of integrating more renewable energy generation and increasing the distribution capacity of the electricity grid will not be possible without digital technologies (Energy Systems Catapult, 2023), especially with increasing requirements for data sharing and more effective system planning and operation. Renewable generation is intermittent and requires active grid management. Digital technologies can help balance the supply side (electricity producers) and the demand side (consumers) management for a more agile, stable and reliable electricity grid for industrial, commercial and household users.
The industry sector is globally responsible for 37% of total final energy consumption and about 20% of GHG emissions. In Scotland, industrial processes and business account for 20% of CO2e in 2021.
As described in 5.1.4, digital technologies will be important to manage the supply and demand of large industrial energy users in a system with diverse sources and feedstock (European Commission, 2022).
The effective use of these digital technologies relies on connectivity. Without it, none of the claims explored in literature can come to fruition.
The emissions intensity of digital connectivity
We have moderate confidence in the evidence that the lowest emissions form of digital connectivity is currently fibre.
One study has found that fibre is the most energy efficient technology for broadband access networks, compared with the family of Direct Subscriber Line (DSL) technologies delivering network access through voice lines and Data Over Cable Service Interface Specification (DOCSIS) which delivers network access through cable television (European Commission, 2020). Studies brought together by Europacable also demonstrated that fibre is the most energy efficient technology for internet access compared to microwave, millimetre wave, copper, satellite, and laser (Europacable, 2022). This is because there are fewer intermediate devices and amplifiers, and glass fibre is largely passive and requires little energy to function.
Although 5G networks are touted to be more energy efficient than 4G networks, the overall energy and emissions impacts are still uncertain. 5G antennas use three times as much energy as a 4G antennae, and a higher network density will be required (International Energy Agency, 2023). Literature on the energy use of 5G is found to be dominated by small-scale, single technology assessments. Embedded energy use and indirect energy use effects are largely overlooked (Williams, et al., 2022).
Satellite broadband is a less disruptive approach to connect rural areas to the internet, requiring less work on land to lay cables, however the GHG emissions of Low Earth Orbit (LEO) satellites are only recently being explored. An October 2023 study estimates worst-case emissions to be 31-91 times higher than equivalent terrestrial mobile broadband (Osoro, et al., 2023). It is unclear whether the terrestrial mobile broadband used in this comparison is sufficiently representative of a rural broadband connection or fixed broadband.
The World Bank identified a strong statistical connection between the capacity of the network (the number of users and the amount of data they require) and the level of GHG emissions (World Bank, 2022). Fibre has a high data capacity, but is only one component of a network. There are other critical parts of the network infrastructure such as data centres which drive this trend.
The most efficient data centres and emissions reduction
We have moderate confidence in the evidence that hyperscale and co-located data centres are the most efficient and offer a high potential for reducing emissions.
Data centres and data transmission networks account for approximately 1-1.5% of global electricity use, making them responsible for 1% of energy-related GHG emissions (IEA, 2023). Rapid growth in demand at large data centres has resulted in a substantial increase in energy use in this sector, growing 20-40% annually over the past several years (IEA, 2023). As a result of this, the International Energy Agency (IEA) has given data centres the “More Efforts Needed” rating, which means that data centres need to do more to align to the IEA’s Net zero by 2050 Scenario. Progress is assessed at the global level against the IEA’s net zero by 2050 Scenario Trajectory for 2030 (IEA, n.d.), and recommendations are provided on how they can get “on track” with this pathway. Recent trends on reducing the environmental impacts of data centres have generally been in the right direction to match this trajectory; however, without acceleration it will fall short (IEA, n.d.).
The carbon footprint of a data centre is affected by three factors:
- electricity consumption
- water consumption
- lifetime of the equipment.
When analysing these factors, it can be seen in Table 1 that hyperscale and co-located data centres are far more efficient (including accounting for water consumption) than internal data centres. This is driven by better energy utilisation, more efficient cooling systems and increased workloads per server (Lavi, 2022). As a result, they are less carbon intensive per tonne of GHG emissions per workload than internal data centres.
Table 1 – Impacts of hyperscale, colocation and internal data centres. Adapted from Lavi, 2022.
|
|
Internal |
Colocation |
Hyperscale |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Energy use (million MWh) |
26.90 |
22.40 |
22.85 |
|
Computing workloads (million) |
16 |
41 |
76 |
|
Water intensity (M3MWh-1) |
7.20 |
7.00 |
7.00 |
|
Carbon intensity (Ton CO2-eq MWh-1) |
0.45 |
0.42 |
0.44 |
|
Water intensity (m3/ workload) |
12.15 |
3.85 |
2.10 |
|
Carbon intensity (Ton CO2-eq/ workload) |
0.75 |
0.25 |
0.15 |
With Scotland’s electricity maintaining a grid intensity of below 50 grams of CO2e per kilowatt hour delivered across 2017-2020 (Scottish Government, 2023), as opposed to the UK average of 149 grams of CO2e per kilowatt hour delivered in 2023 (National Grid, 2023), the emissions intensity of datacentres in Scotland is likely to be significantly lower.
Summary
Investment in digital connectivity can support emission reductions for those primarily industrial sectors which benefit from efficiency. ICT reliant on digital connectivity is supposed to help meet challenges of emission reduction although there is a lack of evidence for these claims.
Digital technology is a source of emissions in and of itself which tends to be overlooked.
As a result of these, we cannot say for certain whether the indirect effects of digitalisation (e.g., saved emissions from home working, see Section 5.1.3) will reduce overall emissions.
Climate adaptation, just transition and investment in digital connectivity
This section sets out the evidence we have been able to find that meets our criteria. Although just transition and adaptation are important policy areas, the steering group wished to focus primarily on Net zero targets and emissions reduction with this research. The Steering Group also emphasised the need to only include information and projects that were current and operating, not theoretical.
The resulting research has emphasised how these concepts are new and emerging. As novel as the concepts such as just transition and adaptation are, the evidence base is being created. As the situation progresses, more and more evidence will be developed to revise the assertions below.
Digital connectivity and adaptation strategies
With the evidence we have been able to find that meets our criteria, we have low confidence in the evidence that digital technologies, which rely on connectivity, support climate adaptation strategies.
ICT technology is an integral component of many proposed mitigation measures (Dwivedi, et al., 2022), but less so for adaptation. Mitigation is reducing and stabilising levels of GHG emissions; adaptation is adapting to life in a changing climate. It is considered by many that digital connectivity and the ability to communicate and share data will be important for adaptation, especially in rural communities.
The example we have been able to find include the European Commission Farmers Measure Water project, where one farmer described how decisions need to be made quickly: “We need fast internet in rural areas because a lot of farmers and water authorities have to make decisions on an hourly basis. If we take a measurement and only see the results in a week’s time, it is too late: the problem has already occurred. If you have fast internet, you have direct access to your data and can decide on the spot what to do” (European Commission, 2022).
Digital technologies can also support climate-resilient agriculture by helping farmers assess weather forecasts and mitigate impacts on crop yields and productivity (United Nations Development Programme, 2023).
In terms of what the ICT sector itself is doing to adapt to climate change, in 2018 TechUK submitted a report to the Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs (Defra) on behalf of the ICT sector outlining how the sector intends to adapt to climate change. Within it, they state that ICT infrastructure including connectivity has unique characteristics that make it more resilient (TechUK, 2018). These include:
- Asset life is relatively short. So more resilient assets can be deployed as part of the normal replacement cycle.
- There is built in redundancy in ICT infrastructures so that if same proportion of ICT assets is damaged or affected by climatic events, there are backups.
- Technology development is fast particularly around threats.
The first two of these are in direct conflict with reducing the direct GHG emissions of ICT and digital connectivity delivery. Programmes that mandate less redundancy or longer asset life may affect the ICT industry’s ability to adapt to climate change. The final point reinforces the ICT sector’s claim that it will innovate out of problems, without evidence to support it.
Digital connectivity and a just transition
With the evidence we have been able to find that meets our criteria, there is moderate evidence that digital connectivity supports a just transition.
There is debate in the literature over whether digital connectivity supports a just transition. Views are largely that it may help when accompanied by strong policy. One study shows that the Just Transition Score may increase as digitalisation increases (Wang, et al., 2022), but this could be a correlation rather than indicating causation. The mechanisms are also little explored: for example, one paper sets out that the digital economy indirectly improves just transition by increasing the level of human capital and financial development (Wang, et al., 2022). There is no further investigation into how this takes place.
There are a few points of information related to how digital connectivity relates to just transition:
- People with low and medium income are more vulnerable to the impacts and costs of economic transitions. Transitions may include job automation, increasing need for access to digital solutions and digital public services, higher energy and food prices, or transport poverty (European Commission, 2022).
- Some articles link which digital solutions can be justice and equity enablers. Examples include
- smart energy management and decentralised and distributed energy production and sale (United Nations Development Programme, 2023)
- an easy-to-use and reliable public transport system that improves mobility for all (United Nations Development Programme, 2023).
This indicates that digitalisation may enhance a just transition.
- Collecting data and use of data is highlighted as important for justice and social good (Friends of Europe, 2021). Many smart solutions require a level of monitoring to maintain the efficiency of the service. Regulation, oversight and controls on appropriate data collection and use will be key. This indicates that policy implemented through digital solutions may become increasingly important in relation to a just transition.
- Across many policies, a just transition is also linked to skills development, with the Climate Change Committee (2023) stating digital skills as a fundamental enabler of net zero. The Welsh Government state the need to “prevent existing labour market inequalities being carried through into the new net zero and digital economies” (Welsh Government, 2022), recognising that employers are actively seeking employees with digital skills.
Summary
The evidence base related to digital connectivity and adaptation in relation to concrete real-world examples is very limited among the literature we have reviewed.
There is no direct evidence to date that investment in digital connectivity supports a just transition, but there are many suggestions for mechanisms by which it might influence a just transition. One of these mechanisms is skills development.
Key mechanisms by which digital connectivity influences emissions reduction
Digital connectivity, primary needs for travel and GHG emissions
We have moderate confidence in the evidence that digital connectivity can reduce primary needs for travel, although we have low confidence to whether this reduces GHG emissions in total.
The assumption that digital can replace physical goods or services completely and therefore avert emissions underpins a great deal of policies supporting digitalisation. It is true digitalisation can substitute certain products or GHG generating activities, such as an e-reader capable of displaying hundreds of books or videoconferencing and telework replacing physical travel. Methodologies to measure the true GHG emissions savings of these substitutes are not rigorous or consistent (Hook, et al., 2020). At the same time, demand for travel is still growing (Itten, et al., 2020; Statista, 2023).
Differences in methodology, scope and assumptions make it difficult to estimate average energy savings of working from home versus working in the office. Rebound effects and home energy use is often overlooked, and where they are included, studies find smaller savings (Harvard Business Review, 2022). Rebound effects include increased non-work travel and more short trips. For example, Harvard Business Review found that a decrease in vehicle miles driven is accompanied by a 26% increase in the number of trips taken (Harvard Business Review, 2022). Trips which would have been taken anyway, such as taking children to school, are also not included.
In the report “Emissions impact of home working in Scotland” concludes that working from home leads to a reduction in commuting and office emissions and an increase in home emissions. How these changes in emission balance out for each individual defines whether their net impact from home working will be positive or negative. The authors state that across their scenarios, the overall impact on emissions will be small (Riley, et al., 2021).
Due to the ambiguities in methodologies, the actual or potential GHG emission reductions of teleworking remain uncertain. Economy-wide savings are likely to be modest (Riley, et al., 2021), and in many circumstances could be negative or non-existent (Hook, et al., 2020).
Public sector digital technology use
We have good confidence in the evidence that the public sector is using technology to solve problems linked to sustainability – but the evidence is not accompanied by reports on the effects of technology use on GHG emissions.
The mechanism of reducing GHG emissions by public sector authorities using digital technology is mainly around energy efficiency. Many documents include a wealth of examples of cities using technology to save energy (European Commission, 2022) – but the GHG emissions associated with implementation or life cycle of this equipment have not been considered.
Main source of emissions from digital connectivity and associated ICT
We have good confidence in the evidence that the largest proportion of emissions from digital connectivity and associated ICT equipment comes from waste management after use.
The ICT sector tends to focus on energy use of their products as the largest influence on the carbon footprint. Therefore, there are calls for energy sources to be decarbonised (Ericsson, n.d.). Independent academic studies are more likely to conclude that the carbon footprint or life cycle emissions of a digital product is dominated by electronic waste or e-waste (Itten, et al., 2020 and Dwivedi, et al., 2022). Figure 5 shows the result of a study into video streaming from device purchase, which identifies that 78% of the GHG emissions are from e-waste (Itten, et al., 2020). This illustrates our claim that the largest proportion of emissions from the use of devices comes from waste management after use (please note, extraction of materials and production was not included in this study, which focused on impacts from consumer behaviour).
Figure 5 – Proportion of GHG emissions from the use case of streaming videos (Itten, et al., 2020).
In its 2020 report on e-waste, the International Telecommunication Union (ITU) estimates that 15 million tonnes of CO2e were averted by the recovery of iron, aluminium, and copper from processed e-waste (International Telecommunications Union, 2020). The ITU report also disclosed that less than 18% of all e-waste can be accounted for, meaning that almost 83% of e-waste is likely not properly disposed of. The sector’s emission reductions may be limited because of the uncertain fate of e-waste.
Human behaviour and digital connectivity
We have good confidence in the evidence that human behaviour plays a role in digital trends, rebound effects, and responsible use of digital connectivity.
Academic papers point out that whilst digital technologies are becoming more efficient individually, the higher demand for computing power, storage capacities, transmitted data and devices per person is systematically compensating for this progress (Aebischer & Hilty, 2015) (Hischier & Wager, 2014). This trend can be partially explained by rebound effects regarding time, volume, weight, and price (Itten, et al., 2020), but also human behaviour. Technology can act as a fashion or wealth statement, with the average person owning more and more connected devices such as smartphones and smart watches. These are often replaced with the latest model far sooner than is required on a technology replacement cycle (Itten, et al., 2020).
Future ICT sector energy consumption reduction
We have moderate confidence in assertions that the ICT sector will continue to innovate to reduce energy consumption.
Deployment of next generation low-power chips and more efficient connectivity technologies (5G and 6G, networks powered by artificial intelligence) is repeatably hailed as the way to reduce the overall footprint of ICT (European Commission, 2022).
Each switch to new standards or technologies requires a massive replacement of equipment. For example, 5G and 6G will require users to replace equipment, due to lack of backwards compatibility of existing smartphones, tablets, and computers. Also, as a growing fraction of products become smart or part of the Internet of Things (IoT), overall resource demand could decrease in theory. In practice, the opposite happens because software-controlled objects are also prone to software-induced obsolescence (Kern et al., 2018; NGI, 2020). While each new model is likely to be more energy efficient than the last, and while smaller smart IoT devices may not consume large amounts of energy in use, 85-95% of their lifecycle energy footprint is created in production. The sheer number and variety make them particularly susceptible to obsolescence once software or hardware support runs out (NGI, 2020).
The fast-evolving nature of digital technologies and the possible sharp increase in digitally enabled services is likely to reinforce the ICT sector’s growing emissions (European Commission, 2023). The European Commission has set out that unless digital technologies are made more energy-efficient, their widespread use will increase energy consumption.
Summary
The key mechanisms that ICT and digitalisation can reduce GHG emissions described by literature include replacing the need to travel, although there is evidence that these savings may not be as high as first thought. The largest source of emissions from ICT equipment is after use, as e-waste, something that changing standards and upgrading systems can increase. Human behaviour plays a role in the resulting emissions from ICT and digitalisation.
Key examples of digital connectivity policies
We studied international policies associated with digital connectivity and decarbonisation, adaptation and just transition in 10 countries, selected based on the methodology in Section 4, to gather important contextual information for Scotland. The degree to which each country links their digital goals and strategy has been given a score, with five representing explicit mention of the GHG or carbon impacts of increased digitalisation, and one representing no mention or linking of decarbonisation within the policy, see Appendix 1 for further detail on the scoring.
|
Country |
Score |
Key conclusions and data sources |
|
Finland |
★★★★ |
Finnish policy does connect increased digitalisation with helping the green transition, but there is no explicit mention of the carbon impact of increased digitalisation on the environment. Finnish Government, 2022 European Union Digital Skills and Jobs Platform, 2023 Ministry of Finance Finland, n.d. |
|
Portugal |
★★ |
Portugal says digitalisation will contribute to decarbonisation. Portugal Digital, 2020 Global Enabling Sustainability Initiative, 2020 |
|
Norway |
★★ |
Norwegian policy connects increased digitalisation with aiding the green transition. Norwegian Ministry of Foreign Affairs, n.d. Norway and European Union, n.d. |
|
Sweden |
★★★★ |
Swedish policy links the use of ICT to decarbonisation effects, as well as acknowledging decarbonisation, circularity, conscious choices, and the energy transition as drivers for a sustainable world. OECD, 2018 Regeringskansliet, 2010 |
|
Estonia |
★★★★★ |
Estonian policy contains a clear and explicit mention of the carbon effects of increased digital footprints, and provides a commitment to reduce the effects. European Union Digital Skills and Jobs Platform, 2023 |
|
Canada (Ontario) |
★ |
Canadian policy contains no mention of the carbon or environmental impact of increased digitalisation. Government of Canada, 2022. Ontario, n.d. |
|
New Zealand |
★ |
New Zealand policy does not explicitly mention the carbon or environmental impacts of increased digitalisation. Digital.Govt.NZ, n.d. Digital.Govt.NZ, 2022 |
|
Denmark |
★★★★ |
Danish policy takes a holistic approach to digitalisation and digital section emissions, with direct considerations for green ICT acquisition and support for the EU’s Green Public Procurement criteria. The Danish Government, 2022 Digitalserings Partnerskabet, 2021 Agency for Digital Government, n.d. |
|
Iceland |
★★★ |
Icelandic policy nods to sustainable procurement as a lever for green digitalisation, but provides no quantification. Nordic Council of Ministers, n.d. Government of Iceland, 2021 Stjornarrad islands, 2023. |
|
Wales |
★★★★ |
It is recognised that digitalisation will play a role in the transition to net zero in the Decarbonising Wales with digital technology website. Centre for Digital Public Services, 2022 |
Appendix 2: Summary of digital policies across 10 countries provides further detail on individual policies.
Decarbonisation impact of these policies
Policy measures to support emission reductions, adaptation or just transition
Few of the countries we studied for this research have set policy measures designed to support emission reductions, adaptation, or just transition in direct association with digital technologies.
No evidence of impact has been identified during this review. This does not prove a lack of progress or attention. There are other jurisdictions outside the scope of this research which may have evidence of policy impact. An example is the European Union Declaration on Digital Rights and Principles. This promotes digital products and services with a minimum negative impact on the environment and on society, as well as digital technologies that help fight climate change (European Commission, n.d.).
Sustainability considerations of using ICT and digital infrastructure
We have good confidence that European countries are starting to look at the sustainability considerations of using ICT and digital infrastructure.
The European Commission is leading the way in setting net zero or climate neutrality targets for certain elements of ICT infrastructure. In the “Fit for the Digital Age Strategy”, the Commission sets ambitious goals such as the climate neutrality of data centres in the EU by 2030 (European Commission, 2023). Measures to improve the circularity of digital devices and to reduce electronic waste include the Right to Repair Directive (European Commission, 2023) and the recently issued eco-design criteria for mobile phones and tablets (European Commission, 2023). These should have a corresponding positive impact on lifecycle emissions from digital technologies. Efforts are also ongoing to develop low-energy chips under the European Processor Initiative (European Processor Initiative, 2023).
The European Commission is starting to look at policy and governance around ICT direct and indirect emissions: “Until recently, the digital transition progressed with only limited sustainability considerations. To diminish adverse side effects and deliver its full potential for enabling environmental, social, and economic sustainability, the digital transition requires appropriate policy framing and governance” (European Commission, 2022).
“Digitalisation is an excellent lever to accelerate the transition towards a climate-neutral, circular, and more resilient economy. At the same time, we must put the appropriate policy framework in place to avoid adverse effects of digitalisation on the environment.” Svenja Schulze, Federal Minister for the Environment, Nature Conservation and Nuclear Safety of Germany (European Council, 2020).
Policy development programmes for datacentre best practice
We have good confidence that countries are starting to drive policy for data centre best practice.
In Estonia, the government has moved to the use of the Estonian Government Cloud (Riigipilv) for ‘Infrastructure, Platform and Software as a Service.’ Analysis of this pointed out that eliminating in-house servers and server rooms, instead relying on cloud services via data centres, offers the biggest potential for reducing emissions (Vihma, 2022). Data centres of the Estonian Government also use the ISO50001 energy management certification.
In Germany[3], the Government launched the Green IT initiative in 2008 to reduce the energy consumption and GHG emissions of its ICT operations. One objective set for the 2022 to 2027 phase of Green IT initiative includes that ‘main’ data centres (>100kW ICT load) owned by the government should meet the German Federal Government Blue Angel criteria for energy efficient data centres (Blume & Keith, 2023). From the start of the initiative, energy consumption has fallen by 49% from 649.65 GWh in 2008 to 334.54 GWh in 2021. This reduced consumption resulted in budgetary savings of €546 million (Blume & Keith, 2023).
In Denmark, the Agency for Digital Government examined which environmental requirements the public sector can include in tenders for data centres and concluded that the EU’s Green Public Procurement criteria is the most appropriate to use (Agency for Digital Government, n.d.).
In China, the Government has called for an average Power Usage Effectiveness of 1.25 in the east and 1.2 in the west of the country as part of its Eastern Data and Western Computing Project. Major cities now have maximum Power Usage Effectiveness requirements for new data centres, including Beijing (1.4), Shanghai (1.3) and Shenzhen (1.4) (IEA, 2023). Power Usage Effectiveness is the metric used to determine the energy efficiency of a data centre.
The private sector is also taking action to reduce the environmental impacts. In January 2021, date centre operators and industry association in Europe launched the Climate Neutral Data Centre Pact, pledging to make data centres climate-neutral by 2030 with intermediate (2025) targets for PUE and carbon-free energy (IEA, 2023).
Baseline assessments and monitoring
We have good confidence that there is no current framework for baseline assessment or monitoring of the environmental impact of increased digitalisation which also considers the indirect benefits and potential rebound effects.
There is a need to develop consistent metrics to measure the impact of technology on the environment (United Nations Environment Programme, 2021).
The European Commission identifies a need for a science-based assessment methodology on the ‘net environmental impact’ of increased digitalisation that consider both the benefits and the possible rebound effects (European Commission, 2022). The Commission has therefore launched dedicated research and innovation initiatives, saying that it will launch a project under Horizon Europe, to develop a methodology and common indicators for measuring the footprint of ICT (European Commission, 2023). In the UK, Building Digital UK also recognises this as a gap and will be reporting on environmental benefits of their interventions (Building Digital UK, 2023). Similarly, EU Member States are collaborating on the Toulouse call for a Green and Digital Transition in the EU. This looks to monitor the impact of digitalisation on the environment and contribute to the development of measurement tools (Presidence Francaise, 2022).
While the framework does not exist to quantify the full scope of direct and indirect effects, a number of standards exist for some elements.
Global standards to support carbon accounting in the ICT sector
There are global standards that can support carbon accounting (the method used to calculate a carbon footprint) in the ICT sector.
The main ones recognised and accepted by ICT bodies are:
- Greenhouse Gas Protocol ICT Sector Guidance. This builds on the internationally accepted GHG Protocol Product Life Cycle Accounting and Reporting Standard (GeSI and Carbon Trust, 2017).
- Recommendation ITU-T L.1470 (01/2020) (International Telecommunications Union, 2020).
- “Guidance for ICT companies setting science-based targets.” (Science Based Targets Initiative, 2022).
In summary
Our literature review has found no good examples of international experience of applying standard carbon accounting in the ICT sector, and this gap is recognised at the European Union level. Standards exist at the corporate or product level which could be adapted.
Conclusions
This work is the start of a process. As a rapid review, we were able to quickly identify information which fit our criteria, but there may be areas we have missed. Digital connectivity infrastructure and ICT are highly interconnected and overlapping with our behaviours and geography, and so this exercise has also highlighted we are having to pull together disparate pieces of information, research and case studies to try to come to conclusions. A key challenge is in understanding the “net” picture – there are disparate sources citing the means by which digital connectivity can impact on emissions, but it is not possible to combine this evidence to form a complete picture.
We were asked to research five key questions and found the following answers:
- To what extent is there evidence that investment in digital connectivity can support emissions reduction, climate adaptation and a just transition?
We have found mixed evidence of the decarbonisation impact, adaptation and just transition of digital connectivity. The sector produces direct emissions from energy consumption and generation of e-waste. This is despite the possibility that it can reduce indirect emissions through increasing efficiency and behaviour changes such as reduced travel linked to working from home. Studies point out a need for a holistic approach in calculating GHG emissions of the ICT sector, including rebound effects and emissions from the end-of-life. This would ensure indirect emissions and emissions from end-of-life are fully accounted for.
Investment in digital connectivity can support emissions reduction for those primarily industrial sectors that benefit most from efficiency. ICT technology and digitalisation can and does reduce GHG emissions in other industries. Heavy industry and the energy sector would benefit the most from digitalisation. ICT reliant on connectivity is supposed to help meet challenges of emissions reduction although there is a lack of evidence for these claims.
The ICT sector is a source of GHG emissions, which tends to be overlooked. It is our view that the reduction in indirect GHG emissions (largely driven by digitalising and making other sectors more efficient) does not negate the need to reduce the ICT sector’s direct impacts from energy consumption and generation of e-waste.
While the ICT sector focuses on the emissions associated with energy use, which is not insignificant, we have good confidence that the GHG emissions associated with e-waste are of growing concern internationally in terms of reaching climate goals. It is uncertain whether ICT’s GHG emissions reduction potential in other sectors can actually outweigh its direct emissions. It gives us only moderate confidence that the ICT sector can help reduce more emissions than are inherent in the manufacture, use and disposal of the equipment used to achieve those savings.
There is a great deal of speculation that digital technologies have the potential to aid adaptation to climate challenges, especially in rural areas, though with few concrete examples. While there is no direct evidence that investment in digital connectivity supports a just transition, there are many suggestions for mechanisms by which it might influence a just transition. One of these mechanisms is skills development, which is also recognised as a key enabler for net zero. Digital connectivity and ICT are capable of doing both good and bad, either addressing or exacerbating existing inequalities, as well as questions around access to connectivity and skills. Studies repeat the need for strong policy in this area.
- If so, what are the key mechanisms by which this could occur (for example, reduction in travel, investment in green data centres or other mechanisms suggested in the evidence)?
The key mechanisms by which ICT and digitalisation can reduce GHG emissions, as described by literature, include replacing the need to travel, although there is evidence that these savings may not be as high as first thought. The largest source of emissions from ICT equipment is e-waste, which changing standards and upgrading systems can increase. Human behaviour plays a role, either positive or negative, in the emissions from ICT and digitalisation.
- What are key examples of existing policies (in Scotland, such as in local authorities, the UK and/or international examples from comparable countries) designed to support emission reductions, adaptation and/ or just transition through digital connectivity? Is there any evidence for the impact of such policies?
No evidence of impact has been identified during this review. Many of the countries analogous to Scotland have policy that mentioned digitalisation as an enabler or essential piece of their decarbonisation, climate change or net zero agenda. None of them were accompanied by evidence of impact of their policies. This does not prove a lack of progress or attention. There are other countries outside the scope of this research that may have evidence of policy impact.
- What are the different options suggested within the literature for Scotland to provide a baseline assessment of, and monitor carbon emissions from digital infrastructure, technologies, and associated activities?
There are no good examples of what other countries are doing, and this gap is recognised at the European Union level. Standards exist at the corporate or product level, which could be adapted.
- What are the other key gaps in existing knowledge where further research is required to support digital connectivity and Scotland’s climate change goals?
Gaps include a need for a baseline assessment methodology, direct studies exploring the questions asked in this research and a consistent methodology for calculating direct and indirect emissions from ICT and digitalisation.
Gaps identified by this research
We have used specific search criteria and search words and applied them in google and google scholar. On basis of this search, we have found the following evidence gaps:
- There is no active study that has been found within this review that investigates whether investment in digital connectivity directly results in GHG emissions reduction.
There are varying approaches to quantifying direct and indirect emissions of ICT, with no academic or sector wide consensus.
There are different approaches and methodologies for calculating and comparing the GHG emissions of digital and non-digital practices and solutions, for example online versus in-person events. As an example, (Hook, et al., 2020) outlines that working from home evaluations should encompass the following:
- energy footprint
- transportation footprint
- technology footprint
- waste footprint.
The evidence we have found to investigate whether digital connectivity contributes to a just transition and the key mechanisms by which this occurs is not conclusive or good quality.
The ICT sector and literature focus on emissions reduction, with climate adaptation either an afterthought or future looking, with few real-world examples.
Case studies of digital technologies saving money, power or water in municipalities focus on the GHG emissions reduced or averted, with no acknowledgment of rebound effects, which literature states is important.
The GHG emissions associated with the collection and use of data, which is deemed to be necessary to digitalisation, are opaque and limited to specific studies on data centres. For example, the full lifecycle of the Internet of Things is not explored in the literature.
Lack of evidence of policy to address GHG emissions of e-waste e.g. from refrigerants leaking GHG.
Lack of evidence of policy to address the embedded GHG emissions from extraction of raw materials and production of the ICT equipment.
Lack of best practice for measuring, monitoring and assessing the GHG footprint of electronic communications services. The European Commission is also looking to develop this in a Horizon Europe project.
Bibliography
Aebischer & Hilty, 2015. The Energy Demand of ICT: A Historical Perspective and Current Methodological Challenges. In: ICT Innovations for Sustainability. s.l.:s.n., pp. 71-103.
Agency for Digital Government, n.d. Digital Green Transition. [Online]
Available at: https://en.digst.dk/digital-transformation/digital-green-transition/
[Accessed 30 11 2023].
Agency for Digital Government, n.d. Digital Green Transition. [Online]
Available at: https://en.digst.dk/digital-transformation/digital-green-transition/
Blume, A. & Keith, M., 2023. Germany’s green IT initiative is cutting energy consumption and GHG emissions in its public sector. [Online]
Available at: https://blogs.worldbank.org/governance/germanys-green-it-initiative-cutting-energy-consumption-and-ghg-emissions-its-public
[Accessed 30 11 2023].
Building Digital UK, 2023. Building Digital UK – environmental resource guide August 2023. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.uk/guidance/building-digital-uk-environmental-resource-guide-august-2023
Centre for Digital Public Services, 2022. Decarbonising Wales with digital technology. [Online]
Available at: https://digitalpublicservices.gov.wales/our-work/decarbonising-wales-digital-technology
Digital.Govt.NZ, 2022. Action Plan for the Digital Strategy for Aotearoa. [Online]
Available at: https://www.digital.govt.nz/digital-government/strategy/digital-strategy-for-aotearoa-and-action-plan/action-plan-for-the-digital-strategy-for-aotearoa/
Digital.Govt.NZ, n.d. The Digital Strategy for Aotearoa. [Online]
Available at: https://www.digital.govt.nz/digital-government/strategy/digital-strategy-for-aotearoa-and-action-plan/the-digital-strategy-for-aotearoa/
Digitalserings Partnerskabet, 2021. Visions and recommendations for Denmark as a digital pioneer. [Online]
Available at: https://en.digst.dk/media/24796/visions-and-recommendations-for-denmark-as-a-digital-pioneer-danish-government-digitisation-partnership.pdf
Dreyfuss, Gadson, Riding & Wang, n.d. The IT Productivity Paradox. [Online]
Available at: https://cs.stanford.edu/people/eroberts/cs201/projects/productivity-paradox/background.html
[Accessed 2023].
Dwivedi, et al., 2022. Climate change and COP26: Are digital technologies and information management part of the problem or the solution? An editorial reflection and call to action. International Journal of Information Management, Volume 63.
Kern et al., 2018. Sustainable software products—towards assessment criteria for resource and energy efficiency. Future Generation Computer Systems, Volume 86, pp. 199-210.
Energy Systems Catapult, 2023. Innovating to Net Zero: Digitalisation for Net Zero. [Online]
Available at: https://es.catapult.org.uk/report/innovating-to-net-zero-digitalisation-for-net-zero-emissions/
Ericsson, n.d. ICT and the climate. [Online]
Available at: https://www.ericsson.com/en/reports-and-papers/industrylab/reports/a-quick-guide-to-your-digital-carbon-footprint
Europacable, 2022. Fibre: the most energy-efficient solution to Europe’s bandwidth needs, White Paper. [Online]
Available at: https://europacable.eu/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/Europacable-Whitepaper-on-Energy-Efficiency-of-Fiber-networks-05-July-2022.pdf
European Commission, 2020. Fibre is the most efficient broadband technology. [Online]
Available at: https://digital-strategy.ec.europa.eu/en/library/fibre-most-energy-efficient-broadband-technology
European Commission, 2022. Strategic Foresight Report 2022 Twinning the green and digital transitions in the new geopolitical context. [Online]
Available at: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/PDF/?uri=CELEX:52022DC0289
European Commission, 2022. Study on Greening Cloud Computing and Electronic Communications Services and Networks: Towards Climate Neutrality by 2050. [Online]
Available at: https://digital-strategy.ec.europa.eu/en/library/study-greening-cloud-computing-and-electronic-communications-services-and-networks-towards-climate
European Commission, 2023. Circular economy: New rules to make phones and tablets more durable, energy efficient and easier to repair, enabling sustainable choices by consumers. [Online]
Available at: https://ec.europa.eu/commission/presscorner/detail/en/ip_23_3315
European Commission, 2023. Report on the state of the Digital Decade 2023. [Online]
Available at: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/HTML/?uri=CELEX:52023DC0570
European Commission, 2023. Right to repair: Commission introduces new consumer rights for easy and attractive repairs. [Online]
Available at: https://ec.europa.eu/commission/presscorner/detail/en/ip_23_1794
European Commission, n.d. European Digital Rights and Principles. [Online]
Available at: https://digital-strategy.ec.europa.eu/en/policies/digital-principles
European Council, 2020. Digitalisation for the benefit of the environment: Council approves conclusions. [Online]
Available at: https://www.consilium.europa.eu/en/press/press-releases/2020/12/17/digitalisation-for-the-benefit-of-the-environment-council-approves-conclusions/
European Processor Initiative, 2023. Framework partnership agreement in European low-power microprocessor technologies. [Online]
Available at: https://www.european-processor-initiative.eu/
European Union Digital Skills and Jobs Platform, 2023. Estoanian Digital Agenda 2030. [Online]
Available at: https://digital-skills-jobs.europa.eu/en/actions/national-initiatives/national-strategies/estonia-estonian-digital-agenda-2030
European Union Digital Skills and Jobs Platform, 2023. Finland: a snapshot of digital skills. [Online]
Available at: https://digital-skills-jobs.europa.eu/en/latest/briefs/finland-snapshot-digital-skills
Eurostat, n.d. Glossary:Global-warming potential (GWP). [Online]
Available at: https://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/statistics-explained/index.php?title=Glossary:Global-warming_potential_(GWP)
Exponential Roadmap Initiative, 2023. Exponential Climate Roadmap. [Online]
Available at: http://www.exponentialroadmap.org/
Finnish Government, 2022. Government report on the digital compass sets the course for Finland’s digital transformation. [Online]
Available at: https://valtioneuvosto.fi/en/-/10623/government-report-on-the-digital-compass-sets-the-course-for-finland-s-digital-transformation
Freitag, et al., 2021. The real climate and transformative impact of ICT: A critique of estimates, trends, and regulations. Patterns, Volume 3, Issue 8.
Friends of Europe, 2021. Connected Europe: A digital brand for a just transition. [Online]
Available at: https://www.friendsofeurope.org/insights/connected-europe-a-digital-brand-for-a-just-transition/
GeSI and Carbon Trust, 2017. ICT Sector Guidance built on the GHG Protocol Product Life Cycle Accounting and Reporting Standard. [Online]
Available at: https://ghgprotocol.org/sites/default/files/2023-03/GHGP-ICTSG%20-%20ALL%20Chapters.pdf
Global Enabling Sustainability Initiative, 2020. Portugal joins Digital With Purpose to unite sustainability with technology. [Online]
Available at: https://gesi.org/posts/portugal-joins-digital-with-purpose-to-unite-sustainability-with-technology
Government of Canada, 2022. Canada’s Digital Ambition 2022. [Online]
Available at: https://www.canada.ca/en/government/system/digital-government/government-canada-digital-operations-strategic-plans/canada-digital-ambition.html
Government of Iceland, 2021. Policies and Strategies. [Online]
Available at: https://www.government.is/topics/information-technology/policies/
Harvard Business Review, 2022. Is Remote Work Actually Better for the Environment?. [Online]
Available at: https://hbr.org/2022/03/is-remote-work-actually-better-for-the-environment
HCL Tech, 2021. Artificial Intelligence, defined in simple terms. [Online]
Available at: https://www.hcltech.com/blogs/artificial-intelligence-defined-simple-terms
Hischier, R. & Wager, P., 2014. The Transition from Desktop Computers to Tablets: A Model for Increasing Resource Efficiency?. In: ICT Innovations for Sustainability. Advances in Intelligent Systems and Computing. s.l.:s.n.
Hook, A., Court, V., Sovacool, B. K. & Sorrell, S., 2020. A systematic review of the energy and climate impacts of teleworking. Environmental Research Letters, 15(9).
HP Enterprise, n.d. Workload. [Online]
Available at: https://www.hpe.com/us/en/what-is/workload.html
IBM, 2023. What is artificial intelligence (AI)?. [Online]
Available at: https://www.ibm.com/topics/artificial-intelligence
IEA, 2023. Data Centres and Data Transmission Networks. [Online]
Available at: https://www.iea.org/energy-system/buildings/data-centres-and-data-transmission-networks
IEA, n.d. Net Zero Emissions by 2050 Scenario (NZE). [Online]
Available at: https://www.iea.org/reports/global-energy-and-climate-model/net-zero-emissions-by-2050-scenario-nze
IEA, n.d. Tracking Clean Energy Progress 2023. [Online]
Available at: https://www.iea.org/reports/tracking-clean-energy-progress-2023#methodology
[Accessed 08 12 2023].
International Energy Agency, 2023. Data Centres and Data Transmission Networks. [Online]
Available at: https://www.iea.org/energy-system/buildings/data-centres-and-data-transmission-networks
International Telecommunications Union, 2020. ITU-T Recommendations. [Online]
Available at: https://www.itu.int/ITU-T/recommendations/rec.aspx?rec=14084
International Telecommunications Union, 2020. The Global E-waste Monitor 2020. [Online]
Available at: https://www.itu.int/en/ITU-D/Environment/Documents/Toolbox/GEM_2020_def.pdf
Itten, et al., 2020. Digital transformation—life cycle assessment of digital services, multifunctional devices and cloud computing. The International Journal of Life Cycle Assessment, Volume 25, p. 2093–2098.
Lavi, H., 2022. Measuring greenhouse gas emissions in data centres: the environmental impact of cloud computing. [Online]
Available at: https://www.climatiq.io/blog/measure-greenhouse-gas-emissions-carbon-data-centres-cloud-computing
[Accessed 30 11 2023].
Lin, B. & Huang, C., 2023. Nonlinear relationship between digitization and energy efficiency: Evidence from transnational panel data. Energy, Volume 276.
Ministry of Finance Finland, n.d. Sustainable Growth Programme for Finland – boosting reforms and investments. [Online]
Available at: https://vm.fi/en/sustainable-growth-programme-for-finland
National Grid, 2023. How much of the UK’s energy is renewable?. [Online]
Available at: https://www.nationalgrid.com/stories/energy-explained/how-much-uks-energy-renewable#:~:text=20%20April%202023%20saw%20the,achieved%20on%2018%20September%202023.
NGI, 2020. Internet of Waste: The case for a green digital economy. [Online]
Available at: https://media.nesta.org.uk/documents/Internet_of_Waste_-_The_case_for_a_green_digital_economy_1.pdf
Nordic Council of Ministers, n.d. Report: A study of the digital green transition in the Nordic Baltic countries. [Online]
Available at: https://en.digst.dk/media/27140/bilag-3a-study-of-the-digital-green-transition-in-the-nordic-baltic-countries.pdf
Norway and European Union, n.d. Norway EU Green Alliance. [Online]
Available at: https://www.regjeringen.no/contentassets/debc1b0c0a2f47d1b77beb96d896cf45/20230420eu-norway-green-alliance-final.pdf
Norway Grants, n.d. Estonia – Green ICT. [Online]
Available at: https://eea.innovationnorway.com/article/estonia-green-ict
Norwegian Minstry of Foreign Affairs, n.d. Digitalisation for Development: Digital strategy for Norwegian development policy. [Online]
Available at: https://www.regjeringen.no/globalassets/departementene/ud/dokumenter/utvpolitikk/digital_strategynew.pdf
OECD Library, 2023. Information and communication technology (ICT). [Online]
Available at: https://www.oecd-ilibrary.org/science-and-technology/information-and-communication-technology-ict/indicator-group/english_04df17c2-en
OECD, 2018. OECD Reviews of Digital Transformation. [Online]
Available at: https://www.oecd.org/sweden/going-digital-in-sweden.pdf
Ontario, 2020. Ontario Onwards. [Online]
Available at: https://files.ontario.ca/tbs-ontario-onwards-action-plan-en-2020-10-18.pdf
Ontario, n.d. Building a Digital Ontario. [Online]
Available at: https://www.ontario.ca/page/building-digital-ontario#section-0
Osoro, O., Oughton, E., Wilson, A. & Rao, A., 2023. Sustainability assessment of Low Earth Orbit (LEO) satellite broadband mega-constellations. [Online]
Available at: https://arxiv.org/abs/2309.02338
Portugal Digital, 2020. Action Plan for the Digital Transition: Strategy for the digital transition in Portugal. [Online]
Available at: https://portugaldigital.gov.pt/plano-de-acao-para-a-transicao-digital/
Presidence Francaise, 2022. Toulouse Call for a Green and Digital Transition in the EU. [Online]
Available at: https://www.economie.gouv.fr/files/files/2022/Call_for_Green_Digital_Transition_EU.PDF
Regeringskansliet, 2010. ICT for a greener administration – ICT agenda for the environment 2010–2015. [Online]
Available at: https://www.government.se/contentassets/4a75c8132fb84313a6a0d2f08a04ab76/ict-for-a-greener-administration—ict-agenda-for-the-environment-2010-2015-n2010.31
Riley, R. et al., 2021. Emissions impact of home working in Scotland, s.l.: Climate X Change.
Royal Society, 2020. Computing for net zero: how digital technology can create a ‘control loop for the protection of the planet’. [Online]
Available at: https://royalsociety.org/-/media/policy/projects/climate-change-science-solutions/climate-science-solutions-computing.pdf
Science Based Targets Initiative, 2022. Information and Communication Technology (ICT). [Online]
Available at: https://sciencebasedtargets.org/sectors/ict
Scottish Environmental Protection Agency, 2023. Scotland’s industrial greenhouse gas emissions revealed for 2022. [Online]
Available at: https://media.sepa.org.uk/media-releases/2023/scotlands-industrial-greenhouse-gas-emissions-revealed-for-2022/
Scottish Government, 2021. A changing nation: how Scotland will thrive in a digital world. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/a-changing-nation-how-scotland-will-thrive-in-a-digital-world/
Scottish Government, 2021. Green datacentres and digital connectivity: vision and action plan for Scotland. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/green-datacentres-and-digital-connectivity-vision-and-action-plan-for-scotland/
Scottish Government, 2021. Scottish Greenhouse Gas Statistics 2021, s.l.: s.n.
Scottish Government, 2023. Climate Change Plan Monitoring Report 2023: Electricity. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/climate-change-monitoring-report-2023/pages/3/#:~:text=Scotland%20has%20made%20significant%20progress,for%20the%20years%202017%2D%202020.
Scottish Government, 2023. Publication – Statistics Supply, Use and Input-Output Tables: 1998-2020. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/input-output-latest/
Siemens, n.d. Messages from 2030 Sweden: A picture of transformation. [Online]
Available at: https://assets.new.siemens.com/siemens/assets/api/uuid:3731ed91-6429-4cfb-bd02-b51cb9791ed7/Siemens-Report-Picture-of-Transformation.pdf
Social Progress Imperative, 2022. Just Transition Score. [Online]
Available at: https://www.socialprogress.org/static/e1977d5b833d24ddcfd4a0ad381262f9/Just%20Transition%20Score%20-%20Social%20Progress%20Imperative-%202022.pdf
Statista, 2023. Annual growth in global air traffic passenger demand from 2006 to 2022, with forecasts until 2023. [Online]
Available at: https://www.statista.com/statistics/193533/growth-of-global-air-traffic-passenger-demand/
Stjornarrad islands, 2023. Opinber innkaup / Public procurement. [Online]
Available at: https://www.stjornarradid.is/verkefni/rekstur-og-eignir-rikisins/opinber-innkaup/
TechUK, 2018. The UK’s core digital infrastructure: Data Centres Climate Change Adaptation and Resilience. [Online]
Available at: https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/5a81ce26e5274a2e8ab55eb7/climate-adrep-tech-uk.pdf
The Danish Government, 2022. National Strategy for Digitalisation. [Online]
Available at: https://en.digst.dk/media/27861/national-strategy-for-digitalisation-together-in-the-digital-development.pdf
UNEP, 2021. With new pact, tech companies take on climate change. [Online]
Available at: https://www.unep.org/news-and-stories/story/new-pact-tech-companies-take-climate-change
United Nations Development Programme, 2023. Four ways digital can power a just energy transition. [Online]
Available at: https://www.undp.org/blog/four-ways-digital-can-power-just-energy-transition
United Nations Environment Programme, 2021. With new pact, tech companies take on climate change. [Online]
Available at: https://www.unep.org/news-and-stories/story/new-pact-tech-companies-take-climate-change
Vihma, P., 2022. The carbon footprint of Estonian digital puublic services. [Online]
Available at: https://e-estonia.com/carbon-footprint-of-estonian-digital-public-services/
[Accessed 30 11 2023].
Wang, H., Yang, G. & Yue, Z., 2023. Breaking through ingrained beliefs: revisiting the impact of the digital economy on carbon emissions. Humanities and Social Sciences Communications, Volume 10.
Wang, J., Wang, K., Dong, K. & Shahbaz, M., 2022. How does the digital economy accelerate global energy justice? Mechanism discussion and empirical test. Energy Economics, Volume 114.
Welsh Government, 2022. Stronger, Fairer, Greener Wales. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.wales/sites/default/files/publications/2022-05/stronger-fairer-greener-wales-plan-employability-and-skills0.pdf
Williams, L., Sovacool, B. & Foxon, T., 2022. The energy use implications of 5G: Reviewing whole network operational energy, embodied energy, and indirect effects. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 157(112033).
World Bank, 2022. How broadband infrastructure impacts greenhouse gas emissions: A Chile case study. [Online]
Available at: https://blogs.worldbank.org/digital-development/how-broadband-infrastructure-impacts-greenhouse-gas-emissions-chile-case-study
World Economic Forum, 2021. This year’s e-waste to outweigh Great Wall of China. [Online]
Available at: https://www.weforum.org/agenda/2021/10/2021-years-e-waste-outweigh-great-wall-of-china/
World Economic Forum, 2022. Digital Tech Can Reduce Emissions by up to 20% in High-Emitting Industries. [Online]
Available at: https://www.weforum.org/press/2022/05/digital-tech-can-reduce-emissions-by-up-to-20-in-high-emitting-industries/#:~:text=World%20Economic%20Forum-,Digital%20Tech%20Can%20Reduce%20Emissions%20by,20%25%20in%20High%2DEmitting%20Industries&text=Davos%2DKloste
Appendix 1: Detailed methodology and approach to the research
This Annex details the methodologies developed and used to complete this research project.
Definitions
The scope of this project defines ‘climate change’ as including Scotland’s interim and 2045 Net zero and emissions reduction targets. Although just transition and adaptation are important policy areas, the steering group wished to focus primarily on Net zero targets and emissions reduction with this research. The Steering Group also emphasised the need to only include information and projects that were current and operating, not theoretical.
By ‘digital connectivity’, we include the following:
Infrastructure
- fixed broadband (including subsea fibre, trunk or backhaul fibre, and access fibre)
- mobile connectivity (including 4G and 5G macro and 5G small cells)
- Datacentres Application, use and behaviours.
- existing applications such as artificial intelligence (AI) and Internet of Things (IoT)
- data-driven products and services
- practices such as working from home that are enabled by digital connectivity.
Geographical scope
- in Scotland and/or serves Scotland
- where there is applicable learning for Scotland.
Key dependencies
- digital skills
- renewable energy
These are all encompassed in our Figure 1 – The landscape of digital connectivity defined as within scope of this research. on page 14 of this report.
Literature review
Search terms
The search terms we used were agreed by the Steering Group on 24th October 2023, these are set out below under the subheadings of Infrastructure, Application, use and behaviour, Geographical scope, and Key dependencies. We used Google and Google Scholar search engines.
Infrastructure:
- Digital connectivity infrastructure strategy
- Digital connectivity infrastructure policy
- Digital connectivity and climate change
- Digital transformation
- Broadband strategy
- Broadband policy
- Mobile network strategy
- Mobile network policy
- 5G strategy
- 5G policy
- Remote digital connectivity
- Rural digital connectivity
- Digital connectivity national plan
- Digital connectivity policy
- Economy strategy + datacentres (looking for links to environmental topics)
- Datacentres as opportunities for economic growth (looking for links to environmental topics)
- National Data Strategy (looking for links to environmental topics)
- Security of data infrastructure (looking for links to environmental topics)
- Resilience of data infrastructure (looking for links to environmental topics)
- Net zero digital connectivity infrastructure
- Net zero broadband infrastructure
- Net zero mobile network infrastructure
- Net zero datacentres
- Green digital connectivity infrastructure
- Green broadband infrastructure
- Green mobile network infrastructure
- Green datacentres
- ‘distribution’, ‘fairness’, ‘equality’ or ‘just transition’ of digital connectivity infrastructure
- ‘distribution’, ‘fairness’, ‘equality’ or ‘just transition’ of broadband infrastructure
- ‘distribution’, ‘fairness’, ‘equality’ or ‘just transition’ of mobile network infrastructure
- ‘distribution’, ‘fairness’, ‘equality’ or ‘just transition’ of datacentres
- Environmental impacts of digital connectivity infrastructure
- Environmental impacts of broadband infrastructure
- Environmental impacts of mobile network infrastructure
- Environmental impacts of datacentres
- Environmental footprint of digital connectivity infrastructure
- Environmental footprint of digital networks
- Sustainable digital infrastructure
- Sustainable broadband
- Digital carbon footprint
- Carbon emissions of datacentres
- Carbon emissions of digital connectivity infrastructure
- Carbon emissions of home working
- Environmental payback of digital connectivity infrastructure
- Environmental payback of broadband infrastructure
- Environmental payback of mobile network infrastructure
- Environmental payback of datacentres
- Life cycle assessment of working from home.
- Defra carbon factors for working from home.
- Life cycle assessment of broadband
- Life cycle assessment of mobile phones / mobile network infrastructure
- Life cycle assessment of datacentres
- Energy intensity of digital connectivity infrastructure
- Energy intensity of broadband infrastructure
- Energy intensity of mobile network infrastructure
- Energy intensity of datacentres
- Environmental sustainability of digital connectivity infrastructure
- Environmental sustainability of broadband infrastructure
- Environmental sustainability of mobile phones / mobile network infrastructure
- Environmental sustainability of datacentres.
Application, use and behaviours
- AI strategy
- Internet of Things (usually in the digital strategy and linked to Environmental departments of councils, waste etc).
- Working from home strategies across business groups and government.
Geographical Scope:
- The analysis of policies was focused on:
- Scotland
- Finland,
- Wales,
- Portugal,
- Norway,
- Sweden,
- Estonia,
- Canada (Ontario),
- New Zealand,
- Denmark and
- Iceland
These jurisdictions have topological and population density scale comparisons with Scotland and are likely to face similar digital connectivity issues (land mass, areas of low population density, rural communities).
Some further findings on China were identified as part of the research and included in the report.
Key dependencies
Key dependencies were discussed as part of the scoping analysis as follows:
- Digital skills strategies – from school age to beyond in target countries
- Government skills strategies
- Government “digital transformation” strategies – usually local government
- Digital inclusion strategies
- Renewable energy strategy (to see if there’s a link to digital)
- National Grid and Distribution Network Operators / Distribution System Operator and their requirements for digital connectivity (fixed and mobile)
Methodology for policy review
We undertook a desk review of existing policies from countries within our scope. We looked for whether their policies were designed to support emission reductions, adaptation or just transition through digital connectivity. Section 7 presents our results and uses a score to rate the extent that digital connectivity and emissions reduction is linked within a country’s policy, with five being explicit mention of the GHG or carbon impacts of increased digitalisation and one being no mention or linking of decarbonisation within the policy.
Table 3 – Key of star ratings used to assess country policies and their link between digital connectivity and emissions reduction.
|
★ |
No mention of decarbonisation within digital connectivity policy. |
|
★★ |
Minor mention of decarbonisation in the digital connectivity policy. |
|
★★★ |
Digitalisation recognised or reported as a contributor to green transition, but no mention of the GHG impacts of digitalisation. |
|
★★★★ |
Digitalisation and decarbonisation linked heavily, and mentions of wider coloration with other decarbonisation initiatives, e.g., through EU green IT community |
|
★★★★★ |
As the above, also with explicit mention of the GHG or carbon impacts of increased digitalisation. |
Assessment of confidence
Following a methodology developed by the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change for the fifth assessment report and used for the sixth for the consistent treatment of uncertainties, we developed a confidence level based on the extent of agreement in the literature and the robustness of evidence. Figure 3 on page 15 sets out what constitutes low, moderate, and good confidence in our claims.
- Low agreement is where sources conflict.
- Medium agreement is where sources make broadly similar conclusions but the data or evidence they use to support their conclusions is very different.
- High agreement is where sources independently make similar conclusions and underlying data are similar despite being independent.
- Limited evidence is some evidence available but largely anecdotal and not from recognised peer reviewed sources. Availability of data was low.
- Medium evidence is information from peer reviewed sources or official sources.
- Robust evidence is a greater volume of information from peer reviewed sources and official sources.
Appendix 2: Summary of digital policies across 10 countries.
A summary of digital policies and their links with decarbonisation, across 10 countries selected based on the methodology in Section 4. The degree to which each country links their digital goals and strategy has been given a score, with five representing explicit mention of the GHG or carbon impacts of increased digitalisation, and one representing no mention or linking of decarbonisation within the policy.
The policies from the individual countries are presented in Appendix 2: Summary of digital policies across 10 countries.
Some policies explicitly mentioned a just transition, and reference to adaptation was not found in any of the policies we were able to identify. See Section 7.2.3 for specific comment on data centre related policy.
Finland
Score: five – digitalisation and decarbonisation linked heavily, and mentions of wider collaboration with other decarbonisation initiatives as well as of the GHG or carbon impacts of increased digitalisation.
Finnish policy does connect increased digitalisation with helping the green transition, but there is no explicit mention of the carbon impact of increased digitalisation on the environment.
The Finnish Government: Digital Compass was drawn up for the purpose of managing the development of the digital transformation in Finland. Based on European values and the Digital Decade 2030 programme. Promotes an economically, socially and ecologically sustainable digital green transition (Finnish Government, 2022).
Objective 9 of the Digital Compass states that Finland develops and applies digital technologies that respond to global climate and environmental challenges (European Union Digital Skills and Jobs Platform, 2023).
Ministry of Finance Finland: Sustainable Growth Programme for Finland aims to support growth that is ecologically, socially and economically sustainable in line with the aims of the Govt Programme. Funding will come mainly from EU Recovery Plan ‘Next Generation EU’ – one of four key elements ‘Digitalisation and a digital economy will strengthen productivity and make services available to all’ (Ministry of Finance Finland, n.d.)
Portugal
Score: two – minor mention of decarbonisation in the digital connectivity policy.
Portugal says digitalisation will contribute to decarbonisation.
Portugal’s Action Plan for Digital Transition (Measure 9) speaks to increased digitalisation of public services, which it reports will contribute to decarbonisation and environmental benefits. (Portugal Digital, 2020)
Portuguese Secretary of State for the Digital Transition has partnered with Digital With Purpose (2020 onwards) to acknowledge and deliver digital sustainability. (Global Enabling Sustainability Initiative, 2020)
Norway
Score: two – minor mention of decarbonisation in the digital connectivity policy.
Norwegian policy connects increased digitalisation with aiding the green transition.
The Norwegian Ministry for Foreign Affairs, Digitalisation for Development, Digital Strategy for Norwegian Digital Policy acknowledges climate change as an important priority but doesn’t directly acknowledge the climate impacts of ICT (Norwegian Minstry of Foreign Affairs, n.d.).
The Norway-EU Green Alliance acknowledges that digital transition is important for and contributes to the green transition (Norway and European Union, n.d.).
Sweden
Score: four – digitalisation and decarbonisation linked heavily, and mentions of wider collaboration with other decarbonisation initiatives.
Swedish policy links the use of ICT to decarbonisation effects, as well as acknowledging decarbonisation, circularity, conscious choices, and the energy transition as drivers for a sustainable world.
The Swedish Government’s ICT for a Greener Administration report outlined the importance of acquisition and public procurement, use of ICT in government agencies and digital tools to reduce business travel (OECD, 2018).
The focus of the Swedish Information Society policy is, among other things, to use ICT to promote sustainable growth (Regeringskansliet, 2010).
Estonia
Score: five – digitalisation and decarbonisation linked heavily, and mentions of wider collaboration with other decarbonisation initiatives as well as of the GHG or carbon impacts of increased digitalisation.
Estonian policy contains a clear and explicit mention of the carbon effects of increased digital footprints, and provides a commitment to reduce the effects.
The Estonian Digital Agenda 2030 stresses the activities of the Estonian development plan contribute through the use of innovative technologies and environmentally friendly solutions to reduce the impact of climate change. They are also meant to reduce the time required for covering distances and ensure a good living environment all across Estonia.
The Estonian government also has Green Digital Government Commitments, stating “we analyse the environmental impact of the Estonian digital government and ways to reduce it” (European Union Digital Skills and Jobs Platform, 2023).
Canada (Ontario)
Score: one – no mention of decarbonisation within digital connectivity policy.
Canadian policy contains no mention of the carbon or environmental impact of increased digitalisation.
Canada’s Digital Ambition 2022 mentions at a high level that their Digital Ambition aligns with the Greening Government Strategy – but delivery on specific plans is unclear from published policy and strategy (Government of Canada, 2022).
The Building a Digital Ontario – Ontario’s Digital Strategy does not mention environmental protection or any digital sector emissions (Ontario, n.d.).
The Ontario Onwards Action plan mentions the importance of environmental protection, but does not specifically link environmental protection with digital and sustainability.
“The Government of Canada’s Digital Ambition goes hand in hand with the Greening Government Strategy, which seeks to make Government of Canada’s operations low carbon through green procurement and clean technologies. Through the increased promotion of environmental sustainability, and by integrating environmental considerations in its procurement process, the federal government is in a position to influence the demand for environmentally preferable goods and services” (Ontario, 2020).
New Zealand
Score: one – no mention of decarbonisation within digital connectivity policy.
New Zealand policy does not explicitly mention the carbon or environmental impacts of increased digitalisation.
The Digital Strategy for Aotearoa proclaims: “we use data and digital technology to address big issues of our time like climate change. We also want the tech sector to play a key role in creating a more equitable, low-carbon future.” (Digital.Govt.NZ, n.d.)
However sustainable delivery or green ICT is not noted in any of the flagship initiatives of the Action Plan for the Digital Strategy for Aotearoa (Digital.Govt.NZ, 2022).
Denmark
Score: four – digitalisation and decarbonisation linked heavily, and mentions of wider collaboration with other decarbonisation initiatives.
Danish policy takes a holistic approach to digitalisation and digital section emissions, with direct considerations for green ICT acquisition and support for the EU’s Green Public Procurement criteria.
The Danish Ministry of Finance’s National Strategy for Digitalization focuses on digital as an enabler and doesn’t consider the impact of digital emissions (The Danish Government, 2022).
The “Visions and Recommendations for Denmark as a Digital Pioneer” document focusses on digitising energy and utility data as a prerequisite to understand the impact of increased digital connectivity. Heavier focus on using digital to achieve green transition (Digitalserings Partnerskabet, 2021).
The Agency for Digital Government – Digital Green Transition lays out plans for the EU’s Green Public Procurement criteria to have been tested throughout 2022 and 2023 (Agency for Digital Government, n.d.).
The Study on the Digital Green Transition in the Nordic-Baltic Countries does not explicitly mention the quantification of spend vs emissions (Agency for Digital Government, n.d.).
Iceland
Score: three – digitalisation recognised or reported as a contributor to green transition, but no mention of the GHG impacts of digitalisation.
Icelandic policy nods to sustainable procurement as a lever for green digitalisation, but provides no quantification.
The Digital Green Transition – Government of Iceland sets out the Icelandic ambition to leverage digital effects to achieve and accelerate the green transition (Nordic Council of Ministers, n.d.) (Government of Iceland, 2021) (Stjornarrad islands, 2023)
Wales
Score: four – digitalisation and decarbonisation linked heavily, and mentions of wider collaboration with other decarbonisation initiatives.
It is recognised that digitalisation will play a role in the transition to net zero in the Decarbonising Wales with digital technology website.
The policy for Wales also mentions a just transition and how skills are central to that (Centre for Digital Public Services, 2022).
Tech Net Zero discovery investigated greener government and third sector tech report came up with 6 recommendations of how public services could use digital technologies to reach net zero, one of which was to measure the carbon footprint of a digital service (Centre for Digital Public Services, 2022).
© Published by Frazer-Nash Consultancy, 2024 on behalf of ClimateXChange. All rights reserved.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
Double Diamond Model: what is it? – Justinmind ↑
Using the supply, use and input-output tables and 2019 data coupled with the Greenhouse Gas Effects 2024-2025 (Scottish Government, 2023) and includes the direct and indirect carbon dioxide equivalent emissions of the following sectors: Computers, electronics and opticals; Telecommunications; Computer services; and Information services. ↑
Whilst undertaking the research to support this statement we have identified additional information, beyond the scope of our initial research, for Germany and China. ↑
December 2023
DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/4512
Executive summary
Background
Scotland recognises the significance of a place-based transition to net zero greenhouse gas emissions (GHG). As part of setting a target of net zero by 2045, the Climate Change (Scotland) Act 2009 places importance on the role of local authorities in achieving this target. Therefore, it is a priority for the Scottish Government to facilitate area-wide and locally-led efforts as part of a just transition to net zero.
Across the 32 local authorities in Scotland, 17 have set net zero targets specific to tackling territorial GHG emissions generated in their geographical area (from agriculture, buildings, industry, land use and land use change and forestry, transport and waste). This is in direct comparison to 26 local authorities that have set net zero targets to reduce their organisational GHG emissions.
This research examines local authority climate-relevant strategies and policies within them; the potential of these policies to reduce emissions if they were scaled to the national level; and the barriers that local authorities face in implementing these policies.
Main findings
We developed a register of 69 climate change strategies across all 32 local authorities. We found that local authorities are modelling exemplary action on climate change across many fronts through the benefit of deep-rooted relationships with local stakeholders and unparalleled knowledge of their area.
However, the level of detail and methodological evidence presented in climate change strategies are often sparse, with many strategies failing to model the scale of impact on GHG emissions.
From the 69 climate-related strategies, we selected six leading strategies for quantification and identified 13 policies within these that could be appropriate for scaling up. We undertook an initial estimate of the potential territorial emission reduction if they were replicated across all Scottish local authorities. We also assessed the likelihood for change at this scale, considering local authorities’ sphere of control, capacity and timescales, alongside the magnitude of potential change. Through this process we identified two policy areas with the potential for major impact on territorial greenhouse gas emissions:
- Nature-based solutions: a combination of individual policies to green derelict land, restore damaged peatland and afforestation.
- Net zero transport: several climate policy initiatives such as active transport, decarbonisation of public transport and low-emission vehicle licences for taxis.
The impact on Scotland’s national territorial emissions, should all local authorities adopt the leading policies, from nature-based solutions (5,497 ktCO2e) and net zero transport (1,527 ktCO2e) amounts to an estimated total potential reduction of 7,024 ktCO2e by 2045. This is an indicative figure, illustrating the scale of change that could be possible.
We found that the Scottish Government have set a compelling ambition to closely support local authorities to develop locally owned and led climate action strategies to tackle territorial emissions.
However, we also found that local authorities are limited by a lack of clarity on their roles and responsibilities, and by a lack of best practice guidance or frameworks across all the territorial emission categories. They face barriers including lack of data maturity, capacity, specialist skills, accountability and funding.
Recommendations
Local authorities could be further supported to develop their climate policies. We recommend the establishment of best practice guidance on the development of climate policies. This would help improve clarity and consistency across local authorities.
Further research could expand on the capacity and capability requirements to deliver local authority climate policies between now and 2045, including methods by which the resourcing needs could be met. Further investigation could help quantify the funding available for tackling each GHG inventory, where further funding might best be directed and methods for administrating funding to ensure that national ambitions can be met.
Glossary and abbreviations
|
BEIS |
Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy |
|
ktCO2e |
Kilo-tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalent |
|
DESNZ |
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero |
|
GHG |
Greenhouse gas |
|
GHGI |
Greenhouse gas inventory |
|
IPCC |
Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change |
|
KPI |
Key performance indicator |
|
LA |
Local authority |
|
LEZ |
Low emission zone |
|
LHEES |
Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategies |
|
LULUCF |
Land use, land use change and forestry |
|
SIC |
Standard Industrial Classification |
|
SSN |
Sustainable Scotland Network |
Introduction
Context
The recent parliamentary inquiry into the role of local government in delivering net zero stressed that it will be impossible for Scotland to reach net zero without local leadership spearheading area-wide decarbonisation efforts (Net Zero, Energy and Transport Committee, 2023). The inquiry recognised that achieving net zero cannot be dictated. It requires a collective effort between local government, which holds the local knowledge and fruitful partnerships across the public and private sectors, and national government which have the strategic capabilities and resources to support and coordinate local efforts.
The Scottish Government is continuing the drive toward empowering, building capacity, and providing the necessary foundations for local government to build their net zero programmes. The parliamentary inquiry also established that, while councils have at times been a model for net zero leadership, this needs to be rapidly scaled across all local authorities and all emission sectors in each local authority. The inquiry report noted that the Scottish Government must facilitate this scaling by providing local authorities with a comprehensive roadmap for net zero and “far more certainty than they have at present about the roles they are to play” (Net Zero, Energy and Transport Committee, 2023).
The Duties of Public Bodies: Reporting Requirements Order placed responsibilities on all public bodies, including local authorities, to report on scope 1 and 2 (and some scope 3) organisational emissions (Climate Change Order, 2015). As a result, all 32 local authorities have developed organisational emission inventories and in 2022 the Accounts Commission reported that 26 local authorities had developed organisational net zero targets (Audit Scotland, 2022). However, local authorities have some influence on certain emissions reduction beyond their organisational boundaries. These emissions produced within a local authority’s geographical area of responsibility are referred to as ‘territorial emissions’. Only 17 local authorities have developed territorial net zero targets and even fewer have developed policies for reducing territorial emissions. If this situation persists, it will present a major barrier to the success of Scotland’s national Climate Change Plan, which is heavily reliant on place-based and locally-led action (Scottish Government, 2020).
In their recent progress update to parliament, the Climate Change Committee noted that “momentum on a local level is increasing, but local action is uncoordinated” (Climate Change Committee, 2022, p. 53). There are pockets of exemplary action but also a lack of knowledge sharing across local authorities. This has led to policies being rolled out with different timescales, best practice not being disseminated and opportunities being missed to drive coordinated action across all local authorities. In November 2023 the Scottish Government launched a new Scottish Climate Intelligence Service to support local authorities to build capacity and capability for the development of area-wide programmes of emissions reduction for the benefit of their communities. This service will enable local authorities to deliver their own area-wide territorial net zero targets and to contribute to Scotland’s national commitment to net zero by 2045 (Improvement Service, 2023).
This research addresses some of the identified challenges by analysing the climate policies local authorities have developed to directly tackle territorial GHG emissions, and mapping their potential impact on territorial GHG emissions.
Project aims and research questions
The first aim of this project was to identify key GHG emission reduction policies developed by Scottish local authorities. We developed a comprehensive register of local authority climate-related strategies and associated policies and described the current action being taken by each local authority across all emission categories.
The second aim was to compile and undertake an initial estimate of the policies’ GHG emission reduction potential at both the local authority and national level. This aim was broken down into three sub-questions. Firstly, to identify what the key policies are that have significant GHG emission reduction potential. Secondly, to estimate their emissions reduction potential within their respective local authorities. Thirdly, to estimate what the emission reduction potential would be, should they be applied across all Scottish local authorities. This type of analysis has previously been conducted by the Edinburgh Climate Commission and Place-based Climate Action Network, although this was only in relation to policy scenarios at the local level (Williamson, et al., 2020).
The third aim was to engage with local authorities through a series of semi-structured interviews to understand how the most significant policies could be implemented across Scotland, including the role of Scottish Government and other public bodies in enabling this.
Overall, this project highlights area-based policy options for Scottish Government to consider for national deployment, whether as a statutory instrument, as in the case of Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategies (LHEES), or via other delivery approaches such as frameworks or guidance.
Defining the greenhouse gas emission inventory
The UK greenhouse gas inventory (GHGI) is published annually by the Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ) and sets out the latest estimates in territorial GHG emissions for all 374 local authorities across the United Kingdom, including the 32 local authorities across Scotland. We have charted the latest DESNZ territorial GHGI publication data for Scotland (DESNZ, 2023) in Figure 1 below. This shows the total territorial GHG emissions split into the inventory categories (agriculture, buildings, industry, LULUCF, transport and waste) between 2005 and 2021. The dataset employs several different methodologies to calculate the spatially disaggregated emissions for each inventory category.

Table 1 provides a description of each of the GHGI categories. These are important for drawing boundaries around polices, determining which inventory a specific policy will impact.
|
Category |
Description |
|---|---|
Agriculture |
A variety of policy options exist for the mitigation of GHG emissions through agricultural practices. The most prominent options are improved crop and grazing land management, restoration of organic soils, and livestock manure management. |
Buildings |
Building emissions are typically tackled through policies implementing technological solutions to improve energy efficiency performance, or non-technological approaches such as land use management and planning legislation. There is a drive to move towards zero direct emission sources of heating and hot water, such as heat pumps, to decarbonise buildings. |
Industry |
Net zero emissions from industry is possible but challenging. Reduced materials demand, material efficiency, and circular economy solutions can reduce the need for primary production. Primary production policy options include switching to new processes that use low to zero GHG-producing fuels (e.g. electrification). |
Land Use, Land Use Change and Forestry |
Changes in how land is used impact’s terrestrial ability to store or release carbon to the atmosphere. Humans are changing the natural rate of flux through Land Use, Land Use Change and Forestry (LULUCF) and policies that seek to improve the quantity (e.g. afforestation) and quality (e.g. restoration) of natural sinks are important to preserving natures ability to retain and further sequester carbon. |
Transport |
Transport emissions are addressed through avoided journeys and modal shifts due to behavioural change, uptake of improved vehicle and engine performance technologies, electrification, low-carbon fuels, investments in related infrastructure, and changes in the built environment. Combined, these offer high potential for mitigating emissions from transport. |
Waste |
Management policies typically consist of waste prevention, minimisation, material recovery, recycling, and re-use. There is growing potential for indirect reduction of GHG emissions through principles of circular economy and design leading to decreased waste generation, lower raw material consumption, reduced energy demand and fossil fuel avoidance. |
It is possible for policies to transcend multiple emission inventories. For example, a policy that seeks to develop a green network to increase the level of active transport[1] by improving tree canopy coverage and hedgerows would impact a transport and LULUCF inventory. There are activities and emission changes that would impact both inventories in this instance.
Methodology
This section provides a summarised version of the research methodology. A more detailed methodology is available in Appendix 13.1.
A steering group was established to support the delivery of the project, and consisted of representatives from the Scottish Government, ClimateXChange, Sustainable Scotland Network (SSN), and the Turner & Townsend research team. Findings and outcomes were reported to the steering group for comments and to confirm the research direction throughout the project. The project was divided into three tasks.
Evidence review
Task 1 was to compile a comprehensive policy register to understand the current climate action being taken by each local authority. This register provides a useful tool to view and analyse individual climate policies across Scotland. We applied the following process:
- Search: our search began with reviewing information available through the “Wider Influence” tab of local authority climate change submissions to SSN (SSN, 2023b). Where gaps existed, we supplemented these by conducting an online search of local authority websites and other public body sources for the relevant policy documentation.
- Classify: we utilised a rapid evidence assessment (HM Treasury, 2020) to classify each policy based on its high-level data, including years of coverage, policy owner, whether the policy is monitored, and any associated targets.
- Select: we developed screening criteria based on Scottish Government priorities for the current project and used this to recommend six strategies of significance to progress to Task 2.
We presented the key findings to the steering group and our assessment of the selected strategies. We asked the steering group for advice on the selection of the six strategies. This resulted in the addition of geographical criteria to our selection assessment, to ensure the research considered local authorities from rural and island communities.
Quantitative research
For Task 2 we developed a GHG profile for each of the six strategies selected from Task 1. This involved identifying the emission boundary of each policy within the strategies and the quantification of the potential impact on territorial emissions of the respective local authority. We then proceeded to calculate an aggregated figure to estimate the policies’ potential impact if rolled out at the national level. We approached this by:
- Assessment boundary: GHG boundaries were established using GHG Protocol Action Standard (Greenhouse Gas Protocol, 2014) to apportion the relevant sinks and sources to each policy and estimate potential emission impacts. This was used to determine the likelihood and magnitude of change.
- Policy scenario emissions: in the first instance, we used existing activity and emission factor information from the local authority policies to develop policy scenario emissions estimates. In the absence of information, we applied Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change guidance. We then used the HM Treasury Green Book to approximate changes and associated emissions values to provide national-level policy scenario figures.
The more comprehensive methodology in Appendix 13.1 explains in detail the range of approaches and methodologies applied in the assessment of GHG boundaries, development of the policy scenario emissions estimations and the limitations of this approach. The findings from Task 2 were presented to the steering group with the objective of selecting two of the most likely and impactful areas of policy to be considered for national deployment by local authorities. These were developed into policy briefings for Scottish Government.
Qualitative research
For Task 3 we conducted interviews with representatives from two local authorities to gain their views on wider implementation of the selected policy areas, including the roles of local authorities, Scottish Government and other public bodies. We planned a third interview with one further local authority however, we were not able to agree a time and date for the interview to take place in the timescales of this research.
A topic guide was developed and formed the basis of 45-minute semi-structured interviews on Microsoft Teams. These aimed to collect the comprehensive views on the likelihood of wider adoption of the policies, including practicability, the capacity and capability required to deliver a new policy. We also included other open-ended questions, encouraging participants to expand further on topics they deemed relevant. The data from interviews was collated in a thematic analysis grid and key themes were extracted using an analytical approach guided by participant views.
We combined the data from all sources (the evidence review, quantitative potential emissions modelling, discussions with the steering group, and the qualitative research) to discuss the key challenges and the possible approaches to adopting the climate policies at a national scale. The conclusion is presented in Section 11.
Review of existing evidence
Overview
The aim of this review was to understand the climate strategy and policy landscape across Scottish local authorities. We created a Climate Strategy Register that involved the collation of climate action plans from all 32 local authorities including individual sector strategies such as transport plans, waste plans and local development plans (Appendix 13.3).
This report makes a distinction between a climate strategy and a climate policy in the context of the documents reviewed. Policies feed into sector strategies, which feed into a climate change strategy.
Most local authorities reviewed already have a top-level document we define as a climate change strategy. A climate change strategy refers to several planned actions and policies designed to outline an organisation’s approach to tackling climate-related challenges in their local region. Climate change strategies encompass other nomenclature such as a ‘climate action plan’. A climate change strategy will typically cover ambitions for all GHG emission inventories and may link to separate sector strategies that set out in further detailed policies specific to a singular emission inventory. For example, a climate change strategy might reference a separate transport emission sector strategy.
A climate policy encompasses an individual action or set of actions that deliver ambitions set out by a climate strategy. Policies will typically include setting of targets and key performance indicators to measure and verify the success of the policy’s intended impact. For example, a transport sector strategy might include a policy to increase electric vehicle charging infrastructure, and a policy to implement a low emission zone (LEZ) in a city centre.
We used several sources of information to inform our review of existing evidence. We started with reviewing the “Wider influences” local authority climate change report submissions to SSN (SSN, 2023b). The wider influences section of SSN reports was completed with varying degrees of information but overall, the level of detail was sparse. We supplemented this gap by searching each of the local authority websites for their climate action strategies. We found various types of initiatives at different levels of hierarchy.
We identified 69 strategies relevant to climate change across the 32 local authorities. We developed short summaries of each strategy document, which are set out in Appendix 13.2.
We developed a screening matrix to rank each of the strategies against five criteria outlined in Table 2 and determined the level of maturity by assessing the level of evidence provided in a climate change strategy as yes / no / partial. Each of the strategies was then assigned a relevance score to identify those that closely aligned with the research objectives.
|
Screening criteria |
Description |
Maturity | |||
|
1 |
2 |
3 | |||
|
1 |
Scalability |
If the policy impacts a defined region, is there possibility for it to be scaled to cover a wider geographical location? |
N |
N |
Y |
|
2 |
Replicability |
Can the policy be easily replicated by other local authorities in Scotland? |
N |
Y |
Y |
|
3 |
Impacts |
Does the policy quantify the intended impacts (e.g. emissions reduction) and set targets against these? |
N |
Y |
Y |
|
4 |
Timescales |
The policy has a clear start and end date and where possible, has interim milestones and targets that will be used to measure progress. |
N |
P |
Y |
|
5 |
Resource |
Does the policy quantify the resourcing requirement to deliver the stated impacts (e.g. finance)? |
N |
P |
Y |
Although some strategies where much more detailed than others in terms of the detail provided against individual policies, all the strategies provided sufficient information for us to understand how they would lead to an impact of the GHG emissions in their area. However, quantified information about the level of impact a strategy had was often high-level, not valued as an impact on territorial GHG emissions, or left as an open ambition.[2]
Selected local authority strategies
From the existing evidence review, we identified five climate change strategies that scored well across all of the screening categories. These climate change strategies were discussed with the steering group and we identified that all of the selected climate change strategies were across the central belt of the country. We therefore added a sixth strategy from a more rural local authority to ensure that we had a more diverse geographical spread. The six climate strategies matching the criteria were taken forward to the next task of valuating climate policies. The local authorities selected are shown in Figure 3 below.
|
Key |
Local authority |
Climate strategy name |
|
1 |
Argyll and Bute Council |
Decarbonisation Plan |
|
2 |
Stirling Council |
Climate and Nature Emergency Plan |
|
3 |
Perth & Kinross Council |
Climate Change Strategy and Action Plan |
|
4 |
Angus Council |
Sustainable Energy and Climate Action Plan |
|
5 |
Glasgow City Council |
Glasgow Climate Plan |
|
6 |
Dumfries and Galloway Council |
Carbon Neutral Strategic Plan |

In the following paragraphs, we present two example climate change strategies as representative of the strategies we reviewed.
Stirling’s Climate and Nature Emergency Plan was the highest-ranking strategy (table 3) we reviewed. This was due to the large array of topics covered, efficient writing style, the explanation of policies and how those could be translated into other local authorities and regions. It provided several emission impact figures for policies and actions to show the effect on the environment and highlighted how these would be resourced in the region. Stirling’s Climate and Nature Emergency Plan was also one of the few climate change strategies to mention their current territorial emissions, which is the key focus of this project. Mention of territorial emissions is usually a strong indicator that a climate change strategy would give thorough information around carbon impacts and implementation. Stirling’s Climate and Nature Emergency Plan estimated a territorial emission reduction of 1/3 between 2005 and 2018 and mapped out their future to show where the local authority wanted to be by 2030. This was one of many examples from Stirling’s Climate and Nature Emergency Plan that set it apart from other climate change strategies and provided a clear understanding of how the local authority wanted to meet their targets for territorial GHG emissions.
The Glasgow Climate Plan (Glasgow City Council, 2022) and Stirling Climate and Nature Emergency Plan (Stirling Council, 2022) were key examples of detailed climate change strategies that could be deployed to support a national transition to net zero. Both strategies gave detailed explanations of the current regional context which was pivotal in explaining why certain policies or actions had a greater impact than others. The strategies also highlighted the importance of developing and investing in climate policymaking to ensure polices they set are appropriate for the regions as well as the communities they serve, whilst aiming to minimise the (negative) impact on residents as much as possible. Another key area both strategies explore is the financial implications of initiatives, indicating whether projects are either already funded, part funded or if they are being financed. This is something the Glasgow Climate Plan provided details on more than any other climate strategy reviewed. Importantly, the strategies outlined the capacity requirements to adequately resource their polices and provided timebound milestones to monitor progress against.
Additional findings
Territorial emissions impact
Of the 69 climate change strategies, 56 either partially valued their emissions impact or failed to value the scale of their impact on GHG emissions at all. A common theme in the absence of territorial GHG emission impact was to apply a bespoke indicator as a measure of success, such as increasing the number of staff working remotely. The majority of climate change plans did not outline the methodologies applied in gathering and quantifying performance measures and targets, so it was often unclear how impacts would be measured.
The key aim of this research was to identify policies that could impact territorial GHG emissions in a major way. The top performing policies against the criteria were scored well because they quantified the anticipated impacts. Emissions were typically quantified as either a tonnage reduction in GHG emissions (tCO2e) or a percentage reduction against a baseline figure.
Resourcing, financing and timelines
56 of the 69 climate change strategies had fully or partially evidenced timescales for implementation and completion. adopt a unified approach.
The most mature climate change strategies also included considerations around cost, whether funding had been secured, who would be financing it and who would be delivering these policies. For example, Argyle and Bute’s Decarbonisation Plan (Argyll and Bute Council, 2021) outlines sources of funding against each individual policy, whether funding has been secured or still requires budget.
However, policies aimed at achieving the same outcome might do so on different timescales. There was no clear pattern across the climate change strategies on how timescales were decided upon. The exception to this rule was waste targets as they are set nationally, which is a good example of how other policy areas could do the same to territorial emissions and targets
Only 13 of the 69 climate change strategies cited their territorial emissions. Of those, only some set territorial emissions targets. It is not clear why this was the case. It could be due to local authorities not having updated information about their territorial emissions or because they were not confident in how they could enact change in their regions. Climate change strategies that specifically mentioned territorial emissions and set emissions targets for their area had more detailed action lists that went beyond council owned assets. This difference is important as it highlights some local authorities are being proactive in tackling territorial GHG emissions in the local authority area beyond just those of their own organisations.
Summary
The level of detail and consistency of targets and performance metrics showed that there was no clear and consistent approach to developing climate change strategies. This makes comparison and valuation of the climate strategies complex due to the non-uniform nature of presenting impact and the lack of detail around the methodological approaches applied.
The strategies we ranked high on our measures including scalability, replicability, and quantification of impacts, could form the basis of best-practice knowledge sharing, and setting of a national approach (see Appendix 13.1.1 for further detail). Our findings reflect those of recent research carried out by Environmental Standards Scotland (Environmental Standards Scotland, 2023) that recommended Scottish Government introduce a standardised Climate Plan template with mandatory reporting for local authorities. This recommendation would go some way to solving some of the challenges uncovered by this research.
Results of quantitative research
Overview
From the six climate strategies reviewed in detail (Figure 3), 61 distinct climate policies were extracted. The distribution of the policies across the GHG inventory categories is summarised in Figure 4.
Of the 61 policies extracted, most policies (26) targeted building emissions and are outside the scope of this research as they are covered by the exemplar LHEES approach that has already been rolled out nationally across all local authorities. This research intended to identify policies in other GHG inventory categories that have the same potential for rollout across local authorities. With building emissions excluded, the remaining 35 policies have the greatest numbers in transport (13), LULUCF (8) and industry (7) as shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4: Number of policies extracted, by GHG inventory.
Of the 35 policies, we could only collect sufficient information from 13 policies to be able to estimate potential GHG emission impact. These are described alongside example targets and KPIs in Appendix 13.5.
Policy scenario emissions
We analysed the 13 policies to estimate the potential GHG emission impact if they were to be scaled-up to the national level and enacted across all 32 local authorities. The potential GHG emission impacts are high-level indicative estimates using a basic methodological approach and incorporating multiple assumptions, as set out in Appendix 13.1.2 and 13.2. As such, the quantitative findings are indicative, illustrating the scale of potential impact that local authorities may have in tackling climate change. Further analysis would provide more accurate potential GHG impacts of policies.
The findings of this analysis are detailed Table 4. Each row in Table 4 contains a climate policy that originates from either a single local authority or multiple local authorities where policies were similar. Table 4 details that across the 13 policies assessed for their GHG emission impact, there is potential for an estimated 9 MtCO2e overall change to territorial emissions, or 22% of the current inventory emissions for Scotland.
The full breakdown of the indicative estimated potential impact on each individual local authority’s GHG inventory is presented in Appendix 13.6 and sources for the assumptions and conversion factors are included at Appendix 13.2.
For each of these 13 policies valued, we also show in Table 4 our assessment of the likelihood of each policy to cause a change in emissions if rolled out nationally to all local authorities, taking account sphere of control, capacity and capability, and the timescale over which a policy would be enacted. We also assessed the magnitude of the potential change. Both of these methodologies are outlined in IPCC guidelines (IPCC, 2006) and set out in Appendix 13.4. There will be widely ranging factors and contexts at an individual local authority level which have not been accounted for and that would significantly impact implementation of the policies assessed. In addition, there are critical wider factors such as future national policy development and available budget that were not incorporated into this quantitative analysis.
Findings
Comparing the policies evaluated in Table 4 with the Climate Change Plan sector envelopes (Scottish Government, 2020, p. 253) indicates that both LULUCF and transport policies have the greatest potential to impact territorial GHG emissions, with a high likelihood of the local authority being able to influence their outcome. Table 3 below shows estimated potential GHG emission reductions in these policy areas if implemented in each local authority.
The other policy areas evaluated may also compare favourably with the Climate Change Plan sector envelopes but local authorities have a more limited control on the outcomes. This is the case with policies relating to changes in agricultural practices. In addition, while seven industrial emission-related policies were present amongst the six climate strategies finalised, none sought to value their impact on territorial GHG emissions and provided limited definitive action. Instead, the industrial-emission-related policies opted for a model of getting organisations to sign up to climate change pledges. Policies that were either outside the local authorities’ sphere of influence, or policies that impacted centralised issues, such as waste management, were also not carried forward to interviews with local authorities.
|
Local authority |
1) Nature-based solutions |
2) Net zero transport | ||
|
Total LULUCF emissions (ktCO2e) |
Potential emission reduction (ktCO2e) |
Total Transport emissions (ktCO2e) |
Potential emission reduction (ktCO2e) | |
|
Aberdeen City |
31 |
-32 |
305 |
-63 |
|
Aberdeenshire |
357 |
-107 |
613 |
-72 |
|
Angus |
389 |
-52 |
235 |
-31 |
|
Argyll and Bute |
-532 |
-225 |
186 |
-24 |
|
City of Edinburgh |
70 |
-37 |
640 |
-139 |
|
Clackmannanshire |
24 |
-155 |
66 |
-15 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
-239 |
-59 |
571 |
-42 |
|
Dundee City |
23 |
-485 |
184 |
-40 |
|
East Ayrshire |
-31 |
-39 |
229 |
-34 |
|
East Dunbartonshire |
20 |
-41 |
113 |
-30 |
|
East Lothian |
194 |
-36 |
210 |
-30 |
|
East Renfrewshire |
23 |
-58 |
147 |
-38 |
|
Falkirk |
79 |
-115 |
327 |
-43 |
|
Fife |
345 |
-150 |
584 |
-101 |
|
Glasgow City |
68 |
-225 |
761 |
-170 |
|
Highland |
110 |
-1,489 |
598 |
-80 |
|
Inverclyde |
3 |
-55 |
106 |
-23 |
|
Midlothian |
52 |
-83 |
137 |
-26 |
|
Moray |
-167 |
-56 |
162 |
-26 |
|
Na h-Eileanan Siar |
951 |
-461 |
42 |
-8 |
|
North Ayrshire |
-32 |
-280 |
151 |
-37 |
|
North Lanarkshire |
90 |
-313 |
736 |
-97 |
|
Orkney Islands |
43 |
-181 |
29 |
-6 |
|
Perth and Kinross |
-140 |
-47 |
515 |
-42 |
|
Renfrewshire |
35 |
-76 |
301 |
-52 |
|
Scottish Borders |
-103 |
-51 |
261 |
-32 |
|
Shetland Islands |
572 |
-160 |
43 |
-7 |
|
South Ayrshire |
-55 |
-48 |
209 |
-31 |
|
South Lanarkshire |
-27 |
-152 |
666 |
-91 |
|
Stirling |
-150 |
-63 |
249 |
-25 |
|
West Dunbartonshire |
9 |
-56 |
127 |
-25 |
|
West Lothian |
48 |
-106 |
373 |
-51 |
|
Total |
2,059 |
-5,497 |
9,878 |
-1,527 |
Results of qualitative research
Overview
The results of the quantitative research found that policies in LULUCF and transport showed potential in having significant impacts on local authority territorial GHG emissions. To find out more about how these policies were developed, and the potential pathways to implementing similar policies at the national level, we interviewed local authorities who had leading policies in nature-based solutions and net zero transport.
Findings
The findings below combine evidence from our review of existing data and assessment of the key themes identified through thematic analysis of interviews.
Capacity and capability
It was clear from the interviews that lack of capacity to develop and deliver policies would likely hamper efforts in expanding policies across all local authorities in Scotland. We found that some local authorities had the resource and ability to hire specialist skills into the organisation. Through this they could actively engage with teams across the organisation to ensure policy ambitions were carried out. An example of this given by one respondent:
“It’s imperative to ensure that any planting of new trees considered multiple planning and climate aspects, impacting the species of tree selected, factoring in considerations about the future microclimate and requirements for future flood prevention.”
However, local authorities do not always know what skills they need to deliver on a policy ambition. One respondent explained that many policies require both multi-disciplinary expertise, such as project management, as well as specialist skills, such as ArcGIS[3], to properly manage the rollout of a policy.
One respondent explained that budget cuts mean that retaining enough resource within the organisation, with access to the right skills and expertise would be a defining factor in the success of climate policies’ targets. Respondents did signal that it was possible to access skills external to the local authority (e.g. through consultancy) but this was often ad hoc. Developing and implementing policies will require multi-year and decadal management to realise their full benefits. Not being able to retain the skills and resource within the local authority places their success at risk.
Data maturity
One of the respondents explained that having good quality data that is continually updated and shared across the organisation is critical to enabling policy development and delivery. The example provided was the data landscape for nature-based solutions policies, which is complex, onerous to compile and requires near-constant updating. For example, in the greening of derelict land, the classification of land as ‘derelict’ ebbs and flows as multiple stakeholders retain interest in the space. The local authority itself (potentially across multiple departments), private individuals, residents and developers may all have a stake in the use of the derelict land. Added to this is the difficulty of collecting accurate data about derelict land, such as carbon evaluation, existence of contaminants, appraisal of natural ecosystems and animal species, and importance to flood prevention. This information is needed to show causal links between greening derelict land and benefits such as heat reduction and carbon sequestration.
Data also enables a local authority to develop robust climate policies by identifying measurable KPIs and to set realistic timescales. Several climate change strategies we reviewed were at early stages of development and specifically referenced the need for additional research to complete the valuation of a policy’s impact. For example, several transport policies referenced other transport strategy documents in-development that sought to improve data maturity for the local area, and enable valuation of impacts and target setting. Timescales for the development of these strategies were not clear.
Collecting adequate data is key to the development, measurement, and success of a climate policy. However, the landscape is complex and demanding and interrelated to capacity and capability in the local authority as discussed above.
Geographical diversity
We found that the overarching aims of climate change strategies across Scotland are the same. However, sometimes these goals are were coupled with specific local issues. Therefore, motivations, KPIs, and targets by which the local authorities measure the performance of climate related policies often differ. This has a knock-on effect on the data and capacity needed to implement policy across diverse communities.
One clear example of this is in homeworking policies. In large island communities that have a widely dispersed rural communities, home working and flexible working has benefited commuters who do not need to travel great distances to reach their work location. One interviewee explained that the policy has helped island communities to overcome other issues such as the lack of public transport provision. Similar homeworking policies also exist in cities with a specific focus on reducing the amount of traffic congestion within the city centre at peak times. Both sets of policies have differing motivations for enacting homeworking polices but the end benefit of reduced air pollution is the same.
Accountability and ownership
We found that climate policies often span multiple departments within an organisation. In some circumstances this led to ambiguity around accountability for the successful delivery of a policy. One respondent explained that for nature-based climate policies, using afforestation as a specific case in point, the responsibility and budget for tree planting might fall with a local authority’s parks department. However, responsibility to actively manage LULUCF from a climate perspective might reside with the sustainability or planning departments. This leads to complexities around who in a local authority needs to be consulted for LULUCF projects and who has ultimate ownership of a policy being successfully enacted. Respondents referenced that it is not uncommon for there to be “a lot of silo working” across departments, so projects that might impact on a climate policy are not always communicated, or vice versa. Respondents also noted that there tends to be an aversion to taking on or sharing climate policy responsibilities because it is a change from how departments have functioned in the past,
“[we] have always done it this way so why would we do it another way”.
Funding
Funding, or the lack thereof, was a common theme across respondents. One respondent noted that there is a lack of funding available to commission external expertise, for example the delivery of a feasibility study. This hampered efforts to collect the information needed to develop robust policies and set realistic targets. It was clear from the strategies reviewed that only a few local authorities sought to quantify the funding requirement to deliver policies.
A strong theme was the lack of funding to attract and retain talent within the local authorities. One example given was that of senior planners, who are required within in a local authority to appropriately manage LULUCF. We were told:
“[Local authorities] advertised at between £39,000 and £48,000 per annum while the private sector advertises similar roles for between £48,000 and £68,00 per annum”.
This leads to expertise being stripped out of the public sector by the private sector after employees have gained a few years’ experience.
There are several avenues of funding available to Scottish local authorities. However, it was the view of respondents that funding was piecemeal, short-term where local authorities needed a longer-term financial commitment and finite, which leads to competition across local authorities. There was a view shared across respondents that funders such as Scottish Government and NatureScot should look to review how funding is administered. A model was suggested in which funders work directly with each individual local authority to identify areas where funding could have the greatest impact at the local level. There was appreciation though that both Scottish Government and NatureScot are themselves suffering from budget and resourcing pressures to many of the local authorities, which hampers efforts to change existing models.
Summary
While very limited, the qualitative evidence indicates that many of the barriers highlighted by the interviews are aligned to those presented in the climate strategy documentary review. Further, the interviews also indicate that these barriers are interlinked and require a holistic approach to be overcome. For example, the lack of funding directly impacts capacity and capability within local authorities to deliver climate policy. This in turn directly impacts the maturity of data across the sector and, again, the local authority’s ability to deliver robust climate policies.
Considering the identified barriers to enacting climate policies, local authorities have nevertheless made significant inroads to developing some best-in-class policies that go above and beyond national ambitions. This is evident in the detail and narrative presented in multiple climate strategies. This shows there is a major interest and commitment by local authorities to tackle their territorial emissions. While policymaking in this area is limited in its scope, scale and consistency, local authorities interviewed demonstrated keenness to increase action.
Combined results
Table 4 combines the quantitative and qualitative research’s estimated potential impacts for the policies should they be implemented nationally. Appendix 13.1.2 describes the methodology used to arrive at the figures included and Appendix 13.2 lists the sources used.
|
Inventory / Policy |
Current territorial emissions |
Potential National Policy emission impact estimate |
Interim target emission impact |
% change from current |
Likelihood |
Magnitude |
Interim target year |
Policy target year |
|
Agriculture |
7,985 |
-1,416 |
-907 |
-17.73% | ||||
|
Changes to Agricultural Practices |
-1,416 |
-907 |
-17.73% |
Possible |
Major |
2025 |
2030 | |
|
Buildings (not accounted) |
11,600 |
0 |
0 |
0.00% | ||||
|
Industry |
7,798 |
0 |
0 |
0.00% | ||||
|
LULUCF |
2,059 |
-5,497 |
-1,159 |
-266.94% | ||||
|
Greening of derelict land |
-2,167 |
N/A |
-105.23% |
Likely |
Major |
2025 |
2040 | |
|
Peatland restoration |
-2,530 |
-1,150 |
-122.86% |
Possible |
Major |
2030 |
2045 | |
|
Reforestation (1 million new trees per local authority) |
-800 |
-9 |
-38.85% |
Likely |
Moderate |
2030 |
2045 | |
|
Transport |
9,878 |
-1,527 |
-258 |
-24.02% | ||||
|
Active travel |
-793 |
N/A |
-16.59% |
Unlikely |
Major |
N/A |
2030 | |
|
Homeworking |
-0.31 |
N/A |
-0.00% |
Likely |
Minor |
N/A |
2026 | |
|
Low Emission Zone |
-129 |
N/A |
-1.30% |
Very likely |
Moderate |
N/A |
2030 | |
|
Public transport |
-169 |
-76 |
-1.71% |
Likely |
Moderate |
2030 |
2045 | |
|
Fleet vehicles |
-124 |
-26 |
-1.26% |
Likely |
Moderate |
2025 |
2030 | |
|
Council Business Travel |
-235 |
-118 |
-2.38% |
Very likely |
Moderate |
2030 |
2045 | |
|
LEV Taxi Licences |
-76 |
-38 |
-0.77% |
Likely |
Minor |
2032 |
2045 | |
|
Waste |
1,333 |
-541 |
-306 |
-40.57% | ||||
|
Waste Reduction Strategy |
-520 |
-290 |
-39.03% |
Likely |
Major |
2025 |
2045 | |
|
Council Waste Reduction |
-21 |
-16 |
-1.55% |
Very likely |
Moderate |
2030 |
2045 | |
|
Scotland Total |
40,653 |
-8,981 |
-2,629 |
-22.09% |
Policy briefing: Nature-based solutions
Background
Biodiversity loss and the destruction of natural habitats is directly linked to climate change. Scottish forests, peatlands and bogs contribute to healthy eco systems. These systems work to remove CO2 from our atmosphere and in some areas become large carbon sinks. According to the Biodiversity Intactness Indicator, Scotland has seen a 15% decline in its natural capital since 1950 with only 64% of our protected woodlands being in a favourable or recovering condition (Scottish Government, 2022).
|
Policy |
Nature-based solutions |
|
Description |
Changing land use – particularly on areas of derelict land – that directly improves carbon sequestration potential through improvements in management practices, afforestation, repairing damaged ecosystems such as peatland, and greening of derelict land. |
|
Potential estimated national impact |
-5.4 MtCO2e |
|
Broader impacts |
|
Figure 5 shows the total estimated impact on LULUCF territorial GHG emissions by each individual policy, moving the inventory from 2.1 MtCO2e emission per annum to (negative) -3.4 MtCO2e through a combination of three polices.

Figure 5: Potential impact on LULUCF territorial GHG emissions across Scotland for a nature-based solutions policy
Greening Derelict Land
The rewilding policy outlined in Glasgow’s Climate Plan (Glasgow City Council, 2022) was one of the most developed we found during the quantitative review. It was used as the foundation to value the potential impact of nation-wide greening of derelict land. NatureScot estimated the total area of urban vacant and derelict land in Scotland in 2017 to be 11,649 hectares (Nature Scot, 2022). Across Scotland, 35% (4,077 ha) of urban vacant and derelict land can be thought of as being uneconomic to develop and/or is viewed as suitable to reclaim for a ‘soft’ end use (i.e. non-built use). The most common new use for sites that were previously urban vacant and derelict land was for residential development, with 50% of sites reclaimed for this purpose (Nature Scot, 2022). Changing land use for derelict land comes with many challenges for local authorities to consider including potential decontamination, private ownership, stakeholder relations, and internal ownership of the policy (see findings from the qualitative research in Section 7).
We have given an interim target of 2025 for greening to reach an estimated net gain in carbon sequestration potential of 2.2 MtCO2e across Scotland by 2040. This figure is an upper bound estimate and was calculated on the basis of the following significant assumptions:
- 50% of the uneconomic land could be ’greened’ as described above.
- Derelict land is assumed to be neutral grassland that can be converted to coniferous woodland, applying carbon stock estimates (tC / ha) by habitat type and converting to MtCO2e (Carbon Rewild, 2020).
- Afforested trees would reach their peak potential sequestration between 16 and 25 years of age (Carbon Store, n.d.).
Peatland Restoration
Scotland’s Nature Agency estimates that Scotland has some 1.8 Mha of blanket bog, representing 23% of the total land area (NatureScot, 2023). It is estimated that up to 80% of the total peatland area (1.44 Mha) is damaged. We have drawn on several policies across three local authorities that had detailed peatland restoration ambitions. The policies we reviewed sought to meet the pace of restoration set by Scottish Government of 20,000 ha restored per annum, with a target of 250,000 ha restored by 2030 (Scottish Government, 2020). Maintaining this pace of change to 2045 would mean a potential restoration of 0.55 Mha of peatland by 2045. The International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN) estimates that up to 4.6 tCO2e per hectare could be reduced by restored peatland (IUCN, 2010). This produces an estimated carbon reduction potential of 2.5 MtCO2e.
A strong caveat to the total potential restoration area is that much of the peatland across Scotland is under private ownership. Local authorities have limited powers outwith their own land ownership and may face significant challenges in convincing some private landowners to restore the peat on their land. In the absence of clear data on the area of peatland under private ownership, or other ownership covenants, for the purposes of estimating a potential GHG emission reduction we have made the broad assumption that these challenges could be overcome. However, if these challenges cannot be overcome it would severely reduce achievable emissions reductions.
Afforestation
We have used Stirling’s Climate & Nature Emergency Plan (Stirling Council, 2022) reforestation policy to plant 360,000 new trees by 2030, and 1 million new trees by 2045 as the basis for the modelled figures. The average kilogram of carbon dioxide sequestered by a mature tree is between 10kg CO2 and 40kg CO2 depending on age, species, and growing environment (EcoTree, 2023). For the purposes of estimation, 25kgCO2 / tree / per annum has been used. Scaling this ambition to the national level, the total estimated removal of 0.8 MtCO2 per annum across Scotland.
There are significant assumptions that sit behind the above estimation. These include:
- Stirling’s policy does not specify the type of land that will be converted, the detailed timescales for planting (impacting when the new tree stock will be at maturity), nor the preferred species of tree to be reforested.
- The policy does not value the GHG emission impact of planting new trees.
- We have assumed that the afforested trees will sequester emissions at their peak potential (i.e. a mature forest). This means the estimated emissions removals are limited by the fact we have not modelled a progressive change in sequestration over time, accounting for the growth of new woodland, such as that outlined by the Woodland Carbon Code (UK Woodland Carbon Code, 2021).
Summary
During our research we found that local authorities were eager to develop and create policies for land use that could make a quantifiable impact. One common theme across all local authorities was the consideration of peatland as one of the most impactful policies to reduce their carbon emissions. There are abundant resources provided by the IUCN peatland code (IUCN, 2023) that local authorities could access to begin developing strong peatland restoration policies.
Policy briefing: Net zero transport
Background
Scotland has ambitious targets to reduce transport emissions to net-zero by 2045 (Transport Scotland, 2019a). Transport emissions are one of the largest GHG inventory categories, accounting for 24% of overall territorial emissions (DESNZ, 2023). This is reflected in the number of transport policies identified across local authority climate change strategies. The policies in the section below demonstrate how local authorities are driving forward transport solutions.
|
Policy |
Net zero transport |
|
Description |
Supporting the nation’s transition to net zero transport through a combination of policies tackling public and private transport methods, including promoting active travel and implementing low emission zones. |
|
Potential estimated national impact |
-1.5 MtCO2e |
|
Broader impacts |
|

Figure 6: Potential impact on transport territorial GHG emissions across Scotland for a net zero transport policy
Figure 6 shows the total estimated impact on transport GHG emissions by each individual policy, moving the inventory from 9,878 MtCO2e emission per annum to 8,351 MtCO2e through a combination of seven polices.
The Scottish National Transport Strategy states that 40% of transport emissions come from fossil fuelled cars. Recognising the impact that internal combustion engine cars have, local authorities have started to introduce policies targeted specifically at reducing these emissions. (Transport Scotland, 2019a).
High private use car use does not just affect GHG emissions, it also has a significant impact on air quality, health and pedestrian safety. Private car use contributes to high pollutions levels and with transport contributing to 1/6 of Scotland’s particulate matter (PM10) it is clear this is an area for policy focus (Transport Scotland, 2019a).
Local authorities understand the need for potent policies to be in line with national targets such as the goal to reduce car kilometres driven by 20% by 2030. These range from encouraging more active travel through the creation of active travel corridors and implementing low emissions zones in congested zones.
Active transport
The figures for this policy were modelled using Argyll and Bute Council’s Decarbonisation Plan 2022-2025 (Argyll and Bute Council, 2021). £2.3 million has been invested in delivering a wide range of active travel initiatives such as improved pathways, community cycle repair stands, cycle parking and new cycling routes. Through a combination of similar initiatives, a viable aim would be to convert 47% of remaining road journeys of up to 3km to active travel, which was the average proportion of active travel journeys up to 3km in 2019 (Transport Scotland, 2019b). The Council has committed to develop an Active Travel Strategy that would drive the policy forward at a future stage, but up to this point, resource to deliver the policy is dependent on external funding awards and is not covered by council budgets.
Homeworking
This policy has been valued as a proportion of the 262,000 Scottish FTE public sector total workforce (Scottish Government, 2022) working from home for 50% of their contracted hours. Reducing the average commute of 20 km round trip to office locations made in 73% of circumstances by personal car (Scottish Government, 2022b). Further potential emission reductions could be achieved through reduced operation of offices, such as heating, lighting, equipment and other operational emissions, although these have not been factored into our current study. However, it should be noted that emissions from reduced transport are minimal due to increased emissions associated with staff working from home (Riley et al., 2021).
Low-emission zones
Currently, there are four low emission zones (LEZ) in Scotland with enforcement for Dundee, Aberdeen and Edinburgh being introduced in 2024. Glasgow’s LEZ is integrated with the City Development Plan 2, Glasgow Transport Strategy and their Climate Plan to implement the change. The LEZ has been operating since 2018 with the aim of encouraging more active travel and public transport use in the city centre. The policy was implemented in phases to ensure low levels of disruption for residents, which should be a key consideration if scaling this across Scotland. Using findings from the London LEZ (Mayor of London, 2023), we have assumed a 4% CO2 saving on emissions from transport on minor roads, to account for the fact LEZs will likely be operational in urban areas.
Decarbonisation of public transport
Climate targets published in the Stirling Climate & Nature Emergency Plan (Stirling Council, 2022) aim to reduce GHG emissions from public transport by an interim target of 25% in 2030, with an overall target of 75% by 2045. This has been extrapolated using population as a function to estimate the number of people served by public transport. However, the provision of public transport across Scotland is dependent on several factors, including sparseness of the population and socioeconomic circumstance, which are not accounted for in the potential emissions impact estimation. Further work should be undertaken to quantify the benefits.
Decarbonisation of fleet vehicles
This policy’s emissions were modelled using the estimated number of 28,800 fleet vehicles in the Scottish public sector (Scottish Futures Trust, 2022). We applied a conversion factor for assumed petrol cars, diesel LGVs and HGVs (BEIS, 2023). The average number of kilometres travelled annually is 12,000 km (Scottish Futures Trust, 2022). Post-conversion to EV emissions are zero, as per emission factor guidance. It is worth noting that EV technology for HGVs is under development and may not play a major role until post-2030 (Transport & Environment, 2023).
Council business travel
These emissions were estimated based on climate targets published in the Stirling Climate & Nature Emergency Plan (Stirling Council, 2022). The plan sets out the ambition of reducing baseline transport emissions (4,450 tCO2) by the interim target of 45% by 2030, and the overall target emission reduction of 90% by 2045. This has been applied across the other local authorities, using population as a proxy. Further research to quantify emissions for each local authority would need to be carried out to refine these estimates.
LEV taxi licences
Stirling Climate & Nature Emergency Plan (Stirling Council, 2022) sets out the authority’s commitment to 100% of all taxis operating in the region being EVs by 2045. Using this as a foundation, we have valued the policy ambition in potential national GHG territorial emission impact.
There are 20,396 taxi licences registered across the 32 local authorities in Scotland of which 9,928 were registered as of 2021 (Transport Scotland, 2021). 1.9% are thought to be ULEVS (DfT, 2023). The policy will seek to increase the share of ULEV licences to 100% by 2045 effectively curtailing the emissions from private car hire.
To calculate the GHG emission impact, we anticipate that the average number of kilometres travelled per annum per capita is 80.85 km taken from the average number of trips made in the UK, by mode of transport (DESNZ, 2023) across the population of Scotland (5,563,000). Assumed that most private hire taxis are diesel cars, we applied the emission factor for a diesel car from BEIS company reporting datasets (BEIS, 2023) to calculate a saving on emission of 76.36 ktCO2e.
Summary
It is clear from our research that transport is a key focus for all local authorities across Scotland due to the interlinked impacts spanning multiple socio-economic factors. Transport policies are very publicly visual in their delivery, making it easy for local authorities to point toward action being taken. In this section we have outlined some of the transport-related policies that could potentially be rolled out across Scotland’s local authorities. There is great potential to support local authorities to drive ambitious change in transport emissions, many of whom are already showing innovative solutions to enacting change in their local area. We have also given high-level estimates of potential emissions reductions if some of the most mature existing travel policies were scaled up.
Conclusions
Through pursuit of Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategies (LHEES), the Scottish Government has set the foundations for local authorities to drive their own locally led net zero agendas, directly tackling territorial greenhouse emissions from buildings. This research sought to investigate the role of local authorities in addressing emissions across other inventory categories, to replicate the success and best practice generated by LHEES.
From the evidence reviewed and from the interviews with local authorities, it is clear that there is local authority ambition to deliver climate policies that tackle local climate challenges, at the same time as delivering emissions reductions that go above and beyond national targets. Our climate strategy register details 69 current local authority climate-relevant strategies and describes the action being taken across all emission categories. We uncovered several climate change strategies that clearly detail intent, value their potential impacts and address resourcing and funding needs. Further research could be carried out to establish best-practice guidance on the development of climate policies, using existing local authority approaches as the foundation. This would help improve consistency across local authorities in how they value policy impacts and Scottish Government’s understanding of the resourcing, skills and funding needed to deliver.
This research assessed local authority strategies and policies to find where the most mature and impactful local authority climate policies have been developed. We scaled-up the emission reduction potential of the strongest of these local policies to give high-level-indicative estimates of what the impact could be in other local authorities and at a national level. Combining all of the analysis, we identified the greatest potential for impactful local authority controlled policies on territorial emissions to be within the LULUCF and transport categories.
For these to be implemented across Scotland, we found that the Scottish Government has a key role to play. They can provide effective leadership through facilitating best-practice knowledge sharing, improved access to skilled resource and targeted funding initiatives.
Territorial GHG policies are complex and data-driven, requiring specialist resource to develop and deliver, which we found does not always exist within individual local authorities. The Scottish Climate Intelligence Service has recently been launched in response to this barrier for many local authorities. Further research could expand on the capacity and capability requirements to deliver local authority climate policies between now and 2045, including methods by which the resourcing needs could be met.
Finally, funding is key to driving forward all the strategies and policies we have reviewed in this research. There are many pockets of funding available to local authorities to deliver climate policies. However, the interviews show that the funding is often piecemeal and short-term. Further investigation could help quantify the funding available for tackling each GHG inventory, where further funding might best be directed and methods for administrating funding to ensure that national ambitions can be met.
References
Argyll and Bute Council, 2021. Decarbonisation Plan 2022-2025, s.l.: s.n.
Audit Scotland, 2022. Scotland’s councils’ approach to addressing climate change. s.l.:s.n.
BEIS, 2022. Digest of UK Energy Statistics – Annual data for UK, 2021, London: Crown.
BEIS, 2023. Government conversion factors for company reporting of greenhouse gas emissions. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/collections/government-conversion-factors-for-company-reporting
BEIS, 2023. Green Book supplementary guidance: valuation of energy use and greenhouse gas emissions for appraisal, London: Crown Commerical.
BEIS, 2023. UK Greenhouse Gas Emission Statistics: Frequently Asked Questions, London: Crown Copyright.
Carbon Rewild, 2020. Exploring the Carbon Capture Potential of Different Land Types. [Online]
Available at: https://carbonrewild.com/exploring-the-carbon-capture-potential-of-different-land-types/#:~:text=Wetlands%20are%20globally%20considered%20a,grow%20in%20or%20on%20water
Carbon Store, n.d. Carbon Sequestration. [Online]
Available at: https://carbonstoreuk.com/publications/carbon-sequestration-the-basics/#:~:text=As%20trees%20grow%2C%20the%20process,CO%E2%82%82%20as%20they%20are%20sequestering.
Climate Change Committee, 2022. Progress in reducing emissions in Scotland – 2022 Report to Parliament, s.l.: s.n.
Climate Change Order, 2015. Climate Change (Duties of Public Bodies: Reporting Requirements) (Scotland) Order 2015. s.l.:s.n.
DESNZ, 2023. Average number of trips by purpose and main mode. [Online]
Available at: Average number of trips by purpose and main mode
DESNZ, 2023. UK local authority and regional greenhouse gas emissions national statistics, 2005 to 2021. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/uk-local-authority-and-regional-greenhouse-gas-emissions-national-statistics-2005-to-2021
[Accessed 01 November 2023].
DfT, 2023. NTS0409: Average number of trips and distance travelled by purpose and main mode: England, 2002 onwards, s.l.: Department for Transport.
EcoTree, 2023. How much CO2 does a tree absorb?. [Online]
Available at: https://ecotree.green/en/how-much-co2-does-a-tree-absorb
Environmental Standards Scotland, 2023. An investigation into the effectiveness of the systems in place to support local authorities in their duty to contribute to the delivery of climate change targets, s.l.: s.n.
Glasgow City Council, 2022. Glasgow’s Climate Plan, Glasgow: Glasgow City Council.
Greenhouse Gas Protocol, 2014. Policy and Action Standard: An accounting and reporting standard for estimating the greenhouse gas effects of policies and actions, s.l.: World Resources Institute.
HM Treasury, 2020. Magenta Book: Central Government guidance on evaluation, London: UK Government.
Improvement Service, 2023. Climate Intelligence Service. [Online]
Available at: https://www.improvementservice.org.uk/products-and-services/consultancy-and-support/climate-change/climate-intelligence-service
IPCC, 2006. Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories, s.l.: s.n.
IUCN, 2010. Peatlands and Greenhouse Gas Emissions Reduction in Scotland, s.l.: IUCN.
IUCN, 2023. Peatland Code. [Online]
Available at: https://www.iucn-uk-peatlandprogramme.org/peatland-code-0
Mayor of London, 2023. Inner London Ultra Low Emission Zone Expansion One Year Report. [Online]
Available at: https://www.london.gov.uk/programmes-strategies/environment-and-climate-change/environment-and-climate-change-publications/inner-london-ultra-low-emission-zone-expansion-one-year-report?auHash=IxeIM3L6iJh-CwYvb2wek2UKMCSJvpOqMgtpRAMt5B8
Nature Scot, 2022. LLC3 Urban Vacant and Derelict Land, s.l.: s.n.
NatureScot, 2023. Blanket bog. [Online]
Available at: https://www.nature.scot/landscapes-and-habitats/habitat-types/mountains-heaths-and-bogs/blanket-bog#:~:text=Blanket%20bog%20is%20one%20of,23%25%20of%20our%20land%20area.
Net Zero, Energy and Transport Committee, 2023. The role of local government and its cross-sectoral partners in financing and delivering a net-zero Scotland, Edinburgh: The Scottish Parliament.
Scottish Futures Trust, 2022. Phasing out petrol and diesel cars & vans from public sector fleet, Edinburgh: Scottish Futures Trust.
Scottish Government, 2020. Update to the Climate Change Plan 2018 – 2032: Securing a Green Recovery on a Path to Net Zero, s.l.: s.n.
Scottish Government, 2022a. About public sector employment statistics. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/about-public-sector-employment-statistics/pages/local-government-employment/
Scottish Government, 2022b. Census data – Transport. [Online]
Available at: https://www.scotlandscensus.gov.uk/census-results/at-a-glance/transport/
Scottish Government, 2022. Biodiversity strategy to 2045: tackling the nature emergency, Edinburgh: ScotGov.
Scottish Government, 2022. Public Sector Employment in Scotland Statistics for 2nd Quarter 2022. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/public-sector-employment-scotland-statistics-2nd-quarter-2022/pages/6/
SSN, 2023b. Reporting: Public Bodies Climate Change Duties. [Online]
Available at: https://sustainablescotlandnetwork.org/reports
[Accessed 07 07 2023].
Stirling Council, 2022. Climate and Nature Emergency Plan 2021 – 2045, Stirling: Stirling Council.
Transport & Environment, 2023. Electric HGVs will soon be cheaper overall than diesels in the UK. [Online]
Available at: https://www.transportenvironment.org/discover/electric-hgvs-will-soon-be-cheaper-overall-than-diesels-in-the-uk/
Transport Scotland, 2019a. National Transport Strategy, Edinburgh: s.n.
Transport Scotland, 2019b. Transport and Travel in Scotland 2019: Results from the Scottish Household Survey, Edinburgh: s.n.
Transport Scotland, 2021. Scottish Transport Statistics, Glasgow: ScotGov.
Transport Scotland, 2022. Scottish Transport Statistics (2021) Personal and cross-modal travel, s.l.: Transport Scotland.
UK Woodland Carbon Code, 2021. 3.3 Project carbon sequestration. [Online]
Available at: https://www.woodlandcarboncode.org.uk/standard-and-guidance/3-carbon-sequestration/3-3-project-carbon-sequestration
Williamson, R., Sudmant, A., Gouldson, A. & Brogan, J., 2020. A Net-Zero Carbon Roadmap for Edinburgh, s.l.: PCAN & Edinburgh Climate Commission.
Appendices
Detailed methodology
Selection of climate strategies
The research identified 69 separate climate-related strategies across the 32 local authorities. To determine which were the key strategies to take forward to develop greenhouse gas emission boundaries, we designed five selection criteria to score each of the strategies against the metrics in 3.
We developed a screening matrix that ranked the strategies against five criteria outlined in Table 5 and determined the level of maturity on a scale of 1-3, assessing the level of evidence provided in a climate change strategy as yes / no / partial. We further embellished the five section criteria to ensure the strategies selected covered, as a collective, each of the six greenhouse gas emission inventories
Following presentation of the final policies selected with the steering group, a further consideration was made to ensure that at least one climate strategy from a local authority located outside of Scotland’s central belt was included, to ensure a better geographical spread. This resulted in the addition of Dumfries and Galloway Council to the climate boundary task.
Greenhouse gas emission boundaries and scenario emissions calculations and limitations
It is impractical to measure greenhouse gas emissions impact in real time from every chimney, exhaust, or acre of land use. GHG emission estimates are based on a series of models that estimate emissions from different sources (BEIS, 2023). The calculations performed for each of the scenario emissions is in line with international guidance (IPCC, 2006). We used government conversion factors for company reporting of greenhouse gas emissions (BEIS, 2023), Green Book supplementary guidance on the valuation of energy use and greenhouse gas emissions for appraisal (BEIS, 2023) and from IPCC guidance (IPCC, 2006). Other sources were researched from literature in the absence of standardised sets of emission factors.
The basic equation used to quantify scenario emissions is:
Equation 1: GHG scenario emissions
- Activity data is a variable that is changed by a policy. For example, a policy may look to reduce the number of kilometres travelled by private car.
- Emission factor is a constant that is used to convert the activity data to an impact. In most cases, this will be a GHG emission conversion factor.
- The impact estimate can either form a policy target or metric by which to measure success. Typically, this will be a GHG emission saving but it could also include other benefits (e.g. societal).
An example of this methodology in practice would be estimating GHG emissions from vehicles. The activity data might be the total number of kilometres travelled by that type of vehicle and the emission factor would be the amount of CO2 emitted per kilometre.
Emission factors for energy sources are either dependent on the fuel characteristics (for emissions of CO2) or how the fuel is burned, for example the size and efficiency of equipment used. For other sources, the emission factor can be dependent on a range of parameters, such as feed characteristics for livestock or the chemical reactions taking place for industrial process emissions. Emission factors are typically derived from measurements on several representative sources and the resulting factor applied to all similar sources in the UK.
This approach follows the ‘Tier 1’ approach as set out in IPCC guidance for national greenhouse gas inventories (IPCC, 2006):
|
Uncertainty → |
Tier 1 |
|
Detail and complexity → |
|
Tier 2 |
| ||
|
Tier 3 |
|
Table 5: Quantification of GHG emission impact
An example of how an emission factor was applied to an activity is converting 1 tonne of municipal waste to 1 tonne of recycled waste as part of a landfill reduction strategy. Using emission conversion factors from government conversion factors for company reporting (BEIS, 2023), 1 tonne of waste sent to landfill has a greenhouse gas intensity of 497 kgCO2e/tonne. A tonne of waste recycled has a greenhouse gas intensity of 21 kgCO2e/tonne. Comparisons made between the two indicate a net greenhouse gas benefit of avoiding waste going to landfill.
As noted in Table 5, this is a basic methodological approach, using emissions and conversion factors from representative sources not specific to Scottish local authorities. In some instances, population data has been used as a proxy where local authority specific data was not available. The activity data was also derived from a variety of sources encompassing a range of levels of confidence (see Appendix 13.2). As such there is a high level of uncertainty in the estimated projected emissions reductions.
Sources for emissions equations
As described in the methodology section above, the figures presented in Tables 3, 4, 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16 and Figures 5 and 6 used the basic equation activity data x emission factor. The emissions factors were primarily drawn from Green Book supplementary guidance: valuation of energy use and greenhouse gas emissions for appraisal (BEIS, 2023) and Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories (IPCC, 2006). However, in some cases additional sources were drawn on. The activity data was calculated using a range of sources. The sources are presented in Table 7 below, by GHG inventory category.
Table 7: Sources for emissions calculations by inventory category
Climate change strategy register
|
Organisation |
Strategy |
Summary description (150-250 words) |
|---|---|---|
|
Aberdeen City Council |
Climate Change Plan |
This builds on Aberdeen’s route map to net zero and has many actions to reduce carbon emissions and build resilience. It includes their reported emissions, climate risks and adaptation, targets for buildings, mobility and behaviour change and how these are aligned to the SDGs. Actions include: low carbon/renewable energy installations, zero emission council fleet, upgraded street lighting and nature-based solutions for council owned land. |
|
Aberdeen City Council |
Electric Vehicle Framework |
This framework was released in 2021 and the objectives are to identify how the city’s charging infrastructure should be increased and managed, ensure that the Council’s policies and strategies facilitate a greater uptake of EVs, outline what supporting measures are required, identify the key groups that should be involved in delivering the framework and set out the costs involved in delivering the framework. Actions include to increase EV charge points, identify key groups that should be involved in delivering this framework, ensure the council’s policies and strategies facilitate a greater uptake of EVs. |
|
Aberdeen City Council |
Waste Implementation Plan and Policy |
This strategy sets out the plans to manage waste until 2025, introducing new waste infrastructure and recycling services. The main targets set in this document are; waste growth to be eliminated by 2015, for Aberdeen to be aligned with the Scottish Government’s Zero Waste Plan 2010, to introduce an organic waste collection for all households by 2016, develop facilities within the Aberdeen Area to recover resources and for no more than 5% of household waste to be landfilled by 2025. |
|
Aberdeen City Council |
Local Transport Strategy |
This strategy is broad and covers elements such as maintenance, management, support but have a focus on sustainable development and travel covering areas such as ultra low emission vehicles, school travel and climate change mitigation and adaptation. Objectives in this section include enabling development that reduces the need to travel and minimises the reliance in personal care use and facilitates sustainable travel methods of walking and cycling when land planning. Travel packs should be provided for users of workplaces and schools by developers so there is future planning for sustainable transport use. Aberdeen City has been making improvements to accessibility of EV chargers, developing a comprehensive publicly accessible charging network serving the City and the trunk and strategic road network in partnership with the Energy Saving Trust (Scotland), Transport Scotland and the Office for Low Emission Vehicles. EV charging points are also included in their LDP. |
|
Aberdeen City Council |
Local Housing Strategy |
The vision for this strategy is for the people of Aberdeen to live in good quality sustainable homes, which they can afford and that meet their needs. This strategy covers fuel poverty, climate change, homelessness issues and the condition of the housing stock. The fuel poverty targets are aligned with the national statutory targets set out by ScotGov. The key actions to achieve this include improving energy efficiency across housing, work with residents to obtain the best prices for heat and power, maximise their income and encourage them to reduce their carbon footprint. |
|
Aberdeen City Council |
Hydrogen Strategy and Action Plan |
The overall aim of this strategy is to position Aberdeen as an example for hydrogen technology by utilising transferable expertise form the oil and gas industry and the capacity for renewable energy generation in the NE of Scotland. Overall, this strategy has 7 areas covering; vehicle deployments, renewable hydrogen, refuelling infrastructure, non-transport applications, supply chain/makrey development, community and education and policy and education. Actions to deliver this plan include having a fleet of hydrogen vehicles and expand this to deploying hydrogen buses, to gain support there will be incentives such as free parking. These actions come soff the back of a second refuelling station (Aberdeen City Hydrogen Energy Storage Project). |
|
Angus |
Sustainable Energy and Climate Action Plan |
The climate action plan outlines multiple actions to be delivered across 2-6 years, with 2 actions funded through the Mercury programme. These include clean growth business units and Timmergreens low carbon housing-led regeneration scheme. Any PPIs are yet to be confirmed by the Mercury Programme and partners include Crown Estate Scotland, Scotland Innovation Centre and Zero Waste Scotland among others. There is also an action to deliver a maintenance and repair programme for historic buildings to ensure climate resilience across 6-10 years. The PPI will be the number of historic buildings retrofitted in partnership with Historic Environment Scotland and funding is yet to be confirmed. |
|
Angus |
Transition to Net Zero Action Plan |
The purpose of this Transition to Net Action Plan (2022 to 2030) is to ensure Angus Council meet the 2030 Scottish Government interim emissions reduction target of a 75% reduction in emission, enroute to the Net Zero target by 2045. From the base year of 2012/13 to the end of the financial year 2020/21, Angus Council reduced its emissions by 52.5%. Going forward to 2030, Angus Council must reduce its emissions by 5% each year to meet the 75% reduction target. The key themes identified below, will be used drive emission reductions within key operational areas to meet the 2030 interim emissions reduction target: Leadership, Governance & Procurement Buildings, Energy & Infrastructure Waste, Recycling & Circular Economy Fleet & Business Travel Land Use Adaptation Within each of these key themes, Action Plans containing emission reduction projects and initiatives have been developed. The progress of the Action Plans and Angus Councils Transition to Net Zero will be reviewed and reported annually in November (starting from 2023), alongside the Public Bodies Climate Change Duties Report. |
|
Angus |
Local Development Plan |
Sets out detailed policies and proposals to guide development and investment over a 10 year period. Reviewed every five years and used as a basis for determining planning applications. |
|
Argyll and Bute Council |
Decarbonisation Plan |
This plan is aligned with the Scottish emission reduction targets and covers waste, energy and transport consumption, transport, climate adaptation and offsetting. This includes climate commitments across these streams , the main themes are: Argyll and Bute Council to achieve 75% carbon reduction by 2030 and net zero before 2045, support a low carbon economy, lead by example and develop practices and partnerships that inspire low carbon behaviour and to make ‘Climate Friendly Argyll & Bute’ a recognised brand and underpin behaviours of council staff and customers. Targets includes a new waste strategy to transition not the Landfill Ban by 2025, additional solar installation to council assets and £2.9million external funding to active travel. |
|
Dumfries & Galloway |
Carbon Neutral Strategic Plan |
This policy consists of a wide range of quantified actions all aimed at reducing carbon emissions. The actions span across categories of; Agriculture, council buildings and streets, council transport, domestic, LULUCF, non domestic buildings, transport and waste. All individual actions within these categories have measures against them of first year of full impact of measures savings, 2025 annua savings (tCO2e) and 2030 annual savings (tCO2e). |
|
Dumfries & Galloway |
Active Travel Strategy |
Integrate the work of this strategy with that of the Regional Transport Strategy to facilitate sustainable travel: |
|
Dumfries & Galloway |
New Waste Management Infrastructure |
Proposals for new or extended waste management facilities will be expected to have given full consideration to the following criteria: National and Local waste plans; Sustainable transport principles; Environmental impacts; Site suitability. |
|
Dundee |
Climate Action Plan |
Dundee City Council are leading on four general actions with partners of SSN and Dundee Partnership. With SSN they are looking to adopt an emissions modelling tool to quantify the impact of Climate Action Plan actions, to inform future targets and present data in an interactive way but they do not have funding in place. With Dundee Partnership this local authority are looking to develop and trial a carbon budget for the Council but do not have funding in place. Dundee City Council have funding for the following two actions where they are collaborating with Dundee Partnership; Establish effective governance for the Climate Action Plan in partnership with public, private and community organisations and implement a system for monitoring and reporting progress and Develop the Sustainable Dundee communications strategy to raise awareness, communicate and engage people in the Climate Action Plan to promote prolonged behaviour change. |
|
Dundee |
Waste and Recycling Strategy Action Plan |
This strategy provides an update on actions taken to implement national policy and meet legislative requirements in Dundee and sets out the strategic direction for the Council going forward. It provides a clear action plan to ensure that waste is managed more efficiently, ensuring that every recycling opportunity is taken over the next five years in order to work towards national recycling targets and once again becoming “Scotland’s Recycling City”. |
|
East Ayrshire Council |
Local Development Plan (LDP) 2 |
LDP2 covers the whole of the East Ayrshire Council area and sets out the Council’s planning policy framework for all matters, including the environment. |
|
East Ayrshire Council |
Clean Green East Ayrshire Climate Change Strategy |
Plans on becoming a net zero council by 2030 and wider communities by 2045. |
|
East Ayrshire Council |
Ayrshire Growth Deal |
Signed in November 2020, this marked the culmination of five years’ work by the three Ayrshire councils, partner organisations and Scottish and UK Governments. It aims to deliver a series of projects to foster economic growth whilst addressing sustainability and climate change. |
|
East Ayrshire Council |
Community Renewable Energy (CoRE) |
Working closely with both the private sector and our partners at the University of Strathclyde and centred around the Cumnock area, this initiative will place East Ayrshire at the very centre of innovation and development of new approaches and technologies that are needed locally to make the move to net zero while also supporting the wider climate change aspirations for Scotland and the UK. Comprising a programme of Demonstrator Projects, CoRE has funding of £17m from the UK Government, together with £7.5m allocated by East Ayrshire Council as part of the Ayrshire Growth Deal. The projects will combine academic and commercial expertise, local resources and new and emerging technologies to move the area into a low carbon future. CoRE will include a Centre of Excellence in Cumnock and various developments linked to energy research and generation at different locations around the local area, including former mining sites. |
|
East Dunbartonshire |
Local Development Plan 2 |
The local development plan shows how the council plan to embed sustainability in their planning process. It includes policy around renewable energy and low carbon technologies including decentralised energy centres and heat networks. It also highlights in LDP policy 15 the need to set stricter requirements for carbon reduction via energy efficiency and renewable use. |
|
East Dunbartonshire |
East Dunbartonshire Sustainability and Climate Change Framework (‘SCCF’) & Sustainability and Climate Change Framework Action Plan |
Sets a framework for strategic, cross-Council approach to sustainability, including corporate carbon reduction. The policy explores several areas but fails to move away from council owned assets and fails to explore territorial ones. |
|
East Dunbartonshire |
East Dunbartonshire Council Active Travel Strategy |
Supplements the Local Transport Strategy, seeking to improve opportunities for transport powered by human physical activity as an alternative to motorised transport. It gives a more detailed explanation on the benefits of improved active travel links for ED and shows how they will be implemented. |
|
East Dunbartonshire |
East Dunbartonshire Local Transport Strategy |
Sets out the Council’s transport policy, presents Transport Planning Objectives and co-ordinates future priorities to enhance transport and travel in East Dunbartonshire including enabling a shift to environmentally, socially and economically sustainable transport. It includes are of focus such as |
|
East Lothian |
East Lothian Climate Change Strategy |
East Lothians climate plan outlines how the council want to meet their Net Zero targets. It focuses on council owned emissions and does not mention council wide emissions in much detail. It includes outcomes on the following areas |
|
East Lothian |
East Lothian Transport Strategy |
East Lothian Councils Transport policy identifies Sustainable Transport, Active Travel, Air Quality and resilient transport networks and infrastructure as key focus areas. The polices work to ensure East Lothian is well-connected, healthy and active, where active travel and sustainable transport methods are embedded in local area plans. |
|
East Lothian |
East Lothian Local Development Plan |
East Lothians Local Development Plan and supplementary planning guidance set out a framework to support and encourage low carbon lifestyles and the transition needed to achieve decarbonisation. Planners actively seek provision where necessary of green networks, paths, active travel routes, open space and Sustainable Drainage Systems in new housing developments. The LDP helps to build a picture of how East Lothian see their built environment in the future but fails to mention any quantitative impacts that this may include. |
|
East Lothian |
Active Travel Improvement Plan |
Locally, the Active Travel Improvement Plan (ATIP) is one of four supporting plans to East |
|
East Renfrewshire |
Local Development Plan 2 |
The LDP2 sets out a long-term strategy and a policy framework to guide future development, sustainable and inclusive economic growth and regeneration. Delivering sustainable development across East Renfrewshire is supported through a number of strategic policies. |
|
Edinburgh |
Climate Strategy |
This strategy sets a target for Edinburgh to be net zero and climate resilient by 2030. This strategy is based on six key actions being; improving energy efficiency in homes and buildings, a citywide programme for heat and energy generation and distribution infrastructure, decarbonising public transport, renewing climate adaptation efforts, supporting behaviour change of citizens and growing the green economy. |
|
Edinburgh |
City Plan 2030 |
The City Plan 230 is very specific to Edinburgh’s future developments. This plan includes spatial strategy, policies, proposals within the city and maps to accompany these with an action plan detailing specifics. The plan covers the city until 2032 and aims to plan the city in a way that responds to climate change, social inequalities, and commits to eliminating poverty, ensure residents have enough money to live, have opportunities to work and plentiful learning opportunities. |
|
Edinburgh |
City Mobility Plan |
The main goals of this plan is to ensure that the people, goods and services of Edinburgh are able to travel around the city in a way that is safe, sustainable, efficient and beneficial to all. The main target that the actions in this plan are centred around is for by 2030 to lower the number of kilometres travelled by car in Edinburgh to reduce by 30% aligning with the net zero target for the city of 2030. |
|
Falkirk |
Climate Emergency Update |
The Climate Emergency Strategy will set out how the Council intends to reach their organisational and national net zero target. The strategy includes points on • fleet decarbonise • Decarbonise Council, operational, building stock (will be contained within the Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategy); • reduce emissions from waste; and • support territorial decarbonisation (this will require some level of community engagement. The plan also mentions community owned solar growth, hydrogen innovation and EV charging which would have impacts on territorial emissions, however, does not go into much detail around data and figures. |
|
Fife |
Zero Waste Fife – Resource Strategy and Action Plan 2018-2028 |
In 2011 the Zero Waste Plan was superseded by a new strategy that addressed the obligations and opportunities presented by the Waste (Scotland) Regulations 2012. It outlined further improvements to the kerbside recycling service, and treating unsorted waste to recover accessible recycle and energy. Additional efforts focused on the development of new business avenues for Fife’s two landfill sites to maintain income levels, and the potential development of an arms-length organisation to develop and operate waste treatment infrastructure on behalf of the Council. A further revision of the Zero Waste Strategy in 2015, took account of developments in household waste recycling and the development of waste management infrastructure (anaerobic digestion facility for the treatment of organic waste). It also took account of the Scottish Government recycling targets and the implementation of the biodegradable municipal waste landfill ban in 2021. |
|
Fife |
Climate Fife: Sustainable Energy and Climate Action Plan |
Climate Fife is Fife’s response to the climate emergency. The plan sets out the strategy which underpins Climate Fife, presenting: • a vision for where Fife Council wants to be, and the themes and programmes to show where actions are needed and how this will be supported. |
|
Fife |
Fife Local Transport Strategy |
Fife Local Transport Strategy does a good job at outlining Fife’s transport future and when paired with the climate Fife plan will focus on reducing the need to travel by settlement and development planning and smart technology; promoting active travel, increasing vehicle efficiencies, making public transport more popular and increasing the uptake of ULEV (ultra-low emission vehicles) such as hybrid-electric, full-electric and hydrogen fuel vehicles. |
|
Glasgow |
Glasgow Climate Plan |
The plan aims to address the climate and ecological emergency by: |
|
Glasgow |
City Development Plan |
Glasgow’s City Development plan outlines key areas of interest for planning consent and ensures that Glasgow meets its built environment goals around sustainability. This includes lots of planning consent around buildings and homes which make up most of the document. |
|
Glasgow |
Energy and Carbon Masterplan |
The Energy and Carbon Masterplan (ECM) sets out a vision of a transformed energy economy for Glasgow that is based on low carbon and increasingly de-centralised energy sources that are better able to meet Glasgow’s energy needs and help Glasgow tackle climate change. The ECM builds and extends the current collaborative working arrangements on energy and sustainability in the city through the work of the Sustainable Glasgow initiative and is a key strategy in helping deliver Glasgow’s aspirations to become one of Europe’s most sustainable cities. |
|
Glasgow |
Glasgow City Council Resource and Recycling Strategy |
Glasgow City Council Resource and Recycling Strategy |
|
Glasgow |
Glasgow Transport Strategy |
Glasgow Transport Strategy 2022 looks to deliver and expand on the following objectives: |
|
Highlands |
Carbon CLEVER |
Highland council-led initiative with a target of a carbon neutral Inverness in a low carbon Highlands by 2025 |
|
Inverclyde |
Inverclyde Net Zero Strategy |
The net zero strategy has two targets, a delivery of carbon footprint reductions of 73% between 2021-2030 |
|
Inverclyde |
Inverclyde Waste Strategy |
The Council has implemented a large waste minimisation and recycling programme in terms of both infrastructure and promotion. The programme included kerbside recycling for various types of waste, education on how to reduce and recycle waste and generating energy from waste and circular economy principals. |
|
Midlothian |
Midlothian Climate Change Strategy |
The strategy sets out a clear vision and set of objectives, to highlight what we can, and must do to combat climate change and highlights some of the challenges to achieving this. It focuses on a number of themes including Energy Efficiency; Recycling & Waste; Sustainable Development; Sustainable Travel; Business Processes; Carbon Management; Governance & Management; and Risk. |
|
Midlothian |
Midlothian Active Travel Strategy |
Promotes an Active Travel culture where walking and cycling become the normal choice for everyday journeys. The plan outlines future planning around walking and cycling routes, increasing safety for non-car users and school walking safety. |
|
Moray |
Climate Change Strategy |
This Climate Change Strategy identifies the key areas that the Council will prioritise within available resources to not only help reduce its own impact on the environment, but how it will seek to influence and encourage the wider community. The Strategy and Action plan detail a range of measures that will contribute directly to achieving key outcomes. Details of how the key actions will be delivered, along with timescales, targets and resource requirements, will be further developed and defined, and be subject to regular review. This Climate Change Strategy comprises the council’s response to the national and international priority of tackling climate change and shall be taken account of in all future planning and policy work undertaken by Moray Council. The policy lacks quantitative data. |
|
Moray |
Local Development Plan |
The Moray Local Development Plan (MLDP) 2020 sets how the Council sees the MLDP area developing over the next 10 years and beyond and covers the administrative area of Moray Council, minus the southern part which falls within the Cairngorm National Park which prepares its own LD. Alongside National Planning Framework 4 (NPF4), the MLDP forms the Development Plan for Moray. |
|
North Ayrshire |
Environmental Sustainability and Climate Change Strategy |
The North Ayrshire climate strategy outlines the key focus areas for them to meet net zero. It includes both territorial emissions and council owned in great detail. Some of the key areas include: •Progress and monitor the Net Zero Carbon Roadmap, with milestones to be reported quarterly to the Head of Service and to Cabinet every six months Council’s through the corporate performance monitoring framework |
|
North Ayrshire |
Electric Vehicles Strategy |
The aim of the Council’s Electric Vehicle strategy is to increase the number of EVs being used throughout North Ayrshire by creating a robust network of EV charge points. The strategic objectives of the EV Strategy are as follows: |
|
North Ayrshire |
Zero Waste Strategy |
The Council were 1 of only 9 Scottish local authorities who exceeded the Scottish Government’s Zero Waste Plan target to recycle over 50% of household waste by 2013, and are currently one of the top performing Councils for recycling in Scotland, highlighting the success of the previous strategy due to their previous strategy. This new strategy outlines the following key areas they want to achieve: Recycle 60% of household waste by 2020; • Cease disposal of Biodegradable Waste to landfill by 31st December 2020; • Recycle 70% of all waste by 2025; and • Reduce the waste disposed of to landfill to a maximum of 5% by 2025. The strategy remains focussed on the waste hierarchy, which identifies waste prevention as the most preferred option, followed by re-use, recycling, and treatment/energy recovery, and then disposal as the final option. |
|
North Ayrshire |
Local Development Plan 2 |
The LDP sets out the planning and built environmental context for the council region. The plans are based around buildings, spaces and infrastructure and does not outline how they will be achieved. |
|
North Lanarkshire |
Active Travel Policy |
The strategy includes targets to work towards a council with active travel provisions with different interventions necessary to achieve each strategy aspect. The strategy focuses on fostering collaboration across the council’s remit and suggests exploring feasibility of developing cross boundary links for active travel with other local authorities and partners. |
|
Orkney Islands |
Orkney Sustainable Energy Strategy |
Developed in partnership with Orkney Islands Council, Highlands and Islands Enterprise (HIE), Community Energy Scotland and the OREF (Orkney Renewable Energy Forum) working to reduce island’s dependency on fossil fuels. |
|
Orkney Islands |
Sustainable & Active Travel |
Contribute to the health and wellbeing of the people of Orkney. |
|
Perth & Kinross |
Climate Change Strategy and Action Plan |
The strategy covers: transport, buildings and energy, business and industry, waste and circular economy, land use, education and engagement, climate resilience. Within each theme there are quantified targets and 4-5 sub-themes with KPIs attached to measure progress against a baseline value. Each category includes a exemplar case study of how this policy aspect will be progressed. |
|
Renfrewshire |
Plan for Net Zero (Phase 2) |
The plan has five key actions: 1. detailed phase plan to 2030, 2. quantified delivery plans, 3. verifying, adopting, and updating emissions modelling tool, 4. developing a carbon budget for Renfrewshire council, 5. developing an adaptation plan for Renfrewshire. The policy categories cover: clean energy, sustainable transport, circular economy, connected communities and resilient place. |
|
Scottish Borders |
Climate Change Route Map |
The climate change route map emphasises collaboration, talking about climate risks/vulnerabilities and undertaking strategic environmental assessments. The categories covered are: resilience, transport use, nature based solutions, energy, waste management, adaptation, behaviour change. The policy document outlines progress to date up to 2021. |
|
Shetland Islands |
Shetland’s Climate Change Strategy |
Shetland Partnerships overarching framework of Shetland’s strategic plan to address climate change. Content currently under development by Shetland Partnership Climate Change Steering Group. |
|
South Ayrshire |
Sustainable Development & Climate Change Framework |
The sustainability strategy has three key themes: 1. Sustainable Council: reducing the corporate GHG emissions and improving the wider environment, 2. Sustainable environment: protecting and enhancing the environment while improving the health, well-being and livelihoods of local communities, and 3. Sustainable Community: supporting local communities to limit GHG emissions, adapt to climate change impacts and improve their local environment. |
|
South Lanarkshire |
Sustainable Development and Climate Change Strategy 2 |
The policy builds upon their 2017 to 2022 climate change strategy and covers health and wellbeing, climate justice, transport, energy, greenspaces, community, waste, protect environment, nature-based solutions, green economy, circular economy, and business transition. Each category has key actions listed out, with progress to-date outlined within document and 5 year improvement actions specified to reach each aim. |
|
Stirling |
Climate and Nature Emergency Plan |
The strategy covers: energy use and generation, transport, resource efficiency, nature and biodiversity, and climate adaptation. It lists ~5 key priorities for each objective, outlines progress to date, includes final targets and interim targets and measures of progression. The national ScotGov targets have been translated to be applicable to Stirling Council area and Stirling Council specifically, and they have used 2005 as their GHG emission base year from which to measure any progress. The policy also notes which other council policies are required to reach the objectives (e.g., the local development plan is integral to advance the objectives listed in the energy use and generation section of the policy document. |
|
West Dunbartonshire |
Climate Change Action Plan |
This plan implements our Climate Change Strategy through a series of high-level actions for the short, medium and long term, setting out the need for action and a high-level framework. |
|
West Dunbartonshire |
Climate Change Strategy |
An overarching Strategy setting the foundation for a plan of action for 2021-22 and beyond and is a response to Scotland’s Climate Emergency and 2045 net zero carbon reduction target. |
|
West Dunbartonshire |
The West Dunbartonshire Energy Centre |
Scotland’s largest water source heat pump installation to date to help Council transit towards net zero. £20 million project, of which the £6.1 million came from Low Carbon Infrastructure Transition Programme |
|
West Dunbartonshire |
Local Development Plan 2 (LDP2) |
Seeks to ensure that new development in West Dunbartonshire is aligned with the goal to achieve net zero through net zero carbon buildings, clean energy generation, green infrastructure, etc. |
|
West Dunbartonshire |
WDC Local Housing Strategy |
Details how the Council and stakeholders will address and support housing, including fuel poverty, etc. |
|
West Lothian |
Climate Change Strategy |
This Strategy aims to ensure that activities to tackle climate change to contribute to the achievement of the outcomes identified within the council’s Corporate Plan (2018-2023) and the West Lothian Local Outcomes Improvement Plan (LOIP) (2013-23). |
|
West Lothian |
Adaptation Action Plan |
The Action Plan identifies seven adaptation outcomes which the council will work towards through implementing over 70 actions over the next 6 years (2022 -28). |
|
West Lothian |
West Lothian Local Outcomes Improvement Plan (LOIP) |
The mechanism by which Community Planning Partnerships deliver improved outcomes for their communities. They are based on a clear understanding of local needs and reflect agreed local priorities, as well as the National Performance Framework developed by the Scottish Government. |
Quantifying impact
In the development of the emission boundaries, we applied two measures of assessing impact: Likelihood and Magnitude.
Likelihood
Likelihood is defined as the probability or chance that a given policy will achieve its intended impact or target. We have applied IPCC Guidance (IPCC, 2006) to determine likelihood as outlined in Table 8.
|
Likelihood |
Description |
Probability |
|
Very Likely |
Reason to believe the effect will happen (or did happen) because of the policy. |
90-100% |
|
Likely |
Reason to believe the effect will probably happen (or probably happened) because of the policy. |
66-90% |
|
Possible |
Reason to believe the effect may or may not happen (or may or may not have happened) because of the policy. About as likely as not. Cases where the likelihood is unknown or cannot be determined should be considered possible. |
33-66% |
|
Unlikely |
Reason to believe the effect probably will not happen (or probably did not happen) as a result of the policy. |
10-33% |
|
Very unlikely |
Reason to believe the effect will not happen (or did not happen) because of the policy. |
0-10% |
There are several considerations made when assessing the likelihood, a policy has in achieving its intended outcomes.
- Sphere of control: a measure of how much control a local authority has over whether action is taken against a policy. This ranges on a scale from absolute where a policy is enacted through legislation, through to voluntary where a policy results in stakeholders making a pledge.
- Capacity and capability: whether the local authority have the resources it needs to actively measure and enforce the provisions within a policy once it is active.
- Timescale: the impacts of policies may require consistent action taken over several years, or even decades. This can prove difficult as socioeconomic needs shift over time meaning that policies may also need to adapt over time, changing impacts and targets.
An example of a policy that is ‘very likely’ to meet its intended targets is a Low Emission Zone whereby a local authority has absolute ability to determine the classification of vehicles that enter its zone. Compare this to a policy improving active travel provision whereby the intended benefits are somewhat dependent on stakeholders enacting the policy out of their own free-will.
Magnitude
Magnitude is a simple measure of a policy’s potential impact on an inventory’s emissions. Following IPCC guidance (IPCC, 2006), we have set the following impact boundaries to rank the valued policies:
|
Magnitude |
Description |
Impact |
|---|---|---|
|
Major |
The effect significantly influences the effectiveness of the policy or action. The change in GHG emissions or removals is likely to be significant in size. |
>10% |
|
Moderate |
The effect influences the effectiveness of the policy or action. The change in GHG emissions or removals could be significant in size. |
1-10% |
|
Minor |
The effect is inconsequential to the effectiveness of the policy or action. The change in GHG emissions or removals is insignificant in size. |
<1% |
Policy descriptions
Table 10: Descriptions of 13 climate policies collated from six chosen local authorities for valuation, including example targets and KPIs set by the local authorities
|
Inventory / Policy |
Description |
Example targets and KPIs from local authorities |
|---|---|---|
|
Agriculture | ||
|
Changes to Agricultural Practices |
Changes in agricultural methods to reduce the use of nitrogen fertilisers, changes in animal feeds, reduced intensity of livestock production and improvements in waste management. |
This policy consists of a wide range of quantified actions all aimed at reducing carbon emissions. All individual actions within these categories have measures against them of first year of full impact of measures savings, 2025 annual savings (tCO2e) and 2030 annual savings (tCO2e). |
|
LULUCF | ||
|
Greening of derelict land |
Identify and utilise Vacant and Derelict Land for greening and rewilding in combination with renewable energy generation measures and reducing flood risk. |
% VDL used for renewable energy generation |
|
Peatland restoration |
Increase investment in peatland restoration in the region to enhance biodiversity and increase capacity for carbon sequestration. |
Percentage emissions reduction. 20,000 hectares restored per annum 250,000 hectares restored by 2030 |
|
Reforestation (1 million new trees per local authority) |
Protecting and enhancing existing ecosystems and biodiversity through reforestation. |
Plant 80,000 new trees by 2023; 360,000 by 2030 and 1,000,000 by 2045. |
|
Transport | ||
|
Active travel |
Encouraging walking and cycling for shorter journeys rather than the use of personal cars. |
Many journeys are relatively short and could easily be undertaken by walking or cycling. In 2017 |
|
Homeworking |
Promote homeworking and videoconferencing to reduce traffic congestion, as part of a range of effective working practices. |
Number of staff working remotely. |
|
Low Emission Zone |
Reduce emissions from transport in city centres and improving air quality by expanding low emissions zone. |
Percentage transport emissions |
|
Public transport |
Work with transport stakeholders in the city to support rapid transition to cleaner public transport as part of the City’s Low Emissions Zone. |
% change in PM 10 at each monitoring location, averaged over a three-year period. |
|
Fleet vehicles |
Deliver rapid transition of council’s fleet to electric, supporting the city’s existing fleet strategy’s target of becoming low carbon by 2030. |
Share of low emission vehicles in the overall modal split – % change |
|
Council Business Travel |
Replace modes of council business transport with low emission alternatives. |
45% reduction in transport emissions by 2030 against a 4,450tCO2 baseline. |
|
LEV Taxi Licences |
Make it compulsory for taxi licences granted depending on whether the mode of transport is a low emissions vehicle. |
100% of new taxi licences that are EV by 2032 |
|
Waste | ||
|
Waste Reduction Strategy |
Detailing how the region will help reduce, reuse and recycle, detailing corporate standards, targets and staff guidance for our waste activities, including improving infrastructure. |
By 2025 – 95% reduction of landfill waste (as part of a suite of other initiatives) |
|
Council Waste Reduction |
Reduce the amount of council-generated waste going to landfill. |
70% reduction of waste going to land fill by 2030 against a 892t 2019 baseline |
Valuing greenhouse gas emissions
Table 21: Total territorial greenhouse gas emissions (ktCO2e), by inventory (BEIS, 2022)
|
Local authority |
Territorial greenhouse gas emissions (ktCO2e) | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Agriculture |
Buildings |
Industry |
LULUCF |
Transport |
Waste |
Total | |
|
Aberdeen City |
32 |
585 |
236 |
31 |
305 |
30 |
1,218 |
|
Aberdeenshire |
1,083 |
579 |
244 |
357 |
613 |
117 |
2,993 |
|
Angus |
264 |
249 |
117 |
389 |
235 |
9 |
1,263 |
|
Argyll and Bute |
297 |
198 |
85 |
-532 |
186 |
23 |
257 |
|
City of Edinburgh |
37 |
1,203 |
213 |
70 |
640 |
73 |
2,236 |
|
Clackmannanshire |
24 |
103 |
290 |
24 |
66 |
5 |
512 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
1,555 |
350 |
185 |
-239 |
571 |
17 |
2,439 |
|
Dundee City |
5 |
353 |
63 |
23 |
184 |
14 |
642 |
|
East Ayrshire |
330 |
238 |
78 |
-31 |
229 |
11 |
855 |
|
East Dunbartonshire |
27 |
237 |
28 |
20 |
113 |
40 |
465 |
|
East Lothian |
112 |
217 |
552 |
194 |
210 |
29 |
1,313 |
|
East Renfrewshire |
43 |
196 |
9 |
23 |
147 |
3 |
421 |
|
Falkirk |
61 |
308 |
1,454 |
79 |
327 |
68 |
2,298 |
|
Fife |
308 |
741 |
1,143 |
345 |
584 |
138 |
3,260 |
|
Glasgow City |
13 |
1,293 |
380 |
68 |
761 |
196 |
2,710 |
|
Highland |
638 |
526 |
458 |
110 |
598 |
80 |
2,410 |
|
Inverclyde |
31 |
151 |
46 |
3 |
106 |
3 |
340 |
|
Midlothian |
70 |
189 |
48 |
52 |
137 |
18 |
513 |
|
Moray |
261 |
228 |
313 |
-167 |
162 |
37 |
834 |
|
Na h-Eileanan Siar |
81 |
66 |
22 |
951 |
42 |
22 |
1,184 |
|
North Ayrshire |
135 |
258 |
349 |
-32 |
151 |
30 |
891 |
|
North Lanarkshire |
79 |
636 |
313 |
90 |
736 |
78 |
1,932 |
|
Orkney Islands |
239 |
44 |
14 |
43 |
29 |
4 |
373 |
|
Perth and Kinross |
408 |
353 |
89 |
-140 |
515 |
81 |
1,307 |
|
Renfrewshire |
50 |
370 |
120 |
35 |
301 |
27 |
903 |
|
Scottish Borders |
767 |
251 |
103 |
-103 |
261 |
13 |
1,292 |
|
Shetland Islands |
107 |
42 |
34 |
572 |
43 |
4 |
801 |
|
South Ayrshire |
296 |
239 |
168 |
-55 |
209 |
10 |
867 |
|
South Lanarkshire |
341 |
652 |
208 |
-27 |
666 |
33 |
1,874 |
|
Stirling |
182 |
204 |
178 |
-150 |
249 |
45 |
709 |
|
West Dunbartonshire |
21 |
179 |
46 |
9 |
127 |
7 |
390 |
|
West Lothian |
89 |
362 |
211 |
48 |
373 |
67 |
1,150 |
|
Total |
7,985 |
11,600 |
7,798 |
2,059 |
9,878 |
1,333 |
40,653 |
Table 32: Estimated potential impact on greenhouse gas emissions (ktCO2e) from Agriculture and LULUCF policies
|
Local authority |
Agriculture |
LULUCF | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Total Agriculture emissions |
Changes to Agricultural Practices |
Total policy impact |
Total LULUCF emissions |
Greening of derelict land |
Peatland restoration |
Reforestation (1 million new trees per LA) |
Total policy impact | |
|
Aberdeen City |
32 |
-6 |
-6 |
31 |
-7 |
0 |
-25 |
-32 |
|
Aberdeenshire |
1,083 |
-193 |
-193 |
357 |
-15 |
-67 |
-25 |
-107 |
|
Angus |
264 |
-47 |
-47 |
389 |
-27 |
-1 |
-25 |
-52 |
|
Argyll and Bute |
297 |
-53 |
-53 |
-532 |
-11 |
-189 |
-25 |
-225 |
|
City of Edinburgh |
37 |
-7 |
-7 |
70 |
-12 |
-1 |
-25 |
-37 |
|
Clackmannanshire |
24 |
-5 |
-5 |
24 |
-60 |
-70 |
-25 |
-155 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
1,555 |
-275 |
-275 |
-239 |
-34 |
0 |
-25 |
-59 |
|
Dundee City |
5 |
-1 |
-1 |
23 |
-448 |
-12 |
-25 |
-485 |
|
East Ayrshire |
330 |
-58 |
-58 |
-31 |
-14 |
0 |
-25 |
-39 |
|
East Dunbartonshire |
27 |
-5 |
-5 |
20 |
-16 |
0 |
-25 |
-41 |
|
East Lothian |
112 |
-20 |
-20 |
194 |
-10 |
-2 |
-25 |
-36 |
|
East Renfrewshire |
43 |
-8 |
-8 |
23 |
-33 |
0 |
-25 |
-58 |
|
Falkirk |
61 |
-11 |
-11 |
79 |
-53 |
-37 |
-25 |
-115 |
|
Fife |
308 |
-50 |
-50 |
345 |
-122 |
-3 |
-25 |
-150 |
|
Glasgow City |
13 |
-2 |
-2 |
68 |
-199 |
-1 |
-25 |
-225 |
|
Highland |
638 |
-113 |
-113 |
110 |
-250 |
-1,214 |
-25 |
-1,489 |
|
Inverclyde |
31 |
-4 |
-4 |
3 |
-29 |
-1 |
-25 |
-55 |
|
Midlothian |
70 |
-12 |
-12 |
52 |
-22 |
-36 |
-25 |
-83 |
|
Moray |
261 |
-47 |
-47 |
-167 |
-3 |
-28 |
-25 |
-56 |
|
Na h-Eileanan Siar |
81 |
-15 |
-15 |
951 |
-2 |
-434 |
-25 |
-461 |
|
North Ayrshire |
135 |
-24 |
-24 |
-32 |
-249 |
-7 |
-25 |
-280 |
|
North Lanarkshire |
79 |
-14 |
-14 |
90 |
-239 |
-49 |
-25 |
-313 |
|
Orkney Islands |
239 |
-42 |
-42 |
43 |
-7 |
-149 |
-25 |
-181 |
|
Perth and Kinross |
408 |
-74 |
-74 |
-140 |
-8 |
-14 |
-25 |
-47 |
|
Renfrewshire |
50 |
-11 |
-11 |
35 |
-51 |
-1 |
-25 |
-76 |
|
Scottish Borders |
767 |
-133 |
-133 |
-103 |
-13 |
-13 |
-25 |
-51 |
|
Shetland Islands |
107 |
-18 |
-18 |
572 |
-1 |
-134 |
-25 |
-160 |
|
South Ayrshire |
296 |
-53 |
-53 |
-55 |
-20 |
-3 |
-25 |
-48 |
|
South Lanarkshire |
341 |
-61 |
-61 |
-27 |
-79 |
-48 |
-25 |
-152 |
|
Stirling |
182 |
-32 |
-32 |
-150 |
-28 |
-11 |
-25 |
-63 |
|
West Dunbartonshire |
21 |
-4 |
-4 |
9 |
-31 |
-1 |
-25 |
-56 |
|
West Lothian |
89 |
-16 |
-16 |
48 |
-77 |
-4 |
-25 |
-106 |
|
Total |
7,985 |
-1,416 |
-1,416 |
2,059 |
-2,167 |
-2,530 |
-800 |
-5,497 |
Table 13: Estimated impact on greenhouse gas emissions (ktCO2e) from Transport policies
|
Local authority |
Transport | ||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Total Transport emissions |
Active travel |
Homeworking |
Low Emission Zone |
Public transport |
Fleet vehicles |
Council Business Travel |
LEV Taxi Licences |
Total | |
|
Aberdeen City |
305 |
-33 |
-0.01 |
-5 |
-7 |
-5 |
-10 |
-3 |
-99 |
|
Aberdeenshire |
613 |
-38 |
-0.01 |
-6 |
-8 |
-6 |
-11 |
-2 |
-112 |
|
Angus |
235 |
-17 |
-0.01 |
-3 |
-4 |
-3 |
-5 |
-1 |
-49 |
|
Argyll and Bute |
186 |
-12 |
0.00 |
-2 |
-3 |
-2 |
-4 |
-1 |
-37 |
|
City of Edinburgh |
640 |
-76 |
-0.03 |
-12 |
-16 |
-12 |
-22 |
0 |
-221 |
|
Clackmannanshire |
66 |
-7 |
0.00 |
-1 |
-2 |
-1 |
-2 |
-1 |
-22 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
571 |
-22 |
-0.01 |
-3 |
-5 |
-3 |
-6 |
-2 |
-65 |
|
Dundee City |
184 |
-21 |
-0.01 |
-3 |
-5 |
-3 |
-6 |
-1 |
-63 |
|
East Ayrshire |
229 |
-18 |
-0.01 |
-3 |
-4 |
-3 |
-5 |
-2 |
-53 |
|
East Dunbartonshire |
113 |
-16 |
-0.01 |
-3 |
-3 |
-2 |
-5 |
-1 |
-46 |
|
East Lothian |
210 |
-16 |
-0.01 |
-3 |
-3 |
-2 |
-5 |
-1 |
-47 |
|
East Renfrewshire |
147 |
-14 |
-0.01 |
-2 |
-3 |
-2 |
-4 |
-12 |
-52 |
|
Falkirk |
327 |
-23 |
-0.01 |
-4 |
-5 |
-4 |
-7 |
0 |
-68 |
|
Fife |
584 |
-54 |
-0.02 |
-9 |
-12 |
-9 |
-16 |
-2 |
-159 |
|
Glasgow City |
761 |
-92 |
-0.04 |
-15 |
-20 |
-14 |
-27 |
-2 |
-268 |
|
Highland |
598 |
-34 |
-0.01 |
-6 |
-7 |
-5 |
-10 |
-17 |
-116 |
|
Inverclyde |
106 |
-11 |
0.00 |
-2 |
-2 |
-2 |
-3 |
-2 |
-35 |
|
Midlothian |
137 |
-14 |
-0.01 |
-2 |
-3 |
-2 |
-4 |
-1 |
-40 |
|
Moray |
162 |
-14 |
-0.01 |
-2 |
-3 |
-2 |
-4 |
-1 |
-41 |
|
Na h-Eileanan Siar |
42 |
-4 |
0.00 |
-1 |
-1 |
-1 |
-1 |
-1 |
-12 |
|
North Ayrshire |
151 |
-19 |
-0.01 |
-3 |
-4 |
-3 |
-6 |
-1 |
-57 |
|
North Lanarkshire |
736 |
-49 |
-0.02 |
-8 |
-11 |
-8 |
-15 |
-6 |
-149 |
|
Orkney Islands |
29 |
-3 |
0.00 |
-1 |
-1 |
-1 |
-1 |
0 |
-10 |
|
Perth and Kinross |
515 |
-22 |
-0.01 |
-4 |
-5 |
-3 |
-7 |
-1 |
-65 |
|
Renfrewshire |
301 |
-26 |
-0.01 |
-4 |
-6 |
-4 |
-8 |
-4 |
-79 |
|
Scottish Borders |
261 |
-17 |
-0.01 |
-3 |
-4 |
-3 |
-5 |
-1 |
-49 |
|
Shetland Islands |
43 |
-3 |
0.00 |
-1 |
-1 |
-1 |
-1 |
0 |
-10 |
|
South Ayrshire |
209 |
-16 |
-0.01 |
-3 |
-4 |
-3 |
-5 |
-1 |
-48 |
|
South Lanarkshire |
666 |
-47 |
-0.02 |
-8 |
-10 |
-7 |
-14 |
-6 |
-141 |
|
Stirling |
249 |
-14 |
-0.01 |
-2 |
-3 |
-2 |
-4 |
-1 |
-40 |
|
West Dunbartonshire |
127 |
-13 |
0.00 |
-2 |
-3 |
-2 |
-4 |
-1 |
-38 |
|
West Lothian |
373 |
-27 |
-0.01 |
-4 |
-6 |
-4 |
-8 |
-2 |
-79 |
|
Total |
9,878 |
-793 |
-0.31 |
-129 |
-169 |
-124 |
-235 |
-76 |
-1,527 |
Table 44: Estimated potential impact on greenhouse gas emissions (ktCO2e) from Waste policies
|
Local authority |
Waste | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Total Waste emissions |
Waste Reduction Strategy |
Council Waste Reduction |
Total | |
|
Aberdeen City |
30 |
-16 |
-0.86 |
-17 |
|
Aberdeenshire |
117 |
-27 |
-0.98 |
-28 |
|
Angus |
9 |
-8 |
-0.44 |
-8 |
|
Argyll and Bute |
23 |
-11 |
-0.33 |
-12 |
|
City of Edinburgh |
73 |
-47 |
-1.96 |
-49 |
|
Clackmannanshire |
5 |
-4 |
-0.20 |
-4 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
17 |
-22 |
-0.57 |
-23 |
|
Dundee City |
14 |
-16 |
-0.56 |
-17 |
|
East Ayrshire |
11 |
-10 |
-0.46 |
-10 |
|
East Dunbartonshire |
40 |
-9 |
-0.41 |
-9 |
|
East Lothian |
29 |
-8 |
-0.41 |
-9 |
|
East Renfrewshire |
3 |
-5 |
-0.36 |
-5 |
|
Falkirk |
68 |
-12 |
-0.61 |
-13 |
|
Fife |
138 |
-38 |
-1.41 |
-39 |
|
Glasgow City |
196 |
-78 |
-2.38 |
-81 |
|
Highland |
80 |
-29 |
-0.90 |
-30 |
|
Inverclyde |
3 |
-5 |
-0.29 |
-5 |
|
Midlothian |
18 |
-8 |
-0.35 |
-8 |
|
Moray |
37 |
-7 |
-0.36 |
-7 |
|
Na h-Eileanan Siar |
22 |
-5 |
-0.10 |
-5 |
|
North Ayrshire |
30 |
-10 |
-0.51 |
-10 |
|
North Lanarkshire |
78 |
-35 |
-1.29 |
-37 |
|
Orkney Islands |
4 |
-4 |
-0.08 |
-4 |
|
Perth and Kinross |
81 |
-13 |
-0.58 |
-14 |
|
Renfrewshire |
27 |
-14 |
-0.68 |
-15 |
|
Scottish Borders |
13 |
-10 |
-0.44 |
-11 |
|
Shetland Islands |
4 |
-3 |
-0.09 |
-3 |
|
South Ayrshire |
10 |
-8 |
-0.43 |
-9 |
|
South Lanarkshire |
33 |
-30 |
-1.22 |
-32 |
|
Stirling |
45 |
-7 |
-0.35 |
-7 |
|
West Dunbartonshire |
7 |
-9 |
-0.33 |
-9 |
|
West Lothian |
67 |
-12 |
-0.69 |
-12 |
|
Total |
1,333 |
-520 |
-20.62 |
-541 |
Table 15: Estimated potential impact on total territorial greenhouse gas emissions (ktCO2e), by inventory
|
|
Territorial greenhouse gas emissions post policy (ktCO2e) | ||||||
|
Local authority | |||||||
|
Agriculture |
Buildings |
Industry |
LULUCF |
Transport |
Waste |
Total | |
|
Aberdeen City |
25 |
585 |
236 |
-1 |
241 |
13 |
1,100 |
|
Aberdeenshire |
889 |
579 |
244 |
250 |
541 |
89 |
2,593 |
|
Angus |
217 |
249 |
117 |
337 |
203 |
0 |
1,124 |
|
Argyll and Bute |
245 |
198 |
85 |
-757 |
162 |
11 |
-57 |
|
City of Edinburgh |
30 |
1,203 |
213 |
33 |
501 |
24 |
2,003 |
|
Clackmannanshire |
19 |
103 |
290 |
-131 |
51 |
0 |
334 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
1,280 |
350 |
185 |
-298 |
529 |
-5 |
2,041 |
|
Dundee City |
4 |
353 |
63 |
-462 |
144 |
-2 |
100 |
|
East Ayrshire |
272 |
238 |
78 |
-70 |
195 |
0 |
714 |
|
East Dunbartonshire |
22 |
237 |
28 |
-22 |
84 |
31 |
380 |
|
East Lothian |
92 |
217 |
552 |
157 |
179 |
20 |
1,218 |
|
East Renfrewshire |
35 |
196 |
9 |
-35 |
109 |
-2 |
312 |
|
Falkirk |
50 |
308 |
1,454 |
-36 |
284 |
56 |
2,115 |
|
Fife |
258 |
741 |
1,143 |
195 |
483 |
99 |
2,919 |
|
Glasgow City |
11 |
1,293 |
380 |
-157 |
591 |
115 |
2,232 |
|
Highland |
526 |
526 |
458 |
-1,379 |
518 |
50 |
699 |
|
Inverclyde |
27 |
151 |
46 |
-53 |
83 |
-2 |
253 |
|
Midlothian |
57 |
189 |
48 |
-31 |
112 |
10 |
385 |
|
Moray |
214 |
228 |
313 |
-223 |
136 |
29 |
699 |
|
Na h-Eileanan Siar |
66 |
66 |
22 |
490 |
35 |
17 |
696 |
|
North Ayrshire |
111 |
258 |
349 |
-312 |
114 |
20 |
540 |
|
North Lanarkshire |
65 |
636 |
313 |
-223 |
639 |
41 |
1,471 |
|
Orkney Islands |
197 |
44 |
14 |
-138 |
22 |
0 |
139 |
|
Perth and Kinross |
334 |
353 |
89 |
-187 |
474 |
68 |
1,130 |
|
Renfrewshire |
38 |
370 |
120 |
-41 |
249 |
12 |
749 |
|
Scottish Borders |
634 |
251 |
103 |
-154 |
230 |
2 |
1,065 |
|
Shetland Islands |
89 |
42 |
34 |
412 |
37 |
0 |
614 |
|
South Ayrshire |
242 |
239 |
168 |
-103 |
178 |
2 |
727 |
|
South Lanarkshire |
280 |
652 |
208 |
-178 |
575 |
2 |
1,538 |
|
Stirling |
150 |
204 |
178 |
-213 |
224 |
38 |
580 |
|
West Dunbartonshire |
17 |
179 |
46 |
-47 |
102 |
-2 |
296 |
|
West Lothian |
73 |
362 |
211 |
-58 |
323 |
55 |
965 |
|
Total |
6,570 |
11,600 |
7,798 |
-3,438 |
8,351 |
792 |
31,672 |
Table 56: Percentage change in territorial greenhouse gas emissions (ktCO2e) from implementing policies
|
|
Percentage change in territorial greenhouse gas emissions | ||||||
|
Local authority | |||||||
|
Agriculture |
Buildings |
Industry |
LULUCF |
Transport |
Waste |
Total | |
|
Aberdeen City |
-20.0% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-101.9% |
-20.8% |
-56.1% |
-9.7% |
|
Aberdeenshire |
-17.9% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-30.1% |
-11.7% |
-23.8% |
-13.4% |
|
Angus |
-17.8% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-13.5% |
-13.4% |
-94.4% |
-11.0% |
|
Argyll and Bute |
-17.7% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
42.3% |
-12.8% |
-51.3% |
-122.0% |
|
City of Edinburgh |
-18.3% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-53.5% |
-21.7% |
-66.9% |
-10.4% |
|
Clackmannanshire |
-19.6% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-637.1% |
-22.1% |
-92.1% |
-34.9% |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
-17.7% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
24.6% |
-7.3% |
-130.4% |
-16.3% |
|
Dundee City |
-22.3% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-2113.7% |
-21.7% |
-117.2% |
-84.5% |
|
East Ayrshire |
-17.5% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
126.5% |
-15.0% |
-95.5% |
-16.6% |
|
East Dunbartonshire |
-18.3% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-211.1% |
-26.1% |
-22.8% |
-18.3% |
|
East Lothian |
-18.3% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-18.6% |
-14.5% |
-29.8% |
-7.3% |
|
East Renfrewshire |
-18.5% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-255.7% |
-25.6% |
-175.4% |
-25.9% |
|
Falkirk |
-18.2% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-146.3% |
-13.1% |
-18.9% |
-7.9% |
|
Fife |
-16.3% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-43.5% |
-17.3% |
-28.4% |
-10.4% |
|
Glasgow City |
-16.7% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-330.9% |
-22.4% |
-41.3% |
-17.7% |
|
Highland |
-17.7% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-1354.6% |
-13.3% |
-37.4% |
-71.0% |
|
Inverclyde |
-11.7% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-2100.5% |
-21.6% |
-158.5% |
-25.5% |
|
Midlothian |
-17.6% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-160.3% |
-18.8% |
-44.6% |
-25.1% |
|
Moray |
-17.8% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
33.3% |
-16.0% |
-19.9% |
-16.3% |
|
Na h-Eileanan Siar |
-18.0% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-48.5% |
-18.2% |
-21.2% |
-41.2% |
|
North Ayrshire |
-17.9% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
876.1% |
-24.3% |
-33.5% |
-39.4% |
|
North Lanarkshire |
-17.4% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-346.8% |
-13.1% |
-47.1% |
-23.8% |
|
Orkney Islands |
-17.7% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-423.4% |
-21.4% |
-93.4% |
-62.6% |
|
Perth and Kinross |
-18.1% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
33.6% |
-8.1% |
-16.9% |
-13.5% |
|
Renfrewshire |
-22.9% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-216.1% |
-17.1% |
-55.8% |
-17.1% |
|
Scottish Borders |
-17.3% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
49.7% |
-12.1% |
-84.7% |
-17.5% |
|
Shetland Islands |
-16.8% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-28.0% |
-15.0% |
-91.2% |
-23.4% |
|
South Ayrshire |
-18.0% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
87.0% |
-14.7% |
-84.2% |
-16.2% |
|
South Lanarkshire |
-18.0% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
570.8% |
-13.7% |
-94.9% |
-17.9% |
|
Stirling |
-17.8% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
42.3% |
-10.2% |
-16.6% |
-18.1% |
|
West Dunbartonshire |
-18.0% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-613.8% |
-19.4% |
-121.7% |
-24.1% |
|
West Lothian |
-18.4% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-222.0% |
-13.6% |
-18.5% |
-16.1% |
|
Total |
-17.7% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
-266.9% |
-15.5% |
-40.6% |
-22.1% |
© Published by Turner & Townsend, 2023 on behalf of ClimateXChange. All rights reserved.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions, or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
Active transport typically means a human-powered form of transport such as walking or cycling. ↑
For example, a policy might be to increase the number of journeys under 5km completed by active travel. ↑
ArcGIS is a family of client, server, and online geographic information system (GIS) that enables users to create, analyse, visualise, and share spatial data such as maps. ↑
December 2023
DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/3885
Executive summary
The Carbon Neutral Islands project is a Scottish Government commitment to support six Scottish islands (Islay, Raasay, Hoy, Yell, Barra and Great Cumbrae) to become carbon neutral by 2040.
We present evidence on the readiness status of island businesses to meet this challenge. Our focus is on the skills available within business to support decarbonisation, skills gaps and future requirements. Our research included a literature review along with online surveys and in-person interviews with key stakeholders on the islands.
Findings
- While most of the businesses interviewed across the six islands are willing and ready to engage with the Carbon Neutral Islands project, there is a lack of knowledge and skills.
- A minority of businesses actively track their carbon footprints. However, some businesses who are developing a strategic plan for decarbonisation do not always use their carbon footprints to guide their strategies.
- Time and cost are key barriers to businesses in tracking carbon footprints and developing a decarbonisation strategy. While most agreed that tracking carbon footprints and developing plans are important, half or more of the businesses in the renewable energy sector, agriculture, housing and trades sectors did not do this.
- Participants have a general understanding about carbon use in their businesses and a general awareness of how to measure it via calculator tools. However, most participants were less confident in their technical knowledge and how to implement changes. There are challenges around finding footprint calculators relevant to individual island-based businesses and guidance for plan development.
- There is a general lack of knowledge of the skills that are required for decarbonising businesses and how to develop these skills. Other key gaps include a lack of understanding of the technical options for decarbonisation. Our evidence indicates that agriculture, aquaculture and marine, the self-employed and logistics sectors require the most support over a wide range of skills.
- Current actions towards carbon neutrality are short term and generalised, such as selecting 2-year green energy tariffs. Barriers to longer-term carbon neutrality include costs of green technologies and a lack of qualified technicians within the islands for installing or maintaining equipment (e.g. heat pumps and solar panels).
Next steps
Our findings aim to support areas of possible action for consideration by the Carbon Neutral Islands (CNI) project team and appropriate Government agencies. The following steps would help address the skill gaps identified and support island businesses to decarbonise:
- Develop a training programme for the CNI project Community Development Officers (CDOs) to enable them to provide island businesses with information resources and support knowledge and understanding. They could directly support businesses in the production of carbon actions plans. Since the production of this report, CDOs across all of the islands have undergone training including accredited qualifications in corporate standard carbon accounting, energy assessor training and other energy efficiency advisory training. It has been hugely valuable for the CDOs and the communities they serve. Roll out to other islands would significantly benefit them.
- Develop island specific carbon planning tools such as carbon calculators. These should ensure relevant measures to each island and account for sectorial differences within each community.
- Provide training for technicians, electricians, mechanics and other trades so they can provide installation and maintenance services to green technologies.
- Develop sector specific roadmaps to carbon neutrality with short- and long-term targets, which aim to address key barriers identified in this report.
- Run specific agricultural focused actions such as additional skills development support for crofters and small farms to understand and implement sustainable land management practises and conduct carbon audits, which are critical for securing some grants and funding.
- Develop a coordinated support package for islands businesses with relevant government agencies and training providers. The level of support for businesses on Cumbrae has increased substantially to include Commercial EPCs, Display Energy Certificates, Carbon Audits and Businesses Energy Scotland funding support. There would be significant benefits to replicating this across the other islands.
- Upgrade energy infrastructure in islands, to support the inclusion of greener technologies as part of businesses decarbonisation strategies.
- Promote a circular economy, which would support reduction in waste and supply chain carbon emissions, aiding in businesses achieving net zero.
Glossary
|
CDO |
Community Development Officer from the Carbon Neutral Islands project |
|
CNI |
Carbon Neutral Islands project |
|
SME |
Small and medium enterprise |
|
Net zero |
The term ‘net zero’ for the Scottish Government means a balance between the amount of greenhouse gas emissions produced and the amount removed from the atmosphere in Scotland. The Scottish government aims to achieve net zero emissions of all greenhouse gases by 2045. |
|
Carbon neutral |
The definition of ‘carbon neutral’ for the Carbon Neutral Islands project is an island where the greenhouse gas emissions are in balance with carbon sinks (such as forests, peatlands, or active carbon removal technologies). This is very similar to ‘net zero’, and for the purposes of this project, the terms are used interchangeably. |
|
Decarbonisation |
The act of removing carbon emissions from daily activities, operations or practises. |
|
Carbon footprint |
The calculation of how much carbon a person, business, activity, or building emits. |
|
Decarbonisation plan |
A strategy informed by a carbon footprint to reduce the amount of carbon a business emits over a number of years. The aim is to reduce carbon emissions each year until the business reaches net zero. |
Introduction
The Carbon Neutral Islands (CNI) project is a Scottish Government ‘programme for government’ commitment to support six Scottish islands (Islay, Raasay, Hoy, Yell, Barra, and Great Cumbrae) to become carbon neutral by 2040. It also aims to support other goals such as economic and skills development.
This project investigates the extent to which businesses, public sector organisations and other bodies within key sectors across the six islands have carbon neutral strategies. Sectors of interest include tourism, food & drink, retail, leisure, transport, aquaculture and marine, renewable energy, agriculture, media, self-employed, logistics, housing and construction/trades. We investigate what would be needed in order for businesses to adopt and implement a carbon neutral strategy.
We consider the skills required in order to deliver carbon neutrality in these sectors on the six Scottish islands. We also consider the nature and scale of the overall skills development that is required to help island businesses meet the goals of the CNI project, both in the medium term (to 2030) and longer term (to 2040). The key challenges and barriers, including sector-specific barriers, for island businesses in preparing to meet the goals of the Carbon Neutral Islands project are reviewed.
We undertook desk-based literature reviews on current sector readiness on a UK-wide scale and a review of local, Scottish and UK policy and how it supports island businesses. We used online surveys in an attempt to achieve broad participation across the six islands. In addition we visited the islands and conducted in-person interviews. A detailed methodology can be viewed in Appendix 1.
Key challenges we experienced undertaking this project were:
- Securing participation – Out of approximately 600 businesses identified and contacted through desk-based research, only 63 surveys were returned with an additional 29 interviews conducted across the six islands.
- Statistical analysis – due to the limited responses, detailed sectorial analysis was not possible. In some cases there were only 2 responders for a sector. Out of the 13 participating sectors, only 4 sectors had over 10 responders (see Table 1 – Error! Reference source not found.).
- There are a number of crossovers between sectors where a business is linked to a number of sectors such as tourism, retail and food. This makes statistical analysis between sectors more challenging because the distinction between them is unclear. This is reflected in the sector breakdown tables, where although there were 59 responders with 6 choosing not to answer, a number of responders selected multiple sectors their business fell into. There were also responders who operated more than one business and used the same survey to answer for all the businesses they operated. This increased the total number of sectors who responded to the questions from the expected 63 to 122. This makes comparisons difficult and potentially skewed data.
As a result, we were unable to present the level of robust findings that may have been possible with more substantial response rates. However, we are confident that the 10% sample achieved, combined with the in-person interviews and input from CDOs, means that we have representative evidence to support our findings.
We can’t conclude on any substantial differences in the readiness and skills between some sectors as the response rate was insufficient.
Overview of island businesses
We found the following sector profiles within the islands:
- Tourism is a dominant sector across all islands (both within the CNI target islands and amongst the other UK islands more generally). This extends to supporting industries such as hospitality and distilleries.
- Independent trades are a vital sector on islands including construction and mechanical, however few have a significant online presence, meaning it was difficult to obtain accurate numbers of these businesses.
- Retail is a prevalent sector with most falling into the food and drink category. Local grocery stores often have a multipurpose function offering post offices and parcel pick up points, some gifts and locally produced goods. Dedicated retail shops are limited on the islands with smaller resident populations such as Hoy and Raasay, however larger population islands such as Cumbrae and Islay have a more diverse retail sector.
- Agriculture and aquaculture are also important sectors across the islands for economic revenue and employment, although not as large in number of businesses and scale of operations compared with rural and coastal mainland areas.
- Large commercial farms are less common on islands than on the mainland. However, there are a larger number of crofts located within the islands, owned by small holders who do not sell to larger supply chains and are more invested in selling goods/produce locally in small volumes or for private consumption.
- There have been challenges for aquaculture businesses such as restricted access to markets following Brexit and losses during the Covid-19 pandemic, meaning there has been a downturn in shellfish and the wider fishing industries.
| Tourism | 25% |
| Food and drink | 19% |
| Retail | 14% |
| Leisure industry | 14% |
| Transport | 7% |
| Aquaculture and marine economy | 4% |
| Renewable energy | 3% |
| Agriculture | 3% |
| Media and related activities | 3% |
| Self-employed | 2% |
| Logistics | 2% |
| Housing | 2% |
| Construction/Trades | 2% |
Figure 1 shows the breakdown of the number of businesses identified across all the CNI islands. While each island showed a diverse range of businesses and were unique in many sector distributions, there was a significance of tourism and recreation businesses across all six islands. These industries include bed and breakfasts, hotels and other holiday accommodation, shops, grocers, galleries, cafés and theatres. Other sector businesses have a critical value to the islands e.g. aquaculture and agriculture can employ a considerable number of staff though there are few businesses. The transport sector reflects the size of the communities, with smaller populations having fewer transport businesses. Some island business operate several operations from a single main business (i.e. a farm may also be a B&B, or a bus operator may also be a mechanic etc.) which makes accurately calculating the numbers of businesses challenging.
Assessment of carbon neutral strategies across island businesses
Carbon reduction readiness
There were 63 responses to surveys and in person interviews. Full details and breakdown of responses can be found in Appendix B (Section 12.5). We found that around half of participants were aware of their businesses carbon footprint to some degree with less than 20% actively tracking it. Around 25% of participants have or are developing a decarbonisation strategy.
Most businesses do not currently track their carbon footprint. More businesses in the tourism, media and transport sectors actively track their carbon footprints than in the other sectors. However, the percentage of businesses in these three sectors actively tracking their carbon footprint is still under 50%.
Similarly, the majority of businesses regardless of sector are not currently producing carbon reduction plans. Those businesses that are tracking their carbon footprints are more likely to produce decarbonisation plans.
Barriers to developing a carbon strategy
Participants were asked about barriers to tracking their carbon footprints and developing a plan to decarbonise.
| Q8 If you do not track your carbon footprint what are the barriers to this? | |||
| Cost | 51% | ||
| Time | 69% | ||
| Lack of skills in the business | 56% | ||
| Lack of external support | 51% | ||
| Not a priority for our business | 29% | ||
| If other please give details | 13% | ||
| Note: Percentage of people who chose this answer | |||
| Q12 If you don’t have a plan to become carbon neutral what are the barriers to this? | |||
| Cost | 68% | ||
| Time | 70% | ||
| Lack of skills in the business | 58% | ||
| Lack of external support | 53% | ||
| Not a priority for our business | 30% | ||
| If other please give details | 10% | ||
Summary of overall responses
The majority (69-70%) said they did not have time to produce carbon footprint baselines. There was also some confusion and lack of understanding on how to do this and which tool out of the many options was right for them. There were also some issues raised with the appropriateness of standard carbon assessment metrics to island business, particularly farming. There is no clear advice on carbon recording tools, calculators and other baseline production options and explanation of how they differ, and which would be most appropriate for islands businesses. This complexity further dissuades businesses from looking into calculating their carbon footprint.
Responders stated that it would be helpful to outsource the carbon footprint and plan production. However, it is difficult to find and apply for the limited funding available for this. We understand that Highlands and Islands Enterprise are aware of this issue and are investigating the support they, or other agencies, could offer.
Responders stated that access to training and external support would be beneficial to allow business owners and operators to better prepare for a net zero transition. However, finding time for upskilling remains a key barrier.
Summary of sector analysis
Time and costs are the most common barriers to businesses in tracking carbon footprints and developing decarbonisation strategies. Most acknowledged that developing footprints and plans were important, but:
- 67% of businesses in the renewable energy sector indicated that developing a footprint was not a priority for their business. Half of businesses in other sectors including agriculture, housing and trades businesses also stated this was not a priority.
- Renewable energy sector place higher priority on developing a plan, with only 25% stating this was not a priority. We find that this sector puts more value in producing the plans than tracking footprints.
- Retail businesses indicated they placed more value in creating a footprint than a plan, as did logistics and leisure.
Prioritising internal resources for decarbonisation efforts is indicated to be challenging across all sectors with the third most identified barrier being the lack of skills and support needed to produce a carbon footprint or plan. Further detail is provided in Appendix B.
Overall Carbon Neutral Island barriers to developing a carbon strategy
Developing a decarbonisation plan is a complicated undertaking, requiring financial and supply records to provide a carbon footprint baseline and develop future actions to improve the carbon footprint. This can be a complex task with many businesses saying that they do not have the knowledge on how to create a baseline or where to find appropriate information to assist them.
Most businesses on the islands are micro scale (up to 10 employees), with many being sole ownership and minimal staff with seasonal increases. Larger businesses (still within SME definitions) are found on some of the larger islands such as Islay, Barra and Yell specifically within distilleries and Aquaculture industries. Producing a plan and looking for alternative options to reduce the carbon emissions is difficult for these businesses due to time pressures within the business.
Costs are also a large factor in preventing businesses being enabled to decarbonise, with many green technologies and alternatives remaining at a higher purchase cost than non-green options. A common example are EVs, while significantly more accessible now than 5 years ago, the purchase costs are still higher than equivalent combustion engine cars, with the investment return taking serval years to see the financial benefit. In contrast, from discussions with businesses owners we found that new clean heating systems can be a worthwhile investment. Although purchase prices may be higher, the overall running costs are lower compared to the high cost of oil which is the main source of heating in the islands, the investment can have favourable returns in a short period of time.
These barriers make it difficult to produce a decarbonisation strategy even though around 70% of participants would like to make it more of a priority.
Assessment of business readiness
We reviewed the details of island business readiness to become carbon neutral. Full details from the surveys can be found in Appendix B (Section 0). While formal decarbonisation plans were in place for a minority of business sectors, most responders reported that they are actively taking steps to reduce their carbon use. The findings suggested that the number of employees (size of business) did not factor into decarbonisation strategies or readiness. There were some sectoral differences however, with businesses like distilleries, fish farms and agricultural businesses having a more developed carbon strategy, this is due to a necessity to either comply with operational conditions or access subsidies.
The majority of the participants indicated that they were taking some steps to becoming net zero ready. However, the largest proportion (87%) said that the action was recycling. This action alone is not sufficient to meet net zero targets. We found that other actions were high level such as reducing paper/plastic use, short term such as a 2 year green tariff and generalised with non-industry-specific actions. There are limited long term technical actions being planned or undertaken by individual businesses due to costs and lack of qualified technicians such as solar panel installers within the islands to construct and maintain the green technology equipment.
Recycling is the most common action taken by businesses to reduce their carbon footprint and conserve resources. The circular economy is important among island businesses and participants stated that they try to reuse and maintain resources due to limited access or costly waste disposal. There are added ferry costs for waste removal or recycling, with some smaller islands having a reduced recycling capability, with recycling centres often at capacity restricting further use.
A reduction in business travel has been as a result of move to IT based solutions nationally following Covid-19. Some of the more expensive decarbonisation options such as electric vehicles and micro energy generation are more of a challenge for relatively small island businesses.
We found from the in-person interviews that there is a strong desire within island businesses to support other local businesses and providers of goods to keep supply chains local. This is more challenging on smaller islands with more limited local products available to source.
While no formal decarbonisation plans may be in place for all business participants, most reported that they are actively taking steps to reduce their carbon use (Appendix B Section12.8). Of those that stated that they are not taking any steps to reduce their carbon footprint at this point, most are planning to do so in the future.
Key skills gaps
Overview of Carbon Neutral Islands businesses skill readiness and gaps
Having access to skills to understand how to reduce carbon emissions is essential to the net zero transition. All participants indicated they have a general ‘basic level’ understanding about carbon use in their businesses and stated they are aware of options to measure carbon use via calculator tools. However, when it came to technical knowledge and implementing changes, participants were less confident in their skills. Fewer than 1/3 of participants are confident in their technical knowledge to deliver technical and detailed decarbonisation actions (Figure 4).
| Q26 What skills do you already have in your organisation to help deliver carbon reduction? | |||
| General understanding of where carbon is used in your business and what solutions may be available to assist in carbon reduction | 100% | ||
| Knowledge of how to assess the carbon footprint of your organisation using a calculator tool | 44% | ||
| Technical knowledge specific to your industry and data analysis skills to do bespoke carbon calculation for your business | 32% | ||
| Knowledge of how to write a decarbonisation plan for your organisation | 28% | ||
| Management and administrative skills to implement carbon reductions in your business | 36% | ||
| Technical and specialist skills to implement carbon reductions in your business | 16% | ||
| Please give detail on the types of skills you have in your organisation that will help you to decarbonise your business | 36% | ||
Only 22% of responders have actively sought external training to increase their skills and understanding of carbon reduction, with those who did undertake training using online webinars and internet sources (Figure in Appendix B). Many of these online training sources did not result in accreditation or certification, however a small number pursued a deeper level of understanding and completed certified courses.
Skills gaps and barriers across CNI businesses
Participants were asked what challenges and barriers they faced in gaining the skills needed to develop actionable decarbonisation plans and achieve the transition to net zero by 2040. The following responses provide a guide on where further support could be focused to support CNI businesses.
| Q30 What do you see as the challenges and barriers for your organisation to building up the skills needed to achieve carbon neutral? | |||
| Cost | 79% | ||
| Time | 65% | ||
| Lack of skills in the business | 42% | ||
| Lack of external support | 40% | ||
| Not a priority for our business | 7% | ||
| If other, please give details | 21% | ||
| Note: Percentage of people who chose this answer | |||
The prominent responses were again cost and time, similar to business planning. This was followed by not having the skills to increase this knowledge suggesting there is a skills gap to be filled.
Sector skills readiness and gaps
Due to limited returns from some sectors it is difficult to do a comprehensive comparison of net zero readiness and skills between sectors, only four participating sectors had responses from more than 10 businesses. However, it is possible to draw evidence to support conclusions on the general level of readiness of islands businesses on the whole.
Summary of analysis
The analysis has highlighted that there are substantial gaps in the skills required to support the route decarbonisation across most of sectors. The main gaps across all sectors include the lack of knowledge of what skills are required to meet net zero. Most of the businesses we spoke with did not know what skills they required to begin to address the challenge, such as the skills needed to produce a carbon footprint or a decarbonisation plan.
Businesses are also unclear on how to access relevant skills, many having significant time restrictions limiting their ability to research the skills or to develop them within the business. Another key issue is the lack of financial support or prioritisation to pay for training or employ someone with this knowledge. We found evidence of a willingness to learn. Finding ways to signpost, fund and develop the relevant skills would be an important first step for policy makers. Developing these skills (see also Table 10 in Appendix B) within the islands would support the longer-term roll-out of decarbonisation plans across the island businesses. Within the CNI project (to 2040) there is the opportunity to create a skills development programme to drive the change required.
Current skills across different sectors
The majority of participants from 9 sectors out of 13 have indicated they do not know what skills are required to produce plans or deliver the actions within the plans (Table 7 in Appendix B). Those in renewable energy, housing, agriculture, and construction felt that they had a good understanding of skills requirements. Sectors such as renewables and housing have clear guidance on how to reduce carbon, hence a better understanding than most about what skills are required to plan for and action decarbonisation strategies.
While all sectors responded that they had a general understanding of carbon use within their business, only those working in the renewable energy sectors felt they had the technical knowledge and ability to understand and track carbon use within their business. This technical understanding makes it easier for these sectors to produce and implement plans to reduce carbon emissions. Our evidence suggests that there is a lack of the more specialist skills to implement carbon reduction actions across all sectors other than the renewables sector.
Few have undertaken training in carbon reduction skills, with the highest proportion of those who have had training within the renewable energy, aquaculture and transport sectors. Up to half of responders from these sectors stated they have actively sought training in these areas.
During interviews it was clear that although willing to learn, it was difficult to find the time or cost to be able to undertake training.
Skills gaps and barriers across sectors
We also asked about potential options to improve business readiness and understanding of the requirements to decarbonisation.
When it comes to developing skills to assist businesses in transitioning to net zero, it appears that there is a significant difference between the sectors in what skills they require to develop (although there were few participants for some sectors). Our evidence indicates that that agriculture, aquaculture and marine, the self-employed and logistics require the most support over a wide range of skills (Table 10 in Appendix B).
The main barrier identified by all businesses across all sectors to decarbonising was cost (Table 11 in Appendix B). Having time was also a key barrier for businesses in all sectors except transport and renewable energy.
| Q29 What support does your organisation require to build up the skills needed to plan and deliver carbon reductions to reach carbon neutral? | |||
| Training | 60% | ||
| Tools | 44% | ||
| Funding | 86% | ||
| Ongoing external support | 56% | ||
| Other (please specify) | 9% | ||
| Note: Percentage of people who chose this answer | |||
Lack of funding features highly in the barriers and challenges businesses face in decarbonising, along with the cost of time. There are funding routes for some businesses, for example Transport Scotland offers grant funding to help organisations install electric vehicle (EV) charging infrastructure on their premises (Find Business Support.gov, 2024). There is also the Scottish Governments SME Loan Scheme (Business Energy Scotland.org, 2024), which is designed to help businesses install new energy efficient systems, equipment or building fabric improvements (loans available up to £100,000). However, the landscape can be confusing and complicated, poorly signposted with highly competitive application processes. Most of the schemes tend to be nationally focussed and rarely take into account island issues such as ferry journeys and limited technical support locally. Information access on decarbonisation strategy advisory services is also an important opportunity. If information was clearer and readily available, businesses would have more confidence in their understanding and the skills needed to investigate green and low carbon alternatives as well as being able to produce carbon baselines and reduction strategies.
Interview insights
These are the common challenges and opportunities raised by businesses through this research.
Opportunities:
- CDOs are a good resource – could they be trained to help produce plans?
- Training local trades in installation and maintenance
- Circular economy practices are important
- Land management important for businesses and communities in decarbonisation strategies
Challenges:
- Old building stock, hard and expensive to renovate/upgrade
- Infrastructure limitations for EVs and other green technologies
- Limited access to renewable and low carbon technologies
- Regulation restrictions hinder some effort, more flexibility through policy needed
- Decarbonisation plans for Agricultural businesses will be required for subsidy access, support not always available for small crofting and farms
- Lack of skills/knowledge to effectively strategize for transition – Toolkits/packs would be useful
- Wide scale dependency on oil for heating
- External supply chain carbon cost
- Lack of financial incentives/ expensive to decarbonise
Evaluation of challenges and barriers to CNI business net zero readiness
There were many common themes from the in-person interviews including: buildings; supply chains; agriculture; green technologies and infrastructure; and regulation and policy.
While not necessarily exclusive issues to island communities, these illustrate the particular challenges faced by island businesses. The significance and prevalence impact on the viability of implementing carbon downshifting within island based businesses. Each issue is explained further in the following sections.
Buildings
Older buildings, which are prevalent on the islands, face greater net zero challenges such as poor energy efficiency. This is due to buildings being poorly insulated, not having the capacity to have cavity wall insulation (stone built) and requiring extensive renovation to accommodate low carbon heating options. The ability to upgrade the older buildings is further exacerbated by the lack of trades able to do the renovations, cost of materials (these are significantly higher on Islands) and availability of materials as some suppliers do not offer carriage to some Scottish islands. This means that it is harder and more expensive to upgrade these buildings to be more energy efficient. While not solely a business challenge as this is an issue for residential buildings as well, many businesses are located within old buildings. This was made evident during the island visits and during conversations with the consultees and CDOs. A typical challenge for island buildings is the need to change heating systems. There are no mains gas lines on any Scottish island except one, Stornoway, which has a small gas network servicing a portion of houses in the main town. This limits common options to reduce cost and carbon with a switch from oil. While there are low carbon alternatives, these can be expensive to install such as electric heat pump systems which often require a whole system upgrade due to lower heating levels or require importing of fuel such as biomass which is costly and has a high carbon footprint due to transportation.
Supply chains
Island businesses have a larger supply chain carbon footprint than mainland Scotland counterparts due to additional transportation. While mainland businesses may find varied supplier access within their locality, island businesses are restricted by suppliers willing to ship to island locations and inevitably additional transport costs.
Agriculture
Businesses identified that it can be challenging to apply national policy in local island environments, such as livestock grazing practises in fields and land management practises. This can be counterproductive to low carbon ambitions. For example, waste management is a significant challenge to island farmers, while there may be a range of commercial waste management options for mainland farms, island farms have fewer options. Waste must be transported by island farmers on ferries to mainland agricultural waste facilities which is financially expensive, carbon intensive and time consuming. There is a need to identify ‘island proofed’ waste management practises or investment in island agri-waste facilities.
Some farming practices are not recognised in farming carbon audits such as not ploughing a field after harvest for reseeding. While it is widely acknowledged by interviewees that a more carbon efficient land management practice is needed, farmers are not able to record this as a “carbon positive” decision.
Green technologies and infrastructure
Green technology can be more expensive than conventional energy and transportation technologies but can be very efficient in an island setting (e.g. wind turbines due to a good wind resource). Businesses that do wish to invest in renewable technologies can find it difficult to find installers and to get prompt maintenance and repairs as they are reliant on mainland technicians who often view islands jobs as low priority and charge higher costs.
Local authorities across Scotland are seeking to install more EV chargers and some islanders would like more investment from their local authorities and other government organisations to ease the individual costs for charges and installation.
Grid capacity is a significant issue across the UK, and particularly so on islands where grid infrastructure is aged and under increasing constraint. While there is a strong desire to install microgeneration technologies such as solar and wind turbines, access to the grid is a challenge and also expensive.
Regulation and policy
While policy is a driving force behind net zero actions, for islands, policy and regulation can be a barrier for some businesses. By their nature, policy and regulations are uniform and broad reaching, not allowing for unique island characteristics. Regulations that may be appropriate for large and mainland businesses do not fully account for the differences of SME and island businesses. These UK and Scottish Government regulations can become barriers and restrict decarbonisation opportunities. An example raised by interviewees is the ability to utilise local produce and goods instead of having to import from large mainland suppliers. Regulation and policy does not allow the sale of locally produced food direct from the source. While it is understood the regulation is to ensure the quality and safety of food consumed, it is restrictive. Locally grown vegetables and fruit, eggs used to be a regular item on the shelves, supporting local farmers, crofters and other suppliers. Now, they are not allowed to buy direct from the grower and instead have to go through the larger distributor.
Another key restriction from regulation is the closure of island abattoirs due to regulatory cuts. The livestock must now be transported off island to be processed and returned back to the distributors. This increases costs for farmers, stress for the animals and increases the carbon footprint of the food products.
Evaluation of opportunities
Opportunities have been identified to assist businesses in achieving operational net zero by 2040. These opportunities include training; supply chains; and land management.
There are opportunities to help upskilling of business owners/operators as well as enabling them to utilise green technologies in their decarbonisation strategies. Each of these opportunities is explained further below:
Training
There are opportunities around training in various forms to aid in the net zero transition of island businesses. These opportunities would not only benefit the transition ambition, but also could increase island economic prosperity and could help reduce population decline often seen in smaller islands. Across many of the businesses and sectors that participated in this study, access to training and skills to understand and develop carbon footprints and decarbonisation plans was highlighted as important. A key finding is that there are opportunities to utilise the CDOs for the islands as contacts and signposters for training and support.
Training for island technicians, electricians, mechanics and other trades to install and service low-carbon technologies such as heat pumps, wind turbines, insulation and property retrofit would be beneficial to allow greater access to green technologies. Increased training for green technology skills would also benefit the island economy by attracting new businesses and skilled employees to the island. Currently islands are more likely to be reliant on Scottish mainland-based company support for green technologies, reducing reliability and efficiency of support and delivery of new technology, as well as adding to cost.
Supply chains
Island businesses in most cases will strive to support other local businesses, sourcing goods where possible within the island. While there can be significant challenges around local supply chains, there are also opportunities to increase local production. For example, ‘added value’ food production, with crofters, farmers and bakers able to develop new products from ‘home and locally grown’ produce. However, this can also have a negative implication for carbon emissions. For example, distillers interviewed on Islay mentioned the recent trend of local growing of barley products for whisky production results in higher emissions from the smaller scale cultivation of the crop and transportation of fertiliser and seed to the island at high cost and high carbon footprint, compared to buying ready produced barley grain from a bulk distributor.
However, restrictions from Food Standards Scotland regulation prohibit the sale of local produce with many providers not having sufficient accreditations or certificates to sell their goods commercially despite having a good food and health standard. This impacts on the businesses ability to reduce carbon emission from their supply chains as part of their CNI net zero readiness. Reviewing Food Standards Scotland agency regulations for small food growers to consider allowing more access to local sellers would support the local economy, reduce carbon footprint of imported foods as well as tackle some food insecurity issues unique to islands. This includes issues such as disruption to ferry transport essential to food delivery regularly during adverse weather events. Costs, food has a significantly higher cost than on mainland Scottland due to increase transport costs being added to the consumer price. Quality and storage ability can also be affected due to longer transportation times, this is prevalent with fruit, vegetables and eggs. Access to locally produced goods would have many benefits to ease food insecurity and improve economic development opportunities for Scottish islands.
The closure of most island abattoirs has seen increased costs for farmers and higher carbon footprints for the product being exported and imported back to the island. The Food Standards Scotland abattoir database (Food Standards Scotland, 2024) lists only authorised slaughterhouses and processing plants located on Barra, Isle of Lewis, Isle of Mull, and Islay. The slaughterhouse in North Uist is scheduled to close later this year. Orkney lost its abattoir in 2018/2019. With 93 inhabited Scottish islands, this is a significant deficit to local communities. Re-opening these facilities would likely be a financial and regulatory challenge. However, there could have significant carbon and financial benefits to farmers, increase animal welfare and reduce costs to island consumers as well as offering additional employment opportunities to island communities.
Land management
Good land management is well known for carbon storage and ecosystem services benefits. There is an opportunity to train and promote large landowner businesses, such as estate owners who operate shooting and fishing activities and farmers in alternative land management practises. Providing access to knowledge and skills could reduce the loss of carbon from standard practises such as ploughing, heath burning and over grazing. Further investment into island peat restoration would provide a useful carbon sink as well as offering more sustainable peat harvesting opportunities for businesses such as distilleries.
Conclusions
The ambition of the CNI project is for the six target islands to reach net zero by 2040, 10 years ahead of the UK target and 5 years ahead of Scotland as a whole. We focused on primary data collection through direct engagement with island businesses. This was enabled through direct involvement of the island-based Community Development Officers.
Overall island businesses are very willing to embrace the challenge to achieve carbon neutrality. They can see the benefits to them and the wider community and have a desire to engage and make progress. However, the challenges they face are significant and evidenced to be arguably greater than businesses based in mainland Scotland communities. The key message businesses conveyed through the interviews was having the ability to have island-focused solutions. This was enhanced by the overall support articulated for the CNI programme and in particular the CDO resource. There is a desire to enable further action through CDOs.
Our findings on three main research questions are as follows:
Do businesses have a carbon reduction plan or strategy?
Many businesses across all sectors have a desire to track their carbon footprints and develop decarbonisation plans. We found that there are significant barriers to acting on this desire. Cost and time are the most commonly identified barriers among island businesses. Skills and access to information are also a concern and a significant gap to enabling decarbonisation measures by businesses.
Do businesses have the skills to develop the carbon awareness and implementation of decarbonisation strategies?
The research identified that most businesses feel they lack specialist knowledge. Despite this, participants feel they have a good general understanding around carbon emissions in their business operations. They were keen to explore ways to reduce carbon but lack knowledge of how.
Significant gaps in the current skills across most SME island businesses included technical aspects on how to actively reduce emissions. There were also gaps in understanding suitability of green technologies and accessing information and funding to action decarbonisation initiatives.
Access to advice and the ability to develop skills in-house would be a significant benefit to many businesses.
What is required to support businesses to transition?
Key opportunities to close the skills gap and assist in the transition process are:
- Training local CNI CDOs to directly support the business community in accessing information and support to develop decarbonisation strategies. This could be via signposting to online resources or helping to develop a template decarbonisation plan for businesses to follow. Local representation is central to the decarbonisation efforts as they understand the unique nature of each island. There is a significant opportunity which could be progressed with HIE to sustain the role of CDOs and potential for income associated with fees for services provided, as HIE have provided funding for island CDOs previously.
- Training local trades in the installation and maintenance of green technologies is an opportunity to increase access to low-carbon alternatives as well as to open new economic opportunities for local supply chains. There is potential to establish a pan-island CNI trades network, enabled through CDOs, for sharing knowledge and resources.
- Many businesses are taking positive steps to reduce their carbon footprints and sustainable use of materials by utilising local supplies and services where possible. Increasing access to local services, skills and goods can significantly reduce carbon costs from external supply chains. Currently, islands are heavily reliant on external supply chains with larger carbon footprints and additional carbon from transportation. They also suffer from limited local purchasing options. This dependence on distant suppliers and supply chain insecurity is a unique feature of island business operation as well as general island living. Whilst there is unlikely to be a solution to this distance from market, there could be further attention given to procurement policy and support mechanism interventions which recognise these supply chain constraints for islands. Directly supporting and enabling the development of local supply chain and circular economy options would be beneficial as well as facilitating the pathway to net zero for islands.
Key recommendations
This section presents actions that could be taken to address the issues raised in our research.
Development of skills across the CNI sectors
There are opportunities around training in various forms to aid in the net zero transition of island businesses. These opportunities would not only benefit the transition ambition but could also improve island economic prosperity and reduce population decline often experienced on smaller islands.
Develop signposting to training options across island and sectors
Many of the businesses and sectors that participated in our study highlighted access to training and skills to understand and develop carbon footprints and decarbonisation plans as gaps. Some sectors want to upskill in-house with other preferring external skills being brought in e.g. from advisory services, so signposting to appropriate training and advice to allow them to do this would be beneficial.
Utilise the CDOs for the islands as contacts for training and support.
In addition, or as an alternative to the above, CDOs could provide more direct support to businesses. This could be encouraged either by further training CDOs in carbon footprint and decarbonisation plan development, or by CDOs being supported to direct businesses to relevant information and resources. This could also offer a routeway for the positions of CNI CDO to be sustainable through a chargeable service provided to local businesses. It would also provide stable employment in supporting decarbonisation.
Training for technicians, electricians, mechanics and other trades
Training for technicians, electricians, mechanics and other trades would allow island businesses greater access to green technologies. In order to be certified for installation and maintenance of these technologies, specific accreditation is often required. Responders stated that gaining these certificates and accreditations is complex and time consuming with minimal support. In many cases Tradesmen are small or even sole businesses that do not have the capacity to become accredited.
Currently islands are more likely to be reliant on Scottish mainland-based company support for installation or design of green technologies. This can be more difficult than for mainland counterparts due to more limited options, impose less competitive prices and have longer delivery times. Securing installation and maintenance on green technology is often extremely difficult in an island, with large delays, higher costs and limited options. Mainland contractors can have geographic exclusions that commonly exclude islands from access to standard services and prices. Addressing this constraint would have multiple benefits, not only by increasing access to low carbon technologies, but by increasing the skills on islands, expanding employment opportunities, and supporting apprenticeships to retain island residents.
Development of sector specific roadmaps
Cost and time have been identified as the most significant area where support is needed across the sectors. However, the priority needs across the sectors have some significant differences. Cost and time constraints were especially notable around seasonal businesses such as tourism and leisure whereas tools and training were more important to agriculture. Renewable Energy, Food and Drink, and Logistics sector responders stated they would like to have access to training to up-skill. Aquaculture, Retail, and the Leisure industry sector responders stated a preference for external skills being brought in (Appendix B Table 3). The remaining sector responders stated all the support options would be useful and had no immediate preference or priority. This all means that a sector targeted approach may be useful in supporting island business.
It would therefore be important to develop specific sector roadmaps within an island context. This could include developing tools such as carbon calculators that account for the sector requirements as well as the island location. These tools would support baselining but should be linked to specific actions and support e.g. funding to help implement their plans. This sectoral approach is supported by the different priorities that were found between business such as:
- To achieve a net zero transition, the retail and food & drink sectors have indicated they would benefit from more assistance in decarbonising their supply chain and ability to use local produce and goods.
- The tourism, leisure and transport sectors would like more infrastructure and local trades assistance to allow for green technologies to be used such as EV chargers and microgeneration.
- Agriculture would like more support in developing their decarbonisation strategies and undertaking carbon audits.
Funding support landscape improvements
There are funds and investment opportunities that may be available for businesses to support decarbonisation efforts (BEIS, 2021). These funds can provide significant financial support and cover a variety of decarbonisation strategies. However, we found that businesses lack the knowledge to access these funds, and face time pressures to complete applications. We also found that there are no means of coordinating a funding search or application process.
These funding application processes are also often complicated with limited assistance offered. Many funds are also only accessible for large organisations or for specific sectors which do not reflect the significant number of SME businesses which account for over 35% of carbon emissions (Energy Saving Trust, 2022). The competitive nature of grants and investments also restrict the access to many who may qualify but do not have the expertise needed to successfully apply and secure funds. Interviewees felt that smaller businesses did not qualify for grants and funding due to a wide range of exclusions. This was especially prevalent among the trades, crofting and farming interviewees.
Finally, the overall capacity and scope of the funding is not sufficient to have impact for enough businesses.
There is the opportunity to address this for CNI islands through reviewing funding guidance and the application process to better reflect the challenges faced by island based SMEs which could be linked to the sector roadmap priorities would support a coordinated approach to meeting the 2040 targets.
The Islands (Scotland) Act 2018 and the 2019 National Islands Plan represent positive steps to support islands and may in time present a key route to address island impacts and opportunities. However, these policy provisions are yet to be fully implemented across all programmes to support all island businesses more directly.
Specific agricultural focused actions
Agriculture has a significant part to play in the net zero target across islands with land use being a major carbon contributor. From our policy research it would seem that there are limited policies and strategies that offer practical actionable support for crofters and small-scale farmers. There can be a disconnect between land use and natural resource protection which may cause policy to become a barrier for those looking to reduce carbon emissions and turn to a more sustainable way of farming. This could include actions such as installation of renewable energy technologies (Solar, Wind or Anaerobic Digestor systems). The general strategic changes to agricultural policy/support mechanisms and subsidy for agriculture should have carbon reduction as a key aspect of framing but also account for island-specific challenges.
Upgrading of island energy infrastructure
Delivering upgrades to islands energy infrastructure is essential in the development and use of renewable energy and associated technologies. This will support island businesses to develop more long-term carbon reduction plans for example by allowing businesses greater access to grid to invest in wind, solar or battery technologies.
Islands are an ideal test bed for the use of mixed renewable energy (tidal, solar, storage and wind). However, the lack of grid capacity severely restricts the ability for companies to develop and test these technologies. It is difficult to gain connections even for domestic or commercial small scale renewable energy technologies.
Many islands suffer from energy insecurity due to grid infrastructure not being reliable and power cuts are common. While there is a nationwide push and promotion of increased renewable energy technologies, all consultees spoken to during the project made reference to significant grid restrictions faced. There is a need for grid infrastructure improvements to support decarbonisation via green technologies across the islands. Without upgrading and improving the grid infrastructure to accommodate more green technology connections, island businesses will struggle to benefit from decarbonisation via green technology.
Promotion of circular economy to reduce emissions from supply chains and waste as part of business decarbonisation strategies
The development of an island circular economy with emphasis on recycling, reuse and sharing of resources. Island communities have fewer recycling options meaning more waste going to general landfills. There are some islands where only reduced recycling is offered, and facilities often overfilled, for example on Hoy, a café owner mentioned this is why she tries to reuse rather than recycle. Many residents try to reuse and upcycle where possible while complying with regulations regarding disposal of waste products. Sharing of tools, some small plant and farming equipment is commonplace with island businesses willing to share and lend equipment where possible and if needed.
Next steps
There are several options highlighted throughout this report that will support island businesses to decarbonise. The key steps that would help are:
- Develop a training programme with the CDOs to enable them to enhance island businesses information routes and understanding. This could also ultimately be a resource to produce business actions plans.
- Develop island specific carbon planning tools such as carbon calculators. These should also account for sectorial differences.
- Develop sector specific roadmaps to carbon neutrality with short and long-term targets.
- Develop a coordinated support package for islands businesses with relevant government agencies and training providers.
References
BEIS, 2021. Net Zero Strategy: Build Back Greener. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/net-zero-strategy
Energy Saving Trust, 2022. How can policy better support SMEs in the pathway to Net Zero?. [Online]
Available at: https://www.theccc.org.uk/publication/how-can-policy-better-support-smes-in-the-pathway-to-net-zero-energy-saving-trust/
Food Standards Scotland, 2024. Approved Establishments Regiser. [Online]
Available at: https://www.foodstandards.gov.scot/publications-and-research/publications/approved-premises-register
Scottish Government, 2023. Carbon Neutral Islands Project Progress Report. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/carbon-neutral-islands-project-progress-report/
Appendices
Appendix A Methodology
This project was undertaken using a range of methodologies and resources. The following sections detail the method used to complete each phase and task.
Phase 1
Phase 1 was to investigate and understand the baseline for current business readiness and the support that is available in a general sense. We also wanted to identify the sector landscape across the CNI islands to allow a comparison between the National sectors and island sectors.
To achieve these goals the tasks proposed consisted of:
- Desktop research to identify the businesses and relevant organisations on each Island
- Graphical analysis of island business distribution
- Policy review of support for decarbonisation, islands and small businesses
- Desk based literature review of wider sector readiness
Business Identification and Analysis
We identified businesses using desk-based research, using online local databases such as commercial directories and cross referencing as best as possible using other online sources such as social media and individual businesses websites to verify current operational status. We recorded results in a CNI target businesses database which was issued to the CDOs for a sense check. CDOs were able to provide invaluable guidance to this stage of the process to refine and target business contacts.

Figure 7: Businesses across the islands
Phase 2 – Engagement Methodology
To allow for maximum outreach, an online survey was created using Survey Monkey for wide spread distribution to the island businesses. The survey comprised of 31 questions that addressed a range of topics that related to the research questions. Readiness, Skills and Needs. The survey was compiled and issued following GDPR privacy standards and all information used in the production of the report has been anonymised.
The surveys were hosted on an online platform and participants were emailed the link to access the surveys. The platform allows for some basic analysis of survey results which was then refined and formatted to create the graphics in section Error! Reference source not found..
Where interviews were held, the interviews were summarised and key comments were selected that best represented the research questions posed in the project, summarised and represented in a graphical way to be clear and concise.
Sectoral comparisons were assessed by filtering and carefully selecting the most relevant questions that provide evidence based data for the questions presented by the project. A table presentation was selected as the most visually appealing way to show how ready the businesses are and what support they require to decarbonise.
Phase 3 – Report production
To compile the data obtained from phase 1 and 2 of the project, we used MS Excel to convert narrated data from interviews into data points for statistical analysis and summarisation. The data accessible from the Survey Monkey online platform was also very useful in providing a clear analysis with multiple filters and analytic tools to aid in the production of statistical graphics.
Selection of the key survey questions to be included in the report were based on the relevance to the key research questions. The full survey was important to gain a full understanding of the awareness and skill level of the participants, however not all were critical to include. We reviewed the 31 survey questions and highlighted those that provided the most detailed information around skills, training, challenges and opportunities. The final question selection was reduced to 10 for the general island findings and 15 for the sector comparison section.
The interviews were well organised by the CDOs and provided a deeper understanding on how the businesses owners felt about support for island net zero transition, how big a priority it was for them and what could encourage them to do more. From the interviews, we discovered that a number of common themes around challenges, opportunities and needs linked the islands and businesses. While there were subtle differences in the themes, the core issues were the same which lends credibility to the small sample when seen across the 6 islands and all interviewees.
Reflections
Challenges in Methodology
Undertaking engagement on a wide scale across various islands is difficult and there has been less participation than we expected. It is essential to have strong connections within the community to promote and encourage participation. CDO connections was very helpful within the islands in getting responses but with limited time available wider engagement was a challenge during island visits. The survey completion rate varied between as low as 3 on Hoy to a maximum of 15 for Yell with the others ranging around 8-12. Interviewees numbered around 3-6 people per visit with the exception of Islay where only 1 in person interview was arranged, however there were phone interviews following the visit.
Online surveys while useful and easy to issue to multiple contacts, rely on the willingness of the recipient to complete them. This reliance has meant that only a small section of island businesses were captured in the survey data, with gaps in the sectors and business sizes. It was hoped that a wide range of sectors and businesses sizes would participate to give a clear picture of the challenges, opportunities and needs of island businesses. This was not the case and the result is that we have significant gaps in data and inconclusive evidence on the current net zero transition readiness on islands.
Lessons Learnt
For engagement reliant projects, it is essential to identify strong community leaders and any steering groups and open discussion early with them on how best to engage with and encourage wide participation. Opportunities to communicate directly with a large number of business owners that were in steering groups were missed. Had we more directly engaged with them in person, perhaps we could have gained more cooperation from a valuable resource.
Visits to the islands were useful and critical in conducting the in person interviews, however time was limited and therefore organising interviews difficult. It may be more productive to contract local residents to undertake the engagement tasks following a set methodology provided by the Project Manager.
The online surveys were useful and provided good data and analysis tools. On reflection, the survey was too long and some questions repetitive and unclear to the participant. While all the questions provided key insight into the carbon related operations of the businesses the final number used in the report was 10-15 out of the 30 and questions asked during the interviews would have been useful to have in the survey to allow for statistical analysis.
Our analysis is based on responses to questionnaires and in-person interviews.
Overall CNI readiness
As shown in Figure , around half of the participants are aware of their businesses carbon footprint to some degree, less than 20% are actively tracking it. There is a slight increase in those who are developing a decarbonisation strategy with around 25% stating they have or are developing a plan for their business. We have assumed for this analysis that any non-responding participants do not track their carbon footprint or plan to develop a decarbonisation strategy.
|
Q5 Are you aware of your organisation’s carbon footprint? |
![]() | |
|
Q6 Do you track your organisation’s carbon footprint? |
![]() | |
|
Q10 Do you have a plan to become carbon neutral or are you developing one? |
![]() | |
If yes, which option best describes your current stag of planning? – We have a draft plan: 6– We are considering writing a plan but have not started preparations: 4 – We have a fully developed: 3 – We have a fully developed carbon neutral plan or strategy: 3 – We intend to write a plan and have started preparations: 3 | ||
Sector analysis of carbon strategy development
Sector readiness
Sectors are compared although there were no participants for some e.g. waste and mining. Some participants skipped some survey questions. Table 1 shows the percentage of businesses in each sector tracking their carbon footprints.
|
(Responses Skipped 6) |
Responses |
Yes |
No |
|
Renewable energy |
4 |
25% |
75% |
|
Housing |
2 |
0% |
100% |
|
Food and drink |
21 |
17% |
83% |
|
Aquaculture and marine economy |
5 |
20% |
80% |
|
Tourism |
26 |
26% |
74% |
|
Retail |
15 |
18% |
82% |
|
Agriculture (including crofting), land use and forestry |
4 |
0% |
100% |
|
Transport |
7 |
40% |
60% |
|
Self-employed |
3 |
0% |
100% |
|
Logistics (related to any of the sectors above) |
3 |
0% |
100% |
|
Leisure industry (music, arts, theatre, active tourism) |
16 |
14% |
86% |
|
Construction and Trades |
2 |
0% |
100% |
|
Media and related activities |
4 |
50% |
50% |
|
|
Responses |
Yes |
No |
|
Renewable energy |
4 |
25% |
75% |
|
Food and drink |
2 |
24% |
76% |
|
Aquaculture and marine economy |
20 |
40% |
60% |
|
Tourism |
5 |
29% |
71% |
|
Retail |
24 |
18% |
82% |
|
Agriculture (including crofting), land use and forestry |
15 |
0% |
100% |
|
Transport |
4 |
25% |
75% |
|
Self-employed |
6 |
0% |
100% |
|
Logistics (related to any of the sectors above) |
3 |
0% |
100% |
|
Leisure industry (music, arts, theatre, active tourism) |
3 |
36% |
64% |
|
Media and related activities |
16 |
50% |
50% |
|
|
Training |
Funding |
Advice on new supplies and supply chain |
External support |
|
Renewable energy |
75% |
100% |
75% |
50% |
|
Food and drink |
85% |
85% |
100% |
85% |
|
Aquaculture and marine economy |
40% |
80% |
60% |
80% |
|
Tourism |
55% |
85% |
70% |
65% |
|
Retail |
73% |
73% |
82% |
82% |
|
Agriculture (including crofting), land use and forestry |
0% |
0% |
100% |
0% |
|
Transport |
40% |
100% |
40% |
40% |
|
Self-employed |
50% |
50% |
100% |
50% |
|
Logistics (related to any of the sectors above) |
100% |
100% |
67% |
67% |
|
Leisure industry (music, arts, theatre, active tourism) |
36% |
71% |
50% |
64% |
|
Media and related activities |
67% |
100% |
100% |
100% |
Sector barriers to developing a decarbonisation strategy
Responses were separated into sectors to identify any differences that were present between the business types. Few responding businesses were actively tracking their carbon footprints, but only renewable energy sector participants indicated this as not a priority. Many businesses identify time and cost as the main barriers with agriculture and logistics strongly indicating that barriers are cost, time and lack of skills equally. Media sector businesses responded that lack of skills is the main barrier, whereas renewable energy states that cost is the main barrier for them. With tourism, time is the main factor given most are small or sole operator business with significant seasonal pressures.
|
Responses |
Cost |
Time |
Lack of skills |
Lack of external support |
Not a priority | |
|
Renewable energy |
3 |
100% |
67% |
33% |
67% |
67% |
|
Housing |
2 |
50% |
100% |
50% |
50% |
50% |
|
Food and drink |
18 |
44% |
66% |
50% |
44% |
22% |
|
Aquaculture and marine economy |
4 |
50% |
25% |
75% |
50% |
25% |
|
Tourism |
23 |
48% |
61% |
52% |
52% |
17% |
|
Retail |
13 |
54% |
77% |
61% |
61% |
23% |
|
Agriculture (including crofting), land use and forestry |
4 |
50% |
100% |
50% |
25% |
50% |
|
Transport |
4 |
100% |
75% |
75% |
75% |
25% |
|
Self-employed |
3 |
33% |
67% |
67% |
33% |
33% |
|
Logistics (related to any of the sectors above) |
3 |
100% |
100% |
100% |
67% |
33% |
|
Leisure industry (music, arts, theatre, active tourism) |
14 |
43% |
57% |
64% |
57% |
29% |
|
Construction/Trades |
2 |
50% |
100% |
50% |
50% |
50% |
|
Media and related activities |
2 |
50% |
68% |
100% |
50% |
0% |
|
Responses |
Cost |
Time |
Lack of skills |
Lack of external support |
Not a priority | |
|
Renewable energy |
4 |
100% |
50% |
25% |
50% |
25% |
|
Housing |
2 |
50% |
50% |
50% |
50% |
50% |
|
Food and drink |
17 |
59% |
76% |
52% |
59% |
23% |
|
Aquaculture and marine economy |
4 |
75% |
75% |
75% |
50% |
25% |
|
Tourism |
20 |
70% |
70% |
60% |
60% |
25% |
|
Retail |
12 |
75% |
83% |
83% |
83% |
42% |
|
Agriculture (including crofting), land use and forestry |
3 |
67% |
67% |
33% |
33% |
33% |
|
Transport |
5 |
80% |
40% |
40% |
60% |
20% |
|
Self-employed |
3 |
67% |
67% |
33% |
33% |
33% |
|
Logistics (related to any of the sectors above) |
3 |
100% |
100% |
100% |
100% |
67% |
|
Leisure industry (music, arts, theatre, active tourism) |
10 |
80% |
70% |
60% |
60% |
40% |
|
Construction/Trades |
2 |
50% |
50% |
50% |
50% |
50% |
|
Media and related activities |
2 |
100% |
100% |
100% |
100% |
50% |
Decarbonisation actions by businesses
The following provides the evidence on current actions being taken by the participating CNI businesses in general from the 6 islands.
| Q14 Is your organisation already taking actions to reduce your carbon footprint? | |||
| Yes | 81% | ||
| No | 8% | ||
| Not yet (planning to take action) | 8% | ||
| Other (please specify) | 4% | ||
| Note: Percentage of people who chose this answer | |||
The majority of participating businesses are actively taking steps to reduce their carbon footprint, however, as shown in Figure , these actions are largely recycling.
| Q15 What measures do you take to reduce your organisation’s carbon footprint? | |||
| Recycle | 87% | ||
| Use low carbon and recyclable packaging for your products | 38% | ||
| Use supplies and suppliers that have low carbon products | 31% | ||
| Use local suppliers and products | 49% | ||
| Use electric vehicles | 11% | ||
| Have low carbon heating in your premises | 27% | ||
| Have microgeneration like solar and wind at your premises | 13% | ||
| Use green energy supplier | 24% | ||
| Use public transport | 7% | ||
| Reduce business travel with online meetings | 38% | ||
| Invest in high quality machinery and keep it maintained | 31% | ||
| Reduce water use | 29% | ||
| Electric vehicle charging at office to encourage staff | 9% | ||
| Electric vehicle charging at premises that the public can use | 4% | ||
| Other (please specify) | 38% | ||
| Note: Percentage of people who chose this answer | |||
Sector actions to decarbonise
The following table shows the differences across the sectors from the participating CNI businesses in terms of the level of activity presently underway.
| Q14 Is your organisation already taking actions to reduce your carbon footprint? | ||||
| Responses | Yes | No | Not yet, planning to take action | |
| Renewable energy | 4 | 100% | 0% | 0% |
| Housing | 2 | 50% | 50% | 0% |
| Food and drink | 16 | 87% | 0% | 13% |
| Aquaculture and marine economy | 5 | 100% | 0% | 0% |
| Tourism | 23 | 86% | 9% | 5% |
| Retail | 13 | 77% | 0% | 23% |
| Agriculture (including crofting), land use and forestry | 3 | 33% | 33% | 0% |
| Transport | 6 | 100% | 0% | 0% |
| Self-employed | 3 | 67% | 0% | 0% |
| Logistics (related to any of the sectors above) | 3 | 33% | 33% | 33% |
| Leisure industry (music, arts, theatre, active tourism) | 15 | 80% | 7% | 14% |
| Construction/Trades | 2 | 50% | 50% | 0% |
| Media and related activities | 4 | 100% | 0% | 0% |
Skills training to help decarbonisation
| Q23 Has anyone in your organisation taken part in skills training to help your business decarbonise? | |||
| Yes | 22% | ||
| No | 78% | ||
| Q24 If yes, what type of training? | |||
| |||
| |||
| |||
| |||
| |||
| |||
| |||
| |||
| |||
| |||
| |||
| Q23 Has anyone in your organisation taken part in skills training to help your business decarbonise? | |||
| Responses | Yes | No | |
| Renewable energy | 4 | 50% | 50% |
| Housing | 2 | 50% | 50% |
| Food and drink | 20 | 20% | 80% |
| Aquaculture and marine economy | 5 | 40% | 60% |
| Tourism | 26 | 23% | 77% |
| Retail | 16 | 25% | 75% |
| Agriculture (including crofting), land use and forestry | 4 | 50% | 50% |
| Transport | 7 | 43% | 57% |
| Self-employed | 3 | 33% | 67% |
| Logistics (related to any of the sectors above) | 3 | 0% | 100% |
| Leisure industry (music, arts, theatre, active tourism) | 16 | 19% | 81% |
| Construction/Trades | 2 | 50% | 50% |
| Media and related activities | 3 | 33% | 67% |
| Q25 Do you feel you have a good understanding of the skills your organisation will need to plan and deliver actions to reduce your carbon footprint to reach carbon neutral? | |||
| Responses | Yes | No | |
| Renewable energy | 4 | 75% | 25% |
| Housing | 2 | 100% | 0% |
| Food and drink | 20 | 20% | 80% |
| Aquaculture and marine economy | 5 | 40% | 60% |
| Tourism | 26 | 27% | 73% |
| Retail | 16 | 25% | 75% |
| Agriculture (including crofting), land use and forestry | 4 | 75% | 25% |
| Transport | 0 | 43% | 57% |
| Self-employed | 3 | 33% | 67% |
| Logistics (related to any of the sectors above) | 3 | 0% | 100% |
| Leisure industry (music, arts, theatre, active tourism) | 16 | 31% | 69% |
| Construction/Trades | 2 | 100% | 0% |
| Media and related activities | 3 | 33% | 67% |
| Q26 What skills do you already have in your organisation to help deliver carbon reduction? | |||||||
| Responses | General understanding of where carbon is used | Knowledge of how to assess the carbon footprint | Technical knowledge to do bespoke carbon calculation | Knowledge of how to write a decarbonisation plan | Management and administrative skills to implement carbon reductions | Technical and specialist skills to implement carbon reductions | |
| Renewable energy | 3 | 100% | 100% | 100% | 100% | 100% | 67% |
| Housing | 2 | 0% | 0% | 50% | 50% | 0% | 0% |
| Food and drink | 11 | 90% | 27% | 9% | 9% | 9% | 9% |
| Aquaculture and marine | 2 | 100% | 50% | 50% | 50% | 50% | 50% |
| Tourism | 14 | 93% | 57% | 29% | 29% | 36% | 7% |
| Retail | 9 | 78% | 33% | 33% | 22% | 33% | 11% |
| Agriculture | 3 | 0% | 33% | 33% | 33% | 0% | 0% |
| Transport | 5 | 80% | 33% | 20% | 20% | 20% | 20% |
| Self-employed | 1 | 0% | 0% | 100% | 0% | 0% | 0% |
| Logistics | 0 | 0% | 0% | 0% | 0% | 0% | 0% |
| Leisure industry | 9 | 89% | 33% | 22% | 22% | 22% | 22% |
| Construction/Trades | 2 | 0% | 0% | 50% | 50% | 0% | 0% |
| Media and related activities | 2 | 100% | 100% | 50% | 50% | 50% | 0% |
Table 9: Existing carbon reduction skills within sectors
| Q27 What skills do you need to develop in your organisation in order to deliver carbon reduction? | |||||||
| Responses | General understanding of where carbon is used | Knowledge of how to assess the carbon footprint | Technical knowledge to do bespoke carbon calculation | Knowledge of how to write a decarbonisation plan | Management and administrative skills to implement carbon reductions | Technical and specialist skills to implement carbon reductions | |
| Renewable energy | 2 | 50% | 50% | 50% | 50% | 50% | 100% |
|
Housing |
2 |
0% |
0% |
0% |
0% |
50% | 50% |
| Food and drink | 17 | 47% | 82% | 65% | 71% | 53% | 65% |
| Aquaculture and marine | 3 | 100% | 100% | 100% | 100% | 100% | 100% |
| Tourism | 24 | 50% | 62% | 58% | 62% | 41% | 54% |
| Retail | 15 | 47% | 73% | 60% | 53% | 27% | 47% |
| Agriculture | 4 | 25% | 25% | 50% | 25% | 50% | 50% |
| Transport | 5 | 40% | 80% | 40% | 40% | 40% | 60% |
| Self-employed | 3 | 100% | 67% | 67% | 67% | 67% | 100% |
| Logistics | 3 | 100% | 100% | 67% | 100% | 67% | 67% |
| Leisure industry | 13 | 54% | 67% | 62% | 46% | 38% | 38% |
| Construction/Trades | 2 | 0% | 0% | 0% | 0% | 50% | 50% |
| Media and related activities | 3 | 33% | 33% | 67% | 67% | 33% | 67% |
| Q30 What do you see as the challenges and barriers for your organisation to building up the skills needed to achieve carbon neutral? | ||||||
| Responses | Cost | Time | Lack of skills | Lack of external support | Not a priority | |
| Renewable energy | 4 | 75% | 25% | 0% | 0% | 0% |
| Housing | 2 | 100% | 100% | 0% | 0% | 0% |
| Food and drink | 18 | 78% | 72% | 55% | 50% | 6% |
| Aquaculture and marine economy | 5 | 60% | 60% | 40% | 40% | 20% |
| Tourism | 24 | 75% | 62% | 46% | 46% | 8% |
| Retail | 14 | 71% | 78% | 64% | 64% | 0% |
| Agriculture | 4 | 75% | 100% | 25% | 0% | 0% |
| Transport | 6 | 67% | 33% | 17% | 33% | 0% |
| Self-employed | 3 | 100% | 100% | 67% | 33% | 0% |
| Logistics (related to any of the sectors above) | 3 | 67% | 67% | 67% | 67% | 0% |
| Leisure industry (music, arts, theatre, active tourism) | 14 | 85% | 78% | 50% | 50% | 14% |
| Construction/trades | 2 | 100% | 100% | 0% | 0% | 0% |
| Media and related activities | 3 | 67% | 69% | 33% | 33% | 0% |
© Published by Aquatera, 2024 on behalf of ClimateXChange. All rights reserved.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/4426
Executive summary
Aims
The purpose of this study is to deliver on a commitment in the Scottish Onshore Wind Sector Deal (SOWSD) to “publish a paper identifying the range of skills needed by industry to deliver our 2030 target” [1] and to inform the enhancement of skills and training provision to meet future sector needs.
Approach
We interviewed 22 Scottish onshore wind stakeholders between February and March 2024, including 11 developers, one owner / operator, two construction companies, two consultancies, three operation and maintenance providers, two skills and training providers and one local authority planning department. Furthermore, we developed a workforce model based on:
- the BVG Associates assessment of the pipeline of onshore wind projects in Scotland underlying their 2023 report “Scotland onshore wind pipeline analysis 2023-2030” and
- our estimates of the workforce requirements for a typical onshore wind project based on wider ITPEnergised insights from working on more than 500 onshore wind projects and validated through stakeholder consultation as part of the study.
Modelling assumptions were validated with the stakeholders above in March 2024.
Findings
- To meet the 2030 ambition, the workforce serving the onshore wind sector will need to increase from around 6,900 FTE (full time equivalent) in 2024 to a peak of around 20,500 FTE in 2027. Over 90% of these roles will be in construction and installation of wind farms. Employment by activity is shown in Figure 1. These job opportunities will only be available if estimates regarding the forthcoming onshore wind project pipeline materialise.

Figure 1: Annual FTE per onshore wind project stage.
Source: Workforce model using data from BVG Associates 2023 and consultants’ expertise.
- Overall, stakeholders felt that those working in the sector have the right skills, but there are skilled workforce shortages. In the short term, there is a need for more people to join the sector and for individuals from other sectors to be reskilled/ upskilled. Without this, the sector faces challenges in delivering new projects on time, maintaining existing wind farms and maximising economic and environmental benefits.
- Not addressing skill shortages is likely to have a severe impact on the ambition to install 20 GW of onshore wind by 2030. By 2027, our model predicts that, on average, four times more FTEs will be required for construction and installation than in 2024. Within this, five times more civil contractors will be required. More than 46% of these individuals will be required to build wind farms in Highland and Dumfries and Galloway, regions where stakeholders have highlighted is already difficult to recruit individuals. For operations and maintenance (O&M) the figures are smaller and the timeframes longer: around 2.5 times as many roles will be required in 2030 than in 2024. The regions with the highest requirement, of around 37%, are again Highland and Dumfries and Galloway[2].
- There will be significant shortages in technical roles, particularly high voltage engineers and wind turbine technicians. Across Scotland, FTE for electricity grid connections will need to increase from 1,100 in 2024 to 4,500 in 2027, a 400% increase. The number of wind turbine technician FTE will need to increase from around 465 in 2024 to almost 1,200 in 2030, a 258% increase. These will affect project development and operations if they are not resolved.
- The scarcity of skilled planners and specialist environmental consultants is set to continue. An average of 100 FTE planners and 434 FTE environmental consultants is estimated to be required across Scotland each year to enable wind farm developments between 2024 and 2030.
- Stakeholders have identified a growth need for digital skills for data analysis and drone inspections to improve turbine performance monitoring.
- There will be a need for diverse skillsets within the sector, which encompass project management, stakeholder engagement and regulatory compliance.
Recommendations
- The Scottish Government, together with partners in other public agencies, industry and the education sector, has the opportunity to address expected skill shortages in relation to the 20 GW capacity ambition by 2030. Investing in skills development is not only essential for the success of individual onshore wind projects but also for Scotland’s broader renewable energy goals. Addressing these shortages will require a comprehensive approach, including workforce development initiatives, training programmes and industry-academy collaborations. In this regard, collaboration between stakeholders from the public, private and education sectors will be crucial to bridge skills divides and unlock the full potential of Scotland’s onshore wind resources.
- Undertake a purposeful awareness raising programme of career opportunities within the sector, the transferrable nature of the skills developed and that many job categories in this sector will be required for a long time.
- Implement targeted campaigns in rural areas where most new installations will take place, to demonstrate highly skilled jobs for local people, many of which pay well above the average UK salary.
Glossary / Abbreviations table
|
CAD |
Computer-aided Design |
|
CITB |
Construction Industry Training Board |
|
DNO |
Distribution Network Operator |
|
dwpa |
Danish Wind Power Academy |
|
eBoP |
Electrical Balance of Plant |
|
ECoW |
Ecological Clerk of Works |
|
ECU |
Energy Consents Unit (Scottish Government) |
|
EHV |
Extra High Voltage |
|
EU |
European Union |
|
FTE |
Full-time Equivalent Employee (an FTE can be one full-time member of staff or multiple part-time employees) |
|
GVA |
Gross Value Added |
|
GW |
Gigawatt |
|
GWEC |
Global Wind Energy Council |
|
GWO |
Global Wind Organisation |
|
HNC |
Higher National Certificate |
|
HND |
Higher National Diploma |
|
HV |
High Voltage |
|
IEA |
International Energy Agency |
|
ISP |
Independent Service Provider |
|
IT |
Information Technology |
|
LA |
Local Authority |
|
LCREE |
Low Carbon Renewable Energy (data published by ONS) |
|
MW |
Megawatt |
|
NVQ |
National Vocational Qualification |
|
O&M |
Operations and Maintenance |
|
OEM |
Original Equipment Manufacturer |
|
OHL |
Overhead Line |
|
ONS |
Office for National Statistics |
|
REPD |
Renewable Energy Planning Database |
|
SAP |
Senior Authorised Person |
|
SCADA |
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition |
|
SCQF |
Scottish Credit and Qualifications Framework |
|
SOWSD |
Scottish Onshore Wind Sector Deal |
|
TSA |
Turbine Supply Agreement |
|
TWh |
Terawatt Hour |
Introduction
Background
Onshore wind is a mature technology, with the first commercial windfarms built in the 1980s in the US and in Denmark. Scotland’s first commercial onshore windfarm, Hagshaw Hill, started generating electricity in 1995. Rapid expansion in the last 30 years has seen onshore wind supplying electricity in countries all over the world. An overview of the recent developments in the global onshore wind industry is provided in Appendix A.
The Scottish Government has recognised the importance of onshore and offshore wind to supply the increased amounts of electricity that will be necessary to achieve net zero carbon emissions by 2045. In the Onshore Wind Policy Statement, the Scottish Government stated its ambition to increase the installed onshore wind capacity of 9 GW in 2021 to a minimum of 20 GW by 2030 (Scottish Government, 2022). Furthermore, the Government intends that this should benefit communities across Scotland and allow a just transition of the workforce to skilled jobs within the onshore wind sector. The statement was followed in 2023 by the Scottish Onshore Wind Sector Deal (SOWSD), which committed to support the delivery of the necessary skills and training across Scotland to contribute to a just transition and realise the 20 GW ambition (Scottish Government, 2023).
Purpose of this study
The purpose of this study is to deliver on a commitment in the SOWSD and in turn, to:
- understand the jobs and skills requirements to support the deployment of onshore wind
- provide the analysis from which the enhancement of current skills and training provisions to meet future sector needs can be developed.
The aim is to map the annual numbers of jobs and skills needed to achieve 20 GW of installed onshore wind capacity by 2030. The specific objectives are to:
- estimate the number and types of jobs required annually in each stage of an onshore wind project
- estimate the geographic spread of these jobs across Scotland
- analyse the current level of skills available for onshore wind and the demand for these skills
- understand whether there are any skills gaps or shortages within the onshore wind industry in Scotland
- understand future demands for skills to enable the 2030 target to be achieved
- identify any skills gaps and make recommendations as to how these might be addressed.
Study methodology
We interviewed 22 Scottish onshore wind stakeholders between February and March 2024. These included 11 developers, one owner / operator, two construction companies, two consultancies, three operation and maintenance providers, two skills and training providers and one local authority planning department. Furthermore, we developed a workforce model that was based on analysis undertaken by BVG Associates of the pipeline of onshore wind projects in Scotland (BVG Associates, 2023), combined with the ITPEnergised assessment of the job requirements for a typical onshore wind project. This provided an assessment of job requirements for each project stage of a wind farm. Workforce numbers, job roles and modelling assumptions were validated in writing with the consulted stakeholders in March 2024.
In the remainder of the document, Section 4 provides an overview of the onshore wind sector in Scotland and a description of the job roles associated with each stage of the project lifecycle. Section 5 presents a summary of the modelling methodology and estimates of current and future job numbers. Section 6 describes the skills associated with the job types identified in Sections 4 and 5 and outlines the findings from our stakeholder engagement regarding skills shortages. Section 7 outlines options for addressing skills shortages from the stakeholder engagement and an international overview. Section 8 provides conclusions and recommendations.
Project pipeline, lifecycle and associated job roles
We reviewed the UK Government’s Renewable Energy Planning database (Department for Energy Security and Net Zero, 2023) to identify the project lifecycle phase of all onshore wind farms in Scotland. At the end of 2023, there was approximately 9.8 GW of installed onshore wind capacity in Scotland. This was distributed across 329 operational sites. The largest of these is at Clyde Wind Farm (operated by SSE Renewables in South Lanarkshire) with an installed capacity of 350 MW, and the smallest is Lower Rumster in Highland with an installed capacity of 0.2 MW. Highland has the largest amount of installed wind capacity (2.12 GW) followed by South Lanarkshire (1.352 GW) and Dumfries & Galloway (1.122 GW). All other local authorities have less than 1 GW installed capacity.
As of September 2023, there were 240 sites either under construction, awaiting construction or with planning applications submitted. These totalled 13.7 GW, with one greater than 500 MW (Scoop Hill Wind Farm in Dumfries & Galloway) and two greater than 400 MW (Viking Wind Farm in Shetland and Teviot Wind Farm in Borders). Another 28 of these windfarms are greater than 100 MW in installed capacity.
Onshore wind project lifecycle, job roles and skills levels
A typical onshore wind project is led by a project developer, who will normally operate the wind farm when it is operational. The developer is supported by a number of contractors and sub-contractors. An onshore wind farm project has five phases with the following durations: feasibility (1 year), development (3-4 years), construction (1-2 years), operation and maintenance (25+ years) and end-of-life. See Figure 1 and detailed descriptions of each project phase below. The project lifecycle structure is based on the ITPEnergised experience of consulting and managing over 500 projects for onshore wind developers. It also aligns with the onshore wind project lifecycle used in recent analysis undertaken in relation to Scottish Government policy (see Section 5). An overview of each project phase and typical workforce composition, in terms of full-time equivalent (FTE[3]) positions and job roles, is provided in Table 1. For the purposes of this study, Optimat and ITPEnergised have developed a model based on a ‘typical’ wind farm which has 90 MW capacity and comprises fifteen 6 MW turbines[4].
Figure 1: Onshore wind project phases.
Feasibility is the initial phase where developers engage with landowners and review potential onshore wind farm locations. This is followed by high-level analysis to understand whether the site has potential and whether there are any obvious issues that might prevent a wind farm being developed. Issues can include connections to the electricity grid, access to the site and whether there are any existing wind farms neighbouring the site. Feasibility can last up to a year and requires around four FTEs (see Table 1).
|
Job role |
FTE |
|
Project manager |
0.5 |
|
Consultant – site design and modelling |
0.2 |
|
Consultant – energy yield assessors and WindPro design specialists |
0.3 |
|
Consultant – grid connection consultancy and application |
0.3 |
|
Planning officers |
0.3 |
|
Environmental consultant |
0.3 |
|
Financial analyst |
2 |
|
Total |
4 |
During the Development phase more detailed assessments are carried out by the developer with support from specialised environmental and technology consultancy firms. These include assessment of potential impacts on ecology, ornithology, geology, hydrology, peatland, noise & vibration, cultural heritage, archaeology, forestry, landscape & visual impact, aviation, and radar and telecommunications. It will also include an assessment of energy yields and some initial engineering design to understand costs. These are essential to the developer’s business case and planning application. During this phase the developer will engage with planning officers within local authorities and the Scottish Government’s Energy Consents Unit (ECU), and with statutory bodies (such as NatureScot) to secure planning permission. The planning process currently takes between two and four years, depending on whether there are any objections to the application that require a public inquiry. At the same time the developer will engage with the appropriate Distribution Network Operator (DNO) to secure a date for connection of the wind farm to the national electricity grid. Finally, the developer will engage with the local community to address any concerns they may have at the earliest possible stage. Overall, this can be the longest phase pre-operations, typically three to four years and requiring around ten FTEs (see Table 2).
|
Job role |
FTE |
|
Project manager |
2 |
|
Planning officers |
0.8 |
|
Environmental consultant |
4.5 |
|
DNO case worker |
0.3 |
|
Consultant – grid connection consultancy and application |
0.3 |
|
Technical consultant |
2 |
|
Total |
10 |
When it comes to Construction and installation, developers will typically appoint one or more principal contractors, including the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) of the wind turbines. This initial procurement phase takes at least six months, and sometimes longer for wind turbines. The timing is also critical as most construction takes place over the summer months. Each of the primary contractors will subcontract others to fulfil local or specialised roles, including building access roads, foundations for turbines, substations and other onsite buildings, and delivering balance of plant (all of the cabling, components and equipment required to deliver electricity to the grid). These contractors, in turn, may also have subcontractors. There is, therefore, a complex supply chain hierarchy. The final part of this phase is physical connection of the wind farm to the grid, which is undertaken by specialist high voltage engineers working for the DNO. Overall, the construction and installation phase lasts at least one to two years, and requires around 148 FTEs across 16 different roles (see Table 3).
|
Job role |
FTE |
|---|---|
|
Project manager |
1 |
|
Planning officers |
0.2 |
|
Environmental consultant |
1 |
|
Civils contractor |
50 |
|
Civil engineer |
2 |
|
Crane/lifting contractor |
15 |
|
Grid connection installation |
35 |
|
DNO EHV commissioning engineer |
4 |
|
Transport operative |
15 |
|
Logistics manager |
1 |
|
Back-office support |
5 |
|
Health & safety officer |
3 |
|
Environmental consultant – ECoW |
0.3 |
|
TSA/OEM project delivery team |
3 |
|
Electrical engineer |
2 |
|
eBoP contractor |
10 |
|
Total |
148 |
Once a wind farm is operational, the OEM that supplied the wind turbines will generally provide Operation & Maintenance services for up to 10 years. The operator will subsequently take out a maintenance contract with an independent service provider (ISP), who will generally service all of that operator’s sites. Most ISPs operate across the whole of the UK, but usually specialise in O&M for a few manufacturers, as technicians must be certified to work on specific wind turbine models. Operators of larger wind farms may, in addition, directly employ a few wind turbine technicians in addition to ISPs performing the bulk of O&M activities. Our ‘typical’ wind farm will require around five FTEs across 10 different roles (see Table 4).
|
Job role |
FTE |
|
Technical consultant |
0.1 |
|
Back-office support |
0.1 |
|
Health & safety officer |
0.1 |
|
Wind turbine technician |
4.2 |
|
HV technician |
0.1 |
|
IT manager |
0.1 |
|
Asset manager |
0.2 |
|
Crane/lifting contractor |
0.01 |
|
Logistics manager |
0.3 |
|
Electrician |
0.01 |
|
Total |
5 |
At the End of life stage (typically 25 years), the operator can choose to decommission the wind farm, extend its operational life, or repower with larger turbines. Life extension is often sought as this is the most economical option. In this case the existing turbines are retained in place. Repowering can generate additional revenue from larger turbines, capitalising on the fact that these older sites tend to be in the most optimal locations for onshore wind. In the case of repowering, however, the operator/owner must essentially begin the project lifecycle again. For the purposes of our ‘typical’ wind farm we are assuming a similar level of FTE requirements to construction and installation. This is because the majority of end-of-life activities will not take place until later in this decade, at which point new turbines will be typically at least two to three times as powerful as the existing turbines. In addition, existing turbines might not be supported by the OEMs due to their age, making O&M more difficult (see Table 5).
|
Job role |
FTE |
|---|---|
|
Project manager |
1 |
|
Planning Officers |
0.2 |
|
Environmental consultant |
1 |
|
Civils contractor |
50 |
|
Civil engineer |
2 |
|
Crane/lifting contractor |
15 |
|
Grid connection installation |
35 |
|
DNO EHV commissioning engineer |
4 |
|
Transport operative |
15 |
|
Logistics manager |
1 |
|
Back-office support |
5 |
|
Health & safety officer |
3 |
|
Environmental consultant – ECoW |
0.3 |
|
TSA/OEM project delivery team |
3 |
|
Electrical engineer |
2 |
|
eBoP contractor |
10 |
|
Total |
148 |
Although specialised consultancies have been described for the development phase, these can also be engaged during any of the other phases. Overall, this highlights the broad range of roles that are required for a wind farm project. For the technical roles in particular, individuals require a significant number of years’ experience (see Appendix C). Tables 1 to 5 also illustrate that usually a wind farm project will employ most people during construction and installation and end-of-life phases. The next section provides a more detailed analysis of this.
In addition to the original turbines installed on the project site, wind farms require components to be manufactured and supplied throughout the project’s lifecycle. There are no manufacturers of large (multi-MW) wind turbines in the UK, and many of the components within these turbines are also not manufactured in the UK. This means that turbines and their parts must be imported. There is, however, end-of-life and remanufacturing capability within Scotland. Renewable Parts (based in Renfrew and Lochgilphead) refurbishes turbine components such as gearboxes for resupply to companies that provide operations and maintenance services. ReBlade, based in Glasgow and Dumfries, specialises in the decommissioning and recycling of blades and nacelles.
Current and future job numbers and their geographic distribution
Estimating current and future job numbers and types
The rapidly expanding activity in the onshore wind industry, in alignment with the nation’s net zero targets, represents a significant economic opportunity for Scotland. To enable this scale of activity, the sector will require a skilled and experienced workforce. It is, therefore, important to understand the overall number of FTE jobs that will be active in the sector on an annual basis, as well as the overall scale of economic activity in job creation in 2024-2030. This is an important distinction to ensure a clear understanding that some of the jobs will be temporary in nature (e.g., construction-related), whilst others will be permanent for the lifecycle of the project (e.g., operations).
The traditional economic modelling approach for estimating FTE numbers is based on the Gross Value Added (GVA) of the sector, calculated as a function of its turnover using historical ratios of these figures. A major limitation of this approach is the overall lack of detail as this method provides a broad overview rather than detailed insights into specific job roles within an industry. It does not easily break down workforce needs into different categories of employment, such as managerial, technical, or operational roles. Further, this approach relies on historical data and static assumptions about the relationship between economic output and employment. Most importantly, in sectors undergoing rapid transformation, such as renewable energy, the past may not be a reliable predictor of the future. Innovations, cost reductions, and changes in regulatory or market environments can significantly impact both GVA and employment levels in ways that historical data cannot predict.
To address these challenges, we developed an approach that makes use of a simulated model of a ‘typical’ onshore wind farm, ITPEnergised in-house expertise of equivalent projects, and refined and tested this through in-depth stakeholder consultation. This was combined with additional data sources as discussed with the study Steering Group. The model structure is presented in Figure 2. This is, to our knowledge, the first systematic attempt to conceptualise workforce composition in an onshore wind farm project.
The development of a ‘typical’ onshore windfarm model and approach for estimating FTE requirements per project phase and per job role associated with each phase are described in Appendix D.
The FTE predictions were triangulated against data in the Low Carbon and Renewable Energy Economy (LCREE) estimates (Office for National Statistics, 2021) that have been analysed and interpreted, in detail, by Ramboll UK in 2023 (Ramboll, 2023). Using the corresponding onshore wind project data from the Renewable Energy Planning Database (Department for Energy Security and Net Zero, 2021), we calculated the estimate of FTE per GW in construction and operations. Details on the validation process and data sources can be found in Appendix D.
Finally, we combined our model of a ‘typical’ onshore wind farm, with data from BVG Associates regarding the pipeline of the onshore wind projects in the timeframe 2024-2030, to project workforce requirements on an annual and regional basis. The BVG Associates database expands on the data contained in the REPD by forecasting wind farm project movement through different project stages up until 2030. It also includes information on planned wind farms that are not yet in the public domain.
An overview of our approach is provided in Figure 2.

Figure 2: Overview of workforce model developed within this study.
Figure 3 provides an overview of projected FTE by project stage on an annual basis to 2030. This highlights the large number of jobs in construction with a peak in 2027. O&M activities are expected to increase steadily throughout this decade and require almost 1,500 FTE by 2030. Significant end-of-life activities are not expected to begin until 2029.

Figure 3: Annual FTE per onshore wind project stage.
Using the capacity predictions on an annual basis, we calculated the number of FTE per job role per year in 2024-2030 (see Table 6). In total, the forecasted scale of activity will require an average of 14,256 FTE each year until 2030, with a particularly high demand for civils contractors and individuals that will deliver the grid connection and installation. It is, however, important to note that the majority of jobs in the onshore wind construction sector might not be sustained in the long term as currently the onshore wind project pipeline predictions show a decrease in activity from 2028 onwards. However, these construction jobs are highly transferrable to other infrastructure projects, including in offshore wind. In contrast, jobs created in operations and maintenance are likely to be sustained over the lifespan of an onshore wind project.
|
Job roles |
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Civils contractor |
1578 |
3429 |
4785 |
6416 |
5089 |
5457 |
3064 |
|
Grid connection installation |
1105 |
2400 |
3350 |
4491 |
3562 |
3820 |
2145 |
|
Crane/lifting contractor |
474 |
1030 |
1437 |
1926 |
1528 |
1639 |
922 |
|
Transport operative |
473 |
1029 |
1436 |
1925 |
1526 |
1637 |
919 |
|
eBoP contractor |
315 |
686 |
957 |
1283 |
1017 |
1091 |
613 |
|
Wind turbine technician |
465 |
531 |
596 |
776 |
931 |
1097 |
1198 |
|
Back-office support |
169 |
356 |
493 |
660 |
531 |
572 |
335 |
|
Environmental consultant |
792 |
696 |
554 |
462 |
217 |
208 |
110 |
|
DNO EHV commissioning engineer |
126 |
274 |
383 |
513 |
407 |
436 |
245 |
|
Health & safety officer |
106 |
218 |
301 |
403 |
327 |
353 |
212 |
|
TSA/OEM project delivery team |
95 |
206 |
287 |
385 |
305 |
327 |
184 |
|
Project manager |
263 |
255 |
256 |
228 |
167 |
124 |
73 |
|
Civil engineer |
63 |
137 |
192 |
257 |
204 |
218 |
123 |
|
Electrical engineer |
63 |
137 |
192 |
257 |
204 |
218 |
123 |
|
Logistics manager |
64 |
106 |
138 |
183 |
167 |
186 |
146 |
|
Financial Analyst |
307 |
222 |
143 |
52 |
21 |
7 |
12 |
|
Planning Officers |
176 |
152 |
141 |
104 |
72 |
34 |
21 |
|
Consultant – Grid connection |
92 |
73 |
59 |
34 |
21 |
5 |
5 |
|
Asset Manager |
22 |
25 |
28 |
37 |
44 |
52 |
56 |
|
DNO case worker |
46 |
39 |
37 |
26 |
18 |
4 |
3 |
|
HV Technician |
11 |
13 |
14 |
18 |
22 |
26 |
28 |
|
IT manager |
11 |
13 |
14 |
18 |
22 |
26 |
28 |
|
Consultant – Energy Yield & WindPro |
46 |
33 |
22 |
8 |
3 |
1 |
2 |
|
Consultant – Site Design & Modelling |
31 |
22 |
14 |
5 |
2 |
1 |
1 |
|
Electrician |
1 |
1 |
1 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
3 |
|
FTE |
6894 |
12082 |
15828 |
20469 |
16409 |
17541 |
10570 |
The colour code is indicative of the relative magnitude of FTEs required; green indicates low and red indicates high, a darker colour indicates a higher number.
Further detail of FTE requirements for different project stages is provided in Appendix D.
Predicting the geographical distribution of onshore wind skills demands
We used the BVG Associates data, as requested by the Steering Group, to analyse workforce requirements for different project stages on an annual basis and at a local authority (LA) level. The data for construction and installation, and O&M are presented in Table 7 and Table 8, respectively, as these project stages have the largest workforce requirements (in the period to 2030), the vast majority of which will be needed onsite. This highlights that Dumfries & Galloway, and Highland local authorities will have the highest workforce demands. Each of these LAs is projected to need more than 20% of the total construction and installation workforce requirements in 2026 and 2027, and Highland will also require 21% of the total workforce in 2028. In terms of O&M, Highland will require more than 20% of the projected workforce in each of 2027, 2028, 2029 and 2030.
It is also clear from this analysis that several Local Authorities will have little or no onshore wind activity throughout this period, as shown in Table 7 and Table 8 below.
|
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Aberdeenshire Council |
81 |
149 |
283 |
696 |
806 |
424 |
191 |
|
Argyll and Bute Council |
0 |
345 |
1024 |
1748 |
2317 |
1421 |
571 |
|
Dumfries & Galloway Council |
416 |
2028 |
3723 |
4335 |
2013 |
1573 |
725 |
|
East Ayrshire Council |
0 |
323 |
704 |
2018 |
1669 |
1398 |
35 |
|
East Lothian Council |
0 |
0 |
230 |
230 |
230 |
0 |
0 |
|
Highland Council |
514 |
1788 |
2819 |
4173 |
3071 |
2615 |
1834 |
|
Midlothian Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
208 |
208 |
208 |
0 |
|
Moray Council |
162 |
1232 |
1321 |
948 |
344 |
56 |
0 |
|
North Ayrshire Council |
2 |
2 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
North Lanarkshire Council |
0 |
68 |
68 |
0 |
0 |
475 |
475 |
|
Orkney Islands Council |
51 |
51 |
46 |
46 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Perth & Kinross Council |
0 |
129 |
129 |
129 |
397 |
863 |
466 |
|
Scottish Borders Council |
955 |
1436 |
1095 |
909 |
1022 |
981 |
1012 |
|
Shetland Islands Council |
855 |
93 |
475 |
475 |
382 |
0 |
0 |
|
South Ayrshire Council |
383 |
561 |
699 |
694 |
516 |
153 |
0 |
|
South Lanarkshire Council |
1024 |
1248 |
258 |
883 |
663 |
538 |
38 |
|
Stirling Council |
0 |
195 |
195 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Unknown* |
0 |
0 |
733 |
733 |
116 |
2644 |
2423 |
|
West Dunbartonshire Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
257 |
257 |
257 |
|
West Lothian Council |
107 |
167 |
38 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Western Isles Council / Comhairle nan Eilan Siar |
12 |
0 |
0 |
168 |
554 |
386 |
386 |
|
Total |
4562 |
9813 |
13840 |
18393 |
14564 |
13990 |
8412 |
*unknown refers to projects that have been confirmed by BVGA with developers that are not yet in the public domain. N.B., no new wind farms are forecast to be built in the following local authorities in the period to 2030: Aberdeen City, Angus, Clackmannanshire, Dundee City, East Dunbartonshire, East Renfrewshire, Edinburgh City, Falkirk, Fife, Glasgow City, Inverclyde, and Renfrewshire. The colour code is indicative of the relative magnitude of FTEs required; green indicates low and red indicates high, a darker colour indicates a higher number.
|
Local authority |
2023 |
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Aberdeenshire Council |
51 |
55 |
55 |
63 |
63 |
87 |
99 |
107 |
|
Angus Council |
2 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
|
Argyll and Bute Council |
42 |
39 |
39 |
50 |
58 |
115 |
177 |
188 |
|
Clackmannanshire Council |
5 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
|
Dumfries & Galloway Council |
112 |
112 |
124 |
146 |
280 |
332 |
382 |
395 |
|
East Ayrshire Council |
90 |
90 |
90 |
96 |
127 |
141 |
210 |
158 |
|
East Lothian Council |
15 |
15 |
15 |
15 |
15 |
27 |
27 |
27 |
|
East Renfrewshire Council |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
|
Falkirk Council |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
|
Fife Council |
9 |
9 |
9 |
9 |
9 |
9 |
9 |
9 |
|
Highland Council |
212 |
214 |
224 |
252 |
335 |
422 |
486 |
547 |
|
Inverclyde Council |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
|
Midlothian Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
11 |
11 |
|
Moray Council |
50 |
50 |
50 |
73 |
114 |
129 |
132 |
132 |
|
North Ayrshire Council |
13 |
13 |
13 |
13 |
13 |
13 |
13 |
11 |
|
North Lanarkshire Council |
29 |
29 |
29 |
32 |
32 |
32 |
32 |
47 |
|
Orkney Islands Council |
5 |
5 |
7 |
7 |
9 |
9 |
9 |
8 |
|
Perth & Kinross Council |
30 |
30 |
30 |
30 |
37 |
37 |
58 |
82 |
|
Scottish Borders Council |
74 |
77 |
123 |
140 |
154 |
174 |
202 |
218 |
|
Shetland Islands Council |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
6 |
25 |
25 |
25 |
|
South Ayrshire Council |
55 |
55 |
67 |
75 |
84 |
103 |
111 |
111 |
|
South Lanarkshire Council |
135 |
139 |
193 |
193 |
206 |
213 |
239 |
241 |
|
Stirling Council |
16 |
16 |
16 |
26 |
26 |
26 |
26 |
26 |
|
Unknown* |
0 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
41 |
41 |
41 |
129 |
|
West Dunbartonshire Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
13 |
|
West Lothian Council |
18 |
20 |
26 |
28 |
28 |
28 |
28 |
28 |
|
Western Isles Council / Comhairle nan Eilan Siar |
4 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
14 |
14 |
34 |
|
Total |
980 |
996 |
1138 |
1276 |
1661 |
1994 |
2349 |
2566 |
*unknown refers to projects that have been confirmed by BVGA with developers that are not yet in the public domain. N.B., no operational wind farms are forecast in the following local authorities in the period to 2030: Aberdeen City, Dundee City, East Dunbartonshire, Edinburgh City, Glasgow City, and Renfrewshire. The colour code is indicative of the relative magnitude of FTEs required; green indicates low and red indicates high, a darker colour indicates a higher number.
Workforce distributions for other project stages per Local Authorities are presented in Appendix E.
Skill requirements and shortages
A programme of stakeholder interviews was undertaken to provide greater insight to the job roles and specific skills that will be needed to achieve the ambition of 20 GW by 2030. In total, 35 stakeholders, that are undertaking different activities across different onshore wind project stages, were contacted; 22 of these stakeholders were interviewed (see
Figure 4), including 11 developers, 2 O&M, 2 experts in skills/training, 2 from consultancies, 2 from construction, 1 owner/operator and 1 from other expertise.
Figure 4: Stakeholder organisations that were interviewed as part of this study.
Stakeholders were asked to provide their views on the following topics (see Appendix F for the full list of interview topics):
- lifecycle of a typical onshore wind project
- project-specific workforce requirements
- workforce composition and numbers
- skill level assessment
- project development challenges
- adaptation to technological advancements
- collaboration with educational institutions
- attracting and retaining talent
- impact of policy changes
- incorporating circular economy principles
- other aspects that can constrain projects.
All of those interviewed were optimistic about the future of onshore wind in Scotland, with nine (41%) indicating that they expect significant increases in turnover and recruitment in their companies as a result. However, all were quite clear that there are a number of constraints that would need to be addressed in order for this to happen. As a result, six (27%) think that their current project pipelines will not be fully realised until after 2030.
A summary of the responses regarding skills shortages is provided in the following section. The stakeholder engagement has identified significant reservations regarding the feasibility of the project pipeline implementation due to constraints other than skill shortages. These further insights are presented in Appendix G.
Specific skills shortages
Overall, based on interview responses there is significant competition for skilled and experienced people across many different job roles within the onshore wind sector. Thirteen (59%) reported significant competition for experienced members of staff, and nine (41%) for skilled staff in general, across several roles. Six (59%), including four of the developers, specifically noted that headhunting of senior staff was a routine occurrence. Furthermore, recruitment and staff retention are challenging for those that operate in more remote locations – identified by eight (36%). Several specific skills shortages were identified, and these are described as follows:
Wind turbine technicians: although industry sources indicated that a single technician can maintain ten individual turbines, in practice all ISPs, and two operators, noted that two or three wind turbine technicians are needed to do so. The reasons for this are two-fold. Any turbine undergoing maintenance must have at least two technicians working on it for health and safety reasons, one of whom must have a certified electrical qualification. Secondly, a technician will typically have experience of two or three turbines, yet there is a broad range of manufacturers and models (including legacy models). Both operators and ISPs indicated that there is already a shortage of wind turbine technicians (nine or 41% of all stakeholders interviewed). Typically, ISPs recruit individuals from other sectors where they have gained relevant expertise in an electrical, mechanical, or hydraulic engineering discipline. Feedback from all three ISPs indicates that having experience of working safely with the electrical and mechanical systems that are present in wind turbines is more important than detailed knowledge of the turbines themselves. These individuals will have a minimum NVQ level 3 / SCQF level 6 qualification and are trained on specific wind turbine technologies by their new employer, either in-house or via specialist training providers. This is a process that can take between one and two years. Two of the ISPs and one of the developers interviewed had worked directly with the further education sector to develop relevant wind turbine technician training. Staff turnover with ISPs is relatively high at 10-20%, particularly when individuals have experience and higher-level certifications. This is reported to be due to a combination of long working hours and, in some cases, significant travel requirements and/or working away from home. Some of these individuals move to offshore wind where thirteen (59%) of stakeholders reported that salaries are higher. Four (18%) specifically stated that this attracts younger workers in particular.
High voltage engineers: of those interviewed, fourteen (64%), including all of the developers, specifically stated that there is a shortage of electrical engineers in general, and high voltage engineers with Senior Authorised Person (SAP) accreditation in particular. These individuals are accredited to work safely on high-voltage equipment, to connect and maintain grid connections, and typically have at least five years’ experience. The shortage of individuals with SAP accreditation will become more pressing as onshore (and offshore) wind industries are reliant on adequate grid connections, and grid operators are undertaking significant expansion to meet these needs, which also requires high voltage engineers.
Planning officers: although principally employed by local authorities and the ECU, stakeholders noted the importance of individuals with planning experience to developers’ operations with six (27%) stating that they were aware of planning officers being actively recruited to assist with onshore wind planning applications. What this means, however, is that local authorities (and the ECU within the Scottish Government) have become limited in terms of their resources to review onshore wind farm applications. This results in delays to the consenting process, with some developers indicating that it can add several years onto the project development stage.
Speciality consultants: operators, developers and consultancy firms all agree that there is a shortage of specialist consultancy expertise covering both environmental and technical aspects. These individuals can either work within a development company or for a consultancy firm, that is then subcontracted by the developer during different project stages. The reason for this shortage is primarily because the specialist consulting market was relatively small until the large expansion of onshore and offshore renewable energy installations increased the demand for individuals with niche skills. As with other skilled individuals in the onshore wind sector, there is ample evidence of headhunting taking place, with six (27%) of stakeholders reporting high turnover of consultants and two developers indicating that they had used specialist recruitment agencies. This process can take more than 12 months and often requires the company to offer enhanced employment packages to secure the right individuals.
Civils and construction: this sector has seen a marked downturn in workforce numbers due to COVID, BREXIT and, more recently, inflationary increases that have seen construction costs spiral. The issue is that there is more than enough work available for remaining construction companies and they can afford to choose the most lucrative contracts. Given the uncertainties and delays regarding when onshore wind projects may progress to the construction and installation stage, it is becoming an increasing concern to developers (noted by two in particular) that they can secure the necessary resources. This becomes a greater issue for smaller windfarms and those in more remote locations. The constraints facing the construction sector have been confirmed by recent analysis from the Construction Industry Training Board (CITB), which indicates that 19,950 extra construction workers will be needed in Scotland before 2027 (approximately 3,910 new starts per year) (CITB, 2023).
Digital skills: of those interviewed 14 (64%) also identified a growing need for digital skills. This ranged from the ability to undertake analysis of large datasets that are produced from the sensor systems now embedded within modern turbines, to the use of drones to visually inspect turbine blades and nacelles without having to climb the turbine. Employing individuals with such skills allows operators and ISPs to monitor turbine performance remotely and more effectively, and to identify issues and take preventative action at an earlier point, thus minimising turbine downtime. SCADA, IT and data managers were also highlighted as needed to oversee the installation and operation of such systems.
Other specific skilled roles that were identified by those interviewed included: project managers (with specific experience in different onshore wind project stages and disciplines – eight interviewees), stakeholder engagement specialists (to work with LAs, landowners and local communities – seven interviewees), procurement specialists (two interviewees), legal and financial experts (two interviewees), regulatory compliance experts (one interviewee), energy traders (to understand the financial processes of energy management and trading on the market – one interviewee), quantity surveyors (one interviewee), CAD technicians (one interviewee) and operational control room staff (one interviewee).
Skills challenges in remote locations
As already noted, many of the wind farms that are within the planning process are located in remote regions, including Highland, Dumfries & Galloway, and Argyll & Bute. Of those interviewed eight (36%) stated that it was difficult to recruit and retain a local workforce for construction and installation and then O&M of a wind farm in remote areas, with four highlighting Highland, Dumfries & Galloway, and Argyll & Bute as being particularly challenging. Instead, those working on these project stages often travel from outside the area and spend up to two weeks onsite and two weeks off. Two of the ISPs operate both local and regional (travelling) teams as a result but find that it can be difficult to recruit and retain people in these regional teams. From the regional perspective, the remote and rural areas often struggle to support, cater, and accommodate the large number of temporary workforces in construction phases of projects.
Sectors competing for skills required in onshore wind
The onshore wind sector is heavily influenced by a number of other sectors, mainly offshore wind, but also wider infrastructure development.
Offshore wind uses many of the same skillsets as onshore wind, meaning that workers can transfer relatively easily from one sector to the other. Feedback from 13 (59%) of stakeholders interviewed during this study indicates that salaries tend to be higher for offshore wind, to compensate people for long periods away from home (typically two weeks) and longer shifts (generally longer hours and seven days a week). This observation is also supported by those providing training (AIS Group, 2024). Two developers and two ISPs that were interviewed as part of this study suggested that younger workers, in particular, were attracted by the higher salaries in offshore wind.
There are a number of large infrastructure projects taking place across the UK, including transport (e.g., HS2 and electrifying the rail network), decommissioning of nuclear power stations, upgrading and reinforcing the electrical grid (in anticipation of increased renewable electricity generation), and upgrades to the national gas network. Each of these needs a cohort of workers with construction and engineering, as well as other skills. Four (18%) stakeholders that were interviewed as part of this study highlighted their concerns of staff shortages in construction companies.
Altogether, this means that there is high competition between sectors for similar skilled workers and the services of the companies that employ them. Overall, nine (41%) of stakeholders indicated a shortage of skilled people affecting the wider sector. This, in turn, can cause delays to project starts and for projects to take longer than originally planned.
The emerging need and opportunities for remanufacturing
Four interviewees noted that lead times for securing wind turbines for new installations were increasing (18 months was quoted by one), and that parts were not always readily available. One stakeholder stated that they were aware of turbines that were idle because it had not been possible to secure the necessary parts.
This offers an opportunity to enhance Scotland’s remanufacturing sector. The ISPs that were consulted indicated that they routinely source remanufactured parts from UK, Danish and Dutch suppliers, and, in some cases, they can do so more quickly than new parts can be provided by OEMs. With the increasing age of wind turbine installations, and with many of the older models no longer manufactured, it becomes even more pressing to have a domestic supply chain.
Options for addressing skills shortages
Feedback from stakeholder engagement
The overriding sentiment is that the skill shortages need to be addressed urgently through encouraging more people into the sector. In the short term, this means attracting people with some existing, relevant and transferrable skills and experience to address current shortages. These individuals will have some understanding of what is required of them from their previous roles but will need to be supported through retraining and upskilling. These roles could be technical, managerial or operational. Given the projected growth of the sector and the small size of some of the companies operating within onshore wind, and ISPs in particular, it is clear that this will require external support.
At the same time, there needs to be a greater effort to encourage younger talent to enter the sector. These will be people coming through further and higher education systems via apprenticeships, or certificate, diploma and degree programmes. These individuals will be critical in three to five years’ time when onshore wind activity is expected to be at its peak. For those entering technical roles, there will be a need to ensure greater opportunities for practical, on-the-job experience. In this regard, increasing the intake and scope of apprenticeships and training schemes, such as the Wind Training Network (ESP, 2024), will be important. This network, established by ESP, has 11 further education institutions as its members but is only delivering between 70 and 80 trained individuals per year[5]. On its own, this is far too small to have a significant impact. There is, therefore, a need for more strategic and wider intervention to meet the forecast numbers of skilled workforce demand.
The most pressing action is to raise awareness of the broad range of career opportunities directly or indirectly associated with the onshore wind energy sector, especially for regional workforces. There is scope for targeted campaigns in rural areas where the majority of the new installations will take place – to demonstrate well-paid, highly skilled jobs for local people. For example, according to UK Government statistics a wind turbine technician can expect a starting salary of £25,000 reaching £47,000 with experience (National Careers Service, 2024). This compares well with the average UK salary (across all sectors and experience) of around £35,000 (Office for National Statistics, 2023). This could also help address population decline, due to younger people moving to more populated parts of the country (National Records of Scotland, 2021).
For O&M, onshore wind provides a long-term, potentially whole-life, career opportunity. Many of these and other skills required are readily transferrable to other sectors, including offshore wind and other onshore renewables, such as solar photovoltaic and battery storage. This could have an additional benefit of retaining people in their home regions, addressing the issue of depopulation and demographic changes in rural and remote areas (National Records of Scotland, 2021). For the construction sector, it is clear that Scotland is entering a phase of intensive infrastructure development in the energy and transport sectors in particular, but also across many aspects of the built environment. As a result, there will be ample employment opportunities available to individuals with these skillsets for the foreseeable future.
Therefore, there needs to be concerted action to increase the visibility of the sector to individuals in secondary, further and higher education. These are the people that could address potential workforce shortfalls towards the end of this decade and into the 2030s.
Several of those that were interviewed indicated that they had existing connections with further and higher education institutions, through recruitment, offering placements and internships, and giving lectures and talks to students. Four of the operators, two of the ISPs, one of the consultancy firms and one of the construction firms are already working with the further education sector, including Ayrshire, Dumfries & Galloway, and Dundee & Angus Colleges, to develop and refine training courses, including for wind turbine technicians. There is an opportunity to strengthen, coordinate and expand these developments through organisations such as ESP which has established strong connections between industry and the further education sector.
Overview of international skills strategies in the onshore wind sector
The Global Wind Organisation (GWO) has developed a series of certified courses that cover safety and technical aspects for technicians working in the onshore and offshore wind sectors (Global Wind Organisation, 2024). This comprises 16 standards divided into 27 training modules, which are delivered by third party training providers across the globe. Individuals completing the training are awarded certificates that can be verified by employers through an online global database. In 2023 around 156,400 individuals had certificates in at least one GWO module.
In terms of technical training for specific wind turbines, the Danish Wind Power Academy (dwpa) was one of the first dedicated training providers for the sector (Danish Wind Power Academy, 2024). Established in 2004, the trainers it employs have significant experience in technical work in the sector and can provide training across multiple wind turbine manufacturers and models. This training can be provided online or in-person and several of those interviewed for this study indicated that they had sent staff on dwpa courses, because of the high level of trainer expertise. BZEE, based in Germany, is another leading training provider (BZEE, 2024). Founded in 2000 by the German wind industry, it has developed certified training courses for the wind sector. It has a global network of training providers that deliver technical training including on specific manufacturers’ equipment. There are no such technical training facilities in Scotland. Companies instead use a combination of internal training and sending staff to training providers such as dwpa and BZEE.
There is the opportunity to consider the creation of training provision akin to dwpa or BZEE in Scotland.
Conclusions and recommendations
In conclusion, this study has indicated that the sector has skilled workforce shortages. Scotland urgently needs significantly more people to enter the onshore wind industry workforce if the country is to achieve the 20 GW ambition by 2030.
If skill shortages are not addressed, the impact on the ambition to install 20 GW of onshore wind by 2030 is likely to be severe. By 2027, our model predicts that on average four times more FTEs will be required for construction and installation than in 2024 and, within this, five times more civils contractors will be needed. More than 46% of these individuals will be required to build wind farms in Highland and Dumfries and Galloway, regions where stakeholders have highlighted that it is already difficult to recruit individuals. For O&M the figures are smaller and the timeframes longer: around 2.5 times more FTE will be required in 2030 than in 2024. However, the regions with the highest requirement are again Highland and Dumfries and Galloway, with around 37% of the total projected requirement.
Specific project findings include:
- A peak of almost 20,500 FTE will be required by 2027 across the whole of Scotland, from around 6,900 in 2024. This includes almost 18,800 FTE for construction and installation activities, representing 92% of the total workforce required.
- O&M requirements will increase from around 600 FTE in 2024 to 1,500 FTE in 2030. This number is expected to be maintained or even increased during the following decade.
- 46% of individuals constructing and installing wind farms will be working in the local authorities in Highland and Dumfries and Galloway, and a further 21% in East Ayrshire and Argyll and Bute.
- Around 37% of all O&M FTE will be working in Highland and Dumfries & Galloway from 2027 onwards.
- Technical expertise shortages, particularly in high voltage engineers and wind turbine technicians will pose significant challenges to project development and operation. An average of almost 3,000 FTE will be required each year, peaking at almost 4,500 in 2027, across Scotland to enable grid connections. A further 800 FTE wind turbine technicians will be required on average each year across Scotland to maintain installed turbines.
- A lack of skilled planners and environmental specialists will hamper the planning and consenting process, leading to delays. An average of 100 FTE planners and 434 FTE environmental consultants will be required each year to enable wind farm developments.
- Remote project locations will exacerbate workforce shortages and require innovative strategies to attract and retain talent in rural areas.
- There is a strong case for enhancing remanufacturing capacity in Scotland.
- Diverse skillsets encompassing project management, stakeholder engagement and regulatory compliance will be essential for effective project execution and communication.
Addressing these shortages will be challenging. For example, the Industrial Strategy Council, established by the UK Government in 2018, projected that by 2030 around 20% of the UK’s workforce would be under-skilled for their jobs (Industrial Strategy Council, 2020). In 2022, the IET reported that the UK had a shortfall of 173,000 skilled workers in science, technology, engineering and maths sectors, a situation that the IET had been monitoring for the previous 15 years (The Institution of Engineering and Technology, 2022). The solutions recommended from both the Industrial Strategy Council and the IET were for closer collaboration between government, industry and education/training providers to address these challenges, and that upskilling and reskilling would be key elements of this.
Recommendations
Investing in skills development is essential for the success of individual onshore wind projects and for achieving Scotland’s broader renewable energy goals. Addressing these shortages will require a comprehensive approach, including workforce development initiatives, training programmes and industry-academy collaborations. In this regard, collaboration between public, private and education sector stakeholders will be crucial to bridge skills divides and unlock the full potential of Scotland’s onshore wind resources.
Further actions may include:
- Undertaking an awareness raising programme of career opportunities within the sector, the transferrable nature of the skills developed and that this is a sector that is a key contributor to achieving net zero, and will be active for a long time (potentially a whole life career).
- Targeted campaigns in rural areas where the majority of the new installations will take place, to demonstrate well-paid, highly skilled jobs for local people. This could also help address population decline, due to younger people moving to more populated parts of the country.
- Extending wind turbine technician training in Scotland to support the O&M of onshore, and eventually offshore, wind farms. This could build on the Wind Training Network already established by ESP and extend this training to specific wind turbine models, as provided by dwpa and BZEE. Alternatively, it could be delivered in partnership with one or both of these organisations, for example, establishing a subsidiary of dwpa or BZEE in Scotland.
References
AIS Group (2024). More information available at: https://training.aisgroup.co.uk/pages/expertareaarticle.aspx?id=86
Blackridge Research & Consulting (2022). Global Top 15 Wind Turbine Manufacturers (2022). Available at: https://www.blackridgeresearch.com/blog/top-wind-turbine-manufacturers-makers-companies-suppliers
Bloomberg NEF (2023). Goldwind and Vestas in Photo Finish for Top Spot as Global Wind Power Additions Fall. Available at: https://about.bnef.com/blog/goldwind-and-vestas-in-photo-finish-for-top-spot-as-global-wind-power-additions-fall/
BVG Associates (2023). Scotland onshore wind pipeline analysis 2023-2030. Available at: https://www.scottishrenewables.com/assets/000/003/621/Scotland_2030_Pipeline_Analysis_Dec_22_FULL_REPORT_original.pdf
BZEE (2024). More information available at: https://www.bzee-association.org/
Danish Wind Power Academy (2024). More information available at: https://danishwpa.com/
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (2023). Renewable Energy Planning Database. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/renewable-energy-planning-database-monthly-extract
ESP (2024). Wind Training Network established by ESP in 2012 to support the sector growth. More information available at: https://esp-scotland.ac.uk/energy-transition/
Global Wind Energy Council (2023). Mission Critical: Building the global wind energy supply chain for a 1.5°C world. Available at: https://gwec.net/supplychainreport2023/
Global Wind Energy Council & Global Wind Organisation (2023). Global Wind Workforce Outlook 2023-2027. Available at: https://gwec.net/global-wind-workforce-outlook-2023-2027-pr/
Global Wind Organisation (2024). More information available at: https://www.globalwindsafety.org/
Industrial Strategy Council (2020). Rising to the UK’s Skills Challenges. Available at: https://industrialstrategycouncil.org/sites/default/files/attachments/Rising%20to%20the%20UK%27s%20skills%20challenges.pdf
International Energy Agency (2024). More information available at: https://www.iea.org/energy-system/renewables/wind
ITPEnergised (2024). One of the partners delivering this study, is an established environmental and technology consultancy that has advised clients in more than 500 onshore wind farm projects. More information available at: https://www.itpenergised.com/
National Careers Service (2024). More information available at: https://nationalcareers.service.gov.uk/job-profiles/wind-turbine-technician
National Records of Scotland (2021). Population Grows in Large Cities, Declines in Remote Areas. Available at: https://www.nrscotland.gov.uk/news/2021/population-grows-in-large-cities-declines-in-remote-areas
Office for National Statistics (2021). Low carbon and renewable energy economy, UK: 2021. Available at: https://www.ons.gov.uk/economy/environmentalaccounts/bulletins/finalestimates/2021
Office for National Statistics (2023). Employee earnings in the UK: 2023. Available at: https://www.ons.gov.uk/employmentandlabourmarket/peopleinwork/earningsandworkinghours/bulletins/annualsurveyofhoursandearnings/2023
OurWorldInData (2024). Renewable Energy. Available at: https://ourworldindata.org/renewable-energy
Ramboll (2023). Assessment of the structure, conduct and performance of Scotland’s onshore wind, offshore wind and hydrogen sectors. Available at: https://www.climatexchange.org.uk/projects/economic-analysis-of-scotlands-wind-and-hydrogen-sectors/
ReBladeLtd (2024). More information available at: https://reblade.com/
Renewable Parts Ltd (2024). More information available at: https://www.renewable-parts.com/
Scottish Government (2022). Onshore Wind: Policy Statement 2022. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/onshore-wind-policy-statement-2022/
Scottish Government (2023). Onshore Wind Sector Deal for Scotland. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/onshore-wind-sector-deal-scotland/
The Construction Industry Training Board (2023). 19,550 extra construction workers needed in Scotland by 2027. Available at: https://www.citb.co.uk/about-citb/news-events-and-blogs/19-550-extra-construction-workers-needed-in-scotland-by-2027/
The Institution of Engineering and Technology (2022). Engineering Kids’ Futures. Available at: https://www.theiet.org/media/11077/engineering-kids-futures.pdf
Wind Europe (2024). More information available at: https://windeurope.org/about-wind/wind-basics/
Appendices
Appendix A – Onshore wind global market overview
As the onshore wind sector has matured, so has the ability to maximise the amount of electricity produced, even in areas with lower wind speeds. Turbines have become larger, with rotor diameters typically 120 m long compared with 15 m in 1985. Turbines now generate up to 7.5 MW compared with less than 1 MW in 1985 (Wind Europe, 2024). Countries across the globe are looking to wind (in addition to solar and hydro) to provide clean and sustainable energy. According to the International Energy Agency (IEA), combined onshore and offshore wind generated more than 2,100 TWh of electricity in 115 countries across the world in 2022 (International Energy Agency, 2024). China is dominating this growth, installing 59 GW in 2023 alone (half of all global installations in 2023), compared with 17.9 GW in the European Union (EU) and 11 GW in the United States (US). However, to achieve global net zero targets, annual installations will need to reach 350 GW by 2030. Onshore wind accounts for 93% of all installed wind capacity, although the share from offshore wind is expected to increase, with offshore responsible for 18% of new capacity installed in 2022. Wind is second to hydropower in terms of global renewable energy production (OurWorldInData, 2024).

Figure 5: Key components of a wind turbine. From ‘Background analysis of the quality of the energy data to be considered for the European Reference Life Cycle Database (ELCD)’ (2013). 10.2788/5377
Manufacturing of wind turbines and their parts takes place in several countries. China dominates with ten of the top fifteen global manufacturers (Blackridge Research & Consulting, 2022). Vestas Wind Systems (Denmark) and Goldwind (China) are the largest manufacturers by installed turbine capacity (Bloomberg NEF, 2023). Other European manufacturers include Siemens Gamesa Renewable Energy (Spain), GE Renewable Energy (France), Nordex (Germany) and ENERCON (Germany). Each of these companies exports turbines across the globe. The only wind turbine manufacturing sites in the UK are for offshore wind turbine blades: Vestas has a site located on the Isle of Wight, and Siemens Gamesa has a site in Hull.
Manufacturing is not, however, keeping pace with the anticipated demand for the installation or supply of spare parts for operations and maintenance (Global Wind Energy Council, 2023). This has been attributed to a number of factors including increasing manufacturing costs and uncertainty regarding the timing of large-scale installations in different countries. Leading global organisations such as the IEA and the Global Wind Energy Council (GWEC) have stated publicly that more needs to be done to support the wider onshore wind supply chain to meet the global installed capacity ambition. The key components of a turbine are highlighted in Figure 5.
Although manufacturing of new onshore turbines and their components is not expected to happen within Scotland within the period to 2030; refurbishment and remanufacturing of parts for existing, largely legacy turbines, is already happening and has potential to be expanded. This will require skilled people.
Global trends regarding skills demand in the onshore wind sector
Construction / installation, and operations and maintenance (O&M) of windfarms will require the largest numbers of individuals, compared to other project stages in the period to 2030. Globally, it is estimated that by 2027 there will be a need for 256,000 technicians to construct and install onshore wind turbines and a further 243,500 to undertake O&M activities, an annual increase of 17% on 2022 figures (Global Wind Energy Council & Global Wind Organisation, 2023). Of all technicians employed in the wind sector, 87% are expected to work onshore. Further analysis suggests that almost 43% of these individuals will be new recruits to the sector (based on growth projections and an annual attrition rate of 6%) (International Energy Agency, 2024). Overall, this indicates a large global competition for individuals with such skills.
For new entrants into technical roles, wind sector employers tend to recruit either directly from further or higher education or from other sectors that have relevant transferable skills, e.g., oil & gas, or vehicle maintenance. These individuals are then provided with in-house training, supplemented as required with external training, that is specific to the wind sector.
Appendix B – Onshore wind project lifecycle
|
Stage |
Feasibility |
Development |
Construction |
O&M |
End-of-life |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Duration |
1 year |
3-4 years |
1-2 years |
25+ years | |
|
Project lifecycle activities |
|
|
|
|
|
Appendix C – Job roles, skill level and years of experience
The job roles, skill level and years of experience in the table below were produced through consultation with a range of IPTEnergised members of staff that have experience of, and responsibility for, delivering different phases of onshore wind projects. This internal assessment was validated by sharing with all engaged stakeholders at the end of February 2024.
|
Job role |
Skill level |
Exp. Yrs (>) |
|---|---|---|
|
Civil engineer |
Post-grad |
5 |
|
Electrical engineer |
Degree |
5 |
|
Mechanical engineer |
Degree |
5 |
|
Environmental consultant – ECoW |
Variable |
2 |
|
Environmental consultant – ornithologist |
Variable |
4 |
|
Environmental consultant – ecologist |
Variable |
4 |
|
Environmental consultant – hydro/hydrogeo/geologist/peat specialist |
Degree |
4 |
|
Environmental consultant – noise & vibration |
Degree |
4 |
|
Environmental consultant – cultural heritage/archaeologists |
Degree |
4 |
|
Environmental consultant – forester |
HND/HNC (+) |
2 |
|
Project manager |
Degree |
3 |
|
Health & safety officer |
HNC/HND/GWO |
3 |
|
Wind turbine technician |
HNC/HND/GWO |
1 |
|
Workshop mechanic |
Variable |
1 |
|
HV technician |
Variable |
5 |
|
Logistics manager |
Variable |
1 |
|
Electrician |
Variable |
1 |
|
IT manager |
Post-grad |
2 |
|
Civils contractor |
Variable |
1 |
|
Transport operative |
Variable |
5 |
|
Asset manager |
Degree |
2 |
|
Consultant – site design and modelling |
Degree |
2 |
|
Consultant – energy yield assessors and WindPro design specialists |
Degree |
2 |
|
Consultant – shadow flicker |
Degree |
2 |
|
Consultant – grid connection consultancy and application |
Degree |
2 |
|
Consultant – landscape & visual consultant |
Degree |
2 |
|
Consultant – carbon consultant/specialist |
Degree |
2 |
|
Consultant – aviation, radar & telecommunications |
Degree |
2 |
|
Back-office support |
Variable |
1 |
|
Grid connection installation |
HNC/HND |
5 |
|
DNO EHV commissioning engineer |
HNC/HND |
10 |
|
Protection engineer |
HNC/HND |
10 |
|
Crane/lifting contractor |
HNC/HND |
2 |
|
Planning officers |
Degree |
4 |
|
DNO case worker |
Degree |
4 |
|
Financial analyst |
Degree |
1 |
|
eBoP contractor |
Degree |
5 |
|
Structural engineer |
Degree (+) |
5 |
|
TSA/OEM project delivery team |
Variable |
1 |
Appendix D – FTE requirements for different project stages
Detailed model description
A model was developed to estimate the workforce requirement in the onshore wind industry that will enable us to provide a breakdown of the total workforce requirements into specific job roles.
To develop the model, we used the knowledge base of our project partner IPTEnergised, who have developed and supported over 500 onshore wind projects, to create a simulated onshore wind farm (90MW installed capacity) and a detailed description of job roles and their fulltime equivalents across all stages of the wind farm life cycle (feasibility, development, construction, operations and maintenance, end of life). This part of the model served as a basis for the estimated FTEs per job role per project stage, normalised to 1GW (FTE/GW). The resulting FTE number per GW was then multiplied by the BVGA forecasts of total GW capacity in each wind farm life cycle stage in the timeframe from 2024 to 2030. This calculation yielded the number of FTEs by job role by project stage across the entire pipeline of Scottish onshore wind projects in 2024-2030.
As a quality control for the FTE/GW assumption from the IPTEnergised, we used the data from LCREE 2021 that has been interpreted by Ramboll (2023) to break down the total employment numbers into those involved in the construction and operations of onshore wind farms. We divided this number by the onshore wind capacity under construction and in operation, respectively, to yield an estimate for FTEs per GW that are independent from those presented in the IPTEnergised model. This quality control exercise showed that the FTE/GW assumptions presented by IPTEnergised are consistent with the employment in the sector in 2021. The 2021 time point was used to enable the use of Ramboll interpretation of LCREE 2021 data. LCREE 2022 was released in March 2023. LCREE is an industry self-reported dataset that has certain limitations associated with the differences in individual interpretation of employment in the low carbon/renewable energy sector.
|
FTE/GW |
LCREE 2021 (Ramboll Interpretation) / REPD 2021 |
IPTEnergised |
|
Construction |
1929 |
1644 |
|
Operations |
100 |
56 |

Figure 6: Data sources for model validation.
The heatmaps below illustrate FTE requirements for different project stages in 2024-2030. A darker colour indicates a higher value, representing a relatively higher FTE demand for a job role.
|
Job roles (feasibility) |
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 |
|
Project manager |
77 |
56 |
36 |
13 |
5 |
2 |
3 |
|
Consultant – Site design and modelling |
31 |
22 |
14 |
5 |
2 |
1 |
1 |
|
Consultant – energy yield assessors & WindPro design |
46 |
33 |
22 |
8 |
3 |
1 |
2 |
|
Consultant – grid connection consultancy and application |
46 |
33 |
22 |
8 |
3 |
1 |
2 |
|
Planning officers |
46 |
33 |
22 |
8 |
3 |
1 |
2 |
|
Environmental consultant |
46 |
33 |
22 |
8 |
3 |
1 |
2 |
|
Financial analyst |
307 |
222 |
143 |
52 |
21 |
7 |
12 |
|
FTE |
599 |
433 |
280 |
101 |
40 |
13 |
24 |
|
Job roles (development) |
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 |
|
Project manager |
154 |
131 |
125 |
88 |
60 |
13 |
9 |
|
Environmental consultant |
694 |
561 |
394 |
269 |
60 |
40 |
0 |
|
Planning officers |
123 |
105 |
100 |
70 |
48 |
11 |
7 |
|
DNO case worker |
46 |
39 |
37 |
26 |
18 |
4 |
3 |
|
Consultant – grid connection & application |
46 |
39 |
37 |
26 |
18 |
4 |
3 |
|
FTE |
1065 |
875 |
693 |
479 |
203 |
71 |
21 |
|
Job roles (construction) |
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 |
|
Project manager |
31 |
68 |
95 |
127 |
100 |
96 |
58 |
|
Civils contractor |
1577 |
3392 |
4783 |
6357 |
5034 |
4835 |
2907 |
|
Civil engineer |
63 |
136 |
192 |
255 |
202 |
194 |
116 |
|
Planning officers |
6 |
14 |
19 |
26 |
20 |
20 |
12 |
|
Crane/lifting contractor |
473 |
1017 |
1435 |
1907 |
1510 |
1450 |
872 |
|
Grid connection installation1 |
1104 |
2374 |
3348 |
4450 |
3524 |
3385 |
2035 |
|
DNO EHV commissioning engineer2 |
126 |
271 |
382 |
508 |
402 |
387 |
232 |
|
Transport operative |
473 |
1017 |
1435 |
1907 |
1510 |
1450 |
872 |
|
Logistics manager |
31 |
68 |
95 |
127 |
100 |
96 |
58 |
|
Back-office support |
158 |
339 |
479 |
636 |
504 |
484 |
291 |
|
Health & safety officer |
95 |
203 |
287 |
381 |
302 |
290 |
174 |
|
Environmental consultant |
31 |
68 |
95 |
127 |
100 |
96 |
58 |
|
Environmental consultant – EcoW |
9 |
20 |
29 |
38 |
30 |
29 |
17 |
|
TSA/OEM project delivery team |
95 |
203 |
287 |
381 |
302 |
290 |
174 |
|
Electrical engineer |
63 |
136 |
192 |
255 |
202 |
194 |
116 |
|
eBoP contractor |
315 |
678 |
956 |
1271 |
1006 |
967 |
581 |
|
FTE |
4651 |
10005 |
14110 |
18752 |
14849 |
14263 |
8576 |
|
Job roles (operations) |
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 |
|
Wind turbine technician |
465 |
531 |
596 |
776 |
931 |
1097 |
1198 |
|
HV technician |
11 |
13 |
14 |
18 |
22 |
26 |
28 |
|
IT manager |
11 |
13 |
14 |
18 |
22 |
26 |
28 |
|
Asset manager |
22 |
25 |
28 |
37 |
44 |
52 |
56 |
|
Crane/lifting contractor |
1 |
1 |
1 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
3 |
|
Logistics manager |
33 |
38 |
42 |
55 |
66 |
78 |
85 |
|
Back-office support |
11 |
13 |
14 |
18 |
22 |
26 |
28 |
|
Health & safety officer |
11 |
13 |
14 |
18 |
22 |
26 |
28 |
|
Environmental consultant |
11 |
13 |
14 |
18 |
22 |
26 |
28 |
|
Electrician |
1 |
1 |
1 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
3 |
|
FTE |
576 |
659 |
739 |
962 |
1154 |
1360 |
1486 |
|
Job roles (end of life) |
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 |
|
Project manager |
0 |
1 |
0 |
1 |
1 |
12 |
3 |
|
Civils contractor |
1 |
37 |
2 |
59 |
55 |
621 |
157 |
|
Civil engineer |
0 |
1 |
0 |
2 |
2 |
25 |
6 |
|
Planning officers |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
2 |
1 |
|
Crane/lifting contractor |
0 |
11 |
1 |
18 |
16 |
186 |
47 |
|
Grid connection installation1 |
1 |
26 |
1 |
41 |
38 |
435 |
110 |
|
DNO EHV commissioning engineer2 |
0 |
3 |
0 |
5 |
4 |
50 |
13 |
|
Transport operative |
0 |
11 |
1 |
18 |
16 |
186 |
47 |
|
Logistics manager |
0 |
1 |
0 |
1 |
1 |
12 |
3 |
|
Back-office support |
0 |
4 |
0 |
6 |
5 |
62 |
16 |
|
Health & safety officer |
0 |
2 |
0 |
4 |
3 |
37 |
9 |
|
Environmental consultant |
0 |
1 |
0 |
1 |
1 |
12 |
3 |
|
Environmental consultant – EcoW |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
4 |
1 |
|
TSA/OEM project delivery team |
0 |
2 |
0 |
4 |
3 |
37 |
9 |
|
Electrical engineer |
0 |
1 |
0 |
2 |
2 |
25 |
6 |
|
eBoP contractor |
0 |
7 |
0 |
12 |
11 |
124 |
31 |
|
FTE |
4 |
110 |
6 |
174 |
162 |
1833 |
463 |
Notes:
- Grid connection installation requires multiple skills and can vary dependent on the specific wind farm location. Specific skilled roles are:
- Project managers
- Designers
- Land agents (for land rights)
- Equipment manufacture
- Civils teams for installation
- Cable pullers, jointers, etc
- Linesmen (for OHL connections)
- Commissioning engineers
- SAPs
- Protection engineers
These are additional FTEs to these with the same skillsets required for other aspects of the construction and installation phase. However, the same individual can perform multiple roles that require the same skillset (up to one FTE) across this phase.
- Two DNO EHV commissioning engineers are required for each of the developer and the subcontractor for the DNO.
Appendix E – FTE requirements by project stage and Local Authority
Local authorities with no forecast activities in specific project stages are not included in the tables below.
|
Local authority |
2023 |
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 |
|
Aberdeen City Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Aberdeenshire Council |
26 |
15 |
8 |
5 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Argyll and Bute Council |
100 |
81 |
57 |
25 |
4 |
4 |
0 |
0 |
|
Clackmannanshire Council |
2 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Dumfries & Galloway Council |
86 |
55 |
36 |
25 |
10 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
East Ayrshire Council |
59 |
58 |
6 |
1 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
East Lothian Council |
8 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Fife Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Highland Council |
182 |
140 |
106 |
59 |
12 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Midlothian Council |
7 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Moray Council |
9 |
9 |
7 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
North Ayrshire Council |
5 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
North Lanarkshire Council |
20 |
17 |
17 |
1 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Orkney Islands Council |
2 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Perth & Kinross Council |
31 |
31 |
31 |
10 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Scottish Borders Council |
72 |
59 |
27 |
20 |
12 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Shetland Islands Council |
1 |
0 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
0 |
0 |
|
South Ayrshire Council |
11 |
5 |
2 |
15 |
13 |
13 |
13 |
0 |
|
South Lanarkshire Council |
27 |
23 |
17 |
14 |
14 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Stirling Council |
5 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Unknown |
105 |
108 |
121 |
101 |
37 |
22 |
0 |
25 |
|
West Dunbartonshire Council |
9 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
West Lothian Council |
2 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Western Isles Council / Comhairle nan Eilan Siar |
6 |
6 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Total |
775 |
613 |
443 |
286 |
103 |
41 |
13 |
25 |
|
Local authority |
2023 |
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 |
|
Aberdeen City Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Aberdeenshire Council |
27 |
20 |
19 |
17 |
7 |
3 |
0 |
0 |
|
Angus Council |
1 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Argyll and Bute Council |
47 |
56 |
65 |
58 |
24 |
12 |
4 |
4 |
|
Clackmannanshire Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
2 |
2 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Dumfries & Galloway Council |
154 |
136 |
67 |
36 |
28 |
24 |
0 |
0 |
|
East Ayrshire Council |
19 |
59 |
57 |
51 |
1 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
East Lothian Council |
8 |
8 |
8 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
East Renfrewshire Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Fife Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Highland Council |
161 |
134 |
116 |
130 |
77 |
55 |
0 |
0 |
|
Midlothian Council |
7 |
7 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Moray Council |
16 |
15 |
9 |
7 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
North Ayrshire Council |
3 |
0 |
0 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
0 |
0 |
|
North Lanarkshire Council |
3 |
3 |
17 |
17 |
17 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Orkney Islands Council |
4 |
2 |
2 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Perth & Kinross Council |
4 |
0 |
21 |
31 |
31 |
6 |
0 |
0 |
|
Scottish Borders Council |
78 |
81 |
66 |
47 |
26 |
20 |
0 |
0 |
|
Shetland Islands Council |
9 |
1 |
1 |
0 |
0 |
2 |
2 |
0 |
|
South Ayrshire Council |
23 |
24 |
9 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
13 |
13 |
|
South Lanarkshire Council |
36 |
23 |
27 |
6 |
14 |
14 |
0 |
0 |
|
Stirling Council |
5 |
5 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Unknown |
0 |
25 |
25 |
80 |
117 |
97 |
34 |
18 |
|
West Dunbartonshire Council |
9 |
9 |
9 |
9 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
West Lothian Council |
5 |
2 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Western Isles Council / Comhairle nan Eilan Siar |
0 |
6 |
6 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Total |
619 |
616 |
523 |
497 |
349 |
239 |
53 |
35 |
|
Local authority |
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 |
|
Aberdeenshire Council |
81 |
149 |
283 |
696 |
806 |
424 |
191 |
|
Argyll and Bute Council |
0 |
345 |
1024 |
1748 |
2317 |
1421 |
571 |
|
Dumfries & Galloway Council |
416 |
2028 |
3723 |
4335 |
2013 |
1573 |
725 |
|
East Ayrshire Council |
0 |
323 |
704 |
2018 |
1669 |
1398 |
35 |
|
East Lothian Council |
0 |
0 |
230 |
230 |
230 |
0 |
0 |
|
Highland Council |
514 |
1788 |
2819 |
4173 |
3071 |
2615 |
1834 |
|
Midlothian Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
208 |
208 |
208 |
0 |
|
Moray Council |
162 |
1232 |
1321 |
948 |
344 |
56 |
0 |
|
North Ayrshire Council |
2 |
2 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
North Lanarkshire Council |
0 |
68 |
68 |
0 |
0 |
475 |
475 |
|
Orkney Islands Council |
51 |
51 |
46 |
46 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Perth & Kinross Council |
0 |
129 |
129 |
129 |
397 |
863 |
466 |
|
Scottish Borders Council |
955 |
1436 |
1095 |
909 |
1022 |
981 |
1012 |
|
Shetland Islands Council |
855 |
93 |
475 |
475 |
382 |
0 |
0 |
|
South Ayrshire Council |
383 |
561 |
699 |
694 |
516 |
153 |
0 |
|
South Lanarkshire Council |
1024 |
1248 |
258 |
883 |
663 |
538 |
38 |
|
Stirling Council |
0 |
195 |
195 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Unknown |
0 |
0 |
733 |
733 |
116 |
2644 |
2423 |
|
West Dunbartonshire Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
257 |
257 |
257 |
|
West Lothian Council |
107 |
167 |
38 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Western Isles Council / Comhairle nan Eilan Siar |
12 |
0 |
0 |
168 |
554 |
386 |
386 |
|
Total |
4562 |
9813 |
13840 |
18393 |
14564 |
13990 |
8412 |
|
Local authority |
2023 |
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 |
|
Aberdeenshire Council |
51 |
55 |
55 |
63 |
63 |
87 |
99 |
107 |
|
Angus Council |
2 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
|
Argyll and Bute Council |
42 |
39 |
39 |
50 |
58 |
115 |
177 |
188 |
|
Clackmannanshire Council |
5 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
|
Dumfries & Galloway Council |
112 |
112 |
124 |
146 |
280 |
332 |
382 |
395 |
|
East Ayrshire Council |
90 |
90 |
90 |
96 |
127 |
141 |
210 |
158 |
|
East Lothian Council |
15 |
15 |
15 |
15 |
15 |
27 |
27 |
27 |
|
East Renfrewshire Council |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
|
Falkirk Council |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
|
Fife Council |
9 |
9 |
9 |
9 |
9 |
9 |
9 |
9 |
|
Highland Council |
212 |
214 |
224 |
252 |
335 |
422 |
486 |
547 |
|
Inverclyde Council |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
|
Midlothian Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
11 |
11 |
|
Moray Council |
50 |
50 |
50 |
73 |
114 |
129 |
132 |
132 |
|
North Ayrshire Council |
13 |
13 |
13 |
13 |
13 |
13 |
13 |
11 |
|
North Lanarkshire Council |
29 |
29 |
29 |
32 |
32 |
32 |
32 |
47 |
|
Orkney Islands Council |
5 |
5 |
7 |
7 |
9 |
9 |
9 |
8 |
|
Perth & Kinross Council |
30 |
30 |
30 |
30 |
37 |
37 |
58 |
82 |
|
Scottish Borders Council |
74 |
77 |
123 |
140 |
154 |
174 |
202 |
218 |
|
Shetland Islands Council |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
6 |
25 |
25 |
25 |
|
South Ayrshire Council |
55 |
55 |
67 |
75 |
84 |
103 |
111 |
111 |
|
South Lanarkshire Council |
135 |
139 |
193 |
193 |
206 |
213 |
239 |
241 |
|
Stirling Council |
16 |
16 |
16 |
26 |
26 |
26 |
26 |
26 |
|
Unknown |
0 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
41 |
41 |
41 |
129 |
|
West Dunbartonshire Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
13 |
|
West Lothian Council |
18 |
20 |
26 |
28 |
28 |
28 |
28 |
28 |
|
Western Isles Council / Comhairle nan Eilan Siar |
4 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
14 |
14 |
34 |
|
Total |
980 |
996 |
1138 |
1276 |
1661 |
1994 |
2349 |
2566 |
|
Local authority |
2023 |
2024 |
2025 |
2026 |
2027 |
2028 |
2029 |
2030 |
|
Aberdeenshire Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
2 |
0 |
28 |
61 |
|
Argyll and Bute Council |
57 |
0 |
27 |
0 |
25 |
0 |
1 |
0 |
|
Dumfries & Galloway Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
42 |
4 |
0 |
73 |
|
East Ayrshire Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
22 |
1040 |
0 |
|
East Renfrewshire Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
4 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Highland Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
97 |
0 |
25 |
|
Moray Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
98 |
|
North Ayrshire Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
46 |
0 |
|
North Lanarkshire Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
186 |
53 |
|
Orkney Islands Council |
0 |
3 |
3 |
0 |
5 |
4 |
7 |
2 |
|
Perth & Kinross Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
52 |
|
Scottish Borders Council |
0 |
0 |
53 |
0 |
60 |
0 |
130 |
0 |
|
Shetland Islands Council |
0 |
0 |
4 |
0 |
3 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
South Lanarkshire Council |
0 |
0 |
0 |
1 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
Total |
58 |
3 |
87 |
5 |
137 |
127 |
1439 |
363 |
Appendix F – Stakeholder interview structure
The interview structure was approved by the project Steering Group as follows:
- Lifecycle of an onshore wind project: could you walk us through the typical lifecycle of one of your onshore wind projects and the key workforce needs at each stage?
- Project-specific workforce requirements: for your current and upcoming projects, what specific job roles and skills levels are you prioritising?
- Workforce composition and numbers: what does the workforce composition look like in terms of numbers and roles for a typical wind farm project?
- Skill level assessment: how do you assess the skill levels required for various job roles within your projects? What overlaps are there with related sectors, particularly offshore wind?
- Project development challenges: are there any unique challenges in project development that are creating new demands for specific skills or roles?
- Adaptation to technological advancements: how is your workforce adapting to the rapid technological advancements in the wind energy sector? What internal training do you provide (e.g., including apprenticeship programmes)?
- Collaboration with educational institutions: what role can partnerships with universities and vocational training institutes play in addressing the skill gaps?
- Attracting and retaining talent: do you experience recruitment difficulties (current or predicted) for any specific roles? What strategies can be implemented to make the onshore wind sector more attractive to skilled professionals, especially in a competitive job market? Is it more difficult to recruit in certain locations than others?
- Impact of policy changes: how do recent and upcoming policy changes influence the skill needs in the sector, and how is the industry adapting? What are the anticipated challenges in scaling up to meet this target?
- Incorporating circular economy principles: how can the industry integrate circular economy principles into its workforce development plans (e.g., recycling, repowering, decommissioning)?
Appendix G – Further insights from stakeholder engagement
In addition to workforce and skills issues, interviewees also highlighted a number of other factors that are constraining sector development. Of these, delays to grid connections and planning consent were stated by all of those interviewed as causing significant issues. We discuss here the delays caused by skills shortages outside the onshore wind industry.
Securing a grid connection date that aligns with project timelines is the most important factor for all developers. Without this the project cannot progress beyond early development stages. At present developers are being offered grid connection dates of mid 2030s for new projects. However, two reported that existing dates that had been agreed with the distribution network operator (DNO) have also been delayed. These delays can be due to a number of issues: resource shortages with the DNO due to competing demands; or lack of skilled workers (e.g., high voltage electrical engineers); or delays in planning consent for DNO operations (e.g., installing the 400kV lines that are required to connect to wind farms to the grid).
Planning consent from local authorities and the ECU within the Scottish Government (for wind farms larger than 50 MW) are also causing significant delays. Developers indicated that the process of securing planning permission can take several years, primarily because of personnel shortages within the LAs and the ECU, but, in some cases, also the time taken in addressing objections from the local community which can trigger a public inquiry. 64% of those interviewed (of which nine were developers) indicated that this was a significant issue. The SOWSD commitment to halve the consenting time to one year (or two years if there is a public inquiry) has been welcomed by the sector, but individuals remain sceptical that this will be achieved given that the resource in planning departments has not been increased.
Five developers also commented that projects which had been granted a grid connection date but had not progressed through the planning consent process for several years, should be removed to free resources and increase the chances of other projects being granted a grid connection.
These delays can increase developer costs. For example, other permits and leases may need to be maintained and paid for, the costs for subcontract labour and materials may increase, and interest on finance and investment still needs to be paid. Furthermore, according to our own estimates and those of interviewed stakeholders, significant investment (around £1.2-1.3M per MW) will need to remain ring-fenced for the construction of the wind farm. At the same time the revenue stream to pay for this investment and generate profit is delayed.
It became apparent through discussing these aspects with developers that the delays in grid connection and planning consent, and subsequent impacts mean that there is now an increased number of projects that are effectively ‘paused’ because they are no longer commercially viable. It is also clear that the main factor causing these delays is a lack of skilled human resources in grid operators and in planning departments (opinion of 64% of all stakeholders interviewed).
© The University of Edinburgh, 2024
Prepared by Optimat and ITPEnergised on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
Scottish Government, 2023: page 6. ↑
For further detail see Section 5 and Appendices D and E. ↑
FTE refers to the number of hours that a full-time employee works for an organisation. One FTE can therefore be one full-time member of staff or multiple part-time employees. ↑
Appendix B provides further details of a wind farm’s project lifecycle, while Appendix C provides a more detailed description of the qualifications and experience required for different job roles. ↑
Feedback from stakeholder interviews. ↑
DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/3843
Executive summary
This research brings new insight into how climate-related hazards and their impact on people and communities vary across Scotland. The project explored which, if any, population groups are disproportionately affected by flooding, high temperature and poor air quality, how they are affected now and potential impact in the future.
Vulnerability to the impacts of climate change depends on two sets of factors:
- The likelihood that people and communities are exposed to climate-related hazards, eg where they live and the dwelling type.
- The characteristics of people and communities that make them more or less likely to experience a negative outcome if they were to be exposed to a hazard. These characteristics include eg age, health, income, property tenure and insurance cover.
To deliver a just (ie fair) approach to managing climate related risks the outcomes for the most vulnerable need to be understood and well managed. The process of identifying, and, if necessary, addressing the disproportionate risk faced by the most vulnerable is therefore a central component of a just approach to climate adaptation.
Main findings
- Low income and poor health are strong drivers of social vulnerability to all three of the climate-related hazards we investigated.
- In rural areas, access to the internet and isolation heighten vulnerability.
- In urban settings, poor health, income deprivation, high levels of social and private renting, lack of local knowledge and limited mobility are all important contributors to vulnerability.
- In general, local authorities experiencing the greatest disadvantage today continue to do so in the future.
- People in rural areas are at greater risk of being adversely impacted by climate change than those living in urban areas. This is particularly the case for flooding, though population density means that a greater number of people are affected in urban areas.
- The most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods in large urban areas are three times more likely to be exposed to high temperatures than others, and 50% more likely to be exposed to poor air quality. However, if planned reductions in emissions are realised, the latter risk is projected to decrease in the future.
- Different ethnic groups experience different levels of risk:
- Black ethnic groups tend to experience higher risk today than any other ethnic group, particularly in relation to poor air quality.
- However, difference between the risks faced by the most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods and others within the same ethnic group is greatest amongst white ethnic groups.
Implications for policy
Many of the most important drivers of social vulnerability affect vulnerability to all hazards considered in this report – flooding, high temperatures and poor air quality. Recognising this presents an opportunity to enhance resilience to multiple climate hazards through targeted action and adaptation.
Climate-related disadvantage is often driven by a limited capacity to appropriately prepare for, and recover from, hazard events eg flooding or heat waves. Supporting the most socially vulnerable to make property-level adaptations, including those in rented accommodation, would reduce the negative outcomes when exposed to a hazard.
Note
The datasets and thresholds used are not representative of thresholds of health-related impacts per se but are chosen to provide a relative insight into social disadvantage across Scotland. For any individual, the relationship between climate related hazards (such as flooding, heat, and air quality) and physical and mental health is extremely complex. It is widely documented, for example, that air pollution can have a negative impact on health, with the very young, the elderly and those with pre-existing health conditions being particularly vulnerable. However, the types of illnesses that may be exacerbated by air pollution can also be affected by multiple other factors – such as obesity, alcohol consumption, smoking and genetics. The ways in which these factors interact with air quality to influence overall health are not currently well understood, and further long-term research is needed. Similar complex interactions between multiple factors exist in relation to flooding and heat. Consequently, it is not generally possible to say with any certainty the impact air pollution may have on a specific individual. These caveats should be borne in mind when considering the information contained in this report.
Glossary
The following table provides selected definitions. Definitions of metrics are given in the appropriate location in the report.
|
Term |
Definition |
|
Climate justice |
Defined here as the outcome of taking action to manage climate related risks that provide a more equitable distribution of the potential harms faced because of both inherent social vulnerability and potential for exposure to hazards. |
|
Driver (of vulnerability) |
Factors that increase the impact exposure to a hazard has on a household or an individual |
|
Exposure |
The potential to encounter a climate-related hazard (i.e., to be flooded, or experience a high temperature, or poor air quality). |
|
Geographic disadvantage |
A function of: (a) the likelihood of exposure to a hazard, and (b) individual or group social vulnerability to that hazard. This considers the spatial coincidence of the hazard, exposure and social vulnerability that can be aggregated to the spatial scale of interest. |
|
Hazard |
The occurrence of a situation with the potential to cause harm (loss of wellbeing). In the context here, the hazards considered are flooding, high temperatures and poor air quality. |
|
Indicator |
The specific variables, e.g. ‘% unemployment’, that contribute to the drivers of vulnerability, e.g. low income |
|
Just transition |
Defined here as a ‘fair’ distribution of the short and long-term costs and benefits of climate mitigation or adaptation; an outcome achieved through a process that balances principles of utility and equality with maximising the outcomes from the most socially vulnerable. |
|
Risk |
A function of the chance of an event (e.g., the hazard) and the impact that the event would cause if it occurred (taking account of the social vulnerability of those exposed). |
|
Systemic disadvantage |
The risk faced by the most socially vulnerable when compared to those less vulnerable (Sayers et al., 2016). Since this enables a comparison of the risks faced within a selected grouping (for example, those living in urban areas or from a particular ethnic group) it is referred to here as systemic disadvantage. |
|
Vulnerability (social) |
The inherent characteristics of individuals and communities in which they live that influence the potential to experience loss of wellbeing when exposed to a climate hazard. |
Introduction
Motivation
Scotland’s climate is already changing, and further change is now inevitable. However, the effects of climate change will not be felt equally by everyone. Some places in Scotland – and the people living in those places – are more likely than others to be exposed to climate-related hazards, such as floods. The impact also varies, with some people and communities more vulnerable than others to being negatively affected when exposed to a climate-related hazard.
The Scottish Government is committed to embedding the principles of climate justice and just transition within its response to climate change. The plans developed to adapt to the effects of climate change should help to address inequality and support the people who are most affected by climate change and are the least equipped to adapt to its effects. Scotland’s Climate Change Adaptation Programme 2019-2024[1] (SCCAP2) states the Scottish Government’s objective to ensure that adaptation is focused directly on empowering the people who are more vulnerable to climate change and that adaptation actions are just and put people first.
Delivering these commitments successfully will require an understanding of the impacts of climate change across different social groups in Scotland. Although some evidence already exists, a recent independent assessment of SCCAP2[2] conducted by the Climate Change Committee (CCC) included a specific recommendation to improve the knowledge base around the distributional impacts of climate change.
The research presented here responds to this recommendation by identifying those groups in Scotland most likely to be disproportionately impacted by three selected climate hazards (flooding; high temperature; and poor air quality), now and in the future.
Research questions
Given this context, the research focuses on three primary questions:
Q1. What are the drivers of social vulnerability to climate hazards across Scotland?
Q2. Which groups are at the greatest social risk from climate related hazards, now and in the future?
Q3. To what extent are the most socially vulnerable disproportionately impacted by climate-related hazards?
It is anticipated that the evidence presented in responding to these questions will be relevant to public engagement on climate change issues, and in implementing a just transition.
Report structure
The report is structured as follows:
- Chapter 2 – Assessment approach, sets out the approach to the assessment.
- Chapter 3 – Climate-related hazards – Present and future, sets out why flooding, poor air quality and the high temperatures have been selected, as well as the data sources used, and the adaptation assumptions made.
- Chapter 4 –Social vulnerability, sets out the definition of social vulnerability, the individual indicators and integrated indices of social vulnerability used and shows how they vary across Scotland. This responds to the first research question: ‘What are the drivers of social vulnerability to climate hazards across Scotland?’
- Chapter 5 – Geographic disadvantage, sets out the definition of geographic disadvantage and aggregates the risk spatially to compare the risk faced across Scotland. This responds to the second research question: ‘Which groups are at the greatest social risk from climate related hazards, now and in the future?’
- Chapter 6 – Systemic disadvantage, sets out the definition of systemic disadvantage and compares the risks face by the most socially vulnerable and the less socially vulnerable across Scotland. This responds to the third research question: ‘To what extent are the most socially vulnerable disproportionately impacted by climate-related hazards?’
- Chapter 7 – Conclusions, summarises the findings of the study.
References are provided in Chapter 8. Appendix 1 provides an extended discussion of the rationale for the selection of three hazards. Appendix 2 presents the rationale for the selected indicators of social vulnerability and sets out the approach to calculating a vulnerability index.
Assessment approach
Climate-related hazards and the impact they have on the people and communities exposed to them vary across Scotland. Delivering a just (i.e., fair) approach to managing climate related risks seeks to ensure the outcomes for the most socially vulnerable are understood and well-managed, rather than basing decisions on strict utilitarian or purely egalitarian principles (e.g., Sayers., 2017). The process of identifying, and if necessary, addressing disproportionality in the risk faced by the most socially vulnerable is therefore a central component of a just approach to climate adaptation.
The framework of assessment used to support this process considers the factors that influence social vulnerability and how these combine with exposure to three selected hazards (flooding, heat, and poor air quality) to drive geographic and systemic disadvantage (Figure 1). The rationale of the approach is discussed in more detail below.

Figure 1 Overview of the assessment process
Climate-related disadvantage arises through the combination of two aspects:
- Social vulnerability – Social vulnerability refers to the combination of social characteristics of people and communities that determine their propensity for harm. Social vulnerability therefore reflects the inherent characteristics of the people and communities in which they live that would – if they were to be exposed to a hazard – make them more or less likely to experience a negative welfare outcome. There are many factors that contribute to social vulnerability, including bio-physical indicators such as older age groups and people with pre-existing ill-health as well as factors such as income, property tenure, access to insurance and access to support to enable adaptation. Multiple indicators are therefore used here to assess a relative measure of social vulnerability at the scale of a ‘neighbourhood’ (defined as one Data Zone[3]). The range of indicators used vary subtlety between the selected hazards (i.e., flooding, poor air quality and high temperatures) but many are shared (as detailed in Chapter 4). People and communities may be classified as socially vulnerable even if they are never exposed to a hazard – it is a measure of their potential to experience harm.
- Exposure to climate-related hazards – This refers to the likelihood of people and communities being exposed to one of the selected climate-related hazards (flooding, high temperature, and poor air quality). Exposure to each hazard varies across Scotland, with some communities more likely than others to be exposed to one or more of these three hazards.
To help understand how climate disadvantage manifests in Scotland the results of the analysis are viewed through two lenses; a geographic spatial lens and a systemic social lens as described below.
Geographic disadvantage (a spatial lens). This considers the risk faced by each neighbourhood, based on the social vulnerability and exposure to climate hazards within each neighbourhood. Those neighbourhoods with the greatest risk face the greatest ‘geographic disadvantage.’ To provide insight into how these risks are distributed, the risks at a neighbourhood scale are aggregated according to four selected groupings:
- Local authority: Local authorities are central to managing climate related risks and disadvantage (Figure 2, left). Neighbourhoods within a local authority area have been aggregated to enable an assessment of the geographic disadvantage faced by each local authority, and how this compares to other local authorities. All local authorities are considered alongside a specific focus on Glasgow and Dundee, that is used to illustrate the potential disadvantage experience in two city regions (Figure 2, right).
- Settlement type: The Scottish Government (2018) identifies eight settlement types ranging from very remote rural areas to large urban areas (Figure 2, middle). Neighbourhoods within each of these eight settlement types have been aggregated and compared to understand the differences in geographic disadvantage faced across rural and urban settings.
- Flood source: Across Scotland some communities are exposed to flooding and others are not, and the different sources of flooding can lead to different types of challenges. Neighbourhoods, therefore, have been grouped according to their potential exposure to three different sources of flooding: coastal, fluvial, and surface water. This enables an analysis and comparison of the risks faced across each source of flooding.
- Between different ethnic groups: Ethnicity is an important consideration across policy. Information on the proportional representation of five different ethnic groups in each neighbourhood (white, black / African / Caribbean, Asian, other minorities, mixed minorities) is used to aggregate the neighbourhood scale risks. The data on ethnicity is drawn from readily available information within public domain and linked at a neighbourhood scale to property tenure and income (Sayers et al., 2020). Ethnicity is not considered as a driver of social vulnerability, but aggregated risks faced by different ethnic groups is used to aid the understanding of distributional aspects of climate-related risks.
The approach and insights into geographic disadvantage across Scotland are discussed further in Chapter 5.
Systemic disadvantage (a social lens) (Sayers et al, 2017). Systemic disadvantage arises when the risks faced by the most socially vulnerable are greater than those experienced by the less vulnerable within a given grouping. To assess the degree of systemic disadvantage the risks faced by the 20% most socially vulnerable within the same local authority, settlement type, flood source or ethnic group are compared with the risks faced by the less vulnerable within the same group. This comparison of the risks faced within each of the four groupings helps to understand how the outcomes for the most socially vulnerable compare to those of others and hence, where needed, how improved outcomes may be appropriately supported (a central consideration in a just (i.e., fair) approach to adaptation, Rawls, 1971).
The approach and insights into systemic disadvantage across Scotland are discussed further in Chapter 6.
Note: Further elaboration of the assessment approach to both geographic and systemic disadvantage is provided where necessary throughout the report and in the supporting appendices.

Figure 2 Geographic aggregations – Local authorities, settlement types and city regions
Climate-related hazards – Present and future
Selected hazards
The 3rd Climate Change Risk Assessment (CCRA3) highlights increased climate-related risks across Scotland from a range of hazards (CCC, 2021). Flooding, increasing water scarcity and the degradation of the natural environment are all highlighted as important challenges. The European Environment Agency (EEA, 2017) also highlight higher temperatures and their association with poor air quality and other risks, such as wildfire, as important considerations.
Based on this evidence and review of available data, three selected priority climate-related hazards are assessed: flooding, heat stress, and air quality (with the rationale for their selection elaborated in Appendix 1). Both the associated present-day risks and how these may change in response to a 2oC rise in Global Mean Surface Temperature (GMST) by 2100 are assessed. In the case of flooding, a second higher, but plausible, 4oC rise in GMST is also considered (mirroring the scenarios used in UKCCRA3 future flood projections, Sayers et al., 2020). Information to support a similar analysis for heat and air quality given a 4oC climate future is not readily available and is excluded here.
Data sources and models
Table 1 sets out the data sources used, and processing undertaken, for each hazard. The approach necessarily varies across the selected hazards to reflect the availability of supporting datasets and previous analysis.
Adaptation assumptions
To explore future risk, it is assumed that flood-related adaptation continues as in the recent past (defined by the Current Level of Adaptation used within the CCRA3 flood projections, ibid) and that no further adaptation takes place to reduce heat or air quality risks (although it is noted that some aspects of adaptation are embedded in the UK Air Quality projections used here as input data). It is also assumed that the present-day socio-economic setting and related distributions (population, income etc) remains unchanged into the future.
|
Hazard |
Climate future* |
Climate data used |
Processing overview |
|
Flood | |||
|
Fluvial |
2oC, 4oC |
As used in UKCCRA3 – changes in future flows derived from UKCP18 Probabilistic Projections (in Sayers et al., 2020 based on Kay et al., 2020). |
Present-day and future flood hazard and associated risk are derived using the Future Flood Explorer (FFE, Sayers et al., 2020) taking account of climate change and a modification representation of Current Levels of Adaptation to better reflects existing flood defence standards in Scotland (as set out in UKCCRA3 modified to assume present-day coastal defence standards remain unchanged in urban areas). Note: The underlying information is based on the analysis undertaken for the UKCCRA3 (Sayers et al., 2020) that includes important caveats on variation in the accuracy of the underlying hazard mapping and important the location of the flood defence infrastructure and the ongoing programme of improvement. |
|
Coastal |
2oC, 4oC |
As used in UKCCRA3 – changes in relative Sea Level Rise (rSLR) from the UKCP18 Marine Report (Palmer et al., 2018) are used to provide an estimate of the change in coastal standards (in Sayers et al., 2020 based on Gouldby et al., 2017). | |
|
Surface water |
2oC, 4oC |
As used in UKCCRA3 – a pre-cursor to the 2.2km UKCP18 short duration rainfall projections (in Sayers et al., 2020 based Kendon et al., 2014 and Dale et al., 2017). | |
|
Air quality | |||
|
Particulate Matter (PM10) |
n/a |
Derived here using UK Air background concentrations developed for use in Local Air Quality Management assessments. These data are produced at a 1km resolution for the present-day (2018) through to 2030 with the latter taken as the future scenario for the purposes of this analysis (Figure 3). |
PM10 and NO2 are key pollutants influencing human health and regulated as such in associated regulatory frameworks. Severity is considered using a threshold approach to exposure based on the following thresholds: an annual mean air quality that exceeds 9.92 µg m3 PM10 and 9.21 µg m3 NO2 These thresholds represent the present-day (2018) average annual (mean) levels of PM10 and NO2 across Scotland. They are referred to as ‘poor air quality’ for the purposes of this report[4]. |
|
Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2, largely derived from burning fossil fuels) |
n/a | ||
|
Heat | |||
|
TMax – 95th percentile maximum temperature |
2oC Note: Equivalent data is not readily available for a 4oC |
Based on from 12km resolution UKCP18 outputs for the RCP8.5 scenario (Kennedy-Asser et al., 2021). The extreme heat measure is taken to be the average temperature for days exceeding the 95th percentile maximum temperature (TMax) for each 12km cell (Figure 4). Present-day refers to a 30-year period in the recent past (1990-2019). The future scenario refers to a 30-year period representing 2oC global warming*. |
Severity is considered using a threshold approach to exposure based on the following threshold: the mean temperature of days that exceed the present-day 95th percentile of the daily maximum summer temperature (TMax) averaged across Scotland (i.e., 21.6 °C). |
*Rise in Global Mean Surface Temperature (GMST)

PM10 – Present and future (yellow, orange, and red indicate areas above the threshold of poor air quality used here)

NO2 – Present and future (yellow, orange, and red indicate areas above the threshold of poor air quality used here)
Figure 3 Poor air quality – Present and future hazard

Right: Yellow, orange, and red indicate areas above the threshold of high temperature used here
Figure 4 High temperature – Present and future
Social vulnerability
What is social vulnerability?
Social vulnerability refers to characteristics of people and communities that determine their propensity for harm, irrespective of whether they are exposed to a hazard. Social vulnerability therefore reflects the specific characteristics of the people and communities in which they live that would – if they were to be exposed to a hazard – make them more or less likely to experience a negative welfare outcome.
There are many conceptualisations of social vulnerability and ways to consider who is vulnerable and why (e.g., Adger and Kelly, 1999; Tapsell et al., 2010; Lindley et al., 2011; Sayers et al., 2017, 2020). There is, however, general agreement that the most important characteristics relate to five domains:
- Susceptibility to harm – personal biophysical characteristics that lead to a differential (negative) impact on welfare given exposure to a hazard (e.g., older age groups and people with pre-existing ill-health).
- Ability to prepare – factors that may influence the degree to which people are able to prepare (e.g., access to insurance, income, and local knowledge).
- Ability to respond – factors that may influence the degree to which people are able to respond to a hazard event (e.g., income, personal mobility, and community networks).
- Ability to recover – factors that may influence how well people can recover from being exposed to a hazard event (e.g., income, insurance, housing mobility, and health service availability).
- Service access and community support – factors that may influence the help people are able to access when needed (e.g., GP services, help from neighbourhoods, access to online advice and support).
These domains underpin the three social vulnerability indices used here:
- Neighbourhood Flood Vulnerability Index (NFVI, Sayers et al., 2017)
- Neighbourhood (poor) Air Quality Vulnerability Index (NAQVI, defined here)
- Neighbourhood (high temperature) Heat Vulnerability Index (NHVI, defined here)
All three indices use multiple indicators at the scale of a ‘neighbourhood’ (defined by the census unit of a Data Zone, GI-SAT, 2011) to evaluate social vulnerability (Table 2). The selected indicators draw upon previous research (e.g., Lindley et al., 2011; Kazmierczak et al., 2015) and are combined to provide the three standardised social vulnerability indices across Scotland (Figure 5).
The rationale for the inclusion of each indicator is detailed in Appendix 2 together with the approach to calculating indices illustrated using the calculation of the NFVI.
| Group | Indicator | Heat | Air | Flood |
|
Age
|
Young Children |
🗸 |
🗸 |
🗸 |
|
Older Adults |
🗸 |
🗸 |
🗸 | |
|
Health
|
People in ill-health |
🗸 | ||
|
Households with members in ill-health |
🗸 | |||
|
Emergency hospital admissions |
🗸 |
🗸 | ||
|
Disability and ill-health |
🗸 |
🗸 | ||
|
Mood and Anxiety Disorders |
🗸 |
🗸 | ||
|
Medical and Care Residents |
🗸 |
🗸 | ||
|
Low birthweight |
🗸 |
🗸 | ||
|
Income
|
Unemployment |
🗸 | ||
|
Long-term unemployment |
🗸 | |||
|
Low-income occupations |
🗸 | |||
|
Households with dependent children and no employed adults |
🗸 | |||
|
Employment Deprivation |
🗸 |
🗸 | ||
|
Income Deprivation |
🗸 |
🗸 |
🗸 | |
|
Average Household Income |
🗸 |
🗸 | ||
|
Information Use |
Recent Arrivals to the UK |
🗸 | ||
|
English Proficiency |
🗸 |
🗸 |
🗸 | |
|
Internet
|
Sub-standard Broadband |
🗸 |
🗸 | |
|
Lack of Superfast Broadband |
🗸 |
🗸 | ||
|
Local knowledge
|
Population Transience |
🗸 |
🗸 | |
|
New Migrants from outside the local area |
🗸 | |||
|
Tenure
|
Social renting |
🗸 |
🗸 |
🗸 |
|
Private renting |
🗸 |
🗸 |
🗸 | |
|
Direct Flood Experience |
Households exposed to significant flood risk |
🗸 | ||
|
Crime |
Crime rates |
🗸 |
🗸 |
🗸 |
|
Mobility
|
Disability |
🗸 | ||
|
Disability and Ill-health |
🗸 |
🗸 | ||
|
Medical and Care Residents |
🗸 |
🗸 |
🗸 | |
|
Private Transport ownership |
🗸 |
🗸 |
🗸 | |
|
Accessibility by bus |
🗸 |
🗸 | ||
|
Social networks
|
Single Pensioner Households |
🗸 |
🗸 |
🗸 |
|
Primary School networks |
🗸 |
🗸 |
🗸 | |
|
Civil Organizations |
🗸 |
🗸 | ||
|
Single Adult Households |
🗸 |
🗸 | ||
|
Lone Parent Households with dependent children |
🗸 | |||
|
Health service access
|
Accessibility of Pharmacies |
🗸 |
🗸 | |
|
Accessibility of Hospitals |
🗸 |
🗸 | ||
|
Travel time to GP surgery (private transport) |
🗸 |
🗸 | ||
|
Travel time to GP surgery (public transport) |
🗸 |
🗸 | ||
|
Service Availability |
Emergency services exposed to flooding |
🗸 | ||
|
Care homes exposed to flooding |
🗸 | |||
|
GP surgeries exposed to flooding |
🗸 | |||
|
Schools exposed to flooding |
🗸 | |||
|
Indoor pollution sources |
Smoking Behaviour |
🗸 | ||
|
Indoor sources |
🗸 | |||
|
Housing Characteristics |
Caravan, mobile or temporary structures in all households |
🗸 |
🗸 |
🗸 |
|
Overcrowding |
🗸 | |||
|
High Rise Flat indicator |
🗸 | |||
|
Urban cover |
🗸 | |||
|
Lack of Private Greenspace |
🗸 | |||
|
Lack of Community Greenspace |
🗸 |

Figure 5 Indices of social vulnerability across Scotland: Heat, air quality, and flooding
Drivers of social vulnerability
Social vulnerability varies across Scotland. These include low income, ill-health, property tenure (particularly social housing) and a lack of local knowledge (either due to issues of language or relatively poor internet access) as well as biophysical sensitivities due to household composition (physical mobility, younger children, and older adults). Consequently, many of the neighbourhoods most socially vulnerable to one hazard are also inherently vulnerable to the others. The relative importance of these common factors that influence social vulnerability to each hazard, as well as hazard specific influences, are discussed below.
Flooding – Neighbourhood Flood Vulnerability Index
Poor health, income deprivation, and limited mobility are dominant contributors to social vulnerability to flooding across all settlement types (Figure 6). Income affects the extent to which people can prepare for, respond to, and recover from events (including their ability to purchase household insurance, make property adaptations or have autonomy over other aspects of adaptation). Restricted personal mobility and transport make it difficult to deploy household level adaptations (e.g., flood gates, move personal items or respond to post-flood challenges, such as find alternative accommodation or access services). In remote and rural areas, social and physical isolation also have a strong influence on social vulnerability. The most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods, particularly in very remote rural areas, also tend to experience low mobility (linked to indicators of physical disability, residential care, and private transport availability) and are more likely than others to have local services (e.g., GP practices and hospitals) affected by flooding and may have more limited social networks to draw upon (e.g., as suggested by higher number of single person households).

Bars show the relative contribution to the overall index of social vulnerability. Highlighted cells show the grouped indicators with greatest influence on social vulnerability for each settlement type.
Figure 6 Relative contributions to the Neighbourhood Flood Vulnerability Index
Poor air quality – Neighbourhood Air Quality Vulnerability Index
Biophysical drivers of social vulnerability (e.g., age, including younger children and older adults, as well as underlying health conditions) are important influences across Scotland (although are particularly influential in smaller towns and remote rural areas). These combine with income deprivation, lack of local knowledge (relating to pollution), and the presence of indoor air pollution sources that exacerbate the risk (e.g., parental smoking and household fuel types) to be the dominant drivers of social vulnerability to poor air quality across Scotland (Figure 7). In combination these issues both increase the potential to experience harm when exposed to poor air quality and reduce the capacity of households to adapt to poor air quality during an event and in the longer term.

Bars show the relative contribution to the overall index of social vulnerability. Highlighted cells show the grouped indicators with greatest influence on social vulnerability for each settlement type.
Figure 7 Air quality – Relative contributions of social vulnerability
Beyond these nation-wide patterns, in rural and more remote areas poor internet availability further undermines adaptive capacity (limiting access to online information and health services as well as access warnings and support). Consequently, accessible rural areas, remote rural areas and very remote rural areas tend to higher social vulnerability than elsewhere due to lower adaptative capacity driven by relatively poor communications. Rural communities also tend to exhibit an increased prevalence of indoor sources of pollution that further increase inherent vulnerability to poor air quality. In remote towns and remote rural areas more limited English proficiency is also an influential factor in determining the overall level of social vulnerability. Within large urban areas and other urban areas social vulnerability is driven by issues of income, language, and local knowledge. The adaptive capacity of households in these communities tends to be limited due to poor access to information (e.g., reflecting limited internet connectivity) that in turn restricts awareness of potential problems as well as income.
High temperature – Neighbourhood Heat Vulnerability Index
Similar indicators increase social vulnerability as reported for air quality and flooding, particularly income and local knowledge (Figure 8). These drivers combine to undermine adaptive capacity by limiting the available resources to adapt their homes, accessing information about the dangers of excess heat in their homes, and accessing help during heatwaves.
In rural and remote areas, factors associated with biophysical drivers (relating to health and age) are also important influences on social vulnerability. As with air quality, the ability to access information through online sources tends to be more difficult. Difficulties in accessing health services is a particularly influential driver in very remote rural areas (although such areas are less likely to experience high temperatures, residents will be less well adapted to heat-wave events when very extreme events do occur).

Bars show the relative contributions to the overall index of social vulnerability. Highlighted cells show the domains with greatest influence on the vulnerability index for each settlement type.
Figure 8 Heat indicators – Relative contributions to social vulnerability
Variation in social vulnerability across Scotland
By Local authority
Social vulnerability varies between Local Authorities (Figure 9). The social character of some Local Authorities, including West Dunbartonshire, Glasgow City, and Dundee City, leads to high levels of social vulnerability to all hazards. This reflects the many challenges these Local Authorities face in addressing underlying social issues (such as income and information access that are important drivers of social vulnerability across all hazards). Subtle differences in the drivers of social vulnerability to each hazard are evident in some locations. For example, East Ayrshire exhibits a particular social vulnerability to flooding (as represented through the NFVI), whereas in Argyll and Bute, for example, social vulnerability to heat and air quality is dominant.

Positive values indicate greater social vulnerability compared to the average across Scotland. Data are averages (means) for each local authority.
Figure 9 Social vulnerability indices by Local Authority
By settlement type
Social vulnerability to all three selected hazards (flood, poor air quality and heat) is greatest in large urban areas, remote small towns, and very remote small towns (Figure 10). The underlying social vulnerability to poor air quality and heat are typically higher in more rural areas than the equivalent vulnerability to flooding. In part this reflects the important influence of internet access within the assessment of social vulnerability to poor air quality and high temperatures that is typically more limited in rural areas (an influence not explicitly included as part of the social vulnerability to flooding, see table 2.

A positive value indicates the social vulnerability is greater than the national average. A negative value indicates social vulnerability is less than the national average. All data are means.
Figure 10 Social vulnerability by settlement type: Flood, heat, and air quality
Geographic disadvantage
What is geographic disadvantage
Geographic disadvantage considers the combination of social vulnerability (from Chapter 3) and exposure to a hazard (i.e., high temperatures, poor air quality or flooding). How exposure to a hazard and social vulnerability combine determines the related social risk. Those neighbourhoods with the greatest risk are at greatest geographic disadvantage.
Geographic flood disadvantage
By flood source
Across Scotland fluvial flood risks are dominant today (~2018) and remain so in the future. Surface water flood risks and coastal flood risks are projected to increase more rapidly than fluvial risks and hence make a larger contribution to the national risk by 2080s (in terms of Expected Annual Damage, EAD)[5]. This is particularly the case given a 2oC climate future (Figure 11).

EAD is based on residential direct damage
Figure 11 Flood – Expected Annual Damage by flood source – all neighbourhoods
By Local Authority
Flood risk (as expressed by EAD) varies significantly across the Local Authorities, with Glasgow City, and Dumfries and Galloway experiencing the greatest risk today (~2018) and in the future (Figure 12). EAD is based on residential direct damage
As sown in Figure 12 the influence of climate change varies, with some Local Authorities experiencing more significant increases in flood risk than others. In Dundee City, Orkney Islands, North Lanarkshire, and Inverclyde, for example, the present-day flood risk is projected to double by the 2080s given a 4oC climate future. In some locations the influence of climate change on flood risk is much less; in South Ayrshire, Perth and Kinross, and East Renfrewshire, for example, the projected increase is around 30%.

EAD is based on residential direct damage
Figure 12 Flood – Flood – Expected Annual Damage by Local Authority – All neighbourhoods
By settlement type
Flood risk (as expressed by EAD) varies across the eight settlement types. Most of the national flood risk is generated within urban areas (large urban areas and other urban areas) – Figure 13. This is as expected given the large number of people living within the major, low-lying, estuaries of Scotland. Accessible rural areas are also significant in the context of the national flood risk profile. This is less intuitive and may in part reflect the greater uncertainty in underlying understanding of flood hazards in rural settings (including less information on the location and standard of flood defences). At an aggregated scale however, this insight is considered a credible finding.

EAD is based on residential direct damage
Figure 13 Flood – Expected Annual Damage by settlement type – all neighbourhoods
A focus on EAD can be misleading in terms of understanding how the risk is distributed at an individual scale. This is because some settlement types represent a much higher number of people than others. The metric of Expected Annual Damage: Individual (EADi, as defined in Sayers et al, 2017) provides an insight into the risk experienced by individuals (Figure 14). The EADi is calculated by dividing the EAD by the exposed population and highlights that those individuals living in smaller towns (accessible small towns) and rural areas (all categories) are, on average, subject to greater levels economic risk that those living in urban areas.

EADi is based on EAD residential direct damage normalised by population
Figure 14 Flood – Expected Annual Damage: Individual by settlement type – all neighbourhoods
By ethnicity
Present-day risk experienced by each ethnic group is similar, although black ethnic groups experience slightly higher flood risk today (when expressed by EADi) than all others (on average). In the future, given climate change, this broad pattern remains, however the risks faced by black, Asian, and Other minority groups are projected to increase more rapidly than for others (Figure 15). This tends to reflect the concentration of these ethnic groups in urban settlements most exposed to increases in flood hazard as the climate changes.

EADi is based on EAD residential direct damage normalised by population across Scotland
Figure 15 Flood – Expected Annual Damage: Individual – By ethnicity
Geographic air quality disadvantage
In general, poor air quality associated with NO2 is principally limited to larger urban areas although there is a stronger regional component for PM10 (Figure 3). As efforts are made to reduce emissions, air quality is projected to improve from present-day levels by 2030 in terms of both PM10 and NO2 (although the broad spatial pattern of concentrations remains largely unchanged). Consequently, there is a corresponding projected reduction in the proportion of neighbourhoods across Scotland exposed to above threshold concentrations of PM10 (falling from 57% in 2018 to 31% in the future) and of NO2 (from 46% to 14%).
This national scale perspective masks the significant variation in disadvantage across Scotland, as illustrated by Figure 16. This figure presents the spatial pattern of disadvantage by combining the Neighbourhood Air Quality Vulnerability Index (Figure 5) with the air quality hazard (Figure 3). Areas marked as extremely high or acute are of particular interest as these locations are within the 20% most disadvantaged across Scotland. The reason for this may be because:
- High social vulnerability levels combine with high concentration levels
- Lower social vulnerability levels combine with very high concentrations
- Lower concentrations combine with very high social vulnerability levels
These issues are considered further below from the perspective of Local Authorities, different settlement types and ethnic groups below.
By Local Authority
Glasgow City experiences the highest level of disadvantage associated with below average air quality, with over half of its neighbourhoods within the 20% most disadvantaged neighbourhoods today and in the future (Figure 18). Similarly, a high proportion of their neighbourhoods within the cities of Edinburgh and Dundee are within the 20% most disadvantaged in terms of below average air quality across Scotland. The principal pollutant of concern is not the same in all Local Authorities. In Mid Lothian and East Lothian, below average air quality is driven largely by PM10 and less so NO2. In Aberdeen, the opposite occurs, with high levels of disadvantage more associated with NO2.

Figure 16 Air quality – Future (2030s) – Social disadvantage. Left: PM10 –future; Right: NO2 –future. In both yellow indicates the Scottish average, i.e., areas where the combination of relative social vulnerability and relative air quality balance out at around average overall. Present-day distributions are similar and not shown here

A neighbourhood is defined at ‘significant risk’ if it is within the 20% most disadvantaged neighbourhoods across Scotland
Figure 17 Air quality – Local Authority
By settlement type
Much of Scotland is sparsely populated with good air quality (according to the threshold values set out earlier in Table 1). Exposure to below average air quality tends to be associated with urban areas (Figure 18). This is particularly evident for NO2 and, of course, is unsurprising. This basic narrative, however, masks two more subtle insights that highlight the present-day regional influence of PM10 pollution in accessible small towns and rural areas and that the air quality hazard is projected to significantly improve in urban settings (but this relies upon significant reduction in emissions).
By ethnicity
There is a stark variation in exposure to below average air quality (defined by the threshold values set out earlier in Table 1) across different ethnic groups (Figure 19). There is also a marked disproportionality in who benefits most from the projected improvements in future air quality. For PM10, for example, non-white ethnic groups are much more likely to experience below average PM10. This is especially true for the black ethnic group since there are five times as many black people living in neighbourhoods with above average PM10 concentrations compared to below average PM10 concentrations. Indeed, the black, and the ‘other’ non-white ethnic groups are the only groups who are still more likely to be exposed to above present-day average PM10 concentrations than not by 2030. A similar pattern holds for NO2 with the black, Asian, and other non-white ethnic groups all being more than three times as likely to be exposed to above average NO2 concentrations compared to below average NO2 in the present-day. By 2030, people in non-white ethnic groups are still more likely to be exposed to NO2 concentrations above the present-day average than people in the white ethnic group.

A value of 1.0 indicates a 1:1 ratio, i.e., an equal number of people exposed to above and below threshold of present-day average air quality (Table 1) today and in the future in the specified settlement type. Values greater than 1 indicate that a larger proportion of people living in the given settlement type are exposed to above threshold conditions compared to below threshold conditions.
Figure 18 Exposure to below average air quality – By settlement type

A value of 1.0 indicates a 1:1 ratio, i.e., an equal number of people exposed to above and below threshold of present-day average air quality (Table 1) today and in the future in the specified ethnic group. Values greater than 1 indicate that a larger proportion of people in the given ethnic group are exposed to above threshold conditions compared to below threshold conditions.
Figure 19 Exposure to below average air quality – By ethnic group
Geographic heat disadvantage
Much of the south and east of Scotland (away from the cooler coastal fringe) is projected to experience a considerable rise in high temperatures relative to the present-day average (Figure 4). Combining this pattern of exposure with information on social vulnerability provides an assessment of disadvantage (Figure 20). The distributions of disadvantage by Local Authorities, settlement types and ethnicities are discussed below.

Figure 20 Heat – Future (2oC 2030s) – Social disadvantage
By local authority
All but 16% of Glasgow City’s neighbourhoods fall within the top 20% most heat disadvantaged neighbourhoods in Scotland, with East Renfrewshire, Falkirk and Dundee City also already experiencing significant heat disadvantage (Table 2). In general, most Local Authorities with significant disadvantage today continue to experience similar risks in the future. There are however some variations. Across Falkirk, for example, relative social risk from heat is projected to reduce in the future, whereas elsewhere increases are projected (e.g., in Scottish Borders and Dundee City). This takes account of changes in relative patterns of warming (Figure 21).

A neighbourhood is defined at ‘significant risk’ if it is within the 20% most disadvantaged neighbourhoods across Scotland. Local authorities with less than 1% of neighbourhoods at significant risk are excluded from the chart.
Figure 21 High temperature – Local Authority
By settlement type
Heat disadvantage is currently largely confined to urban areas (Figure 22). The present-day disadvantage is projected to increase and extend to influence more rural settings. The projected increase is significant across all settlement types (including a fourfold increase in the population exposed to above average maximum temperatures in Other Urban areas by 2030s).

A value of 1.0 indicates a 1:1 ratio, i.e., an equal number of people exposed to above and below threshold of present-day average high temperatures (defined by Tmax95) today and in the future in the specified settlement type. Values greater than 1 indicate that a larger proportion of people living in the given settlement type are exposed to above threshold conditions compared to below threshold conditions.
Figure 22 Exposure to above threshold high temperature – By settlement type
By ethnicity
The projected increase in exposure to extreme heat varies considerably between ethnic groups (Figure 23). Given a 2oC rise in GMST and assuming no change in population distribution, the analysis suggests that people in the Asian ethnic group are almost eight times as likely, and black groups more than nine times as likely, to live in neighbourhoods where temperature extremes are above the present-day Scottish average (as defined by the Tmax95) compared to below the present-day Scottish average.

A value of 1.0 indicates a 1:1 ratio, i.e., an equal number of people exposed to above and below threshold of present-day average high temperatures (defined by Tmax95) today and in the future in the specified ethnic group. Values greater than 1 indicate that a larger proportion of people in the given ethnic group are exposed to above threshold conditions compared to below threshold conditions. The threshold for comparison is an average (mean) temperature for Scotland (Table 1). This national value is compared against respective local averages per neighbourhood to determine whether the neighbourhood’s population is exposed or not. Given the resolution of temperature data used and tendency for warmer areas to be more populated all values are greater than 1.
Figure 23 Heat – Exposure to above average maximum temperatures – By ethnic group
Systemic Disadvantage
What is systemic disadvantage?
Systemic disadvantage arises when the risks faced by the most socially vulnerable are greater than those experienced by others.
Systemic flood disadvantage
Systemic flood disadvantaged is explored by comparing the risks faced by all neighbourhoods with those faced by the 20% most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods (as defined by the NFVI) within a given grouping (i.e., those exposed to the same flood source, living within the same settlement type, or from the same ethnic group).
By flood source
Across Scotland the present-day Expected Annual Damage experienced by an individual (EADi) living within the 20% most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods is, on average, similar in the case of surface water flooding and slightly less in the case of fluvial and coastal flooding (Figure 24). Given climate change, surface water and coastal flood risks increase similarly for the less and most socially vulnerable (in both a 2oC and 4oC future). Fluvial flood risk, however, is projected to increase more rapidly for the most socially vulnerable than for others given a 4oC climate future. The reason for this is difficult to determine (given the scope here) but highlights the importance understanding flood source-specific issues in supporting a just transition.

EADi based on EAD residential direct damage normalised by population
Figure 24 Flood – Systemic disadvantage in Expected Annual Damage: Individual by source
By settlement type and city regions
Flood risk (as defined by the EADi) experienced by those living in the 20% most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods varies markedly across the eight settlement types, with the most socially vulnerable living in remote and very remote small towns, accessible rural areas as well as other urban areas experiencing significantly higher risk than the average (Figure 25Figure 25).
The city of Glasgow and Dundee are important cites in Scotland with contrasting contributions to the national flood risk profile of Scotland; with the Expected Annual Damages from flooding greater in Glasgow than any other Local Authority whilst in Dundee flood damages are much less. This simple narrative fails to capture differences in the number of people exposed to flooding (with Glasgow having many more people exposed to flooding than Dundee) and provides no insight to how the risks are distributed between the most and less socially vulnerable. In both cities, when normalised by the exposed population, the most socially vulnerable experience greater risk than the less socially vulnerable and higher than average risk compared to the most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods across Scotland (as defined by EADi, Figure 26). When income, property tenure, and the likely access to insurance is considered (using the metric of Relative Economic Pain, REP, Sayers et al., 2017)[6] the significant disadvantage experienced by the most socially vulnerable in Dundee (and to a lesser extent Glasgow) is clear (Figure 27). This is likely to reflect the combined influences of low income, and social and private rented accommodation; both of which are considered important barriers to insurance (as reported by Flood Re, Sayers et al., 2020).
EADi based on EAD residential direct damage normalised by population across Scotland
Figure 25 Flood – Systematic disadvantage – By Settlement type

EADi based on EAD residential direct damage normalised by population
Figure 26 Flood – Systematic disadvantage (EADi) – Glasgow and Dundee city regions

Relative Economic Pain (REP) expresses the ratio between uninsured economic damages and household income
Figure 27 Flood – Systematic disadvantage (REP) – Glasgow and Dundee city regions
By ethnicity
Flood risk varies significantly across the five ethnic groups considered. As discussed earlier, black ethnic groups regardless of social vulnerability, on average, experience much higher levels of risk compared to others (Figure 15). This disproportionality is underlined when considered from the perspective of Relative Economic Pain (REP). As shown in Figure 28, the REP associated with present day flood risk is around 1.8 times higher within the black ethnic groups compared to the national average. This increases to 3.6 times by the 2080s given a 4oC climate future (much higher than for any other ethnic group). When comparing the risks faced by the most socially vulnerable within each ethnic group, the most socially vulnerable white groups are most disadvantaged, experiencing a REP of flooding similar to, or greater than, the average for white ethnic groups (Figure 28). The broader social and economic drivers for these issues are difficult to determine but reflect similar issues within the analysis here. For example, both black and the most socially vulnerable white groups are more likely than others to be living in socially rented accommodation and (Figure 29a) and within these two groups household incomes are also more likely to be constrained (Figure 29b). These findings indicate greater inequalities amongst white ethnic groups compared to others around both household incomes and household tenure. These influences lead to both black groups and the most socially vulnerable white groups experiencing higher levels of REP (from flooding) compared to others.
Note:
As introduced earlier the social vulnerability of each neighbourhood is independent of ethnicity. The systemic disadvantage within each ethnic group has therefore been determined as follows:
- The number of people from each ethnic group within each neighbourhood is determined based on published proportions at the neighbourhood scale.
- The number of people from each ethnic group living within the 20% most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods is then summed.
- The proportion of people from each ethnic group living with the 20% most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods is then determined.
- The various metrics (EADi, REP etc) for each ethnic group, including those living in 20% most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods and for all neighbourhoods are then determined.

A value of one indicates the Relative Economic Pain (REP) is equal to the present-day national average in Scotland. A value greater than one indicates the REP is higher than the present-day average by the given factor (i.e., a value of 1.5 indicators the REP is 1.5 times the present-day value).
Figure 28 Flood – Relative Economic Pain – By ethnicity

Distribution of tenure – Percentage of households living in social rented accommodation

Distribution of income (social renters) – Percentage of national average
Figure 29 Ethnicity – Income and tenure distribution
Systemic air quality disadvantage
Systemic disadvantage associated with air quality is explored by comparing the ratio of people facing above average concentrations of PM10 and NO2 compared to below average concentrations, using 2018 as a baseline. The assessment compares ratios for all neighbourhoods to those in the 20% most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods (defined using the Neighbourhood Air Quality Vulnerability Index – NAQVI) and grouped by settlement type.
Today, people living in large urban areas are six times more likely to be exposed to above average rather than below average concentrations of PM10, and eight times more likely for NO2. However, the most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods within large urban areas are much more likely to experience above average poor air quality, being nearly 10 and 13 times more likely for PM10 and NO2 respectively, i.e., compared to the population as a whole living in that settlement type (Figure 30). There is also a particular tendency for the most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods to experience higher pollutant concentrations in other urban areas (for NO2) and accessible small towns (for PM10) (Figure 31).
Elsewhere, the most socially vulnerable are generally less likely to be exposed to above mean concentrations compared to the population as a whole living in that settlement type, or there is very little difference. In rural areas, air quality is generally very good (and is expected to be even better in the future – Figure 18). In all rural areas, it is therefore more likely that people are exposed to concentrations which are below the Scottish mean rather than above it.
In the future, far fewer people are estimated to be exposed to concentrations above present-day averages. Nevertheless, future air quality improvements are expected to be less marked for the most socially vulnerable in large urban areas (for PM10 and NO2) and accessible small towns (for PM10) compared to the population as a whole living in these settlement types.

The y-axis shows the ratio of people expected to be exposed to above vs. below average concentrations of PM10 and NO2 using 2018 as the baseline. A value of 1 represents no difference, i.e., the same number of people for above vs. below.
Figure 30 Air Quality – Exposure to below average air pollutant concentrations – By settlement type

The y-axis shows the mean concentrations of PM10 and NO2. This is expressed as a mean of all neighbourhoods associated with each of the settlement types.
Figure 31 Mean air quality of all and top 20% most vulnerable by settlement type
Systemic heat disadvantage
Across Scotland, the most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods are disproportionately exposed to high temperatures (Figure 32). This is particularly the case in large urban areas, remote small towns, and accessible rural areas (Figure 33). In very remote small towns and very remote rural areas the reverse is true. This is because social vulnerability in these settlement types is strongly influenced by isolation-related factors (such as low accessibility of health services and poor internet) and isolated, more rural areas tend to have lower temperatures and lower temperature extremes. Currently the most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods in large urban areas are much more likely than not to be exposed to above average high temperatures (Figure 34). This is also true under the 2oC scenario; however, the most marked finding is that almost all socially vulnerable neighbourhoods in accessible rural areas are expected to experience above average high temperatures in the future relative to the present-day high temperature threshold. Similar patterns are seen in remote small towns and remote rural areas. In contrast, other urban areas and accessible small towns are expected to see a general trend towards higher numbers of people in less vulnerable neighbourhoods becoming exposed to temperatures exceeding the present-day high temperature average relative to the most socially vulnerable in the same settlement type.

Figure 32 Comparison of exposure of most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods
The y-axis shows the mean temperature for days exceeding the 95th percentile maximum temperature (TMax). This is expressed as a mean of all neighbourhoods associated with each of the settlement types. Modelled temperatures are averaged over large areas (see Table 1) so are expected to under-estimate elevated temperatures due to factors like Urban Heat Island intensity.

Figure 33 High temperatures of all and top 20% most vulnerable by settlement type

The y-axis shows the ratio of people expected to be exposed to above vs. below average high temperatures, i.e., for days exceeding the 95th percentile maximum temperature (TMax), using the present-day (1990-2019) as the baseline. The 1:1 line represents no difference, i.e., the same number of people for above vs. below. This accounts for the total number of people living in all neighbourhoods associated with each of the settlement types.
Figure 34 Heat – Exposure to worse than average high temperatures – By settlement type
Conclusions
The analysis presented provides evidence to support the development of more targeted approaches to delivering a just transition and improving resilience to climate change across Scotland. The analysis selects three climate related hazards (flooding, heat, and poor air quality) and for each explores three research questions:
- What are the drivers of social vulnerability to climate hazards across Scotland?
- Which groups are at the greatest social risk from climate related hazards, now and in the future?
- To what extent are the most socially vulnerable disproportionately impacted by climate-related hazards?
The rationale for the selected climate-related hazards and the conclusions from the research are summarised below.
Drivers of social vulnerability
Across Scotland, low income and poor heath are key drivers of social vulnerability. Income is important because of the potential for reducing adaptive capacity (including how well people can prepare for, respond to, and recover from exposure to potentially harmful hazards). People in poor health are more susceptible to further heath impacts when exposed to a climate-related hazard. For example, exposure to flooding can make pre-existing conditions worse or make treatment difficult due to power cuts. Some pre-existing conditions (or the medicine used to treat them) may make people more sensitive to the effects of air pollution and high temperatures (e.g., dehydration, ability to sweat and exacerbate symptoms such as cardiovascular disease).
Social vulnerability has various drivers across Scotland. Low income, ill-health, property tenure (particularly social housing) and a lack of local knowledge (either due to issues of language or relatively poor internet access) as well as biophysical sensitivities due to household composition (physical mobility, younger children, and older adults) influence vulnerability to all three hazards. Consequently, many of the neighbourhoods most socially vulnerable to one hazard are also often vulnerable to the others.
#Finding-1 Key drivers of social vulnerability are associated with vulnerability to climate-related hazards across Scotland
Low income and poor health are strong drivers of social vulnerability to all three selected climate-related hazards (flooding, high temperature and poor air quality). Both tend to be associated with neighbourhoods with a high proportion of people living in rented accommodation, particularly social housing. A lack of local knowledge and biophysical sensitivities, such as reduced physical mobility, younger children, or older adults, also importance contributors to social vulnerability across all three hazards.
#Finding-2 In rural areas, access to the internet and isolation heighten social vulnerability to climate-related hazards
Across rural communities, limited internet access restricts access to information and support services and combine with social and physical isolation to have a strong influence on social vulnerability to all three hazards. Low mobility (linked to indicators of physical disability, residential care, and restricted access to private transport) are also important influences. Restricted mobility, for example, makes it more difficult to access local services such as GP practices and hospitals, install or deploy household level adaptations, such as flood gates, and access alternative accommodation or remote services, such as access to GPs and hospitals.
#Finding-3 In urban areas, social vulnerability to climate-related hazards is driven by multiple factors in particular income and property tenure
In urban settings, poor health, income deprivation, high levels of social and private renting, lack of local knowledge and limited mobility are all important contributors to social vulnerability. People living on lower incomes and in rented accommodation are also less likely to have access to flood insurance and have more limited capacity to appropriately prepare for, and recover from, flood events. This includes, for example, taking action to adapt their homes.
Drivers of social vulnerability to each hazard
Despite the many shared drivers of social vulnerability across the three selected hazards, there are differences. The following summarises the most important drivers of social vulnerability for each hazard in turn.
- Flooding: Social vulnerability is often driven by a combination of poor health and constraints on adaptive capacity (due to low income, property tenure and mobility). Income and tenure affect the extent to which people can prepare for, respond to, and recover from events (including their ability to purchase household insurance) make property adaptations or have autonomy over other aspects of adaptation. Restricted personal mobility (linked to indicators of disability, residents in care, and private transport availability) makes it difficult to deploy property level adaptations (e.g., flood gates), move personal items or respond to post-flood challenges, such as changes in accommodation or services. If public services are affected by flooding at the same time, access to services (e.g., GP practices, hospitals etc) can be lost or delayed (with potential loss of access to important medication).
- Air quality: Social vulnerability to poor air quality tends to be associated with neighbourhoods where lower incomes and more limited local knowledge relating to poor air quality (e.g., due to limited internet access) combine to limit the capacity of households prepare for, and recover from, events as well as adapt to future conditions. However, our knowledge of the factors influencing indoor air quality is currently limited, and more work is needed to improve our understanding of these interactions.
- Heat (high temperatures): Income and local knowledge are most influential across Scotland in determining social vulnerability to heat. These drivers combine to undermine adaptive capacity by limiting the available resources for people to adapt their homes, access information about the dangers of excess heat in their homes, and access help during heat-wave events. Biophysical sensitivity due to health and age are important across all hazards, but they are critical influences on social vulnerability to high temperatures.
Geographic and systematic disadvantage
In responding to the research questions of ‘Which groups are at the greatest social risk from climate related hazards, now and in the future?’ and ‘To what extent are the most socially vulnerable disproportionately impacted by climate-related hazards?‘ the research highlights that climate-related risks vary across Scotland (now and in the future). In some settings, and for some hazards, the most socially vulnerable face risks greater than the less vulnerable. These findings are summarised below.
#Finding-4 Challenges vary across local authorities
In Glasgow, 84% of neighbourhoods are classified as being among Scotland’s 20% most high heat disadvantaged, the greatest proportion of any Local Authority. The combination of social vulnerability and exposure to climate-related hazards mean Glasgow is similarly disadvantaged with respect to flooding and below average air quality.
In general, local authorities experiencing the greatest disadvantage will continue to do so in the future. Climate change does not, however, always increase risk in a uniform way but reflects the changing pattern of each hazard. For example, the relative proportion of neighbourhoods experiencing the most significant social risk from heat is projected to reduce in the future in Falkirk but increase in Dundee City.
#Finding-5 People living in rural settings tend to be more flood disadvantaged than those living in urban areas
People living in rural areas, on average, are subject to greater flood risk than those living in larger urban areas; particularly those living in remote and very remote small towns, and accessible rural areas. This reflects social factors (such as isolation, limited access to remote services, and limited social networks) as well as exposure to more frequent flooding than those living in urban areas (on average).
Social vulnerability to other hazards is also often high in rural areas. In the context of heat and air quality disadvantages this reflects the more limited internet coverage in rural areas compared to urban areas and consequently a greater difficultly accessing information. The exposure to high temperatures and below average air quality is often lower in rural areas than in urban areas and hence the associated risks are less. As the climate changes, however, many rural neighbourhoods are projected to experience above average high temperatures. This is particularly the case in accessible rural areas settlements.
#Finding-6 Urban settings present a concentration of disadvantage
Within urban settings the most socially vulnerable tend to experience higher disadvantage to heat and air quality. This is partly due to higher exposure in these settings. For example, the most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods in large urban areas are three times more likely to be exposed to high temperatures than others, and 50% more likely to be exposed to below average air quality. The differential in air quality between rural and urban settings tends to reflect higher levels of nitrogen dioxide (NO2). If planned reductions in NO2 emissions are realised this particular risk is projected to decrease.
The standard of protection against flooding tends to be higher in urban areas than in rural, however the exposed population is much larger, particularly in large urban areas and other urban areas settings. This leads to a greater number of people experiencing flood disadvantage in urban settings compared to rural areas (when considered in aggregate).
#Finding-7 black ethnic groups face the greatest geographic disadvantage
Black ethnic groups tend to experience higher risk than any other ethnic group, particularly in relation to poor air quality. For example, people in black ethnic groups are more than three times as likely to be exposed to above average concentrations of air pollution than people in white ethnic groups. Flood and high temperature related risks faced by people in black ethnic groups are also projected to increase more rapidly with climate change than for any other ethnic groups (although the rise is significant for all).
Projected improvements in air quality, if realised, would lead to a significant reduction in the number of people exposed to above average concentrations of nitrogen dioxide (NO2) air pollution across all ethnic groups (using present-day average concentrations as a threshold). This is not the case for those exposed to above average PM10 concentrations. By 2030 people in black and other minority ethnic groups will remain disproportionately exposed to above average levels of air pollution. Flood disadvantage is projected to increase for all ethnicities as the climate changes, but black ethnic groups are projected to experience the most rapid rise (as expressed through changes in expected annual damages).
#Finding-8 – The most socially vulnerable within white ethnic groups experience the greatest systemic disadvantage from flooding
The difference between the risks faced by the most socially vulnerable neighbourhoods and others within the same ethnic group is greatest amongst white ethnic groups. This reflects the greater inequalities within the white ethnic groups compared to others around household incomes and household tenure. Lower household incomes and living in socially rented accommodation tend to limit access to insurance and increase the Relative Economic Pain (REP)[7] associated with flooding and constrain the degree of autonomy over other aspects of adaptation, including household modifications.
Implications for enabling a just transition to climate change
The findings of the research have three central implications for enabling a just transition:
Recognising intersectionality in the underlying drivers of social vulnerability
Many of the most important drivers of social vulnerability affect vulnerability to all hazards considered here – flooding, high temperatures, and poor air quality. Recognising this intersectionality in social vulnerability presents an opportunity to enhance resilience to multiple climate hazards through targeted adaptation. This includes improving access to support and information services (including, for example, internet coverage, income, and tenure).
Enabling adaptive capacity
Climate-related disadvantage is often driven by a limited capacity to appropriately prepare for, and recover from, hazard events. Strengthening these capacities is central to reducing disadvantage. This includes, for example, supporting better access to flood insurance for those living in socially and privately rented accommodation with lower incomes, and addressing the disparities in internet access between rural and urban areas. Supporting the most socially vulnerable to make property-level adaptations, including those in rented accommodation, would also reduce negative welfare outcomes when exposed to a hazard.
Facilitating investments that reduce risk for the most socially vulnerable
Sound evidence on disadvantage is a prerequisite to shaping policy levers, guidance and funding arrangements that facilitate a just transition. The response will necessarily be multi-faceted involving actors operating at different levels. To achieve this, consideration will need to be given to how to address geographic and system disadvantage through multiple policy levers, including funding mechanisms and planning approaches.
Research needs
The presented analysis necessarily includes several assumptions. These include uncertainty in climate hazards (now and how they may change in the future) and adaptation choices that may be made. There is also uncertainty in our understanding of social vulnerability. Opportunities to improve both the methods and the data to refine the results and insights should be considered. Where possible this should include validation at a local level to support the national scale analysis and associated findings presented here. Developing a nuanced understanding of local characteristics and contexts developed through such an exercise would help interpret findings presented here.
Consideration should be given to updating the analysis presented here in the coming years. Updated Census data and advances in hazard mapping, for example, are all planned in the coming few years (e.g., relating to flooding this includes updates to surface water and fluvial assessment and at the coast through initiatives such as the Dynamic Coast). Such advances should be incorporated in any future update.
References
Adger, W.N. and Kelly, P.M., 1999. Social vulnerability to climate change and the architecture of entitlements. Mitigation and adaptation strategies for global change, 4(3), pp.253-266.
CCC – Committee on Climate Change (2021) Independent assessment for Scotland: The third Climate Change Risk Assessment https://www.ukclimaterisk.org/wp-content/uploads/2021/06/CCRA-Evidence-Report-Scotland-Summary-Final-1.pdf
Dale M., Gill E. J. Kendon, E. J, Fowler, H. J. (2017). Are you prepared for future rainfall? Results from the UKWIR rainfall intensity project. Conference paper to the CIWEM Urban Drainage Group
EEA – European Environment Agency (2017) Climate Change impacts and vulnerability in Europe: An indicator-based report. Copenhagen: European Environment Agency
GI-SAT (2011) Scottish Government Geographic Information Science and Analysis Team. Evaluation of the Data Zone Geography. Report available at http://www.scotland.gov.uk/Resource/Doc/933/0120159.pdf. Last accessed March 2013.
Gouldby, B. P., Wyncoll, D., Panzeri, M., Franklin, M., Hunt, T., Hames, D., Tozer, N. P., Hawkes, P. J., Dornbusch, U. and Pullen, T. A. (2017) Multivariate extreme value modelling of sea conditions around the coast of England. Proceedings of the Institution of Civil Engineers – Maritime Engineering, 170 (1). pp. 3-20.
Kay, A. L., Rudd, A. C., Fry, M. and Nash, G. (2020). Climate change and fluvial flood peaks. Report to Environment Agency/Scottish Environment Protection Agency, SC150009 WP2 Final Report, UKCEH, 65pp. + Appendix (27pp.) In review.
Kennedy-Asser, A.T., Andrews, O., Mitchell, D.M. and Warren, R.F., 2021. Evaluating heat extremes in the UK Climate Projections (UKCP18). Environmental Research Letters, 16(1), p.014039.
Kazmierczak, A., Cavan, G., Connelly, A. and Lindley, S. (2015) Mapping Flood Disadvantage in Scotland 2015. The Scottish Government.
Lindley, S. J., O‟Neill, J., Kandeh, J., Lawson, N., Christian, R., and O’Neill., M (2011) Climate change, justice, and vulnerability. Joseph Rowntree Foundation, www.jrf.org.uk
Palmer, M. D., Howard, T., Tinker, J., Lowe, J. A., Bricheno, L., Calvert, D., Edwards, T., Gregory, J., Harris, G., Krijnen, J. & Roberts, C. (2018) UKCP18 Marine Report.
Sayers, PB., Horritt, M, Carr, S, Kay, A, and Mauz, J (2020) Third UK Climate Change Risk Assessment (CCRA3): Future flood risk. Research undertaken by Sayers and Partners for the Committee on Climate Change (using the Future Flood Explorer). Published by Sayers and Partners and the Committee on Climate Change, London
Sayers PB., Carr S., Moss C., and Didcock A. (2020) Flood disadvantage – Socially vulnerable and ethnic minorities. Research undertaken by Sayers and Partners for Flood Re. Published by Sayers and Partners (SPL), London.
Sayers PB, Horritt M, Penning Rowsell E, and Fieth J (2017). Present and future flood vulnerability, risk, and disadvantage: a UK assessment. A report for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation published by Sayers and Partners LLP. Accessible here http://www.sayersandpartners.co.uk/flood-disadvantage.html
Scottish Government (2020). Fourth National Planning Framework: Position statement. www.gov.scot
Scottish Government (2019b). Second Scottish Climate Change Adaptation Programme-2019-2024 (www.gov.scot)
Scottish Government (2019a). Climate Change (Emissions Reduction Targets) (Scotland) Act 2019. https://www.legislation.gov.uk/asp/2019/15/enacted
Scottish Government (2018). Scottish Government Urban Rural Classification 2016. Scottish Government Urban Rural Classification 2016 – gov.scot (www.gov.scot)
Tapsell, S., McCarthy, S., Faulkner, H. and Alexander, M., 2010. Social vulnerability to natural hazards. State of the art report from CapHaz-Net’s WP4. London.
Appendix 1 – Rationale of the selection of priority risks
Introduction
The Independent Assessment[8] of evidence for Scotland undertaken for the third UK Climate Change Risk Assessment (CCRA3), highlights a range of climate risks and identifies the urgency scores for twenty-five risks from climate change in Scotland which have increased since the previous CCRA five years ago. Flood-related risks remain the number one priority for action, with water scarcity and impacts on the natural environment also highlighted. Under Health, Communities, and the Built Environment there are thirteen identified climate risks and opportunities. Both high temperatures and interactions of high temperatures with other impacts (for example air quality) are highlighted as important issues. Other climate risks are expected, including from coastal erosion as being considered through other research activity, e.g., Dynamic Coast Scotland[9]. High temperature events are frequently associated with episodic air pollution and there are complex interactions with other risks such as wildfire.1 These impacts are known to cascade into risks associated with health and care delivery, due to additional stresses such as hospital admissions.
Addressing these issues is a significant adaptation challenge but remains central to achieving aims set out in the Scottish Climate Change Adaptation Programme 2019-2024 (SCCAP2), i.e., to ensure that the people in Scotland who are most socially vulnerable can adapt and have their risks appropriately managed and in a just manner.
Selection process
The research report here uses the evidence presented in documents introduced above and knowledge of data and tools readily available to the research team to selected three priority hazards. Based on this process the research focuses on risks related to heat, air quality and flooding. The evidence to support this focus is elaborated below.
Prioritising heat-related risks for assessment
Historically, policy in Scotland has centred on the mitigation of health impacts from cold temperatures and excess winter deaths. The potential impacts of high temperatures therefore represent something of a hidden risk and one which is not at the forefront of action. Previous studies have used existing thresholds for NE England to characterise heatwaves in the context of southern Scotland. This analysis (Figure A1) shows the rising trends in extreme daytime and night-time temperatures projected through both UKCP09 and subsequent UKCP18 climate projection data. The impacts of heatwaves and high temperatures are felt through several sectors. They include impacts on infrastructure such as transport and energy in addition to direct consequences for human health and wellbeing. Changes in temperature regimes also affect energy demand with different seasonal patterns predicted.
Met Office records shows that extremely high temperatures are already occurring, for instance maximum recorded temperatures of 31.9°C (recorded in Bishopton, 28th June 2018)[10]. The number of heat-wave events is expected to increase, but it is not only temperatures which should be considered. Patterns of exposure relate to aspects of the built environment, with levels of harm being influenced by individual health and demographic characteristics together with wider community contexts. It is these latter characteristics that assessments of vulnerability help to reveal. Estimates suggest that heat-related deaths in Scotland are likely to range from 70-285 per year by 2050 and grow to 140-390 per year by the 2080s. Based on analyses of past events[11],[12], impacts are likely to primarily affect older demographic groups, especially those with multiple health issues and disadvantages.[13] Excess heat-wave deaths are more prevalent in urban locations compared to rural locations due to the Urban Heat Island effect[14].


Figure A1: Trends in heatwave frequency projected for Scotland[15].
Heatwave related excess deaths should also be considered alongside the benefits of less severe winters and the potential for increased physical activity and higher Vitamin D exposure, each of which are reported to bring health and wellbeing benefits from temperature increases.2 For instance, evidence suggests that between 1989 and 2001 there were 51,600 Scottish excess winter deaths primarily affecting people over 65 years of age[16]. Measures to reduce cold-weather related deaths and tackle issues of fuel-poverty have been important adaptations stretching over many decades. However, there are increasing concerns about the potential detrimental effects of ‘super-insulated’ buildings in the context of summer heat-wave events. High levels of over-heating have been recorded in new-build homes across Scotland, with exceedance of 25 degrees C (as a recognised threshold in the UK government’s Housing Health and Safety Rating System (HHSRS))[17]. Although inevitably related to ambient temperatures, over-heating is as much – if not more – related to building design and use of properties by occupants. While some occupants express a preference for over-heated conditions, this does not mitigate the potential for health-related impacts and there is also the potential for impacts on carbon mitigation agendas, through increased demand for air conditioning. In this context, it is also notable that between 1999 and 2009 Glasgow city Council have recorded a higher proportion of severe weather events associated with unreasonably high temperatures (11%) than unreasonably low temperatures (10%).3,[18]
Conclusion – to include heat as one of the three priority hazards
Prioritising flood-related risks for assessment
The risk of flooding to people, communities and buildings is one of the most severe risks from climate hazards for the population, both now and in the future. This risk encompasses flooding from all sources, particularly rivers (fluvial), the sea (coastal) and surface water (pluvial) flooding; the 2018 National Flood Risk Assessment for Scotland, for example, estimates that 284,000 properties are at risk of flooding (1:200-year return period) today. Recent analysis for the UKCCRA3 confirms that the most socially vulnerable experience disproportionate flood risks today and in some settings their disadvantage increases in the future (Sayers et al, 2020). Analysis for Flood Re highlights the low uptake of insurance by the most socially vulnerable across the UK (including in Scotland) and the disproportionate risks faced by some ethnic minorities[19]. This analysis reinforces our work for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation (JRF) in 2015-17[20].
These studies highlight that flooding to people, communities and buildings remains among the most severe climate-related risks for Scotland with flood disadvantage experienced by socially vulnerable communities particularly in some coastal areas, declining urban cities, and dispersed rural communities. The previous work has highlighted that flood disadvantaged communities exist across Scotland. Glasgow and the wider City-region experience significant disadvantage.
The Position Statement on the Scotland’s fourth National Planning Framework[21] highlights flooding as a particular adaptation focus. The statement commits to more action to: reduce a communities’ exposure to flooding by future-proofing the design of the built environment and investing in green infrastructure; promoting natural flood risk management and strengthening policies on the water environment and drainage infrastructure; restricting development in flood risk areas; adapting existing infrastructure where climate change may increase vulnerability to flooding; and placing greater importance on flood risk management and coastal protection and the interface between planning on land and at sea. The statement also re-iterates commitments to socially just transitions which tailor responses according to the specific needs of climate vulnerable communities within a framework of place-based actions which enhance the quality of places, improve health and wellbeing, and reduce geographic disadvantage.
Conclusion – to include flood as one of the three priority hazards.
Note: As part of the CCRA3 analysis decreases are shown in the numbers of people at significant risk of river flooding in the 2050s and 2080s for Scotland in the low population scenario. This is due to estimated decreases in population in some areas rather than the influence of climate change. To avoid confusion, population change (in demographics or growth) is excluded here.
Air quality as a priority risk
There are clear social justice dimensions to the distribution of air quality impacts across Scotland, even without considering future climate change. For instance, a ranking exercise carried out with stakeholders from government, activist groups, community organisations and academia identified air pollution as the top concern for distributive environmental justice in Scotland[22]. In the context of high variability in pollution concentrations, there have been calls to consider both concentrations and patterns of population vulnerability when prioritising interventions like Low Emissions Zones.[23]
Air quality is a function of emissions characteristics and meteorological conditions, and so estimating future changes is particularly challenging[24]. In a similar way to heat waves, health burdens from air pollution are not solely due to concentrations but also the type and nature of human exposure (e.g., exposure to extreme events, exposure at rest or during exercise, or due to aspects of the built environment which enhance or offset pollution levels) and underlying susceptibility to negative effects, such as pre-existing respiratory disease. There is thus a vulnerability component to negative health outcomes. Greater harms can be expected where there is underlying biophysical sensitivity, enhanced exposure and factors which inhibit adaptive capacity.
Emissions scenarios underpinning climate projections are not only indicative of carbon emissions but also a range of other pollutants with the potential to cause future health burdens. However, health-related air pollutants are also subject to regulatory control. It is estimated that all Representative Concentration Pathways (RCPs) are associated with large emissions reductions in particulate matter (PM) and in the precursors of ozone (O3), including nitrogen oxides (NOx)[25]. Projections of ozone concentrations – as the dominant hazard linked to climate change2 – are open to considerable debate and trajectories depend on scenarios and trends in other pollutants, such as methane. This uncertainty means that ozone cannot be considered in the current study. Furthermore, health burdens depend on demographic and social characteristics and how they change into the future, both of which are also out of scope in the current study. One study estimated that the UK’s ozone-related health impacts could rise by 16–28% between 2003 and 2030 if factoring in socio-economic change[26] though analyses suggest substantial falls in mortality related to nitrogen dioxide and fine particulates (PM2.5) with around 6.5 million life-years and 17.8 million life-years gained by 2050 compared to a 2011 baseline[27].
Air quality episodes with elevated concentrations of air pollutants can lead to a range of chronic and acute diseases, evidenced by health outcomes which include increased hospital admissions and excess morbidity and mortality rates. The stagnation weather events associated with air quality episodes can also be associated with summer heatwaves and therefore have cumulative outcomes for human health.[28] Nevertheless, evidence suggests that recent heatwaves in Scotland have not been associated with very high O3 concentrations.2 Indoor concentrations are strongly linked to building type and use (e.g., fuel types) and other behavioural influences (e.g., smoking). As with heatwave impacts, trends towards more insulated buildings could increase risks from these sources since this reduces ventilation (ibid.). The Scotland CCRA3 summary has identified air quality as requiring further investigation which may suggest it is not an immediate priority for the current project. However, despite uncertainties, understanding risks associated with poor air quality could make a useful contribution given synergies with vulnerability factors held in common with heat-related risk. It is currently only practicable to analyse PM10 and NO2 for this study, and using available projections, i.e., which focus on expected changes in air pollutant emissions only.
Conclusion – to include air quality as one of the three priority hazards.
Other climate related risk that could be considered in future assessments
The CCRA3 summary for Scotland identifies several other risks that should be given further attention. They include several that relate to social issues:
Changes the natural environment, including terrestrial, freshwater, coastal and marine species, forests, and agriculture – this has a clear social justice connection, linking those that rely on natural environments (fishing and agricultural, forestry etc) and the groups that may be more or less able to adapt the potential changes. Disruption to the natural environment influences the prevalence and distributions of pests and influences patterns of food- and water-borne disease and contamination. The degree of exposure is in turn influenced by occupational and recreational behaviour making future population risks very challenging to estimate. On balance exposure to the natural environment is widely recognised to be of net benefit for human populations[29]. Indeed, the lack of greenspaces in many urban areas is a core issue of distributive justice in the present-day.[30] Population health is affected by changes to the natural environment, including terrestrial, freshwater, coastal and marine species, forests, and agriculture. However, analysis of residential risks from changes in these sectors are highly complex and their assessment would require further primary research to develop appropriate metrics and models. These risks are therefore not considered priority risks within the scope of this investigation but are discussed below for context.
Changes in coastal erosion – To some extent this is already covered by the recent Dynamic coast Studies but could be usefully extended to consider those communities that may come under increasing pressure for realignment/relocation (as a similar study is underway in England, Sayers et al in press) to address the associated challenge of ‘the viability of coastal communities and the impact on coastal businesses due to sea level rise, coastal flooding and erosion’. Relocation has clear social justice considerations but is not considered a priority over those risks identified for this investigation.
Changes in high winds, moisture and driving rain: highlighted by the CCRA3 these changes are primarily concerned with homes and costs to households, resulting from damage to dwellings. Damp buildings cause harm to health and wellbeing, and damage to dwellings from high winds can also risk injury, but the CCRA3 suggests there is some evidence contained in the assessment that indicates that the vulnerability of the Scottish housing stock to extreme wind and rain is declining. However, this is not considered a priority risk in scope for the investigation here.
Changes in vector borne disease: Some diseases transmitted by insects and ticks (vectors) are likely to change in prevalence in the future due to warmer temperatures changing the distribution of the vector in the UK as well as diseases acquired by people overseas and being brought back into the UK; although in Scotland, the future magnitude of risk from vector-borne diseases due to climate change is medium. This is not considered a priority risk here and this area is a subject of ongoing research.[31]
Changes in household water quality and supply: Reduced summer precipitation resulting from climate change is likely to increase periods of water scarcity and droughts. This may lead to interruptions of household water supplies and associated health, social and economic impacts, particularly for vulnerable households. Private water supplies are most vulnerable to current and future climate hazards that affect water quality (outbreaks) and quantity (interruption of supply) and are particularly important for more isolated communities. Climate change may also increase the risk of contamination of drinking water through increased runoff and flooding events that overwhelm current water treatment approaches. Sea level rise, heavy rainfall, and coastal erosion can increase pollution from historical landfills. There are specific concerns around this issue in Scotland, mainly in relation to Private Water Supplies (PWS), which are those not regulated or supplied by Scottish Water, which are more commonly located in remote and rural communities in Scotland. There is ongoing research by Scotland’s Centre of Expertise for Waters to make PWS more resilient to drought in the future and overall, the CCRA3 assessed the associated risks as low today rising to medium in future. This is not considered a priority risk here.
Appendix 2 – Social vulnerability indicators and indices
Social vulnerability indicators
The indicators used to assess social vulnerability across the three prioritised hazards are summarised in the Table below together with a brief rationale for their inclusion. More detailed discussion can be found in the various supporting references cited. Unless otherwise indicated, all data were sourced from https://www.statistics.gov.scot/, or the Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation 2020 (https://www.gov.scot/publications/simd-2020-technical-notes/)
Table A2-1 Social vulnerability indicators
|
Domain |
Indicator |
Rationale |
Summary metric |
|
Age |
Young Children |
Young children are more susceptible to harms from a range of environmental hazards. There is extensive evidence from analyses of past events, and wider academic research. Evidence is available for stress from hot weather via Climate Just Young children and babies | Climate Just |
% People under 5 years old |
|
Older Adults |
Not all older people are socially vulnerable, However, older people may be more likely to experience detrimental physical impacts during periods of high temperatures, e.g., due to inhibited ability for thermo-regulation and dehydration. This may exacerbate existing ill-health. Similar evidence exists with respect to poor air quality, with the potential for poor air quality and high temperatures to be experienced concurrently. Older people | Climate Just |
% People over 75 years old | |
|
Health |
People in long-term ill-health |
The long-term sick are more vulnerable to flooding, the flood they experienced often making their pre-existing condition worse either as a one-off ‘hit’ or accelerating its adverse trajectory (discussed in Sayers et al., 2017). |
% People whose day- to-day activities are limited |
|
Households with members in ill-health |
Flooding may prevent the use of complex home-based health care systems, for example home dialysis, due to direct flood damage or to loss of power (discussed in Sayers et al., 2017). |
% Households with at least one person with long-term limiting illness | |
|
Emergency hospital admissions |
Some conditions and illnesses (or the medicine used to treat them) make people more sensitive to the effects of air pollution and high temperatures, e.g., dehydration, ability to sweat and exacerbate symptoms, e.g., cardiovascular disease. Some illnesses are associated with acute symptoms and hospital admissions, while others might not People in poor health | Climate Just |
Emergency stays in hospital (index) | |
|
Disability and Ill-health |
Comparative illness factor (index) | ||
|
Mood and Anxiety Disorders |
Some mental health disorders affect people’s ability to self-regulate to avoid environmental hazards or recognise and take effective precautions against symptoms caused or aggravated by environmental hazards. In some cases, medicines used may also increase susceptibility to effects, e.g., of heat stress (Page et al, 2012).[32] People in poor health | Climate Just |
Population prescribed drugs for anxiety, depression, or psychosis | |
|
Medical and Care Residents |
People living in medical and care establishments may have greater dependencies because of health-related factors. People in poor health | Climate Just |
% Living in medical and care establishments | |
|
Low birthweight |
Babies with low birthweight are susceptible to a range of health effects which can be exacerbated by exposure to high temperatures and poor air quality. Furthermore heat, air quality and other environmental stressors are also a cause of low birthweight due to impacts on pregnant women (Dadvand et al, 2014). [33] |
Proportion of live singleton births of low birth weight | |
|
Income |
Unemployment |
Low-income households are less likely to have the capacity to fully prepare for future floods (through insurance and property level measures). The NFVI uses a combination of income metrics to represent this important influence. The indices used to assess social vulnerability to high temperatures and poor air quality also use a range of income factors (see following section). |
% Unemployed |
|
Long-term unemployment |
% long-term unemployed or who have never worked | ||
|
Low-income occupations |
% in routine or semi- routine occupations | ||
|
Households with dependent children and no |
% Households with dependent children and no adults in employment | ||
|
Employment Deprivation |
People on low incomes have reduced adaptive capacity to high temperatures and poor air quality, e.g., have fewer choices in terms of goods and services, and they may also suffer lower self-esteem, engage less with others (e.g., via support networks) and experience higher levels of stress and anxiety. Employment deprivation is a distinctive measure of lower income which accounts for the proportion of working age people who are involuntarily excluded from paid employment, due to lack of opportunities, ill-health and disability or caring responsibilities. |
Score | |
|
Income Deprivation |
Income deprivation is a direct measure of people who are expected to be negatively impacted due to unemployment or who have low earnings. There are a range of associations between income and other factors which reduce adaptive capacity to high temperatures and poor air quality, some of which cannot be directly measured at neighbourhood level such as engagement with public organisations People on low incomes | Climate Just |
Score | |
|
Average Household Income |
Average household income is included as a relative measure of resources that households may have to support adaptation to high temperatures and poor air quality, for instance ability to adapt homes, access to private transport etc. People on low incomes | Climate Just |
Pounds | |
|
Information use |
Recent arrivals |
Higher proportions of people recently arrived from outside an area indicate a higher vulnerability as they are more likely to have difficulty obtaining and using information and guidance provided to the public. |
% People with <1 year residency coming from outside UK |
|
English Proficiency |
Relatively poor proficiency in English restricts people’s ability to prepare for, respond to and recover from events with the capacity to cause harm because it restricts knowledge of and access to information and support services. |
% People who do not speak English well | |
|
Internet |
Sub-standard Broadband |
The internet is an increasingly important means of supplying and receiving information about public authorities and services, for obtaining goods and services and for communicating with others (ONS, 2019). [34] However, its availability, reliability and accessibility varies across Scotland. Furthermore, the internet, like other critical infrastructure, can also be impacted by some events, like high temperatures or extreme weather.[35] The Universal Service Obligation relates to average household requirements, assumed to be download speeds >10Mbps and upload speeds of 1Mbps. Areas with poorer internet may also have less well-developed infrastructure for other key sectors, e.g., mobile communications, transport, and energy. |
% premises below the Universal Service Obligation (USO) (Ofcom, 2018) |
|
Lack of Superfast Broadband |
Better connection speeds allow more rapid access to information, goods and services and social networks. This is important given the increasing reliance on online information, especially during periods where demand is high. Internet accessibility is also important for business sectors and for employees working from home. |
Percentage of premises without access to superfast broadband | |
|
Local knowledge |
Population Transience |
In places with high amounts of population turnover there is the potential for higher vulnerability due to lack of knowledge of hazards, health and support services and social networks. Such areas are more likely to be characterised by rented accommodation and in some cases insecure employment. These factors affect the capacity for preparing for, responding to, and recovering from environmental hazards like high temperatures. |
% HHs which appear to have changed occupier (2012-2020) [36] |
|
New migrants |
People who have recently moved into an area may lack awareness of local flood risk provided through family and community clues. | ||
|
Tenure |
Social renting |
Social renters are less able to prepare for extreme weather events, for example due to inability to modify their homes to prepare for heatwaves or account for poor air quality. Property maintenance and adaptation is normally the responsibility of the property owner although in the case of some social tenants social renting may also provide opportunities for adaptation. Tenants in social housing are likely to have a range of other characteristics which increase vulnerability Tenants in social or private rented housing: who are we concerned about? | Climate Just |
% Social rented households |
|
Tenure |
Private renting |
Private renters represent a very broad group and not all are equally socially vulnerable. However, on average private renters are less able to prepare for extreme weather events, for example due to inability to modify their homes to prepare for heatwaves or account for poor air quality. Property maintenance and adaptation such as insultation and ventilation is normally the responsibility of the property owner. Renters may also be more transient and therefore less familiar with local neighbourhoods, environmental hazards, and sources of support Tenants in social or private rented housing: who are we concerned about? | Climate Just |
% Private rented households (historical reference) |
|
Direct flood experience |
Households exposed to significant risk |
A large body of research shows that those with experience of flooding are less vulnerable in subsequent events as they have more knowledge as to what to do and how to respond. Flood experience has often been shown to be a key factor in level of willingness to take preventative action against future floods and respond seriously to warnings. | |
|
Crime |
Crime Rates |
People living in high crime (or perceived high crime) areas may have reduced adaptive capacity during high temperature events due to an unwillingness to leave windows open at night. There is also a connection between crime and income, and income and security measures. Who are we concerned about? | Climate Just |
Crime rate per 10,000 population |
|
Mobility |
Disability and Ill-health |
People with disabilities or poor health are more likely to have reduced mobility and/or be reliant on others to assist them during extreme events, e.g., if they have symptoms of heat stress or acute adverse effects due to poor air quality. Even if people are relatively independent in normal times, there may be additional pressures if infrastructure is impacted, e.g., power cuts, internet, or mobile networks. People with low personal mobility | Climate Just |
Comparative illness factor (index) |
|
Medical and Care Residents |
People living in medical and care establishments may have greater dependencies because of health-related factors. As well as making people generally more susceptible to negative effects, there are also more likely to be low mobility and additional needs in relation to responding to and recovering from environmental stresses like high temperatures and poor air quality. People with low personal mobility | Climate Just |
% Living in medical and care establishments | |
|
Private Transport ownership |
People with access to private transport have increased adaptive capacity as they have more flexibility to cope with impacts which may result from extreme events and environmental hazards, for instance helping immediate family or the local community access health or other support services, or handling changes due to transport problems during periods of extreme heat. |
% Households with no car or van | |
|
Accessibility by bus |
In areas with low public transport provision, it may be more difficult for people to cope during and after events like heat waves, or if immediate family is affected by symptoms aggravated by poor air quality. More physically isolated areas may also be associated with other factors which increase vulnerability (Preston et al., 2014[37]). |
Bus Accessibility | |
|
Social networks |
Single Pensioner Households |
Socially isolated people may have restricted adaptive capacity because of a lower ability to seek and receive help if negatively affected by heat or poor air quality. For instance, a sample of approximately half of 919 people who died at home during the 2003 heat wave in Paris showed that 92% of them lived alone and social service records for 383 indicated that a quarter had no social ties (Poumadère et al., 2005). [38] Other studies have shown that those with social ties have lower risk of death, were more likely to take remedial measures and to have support networks for recovery. Single pensioner households may be particularly vulnerable due to a greater chance of other factors such as older age and ill-health, all other things being equal. |
% Single pensioner households |
|
Primary School networks |
Social ties are generally greater in some sub- sections of society meaning that information and support networks developed as part of everyday life vary. People with primary school children are one such group since connections between children and between parents of young children (e.g., through school related activities) are likely to be stronger on average (Kazmierczak et al., 2015). [39] During and after extreme event trusted social networks may enable greater adaptive capacity, e.g., through information sharing, support and sharing resources. People who are socially isolated | Climate Just |
% Children not of primary school age | |
|
Civil Organisations |
The presence of charities and other voluntary organisations in an area is one indicator of social networks and civil society. Such networks facilitate greater social engagement and participation which provide more potential for information, sharing of resources and wider support. People in neighbourhoods with these networks are less likely to be socially isolated, and people who are socially or physically isolated may also benefit because of activities of these organisations. People who are socially isolated | Climate Just |
Per capita rate of registered local civil organisations (Rutherford and Brook, 2018) [40] | |
|
Single Adult Households |
Living alone is not necessarily an indicator of social isolation, there are however several reasons why single adult households may be more vulnerable, including because of the potential for poorer social networks especially following traumatic life events. Furthermore, people in single households may have fewer resources and more precarity. [41]People who are socially isolated | Climate Just |
% Single adult households | |
|
Lone parent households |
These households face practical difficulties in responding to a flood where children are dependent on them as there is less direct within-the-family support. |
% Lone-parent households with dependent children | |
|
Health Service access |
Accessibility of Pharmacies |
People living in areas which are more physically isolated from health services are less likely to be able to access health services, medical help, or medicines quickly if experiencing heat stress or the effects of poor air quality. They are also less likely to use such services (Ensor, 2004). [42]Fortunately, more physically isolated areas tend to have cooler temperatures and better air quality, although residents may be affected by relatively low temperatures compared to people adapted to warmer environments. This situation is reflected in the differences with heat health warning thresholds across the UK. |
Accessibility of Pharmacies (Daras et al., 2019) [43] |
|
Accessibility of Hospitals |
Accessibility of Hospitals | ||
|
Travel time to GP surgery (private transport) |
Travel time to GP surgery (private transport) (mins) | ||
|
Travel time to GP surgery (public transport) |
Travel time to GP surgery (public transport) (mins) | ||
|
Service availability |
Emergency services exposed to flooding |
Various studies highlight the link between the degree of support provided by institutional (such as the police, the fire brigade, ambulances, and local authority social care) and community support networks and the vulnerability of the individuals in those communities. These linkages are discussed in Sayers et al, 2017 |
% of emergency services exposed to flooding |
|
Care homes exposed to flooding |
% no. of care homes exposed to flooding | ||
|
GP surgeries exposed to flooding |
% no. of GP surgeries exposed to flooding | ||
|
Schools exposed to flooding |
% no. of schools exposed to flooding | ||
|
Housing characteristics |
Over-crowding |
Densely populated locations and over-crowded households are indicators of where temperatures may be elevated indoors. There is also evidence for poorer health in residents living in crowded accommodation (Public Health Scotland, 2021). [44] |
% of people in over-crowded households |
|
High Rise Flat indicator |
High rise flats are well known to be associated with elevated temperatures during heat-wave events (Taylor et al., 2015). [45] Analyses of past events demonstrate increased mortality in these building types. Modelling suggests that the degree of enhanced exposure depends on a range of factors such as building orientation, insulation, ventilation and building use (DCLG, 2012). [46] |
Count of flats without gardens (Proxy for high-rise flats) Office of National Statistics Source: Ordnance Survey Open Greenspace | |
|
Smoking Behaviour |
Maternal smoking is an indicator of the potential for smoking behaviour within the home which may leads to poor indoor air quality. |
% Mothers current or former smokers | |
|
Indoor sources |
Sources of indoor air pollution, such as solid fuel burning, can give rise to elevated air pollution within the home. Domestic and commercial black carbon emissions are taken as a proxy indicator of a range of air pollutants associated with solid fuel use. |
Per HH Domestic/Commercial black Carbon emissions (t/a total / HH total) National Atmospheric Emissions Inventory [47] | |
|
Physical Environment |
Urban Cover |
Urban land covers are associated with higher temperatures because of the Urban Heat Island effect, especially during heat wave conditions (low wind speed, high solar radiation, and low cloud cover) (Levermore et al., 2018). [48] The effect is particularly marked in larger urban areas due to urban structures which prevent re-radiation of stored heat, albedo and thermal capacity of urban structures and waste heat from human activities (Smith et al., 2009). [49] Changes in urban cover overtime also exert an influence on temperature trends as has been shown for Glasgow (Emmanuel and Krüger (2012). [50] Neighbourhoods without much greenspace | Climate Just |
% Urban land cover Land Cover Map (2019) |
|
Physical Environment |
Lack of private greenspace |
Vegetated cover around individual dwellings has the potential to provide cooling through shading and evapotranspiration, thus cooling the local areas around where people live. However, it should be noted that this assumes that private spaces are vegetated. In Manchester, the average garden is about 50% vegetation and 17% trees (Baker et al., 2018). [51]Modelling studies have shown both local cooling effects from vegetation and increased temperatures if vegetation is removed (Skelhorn et al., 2014). [52] Private greenspace may also offer residents better adaptive capacity during hot weather. |
Lack of private greenspace (% dwellings without gardens) Office of National Statistics Source: Ordnance Survey Open Greenspace |
|
Physical Environment |
Lack of community greenspace |
Urban parks have been shown to be on average 1°C cooler than built-up areas and larger parks have a greater cooling effect due to shading and evapotranspiration (Bowler et al., 2010). [53] This impact can be particularly important in larger and denser urban areas where the cooling effect has an influence on surrounding areas. This effect can be reduced or even reversed in some cases, e.g., dried grass areas. Neighbourhoods without much greenspace | Climate Just |
Median combined size of parks and public gardens and playing fields within 1,000 m radius (m2) Office of National Statistics Source: Ordnance Survey Open Greenspace |
Social vulnerability indices
A unique social vulnerability index has been derived for each hazard:
- Flooding: Neighbourhood Flood Vulnerability Index (NFVI)
- Air quality: Neighbourhood air Quality Vulnerability Index (NAQVI)
- Heat: Neighbourhood Heat Vulnerability Index (NHVI)
To calculate each index the associated indicators of social vulnerability are combined using a statistical process. This process is illustrated for the NFVI below (taken from Sayers et al., 2017). Each other index follows a similar process of calculation. In all cases data are standardised and allocated no weights, i.e., where there are multiple factors contributing to a particular vulnerability theme they are all given equal importance in the calculations.
Approach to calculating the Neighbourhood Flood Vulnerability Index (NFVI)
The Neighbourhood Flood Vulnerability Index (NFVI) is determined through a three-stage process as outlined in Figure A2-1 and described below.
Figure A2‑1 The process used to calculate the NFVI (Sayers et al, 2017)
Stage 1: Determine the z-score for Individual Indicators
Each indicator (‘age’ etc. as described in the previous section) is normalised to a z score. The z score is derived by subtracting the mean value and dividing by the standard deviation. If an indicator is already in the form of a rank (e.g., as is the Index of Multiple Deprivation, IMD), the equivalent z score is determined by assuming the rank is drawn from a normal distribution and calculating the number of standard deviations from the mean associated with that rank. This is done so that each indicator has the same numerical parameters, rather than its original numbers (which might be a %, a number, a rank, a fraction, etc.), and to enable them to be compared and combined on the “same playing field.”
Stage 2: Determine the z-score for each domain
Z scores for the individual indicators that contribute to each domain (Susceptibility, Ability to Prepare, Respond and Recover, and Community Support) are combined based upon the assumption of equal weighting (Table A2‑1). The only exception is the individual indicator associated with ‘direct flood experience’ (e1). In this case the weighting is negative as it acts to reduce the relative vulnerability of one neighbourhood compared to another.
The resulting values for each domain are then themselves transformed into a z score.
Stage 3: Determine the NFVI
For each neighbourhood, the z scores derived for each Indicator are summed with equal weighting. The final z score is calculated based on these results and used as the NFVI.


Top: Belfast, Bottom: Boston
Figure A2‑2 Example Neighbourhood Flood Vulnerability Index Maps (Sayers et al, 2017)
Table A2‑1 Indicator weighting (Sayers et al, 2017)

© Published by Sayers and Partners 2022 on behalf of ClimateXChange. All rights reserved.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions, or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent
those of the host institutions or funders.
Suggested citation: Sayers, PB., Lindley. S, Carr, S and Figueroa-Alfaro, R. W(2021) The impacts of climate change on population groups in Scotland. Research undertaken by Sayers and Partners in association with the University of Manchester for ClimateXChange.
-
https://www.gov.scot/publications/climate-ready-scotland-second-scottish-climate-change-adaptation-programme-2019-2024/ ↑
-
https://www.theccc.org.uk/publication/is-scotland-climate-ready-2022-report-to-scottish-parliament/ ↑
-
750 people on average in 2011 ↑
-
For air quality standards used in Scotland see Standards (scottishairquality.scot) ↑
-
Expected Annual Damage (EAD): defines annual ‘average’ residential damage considering a hazard event, from frequent to rare, their annual probability of exceedance and the associated damage (detailed in Sayers et al, 2020). ↑
-
The ‘relative pain’ of the economic risks faced by those exposed to flooding (expressed as the ratio between uninsured economic damages and household income). ↑
-
Relative Economic Pain (REP, Sayers et al., 2017): The ‘relative pain’ of the economic risks faced by those exposed to flooding (expressed as the ratio between uninsured economic damages and household income). ↑
-
https://www.ukclimaterisk.org/wp-content/uploads/2021/06/CCRA-Evidence-Report-Scotland-Summary-Final-1.pdf ↑
-
https://www.dynamiccoast.com/files/dc2/_DC2_WS6_CE_Disadvantage_FINAL.pdf ↑
-
Majekodunmi, M., Emmanuel, R., & Jafry, T. (2020). A spatial exploration of deprivation and green infrastructure ecosystem services within Glasgow city. Urban Forestry and Urban Greening, 52, article 126698. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ufug.2020.126698 ↑
-
Johnson H et al. (2004) The Impact of the 2003 Heat Wave on Mortality and Hospital Admissions in England. Epidemiology, 15(4)6-11 ↑
-
Poumadere M, Mays C, Le Mer S, Blong R (2005) The 2003 Heatwave in France: Dangerous Climate Change Here and Now. Risk Analysis, 25(6):1483-1494 ↑
-
Climate Change and Marginalised Communities Workshop Contributors (2020) Climate change, marginalised communities and considered debate within Scotland’s climate emergency, Scottish Geographical Journal, 136:1-4, 41-48, DOI: 10.1080/14702541.2020.1834335 ↑
-
Marselle MR, Hartig T, Cox D, Siân de Bell SK, Lindley S, Triguero-Mas M, et al. Linking biodiversity to human health: a conceptual framework. Environ Int. 2021; 150:106420 ↑
-
a sequence of five days or more during which minimum temperatures do not fall below 15°C and maximum temperatures exceeds 28°C averaged across the region, from Large increase in projected heatwave frequency for Scotland under new UK climate projections (climatexchange.org.uk) ↑
-
McCartney, G, Collins, C, Walsh, D, Batty, GD (2012) Why the Scots die younger: Synthesizing the evidence Public Health 10.1016/j.puhe.2012.03.007 ↑
-
C. Morgan, J. A. Foster, A. Poston & T. R. Sharpe (2017) Overheating in Scotland: contributing factors in occupied homes, Building Research & Information, 45:1-2, 143-156, DOI: 10.1080/09613218.2017.1241472 ↑
-
Glasgow City Council (2017) ‘A Local Climate Impacts Profile for Glasgow City Council’. ↑
-
Sayers PB., Carr S., Moss C., and Didcock A. (2020) Flood disadvantage – Socially vulnerable and ethnic minorities. sayers_-_flood_disadvantage_-_socially_vulnerable_and_ethnic_minorities_10feb2021.pdf (sayersandpartners.co.uk) ↑
-
Sayers, P.B., Horritt, M., Penning Rowsell, E., and Fieth, J (2017). Present and future flood vulnerability, risk, and disadvantage: A UK assessment. A report for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation. ↑
-
Fourth National Planning Framework: position statement – gov.scot (www.gov.scot) ↑
-
Todd, H; Zografos, C; Todd, Helen; Zografos, Christos (2005) Justice for the Environment: Developing a Set of Indicators of Environmental Justice for Scotland Environmental values., 2005, Vol.14(4), p.483-501 ↑
-
Lee, D., Robertson, C., Ramsay, C., Gillespie, C. and Napier, G (2019) Estimating the health impact of air pollution in Scotland, and the resulting benefits of reducing concentrations in city centres Spatial and Spatio-temporal Epidemiology 29 (2019) 85–96 ↑
-
https://www.ukclimaterisk.org/wp-content/uploads/2021/06/CCRA-Evidence-Report-Scotland-Summary-Final-1.pdf ↑
-
Fenech et al (2021) Future air pollution related health burdens associated with RCP emission changes in the UK Science of the Total Environment. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.scitotenv.2021.145635 ↑
-
Heal, M.R., Heaviside, C., Doherty, R.M., Vieno, M., Stevenson, D.S., Vardoulakis, S., 2013.
Health burdens of surface ozone in the UK for a range of future scenarios. Environ.Int. 61, 36–44. ↑
-
Williams, M.L., Lott, M.C., Kitwiroon, N., Dajnak, D., Walton, H., Holland, M., Pye, S., Fecht, D., Toledano, M.B., Beevers, S.D., 2018. The Lancet Countdown on health benefits from the UK Climate Change Act: a modelling study for Great Britain. Lancet Planet. Heal. 2, e202–e213 ↑
-
Doherty R M, Heal M R, O’Connor F M (2017) Climate change impacts on hu-man health over Europe through its effect on air quality. Environmental Health, 16 (Suppl 1):1-18 ↑
-
Lindley, S.J., Cook, P.A., Dennis, M., Gilchrist, A., (2018), Biodiversity, Physical Health, and Climate Change: A Synthesis of Recent Evidence In: Marselle, M., Bonn, A., Graner, T., et al. (Eds.) Biodiversity, Health & Climate Change. Springer. ↑
-
Labib, SM, Lindley, SJ, Huck JJ (2021) Estimating multiple greenspace exposure types and their associations with neighbourhood premature mortality: A socioecological study Science of The Total Environment Vol 789 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.scitotenv.2021.147919 ↑
-
Maximising ecosystem services in urban environments (MEaSURE) (nercmeasureproject.co.uk) ↑
-
Page, L, Hajat, S, Kovats S, and Howard, LM (2012). Temperature-related deaths in people with psychosis, dementia, and substance misuse. Br J Psychiatry 200(6): 485-490. ↑
-
Dadvand, P; Ostro, B; Figueras, F; Foraster, M; Basagaña, X; Valentín, A; Martinez, D; Beelen, R; Cirach, M; Hoek, G; Jerrett, M; Brunekreef, B; Nieuwenhuijsen, M (2014) Residential Proximity to Major Roads and Term Low Birth Weight, Epidemiology: Vol 25 – Iss 4 – p 518-525 doi: 10.1097/EDE.0000000000000107 ↑
-
Office for National Statistics (2019) Exploring the Digital Divide. https://www.ons.gov.uk/peoplepopulationandcommunity/householdcharacteristics/homeinternetandsocialmediausage/articles/exploringtheuksdigitaldivide/2019-03-04#why-does-digital-exclusion-matter ↑
-
UK Parliament Note no, 621 (not dated) Infrastructure and Climate Change https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/POST-PN-0621/POST-PN-0621.pdf ↑
-
CDRC Residential Mobility Index | CDRC Data https://data.cdrc.ac.uk/dataset/cdrc-residential-mobility-index ↑
-
Preston, I., Banks, N., Hargreaves, K. Kazmierczak, A., Lucas, K., Mayne, R., Downing, C and Street, R (2014) Climate Change and Social Justice: an evidence review Report for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation ↑
-
Poumadère, M., Mays, C., Le Mer, S. and Blong, R. (2005), The 2003 Heat Wave in France: Dangerous Climate Change Here and Now. Risk Analysis, 25: 1483–149 ↑
-
Kazmierczak, A., Cavan, G., Connelly, A and Lindley, S (2015) Mapping Flood Disadvantage in Scotland 2015: Methodology Report. Scottish Government. ↑
-
Rutherford, A., Brook, O. (2018). Civil society organisations in Scotland, 2017. [data collection]. UK Data Service. SN: 852915, DOI: 10.5255/UKDA-SN-852915 ↑
-
Palmer, G (2006) Single Person Households Report for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation https://www.npi.org.uk/files/4213/7544/5585/single_people.pdf ↑
-
Ensor, T. (2004) Overcoming barriers to health service access: influencing the demand side. Health Policy and Planning 19, 69–79. ↑
-
Daras K., Green M. A., Davies A., Barr B., Singleton A. (2019) Open data on health-related neighbourhood features in Great Britain. Scientific data 6 (1), 107. DOI: 10.1038/s41597-019-0114-6 ↑
-
Public Health Scotland (2021). Healthy housing for Scotland: a briefing paper setting out the fundamental link between housing and public health. Edinburgh: Public Health Scotland; Healthy housing for Scotland (publichealthscotland.scot) ↑
-
Taylor, J, Wilkinson, P., Davies, M, Armstrong, B., Chalabi, Z., Mavrogianni, A., Symonds, P., Oikonomou, E., Bohnenstengel,EI (2015) Mapping the effects of urban heat island, housing, and age on excess heat-related mortality in London, Urban Climate, 14:4, Pages 517-528 ↑
-
DCLG (2012) Investigation into overheating in homes. Literature review. ↑
-
Tsagatakis, I., Richardson, J., Evangelides, C., Pizzolato, M., Pearson, B., Passant, N., Pommier, M. & Otto, A. (2021) UK Spatial Emissions Methodology: A report of the National Atmospheric Emission Inventory 2019. Retrieved from: https://naei.beis.gov.uk/reports/reports?report_id=1024 ↑
-
Levermore, G, J Parkinson, K Lee, P Laycock, S Lindley (2018) The increasing trend of the urban heat island intensity Urban Climate, 24: 360-368 ↑
-
Smith, C., Lindley, S. & Levermore, G. Estimating spatial and temporal patterns of urban anthropogenic heat fluxes for UK cities: the case of Manchester. Theor Appl Climatol 98, 19–35 (2009). https://doi.org/10.1007/s00704-008-0086-5 ↑
-
Emmanuel, R and Krüger, E (2012) Urban heat island and its impact on climate change resilience in a shrinking city: The case of Glasgow, UK, Building and Environment, Volume 53, 2012, Pages 137-149 ↑
-
Baker, F, Smith, CL and Cavan, G (2018) A Combined Approach to Classifying Land Surface Cover of Urban Domestic Gardens Using Citizen Science Data and High-Resolution Image Analysis Remote Sensing 10(4):537 DOI:10.3390/rs10040537 ↑
-
Skelhorn, C., Lindley, S., Levermore, G (2014) The impact of vegetation types on air and surface temperatures in a temperate city: A fine scale assessment in Manchester, UK, Landscape and Urban Planning, 121: Pages 129-140, ↑
-
Bowler, D. E. Buyung-Ali, L., Knight, T. M and Pullin, A. S (2010) Urban greening to cool towns and cities: A systemic review of the empirical evidence Landscape and Urban Planning 97 (2010) 147–155 ↑
Appendix H Production history

